Tatar Grammar: a grammar of the contemporary Tatar literary language 9785939432597

Table of contents :
FOREWORD
Acknowledgment
Preface
Abbreviations Used in the Grammar and in the Indexes
Symbols Used in this Book
Rendering of Proper Names in the English Translations of Tatar Texts
Introduction
Literature
PART ONE
PHONOLOGY AND ORTHOGRAPHY
Chapter I - Phonology
Chapter II - The tatar alphabet
and orthography
PART TWO
MORPHOLOGY
Chapter I - Nouns
Chapter II - Adjectives
Chapter III - Numerals
Chapter IV - Pronouns
Chapter V - Postpositions
Chapter VI - Adverbs
Chapter VII - Conjunctions
Chapter VIII - Particles
Chapter IX - Modal words
Chapter X - Parenthetical expressions
Chapter XI - The expletives НИ and КЕМ
Chapter XII - Interjections
Chapter XIII - Onomatopoetic words are words not representing sounds
Chapter XIV - Verbs
Chapter XV - Inflection of verbs
Chapter XVI - Imperative Mood
Chapter XVII - Optative Mood
Chapter XVIII - Indicative Mood
Chapter XIX - Conditional Mood
Chapter XX - Indefinite Use of Personal Veb Forms
Chapter XXI - Participles
Chapter XXII - Infinitive
Chapter XXIII - Verbal Nouns
Chapter XXIV - Verbal Adjectives
Chapter XXV - Reduplications
Chapter XXVI - Verbal Adverbs
Chapter XXVII - Modes of Action of the Tatar Verbs
Chapter XXVIII - Modes of Action Expressed by Repetition or by Means of the Suffixes
Chapter XXIX - Modes of Action Expressed by Verbal Adverbs
Chapter XXX - Modes of Action Expressed by Conjugated Verbs with Auxiliary Verbs
PART III
PART IV
APPENDIX

Citation preview

TATAR GRAMMAR A Grammar of the Contemporary Tatar Literary Language Gustav Burbiel

Institute for Bible Translation Stockholm – Moscow 2018

TATAR GRAMMAR

А Grammar of the Contemporary Tatar Literary Language

by Gustav Burbiel

Editor: James E. Lott Linguistic assistance: Helif R. Kurbatov Proof-reading: Khörshid F. Iskhaqova Publishing directed by: Borislav Аrapović Computer typesetting: Siv Lindström Page-making and lay-out: Kaisa Franzén Computer fonts prepared by: Kjell Johannessen Technical assistance: Brane Kalčevič

ISBN 978-5-93943-259-7 © Institute for Bible Translation, Stockholm, 2001, 2018

ПРЕДИСЛОВИЕ К ИЗДАНИЮ 2018 г. Настоящее издание представляет собой англоязычную грамматику литературного казанскотатарского языка (ISO-3: tat). Ее автор Густав Бурбиел, немецкий тюрколог, сотрудничал с Институтом перевода Библии (ИПБ) в Швеции в 1970-х и 1980-х гг., редактируя новые переводы Библии на тюркские языки. Непосредственное участие в составлении этого труда также принял Х.Р. Курбатов, ведущий научный сотрудник отдела языкознания ИЯЛИ им. Г. Ибрагимова Академии наук Республики Татарстана. Единственная попытка полноценного изложения грамматики татарского языка на английском языке, кроме этого издания, принадлежит лингвисту и востоковеду Николаю Николаевичу Поппе (Nicholas Poppe). Его труд Tatar Manual был опубликован в 1963 г. (Indiana University) и переиздан в 1997 г. (Curzon Press). До сегодняшнего дня другой масштабной грамматики татарского языка, написанной на английском языке, так и не появилось Г. Бурбиел закончил свой капитальный труд над татарской грамматикой в 1994 г. В 2001 г. он скончался, так и не увидев ее широкого распространения – в январе 2001 г. ИПБ в Швеции напечатал лишь несколько экземпляров пробного издания. Несмотря на почти 25 лет, которые прошли между написанием этой грамматики и ее нынешней публикации, сотрудники ИПБ в Швеции и России считают его труд все еще востребованным и актуальным для исследования литературного татарского языка и надеются, что это репринтное издание будет полезно новому поколению татароведов и тюркологов в Российской Федерации.

FOREWORD It is with considerable pleasure that we publish Dr. G. Burbiel’s Tatar Grammar, the crowning achievement of his life’s work for the benefit of the Turkic peoples previously contained within the boundaries of the USSR. Great changes in their status have occurred in the last ten years, changes which have underlined the need for more knowledge about them, including the study of their languages. When the author began work on the Tatar Grammar, the Tatars, like other Turkic peoples of the USSR, were firmly confined within the borders of that state. Today, five of them – Azerbaydzhanis, Kazakhs, Kyrgyz, Turkmens and Uzbeks have their own independent countries, with their mother tongue as the official language. The languages of the other Turkic peoples – Altay, Balkar, Bashkir, Chuvash, Crimean Tatar, Gagauz, Karachay, Karakalpak, Khakas, Kryashen, Kumyk, Nogai, Shor, Siberian Tatar, Tatar, Tuvinian, Uighur, Yakut and others – as well as those of other non-Slavic peoples in Russia and the C.I.S. have also gained substantially higher status in the 1990s, with increased demand and interest in learning them, both at home and abroad. Courses in the Tatar language have been given at various universities around the world. However, apart from Nicholas Poppe’s descriptive grammar, structural in approach, Tatar Мanual, Bloomington 1963, there have been no text books of Tatar grammar which Western students without a command of Tatar or Russian could use. The present work will meet this need. The publication of the Tatar Grammar is in accord with the Institute for Bible Translation’s desire to contribute to the promotion of the culture of the non-Slavic peoples of the former USSR. It is therefore a particular pleasure to include among IBT’s publications works of cultural importance written by its own co-workers – in this case, by IBT’s former chief editor of Bible translations in the Turkic languages. Shortly after the Institute was established (in 1973), with the aim of translating the Bible into non-Slavic languages spoken in Slavic countries, and primarily the then USSR, the need arose to find scholars both for the work of translation and of editing. Each translation had to be checked from the point of view of accuracy, terminology, style, comprehension and so on. There were not many people outside the USSR who had sufficient practical knowledge to do this work. Dr G. Burbiel, with his knowledge of many languages, among them all the major Turkic languages, and Tatar in particular, accepted our invitation to help with this valuable task. For over ten years, from 1975 to the late 1980s he read, corrected and edited translations into Balkar, Karachay, Karakalpak, Kazakh, Kyrgyz, Tatar, Turkmen, Uighur, and Uzbek. Over time, as the work developed, other scholars and knowledgeable people became engaged in these tasks, while Dr Burbiel concentrated his efforts on the Tatar Grammar. Мay we offer our sincere congratulations on this publication both to him and to all those who have kindly helped him in this great task, as well as to the Tatar people itself. In publishing this work we hope that it will contribute to study and research in the Tatar language and benefit Tatar literature and the cultural heritage of the Tatar people, a heritage whose achievements, and not in the written word alone, deserve to be known far more widely beyond the borders of Tatarstan than is the case today. Borislav Arapović, Stockholm, January 2001.

I

Acknowledgment I wish to acknowledge my indebtedness and express my gratitude to Dr. Phil. Helif R. Kurbatov, a leading scholar of the Ghalimjan Ibrahimov Institute for Language, Literature and History of the Academy of Sciences of Tatarstan, and author of several books on Tatar linguistics, for his sustained interest, help and advice throughout the many years it took to prepare this grammar. Specifically, I wish to express my appreciation and thanks to him for discussing and elucidating some hitherto little or totally unexplored problems of the Tatar language, as well as for designing the paradigms of the relational adjectives and the chart showing the possible verbal constructions denoting modes of action of the Tatar verb, both included in the grammar on pages 117 and 813, respectively. Furthermore, I am especially indebted to Dr. Kurbatov for the invaluable help he has afforded me by sending me over the years, what must amount to more than two hundred publications (Tatar grammars, dictionaries, books on specific problems of the Tatar language, literary works, etc.) These books, which otherwise would not have been available to me, served as an important source for linguistic research as well as for the selection of illustrative examples. Last but not least, I deem it appropriate to give credit to Dr. Kurbatov for urging and encouraging me to undertake the project of preparing this grammar. I also wish to acknowledge the invaluable help I received from Мr. James E. Lott throughout the preparation of this grammar, as well as in reading its proofs. Мr. Lott, who has an М.A. in Philosophy from Columbia University, has an excellent background in linguistic theory and a good grammatical knowledge of several languages, including the Tatar language, which he studied for several years in my Tatar classes at Columbia as well as in private lessons. I am especialy indebted to Мr. Lott for his careful and thorough checking of the translations of all Tatar examples in the grammar and for suggesting changes and improvements wherever necessary or desirable. Мr. Lott has also helpfully discussed problems of Tatar grammar with me, and I am particularly thankful to him for his penetrating critical comments, which more often than not resulted in important improvements. Next, I wish to express my gratitude to my Tatar friend Garif Sultan, writer-journalist, radio commentator, and scholar of Tatar-Bashkir affairs, for clarifying a number of particu larly complex Tatar examples and for verifying their English translations. Thanks are also due to Мrs. Halima Shahmay for helpfully discussing some of the Tatar examples and for assistance received from her in the use of the Tatar vernacular and Tatar colloquialisms. Special thanks go also to Мrs. Siv Lindström who, though not knowing the Tatar language, undertook the rather demanding task of preparing the computer copy from the typewritten manuscript. The patience with which she made the not infrequent changes, additions and deletions introduced during proofreading is particularly appreciated. Last but not least, I wish to express my gratitude and appreciation to Мrs. Khörshid F. Iskhaqova of the Institute of Linguistics of the Academy of Sciences in Мoscow for proofreading the entire Tatar contents of the book and for checking and verifying the rendering of Tatar proper names in the English translations. And finally, I would like to convey my special thanks to Мrs. Kaisa Franzén who prepared the final copy for publication. It goes without saying that any errors which might possibly be contained in the book are my sole responsability.

III

Preface The subject of this Grammar is the Tatar literary language of today as used in public offices in Tatarstan, in educational institutions, in belles-lettres, theater, radio, scientific and scholarly works, media publications, etc. However, since the Tatar language – especially the literary language – has since the turn of this century undergone considerable changes both in grammar and vocabulary, it was considered necessary to include also such grammatical forms and constructions as well as certain individual words belonging to various parts of speech (postpositions, participles, conjunctions, pronouns, etc.) which, with rare exceptions, are no longer used in the present literary language but are essential for the understanding of the Tatar classics and any other publications belonging to the second half of the 19th and the beginning of the 20th centuries and representing an important part of Tatar literature. Furthermore, some grammatical forms and expressions which actually belong to the vernacular but have found their way also into the literary language have also been included in the grammar. The grammar consists of four parts: Phonology/Orthography, Morphology, two Indexes and an Appendix. A complete, separate treatment of Tatar syntax was beyond the scope of this work, but notes and explanations of syntax have been included throughout, wherever it appeared necessary or appropriate for the study and better understanding of the use of individual grammatical forms and constructions. All grammatical and syntactical forms discussed in this grammar are illustrated by an ample number of examples. To achieve a linguistic presentation as diverse and as extensive as possible in vocabulary, syntax and style, the examples have been selected from a wide range of literary works – novels, novellas, stage plays, short stories, fairy tales, travelogues, etc. – written by distinguished Tatar authors, as well as from nonfictional publications, articles, etc. Furthermore, examples have been chosen from history books, journals (including a teacher’s journal), periodicals, from Tatar-Russian phrase books and even from cookbooks. Some examples have been taken from poetry, from the daily press, dictionaries, Tatar school books and grammars. Except for some short examples used generally to illustrate lexical and grammatical patterns, such as the formation of words, moods, tenses, etc., each example is followed by an indication of its source. All Tatar examples are accompanied by English translations. Translations follow the Tatar original as closely as possible. Where, for reasons of differences in language structure, a close translation was not possible, a literal translation has often been added in parentheses to better reveal the grammatical structure and the real meaning of the Tatar. Furthermore, where necessary or desirable for the easier understanding of an example taken out of context, some explanatory background information has been furnished after the English translation. Also, throughout this grammar, many notes and observations have been included, often with examples, to give additional information on grammatical forms, language usage, style, etc. To facilitate the systematic study of the Tatar language and to be also useful for reference, two indexes have been included in the book. INDEX I is a subject index in English. Tatar words, grammatical forms, suffixes, etc. occurring in it are written in the phonetic (latinized) alphabet.

XIV

INDEX II is a list of Tatar grammatical forms and constructions, of suffixes, certain parts of speech, etc. arranged in alphabetical order. Parts of speech and suffixes which are subject to vowel or consonant harmony and therefore occur in more than one basic form are listed as follows: The first entry of a given word or suffix shows all basic forms. But if functioning as part of a grammatical construction, or if grammatically expanded (for example, with case endings), it appears only in its back vowel form, which alphabetically comes first (for example, when first listed the suffix -gan, -gän, -kan, -kän /-ôan, -gðn, -qan, -kðn/, which forms a past participle, appears in all its four basic forms. But constructions such as -gan ãhen, -gan täkâdirdä, or expanded forms like -gandaj are given only with the back vowel form -gan / ôan/. The three basic forms -gän, -kan, -kän are listed once in alphabetical order, each with the reference “see -gan”, meaning forms like -gän ãhen, -kändäj can be found under -gan or expanded forms of the possessive suffix +byz, +bez, +ybyz, +ebez /+báz, +bez, +ábáz, +ebez/ are listed under +byz /+báz/.) INDEX II is in the Tatar modified Cyrillic alphabet. However, where deemed necessary or appropriate, some entries appear also in the phonetic (latinized) alphabet to show the correct pronunciation of certain parts of speech, grammatical forms and suffixes. The reference numbers after each entry are the paragraph numbers. Paragraph numbers have also been used for cross-reference throughout this grammar. THE APPENDIX contains a list of authors whose works have been referred to for linguistic illustration and a list of Tatar names with initial, medial or final V, G, Ga, K, Ka, Q, Iq, Yq. Names appear in alphabetical order in the Cyrillic alphabet with each of them repeated in the latinized Tatar alphabet (Jaìalif) to show its pronunciation.

XV

Abbreviations Used in the Grammar and in the Indexes A. abl. acc. adj. adv. aff. alt. apod. arch. art. attr. aux. betw. card. cat. caus. cl. class. coll. comp. compar. con. conc. cond. conf. conj. conjug. contr. cor. cpd. Cyr. dat. dec. def. defec. dem. deriv. desul. dimin. dir. disc. dir. obj. disj. edit. emph.

XVI

Arabic ablative accusative adjective adverb affirmative alternative apodosis archaic article attribute auxiliary between cardinal categorical causative clause classifier colloquial compare, comparison comparative connecting concession, concessive conditional confirmation conjunction conjugated contraction correlative compound Cyrillic dative decimal definite defective demonstrative derivation, derivational desultory diminutive direct discourse direct object disjunctive editorial emphatic

Engl. esp. etc. ex. exclam. exp. expl. fact. fem. fig. foll. form. Fr. frac. freq. ft. func. fut. gen. gener. hab. ibid. i.e. imp. impers. ind. indef. indep. indic. indif. indir. disc. indir. obj. inf. insep. inst. intens. inter. interj. intr. iter. lit. loc. masc. mean.

English especially et cetera, and so on example exclamation expression, expressing expletive, explanatory factitive feminine figurative following, followed forming French fractional, fraction frequentative future tense function future genitive generalizing habitual in the same place id est; that is imperative impersonal indicates, indicating indefinite independent indicative indifference indirect discourse indirect object infinitive inseparable instead intensive, intensifier interrogative interjection intransitive iterative literally locative masculine meaning

mod. w. multipl. n. n. class. neg. n. suf. nom. num. numb. obs. on. poet. w. opt. ord. P. p. paren. part. partic. pass. pat. phon. phr. pl. poss. postp. p. perf. p. pt. prec. pred. pref. prep. pres. pret. prp. pr. perf. priv. prob. pron. prot. prt. pt. quot. R. recip. redupl. ref l. rel. relat. rep.

modal word multiplicative noun noun classifier negative noun suffix nominative numeral number obsolete onomatopoetic word(s) optative ordinal Persian person parenthetical particle participle passive pattern phoneme phraseological plural possessive, possession postposition past perfect past participle preceding, preceded predicate prefix, prefixed preposition present pretense present participle present perfect privative probability pronoun, pronominal protasis present tense past tense quotation Russian reciprocal reduplication reflexive relative relational, relation repetition, repeated

sent. sg. spec. subord. subst. suf. sug. superl. supp. syn. v. v. adj. v. adv. v. noun v. st. var. vern. w.

sentence singular special subordinating substantive, substantivized suffix suggestion superlative supposition synonymous verb verbal adjective verbal adverb verbal noun verb stem various vernacular with

Books and Journals A.T.T.C./A.T.T.S. Tatar teleneì aìlatmalá syzlege. Tatar Grammatikasí, Ø. Ramazanov hðm X. Xismðtullin, Tatar tele grammatikasí, Kazan, 1954. K. U./Q.U. Qazan Utlarí. C.M./S.M. Sovet Mðktðbe C.Ð./S.Ð. Sovet Ðdðbiatí

XVII

Symbols Used in this Book o o

õ Š ´ ’’ ` ~ + +...– ± – –...+ ()

‘....’ /.../ [...]  >  – ... ... ‘ ¶...¶ «...»

XVIII

indicates a vowel, (stem or connecting). over ‘a’ and ‘b’, indicates labialization; over ‘á’ indicates rounding of ‘í’ towards ‘o’. over ‘e’ indicates rounding of ‘e’ towards ‘õ’. indicates contraction of words in speech, or a glide in the pronounciation. indicates main accent. indicates intensified accent. indicates secondary accent. within an entry indicates an unchanged head-word. indicates ‘plus’, a noun suffix, or noun stem. indicates a verb suffix joined to a part of speech other than a verb. indicates that the suffix may be joined to both verbal and non-verbal forms. indicates a verb suffix or verb stem. indicates a noun suffix joined to a verb. besides its use as a regular punctuation mark, the parenthesis is used to enclose: a literal translation; a possible alternative version of a given translation; a part of speech implied but not appearing in the Tatar text; an explanatory remark; the last of two suffixes joined to a word, to avoid repeating the first suffix, for example, -myj(ha), -mi(hä); to indicate that a given grammatical form or construction may be used with or without the word, particle, suffix, etc. enclosed; the source of an example; crossreferences. used to set off translations of single words, phrases and short groups of words. encloses words, grammatical forms, suffixes, etc. rendered in the latinazed alphabet to show pronunciation. encloses words, names, etc. added for clarity or completeness. Also used with the paragraph numbers. changed into; originated from. over a vowel indicates lengthening. set off from the preceding and/or following text, indicates omission of a part of the text. used immediately after the end of a statement, exclamation, or any other text, the dots indicate words left unspoken. apostrophe. Also used to indicate the hamza and hamzat al-qat. indicates a letter of the latinized Tatar plphabet. quotation marks in Tatar texts, used also to indicate a letter of the Cyrillic Tatar alphabet.

Rendering of Proper Names (Names of Persons, Animals and Certain Place Names)

in the English Translations of Tatar Examples and Texts

Proper names occurring in the Tatar examples and texts have been rendered in their English translations with the English alphabet plus Ä ä, Ö ö, and Ü ü, as shown in the table below. Tatar Cyrillic Aa Bb Vv Gg Dd Ee3) Àà Zz Ii Jj Kk Ll Mm Nn Oo Pp Rr Ss Tt Uu Ff Xx Cc Hh Ww Ìì â Yy3)

yj á (soft sign)

English Aa, Ää Bb Ww, Vv2) Gg, Gh, gh Dd Ee, Ye, ye, Yy, yy, yo Zh, zh Zz Ii Yy Kk, Qq Ll Mm Nn Oo, Öö Pp Rr Ss Tt Uu, Ww, Üü Ff Kh, kh Ts, ts 40, 103 Ch, ch Sh, sh Shch, shch ‘ (apostrophe), or not expressed

Yy, i, e i ‘ (apostrophe),

Pronunciation1) 5, 6, 91 94, 1-3 22, 92 25, 26, 93 42, 46, 94 28, 95 12, 96, a-g 35, 97 33, 97 14, 97 37, 98 43, 47, 94 31, 99 24, 99 30, 99 7, 100 23, 101 32, 101 34, 101 29, 101 9, 102 27, 103 45, 103 39, 36, 41. 49,

103 103 103 104

11, 105 13, 98 49, 106

or not expressed

1) 2)

The numbers in this column designate the paragraphs describing the Tatar phonemes. Pronounced ‘f’ in the Russian family endings -ov /-ov/ and -ev /-ev/ and when preceded by a voiceless consonant. 3) For the labialization (rounding of ‘e’ towards ‘õ’ (ö) and ‘y’ (y) towards ‘o’ in syllables succeeding the first syllable of a word containing an ‘õ’ or ‘o’, respectively, see 56.

XIX

Ïï Îî Qq yq, iq Ää Ãã Åå Ææ Èè Çç

Ee, ‘ (apostrophe) Yu, yu, Yü, yü, u, ü Ya, ya, Yä, yä, a, ä ia, iä 109 Ää Öö Üü Jj ng Hh

Imperfect (partial) Diphthongs aj ai, ey äj ey oj oy ãj öy uj uy yj i ej ey au (av) aw äå (äv) äw jo yo jã yö ua (va) wa vä wä vu wu vy wy

107 108 109 6, 110 8, 110 10, 111 38, 112 44, 112 48, 112 See 50-54 and 54, Notes 1 and 2

(for äå see also 53, Note 1)

Note: Both the diphthong ‘aj’ and the phoneme ‘a’ followed immediately by ‘i’ /i/ are rendered in English by ‘ai’. It should be borne in mind that, when rendering, ‘ai’ is pronounced as in ‘fine’, ‘try’, whereas when rendering, ‘a’ and ‘i’ are pronounced separately.

XX

Introduction I. Classification of the Tatar Language within the Turkic Language Family Tatar belongs to the Northwestern, or Qypchaq, group of the Turkic languages1) but contains some Bolghar and Oghuz elements. It has three main dialects each of which has several subdialects.

1. The Dialect of the Kazan Tatars This dialect, which is also called the Central Dialect, forms the basis of the contemporary Tatar literary language. Spread over a rather large area ranging from the Volga to the Ural Mountains, it has a considerable number of subdialects.2) However, the great majority of them differ very little from the literary language. Subdialects of the central dialect are spoken by Tatars living in the Tatar, Mari, Udmurt and Bashkir Republics, in the oblasts of Perm’, Sverdlovsk, Kirov, Kuybyshev, in the Kasimov (Qasim) district of the Ryazan’ oblast, as well as in the oblasts of Chelyabinsk, Orenburg and Kurgan. The dialect of the Kreshen (Christian Tatars) is spoken in the districts of Ðlmðt (Al’metevsk), Alabuga (Yelabuga), Minzðlð (Menzelinsk), Tuqai, Aqtaníø (Aktanysh), and in other districts of Tatarstan. Some Kreshen live in the Bashkir Republic.

2. The Dialect of the Mishars Also called the Western Dialect, the Mishar dialect may be divided into three groups,3) according to the treatment of the voiceless variant of the alveolo-palatal affricate (see Phonology, 39, phoneme ‘c’). 1) The ‘ts’ dialect, in which it is pronounced as in English cats and, in some words, as ‘s’ in English sing. 2) The ‘ch’ dialect, in which it is pronounced as English ‘ch’ as in church in the standard pronunciation. 3) The mixt dialect, in which it is pronounced as ‘ts’ or ‘ch’. The great majority of the Mishars live outside of Tatarstan, in the Mordvinian, Chuvash, and Bashkir Republics, in the oblasts of Penza, Saratov, Volgograd, Ul’yanovsk, Nizhny Novgorod, Sterlitamak, and Orenburg. A comparatively small number of Mishars can be found in Tatarstan, in and around Chistai (Chistopol’) and in its southwestern part.

1)

Other languages belonging to this group are: Bashkir, Kazak, Kyrghyz, Karakalpak, Noghai, Karachai, Balkar. 2) G.X. Ðxðtov divides the central dialect into twelve subdialects. See: G.X. Ðxðtov, Tatar dialektologiðse, Kazan, 1985, p.35. 3) ibid. pp. 98-99.

XXI

3. The Dialect of the Western Siberian Tatars Except for a few local phonetic and lexical characteristics, this dialect, which is also called the Eastern Dialect, has no subdialects.1) It is spoken by Tatars living in Tõmän (Tyumen), Tobol (Tobolsk), Iøem (Ishim), Tomsk, Baraba, Tara, Tevriz, Omsk and others.2) Note: According to the census of 1989, Tatars in the USSR numbered more than 6.645.000: 83 % lived in the RSFSR, 7 % in Uzbekistan, 5 % in Kazakstan (see Tatarskaya Grammatika, Vol. I. Kazan, 1993, p. 11).

II. A Short Outline of the Development of the Tatar Language Like other Turkic languages, Tatar too has its roots in the ancient Turkish language whose written linguistic monuments date back to the 5th century. While its basic phonetic, lexical, and grammatical characteristics can be discerned in ancient Turkish, the contemporary Tatar literary language developed into its present modern form as the result of interaction between Bolghar and Qypchaq tribal languages and through a long and complex linguistic process which may be divided into the following periods:

1. 13th and 14th Centuries Written material produced in the Volga-Kama region (the State of Bolghar) before the 13th century was lost through various historical upheavals; Tatars trace their literary language back to the epic poem ‘Qissa-i Josíf’ created by the poet Qol Ghäli3) sometime between 1212 and 1233. Its language is essentially Bolghar-Qypchaq, with a considerable amount of Oghuz elements. It is sometimes also called the language of the Western region of the Golden Horde, or Volga Turkic.4)

2. 15th to 17th Centuries5) In the 15th century, and especially during the period of the Khanate of Kazan (1436-1552), a common popular language (vernacular) formed, together with a uniform literary language. Besides being used in the Khanate of Kazan, the latter was also used in the Khanate 1) 2)

ibid. p. 120 Siberian Tatars are using the contemporary Tatar literary language. There is a movement among Siberian Tatars advocating the creation of a Siberian Tatar nationality with the Siberian Tatar dialect as its literary language. However, the great majority of them are not in favor of parting with the Volga Tatar literary norms. (See Tatarskaya Grammatika, Vol. 1, Kazan, 1993, p. 11.) 3) Qol Ghäli was born in the 4th quarter of the 12th century, probably in 1183. Tatars regard him as having laid the foundation of Bolghar-Tatar poetry. Although written more than 750 years ago, his ‘Qissa-i Josíf’ (in more recent times also known as ‘Josíf wð Zõlðjxa’) has not lost its popularity among Tatars, who commonly call it ‘Josíf Kitabí’ (The Book of Joseph). The 800th anniversary of the poet’s birth was, among others, commemorated in an article in the UNESCO News Bulletin # 5, 1983. ‘Qissa-i Josíf’ is known also among other Turkic peoples. 4) Further literary examples for this period are: Xarðzmi’s ‘Mðxðbbðtnamð’, the epic poem by Xõsam Kjatib ‘Çõmçõmð soltan’, Mðxmyd bine Ôðli’s ‘Nðhçel-fðradis’ and others. See: Tatar ðdðbiatí tarixí, I, Kazan 1984, pp. 196-246; Tatarskaq Grammatika, I. Kazaè, 1993, p. 33. 5) Literary works pertaining to this period are e.g.: The Tatar national epos ‘Idegðj’ (the epos depicts the events and heroic deads of Idegðj which took place in the time from about 1380 to Idegõj’s death in 1419), see: Flora Ðxmðtova and Ilbaris Nadirov, Kazan utlarí # 1, 1989, pp. 3-66; Nðqi Isðnbðt, Tatar xalíq dastaní ‘Idegðj’, Sovet Ðdðbiatí, 1940, # 11, pp. 39-76 and # 12, pp. 34-82; Mõxðmmðdjar’s ‘Tõxfði mðrdan’ (1539) and ‘Nurí sodur’ (1542); Çðmiô-et tðwarix (17th c.); Mðyla Qolíj’s poems (17th c.). See: Borínôí tatar ðdðbiatí, Kazan 1963; Tatar ðdðbiatí tarixí, I, Kazan, 1984, pp. 295-312, 333-343, and 366-385.

XXII

of Astrakhan, by the Mishars, Bashkirs, and by parts of the Kazaks and Kyrghyz. Furthermore, this language (Old Tatar language) served as a means of communication in Russia’s relations with countries to the East as well as in administrative affairs with the Turkic peoples in Russia. With the Beginning of the 17th century the Old Tatar Language was also taught in Russian educational institutes to prepare Russian officials for positions requiring the knowledge of this language. (See Tatarskaya Grammatika, Vol. I, Kazan, 1993, p. 35).

3. 18th Century and First Half of the 19th Century The old literary language, which originally had formed on the basis of the spoken language, continued in its old traditions. It remained saturated with Arabic and Persian elements, and by the beginning of the 19th century, its difference from the vernacular had become considerable. Because of this high percentage of Arabic and Persian grammatical constructions and vocabulary, many of which were only understood by the better educated segment of the population, its effectiveness as a means of general communication was limited. Therefore, progress-minded educators and men of letters like Ôðbderðxim Utíz Imðni (1754-1834), Ðbelmðnix Ôðbdessðlðm-Qarôali (1782-1826), Hibðtulla Salix (1794-1867), Ô. Qursawi (1783-1814), Ôðbdelçabar Qandali (1797-1860), Qajum Nasiri (1825-1902), Jakow Jemeljan (1848-1893), Fatix Xalidi (1850-1925), began making efforts to bring it closer to the spoken language.

4. Second Half of the 19th Century and First Quarter of the 20th Century At the beginning of this period, the Tatar national literary language started to form on the basis of the vernacular. Samples were included in chrestomathies, and dictionaries and grammars were compiled. The Tatar vernacular began to be taught at Kazan University in 1862.1) This process continued throughout the above period when, as far as grammar is concerned, the Tatar literary language established itself essentially in its present form. During the same period, but especialy after the revolution of 1905, Tatar writers lifted Tatar literature to new heights. The contemporary Tatar press too developed on a large scale. Tatar newspapers and periodicals were not only published in Kazan and Ufa, but appeared also in many other cities with a sizeable Tatar population.2)

5. The Soviet Period until the End of the 1980’s During the first two decades or so of Soviet rule, the Tatar language continued to f lourish. However, towards the end of the 1930’s the Soviet government embarked on a new language

1) 2)

See: Voprosy tatarskogo yazykoznaniya, Kazan, 1965, p. 11. Tatar newspapers and periodicals appeared in Petersburg, Moscow, Samara, Orenburg, Astrakhan, Uralsk, Simbirsk, Yekaterinburg, Troitsk, Tomsk, Semipalatinsk, and in Tashkent. Right after the revolution of 1917 Tatar newspapers appeared also in Omsk, Novosibirsk, Sterlitamak, Zlatoust, Alma-Ata (Kazakstan), Bukhara (Uzbekistan), Orsk, Perm’, Berezniki, Kharkov, Penza, Donetsk, Petropavlovsk, and Nizhniy Novgorod. (See Tatarskaya Grammatika, Vol. I, Qazan, 1993, p. 36.)

XXIII

policy, which made Russian obligatory for everybody in the USSR.1) The Tatar latinized alphabet, which had replaced the Arabic alphabet in the above period,2) was abolished and replaced by the Russian alphabet plus several additional symbols. 3) Simultaneously with this, numerous changes in the vowel harmony were introduced into the written Tatar language. Furthermore, if Tatars themselves had already purged their language of unincorporated and unneeded Arabic and Persian elements, Soviet language policy carried this a step further to extend also to such Arabic and Persian words which for centuries had formed an integral part of the Tatar language and were not felt as foreign. These ‘old words’ were forced out of the language on a rather large scale and were replaced by Russian words or by so-called ‘international’ words in Russian form.4) This aspect of the language policy had a profound inf luence on the Tatar language, for it affected not only its lexical heritage but also its phonetic structure, its orthography (comp. 84,2.) and, through the introduction of many loan-translations (calques) from Russian, even syntax and style. In addition, various official measures were taken to advance the use of Russian among Tatars. For example, all Tatar newspapers and periodicals published outside Tatarstan and Bashkirstan were closed down.5)

6. The Tatar Language after the 1980’s With the political changes in the Soviet Union and, particularly after its dissolution, Tatars set about reforming and reviving their language. Since the beginning of this process, which still continues at the time of this writing, a considerable number of ‘old and forgotten’ words6) have been brought back into use, replacing, or limiting the use of, the corresponding ‘modern loanwords’. Tatar writers have practically ceased having their literary characters intersperse their language with Russian words and expressions. In other words, an ‘awareness’ trend has begun which has already resulted in a markedly purer language in Tatar literature and non-fictional publications. The Tatar language has been declared the official language of the Tatar Republic, on an equal footing with Russian. In Kazan and in many other cities where Tatars live, scores of facultative courses and circles have been opened at which Tatar is taught for a certain fee or free of charge. The study of Tatar is receiving great attention also in schools, in institutes of higher learning and in technical secondary schools.7) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

6) 7)

Resolution of 1938; see: Mirôazijan Junís, Telsezlðny: tamírí hðm çimeølðre, Qazan utlarí, # 3, 1990, p. 139. Resolution of July 3, 1927; see: X. Qurbatov, Tatar teleneì alfavit hðm orfografið tarixí, Kazan 1960, p. 77. Decree of May 5, 1939; ibid., p. 105. See, for example, Rafael’ Mostafin, Telebez jarlí tygel, Qazan utlarí, # 11, 1990, p. 179. Other measures were, for example: the requirement of a good knowledge of Russian for the admission to institutes of higher learning; (see, for example, Ðmirxan Jeniki, Cínbarlíq hðm tel, Qazan utlarí, # 9, 1988, p. 171); the gradual closing of Tatar schools or their conversion into Russian schools, both inside and outside Tatarstan; (see: ibid., p. 174; Mirôazijan Junís, Telsezlðny: tamárá hðm çimeølðre, Qazan utlará, # 3, 1990, p. 139; Ajdar Xðlim, Ile barníì tele bar, Qazan utlará # 11, 1990, pp. 145, 150); the use of Russian only in kindergarten; (ibid., p. 158). Towards the end of the 1980’s only 7 % of Tatar children attended a Tatar school. Publication of Tatar books was increasingly restricted, and in 1989 only 0.7 copies were published per capita (the national average was 9 per person and in Russian still more). See Tatarskaya Grammatika, Vol. I, Kazan, 1993, p. 37. ‘Old and forgotten’ words refers to words of Arabic, Persian or Tatar (Turkic) origin which had been forced out of the Tatar language or whose use had been discouraged. Rafael’ Mostafin, Telebez jarlá tygel, Q.U. # 11, 1990, p. 183.

XXIV

Literature Books Boryngy Tatar ädäbiqty, Kazan, 1963. Zäkiev, M.Z., Tatar xalky teleneè barlykka kilue, Kazan, 1977. Kurbatov, X., Tatar teleneè alfavit çäm orfografiq tarixy, Kazan, 1960. Tatarstan ASSR tarixy, I, Kazan, 1959. Tatar ädäbiqty, I, Kazan, 1984, II, Kazan, 1985. Xakov, V.X., Tatar milli ädäbi teleneè barlykka kilue çäm usewe, Kazan, 1972. Xäzerge tatar ädäbi tele, Kazan, 1965. Äxätov, G.X., Tatar dialektologiqse, Kazan, 1984. Sovremennyj tatarskij literaturnyj qzyk, I, Moscow, 1969. Burbiel, Gustav, Discordant Voices – The non-Russian Soviet Literatures, Mosaic Press, Oakville, Ontario, Tatar Literature, pp. 89-125. Tatarskaq Grammatika, tom I, Tatarskoe kniànoe izdatelástvo, Kazaná, 1993.

Others

Gosmanov, Mirkasyjm, Kol Gali - Xalyk xäterendä sigez gasyr, K.U. 9, 1983, rr. 13-15. Isänbät, Näkyj, «Synatmaska kiräk, æegetlär!», K.U. 12, 1989, rr. 178-181. Lomidze, Georgij, Sånmäs nur, K.U. 2, 1985, 139-141. Mostafin, Rafaïlá, Telebez qrly tugel, K.U. 11, 1990, rr. 179-184. Safarov Räis, Nätiæä bulyrmy?, K.U. 12, 1988, rr. 170-173. Xisamov, Nurmãxämmät, «Kyjssai Josyf» poïmasynyè xalykta qwäewe, K.U. 9, 1974, rr. 175-182. Xisamov, Nurmãxämmät, XIII–XIV, gasyrlarda Idel bue tãrki poïziqse, K.U. 4, 1987, rr. 174-178. Xisamova, Fäçimä, Xäzinädä nilär bar?, K.U. 6, 1987, rr. 145-150. Xälim, Ajdar, Ile barnyè tele bar, K.U. 11, 1990, rr. 144-159. Xäsänov, Mansur, Wigâriqtneè saf, rauwan kãzgese, K.U. 2, 1985, rr. 132-139. Înys, Mirgaziqn, Telsezlänå: tamyry çäm æimewläre, K.U. 3, 1990, rr. 133-141. Äxmätova, Flora, Idegäj - Tatar xalyk dastany, (Introduction); Prepared for Qazan utlarí by: Ilbaris Nadirov and Flora Äxmätova, K.U. 1, 1989, rr. 3-66. Æävad, Almaz, Kol Galineè «Kyjssai Josyf» dastany, S.Ä. 2, 1960, rr. 92-114.

XXV

TATAR GRAMMAR PART ONE PHONOLOGY AND ORTHOGRAPHY CHAPTER I ¡ PHONOLOGY Phonetic Alphabet [1] The phonetic alphabet employed in this grammar is based on the latinized Tatar alphabet (called 'Jaìalif', see 89). This alphabet, which was the official Tatar alphabet from 1927 to 1939/40, is nearly phonetic in its original form. However, to render certain phonemes still more precisely, the following changes and additions have been introduced into it. 1. Changes: The symbol 'v' represents only the voiced labiodental fricative which occurs in words adopted from or through Russian (identical with English 'v' in 'vocal', 'very'). Lower case 'v' has been changed to 'b'. 2. Additional symbol: w. 3. Diacritical marks and signs: a) ° over 'a' and 'í' ( å, á) indicates labialization; b) ° over 'í' (á) indicates rounding of 'í' towards 'o'; c) ° over 'e' (ê) indicates rounding of 'e' towards 'õ'; d) Š indicates contraction of words in speech. This expanded form of the Tatar latinized alphabet has been used as the phonetic alphabet for the entire chapter on phonology and, wherever necessary in the grammar, for transcription, to indicate correct pronunciation.1)

Tatar Vowel Phonemes and their Classification [2] The contemporary Tatar literary language has the following ten original Tatar vowel phonemes: a, ð, o, õ, u, y, í, e, ù, i plus the three non-native (Russian) vowel phonemes o, í (Cyr. 'y'), e (Cyr. 'ï/e'), which are of more recent origin. Note: The phoneme 'ù' has the characteristics of a diphthong, but because of its function as the back vowel correlative of the front vowel 'i' (for example: ul eøli 'he works', ul qarù 'he looks'), it is classified here with the vowel phonemes. 1)

Exceptions are proper names in the English translations of Tatar examples and texts, see pages XVII and XVIII.

1

Seven of the original phonemes – ð, o, õ, í, e, y, ù – occur only in native Tatar words and completely naturalized loanwords. The three original vowel phonemes a, u, i may occur in native Tatar words, as well as in loanwords of any origin, whether naturalized or not. The non-native phonemes o, í, e occur only in words adopted more recently from Russian or, through Russian, from other European languages. In the Tatar alphabet (see 89, 90) these phonemes are not represented by separate symbols (letters), i.e. both variants, the original (Tatar) variant (7, 11, 12) and the non-native (Russian) variant (15, 16, 17) of o, í, e, do not distinguish themselves when written. However, in formal Tatar speech (for example on radio, television, etc.) o, í, e of the latter variant are pronounced as in Russian (see 15, 16, 17). [3] Vowel phonemes are divided into front vowel phonemes and back vowel phonemes. Furthermore they are classified into rounded and unrounded, narrow, semi-narrow, and broad. 1. Original Tatar vowel phonemes: Front vowel phonemes are: ð, õ, y, e, i. Back vowel phonemes are: a, o, u, í, ù. Rounded are: o, õ, u, y. Unrounded are: a, ð, e, í, ù, i. Narrow are: u, y, i, ù. Semi-narrow are: o, õ, e, í. Broad are: a, ð. 2. The non-native variant of the phonemes o, e, í: a) The phoneme o is a rounded, semi-narrow back vowel phoneme. b) The phoneme e is a front vowel, unrounded, semi-narrow. c) í is an unrounded, narrow back vowel phoneme. When articulating the narrow, semi-narrow and broad vowel phonemes, the position of the tongue is high, mid-high and low, respectively.

Length of the Vowel Phonemes [4] The original Tatar vowel phonemes are either long or short. Long are: a, ð, u, y, i, ù; short are: o, õ, e, í. The non-native vowel phonemes o, e, í are long.

Description of the Vowel Phonemes [5] a – In the first syllable of a word the phoneme a is slightly labialized and sounds similar to English 'a' in 'always'. In syllables following the first its labialization becomes gradually weaker the farther its position is from the beginning of the word, until it entirely ceases. In an open syllable at the end of a word the Tatar a sounds like English 'a' in 'arm', 'far': åt 'horse', bål 'honey', qål 'remain!', 'stay!', qåz 'goose', båla 'child', åta 'father', åtålårôa 'to the fathers', bålålårôa 'to the children'. 2

[6] ð – sounds approximately like the English 'a' in 'gag', 'bag'; or 'ai' in 'air', but more open: tðrðzð 'window', nðrsðlðr 'things', ðgðr 'if'. [7] o – sounds approximately like English 'oo' in 'look': on 'flour', tor! 'live!', 'stand up!', qom 'sand'. [8] õ – The phoneme õ is formed well forward in the mouth. It is a sound between German 'ö' and 'ü': jõrðk 'heart', õc 'three', õlkð 'province', 'district', kõz 'autumn', tõn 'night'. [9] u – sounds approximately like English 'u' in 'rumor': ut 'fire', 'light'; urín 'place', qul 'hand', bul 'be', juq 'no'. When stressed it is somewhat lengthened: quju (first 'u' shorter, second 'u' longer) 'to put down'. [10] y – The phoneme y is somewhat less rounded than u. When articulating it the middle part of the tongue is brought as near as possible to the hard palate, while the tongue is moved forward until its tip is near the lower teeth. The phoneme y sounds somewhat like 'u' in 'juice' followed immediately by a very short i: yzðk 'center', kyz 'eye', kyp 'much', kyl 'lake'. [11] á – the phoneme í is formed in the oral cavity between the back part of the tongue and the uvula. It resembles the second vowel sound in English 'Cyril': írôítu 'to throw; 'fling', íøaníclí 'trustworthy', jíl 'year', qír 'field', altí 'six', jazdí 'he wrote'. [12] e – sounds approximately like English 'i' in 'mill', 'it': elek 'before', 'ago', tel 'tongue', 'language', ike 'two', jegetlek 'courage', 'fortitude'. [13] ù – is actually a partial, falling diphthong consisting of the phonemes í – and j, the latter functioning here as a semivowel. Like the phoneme í it is formed first between the back part of the tongue and the uvula, then between the middle part of the tongue and the hard palate, as the tip of the tongue moves forward and both its sides touch the molar teeth. 'ù' does not occur at the beginning of a word or syllable: tùnaq 'modest', sùfat 'quality', qarù 'he looks', andù 'such'. Note: With the latinized Tatar alphabet ù changes into i when preceded by c, ç, ø, ô, q, x, z. For example: çiu 'to gather', aøi 'he (she, it) eats', uqi 'he (she, it) reads', xial 'dream' (noun), Zia (masc. name).

[14] i – has two variants. The first occurs in native Tatar words and in some loanwords. It sounds approximately like English 'i' in 'police', 'machine': il 'country', min 'I', tik 'only', bir! 'give!' øimbð 'Saturday'. The second variant is less narrow; it is formed further back in the mouth and occurs in Arabic and other loanwords: iôlan 'announcement', iôtibar 'attention', ixtiram 'esteem', kooperatif 'cooperative'. Furthermore, i is somewhat longer when accented and somewhat reduced when unaccented: ðtŽi 'father', ðbŽi 'grandmother', ipŽi 'bread', sõjläømi ' he does not speak', kitmi 'he does not leave', kilmi 'he does not come', birmi 'he does not give'. It is further reduced in a closed, unaccented syllable: kitték 'let's go', kilép çitté 'he has arrived'. [15] o – Used only in loanwords adopted from or through Russian, this non-native (Russian) vowel phoneme has three variants. When in stressed position, it sounds approximately like 'o' in English 'fork' but pronounced very open. It is open to such an extent that it sounds like starting off with a very short 'u' – uo. For example: o Ž braz 'character' (in 3

literature, stage play, etc.), xudŽoûnik1) 'artist', 'painter', kinŽo 'cinema'. When preceding a stressed syllable, o is pronounced 'a' as in 'far': kooperatŽiv 'cooperative', RossŽið 'Russia', Odessa 'OdŽessa'. When following a stressed syllable, the phoneme 'o' is a sound between open 'o' and 'a', or it is colored towards 'í': vŽeto 'veto', televŽi zor 'television set', dŽoktor /dŽoktír/ 'doctor'. [16] í (Cyr. y) 2) – In loanwords from or through Russian. This non-native (R.) phoneme sounds approximately like English 'y' in 'synonym'. The middle of the tongue is raised to articulate a sound between English short 'i' and 'u' (without labialization, however). It can also be approximated by articulating German 'ü' in 'Dürre' with unrounded instead of rounded lips. The sound quality of í is not affected when it is in unstressed position. It does not occur in word-initial position. Examples: múzíka /muzíjka/ 'music', sír3) /síjr/ 'cheese'. [17] e (Cyr. ï/e) – In loanwords from or through Russian. When stressed, the non-native (R.) phoneme e (ï/e) sounds approximately like English 'e' in 'error'. In unstressed position it is shortened, and its sound quality is changed, making it sound like the short 'i' in English 'it', 'sit' but colored towards e (ï/e). Examples: eŽ pos 'epos', eŽ ra 'era', poŽema 'poem', aeropŽort 'airport', ekvŽator 'equator', ekrŽan 'screen', EstŽonið 'Estonia', etaûérka 'etagere', elevŽator 'elevator', enŽergið 'energy'. Note 1: All Russian vowel phonemes in unstressed position are reduced in length. As we have seen above, this affects also the sound quality of unstressed o and e (ï/e). Other vowel phonemes undergoing changes in their sound quality when unstressed are a, ye (e), and ya (q). The sound quality of the remaining phonemes – i (i), u (y), and yu (î) – does not change when they are in unstressed position. Note 2: As a rule, the non-native vowels o, í, e are to be pronounced in Tatar the same way as in Russian. However, in practice this rule cannot be considered as absolute, the pronunciation of these vowels depending on such factors as the speaker's age, his (her) regional and social background, the degree of command he (she) has of the Russian language, etc. That means, their pronunciation may range from being more or less colored by the speaker's native, i.e., Tatar, language to a pronunciation as in Russian, with the latter occurring especially in formal speech as, for example, in lectures, public speeches, on radio and television, with Russian proper names, with geographical names used in Tatar in their Russian form, etc. (See also 64 and Footnote.) In the present official Tatar alphabet non-native o, í, e are not expressed by separate letters.

[18] In the Tatar literary language all vowels in absolute word-initial position are pronounced with a hamza, i.e. with a glottal stop: 'altá 'six', 'et 'dog', 'ðjje 'yes', 'irek 'freedom', 'oca 'he flies', 'urman 'forest', 'õc 'three', yteny 'to beg', 'to ask for'. The hamza (glottal stop) is absent when the flow of normal speech is not interrupted by natural pauses. The initial vowel of the first syllable of a word then: a) Attracts the final consonant of the preceding word: qul eøe -- qu-leøe 'handwork', satíp alu – satí-balu 'to buy'. b) Is attracted by the final vowel of the preceding word, resulting in the formation of a diphthong-like combination: bara ide – baraj-de 'he was going', belð ide – belðj-de 'he knew', Batu ðjtð – Batu-wðjtð 'Batu says', øunda utíra -- øundaw-tíra 'he sits there'. c) Contracts with the final vowel of the preceding word: bara almù – ba-ralmù 'he cannot go', kyrð almù ''ky-ralmù (or: ky-rðlmù, or: ky-rðlmi) 'he cannot see', alma ala – alma-la 'he takes an apple'. Hence: 'alma 'apple', but: 'ðnisŠ almasí 'anisette', 'urman 'forest', but: BezŠ urmanôa bardíq, 'We went into the forest'. 'Ðlfið sðôðt sigezdðŠ yk kilde, 'ð ul - 'ðle genð. 'Älfiä came (as early as) eight o'clock, but he's (only come) just now.' (See: Xðzerge tatar ðdðbi tele, Kazan 1965, pp. 140-141). 1)

sðnôðtce, rðssam In the latinized Tatar alphabet expressed by 'íj'. 3) But sír (tatar 'í') 'carving', 'fretwork'. 2)

4

[19] Being non-phonemic, the glottal stop at the beginning of a word is not ref lected in the official orthography. However, in the reformed Arabic alphabet1) it was rendered by a hamza.

Tatar Consonant Phonemes and their Classification [20] Today's Tatar literary language has the following consonant phonemes: b, p, d, t, g, k, ô, q, z, s, j, l, m, n, r, w, f, v, ç, c, û, ø, ì, x, h, ts, øc. The phonemes v, ts, øc occur only in words adopted from Russian or, via Russian, from other European languages. [21] Tatar consonant phonemes are divided into voiced and voiceless phonemes. Voiced are: b, ç, d, g, ô, j, l, m, n, ì, r, w, z, û, -, -, v. Voiceless:

p, c, t, k, q, -, -,

-,

-, -, -, -, s, ø, h, x, f, ts, øc.

They are further classified into: The sonants: j, l, m, n, ì, r, w, v; the bilabial plosives: b, p; the bilabial nasal: m; the bilabial fricative: w; the labiodental fricatives: v, f; the tongue-point alveolar oral stops: d, t; the tongue-point alveolar nasal: n; the dental lateral (tongue-point alveolar): l; the dental (tongue-point) trill: r; the alveolar fricatives: z, s; the alveolo-palatal fricatives: û, ø, j; the alveolo-palatal affricates: ç, c, ts, øc; the velar plosives: g, k; the velar nasal: ì; the velar fricative: x; the uvular fricative: ô; the uvular plosive: q; the laryngeal fricative: h; the laryngeal stop (hamzat al-qat): '.

Description of the Consonant Phonemes [22] b – (lenis, unaspirated) is a voiced bilabial oral stop. It sounds approximately like English 'b' in 'boy': balíq 'fish', bulu 'to be', 'to become', bylmð 'room', ber 'one', biø 'five', boz 'ice', bõti 'amulet', 'talisman', Ibrahim 'Abraham'. In intervocalic position the articula-

1)

Officially adopted December 19, 1920.

5

tion of the oral stop is considerably weaker and 'b' sounds almost like a bilabial fricative: keàek 'as', 'like', tðàðnðk 'low', qaàat 'again'. The phoneme 'b' does not occur in word-final position. However, in loanwords adopted from Russian 'b' is written, but it is pronounced 'p'. For example: klub 'club' is pronounced 'klup'. [23] p – (fortis, aspirated) is the voiceless oral stop (pressure stop) corresponding to 'b', its voiced correlative. It is identical with English 'p' in 'top': pecðn 'hay', patøalíq 'kingdom', ipi 'bread', qapíl 'suddenly', tõp 'bottom', kyp 'much', 'many'. [24] m – is identical with English 'm' in 'me'. In forming it the lips are brought together and the soft palate lowered at the same time, allowing the voice to pass through the nasal passage: min 'I', matur 'beautiful', tamár 'root', 'vein', kimendð 'at least', qom 'sand', kem 'who'. [25] w – has two variants, one occurring only in the vicinity of back vowels, the other only in the vicinity of front vowels. In forming the back variant the lips are rounded and the tongue back raised. In forming the front variant the lips are more rounded and the tongue center is raised. It is also classified as a semivowel. Tatar 'w' is more or less identical with English 'w' in 'want', 'win': watan 'homeland', awíl 'village', wõçdan 'conscience', wðôdð 'promise', dðwlðt 'state', dðwer 'epoch', 'period'. Note: The labial fricative 'w' does not occur in the Mishar dialect of the Tatar language.

[26] v – is a voiced labiodental fricative identical with English in 'vocal', 'very'. It occurs only in loanwords adopted from or via Russian. Vladivóstok 'Vladivostok', vitamin 'vitamin', veto 'veto', viza 'visa'. [27] f – is the voiceless labiodental fricative corresponding to 'v', its voiced correlative. It is formed by forcing the breath out between the lower lip and the upper teeth. It is identical with English 'f' in 'fame': fiker 'thought', 'idea', fðn 'science', ifrat 'very', jefðk 'silk'. [28] d – (lenis, unaspirated) is a voiced tongue-point alveolar oral stop. It is identical with English 'd' in 'day': dan 'glory', 'fame', dõres 'correct', din 'religion', dyrt 'four', anda 'there', nindi 'what kind of', qðdðr 'till', 'until'. [29] t – (fortis, slightly aspirated) is the voiceless tongue-point alveolar stop corresponding to 'd', its voiced correlative: tuôíz 'nine', tiz 'fast', kitap 'book', sõt 'milk', xat 'letter', kit! 'leave!', 'go away!'. [30] n – is identical with English 'n': nadan 'ignorant', 'uneducated', níq 'strong', nigð 'why', monda 'here', urman 'forest', minem 'my', min 'I'. [31] l – has two variants. The first (velarized) variant is formed with the tongue point on the upper teethridge, the back of the tongue retracted toward the soft palate, and voiced breath passing out at both sides of the tongue. It is identical with English 'l' in 'lot', 'salt': líôírdaw 'to chatter', 'to jabber', lajíq 'deserving', 'worthy', alma 'apple', tulí 'full', qul 'hand', sal! 'put!', 'build!', bal 'honey', altí 'six'. The second variant is formed farther forward in the mouth, much like English 'l' in 'least'. In forming it the tongue center is raised toward the hard palate and its back lowered. The area on the upper teethridge touched by the tongue point is narrower than in the first variant: lðkin 'but', elek 'before', õleø 'part', bel! 'know!'.

6

[32] r – is identical with the Spanish and Italian 'r': rux 'spirit', 'soul', rðxmðt 'thanks', qara 'black', nðrsð 'what', tar 'narrow', ber 'one', byre 'wolf', irtð 'morning'. [33] z – is a voiced tongue-point alveolar fricative. It is identical with English 'z' in 'zeal' or 's' in 'busy'. It remains voiced in final position: zur 'big', zðìgðr 'blue', sízíq 'line', bizðk 'decoration', 'ornament', qíz 'girl', sigez 'eight'. [34] s – is the voiceless correlative of 'z'. It is identical with English 's' in 'see': saz 'swamp', syz 'word', basu 'field', 'cornfield', kðsep 'business', tõs 'colour'. [35] û – is identical with English 's' in 'usual': ûurnal 'journal', ûirðbð salu 'to cast lots', íûôíru 'to wail', 'to howl' (about wind), inûener 'engineer'. [36] ø – is the voiceless correlative of 'û'. It is identical with English 'sh' in 'sharp', 'ship', 'fish': øart 'condition', øðp 'quick', 'good', 'nice', aøa 'through', eøce 'worker', baø 'head', biø 'five'. [37] j – is formed with the tip of the tongue lowered and its center near the hard palate. It is identical with English 'y' in 'year', 'yes'. It is also classified as a semivowel: jíl 'year', juq 'no', 'not', jõz 'hundred', qujan 'hare', sðjaxðt (sðjðxðt) 'journey'. [38] ç – is a voiced alveolo-palatal affricate. It is greatly palatalized and its stop element is very weak so that it sounds almost like 'û', particularly in the vicinity of back vowels: çawap 'answer', xuça 'master', 'proprietor', çír 'song', çide 'seven', oçmax 'paradise', hõçym 'attack', jð'çyç-mð'çyç 'Gog and Magog'. [39] c – has two variants. The first one is the voiceless correlative of voiced 'ç'. It occurs only in native Tatar words. Having the same characteristics (greatly palatalized, stop element very weak) as 'ç', it sounds almost like 'ø': cabu 'to run', cíôíø 'speech', cðcðk 'flower', cik 'border', acíq 'open', pecðn 'hay', qac! 'escape!', 'flee!', iskitkec 'amazing'. The second variant occurs in loanwords adopted from or via Russian. It is identical with English 'ch' in 'chair'. However, the stop element is often not observed: pocta 'post', 'mail', macta 'mast', kartocka 'card'. [40] ts – is a voiceless alveolo-palatal affricate. However, since its stop element is rather weak, it often appears as a palatalized alveolar fricative which sounds almost like 's', the 't'-element being barely audible. (During the period of the latinized Tatar alphabet it was therefore often rendered by 's'.) It occurs only in loanwords from or via Russian: tsentnér 'centner', tsirk 'circus', ofitser 'officer', kontsért 'concert'. [41] øc – is a voiceless semi-plosive. It sounds approximately, like English 'sh' – 'ch' in 'girlish charm', 'fresh cherries'. It occurs only in a very few loanwords from Russian: øcotka 'brush', øci 'cabbage soup'. [42] g – is a voiced tongue-back velar pressure stop. It is identical with English 'g' in 'give', 'go'. In native Tatar words and in Tatar suffixes, it occurs only in the vicinity of front vowels. In loanwords, it occurs with both front and back vowels: gel 'constantly', 'always', gõmbð 'mushroom' (noun), gyzðl 'beautiful', sigez 'eight', jegerme 'twenty', gaz 'gas', geografið 'geography', gitara 'guitar'.

7

[43] k – is the voiceless tongue-back velar stop corresponding to its voiced correlative 'g'. It is identical with English 'k' in 'key', 'pink'. Like 'g' it occurs in native Tatar words and in Tatar suffixes only in the vicinity of front vowels, in loanwords with any vowel: keøe 'man', kicð 'yesterday', ike 'two', siksðn 'eighty', kyzlek 'eyeglass', kirðk 'necessary', kalórið 'calorie', okrug 'district', 'region', Kamal (A Tatar name). [44] ì – is a voiced tongue-back velar nasal. It has two variants, the first occurring with back vowels, the second with front vowels. The first is formed with the back of the tongue pressing against the soft palate, thus closing the air passage through the mouth. The sound passes out through the nose. It is identical with English final 'ng' in 'song', 'tongue'. The second variant is formed farther forward in the mouth, much like English final 'ng' in 'sing', 'cling': qaraìôí 'dark', síìar 'one of a pair', taì 'the dawn', soì 'late', çiì 'sleeve', tiì 'equal', ðìgðmð 'conversation', tðìkð 'coin', 'ruble', çiìel 'easy'. [45] x – is formed with the back of the tongue pressed close to the soft palate. It sounds more or less like German 'ch' in 'ach', or the Spanish 'j' in 'Juan': xat 'letter', xuø 'good-bye', jaxøí 'good', oxøaø 'similar', tarix 'history', xikðjð 'story', xezmðt 'service', rðxmðt 'thanks', rõxsðt 'permission'. [46] ô – is a voiced uvular fricative. It is formed by raising the back of the tongue near the soft palate and producing a rather harsh guttural sound. In native Tatar words and in Tatar suffixes it occurs only in the vicinity of back vowels, in loanwords (mostly from Arabic) it occurs also with front vowels: ôína particle meaning 'only', ôomumðn 'generally', daôa '(horse)shoe', tuôan 'relative', tuôíz 'nine', ôðrðp 'Arab', ôðlðmðt 'sign', sðôðt 'watch', 'clock', 'hour', mðônð 'meaning'. [47] q – (fortis, aspirated) is the voiceless correlative of 'ô'. It sounds like English 'c' in 'call', but pronounced far back in the throat. Like 'ô', it occurs in native Tatar words and in Tatar suffixes in the vicinity of back vowels, in loanwords (mostly from Arabic) also with front vowels: qanat 'wing', qom 'sand', baqa 'frog', uqu 'to read', tuqsan 'ninety', maqtanu 'to boast', saq 'careful', qaraq 'thief', qðdðr 'till', 'until', qðlðm 'pen', diqqðt 'attention', nðq 'exactly'. [48] h – is a voiceless laryngeal fricative. It has a back and a front variant. In the former, the tongue moves father back and down, whereas in the latter it moves forward and up; approximately like in English 'horse' and 'he'. The back variant is therefore also called low 'h', the front variant high 'h': hawa 'air', huøsíz 'unconscious', Tahir 'masculine name', gõnah 'sin', hõnðr 'trade', 'profession', hðmmð 'all', mõhim 'important', øðhðr 'town'. [49] ' – is a laryngeal stop (hamzat al-qat) which occurs only in Arabic loanwords. It represents a distinct pause within a word between a consonant and a vowel, a vowel and a consonant, or (rarely) between two vowels, as for example in English 'co-operative', 'reestablish': mðs'ðlð 'matter', 'problem', mõ'min 'believer', tð'sir 'influence', Qor'ðn 'Koran'.

8

Diphthongs [50] The Tatar language has no full diphthongs. All diphthongs are imperfect (partial) diphthongs. Depending on the position of their syllabic elements (the vowels), they are either falling diphthongs or rising diphthongs. In falling diphthongs the syllabic element precedes the non-syllabic one, while in rising diphthongs it follows the latter. [51] Falling diphthongs may be further classified into a) narrow diphthongs; b) labial diphthongs. [52] Narrow diphthongs are formed by combining the vowels a, ð, o, õ, u, í, e with the sonant (semivowel) j: aj, ðj, oj, õj, uj, ù, ej. They are pronounced as follows: The vowels are articulated as described in 5-14, with the sound gradually changing to that of their nonsyllabic element, the sonant (semivowel) 'j'. That means, 'aj' sounds approximately as in English 'fine' but with 'a' more or less colored (see 5); 'ðj' sounds like 'ey' in 'they', 'hey' but more open, 'oj' like 'oy' in 'boy', etc. The partial diphthong 'ej' occurs only in loanwords from or through Russian. Examples: ajlíq 'monthly', fajdalí 'useful', baj 'rich', malaj 'boy,' ðjber 'thing', ðjt! 'say!', bðjsez 'independent', çðj 'summer', kykðj 'egg', qojma 'fence', tojôí 'feeling', õj 'house', kõjmð 'ship', ujna! 'play!', tuj 'wedding', abruj 'reputation', 'authority', tùnaq 'modest', abù 'uncle', 'older brother', qarù 'he (she, it) looks, gazes', rejs 'trip', 'run', 'voyage', sejf 'safe' (noun). [53] Labial diphthongs are formed by combining a or ð with the sonant (semivowel) w: aw, ðw. The former sounds approximately like 'ow' in 'powwow', the latter is pronounced like 'ev' in 'beverage' but more open and 'v' pronounced as 'w' (25). Examples: awcí 'hunter', awlaq 'deserted', 'secluded', 'lonely', taw 'mountain', aìlaw 'to understand', ujnaw 'to play', ðwlið 'a holy man', gðwdð 'body', tðwbð 'repentance', sõjlðw 'to speak', eølðw 'to work'. Note 1: The phonemes ð and y (å), when coming together, do not always form the diphtong ðw. For wxample, they form this diphtong in: Kðwsðr (Käåsär) 'fem. name', Milðwøð (Miläåwä) 'fem. name', but each of the two phonemes is pronounced separately in: Rðyf (Räåf) 'masc. name', Rðyfð (Räåfä), 'fem. name'. Note 2: Falling diphthongs may also form in rapid speech when a word with a final broad or seminarrow vowel is immediately followed by another word with an initial narrow vowel. Both vowels combine then in one accented syllable, whereby the narrow vowel is reduced and changed into 'j' or 'w'. For example: tora idem – toŠrajdem 'I was living, residing', ðjtð ide – ðjŠtðjde 'he was saying', uqí inde – uqíjnde 'come on, read', anda utíra – andŠawtíra 'he sits there', belð yze – belŠðwzð 'he knows himself'. (See:  Xðzerge tatar ðdðbi tele, Kazan, 1965, pp. 102, 103.)

[54] The rising diphthongs are ja, jð, jo, jõ, ju, jy, jí, je, wa, wð, wu, wí, we. Their non-syllabic elements, j and w, are pronounced as described in 37 and 25 respectively. Examples: jarím 'half', jaqín 'near', dõnja 'world', jðøel 'green', 'jðø 'young', xikðjð 'story', 'tale', jola 'custom', 'ceremony', joldíz 'star', jomøaq 'soft', jõrðk 'heart', jõzem 'grape', jul 'way', 'road', juôarí 'above', jynðleø 'direction', jykð 'linden (tree)', jíø 'often', jíôílu 'to fall', jíraq 'far', jefðk 'silk', jegerme 'twenty', watan 'homeland', waqít 'time', tðqwa 'god-fearing', 'pious', 'devout', dðôwa 'claim', 'suit', wðôdð 'promise', wðkil 'representative', 'deputy', 'envoy', xðlwð 'halva', aldawíc 'bait', 'lure', dðwer 'epoch', 'period'. Note 1: When a word ends in a falling diphthong and a suffix with an initial vowel is added, the nonsyllabic element of the falling diphthong glides over to the added suffix, forming a rising diphthong with its vowel. In dividing such words in writing, the non-syllabic element remains with the latter, i.e. in

9

writing the falling diphthong is split apart. However, in the normal f low of speech there is no pause between the two syllables. They are pronounced together, with the non-syllabic element functioning as a gliding link. But the diphthongal quality of the falling diphthong is weakened. For example: Cðj 'tea', cð-jem 'my tea', malaj 'boy', mala-jíì 'your boy', jílmaj! 'smile!', jíma-ja 'he (she, it) smiles', çðj 'summer', çð-jen 'in summer', çðj! 'spread!', çð-jðm 'I spread', sõj! 'love!', sõ-jen! 'be glad!', 'rejoyce!', quj! 'put down!', qu-jíjm 'let me put down', tù! 'forbid!', tí-jíla 'is forbidden', 'one forbids', saw! 'milk!', sa-wùq 'let us milk', saw 'healthy', sa-wíqtíru 'to heal' (trans.), 'the healing', taw 'mountain', Aq byre ta-wí 'White Wolf Mountain', eølðw 'to work', 'the working', eølð-wem 'my working'. Note 2 The sonants (halfvowels) 'j' and 'w' may form syllables with indivisible (partial) diphthongs. The sonant 'j' forms such syllables with narrow and labial diphthongs, 'w' combines with narrow ones. For example: ba-jù 'sets', 'goes down' (sun), qu-jùq 'let us put down', jaw-líq 'kerchief (for the head)', jaw-cí 'matchmaker', bu-jaw-cí 'painter', çð-jðw 'on foot', tõ-jðw 'to load', juw-cí 'washer', sa-wùm 'let me milk', wðj-ran 'dilapidated', 'ravaged', 'destroyed'.

Vowel Harmony [55] In accordance with a phonetic law called vowel harmony, the vowel contained in the first syllable of a native Tatar stem determines the quality of the vowels in the succeeding syllables. That means that, as a rule, all vowels in a native Tatar word are either back vowels or front vowels. With a few exceptions (see further below), the rule of vowel harmony applies also to Tatar suffixes, whether derivational or inflective. [56] The vowel phonemes o, õ in the first syllable of a word affect the quality of the vowels í and e in succeeding syllables, causing them to be rounded towards o, õ. However, labialization of these phonemes is increasingly weakened (particularly in suffixes) the farther they are positioned from the first syllable, until it ceases entirely: boránôácáláq 'archaism', bõtênêbez 'all of us'. Labialization of í, e occurs also in compound words. The phonemes o, õ are then fully articulated also in the first syllable of the second component: ozánborán 'mosquito' (ozán 'long', borán 'nose'), terekõmêø 'quicksilver' (tere 'alive', kõmêø 'silver'). [57] The vowel phonemes u, y do not usually occur in non-first syllables or in final position of native Tatar words, but they do in the infinitive (verbal noun) of Tatar verbs and its derivations. For example: bulu 'to be', 'to become', tíríøu 'to endeavor', tíríøucan 'diligent', betery 'to finish', iðry 'to follow', iðryce 'follower'. [58] The vowel phoneme i usually occurs only in first syllables of native Tatar stems. A few exceptions are: ðti 'father', ðni 'mother', ðbi 'grandmother', ipi 'bread', bõti 'talisman', 'charm'. The vowel 'i' does not appear in suffixes, but it does in verb inflection. For example: eølðw 'to work', ul eøli 'he works', tylðw 'to pay', sin tyliseì 'you pay'. [59] Thus, with the above exceptions, the following rules of vowel harmony are applied: a) Any of the back vowels a, í (ù), u in a first syllable may be followed by either a or í; o may be followed by a or í (á). b) Any of the front vowels ð, e, i, y in a first syllable may be followed by either ð or e; õ may be followed by ð or e (ê). Examples: bala 'child', ata 'father', altí 'six', awíl 'village', tícqan 'mouse', qílíc 'sabre', tùnaq 'modest', sùdíru 'to place', 'accommodate', tuzan 'dust', tuôíz 'nine', botaq 'branch', ozán 'long', tðrðzð 'window', kðkre 'crooked', pecðn 'hay', jegerme 'twenty', tirðn 'deep', ike 'two', tybðn 'low', tygel 'is not', õlkðn 'old', dõgê 'rice', kõmêø 'silver', at+lar 'horses' (at 'horse'), jaz-u+cí+lar 'writers' (jaz! 'write!, jazu 'to write', 'writing in general', 'letter', jazucá 10

'writer'), eø+lð-gðn+seì 'you worked' eø 'the work', eølð! 'work!', eølðgðn 'worked', +seì indicates second person singular), qul 'hand', qul+ím 'my hand', qul+ím+da 'in my hand', qul+ím+da+ôí 'that which is in my hand', qul+lar+ím+da+ôí+lar 'those which are in my hands', bylmð 'room', bylmð+bez 'our room', bylmð+bez+dð 'in our room', bylmð+bez+dð+ge 'that which is in our room', bylmð+lðr+ebez+dð+ge+lðr 'those which (who) are in our rooms'. [60] The rule of vowel harmony applies also to many particles even if separate from the word they succeed: bez dð 'we too', ul da 'he too', ber genð 'only one', altí ôína 'only six', xðzer yk 'immediately', aldan uq 'beforehand'. [61] In native Tatar (Turkic) words there are very few exceptions to the principle of vowel harmony. Words in which such exceptions occur are for example: a) miìa 'to me', siìa 'to you', icmasa 'although', 'at least', zðìgðrsu 'bluish'; b) compound words whose components belong to different vowel harmony groups: kõncíôíø 'east' (kõn 'day', cíôíø 'rising'), tõnjaq 'north' (tõn 'night', jaq 'side'), õcpocmaq 'triangle' (õc 'three', pocmaq 'angle'). [62] With a few exceptions1), the principle of vowel harmony does not apply to Arabic and Persian loanwords, nor does it apply to words borrowed more recently from Russian or from other European languages. In these words back and front vowels may occur together in the same word. However, depending on their origin, Tatar suffixes joined to loanwords are subject to vowel harmony. 63] With Arabic and Persian loanwords the vowels in the Tatar suffixes tend to correspond to the vowel of the last syllable of the loanword: kitap (A.) 'book', kitabím 'my book', xatirð (A.) 'recollection', xatirðlðr 'recollections', xain (A.) 'traitor', xainlek 'treason', øðhðr (P.) 'city', øðhðrlðrebez 'our cities', çihan (P.) 'world', çihanôa 'to the world', sðjaxðtnamð (A.-P.) 'travel notes', 'travelogue', sðjaxðtnamðdðn 'from the travel notes, travelogue'. Some Arabic and Persian loanwords deviate from the above rule. Some of these, although containing a front vowel in their last syllable, require Tatar suffixes with back vowels (more often than not these are bisyllabic words with the pattern a–i, i.e., with 'a' in their first syllable and 'i' in their last), whereas others, having a back vowel in their last syllable, take Tatar suffixes with front vowels: tarix 'history', tarixnáì 'of the history', øahit 'witness', øahitlar 'witnesses', ruxani 'clergyman', ruxanidan 'from the clergyman', fatir 'flat', 'apartment', fatirlar 'flats/apartments', fanil 'perishable', fanilíq 'perishableness', sðlam2) 'greeting', sðlamnðr 'greetings', sõal2) 'question', sõale 'his question'. Note: Arabic loanwords ending in +iat, as for example, ðdðbiat 'literature', nðøriat 'publishing house', take suffixes with back vowels. But both the ending +iat and the suffixes sound hard only in the traditional book language (higher style). In the vernacular they are colored towards 'ð'. Hence, one writes: ðdðbiatta 'in literature', nðøriatqa 'to the publishing house', but pronounces: ðdðbiðttð, nðøriðtkð.

[64] Words borrowed more recently3) from Russian or, via Russian, from other European languages, require Tatar suffixes either with back vowels or with front vowels. However, with many such loanwords (and the Tatar suffixes joined to them) there is a difference 1)

Exceptions are some foreign words which have been borrowed through the spoken language and become completely naturalized. For example: õstðl 'table', eølðpð 'hat', kðbestð 'cabbage', Mðskðw 'Moscow', cirkðw 'church'. 2) The 'a' in this word is colored towards 'ð'. 3) Commonly after the revolution of 1917.

11

between their official orthography and their pronunciation in formal speech (for example in radio and television announcing, in lectures, etc.) and that in the vernacular. Words like Berlin, øved 'Swede', grek 'Greek', nemets 'German', ministr 'minister', muzej 'museum', which in Russian are pronounced hard, require the same pronunciation in Tatar formal speech and hence Tatar suffixes with back vowels. For example: Berlinda (Berlinda) 'in Berlin', øvedlar (wvedlar) 'Swedes', øvedca (wvedha) 'Swedish', greklar (greklar) 'Greeks', grekníì (greknyè) 'of the Greek', grekca (grekha) 'Greek' (adv.), nemetsca (nemecha) 'German' (adv.), ministrlar (ministrlar) 'ministers', muzejdan (muzejdan) 'from the museum'. In the vernacular, however, there is a strong tendency to soften the back vowels in the suffixes, as well as the pronunciation of the loanwords themselves, i.e. the tendency to naturalize them (to use them like regular front vowel words).1) Consequently, the vowel 'a' of the suffixes is coloured towards 'ð', 'í' is coloured towards 'e': Berlindð, ministerlðr, muzejdðn, grekneì; the words øvedca, grekca, nemesca sound in the vernacular like øvidcð, nimescð (more exact: nimeccð). Suffxes with back vowels are joined to: a) Words ending in a back vowel: logika 'logic', statistika 'statistic', lirika 'lyric', rota 'company', bjuro 'office', radio 'radio', kino 'cinema', galereja 'gallery'; b) Words containing either back vowels or both back and front vowels and ending in a consonant: advokat 'lawyer', aftobus 'autobus', Pariû 'Paris', universitet 'university', student 'student', adres 'address', prezidium 'presidium'; c) Words containing only front vowels but pronounced hard in Russian (see above). Suffixes with front vowels are joined to: a) Words ending in 'ie', 'ið', 'ejð': posobie 'grant-in-aid', 'dole', konstitutsið 'constitution', Korejð 'Korea', epopejð 'epopee'; b) All words ending in Russian in 'l' plus the soft sign, regardless of the vowels they contain: Kreml' 'Kremlin', Gogol', Sevastopol', Simferopol', korol' 'king', fevral' 'February', aprel' 'April', ijyl' 'July'. Words ending in Russian in a consonant other than 'l' followed by the soft sign take Tatar suffixes either with back or with front vowels. There is no rule as to which words take which suffixes. For example, suffixes with back vowels are joined to the words: vlast' 'power', 'authority', lager' 'camp', jakor' 'anchor', povest' 'tale', 'story', krepost' 'fortress'. Suffixes with front vowels are joined to the words: knðz 'prince', ijyn' 'June', neft' 'oil', 'petroleum'. Note: All of the above rules apply, of course, also to particles which are joined to or which follow the basic loanword and which ordinarily are subject to vowel harmony.

1)

12

Before the introduction of the Cyrillic alphabet for Tatar, words like Berlin, øved, ministr, muzej and others were front vowel words requiring front vowel suffixes in both the vernacular and the literary language (for more details see 119).

Unstable Vowels [65] The vowel phonemes í, e (á, ê), when fully articulated in the basic form of a word, but either reduced or completely ejected when the basic form is expanded by the addition of suffixes, are called unstable vowels. There are no definite, established laws as to the behavior of unstable vowels. As a rule, they are fully retained and pronounced when the accent rests upon them. If, through the addition of inflectional or derivational suffixes, the accent shifts to another syllable of the word, unstable vowels are either reduced or ejected.1) 1. A small group of bisyllabic verbs ejects the vowel í, e, of the stem when a suffix with an initial vowel is added. For example: quríq! 'be afraid!', 'be frightened!', quríqma! 'do not be afraid, frightened!' bez quríqmadíq 'we were not afraid, frightened!'; but: alar qurqalar 'they are afraid, frightened', ul qurqacaq 'he will be afraid, frightened', qurqu 'to be afraid, frightened', qurqaq 'coward', 'timid'; qalíq! 'rise!', qalíqma! 'do not rise!', min qalíqmadím 'I did not rise'; but: sez qalqasíz 'you are rising', min qalqacaqmín 'I shall rise', qalqíp 'rising', qalqu 'to rise', qalqítu 'to raise'. 2. Another small group of bisyllabic verbs has two stems, both of them containing an unstable vowel (í or e) in their second syllable. These verbs eject the vowel í, e of the stem when a suffix with an initial vowel is added: selky 'to shake', selkð or selki 'he shakes', selkep 'shaking'; but: selekkðn or selkegðn 'he shook'. Verbs belonging to this group are: balqu (balíq – balqí) 'to shine', jolqu (joláq – jolqá) 'to pull out', sarqu (saríq – sarqí) 'to percolate', 'to seep out', bõrky (bõrêk – bõrkê) 'to sprinkle'. 3. A rather comprehensive group of bisyllabic words with an open first syllable and í, e in a closed second syllable with an initial or final sonant or fricative, strongly reduce or completely eject í, e (á, ê) when suffixes with an initial vowel are added: urín 'place', uríníbíz (urníbíz) 'our place', borán 'nose', borání (borná) 'his (her, its) nose', kyìel 'spirit', 'mood', kyìele (kyìle) 'his (her, its) spirit, mood', buríc 'debt', 'duty', burícím (burcím) 'my debt' duty', kyren! 'appear!', kyrenð (kyrnð) 'he (she, it) appears', sigez 'eight', sigezence (sigzence) 'eighth', tuôíz 'nine', tuôízíncí (tuôzíncí) 'ninth'. To this group belong also words of Arabic origin which originally ended in two consonants, and which in Tatar have become bisyllabic by the insertion of the vowels í, e (á, ê) between these consonants: isem 'name', isemem (ismem) 'my name', fiker 'thought' (noun), fikere (fikre) 'his (her, its) thought', ôõmêr 'life', ôõmêre (ôõmrê) 'his (her, its) life', waqít 'time', waqítínda (waqtínda) 'in its time', sùníf 'class', sùnífíôíz (sùnfíôíz) 'your class', axír 'end', axírína (axrína) 'to its end'. The unstable vowel in this latter group of words is always ejected when the Arab adjective ending 'i', 'ù' is added: ôilem 'science', ôilmi 'scientific', sùníf 'class', sùnfù 'class' (attr.). 4. In the first syllable, if open and unaccented, the vowel phonemes í, e (á, ê) are always strongly reduced: bely 'to know', sounds almost like bly, telðw 'to wish', almost like tlðw, qísu 'to press', sounds almost like qsu, qástaw 'to beg, urge', almost like qstaw. 5. In polysyllables í, e are increasingly reduced the farther they are from the accent: tínâc 'quiet', 'peaceful', tínícsâz 'turbulent', 'agitated', tínícsízlâq 'worry', 'unrest', 'trouble', tínícsízlíôâ 'his (her, its) worry, unrest, trouble', tínícsízlíôínâì 'of his (her, its) worry, unrest, trouble', belém, 'knowledge', belemséz 'without knowledge', 'ignorant', belemsezlék 'ignorance', belemsezlegemnéì 'of my ignorance'. 1)

For the accent in Tatar see 71-87.

13

Elision of Vowels [66] Elision of Vowels takes place: a) In a number of compound nouns whose first component ends in a vowel and whose second component begins with a vowel. But note: Rounded vowels are always retained: alma 'apple', aôac 'tree', almaôac 'apple tree', irtð 'morning', yk particle meaning 'at once', 'immediately', irtyk 'early in the morning', ðjdð 'let's go', ðjdyk 'come on in, please'. b) In rapid speech: qara 'black', urman 'forest', qarurman 'dense forest', cíôa almù – cíôalmù 'he cannot go out', tyzð almù – tyzðlmù (or: tyzðlmi) 'he cannot bear it', baøta uq – baøtuq 'right at the beginning'. Sez ni eølisez? – Sez niølisez? 'What are you doing?' Cðj ecðbez – CðŠjcðbez. 'We are having (drinking) tea.'

Prosthesis and Epenthesis [67] No native Tatar word or syllable in a Tatar word may begin with a cluster of two or more consonants, nor may any syllable in a native word contain a cluster of more than two consonants. In a small number of native Tatar words two consonants may occur at the end of closed syllables, but their nature and their sequence within a syllable are governed by strict rules. When non-Tatar clusters, as for example, 'st', 'sk', 'sm', 'øt', 'msk', appear in loanwords adopted from or via Russian, either in word-initial or non-first syllable position, a prosthetic vowel is prefixed to, or an epenthetic vowel interpolated in, the cluster. Note: Both prosthesis and epenthesis are in most cases not ref lected in the orthography.

Examples of words pronounced with a prosthetic vowel: sport – íspórt 'sport', øtab – íøtab 'staff', 'headquarters', ístakan (R. stakan), '(drinking) glass', íøtan (R. wtany) 'trousers', eølðpð (R. wlqpa) 'hat', eskðmið (R. skamáq) 'bench', eskðter (R. skatertá) 'tablecloth', õstðl (R. stol) 'table'. Examples of words pronounced with an epenthetic vowel: Omsk – Omíski 'Omsk', smola – sumala 'pitch', 'tar'. Note: In spórt, øtab, stakan, the prosthetic vowel is not ref lected in the orthography. In the remaining examples it is written. The epenthetic vowel 'á' in 'Omáski' is not reflected in the orthography; the vowel 'i' at the end of 'Omáski' is only written when suffixes are added. For example: Omskida 'in Omsk'. The loanword 'sumala' always appears in this form.

Consonant Harmony [68] In accordance with the principle of consonant harmony, consonants undergo the following phonetic changes. 1. Consonant variation in suffixes: a) A rather large group of Tatar suffixes have two variants, one beginning with the voiced consonants d, g, or ô, the other beginning with their voiceless correlatives t, k, or q. Stems ending in a voiced consonant, a vowel, or a semivowel ('j' or 'w') require these suffixes to appear in their voiced form. Conversely, stems ending in a voiceless consonant require their voiceless variant: Qazan+da 'in Kazan', tíø+ta 'outside', Qazan+ôa 'to Kazan', ut+qa 'into the fire', bðjrðm+gð 'to the holiday', xõkymðt+tðn 'from the government', xõkymðt+kð 'to the government', ujna-dí 'he played', qara-ôan 'he has looked', 14

bylmð+dð 'in the room', eølð+gðn 'he has worked, done', abù+dan 'from the older brother', abù+ôa 'to the older brother', õj+dð 'in the house', õj+gð 'to, into the house', taw+da 'on the mountain', taw+ôa 'to the mountain. b) Initial d of the ablative suffix +dan, +dðn and initial l of the plural suffixs +lar, +lðr and of the suffix lap, +lðp, which forms approximative numbers, change to n when these suffixes are joined to stems ending in any of the three nasals m, n, ì: uram+nan (instead of uram+dan) 'from the street', uram+nar (instead of uram+lar) 'streets', kilgðn+nðr (instead of kilgðn+lðr) 'they have come', taì+nan (instead of taì+dan) 'from the dawn', un+nap (un+lap) 'about ten', meì+nðp (meì+lðp) 'about a thousand'. Note: The change of l to n in the suffix +lap, +lðp is not ref lected in the orthography.

c) Suffix-initial g and ô change to ì when following the latter: çiì-ìðn (çiìgðn) 'was victorious', tuì-ìan (tuìôan) 'froze'. Note 1: The change of g and ô to ì is not reflected in the orthography. Note 2: Stems may take more than one suffix. In such cases the final phoneme of the preceding suffix determines the initial consonant of the following suffix. For example: hawa+da+ôá qoø+lar 'the birds of the air' (hawa 'air', hawa+da 'in the air', qoø 'bird'), kyp+tðn+ge dus 'a friend of long standing' (kyp 'much', kyp+tðn 'of long', 'since long', dus 'friend').

2. Consonant variations in stems: a) Final k, p, q, change to g, b, ô1) if followed by a suffix beginning with a vowel: k – g: cilðk 'pail', cilðge 'his (her, its) pail', kyzlek 'glasses', kyzlege 'his (her, its) glasses', p – b: kitap 'book', kitaàí 'his (her, its) book', mðktðp 'school', mðktðáe 'his (her, its) school', q – ô: ajaq 'foot', ajaôí 'his (her, its) foot', qaøíq 'spoon', qaøíôí 'his (her, its) spoon'. b) The consonant n before initial q – ô, k – g changes to ì. For example: jaì-ôan (janôan) 'burned', syì-gðn (syngðn) 'extinguished', basíì-qí (basínqí) 'modest', kytðreì-ke (kytðrenke) 'excited', 'heightened'. c) The consonant z before suffix-initial s changes to s. For example: toz 'salt', tos+síz (tozsíz) 'saltless', tigez 'equal', tiges+sezlek (tigezsezlek) 'inequality', syz 'word', sys+sez (syzsez) 'silent', 'taciturn'. d) The consonant n before b changes to m. For example: umber (unber) 'eleven', umbiø (unbiø) 'fifteen'. Note: The consonant variations discussed under b) - d) are not reflected in the orthography.2)

3. Consonant variations in rapid speech:3) The consonant variations k – g, q – ô, p – b, n – ì, n – m, z, s – may also occur in rapid speech. However, in addition to the changes already discussed, the variations k – g, q – ô occur then also before initial r of the following word, n changes into m also before initial m and z into s also before initial k, q: jõrðgŠ õzgec (jõrðk õzgec) 'heart-rending', 'piercing (sound)', bigŠ irtð (bik irtð) 'very early', aôŠ aljapqíc (aq aljapqíc) 'white apron', kitabŠ alu (kitap alu) 'to take, buy, a book', talðàŠ itte (talðp itte) 'he demanded', aôŠ roza (aq roza) 'white rose', biegŠ rðøðtkð (biek rðøðtkð) 'high railing', tíìŠ ôína (tín ôína) 'rather quiet', 1)

Exceptions are verbal stems of the type qaláq - qalqu, selek - selke, and a small group of Arabic loanwords. For example: ôiøáq 'love', ôiøqá 'his (her) love', xaláq 'people', xalqábáz 'our people', xaq 'right', xaqá 'his (her) right', xoquq '(legal) right', xoquqá 'his (legal) right', xoláq 'nature', 'character', 'temper', xolqám 'my nature', 'character', 'temper', ðxlaq 'morals', ðxlaqáôáz 'your morals', irek 'liberty', 'will', irkebez 'our liberty, will', milek 'property', milke 'his property'. 2) But in some Persian loanwords, such as the names of the days of the week, 'm' is reflected in the orthography: jðkøðmbe 'Sunday', dyøðmbe 'Monday', etc. It is also reflected in the feminine name (and name of the last Tatar queen): Sõjembikð. 3) See: Sovr. Tat. Lit. Yazyk, Vol. I. Izd. 'Nauka', Moscow, 1969, p. 108, 5. 1-2.

15

miìŠ qajttím (min qajttím) 'I returned', siìŠ kildeì (sin kildeì) 'you came', jõsŠ sum (jõz sum) 'hundred rubles', tosŠ qajnatu zavodí (toz qajnatu zavodí) 'saltworks', jasŠ kilde (jaz kilde) 'spring has come', tisŠ kil! (tiz kil!) 'come quickly!', umŠ minut (un minut) 'ten minutes'. The voiceless tongue-back velar stop k sounds like an uvular q when succeeded by the latter: biqŠ qízíq (bik qízíq) 'very interesting', kieqŠ qaz (kiek qaz) 'wild goose'.

The Syllable and Syllabication [69] The syllable-forming element is the vowel. Therefore, the number of syllables in any Tatar word coincides with that of its vowels. Syllables may be open or closed. They may consist of: 1. a single vowel (V); 2. a consonant and a vowel (C + V); 3. a vowel and a consonant (V + C); 4. a consonant, a vowel, and a consonant (C + V + C); 5. a vowel and two consonants (V + C + C); 6. a consonant, a vowel, and two consonants (C + V + C + C). Open syllables: 1. V: a-lu 'to take', ð-bi 'grandmother', o-ca 'he flies', õ-lêø 'part', u-raq 'sickle', y-zðk 'center', í-lís 'needle' (of a conifer), e-lek 'before', i-ke 'two'; 2. C + V: qa-ra 'black', cð-cðk 'flower', bo-rán 'nose', 'cape', tõ-rêk 'Turk', 'Turkish', su-ôan 'onion', ty-bðn 'low', cí-ôíø 'speech', te-re 'alive', ti-rðn 'deep'. Closed syllables: 3. V + C: al-tín 'gold', ðr-sez 'impudent', ox-waw, 'resembling', õs-kê 'the upper part', uz-ôan 'passed', yr-nðk 'model', ím-law 'to hint', eø-ce 'worker', ir-ken 'free'; 4. C + V + C: jal-qín 'flame', tðm-le 'tasty', tot-qa 'handle', kõc-lê 'strong', tuq-san 'ninety', kyr-kðm 'beautiful', 'pretty', cíp-cíq 'sparrow', bel-gðn 'known', kis-ken 'sharp'; 5. V + C + C: Native Tatar words made up of, or containing, syllables of this composition are only a few. The syllable-final consonant is a tongue-point alveolar oral stop, practically always t. The preceding consonant is either a sonant, usually l or r, less often n – or a fricative, practically always j: alt-míø 'sixty', art-tan 'from behind', ant-lí 'on oath', õrt-kec 'cover' (noun), urt-law 'to swallow', ðjt-kð-lðw 'to say repeatedly'. Note: It is important to note that in syllables of native Tatar words the oral stop always succeeds the sonant or fricative, never precedes it. However, in loanwords from or via Russian this sequence may be reversed. Where this happens, as for example, in the syllable 'eks', in which the oral stop (plosive) 'k' precedes the fricative 's', the epenthetic vowel 'á' is interpolated – 'ekás'. The epenthetic vowel is not reflected in the orthography.

6. C + V + C + C: The pattern of the final two consonants in syllables of this composition is the same as that described in 5. However, the group of native Tatar words made up of, or containing, such syllables is somewhat larger: jalt 'sudden(ly)', qart-líq 'old age', ju-mart 'generous', dðrt-le 'ardent', 'fervent', gõlt: gõlt ity 'to flash' (intrans.), jort-ta 'in the house', jõrt-kð-lðw 'drive!' (trans.), 'wear!' (for ex.: jewelry) repeatedly, byrt-kðn 'swelled', dyrt-le 'a four', qíz-ôílt 'reddish', jírt-qíc 'predator', qaj-ôírt! 'look after!', 'trouble! (about)', kert  'lead in!', kirt-lðw 'to make incisions', 'notch', 'dent', qajt-ma-ôan 'has not returned'.

Note: Syllables consisting of a single vowel may not be separated from the rest of the word (see 118, Division of Words).

16

[70] Syllabication is as follows: Open syllables of the type C + V are divided after the vowel. For example: yte-ny 'to beg', aøí-ôu 'to hurry'. Closed syllables of the types V + C and C + V + C are divided after the consonant, whereby two consonants occurring between two vowels are separated: ur-man 'forest', õs-tên-lek 'superiority', jaz-ôan-nar 'they wrote', soq-lan-dír-ôíc 'delightful', 'ravishing'. Closed syllables of the types V + C + C and C + V + C + C are divided after the consonant cluster, if the succeeding syllable begins with a consonant; if it begins with a vowel, the cluster is separated: alt-míø 'sixty', qart-líq 'old age', qar-ta-ju 'to get old', dðrt-lðn-de-ry 'to inspire', dðr-te-bez 'our passion'.

The Accent ¡ Its Position and Intensity [71] The position of the accent in a given word depends on that word's morphology, its relation to other parts of speech in a sentence, and on its origin. Inflection, expansion by derivational suffixes, or combination of a word with another word may cause the accent to shift from its original syllable to another syllable, or it may produce a secondary accent in addition to the main accent. [72] The degree of intensity of the accent in a given word depends on such factors as the word's morphology, its composition (compound word, word-pair), the number of syllables it comprises, its position in relation to another word, its position and function in a sentence, the flow and rhythm of speech (syntactical accent). The intensity of the accent in Tatar is a rather complicated subject. Its exhaustive treatment requires a special study, including experimental research, and can therefore not be attempted within the scope of this grammar. The rules, explanations and examples given in this chapter may serve as approximate illustrations. Tatar (Turkic) words have their accent mostly on the last syllable, less often on the first or on the syllable next to the last. [73] The accent is on the last syllable in: Nouns, adjectives, numerals, postpositions, personal, demonstrative, reflexive and reciprocal pronouns, the indefinite pronouns baøqŽa 'other', bõtén 'whole', ðllŽð kem 'someone', 'somebody' (very vague),, verbal nouns, participles, verbal adverbs, except the verbal adverb in -ôancá, -gðnce, -qancí, -kðnce; all affirmative verbal forms whose personal endings are of the possesive type (see 907), the affirmative imperative, except the second person singular and plural, the negative indicative future tense I, first person singular and third person singular and plural, the suffixes +laj, +lðj, +lap, +lðp, +latŽa, +lðtŽð, +án, +en, +tán, +ten, +an, +ðn, +anð, which form derivational adverbs. Examples: diìgéz 'sea', 'ocean', kõnbatâø 'west', matúr 'beautiful', sigéz 'eight', qarøâ 'against', õcén 'for', miìŽa 'me' (pers. pron., dative), øuøâ 'this (here)', yzemné 'myself' (refl. pron., accusative), ber-berén 'one another' (accusative), utírú 'the sitting', 'to sit', utírôŽan 'having sat', 'sitting', utírâp 'sitting' (verbal adverb), utírdâì 'you sat', utírâjq 'let us sit', utírmŽam

17

'I shall not sit', bõtenlŽðj 'entirely', cínlŽap 'really', ikelðtŽð 'doubly', qíøân 'in winter', tirðntén 'profoundly', xðqiqðtŽðn 'really', 'truly', dustanŽð 'friendly'. Note: When a postposition follows a noun, pronoun, or other nominal form, the main accent rests on the latter and only a secondary accent remains on the postposition: õ Ž j aldánda` 'in front of the house', miném kebe`k 'like me', bezgŽð qarøí` 'against us', anâì bélð`n 'with him'.

[74] The accent is on the first syllable in: The affirmative imperative, second person singular and plural; the comparative pronouns móndù 'such' (like this), øúndù 'such' (like this/here), a Ž ndù 'such' (like that/there), practically all interrogative pronouns, almoust all indefinite pronouns. Examples: tâìla! 'listen!' (sing.), tâìlaqíz! 'listen!' (pl.), nŽicð 'how many', 'how much', qŽajda 'where', nŽðrsð 'what', qŽajcan 'when', qŽajber 'some', bŽarlíq 'alll', bŽarí 'all (of them)',, hŽðmmð 'all', hŽðrkem 'everyone', 'each', 'everybody', hŽickem 'nobody', 'no one'. [75] The accent is on the syllabe next to the last in: All affirmative verbal forms whose personal endings are of the pronominal type (see 907), the optative with -mŽaqcí, -mŽðkce, all persons of the negative indicative future tense I, except those indicated above, the verbal adverb in ôŽancí, etc., the comparative pronouns tegŽendi 'such' (like that), øuøândù 'such' (like this here), the third person plural of the indicative present tense, words used with the predicative endings: Bez øðkertl`ðŽ rbez. 'We are students'. Min bðxetlŽemen. 'I am happy'. [76] The accent is on the first or last syllable, sometimes on the syllable next to the last in: Adverbs, conjunctions, modal words: hŽaman 'always', bŽðlki 'perhaps', øŽaqtù 'rather', iŽ nde 'already', jŽðôni 'namely', 'that is', ðŽ mma, lŽðkin 'but', 'however', júqsa, júôisð 'if not', 'otherwise', 'or else', jŽaki 'or', cŽõnki 'because', gŽðrcð 'although', Žðjdð 'come on', 'let's go', 'go', mŽenð 'here' (French: voici), Žðnð 'there' (French: voila`), iŽ cmasam 'at least', jŽðgez (expresses inducement), tŽygel 'not', xŽðjer 'but then', 'by the way', irtŽð 'early', xŽðzer 'now', kinŽðt 'suddenly', bygŽen 'today', bíltâr 'last year', kyptŽðn 'long ago', isŽð 'as to', 'as regards', jaxŽut 'or', ðg´ðr 'if', buôŽaj 'it seems', jarâj 'good', 'all right', kirŽðk 'necessary', tiéø 'must', ðlbŽðttð 'of course', 'naturally', tatŽarca 'Tatar' (adv.), xðlbúki 'however', gyjŽðki 'as if', 'as though'. [77] The accent in negative verbal forms: All negative verbal forms, regardless of mood, tense (except future tense I) and type of personal endings, stress the syllable preceding the negative suffix -ma, -mð. For example: utârma 'do not sit' (sg.), kctmð! 'don't go away!'. If -ma, -mð is followed by other suffixes, a secondary accent is produced, the intensity and position of which depends on the morphological category of those suffixes. For example, in a negative verb standing in the third person plural imperative, or in the second or third plural indicative past tense I, the main accent is weaker and the secondary accent stronger than in the same verb standing in the third person singular imperative, or indicative past tense I: aøí`qmasínnŽar 'may they not hurry', aìla`madílŽar 'they did not understand', aìla`madíôâz 'you (pl.) did not understand', aøí`qmasân 'may he not hurry', aìlŽamadí` 'he did not understand'. Thus, the more syllables there are after the suffix -ma, -mð the stronger the accent at the end of the word and the weaker the original main accent: qŽajtmù 'he does not return', qŽa Ž jtlmajaca`q 'he will not return', qa`jtmajacaqlŽar 'they will not return'.

18

[78] The accent and particles. Particles written together with, or following the word which they modify, commonly do not attract the accent. Some retain a slight secondary accent on the syllable which is commonly stressed. The accent in the word immediately preceding the particle is strengthened: byrŽe 'wolf', byrŽedðj 'like a wolf', çiìŽel 'light', 'easy', çiìŽelme 'light?', 'easy?', tuqtadâ 'it stopped', Jaìôír tuqtad´ímíni? 'The rain has stopped, hasn't it?', kil! 'come!', kíl ðle`! 'come, please!', kílce! 'please come!', kem 'who', kŽemder 'someone', al! 'take!', aŽ lsana`! 'please take it!', urmanô´a uq 'right up to the forest', uqísínn´ar la!` 'do let them read it!', zúr ôína 'rather big', çiìŽel genð 'rather easy', jaxøâ ôína 'rather good'. Note: In certain cases (depending on style) the restrictive particle ôína, qína, genð, kenð attracts the accent (second syllable) when following a noun, a pronoun or numeral: Õjdð ber genŽð bala qaldí. 'There remained at home only one child.' Jaz ôínŽa çitsen. 'If only spring would come.'

The particle da, dð, ta, tð remains unstressed when preceded by a word with a stressed last syllable. However, it causes the accent in the preceding syllable to be somewhat strengthened: kitep tð bardí 'he left abruptly'. If preceded by unstressed syllables, the particle is stressed slightly: bŽer kem dð` 'nobody', 'no one', bŽer nindi dð` 'none whatever'. The particle ðllð always has the accent on its last syllable. However, the intensity of the accent depends on the structure of the sentence and position of ðllð in relation to the word to which it refers. Ðll´ð kem kilde. 'Someone came.' Ðll´ð abù qajttí inde. 'Perhaps the (older) brother has already returned.' Sin bŽelmðdeìme ðllð? 'Why, didn't you know it?' Furthermore, if ðllð precedes the word it refers to, the degree of intensity of the accent in ðllð will depend on what part of speech the word is to which it refers. If it is an interrogative pronoun having the accent on its first syllable, the intensity of the accent on the particle increases, while the accent on the interrogative pronoun shifts to the end: ðll´ ´ð nðrsŽð (from: ðllð nŽðrsð) 'something' (very vague), ðll´ ´ð nicŽek (from ðll´´ð nŽicek) 'how', 'in what way' (very vague), ðll´ ´ð qajdŽa (from: ðllŽð qŽajda) 'somewhere'. With the intensifying particles bik 'very', iì 'most', ôŽajðt 'very', 'extremely', 'extraordinarily', utŽä 'very', çeté 'very', 'completely', dõm 'completely', õr 'completely', 'absolutely', the accent is strengthened when they precede an adjective, and only a secondary accent remains on the last syllable of the adjective: bŽi k jaxøí` 'very good', ytŽð jðøe`l 'very green', çeté qízí`l 'scarlet', dŽõm suqí`r 'completely blind', õ Ž r-jaìa` 'brand new', 'completely new'. [79] The accent in partial reduplications: The main accent is on the first, a secondary accent on the last syllable: zŽðp-zðìg`ðr 'deep blue', aŽ p- a`q 'completely white'. [80] The accent in word-pairs: The main accent rests on the last syllable of the first component. A secondary accent is on the last syllable of the second component: balŽa-caôa` 'childhood', kildelé-kittele` 'hither and thither', 'incoherently'. [81] The accent and derivational suffixes: Derivational suffixes commonly attract the accent. If more than one suffix is added the accent shifts to the last one: tíríøú 'the striving', 'to strive', tíríøucŽan 'zealous', baltŽa 'ax', baltacâ 'carpenter', baltacílâq 'carpentry'. Note: Exceptions are certain loanwords adopted from or via Russian (see 84).

19

[82] The accent and inf lectional suffixes: Inf lectional suffixes mostly attract the accent: qalŽa 'city', qaladŽa 'in the city', atŽa 'father', atas´í 'his father', atasínnŽan 'from his father'. Exceptions are: a) Personal endings of the pronominal type (see above); b) Tatar words which stress the first syllable: móndù 'such (here)', móndùní (accusative); bŽarí 'all', bŽarísína 'to all of it'; c) Certain loanwords adopted from or via Russian (see 84, 2. a-b). Inflectional suffixes take a secondary accent if preceded by unstressed suffixes or particles. The main accent then remains in its original place: baølŽama! 'do not begin!', baølŽamasí`n! 'may he not begin!' [83] The accent in words borrowed from Arabic and Persian: Practically all words borrowed from Arabic and Persian have become completely naturalized and, consequently, are subject to the same accent rules as are native Tatar words. Most of them shift their original accent to the last syllable. Examples: mðdðniŽðt 'culture', 'civilization', idarŽð 'administration', ôðlím 'scholar', 'scientist', ôõmér 'life', øðhŽðr 'city', 'town', sðwdðgŽðr 'merchant', mðdðniðtl´e 'educated', 'cultured', idarðcé 'administrator', ôðlimnŽðr 'scholars', 'scientists', mðônŽð 'meaning', 'sense', mðônðs´ez 'meaningless', 'senseless', mðônðsezl´ek 'senselessness', øðhðrdŽð 'in the city, town'. [84] The accent in words borrowed from or via Russian The accent in loanwords adopted from or via Russian depends on the degree to which a word has become naturalized in Tatar. 1. Older loanwords1) which have become completely naturalized: The position of the accent is the same as that in native Tatar words. For example: tðlinkŽð (R. tar´elka), 'plate', kðbestŽð (R. kap´usta), 'cabbage', eølðpŽð (R. wl´qpa), 'hat', tðlinkðdŽð 'on the plate', kðbestðné 'cabbage' (accusative). 2. More recent loanwords 2) a) Words which in their original Russian form have the accent on a non-final syllable. These words retain their original accent. However, when Tatar suffixes which ordinarily attract the accent are joined to them, a secondary accent rests on the latter. The intensity of the two accents varies with the individual words. But, in most cases the Tatar suffix carries the stronger accent, while the original accent is weakened. In some words the latter becomes almost inaudible. Examples: televŽizor 'television set', respúblika 'republic', revolýtsið 'revolution', delegŽatsið 'delegation', koordinŽatsið 'coordination', ekonómika 'economy', proféssor 'professor', respu`blikadŽa 'in the republic', respu`blikacâ 'a republican', revoly`tsiðgŽð 'to the revolution', revoly`tsiðc´el 'revolutionary' (in this word the original accent almost disappears), koordina`tsiðlðdegéz 'you (pl.) coordinated', ekono`mikabâz 'our economy', profe`ssorlâq 'professorship'.

1) Commonly words which have been adopted before the revolution of 1917. 2)

20

Commonly words which have been introduced after the revolution of 1917.

b) Words used in their original Russian form which in Russian have the accent on the last syllable, and adjectives adopted without their Russian ending +nyj. They retain their original accent, but when Tatar suffixes which ordinarily attract the accent are joined to them, the accent shifts to the latter. Examples: kolxóz 'collective farm', kolxozcâ 'collective farmer', kolxozlaøtírú 'to collectivize', telefón 'telephone', telefonnŽar 'telephones', telefonnaríbâz 'our telephones', formŽal (R. formalányj) 'formal', formal'lék 'formality', traditsión (R. tradici´onnyj) 'traditional', traditsiónlâq 'traditional nature', abstrŽakt (R. abstraktnyj) abstraktlaøtírú 'to abstract', 'populŽar', pópularlâq 'popularity'. c) Adjectives ending in Russian in +Žiceski (+´ihesknj): They drop this ending, take +ik instead and shift the accent forward to the next syllable. Examples: sótsialŽistik (R. socialist´iheskij) 'socialistic', ekonómik (R. ïkonom´iheskij), 'economic', politik (R. polit´iheskij) 'political', prŽaktik (R. prakt´iheskij) 'practical', eléktrik (R. ïlektr´iheskij) 'electrical'.

The Accent and the Meaning of Words 85] The accent functions also to distinguish the meaning of words. For example: ójíø! 'organize yourself!', ojâøma! 'do not organize yourself!', ojíømŽa 'organization', byl! 'divide!', býlmð! 'do not divide!', bylmŽð 'room'; quø! 'join!', 'add!', qúøma! 'do not join, add!', quømŽa 'united', al! 'take!', a Ž lma! 'do not take!', almŽa 'apple', qŽara! 'look!', qarŽa 'black', atŽabíz 'we shoot', atabâz 'our father', qalŽabíz 'we remain', qalabâz 'our city', mindŽð 'in, with me', mŽin dð 'I too'. [86] The accent in the literary Tatar language, as well as in most dialects, is expiratory1). However, in certain cases a musical accent may occur. Note: The dialects of the Mishars and the Kasim Tatars have, besides the expiratory accent, a musical accent.

1)

Expiratory accent – stress produced by expulsion of air.

21

[87] Tense and/or Mood

Table Showing the Position of the Accent in Conjugated Verbs

Indic.Present Tense: I sit, etc.

Person

min sin ul bez sez alar

Past Tense I: I sat, etc.

Past Tense II: I sat, etc.

22

Accent is on syllable preceding the negative suffix -ma-, -mð-

utáram

utáramán1)

utármùm

utárasáì

utármùsáì utármù utármùbáz utármùsáz utármùlar

utára

utárabáz utárasáz utáralar

utármadám

sin ul bez sez alar

utárdáì utárdá utárdáq utrdáôáz utárdálar

utármadáì utármadá utármadáq utármadáôáz utrmadálar

min

min min sin sin

utárôanmán utármaôanmán utárôansáì utármaôansáì utármaôan utárôanbáz utármaôanbáz utárôansáz utármaôansáz utárôannar utármaôannar

I do not sit, etc.

I did not sit, etc.

I did not sit, etc.

utárôan

utármam

utárármán utárársáì utármassáì

utárár utármas

bez bez

utárárbáz utármabáz

sez sez

utárársáz utármassáz

alar alar Used less often.

Accent is on syllable next to last

utárdám

ul ul

1)

Accent is on last syllable

min

sin ul bez sez alar Future Tense I: I shall sit, etc.

Accent is on first syllable

utárárlar utármaslar

I shall not sit You will not sit He, she, it will not sit We shall not sit You will not sit They will not sit

Tense and/or Mood

Future Tense II: I shall sitt, etc .

Person

min

utár

Let us sit Sit (ye) They shall sit

Sitting Not sitting Not sitting ) Without sitting ) After sitting After not sitting Before sitting While sitting While not sitting To sit; the sitting, to sit Not to sit

Accent is on last syllable

Accent is on syllable next to last

Accent is on syllable preceding the negative suffix -ma-, -mð-

utáracaqmán utármajacaqmán I shall not sit, etc. utáracaqsáì utármajacaqsáì utáracaq utármajacaq utáracaqbáz utármajacaqbáz utáracaqsáz utármajacaqsáz utáracaqlar utármajacaqlar

sin ul bez sez alar

Imp./Opt. Moods: Let me sit Sit (thou) He shall sit

Cond. Mood: If I sit, etc.

Accent is on first syllable

utárùm

utármùm utárma utármasán

utársán

utársánnar

utármùq utármaôáz utármasánnar

min sin ul

utársam utársaì utársa

utármasam utármasaì utármasa

bez sez alar

utársaq utársaôáz utársalar

utármasaq utármasaôáz utármasalar

utáráôáz

utárùq

utáráp

utáru

If I do not sit, etc.

utármù utármùca

utárôac utárôanda

Let me not sit Do not sit He, she, it shall not sit Let us not sit Do not sit They shall not sit

utárôancá

utármaôac utármaôanda utármaw

23

CHAPTER II ¡ THE TATAR ALPHABET AND ORTHOGRAPHY [88] After undergoing several reforms aimed at making it more phonetic, the Arabic alphabet, which Tatars had been using for many centuries, was officially replaced on July 3, 1927 by the latinized Tatar alphabet or "Jaìalif" (New Alphabet). The New Alphabet, or more precisely, the orthography based on it, was not perfect. Still under the influence of the Arabic script, it emphasized the consonants, while neglecting the vowels. Particularly the omission of the vowels 'í' and 'e' in unstressed syllables of polysyllabic words created clusters of up to seven consonants and complicated reading. For example: brktmð (berketmð) 'protocol', qlnôan (qílínôan) 'was made', ðjtlgðn (ðjtelgðn) 'was said', aldnda (aldínda) 'in front of', jrtqclar (jírtqíclar) 'predators', jgtlðr (jegetlðr) 'young men', çitøszlklðr (çiteøsezleklðr) 'shortages', 'deficiencies', brlkkð (berlekkð) 'union' (dative). In 1933 a major orthographical reform was carried out, and several minor improvements were made in the years thereafter. In its final form then, the Jaìalif emerged as an almost phonetic alphabet which, together with its simple orthographical rules, was excellently suited to writing the Tatar language. Reflecting the language 'as spoken by educated Tatars', it played an important role in the standardization of the Tatar literary language and in setting firm language norms for it. Nevertheless, in 1939-40 the Jaìalif was abolished and replaced by a modified Cyrillic alphabet1), i.e., the Russian alphabet plus the letters Ä ä, Ã ã, Å å, Æ æ, È è, Ç ç. This Tatar-Cyrillic alphabet and orthography lack the simplicity and clarity of the Jaìalif. In particular, the absence of separate symbols to render 'ô' and 'q' has resulted in involved orthographical rules. Some symbols are 'overburdened', the same symbol is used to designate two, three or even four different sounds, while in other instances the alphabet uses two or three symbols to designate the same sound. Some symbols again (for example, the soft sign 'í' in its function as syllable divider) are used where completely unnecessary in Tatar.

The Latinized Tatar Alphabet (Jaìalif) 2) [89] The Latinized Tatar Alphabet comprises the following 33 letters, and an apostrophe: A B C Ç D E Ð F G Ô H 1) 2)

a v c ç d e ð f g ô h

I J K L M N Ì O Õ P Q

i j k l m n ì o õ p q

R S Ø T U V X U Z Û Á '

r s ø t u v x y z û á apostrophe

Decree of May 5, 1939. As used up to the changeover to the modified Cyrillic Alphabet.

24

All letters, except lower case 'v' (replaced by 'b'), are the same as those used in the chapter on vowel and consonant phonemes. The letters 'e', 'o' represent both the native Tatar phonemes e, o and the phonemes e, o in loanwords from or via Russian. The letter 'í' expresses the native Tatar phoneme í, the Russian phoneme í (y) being rendered by 'ù'. The letter 'v' represents the native Tatar phoneme w, as well as the labiodental fricative v in loanwords from or via Russian. As already mentioned, the orthography is nearly phonetic and rather simple. The vowels e, í are always written, even when they are strongly reduced. For example: qízíl 'red', tíníc 'quiet', seberke 'broom', jegerme 'twenty', qísqa 'short', bely 'to know'. But they are not written in such cases as discussed in the chapters 'Unstable Vowels' and 'Consonant Variations in Stems'. Furthermore, e and í are not written in a few other cases. These will be dealt with in the appropriate chapters. The letters 'o', 'õ' are written only in the first syllable of simple Tatar words and in the first syllable of the second component of compounds. The phonemes o, õ in non-first syllables are represented by the letters 'í', 'e'. In recent loanwords from or via Russian the letter 'o' may, of course, appear also in non-first syllables. Examples: borínôí 'old', 'ancient', tormíø 'life', tõzeleø 'construction', jõzemcelek 'winegrowing', ozínborín 'mosquito' (ozín 'long', borín 'nose'), terekõmeø 'quicksilver' (tere 'living', kõmeø 'silver'), doktor 'doctor', telefon 'telephone', Jevropa 'Europe'. Note: The above spelling rules apply also to the present Tatar alphabet and orthography.

'ù' after c, ç, ø, z, q, ô, x is written 'i'. For example: ul çia 'he gathers', ul aøi 'he eats', ul uqi 'he reads', tabiôi 'natural', tarixi 'historical', zialí 'intellectual', zian 'damage'. Note: With the introduction of the modified Cyrillic alphabet for Tatar, this rule was changed and 'ù' (yj) is now written in all instances, including the above. The new rule has been followed here for the Jaìalif only in the formation of the present tense of verbal stems ending in a- or á- preceded by one of the above consonants. For example: aøa! 'eat!', ul aøù 'he eats', uqá! 'read!', ul uqù 'he reads'.

The apostrophe is used: a) To render the hamzat al- qat in Arabic words: mðs'ðlð 'matter', tð'sir 'influence', mõ'min 'believer'; b) To indicate the palatalization of the preceding consonant in words of Russian origin or in words from other European languages introduced into Tatar through Russian. In this function, the apostrophe is then the equivalent of the Russian soft sign 'á': Pol'øa 'Poland', Arxangel'ski 'Arkhangel'sk', Kreml' 'Kremlin', korol' 'king', fevral' 'February'. Note: During the period of the latinized alphabet the apostrophe served in most cases to indicate the palatalization of the sound l (see the above examples), but its use was not consistent. For example, while it was used in the word 'fevral', which has a back vowel in its last syllable, it was not used with words like ijyl 'July', and predsedatel 'chairman', which have front vowels. Furthermore, it was not used with final 'r' and its use was inconsistent with other consonants. For example: ôinvar 'January', sintðbr 'September', oktðbr 'October'; vlast' 'power', 'authority', 'rule', but: krepost' 'fortress', 'stronghold'.

25

The Modified Cyrillic Alphabet and Orthography [90] The Modified Cyrillic Alphabet comprises the following 38 letters: Mod.Cyrillic

Lat. Equivalent

Mod. Cyrillic

Lat. Equivalent

A B V G D E À Z I J K L M N O P R S T

a b, p (w) v, f g, ô d e, je, í, jí, jo û z i j k, q l m n o, õ p r s t

U F X C H W Ì

u, v (w) f x ts, s c ø øc ' (apostrophe) í, i, e ', - (apostrophe or not indicated) e, ' (apostrophe) ju, jy, u, y ja, jð, a, ð ð õ y, v (w) ç ì h

a b v g d e à z i j k l m n o p r s t

Y Ï Î Q Ä Ã Å Æ È Ç

u f x c h w ì â y á ï î q ä ã å æ è ç

The letters of the Modified Cyrillic Alphabet have the following phonetic values: [91] The letter «a» renders the phoneme a; it corresponds to 'a' of the latinized alphabet (but see 94). [92] The letter «b» corresponds to 'b', but in final position of words of Russian or other European origin it is pronounced 'p' and therefore requires suffixes with an initial voiceless consonant. For example: klubta 'in the club'. [93] The letter «v» renders the Tatar phoneme 'w', as well as the labiodental fricative 'v' in loanwords adopted from or via Russian. When pronounced 'f' in final position of loanwords, it requires suffixes with an initial voiceless consonant. For example: Danilovtan /Daniloftan/ 'from Danilov', kooperativka /kooperatifqa/ 'to the cooperative', Ibraçimov ta /Ibrahimof ta/ 'Ibrahimov too'. [94] The letters «g» and «k»: 'g' represents both 'g' and 'ô', «k» represents both 'k' and 'q'. The respective functions of each of these symbols in a given word is indicated by the following orthographical and pronunciation rules: a) In words in which they are preceded and/or followed by back vowels, «g», «k» render 'ô', 'q': tugyz /tuôíz/ 'nine', doga /doôa/ 'prayer', gafu /ôafu 'pardon', gomumän /ôomumðn/ 'generally', gyrlau /ôírlaw/ 'to snore', gyjbadät /ôibadðt/ 'prayer', 'worship', gyjwyk /ôiøíq/ 'love', kyjbat /qibat/ 'expensive', kyjnau /qinaw/ 'to beat', akha /aqca/ 'money',

26

ahyk /acíq/ 'open', 'clear', kar /qar/ 'snow', kom /qom/ 'sand', kul /qul/ 'hand', kyw /qíø/ 'winter'. In loanwords from or via Russian «g», «k» correspond to g, k: gaz /gas/ 'gas', gazeta /gazeta/ 'newspaper', Gollandiq /Gollandið/ 'Holland', katalog /katalog/ 'catalogue', kurort /kurort/ 'seaside resort', fabrika /fabrika/ 'factory'. b) When preceeded and/or followed by front vowels, «g», «k» basically render 'g', 'k'. However, in certain words (mostly in words adopted from Arabic) they may also represent 'ô', 'q' (see next paragraph): ägär /ðgðr/ 'if', nigez /nigez/ 'base', 'foundation', sigez /sigez/ 'eight', tãgäl /tõgðl/ 'even', 'equal', 'exact', 'precise', gärhä /gðrcð/ 'although', gãreldäå /gõreldðw/ 'to make noise', gåzäl /gyzðl/ 'beautiful', 'nice', gizå /gizy/ 'to travel', iwek /iøek/ 'door', äkiqt /ðkiðt/ 'story', ike /ike/, 'two', kiräk /kirðk/ 'necessary', käbestä /kðbestð/ 'cabbage', kewe /keøe/ 'man', kãn /kõn/ 'day', kãjmä /kõjmð/ 'boat', 'ship'. c) The uvular articulation of «g», «k» /ô, q/ in words in which they are followed by front vowels (ôð, ôe, ôi, qð, qi) is indicated in the following way: 1. In an open first syllable followed by another syllable comprising a front vowel, 'ôð', 'qð' are rendered by «ga», «ka»; «a» is then pronounced 'ð'. It is written «a» only to indicate that «g», «k» represent the uvular sounds ô, q: garäp /ôðrðp/ 'Arab', 'Arabic', gaæäp /ôðçðp/ 'amazing', 'astonishing', galämät /ôðlðmðt/ 'sign', kadär /qðdðr/ 'till', 'until', kaläm /qðlðm/ 'pen', kaderle /qðderle/ 'dear'. Note 1: The pronunciation of the vowel «a» in the syllables «ga», «ka» does not always depend on the following syllable. In some words its exact pronunciation (ôa, qa, or ôð, qð) can be determined only when one knows the word. For example: gaqtá /ôajðt or ôðjðt/ 'very', gawyjk /qaøiq/ 'amorous', gadel /ôðdel/ 'just', 'honest', gaskär /ôðskðr/ 'soldier', kagyjdä /qaôidð/ 'rule', kardäw /qðrdðø/ 'relative/brother', kabilä /qðbilð/ 'tribe'. Note 2: Determining the pronunciation of Cyrillic 'a' in the open syllables «ga» and «ka» is especially difficult in Tatar proper nouns (names of persons, companies, institutions, geographical names etc.) when the following syllable contains an 'i' /i/. Although the phoneme i is classified as a front vowel phoneme, Tatar proper nouns – as well as common nouns – with the pattern a – i may be front or back vowel words. For example: The vowel «a» is pronounced 'a' as in 'call' or 'far' in such proper names as Garif /Ôarif/, Gafuri /Ôafuri/, Gazi /Ôazi/, Gabdulla /Ôabdulla/, Galiq /Ôalið/, but it is pronounced 'a' as in 'bag', 'gag' in the names Gali /Ôðli/, Galim /Ôðlim/, Galiäsgar /Ôðliðsôðr/, Gafif /Ôðfif/ , Gabderaxman /Ôðbderaxman/, Gabdelxämit /Ôðbdelxðmit/. (See: Ôabdulla Tuqai, Sajlanma Ðsðrlðr, Qazan, 1938 – in Jaìalif – pp. 342, 367, 380, 396, 406, 408, 454, 573), Rabiga /Rabiôð/. Names with the open syllable «ka» /qa, qð/ are: Kadyjr /Qadir/, Kaîm /Qajum/, Kavi /Qawi/, Kaderbanu /Qðderbanu/, Kamär /Qðmðr/. Note also that Cyrillic «a» is always pronounced 'a' as in 'call', 'far' when preceding 'k' corresponds to «k» as in 'king'. For example: Kamal /Kamal/, Kamil /Kamil/, Kawifä /Kaøifð/. (See: Ô. Tuqai, pp. 356, 395, 570).

2. In an open final syllable the pronunciation of «ga», «ka» can be determined only when one knows the word: vakyjga /waqiôð/ 'event', faæiga /façiôð/ 'tragedy', mäæmuga /mðçmyôð, also: mðçmuôa/ 'magazine', 'journal', sädaka /sðdaqa/ 'charity', 'alms', kyjtga /qitôa/ 'continent'. 3. In a closed syllable 'ôð', 'qð' are likewise written «ga», «ka», but the pronunciation of «a» as 'ð' is indicated by the soft sign «á» joined to the final consonant of the closed syllable. For example, in the word kanägatáländer /qðnðôðtlðnder/ 'satisfy', the pronunciation of «k» as 'q' is indicated by «a»; the front vowel pronunciation (ð) of «a» is in turn indicated by the front vowel syllable following «a»; the pronunciation of «g» as 'ô' is indicated by «a», whose front vowel pronunciation (ð) is again indicated by the soft sign «í» at the end of the closed syllable. Other examples: sägatá /sðôðt/ 'hour', 'clock', sägatálär /sðôðtlðr/ 'hours', 'clocks', sängatá /sðnôðt/ 'art', tabigatá /tabiôðt/ 'nature', xakyjkatá /xðqiqðt/ 'truth', kägazá /kðôðz/ 'paper', mäkalá /mðqðl/ 'proverb', mãstäkyjlá /mõstðqil/ 'independent'. 27

4. 'ôe' in a closed syllable is rendered by «gy» and the soft sign «á» joined to the final consonant of the syllable: wigyrá /øiôer/ 'poem', wigyrálär /øiôerlðr/ 'poems', wãgylá /øõôel/ 'occupation'. 5. The syllables 'ôi', 'qi' are rendered by «g», «k» and the diphthong «yj» (gyj, kyj). In a closed syllable the soft sign «á» is joined to indicate the front vowel pronunciation (i) of «yj»: gyjlem /ôilem/ 'science', 'knowledge', gyjbrät /ôibrðt/ 'example', gyjbadät /ôibadðt/ 'prayer', 'divine service', iætimagyj /içtimaôi/ 'social', katgyj /qðtôi/ 'categorical', kyjmmät /qimmðt/ 'expensive', kyjbat /qibat/ 'expensive', kyjnau /qinaw/ 'to beat', îgyjsä /juôisð/ 'otherwise', tänkyjtá /tðnqit/ 'criticism', wagyjrá /øaôir/ 'poet', wagyjrálär /øaôirlðr/ 'poets'. d) To indicate the uvular pronunciation of «g», «k» when preceded by a front vowel, the hard sign «â» is joined to «g», «k». For example, in the word dikâkatá /diqqðt/ 'attention', the pronunciation of the first «k» as 'q' is indicated by the hard sign «â»; the pronunciation of the second «k» as q is designated by «a», whose pronunciation as 'ð' is in turn indicated by the soft sign «á» at the end of the syllable. Other examples: vägâdä /wðôdð/ 'promise', mägânä /mðônð/ 'meaning', 'sense', igâtibar /iôtibar/ 'attention', qgâni /jðôni/ 'that means', näkâ /nðq/ 'directly', exactly', 'right', täkâdim /tðqdim/ 'proposal'. e) In final position of words from or through Russian the letter «g» is pronounced 'k' and therefore requires suffixes with an initial voiceless consonant. For example: Peterburgta 'in Petersburg'. [95] The letter «d» represents the phoneme d. When pronounced 't' in final position of loanwords from or via Russian, it requires suffixes with initial voiceless consonant. For example: Novgorodta /Novgorodta/ 'in Novgorod'. [96] The letter «e» renders the following sounds: a) In medial or final position in front vowel syllables «e» represents 'e': bel /bel/ 'know', ker /ker/ 'enter', kewe /keøe/ 'man', seberke /seberke/ 'broom', kebek /kebek/ 'like', 'as', ike /ike/ 'two', æide /çide/ 'seven'. b) In loanwords from or via Russian the trend in the literary language is towards pronouncing 'e' as described above – centner /tsentner/ '(metric) centner', tezis /tezis/ 'thesis', otelá /otel/ 'hotel', telefon /telefón/ 'telephone', respublika /respublika/ 'republic' – or as an open 'e' with palatalization of the immediately preceding consonant: metr /metr/ 'meter', lektor /lektor/ 'lecturer', bilet /bilet/ 'ticket'. c) In front vowel words, in word-initial or syllable-initial position, «e» renders the rising diphthong 'je': egerme /jegerme/ 'twenty', eget /jeget/ 'young man', bãek /bõjek/ 'great', säer /sðjer/ 'strange', sãekle /sõjekle/ 'dear', 'beloved', tãen /tõjen/ 'knot'. Note: In native Tatar words, in syllable-initial position and immediately preceded by «i» /i/, «e» is pronounced with a slight glide, a very slight 'j', i.e. 'ie' is pronounced iŠje (approximately as in English 'dizzying', 'pitying'. For example: kiem /kiŠjem/ 'clothes', kiek /kiŠjek/ 'wild', bietå /biŠjety/ 'to cause to dance', tien /tiŠjen/ 'squirrel', 'kopeck', tiew /tiŠjeø/ 'must', biek /biŠjek/ 'high'.

d) In loanwords from or via Russian, the trend is towards pronouncing «e» /je/ as in Russian, i.e. approximately as in English 'yet': Evropa /Jevropa/ 'Europe', poezd /pojezd/ 'train'. e) In back vowel words, in word-initial or syllable-initial position, «e» renders jí: el /jíl/ 'year', elga /jílôa/ 'river', ertkyh /jírtqíc/ 'predator', oewma /ojíøma/ 'organization', kue /qují/ 'dense', 'thick', syer /sùír/ 'cow'. f) In initial position of Tatar suffixes, «e» renders 'í' when the suffix is joined to back vowel loanwords adopted from or via Russian and ending in a consonant other than «l» /l/ plus

28

the soft sign «á». The latter is then dropped. For example: sekretará /sekretar'/ 'secretary', sekretare /sekretarí/ 'his secretary', vlastá /vlast'/ 'power', 'authority', vlaste /vlastí/ 'its power, authority'. Further suffixes are joined in accordance with the vowel harmony category of the loanword: sekretarennan /sekretarínnan/ 'from his secretary', vlastenda / vlastínda/ 'in its power, authority'. g) In words borrowed from Russian «e» (ë) renders 'jo': samolet /samoljot/ 'airplane', pulemet /pulemjot/ 'machine-gun', Petr /Pjotr/ 'Peter'. [97] The letters «æ», «z», «i» render the phonemes û, z and i, respectively. [98] The letter «j» represents the word-initial phoneme j when succeeded by o or õ (for the syllables ja, jð, ju, jy, see 108, 109): jogynty /joôántá/ 'influence', jozak /jozaq/ 'lock', jomwak /jomøaq/ 'soft', jãz /jõz/ 'face', jãzem /jõzem/ 'grape', jãrå /jõry/ 'to walk'. When preceded by vowels it forms the falling (partial) diphthongs «aj» /aj/, «äj» /ðj/, «oj» /oj/, «ãj» /õj/, «uj» /uj/, «yj» /ù/: saraj /saraj/ 'palace', æäj /çðj/ 'summer', kojma /qojma/ 'fence', ãj /õj/ 'house', uj /uj/ 'thought' (noun), tyjnak /tùnaq/ 'modest'. When suffixes with initial «e», «y» /e, í/ are added, «j» is dropped and replaced by «e»: saraem /sarajím/ 'my palace, shed', æäe /çðje/ 'its summer', ãegez /õjegez/ 'your (pl.) house', koela /qojíla/ 'is poured', uebyz /ujíbíz/ 'our thought', tämäke tartu tyela /tðmðke tartu tùíla/ 'smoking prohibited' (tyj /tù/ 'prohibit'). [99] The letters «l», «m», «n» are identical with 'l', 'm', 'n'. [100] The letter «o» is identical with 'o' and renders both the Tatar o and the broad «o» in loanwords adopted from or via Russian. In front vowel words «o» is written instead of «õ» to indicate the uvular articulation of preceding «g» /ô/: gomer /ôõmer/ 'life', goref /ôõref/ 'custom', Gomär /Ôõmðr/ 'masculine name'. [101] The letters «p», «r», «s», «t» are identical with 'p', 'r', 's', 't'. [102] The letter «y» has the following functions: a) When preceded or followed by a consonant «y» corresponds to 'u': sukmak /suqmaq/ 'path', Hulpan /Culpan/ 'Venus', su /su/ 'water', uram /uram/ 'street', urman /urman/ 'forest'. b) With the vowel «a», «y» forms the labial (partial) diphthong «ay» /aw/: karau /qaraw/ 'to look', ujlau /ujlaw/ 'to think', tau /taw/ 'mountain'. c) In intervocalic position «y» is changed into «v» (Tatar 'w') karavy /qarawí/ 'his looking', tavy /tawí/ 'its mountain', çava /hawa/ 'weather', 'air', avyl /awíl/ 'village'. Exceptions are the following monosyllabic verbs (verbal nouns) in which final «y» is preceded by «y»: buu /buu/ 'to dam up', 'the damming up'; 'to choke/strangle', 'the choking/strangling', kuu /quu/ 'to chase', 'the chasing', tuu /tuu/ 'to be born', 'the being born', 'delivery', 'birth', uu /uu/ 'to rub', 'the rubbing', wuu /øuu/ 'to glide/slide', 'the gliding/sliding', îu /juu/ 'to wash'. 'the washing'. In these verbs (verbal nouns) final 'y' is retained in intervocalic position, but pronounced 'v' (Tatar 'w') buuy /buuí/ 'his (her, its) damming up'; 'his (her, its) choking/strangling', kuuym /quuám/ 'my chasing', tuuy /tuuá/ 'his (her, its) being born', 'his (her, its) birth', etc. Note: buu /buu/, kuu /quu/, tuu /tuu/, etc. are articulated with a very slight 'w' (Tatar 'w') between the two vowels: buwu, quwu, tuwu, etc.

29

d) In front vowel words «y» is written instead of 'å' to indicate the uvular articulation of «g», «k» /ô, q/: mälguná /mðlôyn/ 'cursed', mägâkulá /mðôqyl/ 'acceptable', 'suitable'. [103] The letters «f», «x», «c», «h», «w», «ì» are identical with 'f', 'x', 'ts(s)', 'c', 'ø', 'øc'. [104] The letter «â» (hard sign) has the following functions: a) It indicates the uvular articulation of «g», «k» /ô, q/ in front vowel words: täkâdir /tðqdir/ 'fate', dikâkatá /diqqðt/ 'attention', tägâbir /tðôbir/ 'expression', 'interpretation', mägâlåm /mðôlym\ 'known', näkâ /nðq/ 'exactly', baligâ /baliô/ 'of (full) age', wigâriqt /øiôriðt/ 'poetry'. b) In back vowel words of Arabic origin it indicates the hamzat al-qat before a syllable succeeding a closed syllable: korâän /qor'ðn/ 'Koran', Qxâq /Jax'ja/ 'John'. c) It is written between two back vowel words forming a compound word: elâqzma /jjíljazma/ 'chronicle', 'annals', kulâqzma /quljazma/ 'manuscript', alâqpkyh /aljapqíc/ 'apron', unâellyk /unjíllíq/ 'decade (10 years)'. But: alwart /aløart/ 'precondition' (al 'front part', wart 'condition'). d) It is used in loanwords adopted from or via Russian: adâîtant /ad'jutant/ 'aide-de-camp', 'aide', obâektiv /ob'jektif/ 'objective'. [105] The letter «y» represents both the narrow 'á' in Tatar words and the broader «y» in loanwords from Russian (the latter is rendered by 'ù' in the latinized Tatar alphabet): kylu /qílu/ 'to make', kyr /qír/ 'field', batyr /batár/ 'hero', 'heroic', yrgak /írôaq/ 'anchor', ylysly agah /ílíslí aôac/ 'conifer', syr /sír/ 'carving', syr /sùr/ 'cheese', muzyka /muzùka/ 'music'. «y» is written instead of 'e' to indicate the uvular articulation of «g» /ô/: wigyrá /øiôer/ 'poem', wãgylá /øõôel/ 'occupation'. [106] The letter «í» (soft sign) has the following functions: a) In native Tatar words and in words of Arabic origin, it indicates the front pronunciation of the syllable preceding it. For example: mägâkulálek /mðôqyllek/ 'acceptability', «y» /u/ is written to indicate the uvular pronunciation of «k» /q/, «á» in turn indicates that «u» /u/ must be pronounced «å» /y/. Other examples: xakyjkatá /xðqiqðt/ 'truth', qmále /jðmle/ 'beautiful', 'cozy', wäfkatá /øðfqðt/ 'charity', 'sympathy', înásez /jynsez/ 'disgraceful', 'shocking', zägyjfá /zðôif/ 'weak', fäkyjrá /fðqir/ 'poor', fäkatá /fðqðt/ 'only'. «á» is dropped when suffixes with initial vowel are joined to the word: qme /jðme/ 'its beauty, coziness', wäfkate /øðfqðte/ 'his charity, sympathy', sägate /sðôðte/ 'his watch'. b) In front vowel words of Arabic origin it indicates the hamzat al-qat before a syllable succeeding a closed syllable. For example: æãráät /çõr'ðt/ 'courage', mäsáälä /mðs'ðlð/ 'matter', mäsáåliqt /mðs'yliðt/ 'responsability'. c) It serves as a divider of two syllables or components of compound words the first or both of which comprise front vowels: Märáqm /Mðrjðm/ 'Mary', dãnáq /dõnja/ 'world', däráq /dðrja/ 'river', jãzáqwär /jõzjðøðr/ 'aloe', 'agave', 'centuryplant', kãnáqk /kõnjaq/ 'south', tãnáqk /tõnjaq/ 'north', biwáellyk /biøjíllíq/ 'Five-Year plan', biwáqkly /biøjaqlí/ 'pentahedral', dårtáqkly /dyrtjaqlí/ 'tetrahedral'. But: kãnhygyw /kõncíôíø/ 'east', kãnbatyw /kõnbatíø/ 'west', ãhpohmak /õcpocmaq/ 'triangle', biwkãnlek /biøkõnlek/ 'period of five days', æideellyk mäktäp /çidejíllíq mðktðp/ 'seven-year school'. d) In a very few words it indicates that k is the voiceless tongue-back velar stop k: paká /pak/ 'pure', 'clean', pakálek /paklek/ 'cleanness', cleanliness', 'neatness'.

30

e) In loanwords from or via Russian, it indicates the palatalization of the preceding consonant: páesa /p'esa/ '(theatre) play', Poláwa /Pol'øa/ 'Poland', qkorá /jakor'/ 'anchor', rolá /rol'/ 'role'. [107] The letter «ï»: a) At the beginning of a native Tatar word it renders e: ïw /eø/ 'work', ït /et/ 'dog', ïlek /elek/ 'before'. b) In words of Arabic origin it indicates the hamzat al-qat after an open syllable: täïsir /tð'sir/ 'influence', täïminat /tð'minat/ 'security', mäïîs /mð'jys/ 'despondent', 'downcast'. c) In syllable-initial position in loanwords adopted from or via Russian it renders 'e', that means, it sounds approximately as English 'e' in 'bet' or as 'a' in 'care' (comp. 17): ïtnologiq /etnologið/ 'ethnology', ïpos /epos/ 'epos', aïroport /aeroport/ 'airport', ïlektr /elektr/ 'electricity', 'electrical'. [108] The letter «î» has the following functions: a) In back vowel words: In native Tatar words «î» renders 'ju' and 'u': îk /juq/ 'no', 'there is no', îgary /juôarí/ 'above', 'high', îmart /jumart/ 'generous', aî /aju/ 'bear', kartaî /qartaju/ 'to grow old', koî /qoju/ 'to pour', kuî /quju/ 'to put', tyîly /tùulá/ 'prohibited', kyî /qiu/ 'courageous', æiî /çiu/ 'to gather'. b) In front vowel words: In native Tatar words «î» renders 'jy' and 'y': înälew /jynðleø/ 'direction', îkä /jykð/ 'linden', îri /jyri/ 'purposely', 'on purpose', iîlá /ijyl'/ 'July', kiî /kiy/ 'to dress', biî /biy/ 'to dance', diî /diy/ 'to say', tiî /tiy/ 'to touch'. Note: «-iî» /-iy/ in the above verbs is pronounced with a slight glide, a slight 'j', between 'i' and 'y': kijy, 'to dress', dijy, 'to say'.

c) In loanwords from or via Russian «î» in syllable-initial position renders 'ju': îbilej /jubilej/ 'anniversary', 'jubilee', îrist /jurist/ 'lawyer', 'jurist'. In syllable-medial or syllable-final position «î» represents 'u' or 'y' and indicates the palatalization of the preceding consonant: bîro /bjuro/ 'office', revolîciq /revolytsið/ 'revolution'. d) When «î» succeeds a falling diphthong «j» is dropped: baj /baj/ 'rich', baî /baju/ 'to become rich', sãj /sõj/ 'love' (imp.), sãî /sõjy/ 'to love', kuj /quj/ 'put', kuî /quju/ 'to put'. [109] The letter «q» has the following functions: a) In back vowel words: In native Tatar words «q» renders 'ja' and 'a': qfrak /jafraq/ 'leaf', qxwy /jaxøí/ 'good', aqk /ajaq/ 'foot', kuqn /qujan/ 'hare', kaq /qaja/ 'where to', kuq /quja/ 'he puts', zyqly /zialí/ '(well) educated', æyq /çia/ 'he gathers', kyq /qia/ 'rock'. b) In front vowel words: In native Tatar words «q» renders 'jð' and 'ð': qwá /jðø/ 'young', qwel /jðøel/ 'green', qtim /jðtim/ 'orphan', tãq /tõjð/ 'load', 'burden' (imp.)' diq almyjm /dið almùm/ 'I cannot say', kiq /kið/ 'he dresses', tiq /tið/ 'he touches'. Note: «-iq» /-ið/ in the above verbs is pronounced 'iŠjð': diŠjð, kiŠjð, tiŠjð.

c) In words of Arabic origin: As the Arabic language has no vowel harmony, the correct articulation (front or back) of «q» in syllable-final or in closed final syllable position can often not be determined without a thorough knowlege of the word and its use with suffixes. For example: Front vowel words are ximaq /ximajð/ 'protection', 'support', kinaq /kinajð or kinðjð/ 'allegory', 'parable', dãq /dõjð/ 'camel', mädäniqt /mðdðniðt/ 'civilization', 'culture', xakimiqt /xakimiðt/ 'rule', 'authority', æãmçåriqt /çõmhyriðt/ 'republic', äåliq /ðwlið/ 'a holy man', 'clairvoyant'.

31

Back vowel words are: dãnáq /dõnja/ 'world', däráq /dðrja/ 'river', särmaq /sðrmaja/ (P.) 'initial (starting) capital', xyql /xial/ 'dream', 'fantasy', xäqt /xðjat/ 'life', näwriqt /nðøriat/ 'publishing house', ädäbiqt /ðdðbiat/1) 'literature'. The above applies also to Tatar proper names (names of persons) borrowed from Arabic. For example: The following feminine names belong to the front vowel group: Asiq /Asið/, Saniq /Sanið/, Naæiq /Naçið/, Xaæiq /Xaçið/, Maviq /Mawið/, Älfiq /Ðlfið/, Galiq /Ôalið/, Rãkyq /Rõqið/. Feminine names of the back vowel group are, for example: Sufiq /Sufia/, Xäqt /Xðjat/, Raziq /Razia/. Masculine names of the front vowel group are: Zäkäriq /Zðkðrið/, Çidiqt /Hidiðt/, Gyjniqt /Ôiniðt/. Masculine back vowel names are: Zyq /Zia/, Kyqm /Qiam/, Niqz Niaz/. d) In words introduced from or via Russian «q» in syllable-initial and in word final position renders 'ja', 'jð', 'ð': qkorá /jakor'/ 'anchor', Qponiq /Japonið/ 'Japan', qdrä /jðdrð/ 'shot' (for rifle), filologiq /filologið/ 'philology', Angliq /Anglið/ 'England', Italiq /Italið/ 'Italy', ïpopäq /epopejð/ 'epopee', galereq /galereja/ 'gallery'. Note: Most (but not all) loanwords from or via Russian ending in «-iq» are regarded as front vowel words.

In syllable-medial position «q» represents 'a' or 'ð' and indicates the palatalization of the preceding consonant: oktqbrá /oktðbr/ 'October', sentqbrá /sintðbr/ 'September'. Note: Oktðbr, sintðbr are the Tatar naturalized forms as used in both the vernacular and the literary language. The Russian pronunciation is 'aktyaber', 'sentyaber'.

e) When «q» succeeds a falling diphthong «j» is dropped. For example: kuj /quj/ 'put', kuq /quja/ 'he puts', sãj /sõj/ 'love', sãq /sõjð/ 'he loves'. [110] The letters «ä», «ã» are the same as 'ð', 'õ' of the latinized alphabet. [111] The letter «å» has the following functions: a) When preceded or followed by a consonant 'å' corresponds to 'y': kårå /kyry/ 'to see', kåz /kyz/ 'eye', dårt /dyrt/ 'four', såzlek /syzlek/ 'dictionary'. b) Combined with the vowel «ä» «å» forms the labial (partial) diphthong «äå» /ðw/: sãjläå /sõjlðw/ 'to speak', däålät /dðwlðt/ 'state', säådä /sðwdð/ 'trade', 'commerce'. c) In intervocalic position «å» /y/ is changed into «v» /Tatar w/: sãjläve /sõjlðwe/ 'his speaking', ïwlävebez /eølðwebez/ 'our working', belmävem /belmðwem/ 'my not knowing', äverelå /ðwerely/ 'to turn, change, into'. [112] The letters «æ», «è», «ç» correspond to 'ç', 'ì', 'h'.

Rules of Spelling Compound Words [113] 1. Compounds are to be written together: a) When they are composed without the use of the possessive suffix: kãnhygyw /kõncíôíø/ 'east' (kãn 'day', 'sun', hygyw 'rising', 'the rise'), elâqzma /jíljazma/ 'chronicle', 'annals' (el 'year', qzma 'record', 'inscription'), bilbau /bilbaw/ 'belt' (bil 'waist', bau 'band', 'string'), radioalgyh /radioalôíc/ 'radio set'. 1)

32

In the written language this word is treated as a back vowel word, but the letter 'q' is articulated ð (ðdðbiðt).

Note: Compound nouns in which the first component designates the material of which the second is made are written separately (see below, 2, b).

b) When one or both components have lost their original meaning. Such compounds may consist of adjective + noun, numeral + noun, verbal adverb + noun, noun + participle, etc.: akkow /aqqoø/ 'swan' (ak 'white', kow 'bird'), aksakal /aqsaqal/ 'elder' (sakal 'beard'), terekãmew /terekõmeø/ 'quicksilver' (tere 'lively', kãmew 'silver'), kyrygaqk /qíríôajaq/ 'centipede' (kyryk 'forty', aqk 'foot'), torataw /torataø/ 'idol' (tora 'standing', taw 'stone'), urynbasar /urínbasar/ 'deputy', 'assistant' (uryn 'place', 'position', basar 'occupying', 'stepping'), îlbasar /julbasar/ 'waylayer', 'bandit' (îl 'road', 'way'), bawkisär /baøkisðr/ 'robber', 'brigand' (baw 'head', kisär 'cutting'). c) When the first component is abbreviated, or when the second component is the postposition ara /ara/ 'between': pedinstitut /pedinstitut/ 'pedagogical institute' (pedagogik 'pedagogical'), xalykara /xalíqara/ 'international' (xalyk 'people', ara 'mutual'). 2. Compounds are to be written separately: a) When two or more nouns are composed by means of the possessive suffix (see 175, a, j): æir xuæasy /çir xuçasí/ 'landowner', 'farmer', (æir 'land', xuæa 'owner', 'master'), æimew bakhasy /çimeø íaqcasí/ 'orchard' (æimew 'fruit', bakha 'garden'), aw bålmäse /aø bylmðse/ 'dining room' (aw 'food', bålmä 'room'), su asty kãjmäse /su astí kõjmðse/ 'submarine' (su 'water', as 'lower part', kãjmä 'boat', 'ship'). b) When the first component designates the material of which the second is made: kãmew kawyk /kõmeø qaøíq/ 'silver spoon', (kãew 'silver', kawyk 'spoon'), altyn sägatá /altín sðôðt/ 'gold watch' (altyn 'gold', sägatá 'watch'), agah ãj /aqac õj/ 'wooden house' (agah 'wood', ãj 'house'). c) When a participle is united with a noun: qnar tau /janar taw/ 'vulcano' (qnar 'burning', tau 'mountain'), joklar vakyt /joqlar waqít/ 'bedtime' (joklar 'sleeping', vakyt 'time'). d) When a noun or a simple adjective is united with an adjective derived from a noun by means of the suffix +ly, +le: aryslan jãräkle /aráslan jõrðkle/ 'lion-hearted' (aryslan 'lion', jãräk 'heart'), kara kåzle /qara kyzle/ 'dark-eyed' (kara 'black', 'dark', kåz 'eye'), ak hähle /aq cðcle/ 'white-haired' (häh 'hair'), kyska vakytly /qísqa waqítlí/ 'shortterm' (kyska 'short'; vakyt 'time'). e) When the first component is the adjective qrym /jarím/ 'half': qrym utrau /jarím utraw/ 'peninsula' (utrau 'island'), qrym aj /jarím aj/ 'half-moon' (aj 'moon'), qrym war /jarím øar/ 'hemisphere' (war 'sphere'), qrym suzyk /jarím suzíq/ 'semivowel' (suzyk 'vowel'), qrym ahyk /jarím acíq/ 'half-open' (ahyk 'open'). Note: According to the latest orthographic rules, the compounds qnar tau, qrym utrau, qrym war, as well as iwek aldy /iøek aldá/ 'yard' (iwek 'door', aldy 'front part'), ãj aldy /õj aldá/ 'porch', are now written solid: qnartau, qrymutrau, qrymwar, iwegaldy, ãjaldy. Note the change of «k» to «g» before the vowel «a» of 'aldy' in iwegaldy.

3. Compounds are to be written with a hyphen: a) When they are composed of two nouns complementing each-other: ata-ana /ata-ana/ 'parents' (ata 'father', ana 'mother'), ata-baba /ata-baba/ 'forefathers' (baba 'grandfather'), jort-æir /jort-çir/ 'property' (jort 'house', æir 'land'), xatyn-kyz /xatín-qáz/ 'women', 'womenfolk' (xatyn 'woman', kyz 'girl'), aw-su /aø-su/ 'food' (aw 'food', su 'water'). b) When two independent nouns convey a combined meaning: tãnáqk-kãnhygyw /tõnjaqkõncíôíø/ 'northeast', kãnáqk-kãnbatyw /kõnjaq-kõnbatíø/ 'southwest', inàenermexanik /inûener-mexanik/ 'mechanical engineer', tarix-filologiq fakulátety /tarixfilologið fakultetí/ 'historical-philological faculty'. c) When they are composed of a noun and a word with no meaning of its own: savyt-saba /sawát-saba/ 'plates and dishes' (savyt 'vessel'), bala-haga /bala-caôa/ 'kiddies', 'little ones' (bala 'child'). 33

d) When they are intensive compounds (emphatic superlative of adjectives): kap-kara /qapqara/ 'completely black', zäp-zäègär /zðp-zðìgðr/ 'deep blue', tåm-tågäräk /tym-tygðrðk/ 'completely round', bup-buw /bup-buø/ 'absolutely empty', ãr-qèa /õr-jaìa/ 'brand new'. e) When they are adverbs formed by reduplication: vakyt-vakyt /waqít-waqít/ 'from time to time', tãrkem-tãrkem /tõrkem-tõrkem/ 'in groups', bara-bara /bara-bara/ 'in due course' (baru 'to go'), kãne-tãne /kõne-tõne/ 'day and night', tora-bara /tora-bara/ 'in due course' (toru 'to stand, dwell').

Suffixes Joined to Words in Quotation Marks [114] Suffixes joined to words in quotation marks are to be written together with the word, but they are placed outside the closing quotation mark. For example: «Kazan utlary»nda basylyp hykkan xikäq (''Qazan utlarí''nda basílíp cíqqan xikðjð/ 'the story which was published in ''Kazan Utlary'' (Kazan utlary Tatar literary monthly, basylyp hykkan 'was published', 'appeared', xikäq 'story'). Words enclosed in quotation marks always remain in their basic form. This means that the change of final «k» /k, q/ to «g» /g, ô/ and «p» /p/ to «b» /b/ before suffixes with initial vowel is not expressed in writing. The same applies to final diphthongs (au /aw/, äå /ðw/, aj /aj/, etc.). Likewise, final «á» is not dropped in writing when followed by a suffix with initial vowel. However, the pronunciation is subject to the natural flow of speech and its phonetic laws. For example: Xänif Xäjrullinnyè «Kartlyk... kemgä watlyk»ynda... In Khänif Kheyrullin's "Old Age... For Whom is it a Pleasure?" is pronounced in the same way as if written without quotation marks: Xänif Xäjrullinnyè Kartlyk... kemgä watlygynda /Xðnif Xðjrullinníì Qartlíq... kemgð øatlíôínda/. Äxsän Baqnnyè «Taw kitap»ynda (pronounced: ... Taw kitabynda /... Taø kitabínda/). In Äkhsän Bayan's "The Book of Stone". Ul ... T. Wevhenkonyè «Asrau»yn ... täræemä itä. (Pronounced: ... T. Wevhenkonyè Asravyn ... /... T. Øevcenkoníì Asrawín.../). 'He... translated (lit. translates) T. Shevchenko's "The Housemaid".' Wäåkät Galievneè «Kanatly malaj»ynda (malaenda /malajínda/). In Shäwkät Ghäliev's "The Winged Boy". Ämirxan Enikineè «Äjtelmägän vasyqtá»endäge Akâäbi... (... vasyqtendäge Akâäbi... / ... wasiðtendðge Aqðbi.../). Aqäbi of Ämirkhan Yeniki's "The Unspoken Testament"...

Suffixes Combined with Numbers or Following Symbols Indicating Percent, Degrees, etc. [115] Suffixes combined with numbers or following symbols indicating percent, degrees, etc., are to be written separately: 20 nhe /20 nce/ 'twentieth', 19 nhy /19 ncí/ 'nineteenth', temperatura 30o tan (30 gradustan, or däräæädän) îgary /temperatura 30o tan (30 gradustan/dðrðçðdðn) juôarí/; 'the temperature is above 30o, bäqlär 5-8% ka (5-8 procentka, or biwtän alyp sigez procentka kadär) artahak /bðjðlðr 5-8% qa (5-8 protsentqa, or biøtðn alíp sigez protsentqa qðdðr) artacaq/ 'prices will rise 5-8%'. Note: The suffix forming ordinals is not weritten after Roman numbers: XX jãz /XX jõz/ 'the twentieth century'.

34

Use of Capitals [116] The rules governing the use of capitals are rather complex. In general, a capital is used with all proper names, that is, names of individual persons, places, or things. Capitals are also used with adjectives derived from place names and used as part of a person's name. Contrary to English usage, many generic terms (geographical, political, etc.) forming an integral part of a specific proper name are not capitalized when following the latter. However, when preceding the actual proper name, they are written with a capital. A capital is used as an initial letter of: a) The first word of a sentence. b) The first word of every line of poetry. c) Proper names and words used as proper names (first names, patronymics, surnames, etc.): Sägyjt Sånhäläj /Sðôit Syncðlðj/ 'name of a Tatar poet', Gabdulla Tukaj /Ôabdulla Tuqaj/ 'name of a Tatar poet', Fatix Säjfi-Kazanly /Fatix Sðjfi-Qazanlí/ 'name of a Tatar writer and journalist' (Kazanly 'the one from Kazan'), Gaziz Idelle /Ôðziz Idelle/ 'name of a Tatar writer' (Idel 'Volga', Idelle 'the one from the Volga). d) Names of animals and objects when personified (as in poems and fairy tales): · Äjt äle, Kåbäläk, Sãjläwik bergäläp /Ðjt ðle, Kybðlðk, Sõjlðøik bergðlðp/ (Gabdulla Tukaj, Bala belän Kåbäläk.) 'What do you say, Butterfly. Let's have a talk together'. · Wul sägatá Aî Tãlkene æibärde: Ågez monda kilep æitsen, diep, tizdän /Øul sðôðt Aju Tõlkene çibðrde: Ygez monda kilep çitsen, diep, tizdðn./ (Mäæit Gafuri, Ågez belän Båre.) Then the Bear sent the Fox, saying: "Have the Bull come here quickly." (wul sägatá 'then', 'at that hour', 'at that time', aî 'bear', tãlke 'fox', æibärde 'he sent', diep 'saying', ågez 'bull', monda 'here', 'hither', kilep æitsen 'he shall come', 'have him come' (impr.), tizdän 'quickly', båre 'wolf', belän'with', 'and'). · Baryp kerde Urak timerhegä, Kergäh sälam birde kyhkyryp, ... Wunda Håkeh kårde bu Urakny, ... /Baríp kerde Uraq timercegð, Kergðc sðlam birde qícqíríp, ... Øunda Cykec kyrde bu Uraqní, .../ (Mäæit Gafuri, Urak belän Håkeh.) A Sickle came to a smith, And after entering greeted loudly, ... Then the Hammer saw this Sickle, ... (baryp 'going', kerde 'he entered', urak 'sickle', timerhegä 'to the smith', kergäh 'after entering', sälam birde 'he greeted', kyhkyryp 'crying (out)', wunda 'then', håkeh 'hammer', kårde 'he saw', bu 'this', urakny 'sickle' /acc./). e) Official names of national or international governmental bodies or documents: Tatarstan Mägarif ministrlygy /Tatarstan Mðôarif ministrlege/ 'Ministry of Education of Tatarstan', Avyl xuæalygy ministrlygy /Awál xuçalíôí ministrlege/ 'Ministry of Agriculture', AKW Kongressynyè senaty /AQØ Kongressíníì senatí/ 'The Senate of the Congress of the USA', AKW Konstituciqse /AQØ Konstitutsiðse/ 'The Constitution of the United States'. f) Geographical names and names of definite geographical divisions: Tatarstan /Tatarstan/ 'Tatarstan', Tãrkiq /Tõrkið/ 'Turkey', Idel /Idel/ 'Volga', Kazan /Qazan/ 'Kazan', Amerika Kuwma Wtatlary /Amerika Quøma Øtatlarí/ 'The United States of America', Altyn Qr /Altín Jar/ 'Gold Coast', Qèa Zelandiq /Jaìa Zelandið/ 'New Zealand'. Åzäk Evropa /Yzðk Jevropa/ 'Central Europe', Åzäk Aziq /Yzðk Azið/, 'Central Asia', Kãnáqk Amerika /Kõnjaq Amerika/ 'South America', Qkyn Kãnhygyw /Jaqán Kõncíôíø/ 'Near East', Erak Kãnhygyw /Járaq Kõncíôíø/ 'Far East', Baltik diègeze /Baltùq diìgeze/ 'Baltic Sea', Kara diègez /Qara diìgez/ 'Black Sea', Tyn okean /Tín okean/ 'Pacific Ocean', Çind okeany /Hind okeaní/ 'Indian Ocean', Persiq kultygy /Persið qultíôí/ 'Persian Gulf', Såäew kanaly /Syðjeø kanalí/ 'Suez Canal', Balkan taulary /Balkan tawlarí/ 'Balkan Mountains', Pasxa utravy /Pasxa utrawí/ 'Easter Island', Kazan xanlygy

35

/Qazan xanlíôí/ 'The Khanate of Kazan', Tukaj uramy /Tuqaj uramí/ 'Tuqai Street', Irek mäjdany /Irek mðjdaní/ 'Liberty Square'. But: Mäskäådä Kyzyl Mäjdan /Mðskðwdð Qízíl Mðjdan/ 'Red Square in Moscow'. See also the following examples: · Bosfor bugazynyè bue 15 milá tiräse /Bosfor buôazíníì bují 15 (unbiø) mil tirðse/ (Rafaïlá Mostafin «Oæmax»ka säqxät.) 'The Bosporus is about 15 miles long' (bugaz 'strait', buj 'length', bue 'its length', tiräse 'about', 'approximately'). · Märmär diègeze bujlap barabyz /Mðrmðr diìgeze bujlap barabíz/. (ibid.) We are traveling through the Sea of Marmara. (bujlap 'along', barabyz 'we are going, traveling'). · Izge Ãmet borynyna kadär ike kãnlek îl kaldy /Izge Õmet borínína qðdðr ike kõnlek jul qaldí/. (ibid.) A two day's voyage remained until the Cape of Good Hope. (izge 'holy', ãmet 'hope', boryn 'cape', Izge Ãmet boryny 'Cape of Good Hope', +na 'dative suffix', kadär 'until', 'till', kãnlek 'daily', îl 'way', 'road', here: 'voyage', kaldy 'it remained'). · ... ul (Singapur) Tyn okeannan Çind okeanyna hyga torgan berdänber uèajly urynga urnawkan /... ul (Singapur) Tín okeannan Hind okeanína cíôa torôan berdðnber uìajlí urínôa urnaøqan/. (ibid.) ... it (Singapore) lies at the only convenient spot leading from the Pacific into the Indian Ocean. (hyga torgan 'leading', 'going, getting out', berdänber 'sole', 'only', uèajly 'convenient', uryn 'place', 'spot', urnawkan 'situated'). g) Names of congresses, councils; of governmental departments; of organizations, institutions; of political parties: Berläwkän Millätlär Oewmasy /Berlðøkðn Millðtlðr Ojíømasí/ The United Nations, G. Kamal isemendäge Tatar däålät akademiq teatry /Ô. Kamal isemendðge Tatar dðwlðt akademið teatrá/ The Gh. Kamal Tatar State Academy Theatre, Tatarstan Qzuhylar berlege /Tatarstan Jazucílar berlege/ the Tatarstan Writers' Union, Kazan däålät universitety /Qazan dðwlðt universitetí/ the State University of Kazan, Olimpiq uennary /Olimpið ujínnarí/ the Olympic Games. h) Names of holidays: The first component of some secular holidays is written with a capital, that of others with a small initial letter: Qèa el /Jaìa jíl/ New Year, Berenhe maj /Berence maj/ the First of May (European Labor Day). But: uèyw bäjräme /uìíø bðjrðme/ Thanksgiving, saban tue /saban tují/ Plough (or: Spring) Festival. i) Titles of books, periodicals, newspapers, essays, poems: Kazan utlary /Qazan utlarí/ The Lights of Kazan (name of Tatar literary monthly), Tirän tamyrlar /Tirðn tamírlar/ Deep Roots (title of a novel by Ghalimjan Ibrahim). · Alma-Atada F. Xãsnineè «Æäqåle kewe sukmagy» romany kazak telenä täræemä itelde (Ädäbiqt baskyhlary, 335.) /Alma-Atada F. Xõsnineì «Çðjðwle keøe suqmaôí» romaní qazaq telenð tðrçemð itelde/. In Alma Ata Fatikh Khösni's novel The Footpath has been translated into Qazaq. · Orenburda «Qèa vakyt» iseme belän atnalyk iætimagyj gazeta hyga bawlady (Kazan utlary, 1, 1992, b. 189.) /Orenburda «Jaìa waqít» iseme belðn atnalíq içtimaôi gazeta cíôa baøladí/ In Orenburg a weekly social newspaper called "The New Time" has begun to appear. · Garäfi Xäsänov. Elnyè dårt fasyly. «Mäktäp kitapxanäse» seriqsennän. (Kazan utlary, 1, 1992, b. 190.) /Ôðrðfi Xðsðnov, Jílníì dyrt fasílí, «Mðktðp kitapxanðse» seriðsennðn/ 'Ghäräfi Khäsänov. The Four Seasons of the Year. (From the series "School Library".)

36

j) Names of planets, stars and groups of stars: Oly Æidegän /Olí Çidegðn/ the Great Bear, Kehe Æidegän /Kece Çidegðn/ the Little/Lesser Bear, Hulpan /Culpan/ Venus, Zãçrä joldyzy /Zõhrð joldízí/ Venus, morning star. But: koqw /qojaø/ 'sun', æir /çir/ 'earth', aj /aj/ 'moon' are spelled with a capital only when specifically referred to as celestial bodies. k) The points of the compass used to designate divisions of the world: Kãnhygyw xalyklary /Kõncíôíø xalíqlarí/ peoples of the East. l) Relational adjectives formed from proper names by means of the suffix +dagy, +däge, +tagy, +täge /+daôí, +dðge, +taôí, +tðge/: Kazandagy /Qazandaôí/ 'in/of, belonging to, Kazan', Tatarstandagy /Tatarstandaôí/ 'in/of, belonging to, Tatarstan', Xafazamdagy /Xafazamdaôí/ 'in/of, belonging to, my Khafaza' (Xafaza 'feminine name'). m) Names of persons with the suffix +ha, +hä /+ca, +cð/: Mostafaha /Mostafaca/ 'like/ according to Mostafa', Xãsniqhä /Xõsniðcð/ 'like/according to Khösniä'. n) Abbreviations of proper names: AKW /AQØ/ (Amerika Kuwma Wtatlary /Amerika Quøma Øtatlará/) USA, BMO /BMO/ (Berläwkän Millätlär Oewmasy /Berlðøkðn Millðtlðr Ojíømasí/) UNO, BDB /BDB/ (Bäjsez Däålätlär Berdämlege /Bðjsez Dðwlðtlðr Berdðmlege/) C.I.S. (Commonwealth of Independent States).

Use of Small Initial Letters [117] The following are written with a small initial letter: a) Names of peoples and languages: tatarlar /tatarlar/ Tatars, tãreklär /tõreklðr/ Turks, amerikaly /amerikalí/ American, tatar tele /tatar tele/ the Tatar language, ingliz tele /ingliz tele/ the English language. b) Nouns that refer to the Deity, names for the Koran, the Bible or its parts, names of other sacred books, names of religions: alla /alla/ God, xodaj /xodaj/ Lord, korâän /qor'ðn/ the Koran, täårat /tðwrat/ the Bible, the Old Testament, inæil /inçil/ the New Testament, the Gospel, islam /islam/ Islam, mãselman /mõselman/ a Moslem, mãselman dine /mõselman dine/ the Moslem religion, xristian /xristian/ a Christian, xristianlyk /xristianláq/ Christianity. Also see the following examples: · inæil: ... xristian dine ãjrätmäläreneè nigezen täwkil itkän dini kitap, bibliqneè ber ãlewe; evangelie /inçil: ... xristian dine õjrðtmðlðreneì nigezen tðøkil itkðn dini kitap, bibliðneì ber õleøe; jevangelie/ (Tatar teleneè aèlatmaly såzlege, Kazan, 1977) New Testament: ... a religious book forming the basis of the teachings of the Christian religion, a part of the Bible; The Gospel (din 'religion', ãjrätmälär 'teachings', nigez 'basis', täwkil itkän 'forming', dini 'religious', ãlew 'part'). · Korâän, inæil åbep [ant] birgän soldatlar [tezelgän] /Qor'ðn, inçil ybep [ant] birgðn soldatlar [tezelgðn]/ (ibid.) The soldiers who had taken the oath, kissing the Koran, the Bible (lit. the New Testament), formed up in ranks. (åbep 'kissing', ant birå 'to take the oath', tezelå 'to form up in ranks'. Note: When specifically referring to any of the sacred books, as for example, in books or texts portraying religion or dealing with matters of religion, the names for such books are written with a capital.

Korâän belän Täårat äjtkänhä... /Qor'ðn belðn Tðwrat ðjtkðncð.../ (Garif Gobäj /Ôarif Ôõbðj/, Korâän serläre.) As the Koran and the Old Testament say... · ... kåp kenä izge kitaplarga, wul æãmlädän Inæilgä taqnyp ... /... kyp kenð izge kitaplarôa, øul çõmlðdðn Inçilgð tajaníp .../ (ibid.) ... based on many holy books, ·

37

including the New Testament... (kåp kãnä 'many', 'quite a lot', izge 'holy', wul æãmlädän 'including', taqnu 'to lean', 'to be based'). · Mãxämmät isä Korâänne alla isemennän qza... /Mõxðmmðt isð Qor'ðnne alla isemennðn jaza.../ (ibid.) As for Mohammed, he wrote (writes) the Koran in the name of God... (isä 'as for', isemennän 'in the name of', qza 'he writes'). c) Religious holy days: ramazan gaete /ramazan ôðjete/ 'holy day after the fast', korban gaete /qorban ôðjete/ 'Feast of Sacrifice', rawtua /raøtua/ Christmas, pasxa /pasxa/ Easter. d) The months of the year and the days of the week: mart /mart/ March, maj /maj/ May, qkwämbe /jðkøðmbe/ Sunday, wimbä /øimbð/ Saturday. e) Names of geological eras, periods, epochs: ...paleolit horyndagy taw korallar... /paleolit coríndaôí taø qorallar.../ (Tatarstan ASSR tarixy.) ...stone implements of the Paleolithic era... (taw dävere /taø dðwere/ Stone Age). Idel çäm Hulman bujlaryna kewe taw gasyrynyè iè äåvälge horynda, ... kilep hyga. Monda ul mezolit, neolit, bronza horlaryn çäm äåvälge timer gasyryn kiherä. /Idel hðm Culman bujlarína keøe taø ôasíríníì iì ðwðlge corínda, ... kilep cíôa. Monda ul mezolit, neolit, bronza corlarín hðm ðwðlge timer ôasírín kicerð/ (Aláfred Xasan Xalikov, Tatar xalkynyè kilep hygywy.) Man came (lit. comes) to the banks of the Volga and Kama in the earliest period of the Stone Age, ... Here he lived (lit. lives) through the Mesolithic, Neolithic (epochs), the Bronze Age and the early Iron Age. (Idel /Idel/ 'Volga', Hulman /Culman/ 'Kama', buj /buj/ 'length', 'along', kewe /keøe/ 'man', gasyr /ôasír/ 'century', iè äåvälge /iì ðwðlge/ 'the earliest', hor /cor/ 'period', 'epoch', kilep hygu /kilep cíôu/ 'to come (out) to', monda /monda/ 'here', ul /ul/ 'he' (she, it), timer /timer/ 'iron', kiherå /kicery/ 'to live through'). Also note: urta gasyrlar /urta ôasárlar/ Middle Ages.

f) Relational adjectives formed from geographical names by means of the suffixes +ly, +le /+lí, +le/ and +ha, +hä /+ca, +cð/: Kazan /Qazan/ Kazan, kazanly /qazanlí/ 'a native or resident of Kazan', Vawington /Vaøington/ Washington, vawingtonly /vaøingtonlí/ a Washingtonian, Evropa /Jevropa/ Europe, evropaly /jevropalí/ a European, evropaha æiçazlandyrylgan bålmä /jevropaca çihazlandírílôan bylmð/ 'a room furnished in European style'. g) Titles of rulers, official and government titles, academic, professional and religious titles, titles of honor, titles of nobility are to be written with a small initial letter, regardless of whether or not they are accompanied by the person's name, used in direct discourse, or referred to in a given text: · Säxibgäräj xan /Sðxibgðrðj xan/ Khan Säkhibgärey, prezident B. /prezident B./ President B., Angliq premáer-ministry S. /Anglið premjer-ministre S./ The English Prime Minister S., säådä ministry A. /sðwdð ministre A./ The Secretary of Commerce A., professor Taçirov /professor Tahirov/ Professor Tahirov, mãdir S. /mõdir S./ Principal S./ knqzá Vladimir /knðz Vladimir/ Prince Vladimir. · – Xuw, mulla Xäjretdin, räxim it! /– Xuø, mulla Xðjretdin, rðxim it!/ (Näkyj Isänbät, Çiærät) "Welcome, Mulla Kheyretdin, you are welcome!" · – Biw summy? Îk, xäzrät, min sädaka almyjm, ... /– Biø summí? Juq, xðzrðt, min sðdaqa almùm, .../ (ibid.) "Five roubles? No, Your Excellency, I do not take alms, ..." (biw 'five', sum 'rouble', +my interrogative particle, min 'I', sädaka 'alms', almyjm 'I do not take'). · – ... monnan hykkah, mãfti xäzrätkä dä baryrbyz, ... /... monnan cíqqac, mõfti xðzrðtkð dð barírbíz, .../ (ibid.) ''... after leaving here, we shall also go to His Excellency the Mufti, ...'' (monnan 'from here', hykkah 'after leaving', baryrbyz 'we shall go'. 38

Sadri äfände bik aèly eget /Sadri ðfðnde bik aìlí jeget, .../ (Wärif Kamal, Kozgynnar oqsynda.) Mister Sadri is a very bright young man, ... (bik 'very', aèly 'bright', 'conscientious). · – Sezne, professor, Pariàdan kilgän, dilär /– Sezne, professor, Pariûdan kilgðn dilðr/ (Ïduard Kasyjmov, Sorbonna professory.) "They say that you, Professor, have come from Paris", (sez 'you', kilgän 'have come', dilär 'they say'). ·

Note: If expressed in letters, the ordinal numbers after the names of kings, queens, etc. are capitalized. For example: Ekaterina Berenhe /Jekaterina Berence/ Cathrine I.

Division of Words [118] a) Words are divided between syllables (see 69, 1-6, 70). A hyphen is used at the end of the line which terminates with a syllable or a word the remainder of which is carried to the next line: kãh-le /kõc-le/ 'strong' (kãh 'strength', 'power'), dus-la-wu /dus-la-øu/ 'to become friends' (dus 'friend'), ty-nyh-syz-lan-dy-ru /tí-níc-síz-lan-dí-ru/ 'to perturb', ka-en /qa-jín/ 'birch', ku-elu or: kue-lu /qu-jí-lu/ 'to be put', sy-er /sí-jír/ 'cow', te-atr /te-atr/ 'theatre', ti-ew /ti-eø/ 'must', bi-ep /bi-ep/ 'dancing' (verbal adverb in -ep of biî /biy/ 'to dance'; see 1247-1262), bi-ik1) /bi-ik/ 'let us dance', ki-en-gäh /ki-en-gðc/ 'after he (she, it) got dressed (verbal adverb in -gäh of kienå /kieny/ 'to dress/get dressed' (see 1270), ku-yp /qu-íp/ 'chasing' (verbal adverb in -yp of kuu /quu/ 'to chase'), ki-lå-en /ki-ly-en/ 'his coming (accusative), bu-lu-yn /bu-lu-án/ 'his being' (accusative), ku-aklar /qu-aq-lar/ 'bushes', su-yk /su-íq/ 'cold'. b) A single letter may not be separated from the rest of the word: iæat /içat/ (not: i-æat) 'work', 'creation', ki-låe /ki-lye/ (not: ki-lå-e) 'his coming', kar-taî (not: kar-ta-î) 'to get old', ku-qdyr or: kuq-dyr 'he probably puts'. (But note that with the latinized alphabet it was possible to divide: qar-ta-ju, qu-ja-dír). c) «â», «á» in all their functions, and «ï» when indicating the hamzat-al-qat may not be separated from the syllable to which they belong: täkâ-dim /tðq-dim/ 'proposal', mägâlåm /mðô-lym/ 'known', Korâ-än /Qor'-ðn/ 'The Koran', kulâ-qz-ma /qul-jaz-ma/ 'manuscript', mäsá-älä /mes'-ðlð/ 'matter', 'subject', mägâ-kulá-lek /mðô-qyl-lek/ 'acceptability', Märá-qm /Mðr-jðm/ 'Mary', kãná-qk /kõn-jaq/ 'south', täï-sir /'tð'-sir/ 'influence', täïmin itå /tð'-min ity/ 'to provide/, supply'. d) Falling narrow partial diphthongs may be divided only if their second component – the semivowel «j» /j/ can merge and form a new syllable with the initial vowel of the following syllable. It can do so if the latter is «a», «ð», «y» or «e»: kuj /quj/ 'put' (imperative), ku-qlar or: kuq-lar /qu-ja-lar/ 'they put (present tense), sãj /sõj/ 'love' (imperative), sã-qbez or: sãq-bez /sõ-jð-bez/ 'we love', ku-îym or: kuî-ym /qu-ju-ám/ 'my putting', sã-îe /sõ-jye/ 'his (her, its) loving', tyj /tù/ 'prohibit' (imperative), ty-ela or: tye-la /tí-jí-la/ 'is prohibited', 'one prohibits', aby-eè /abí-jíì/ 'your older brother', sã-eneh or: sãe-neh /sõ-je-nec/ 'joy'. e) Falling narrow partial diphthongs may not be divided if 'j' cannot, or does not, form a new syllable. It cannot do so if the following syllable begins with a consonant: bäj-räm /bðj-rðm/ 'feast', 'festival', baj-rak /baj-raq/ 'flag', 'banner', koj-ryk /qoj-ríq/ 'tail', kujdyk /quj-díq/ 'we put' (past tense).

1)

«i-i» is pronounced together: biŠ-ik (not bi+ik); the second i is lengthened.

39

«J» does not form a new syllable if the following syllable begins with «i» or «yj», as in the first person singular and plural of the optative: sãj-im1) /sõ-jim/ 'let me love', sãjik1) /sõ-jik/ 'let us love', tãj-im1) /tõ-jim/ 'let me load', tãj-ik1) /tõ-jik/ 'let us load', but: tã-qå /tõ-jðw/ 'to load', kuj-yjk2) /qu-jùq/ 'let us put', kuj-yjm1) /qu-jùm/ 'let me put'. Note: In loanwords from Russian, syllables may be divided after or before «j». For example: raj-on, or: ra-jon 'district'.

f) Falling labial partial diphthongs may be divided if the following syllable begins with a vowel. The second component of the diphthong – «u» or «å» – is changed into «v» (Tatar »w»): ka-ra-vy /qa-ra-wí/ 'his looking', ba-vy /ba-wí/ 'his string/cord', (bau /baw/ 'string/ cord'), sãj-lä-ve /sõj-lð-we/ 'his speaking', bel-mä-vem /bel-mð-wem/ 'my not knowing'. g) A syllable may not be carried to the next line if this could cause ambiguity. For example: Bu · biw gram-my? /Bu – biø gram-mí?/ 'Is this five grams?', darunyè biw grammy /daruníì biø grammí/ 'five grams of the medicine'. In the first example the interrogative particle -my may be carried to the next line (words in which the final «m» is doubled lose an «m» before suffixes or particles with initial «m»). In the second example the syllable «my» /the second «m» of the stem plus the possessive suffix «y») may not be carried over, as it may be mistaken for the interrogative particle. h) Suffixes or conventional abbreviations of measure or weight may not be separated when joined to a number: 3 nhe (ãhenhe) '3rd', 100 km (jãz kilometr) '100 km', 2 kg. (ike kilogramm) '2 kg.'.

Some Remarks on Orthographical Changes and the Principle of Vowel Harmony2) [119] With the changeover from the Latin to the Cyrillic script for Tatar and, in connection herewith, the introduction of new orthographic rules (e.g., the rule that most words introduced from or via Russian, mainly through the literary language, as well as some earlier loanwords adopted through the spoken language, must be written in the same way as they are written in Russian), changes occurred also with respect to the application of the principle of vowel harmony in joining Tatar suffixes to words introduced more recently from Russian or, via Russian, from other European languages. As a result, many such words which previously used to take Tatar suffixes with front vowels now require them with back vowels. Suffixes with back vowels are now joined to:3) a) Most words introduced from or via Russian ending in a consonant, regardless of the vowels they contain: ministrlar /ministerlðr/ 'ministers', Leninnyè /Leninneì/ of Lenin, Berlinda /Berlindð/ in Berlin, nemeclar /nemeslðr/ Germans, nemecha /nemescð/ German (adverb). But: inglizlär /inglizlðr/ Englishmen, inglizhä /inglizcð/ English (adverb).

b) Words ending in «e» /e/, «ej» /ej/, «q» /jð/, «i» /i/, «áe» /je/, «áq» /jð/: Frunzenyè /Frunzeneì/ of Frunze, muzejda /muzejdð/ 'in the museum', farisejlar /farisejlðr/ 'Pharisees', pulqlar /pulðlðr/ 'bullets', Tbilisida /Tbilisidð/ in Tbilisi, podpoláeda /pódpol'jedð/ 'in the underground'. 1)

Pronounced together, the vowel «i» and the falling diphthong «yj» are lengthened: sãjŠ-im, sãjŠ-ik, tãjŠ-im, tãjŠ-ik (not: sãj+im, sãj+ik, tãj+im, tãj+ik), kujŠ-yjm, kujŠŠ-yjk (not: kuj+yjm, kuj+yjk). 2) Compare also 17, Note 2, and 64. 3) In recent publications a more phonetic spelling can again be observed (for example, Berlindä /Berlindð/, nimeslär /nimeslðr/, nimeshä /nimescð/).

40

c) Geographical names ending in a consonant plus «sk» /sk/, and to names of persons ending in «kij» /ki/: Minskida /Minskidð/ in Minsk, Murmanskidan /Murmanskidðn/ from Murmansk, Nevskijnyè /Nevskineì/ of Nevski. d) A number or words ending in a consonant other than «l» /l/ plus «á» (soft sign): qkoráda /jakor'dð/ 'at anchor', oktqbráda /oktðbrdð/ 'in October', noqbráda /nojðbrdð/ 'in November', dekabráda /dikðbrdð/ 'in December'. But: sentqbrádä /sintðbrdð/ 'in September', neftáneè /neftneì/ 'of the (mineral) oil'.

The change of category from front to back has affected even some Arabic loanwords. For example: vakyjgalar /waqiôðlðr/ 'events', wäryknyè /øðreqneì/ 'of the east'. But: faæigale /façiôðle/ 'tragic', bälalär /bðlðlðr/ 'troubles'. Note: It should be noted that the shift from front to back vowels in words belonging to the above categories as well as in suffixes joined to them, is largely an orthographic shift, which has, however, found its reflection in today's formal speech. In the vernacular their pronunciation remains in most cases front, as rendered during the periods of the Jaìalif and the Arabic script.

41

Literature Gazizov, R.S. Tatarskij qzyk. – Kazan, 1960. ____, Sopostavitelánaq grammatika tatarskogo i russkogo qzykov. Fonetika i morfologiq. · Kazan, 1977. Zäkiev, M.Z. Xäzerge tatar ädäbi gele (singaksis), Kazan, 1966, 1974. ____, Xäzegte tatar ädäbi tele sintaksysy çäm punktåaciqse, Kazan, 1984. ____, Tatar xalky teleneè barlykka kilåe, Kazan, 1977. Ibraçimov, Fatix. Belem älifbadan bawlana. · Kazan, 1973. Isxakov, F.G. Ob otdelányx Fonemax tatarskogo qzyka / Issledovaniq po sravnitelánoj grammatike tîrkskix qzykov. 1 Fonetika. Izd. Ak. Nauk SSSR, Moskva, 1955, rr. 217-248. ____, Zakony slovesnogo udareniq v tatarskom qzyke / ibid., rr. 329-332. ____ i Palámbax, A.A. Beglye glasnye v tatarskom i nekotoryx drugix tîrkskix qzykax / ibid., rr. 208-216. Kurbangaliev, M., Gazizov, R. Opyt sistematiheskij grammatikij tatarckogo qzyka. Kazaná, Tatizdat, 1931 (in Jaìalif) Kurbatov, X. Tatar teleneè alfavit çäm orfografiq tarixy. Tatarstan Kitap Näwriqty, Kazan, 1960. ____, Orfografiq tatarskogo qzyka / Orfografii tîrkskix literaturnyx qzykov SSSR, Moskva, 1973, rr. 182-191. ____, Alfavit tatarskogo qzyka / Voprosy soverwenstvovaniq alfavitov tîrkskix qzykov SSSR, Moskva, 1972, rr. 126-139. Kyzyl Taè, Ufa (daily newspaper). Nurieva, A.X. Faseev, F.S., Mäxmåtov, M.I. Tatar teleneè orfografik såzlege. – Tatarstan Kitap Näwriqty, Kazan, 1983. Paffen, K.A., RUSSISCH, Verlag der Literaturwerke "Minerva", R. Max Lippold, Leipzig. Ramazanov, W. çäm Xismätullin, X. Tatar tele grammatikasy, I kisäk – fonetika çäm morfologiq, Kazan, 1954. Saráqn, Xäsän. Ueèny ujdyryp sal... (Tel, ädäbi ostalyk turynda mäkalälär) · Tatarstan kitap näwriqty, 1977. Sattarov, T.F. Tatar Isemnäre Såzlege, Kazan, 1981. Senn, Alfred and Rozhdestvensky, Andrey A., RUSSIAN, R.D. Cortina Co. Inc. Publishers, New York 19, N.Y., 1967. Sovremennyj tatarskij literaturnyj qzyk · Leksikologiq, fonetika, morfologiq. · Izd. «Nauka», Moskva, 1969. Socialistik Tatarstan, Kazan (daily newspaper). SSSR tarixí. Prof. Øestakof redaksiðsendð (in Jaìalif) – Tatgosizdat, 1939. Sägyjtov, M.A. Avaz iqrtemnären ãjränågä karata / Voprosy tîrkologii, 1970, rr. 176-184. Tatarskaq Grammatika, Tom 1, Fonetika, Fonologiq, Grafika i Orfografiq, Orfoïpiq, Slovoobrazovanie, Kazaná, Tatarskoe Kniànoe Izdatelástvo, 1993. Tatar Teleneè Aèlatmaly Såzlege, 1-3, Kazan, 1977-1981. Tatar Äläbiqty Tarixy, Kazan 1984. Tatarca-Rusca Syzlek, 1931 (in Jaìalif). Ô. Tuqaj, Sajlanma ðsðrlðr, Qazan, 1938 (in Jaìalif). Xakov, V.X. Tatar ädäbi teleneè åså çäm normalawu processyna karagan kajber mäsáälälär / Voprosy tîrkologii, Kazan, 1970, rr. 166-175. Xäzerge tatar ädäbi tele (Leksika, fonetika, orfoïpiq, grafika çäm orfografiq, morfologiq). · Tatarstan Kitap Näwriqty, Kazan, 1965. Ìerbak, A. Sravnitelánaq fonetika tîrkskix qzykov. · Izd. «Nauka», Leningrad, 1970. 42

PART TWO MORPHOLOGY CHAPTER I ¡ NOUNS Formation of Nouns [120] Tatar nouns may be simple or compound. They may be underived or derived. Underived nouns coincide in form with the root or with the root plus a suffix which has become inactive and is no longer felt as such. Derived nouns are formed by means of suffixes joined to other nomina or to verbs. Compound nouns are formed by uniting two or more words (underived or derived). They may be joined with or without a hyphen or written separately. For example: ïw ‘work’, ãj ‘house’, at ‘horse’, balyk ‘fish’, qègyr ‘rain’, qrdäm ‘help’, ïw+he ‘worker’, ãj+däw ‘someone living in the same house’, balyk+hy+lyk ‘fishery’, qxwy+lyk ‘kindness’, ‘goodness’ (qxwy ‘good’), bas-ym ‘accent’, ‘stress’, ‘pressure’, (bas ‘press’), bawkala ‘capital’ (baw ‘head’, kala ‘town’), altyn sägatá ‘gold watch’ (altyn ‘gold’, sägatá ‘watch’), ïw xaky ‘salary’ (ïw ‘work’, xak ‘pay’, ‘fee’, -y possessive suffix).

Suffixes Forming Nouns from Words other than Verbs [121] +gär, +kär (P.); forms words designating a person exercising a certain profession or trade or engaged in a certain activity: säådägär ‘merchant’ (säådä ‘trade’, ‘commerce’), xezmätkär ‘servant’ (xezmät ‘service’), çäväskär ‘amateur’ (çäväs ‘passion’; ‘hobby’). Note: When joined to nouns belonging to the back vowel group, +kär is spelled +kqr or +kará: gãnaç ‘sin’, ‘guilt’, ‘crime’, ‘offence’, gãnaçkqr ‘sinner’, ‘culprit’, ‘criminal’, ‘offender’; qd, ‘remembrance’, ‘memory’, qdkará /jðtkðr/, ‘monument’, ‘a thing given as a keepsake’, ‘souvenir’.

[122] +dar (P.); xãkemdar ‘ruler’ (xãkem ‘judgment’, ‘rule’). [123] +daw, +däw, +taw, +täw; indicates a person who possesses, in common with another person, that which is designated by the basic noun: îldaw ‘companion’, ‘fellow traveler’ (îl ‘way’, ‘road’), fikerdäw ‘a person who holds the same views’ (fiker ‘thought’, ‘view’), qktaw ‘fellow countryman’ (qk ‘side’, ‘country’), millättäw ‘compatriot’ (millät ‘nation’). [124] +ek; berek (archaic) ‘union’, ‘unification’ (ber ‘one’). 43

[125] +z; this suffix is an archaic dual: kåz ‘eye’, tez ‘knee’, mãgez ‘horn’. [126] +kaj, +käj; forms terms of endearment («j» is a vocative particle joined to +ka, +kä): atakaj ‘dad’, ‘daddy’ (ata ‘father’), duskaj ‘dear friend’, seèelkäj ‘little/dear sister’ (used in address), meskenkäj ‘poor thing, girl, boy, etc.’, Zifakaj ‘dear Zifa’ (Zifa feminine name), Läjläkäj ‘dear Leylä’ (Läjlä feminine name), ätkäj ‘papa’, änkäj ‘mommy’. Note: ätkäj and änkäj are the equivalents of äti and äni.

[127] +kän (rare); æilkän ‘the sail’ (æil ‘wind’). [128] +käw forms diminutives: ïnekäw ‘little brother’ (ïne ‘younger brother’); ‘chap’, ‘my boy’, seèelkäw ‘little/dear sister’. [129] +ly, +le; this suffix forms mostly adjectives, less often nouns. When forming nouns it designates: a) A national of a certain country or a native of a certain place: amerikaly ‘an American’ (Amerika ‘America’), kazanly ‘an inhabitant of Kazan’ (Kazan ‘Kazan’), aziqle ‘an Asian’ (Aziq ‘Asia’), æirle ‘a native’, ‘an indigene’ (æir ‘place’). b) The possessor of the object denoted by the noun: atly ‘a person owning a horse’, ‘rider’, ‘horseman’, ãjle ‘a person owning a house’. [130] +lyk, +lek; forms nouns designating: a) A place abounding with the objects of nature expressed by the basic word: agahlyk ‘grove’, ‘woodland’ (agah ‘tree’), naratlyk ‘pine forest’ (narat ‘pine’), komlyk ‘a sandy place’ (kom ‘sand’), imänlek ‘oak forest’ (imän ‘oak’); b) Instruments: avyzlyk ‘bit (of a bridle)’ (avyz ‘mouth’), kåzlek ‘spectacles’, ‘glasses’ (kåz ‘eye’). c) An office, post, duty: professorlyk ‘professorship’ (professor ‘professor’), ilhelek ‘embassy’ (ilhe ‘ambassador’), mãdirlek ‘post/duty of a director’, ‘manager’ (mãdir ‘director’, ‘manager’), väkillek ‘representation’, ‘agency’ (väkil ‘representative’, ‘agent’). d) Abstract nouns: ostalyk ‘mastery’, ‘skill’ (osta ‘master’, ‘specialist’, ‘expert’), batyrlyk ‘heroism’, ‘courage’ (batyr ‘hero’), balalyk ‘childhood’ (bala ‘child’), analyk ‘motherhood’ (ana ‘mother’), atalyk ‘fatherhood’ (ata ‘father’), qxwylyk ‘goodness’, ‘kindness’ (qxwy ‘good’), gåzällek ‘beauty’ (gåzäl ‘beautiful’), qwálek ‘youth’ (qwá ‘young’), berlek ‘union’, ‘singular’ (ber ‘one’), karwylyk ‘resistance’, ‘opposition’, ‘objection’ (karwy ‘against’), îklyk ‘absence’ (îk ‘no’, ‘not’, ‘there is no/not’), kirelek ‘obstinacy’, ‘stubbornness’ (kire ‘back’, ‘reverse’, ‘stubborn’), min-minlek ‘vanity’, ‘conceitedness’, ‘arrogance’ (min ‘I’). Note: In the spoken language, initial «l» of the suffixes +ly, +le, +lek is often changed to «n» after the nasals m, n, è: tämne (instead of tämle) ‘tasty’, komny (instead of komly) ‘sandy’, æanny (instead of æanly) ‘lively’, ozyn æiène (instead of ozyn æièle) ‘having long sleeves’; unnyk (instead of unlyk) ‘ten-rouble note’, utynnyk (instead of utynlyk) ‘wood-shed’. However, Tatar orthoepy recommends pronouncing these suffixes as they are written.

[131] +sa, +sä; forms names of objects put on those parts of the body designated by the stem: muensa ‘necklace’, ‘neck decoration’, (muen ‘neck’), æièsä ‘oversleeve’ (æiè ‘sleeve’). [132] +stan (P.); indicates countries: Tatarstan ‘Tatarstan’, Çindstan ‘India’ (çind ‘Indian’).

44

[133] +t; this is an old foreign plural whose function is not felt any more; it is therefore listed as derivational element: sãt ‘milk’. [134] +uk, +åk (mostly +åk); this suffix is joined to certain girls’ names. It is used by older persons (mother, older sister, etc.) to address a younger person (daughter, younger sister, etc), and it may also be used between a young woman and a young man. It expresses a higher degree of affection than the suffix +kaj, käj: · – Bu anyè temasy bit, Läjlåk, anyè doktorlyk dissertaciqse. (Mädinä Malikova, Ak davylda tal bãrese.) “After all, my dear Leylä, this is his subject, his doctoral thesis!” (bu ‘this’, anyè ‘his’, bit ‘after all’, Läjlä ‘girl’s name’). · – Bågen sin – minem äniem, ...! Professorlygyèny bågengä onytyp tor! – Bik onytyr idem dä, Läjlågem, ...! (ibid.). “Today you are my mom, ...! Forget for today that you are a professor! “ “I would like very much to forget it, my darling Leylä, but, ...! “ Note: Final «ä» on «Läjlä» is dropped before +åk (bågen ‘today’, sin ‘you’, minem äniem ‘my mother/ mom’, onytyp tor ‘forget’ /for some time/, dä ‘even’, ‘but’, ‘though’).

[135] +ha, +hä; forms diminutives: syzykha ‘small, little line’ (syzyk ‘line’), kisäkhä ‘particle’ (kisäk ‘bit’, ‘piece’). [136] +hak, +häk; uenhak ‘a playful fellow’ (uen ‘game’, ‘play’). [137] +hy, +he; forms words designating: a) A person exercising a certain profession or trade or engaged in a certain activity: urakhy ‘reaper’ (urak ‘sickle’), sporthy ‘sportsman’ (sport ‘sport’), qlganhy ‘liar’ (qlgan ‘lie’), timerhe ‘blacksmith’ (timer ‘iron’), ïwhe ‘worker’ (ïw ‘work’), îlhy ‘traveler’ (îl ‘road’). b) A person promoting certain views, ideas, or maintaining certain convictions: respublikahy ‘republican’ (respublika ‘republic’), ittifakhy ‘a person supporting the aims of the Ittifaq party (ittifak ‘union’), milläthe ‘nationalist’ (millät ‘nation’), ïw tawlauhy ‘striker’ (ïw tawlau ‘strike’ (noun) or ‘to strike’). [138] +hyk, +hek; forms diminutives: kowhyk ‘little bird’ (kow ‘bird’), elgahyk ‘little river’ (elga ‘river’), utrauhyk ‘little island’ (utrau ‘island’), telhek ‘little tongue’ (tel ‘tongue’), kyzhyk ‘little girl’ (kyz ‘girl’). Note: The suffix +hyk, +hek may be used with names of persons to express endearment. For example: Zãlfiqhek ‘little/dear Zölfiä’. Furthermore, this suffix may be used when taunting a person or when speaking depreciatingly of a person. For example: · Närsä wargyn, sãjlä, i bihara adämhek kenäm! (Gabdålla Tukaj, Wåräle.) “What is your condition, speak, oh, my dear poor little man!” (The speaker, a forest spirit, addresses the man tauntingly).

[139] +hy+lyk, +he+lek; indicates a profession or trade: baltahylyk ‘carpentry’ (balta ‘ax’, baltahy ‘carpenter’), igenhelek ‘agriculture’ (igen ‘grain’, igenhe ‘farmer’). [140] +hyn, +hen (mostly +hyn); has the same meaning as +sa, +sä: kolakhyn ‘earflap’ ‘earcap’ (kolak ‘ear’). Note: Some derivational suffixes occur more frequently (or even almost exclusively) in their back vowel form, while with others the front vowel form predominates.

45

[141] +yn; utyn ‘firewood’ (ut ‘fire’). [142] +äs (rare); æiläs ‘light breeze’ (æil ‘wind’). [143] +å; this suffix is a vocative form of endearment used in the vernacular. For example: – Kaq, kaq äle åze, – dide Qkub, ... – Kyzym Zãlfiqå! ... – Kil äle, kil. (Mãsägyjt Xäbibullin, Sular årgä aksa da.) “Now then, where is she?” Yaqub said, ... “My girl (daughter), darling Zölfiä! ... Come here, come.” (kaq äle ‘now then’, åze ‘she (herself)’, dide ‘said’, kil äle ‘come here’). [144] In addition to the above suffixes, a few Persian prefixes are used to form derived nouns. For example: bi+ indicates the lack of a quality: biçuw ‘fainting’, ‘fit’, ‘swoon’ (çuw ‘feeling’, ‘remembrance’), bitaraflyk ‘neutrality’ (taraf ‘side’), bimaza ‘anxiety’, ‘uneasiness’ (maza ‘calm’, ‘calmness’, ‘tranquility’, ‘rest’, ‘peace’). [145] na+, nä+; forms nouns with a negative meaning: nadanlyk ‘ignorance’ (danistan (P.) ‘to know’), naxaklyk ‘injustice’ (xaklyk ‘justice’), näkäslek ‘meanness’, ‘dishonourableness’ (käs (P.) ‘a person’).

Suffixes Forming Nouns from Verbs [146] -ga, -gä, -ka, -kä, (rare; mostly -ka); forms nouns designating instruments which serve to carry out the activity expressed by the verb, or denoting objects which are the result of the activity. totka ‘handle’ (tot ‘hold’), qrka ‘block’, ‘log’ (qr ‘cleave’, ‘split’, ‘saw/cut up’). Note: The verb forms tot and qr in this paragraph are the stems, as well as the form of the second person singular of the imperative mood, of the verbs totu ‘to hold’ and qru ‘to cleave’, ‘to split’, ‘to saw/cut’. Wherever feasible, the stem is the form (instead of the infinitive) in which Tatar verbs are given in this book. Accordingly, in their English translations they are rendered by the English verb form without ‘to’.

[147] -gak, -gäk, -kak, -käk. This suffix designates instruments and objects which serve to carry out the activity inherent in the verbal root, or it denotes objects which are the result of an activity. Furthermore, it forms nouns denoting the subject of an action, and it may also designate a place whose peculiarities relate to the action expressed by the verb, or a place where an activity is performed. Compare the following examples: iwkäk ‘oar’, ‘paddle’ (iw ‘row’), tãrgäk ‘bundle’, ‘package’ (tãr ‘roll’, ‘wrap up’), kurkak ‘coward’ (kuryk ‘fear’, ‘be afraid’), qrgak ‘chatterer’, ‘chatterbox’ (qryp sãjlä ‘speak frankly), batkak ‘swamp’ (bat ‘sink’; intrans.). (Compare also 153). [148] -gy, -ge, -ky, -ke; forms names of objects and instruments which serve to carry out the activity expressed by the basic verb: halgy ‘scythe’ (hal ‘chop’), ãterge ‘a chisel’ (ãter ‘chisel’), pyhky ‘saw’ (peh ‘cut off’, ‘castrate’), seberke ‘broom’ (seber ‘sweep’). [149] -gyn, -gen, -kyn, -ken; designates the state (condition) of an object or its characteristics (property); sometimes it denotes the subject of an action: qngyn ‘fire’ (qn ‘burn’), ohkyn ‘spark’ (oh ‘fly’), kahkyn ‘escapee’ (kah ‘escape’), sãrgen ‘exile’ (sãr ‘chase’, ‘hunt’, ‘deport’).

46

[150] -gyh, -geh, -kyh, -keh; this suffix forms: a) The names of instruments which serve to carry out the activity expressed by the basic verb: urgyh ‘harvester’, ‘harvesting machine’ (ur ‘reap’), kyrgyh ‘grater’ (kyr ‘grate’), sãzgeh ‘strainer’, ‘filter’ (sãz ‘strain’, ‘filter’), ahkyh ‘key’ (ah ‘open’), suytkyh ‘refrigerator’ (suyt ‘cool’), kiskeh ‘cutter’ (of a machine), kiskehlär ‘incisors’ (teeth), (kis ‘cut’). b) Nouns denoting the subject or the name of an action: belgeh ‘specialist’, ‘expert’ (bel ‘know’), bawlangyh ‘beginning’ (e.g., bawlangyh mäktäp ‘elementary school’) (bawlan ‘begin’, intrans.), ïtärgeh ‘stimulus’, ‘incentive’ (ïtär ‘push’). [151] -dyk, -dek, -tyk, -tek; tabyldyk ‘foundling’ (tabyl ‘be found’), æyentyk ‘collection’ (æyen ‘be gathered together). [152] -oz; såz ‘word’ (sãjlä ‘speak’, ‘say’; root: sã-). [153] -ok; has the same meaning as -gak, -gäk, -kak, -käk: tarak ‘the comb’ (tara ‘comb’), urak ‘sickle’ (ur ‘reap’, ‘cut’ /corn, grass, etc./), qtak ‘bed’ (qt ‘lie down’), iläk ‘sieve’ (ilä ‘sift’), bizäk ‘ornament’ (bizä ‘adorn’), vatyk ‘something broken’, ‘broken off’(vat ‘break’), teläk ‘a wish’ (telä ‘wish’, ‘want’), boeryk ‘an order’, ‘command’ (boer ‘order’, ‘command’), kisäk ‘piece’, ‘part’, ‘section’, ‘lump’, kisek ‘slot’, ‘notch’, ‘something cut off’, ‘sliced off’ (kis ‘cut off’), kahak ‘refugee’, ‘escapee’ (kah ‘flee’, ‘escape’), torak ‘apartment’ (tor ‘live’, ‘reside’, ‘stay’). [154] -kel (rare); åtkel ‘(mountain) pass’, ‘ford’ (åt ‘pass through’), ièkel ‘depresion’ (iè ‘fall, drop away/land’).. [155] -om; designates the result of, or an object subjected to, an activity. Nouns formed by this suffix may also denote measure: atlam ‘the step’, ‘stride’ (atla ‘step’, ‘stride’, ‘walk’), bäjläm ‘bundle’ (bäjlä ‘bind’, ‘tie up’), jotym ‘gulp’, ‘mouthful’ (jot ‘swallow’), totam ‘handful’ (tot ‘hold’), tatym ‘the taste’ (taty ‘taste’), salym ‘tax’ (sal ‘put on’, ‘lay on’, ‘load’, ‘burden’), kiem ‘suit’, ‘dress’ (ki ‘dress’, ‘put on’), belem ‘knowledge’, ‘education’ (bel ‘know’). [156] -ma, -mä; designates objects or forms abstract nouns which are the result of the action expressed by the verb: oewma ‘organization’ (oew ‘organize yourself’), basma ‘step’ (of staircase) (bas ‘step’), bålmä ‘room’ (bål ‘divide’), iskärmä ‘note’, ‘comment’ (iskär ‘notice’, ‘perceive’). [157] -mak, -mäk; this suffix has the same meaning as -ma, -mä: tabywmak ‘riddle’, ‘enigma’ (tabyw ‘help to find’, ‘meet’), sukmak ‘path’, ‘track’, ‘trail’ (suk ‘beat’), ikmäk ‘bread’ (igå ‘to till the ground’, ‘cultivate’). [158] -man, -män; batman ‘vat’, ‘tub’ (bat ‘sink’), kitmän ‘hoe’ (kit ‘break off’, ‘split off’). [159] -mah, -mäh; denotes objects which are the result of the action expressed by the verb: umah ‘dough ball’/put in soup/ (u ‘knead’); tägärmäh ‘wheel’ (tägärä ‘turn’, ‘rotate’). [160] -myr, -mer; ujmyr ‘adze’ (uj ‘cut out’, ‘hollow out’), åsmer ‘youth’, ‘juvenile’ (ås ‘grow’).

47

[161] -myw, -mew (mostly -myw); tormyw ‘life’ (tor ‘live’, ‘dwell’), qzmyw ‘fate’ (qz ‘write’), tumyw ‘birth’ (tu ‘be born’); kårmew ‘(calamitous) fate’ (kår ‘see’); jãrmew ‘carriage’, ‘gait’ (jãr ‘walk’). [162] -nä (rare); birnä ‘gift’ /of the bride to the bridegroom/ (bir ‘give’). [163] -r, -yr, -er (rare); kiler ‘income’ (kil ‘come’). [164] -w, yw, -ew; forms nouns denoting the process or result of an action, a reciprocal action, participation in an action, or simply the form of an action: kargyw ‘curse’, ‘malediction’ (karga ‘curse’), sãjläw ‘dialect’, ‘jargon’ (sãjlä ‘talk’, ‘speak), kazanyw ‘acquisition’, ‘achievement’ (kazan ‘acquire’, ‘achieve’); kilew ‘coming’, ‘arrival’ (kil ‘come’), utyryw ‘session’ (utyr ‘sit’), kãlew ‘laughing together’ (kãl ‘laugh’), sugyw ‘the fight’, ‘battle’, ‘war’ (suk ‘fight’, ‘battle’, ‘beat’), kårenew ‘appearance’, ‘view’ (kåren ‘appear’). [165] -ty, -te (rare); jogynty ‘influence’ (jogyn ‘touch’), sygynty ‘juice’ (sygyn ‘be pressed, squeezed, squeeze yourself’), gãrelte ‘roar’, ‘low rumble’ (gãrlä ‘make noise’, gãreldä ‘roar’, ‘rumble’). [166] -u, -å; forms verbal nouns from all verbs designating either the terminated action or the process of an action: qzu ‘writing’, ‘letter’ (qz ‘write’), bålå ‘dividing’ (bål ‘divide’), karau ‘looking’, ‘gazing’ (kara ‘look’, ‘gaze’), kãhläå ‘forcing’, ‘obliging’ (kãhlä ‘force, oblige’). [167] -u+hy, -å+he; forms new nouns from verbal nouns1); designates the person (or object) who (which) carries out the action expressed by the basic verb (profession): ukytuhy ‘teacher’ (ukyt ‘teach’, ukytu ‘teaching’, ‘to teach’), qzuhy ‘writer’ (qz ‘write’, qzu ‘writing, to write’), bålåhe ‘divider’, ‘one who divides’ (bål ‘divide’, bålå ‘dividing, to divide’), karauhy ‘onlooker’ (kara ‘look’, ‘gaze’, karau ‘looking’, ‘gazing’, ‘to look’, ‘gaze’), tyèlauhy ‘listener’ (tyèla ‘listen’, tyèlau ‘listening’, ‘to listen’). Note: The suffix +hy, +he may also be joined to verbal nouns in -u, -å when the latter function as auxiliary verbs, forming compounds with verbal adverbs in -op. (For verbal adverbs in -op see 1247, for auxiliary verbs 1322-1378). For example: satyp aluhy ‘buyer’ (satu ‘to sell’, alu ‘to buy/take/ receive’), basyp aluhy ‘invader’ (basu ‘to press/suppress’), bastyryp hygaruhy ‘publisher’ (bastyru ‘to print’, hygaru ‘to put out/publish).

[168] -v+yk, -v+ek; forms new nouns from verbal nouns: waltyravyk ‘rattle’ (waltyra ‘ring the bell’, waltyrau ‘ringing’, ‘jingling’), kaltyravyk ‘quiver’, ‘trembling’, ‘shiver’, ‘shudder’ (kaltyra ‘quiver’, ‘tremble’, kaltyrau ‘quivering’, ‘trembling’), gãrlävek ‘brook’, ‘stream’ (gãrlä ‘purl’, ‘murmur’, gãrläå ‘purling’, ‘murmuring’). [169] -v+yl, -v+el; forms new nouns from verbal nouns: karavyl ‘guard’ (kara ‘look’, ‘observe’, karau ‘looking’, ‘observing’). [170] -v+yh, -v+eh; forms new nouns from verbal nouns; designates objects or instruments which serve to carry out the activity expressed by the basic verb: kaplavyh ‘the cover’ (kapla ‘cover’, kaplau ‘covering’, ‘to cover’), bikläveh ‘the lock’, ‘the bolt’ (biklä ‘lock’, ‘bolt’, bikläå ‘locking’, ‘bolting’, ‘to lock, bolt’).

1)

Also forms present participles (see 1042-1045).

48

[171] -hyk, -hek; orhyk ‘spindle’ (or ‘beat’, ‘deal a blow’), bãrkänhek ‘large shawl’ (bãrkän ‘cover yourself’), ãjränhek ‘apprentice’, ‘novice’ (ãjrän ‘learn’). [172] -ymta, -emtä; kuwymta ‘appendix’, ‘supplement’ (kuw ‘add’, ‘join’), ãzemtä ‘excerpt’, ‘extract’, ‘quotation’ (ãz ‘tear’, ‘break’). [173] -yn, -en; denotes the result of the action expressed by the verb (rare): æyen ‘meeting’, ‘gathering’ (æyj /çi/ ‘meet’, ‘gather’, ‘collect’), tãten ‘the smoke’ (tãtä ‘smoke’ / chimney/), igen ‘grain’ (igå ‘to till’, ‘cultivate’). [174] -yh, -eh; is attached to verbal stems in -on and forms mostly abstract nouns: kurkynyh ‘fear’, ‘danger’ (kurkyn ‘be /suddenly/ frightened’, ‘startled’), qlynyh ‘bid’, ‘petition’, ‘request’ (qlyn ‘implore’, ‘beg’), ywanyh ‘belief’ (ywan ‘believe’), sãeneh ‘joy’, ‘good news’ (sãen ‘enjoy’, ‘be glad’), åteneh ‘request’ (åten ‘beg’).

Formation of Compound Nouns [175] Compound nouns are formed in the following manner: a) Two nouns are united. The second takes the possessive suffix +y, +e, +sy, +se (see 191, 192 a). Both parts are written separately: qz kãne ‘spring day’ (qz ‘spring’, kãn ‘day’), æir xuæasy ‘farmer’, ‘landowner’ (æir ‘land’, xuæa ‘owner’, ‘master’), tau bawy ‘mountain peak’ (tau ‘mountain’, baw ‘head’), avyl xuæalygy ‘agriculture’ (avyl ‘village’, xuæalyk ‘economy’), æil tegermäne ‘wind mill’ (æil ‘wind’, tegermän ‘mill’), æimew bakhasy ‘orchard’ (æimew ‘fruit’, bakha ‘garden’), aw bålmäse ‘dining room’ (aw ‘food’, bålmä ‘room’), kunak bålmäse ‘guest room’ (kunak ‘guest’). If the first noun designates the material of which the second is made, the possessive suffix is not joined: kãmew kawyk ‘silver spoon’ (kãmew ‘silver’, kawyk ‘spoon’), timer îl ‘railroad’ (timer ‘iron’, îl ‘road’). b) Two nouns are joined: kãnhygyw ‘east’ (kãn ‘day’, ‘sun’, hygyw ‘rising’, ‘the rise’), kãnáqk ‘south’ (qk ‘side’), tãnáqk ‘north’ (tãn ‘night’), kulâqzma ‘manuscript’ (kul ‘hand’, qzma ‘record’, ‘entry’, ‘inscription’). c) Two nouns are joined with a hyphen: ata-ana ‘parents’ (ata ‘father’, ana ‘mother’), atababa ‘forefathers’ (baba ‘grandfather’), jort-æir ‘property’ (jort ‘house’, æir ‘land’), aw-su ‘food’ (aw ‘food’, su ‘water’). Note: In some compound forms joined by a hyphen, the first or last component has no independent meaning: savyt-saba ‘plates and dishes’ (savyt ‘vessel’), bala-haga ‘kiddies’, ‘little ones’ (bala ‘child’).

d) An adjective and a noun are joined: karabodaj ‘buckwheat’ (kara ‘black’, bodaj ‘wheat’), akkow ‘swan’ (ak ‘white’, kow ‘bird’), aksakal ‘elder’ (sakal ‘beard’), terekãmew ‘quicksilver’ (tere ‘lively’, ‘quick’). e) A numeral and a noun are joined: ãhpohmak ‘triangle’ (ãh ‘three’, pohmak ‘angle’, ‘corner’), kyrygaqk ‘centipede’ (kyryk ‘forty’, aqk ‘foot’), qrymutrau ‘peninsula’ (qrym ‘half’, utrau ‘island’), qrymwar ‘hemisphere’ (war ‘sphere’). f) A participle is combined with a noun: qnartau (also: qnar tau) ‘vulcano’ (qnar ‘burning’, tau ‘mountain’), joklar vakyt ‘bedtime’ (joklar ‘sleeping’, vakyt ‘time’). g) A noun and a participle are joined: urynbasar ‘representative’, ‘deputy’ (uryn ‘place’, basar ‘occupying’, ‘stepping’), îlbasar ‘waylayer’, ‘bandit’, bawkisär ‘robber’, ‘brigand’ (baw ‘head’, kisär ‘cutting’).

49

h) A verbal adverb is joined with a noun: torataw ‘idol’ (tora ‘standing’, taw ‘stone’), kajtavaz ‘echo’ (kajta ‘returning’, avaz ‘sound’, ‘voice’). i) A noun, adjective, or pronoun merges with a noun: almagah ‘apple tree’ (alma ‘apple’, agah ‘tree’), karurman ‘dark’, ‘dense’, ‘forest’ (kara ‘dark’, ‘black’, urman ‘forest’), byel ‘this year’ (bu ‘this’, el /jíl/ ‘year’). j) Three words are united; the second and third take the possessive suffix +y, +e, +sy, +se: su asty kãjmäse ‘submarine’ (su ‘water’, as(t) ‘lower part’, kãjmä ‘boat’, ‘ship’). k) Abbreviations are used as compound nouns: AKW /Amerika Kuwma Wtatlary/ ‘United States of America’, Profxäräkät ‘Trade Union movement’ (Prof, abbreviation of professionalá ‘professional’, xäräkät ‘movement’). Note: Other parts of speech (adjectives, numerals) may be used as nouns. These will be dealt with in their respective chapters.

Meaning of the Noun [176] Tatar nouns are divided into two classes – proper nouns and common nouns. A proper noun is the name of a particular person, place, or thing: Gabdulla Tukaj (Tatar poet, 1886-1913), Çadi Taktaw (Tatar poet, 1901-1931), Kazan ‘Kazan’, Idel ‘Volga’, Vawington ‘Washington’, Parià ‘Paris’, Fiker ‘Thought’ (name of a newspaper), Uklar ‘Arrows’ (name of a satirical journal). A common noun is a name which may be applied to any one of a class of persons, places, or things: prezident ‘president’, xan ‘khan’, patwa ‘czar’, ukytuhy ‘teacher’, uram ‘street’, wäçär ‘town’, ‘city’, kitap ‘book’, watlyk ‘joy’, sägatá ‘hour’, ‘watch’, ‘clock’, fiker ‘thought’, såzlek ‘dictionary’.

Gender of Nouns [177] There is no grammatical gender in Tatar. But gender of masculine and of feminine nouns may be shown in various ways: a) The male and the female of many kinds or classes of living beings are denoted by different words: ata ‘father’, ana ‘mother’, ir ‘man’, xatyn ‘woman’, babaj ‘grandfather’, äbi ‘grandmother’, malaj ‘boy’, kyz ‘girl’, abyj ‘(older) brother’, ïne ‘(younger) brother’, apa ‘(older) sister’, seèel ‘(younger) sister’, ajgyr ‘stallion’, biq /bið/ ‘mare’, ågez ‘bull’, syer ‘cow’, ätäh ‘cock’, tavyk ‘hen’. b) A noun is prefixed to, or follows, a noun: ir bala ‘male child’, kyz bala ‘female child’, xezmäthe malaj ‘young manservant’ (xezmäthe ‘servant’), xezmäthe xatyn ‘maidservant’, xezmäthe kyz ‘young maidservant’, ata ït ‘male dog’, ana ït (or: änhek, käntäj) ‘she-dog’, ‘bitch’, ata mähe ‘tomcat’, ata aryslan ‘lion’, ana aryslan ‘lioness’, irkäk dãq ‘male camel’, (irkäk ‘male’), käæä täkäse ‘he-goat’ (käæä ‘goat’, täkä ‘ram’), saryk täkäse ‘ram’ (saryk ‘sheep’). Note: There is no definite rule as to the position of the words malaj, xatyn, kyz.

c) Some masculine nouns become feminine by the addition of the word bikä1) ‘lady’, ‘mistress’, ‘madam’, or by adding certain suffixes (the latter mostly in words borrowed from Arabic or other languages): xuæabikä ‘hostess’ (xuæa ‘host’, ‘owner’), xanbikä 1)

The word bikä also forms feminine names: Almabikä, Sãembikä, Gãlbikä.

50

‘wife of a khan’, ‘queen’, ostabikä ‘wife of a mulla’ (osta ‘master’, ‘expert’), xanha ‘wife of a khan’, ‘queen’, bihä (dial.) ‘wife’ (bi ‘prince’, ‘official’, ‘proprietor’), koda ‘father of a son-in-law’, ‘godfather’, kodaha ‘sister-in-law’, kart ‘old man’, karhyk ‘old woman’, mãgallimä /mõôðllimð/ ‘woman teacher’ (mãgallim ‘teacher’), wagyjrä /øaôirð/ ‘poetess’ (wagyjrá ‘poet’), Xälimä ‘feminine name’ (Xälim ‘masculine name’), princessa (pref.: patwa kyzy) ‘princess’ (princ ‘prince’), delegatka (pref.: xatyn delegat) ‘woman delegate’ (delegat ‘delegate’).

Number of Nouns [178] The Tatar noun in its basic form denotes the whole of a class of persons (animals), places and things (i.e., it is a collective noun). However, it may also designate a single person (animal), place, or thing: Ana alma satyp ala. The mother buys apples. Bu – alma. This is an apple. Urmanda æir æiläge bar. In the wood there are strawberries. Bu – æir æiläge. This is a strawberry. Balagyz barmy? Do you have children? Bu balaga nihä qwá? How old is this child?

Formation of the Plural [179] The plural is formed by means of the suffix +lar, +lär, +nar, +när joined to the noun in accordance with the rules of vowel and consonant harmony. With compound nouns the suffix is always attached to the last component. If that component has the possessive suffix, the plural ending is joined first and the possessive suffix is in turn added to it: at ‘horse’, atlar ‘horses’; tamyr ‘root’, ‘vein’, tamyrlar ‘roots’, ‘veins’; ït ‘dog’, ïtlär ‘dogs’; kåz ‘eye’, kåzlär ‘eyes’; kewe ‘man’, ‘person’, kewelär ‘men’, ‘persons’, ‘people’; bala ‘child’, balalar ‘children’; universitet ‘university’, universitetlar ‘universities’; uram ‘street’, uramnar ‘streets’; bäjräm ‘holiday’, bäjrämnär ‘holidays’; urman ‘forest’, urmannar ‘forests’; idän ‘floor’, idännär ‘floors’; moè ‘melody’, pl. moènar; urynbasar ‘deputy’, ‘representative’, pl. urynbasarlar; kãmew kawyk ‘silver spoon’, pl. kãmew kawyklar; altyn sägatá ‘gold watch’, pl. altyn sägatálär; su asty kãjmäse ‘submarine’, pl. su asty kãjmäläre; tau bawy ‘mountain peak’, pl. tau bawlary; æir xuæasy ‘landowner’, pl. æir xuæalary; æimew bakhasy ‘orchard’, pl. æimew bakhalary; aw bålmäse ‘dining room’, pl. aw bålmäläre; qz kãne ‘spring day’, pl. qz kãnnäre. Note: During the period when the Tatar language was written with the Arabic script the plural suffix was always +lar, +lär, a tradition dating back to the ancient literary language. However, in the vernacular of the Volga Tatars (Kazan Tatars) the plural ending was pronounced +nar, +när after the nasals m, n, è. As the local dialect gradually replaced the old literary language with its rather numerous Arabic-Persian and Oghuz words and grammatical elements, and the Latin alphabet (Jaìalif) was adopted for the Tatar language, +nar, +när came to be expressed also in writing. The same applies to the ablative (237).

Functions and Meanings of the Plural [180] The plural denotes primarily more than one single person (animal), place, or thing. However, it may also express such meanings as collectivity, abundance, variety, comparison, approximateness, endearment, hyperbole, respect, deference, expressive stress. Examples:

51

a) Collectivity is mainly expressed in names of institutions and professional or political organizations: Qzuhylar oewmasy ‘Writers’ Association’, Socialistlar partiqse ‘the Socialist Party’. Tatarstan Fännär akademiqse ‘Academy of Sciences of Tatarstan’. · Ul Hallydagy Qzuhylar oewmasynyè buryhlary, iæat plannary turynda sãjläde ... (Kazan utlary No. 9, 1980.) He spoke about the duties, the work plans of the Writers’ Association in Chelny ... b) Abundance or variety is expressed with nouns designating basic materials or denoting collectivity: boz ‘ice’, bozlar ïri ‘the ice is melting’ (i.e., ‘everywhere’, ‘in many places’), su ‘water’, sular aga ‘water is flowing’ (‘the waters are flowing’), qègyr ‘rain’, qègyrlar qva ‘rain is falling (in abundance)’, çava ‘air’, ‘weather’, salkyn çavalar betmäde ‘the cold weather has not ended’ (‘it extends over a period of several days’), tämäke ‘tobacco’, tämäkelär ‘tobaccos’, ‘various brands of tobacco’, on ‘flour’, onnar ‘various grades of flour’. · Qz buldy, ... Taulardan sular aga gãrläp, warlap. (Därdmänd, Qz.) Spring has come, ... From the mountains flows the water (in many places), roaring and thundering. · Tywta issen ahy æillär, tuzsyn karlar, ... (Gabdulla Tukaj, Kywky kih.) Though outside biting winds are blowing, though the snow is swirling, ... ( everywhere, in many places). · Qz æitä, bozlar kitä, dip birde inde mart xäbär, ... (Tabdulla Tukaj, Qz galämätläre /Jaz ôðlðmðtlðre/.) March has already conveyed the message that Spring is arriving, that the ice is going away (everywhere). c) The plural expresses collectivity or comparison when joined to names of persons: Afzallar ‘the Afzals’, or: ‘Afzal and his family’, ‘Afzal and his entourage’, ‘Afzal and people of his kind’, ‘Afzal and people like him’; · Nasyjrilar, Tukajlar, Gafurilar kåtärgän mägârifäthelek ideqläre ‘the ideas of enlightenment advanced by Nasiri, Tuqai, Ghafuri and other similar educators’, (Kaîm Nasyjri, Tatar scholar, educator and writer, 1825-1902), (Mäæit Gafuri, Tatar-Bashkir poet and writer, 1880-1934). · · ... beläm min, barysyn da sizep toram: hiten sièa abyeènarda! (Fatix Xãsni, Bertugan Taçirovlar.) ... I know, I feel it all: It is difficult for you at your brother’s! · Ägâzämneè ätiläre mäktäp artynda gyna, biw katly taw jortnyè ãhenhe katynda toralar. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Qwel qr.) Äghzäm’s father and family live right behind the school, on the third floor of a five-storied masonry house. d) Approximateness may be expressed with regard to time or space: XX (egermenhe) gasyrnyè bawlarynda ‘approximately at the beginning of the 20th century’; but: XX gasyrnyè bawynda ‘at the beginning of the 20th century’, martnyè azaklarynda ‘around the end of March’, but: martnyè azagynda ‘at the end of March’, elganyè urtalarynda ‘approximately in the middle of the river’, elganyè urtasynda ‘in the middle of the river’, egerme metrlar ‘approximately 20 meters’, egerme metr ’20 meters’. · ... bu xikäqlärdä äjtelgän fikerlär XIII jãzlärdäge Idel bue tãrki xalyklary ãhen dä kiräkle çäm äçämiqtle fikerlär bulgannar, ... (Boryngy tatar ädäbiqty, r. 225.) ... the thoughts expressed in these stories were necessary and important thoughts also for the Turkic peoples who lived along the Volga around the 13th century, ...

52

· Avtory Mãxämmät Ämin dip tanylgan bu wigyrá Kazanda XV jãzneè axyrlarynda qisä XVI jãzneè bawlarynda qzylgan äsärlärneè berse dip xisaplana. (ibid. p. 343.) This poem, whose author is known to be Mökhämmät Ämin, is thought to be one of the works which were written in Kazan approximately at the end of the 15th or beginning of the 16th century. e) Hyperbole or endearment. The plural expressing hyperbole or endearment occurs particularly in folk tales: Agyjdellär awa uk attym I shot an arrow over the great (wide) river Aghidel (Belaya). · Agyjdelkäjlärneè qrlarynnan ‘Along the banks of the belovedAghidel (Belaya) · Agadyr la sular tavywsyz, ... The waters flow silently on and on, ...’ · (Gomär /Ôõmðp/ Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) f) Respect, deference. Joined to titles of high personalities, the plural (plus the possessive suffix) expresses respect, deference: Patwa æänaplary ‘His Highness, the Czar’, Mãfti xäzrätläre xãtbä ukydy His Excellency, the Mufti, read a hutba (sermon’. g) Expressive stress (emphasis): · Kilmä qkyn zäçärlänep ãsläremä! Come not close upon me in your anger! · Ertkyhlyk hykkan sineè jãzläreèä! (Çadi Taktaw) A wild fierceness has come upon your face! · ... Menä xäzer · ... Tynhurin ... bäläkäj täräzädän karap bara. Qkty dãnáqga karap bara. Ä dãnáq bigräklär dä matur ikän läbasa. (Gaziz Åzile, Gyjfrit.) Here now ... Tynchurin is riding, looking through the tiny little window ... He is riding, looking at the bright world. And (he now realizes) the world is truly beautiful. (Tynchurin is riding in a paddy wagon bringing him to the prison. But he is very, very happy because the judge has rejected the death penalty demanded by the prosecution, sentencing him instead to 13 years in prison).

Other Plural Forms [181] A small number of nouns, mostly designating parts of the body occurring in pairs, have retained the historical plural (or dual) in +k, or +z: kåkräk ‘breast’, aqk ‘foot’, kolak ‘ear’, myek ‘mustache’, qèak ‘cheek’, kåz ‘eye’, tez ‘knee’, mãgez ‘horns’, avyz ‘mouth’. In today’s Tatar language these forms are not felt any more as plurals (or duals) and, consequently, the above nouns may take the plural suffix +lar, +lär: kåzlär ‘eyes’, avyzlar ‘mouths’, aqklar ‘feet’, kolaklar ‘ears’, etc. Note: +z also occurs in the pronouns bez ‘we’, sez ‘you’, as well as in conjugational endings of the 1st and 2nd persons plural. The suffix +k remains active only as the ending of the first person plural of verbs in the past tense I indicative and of the first person plural of verbs in the conditional and optative moods.

[182] A small number of nouns borrowed from other languages (particularly from Arabic) may occur in their original plural forms. However, in contemporary Tatar, they are usually regarded as singular forms and are used with the plural suffix +lar, +lär: xokuk ‘(legal) right’ (Arabic plural of xak ‘right’), xokuklar ‘(legal) rights’, äsbaplar ‘means’, ‘utensils’, ‘implements’ (qzu äsbaplary ‘writing materials’), (äsbap Arabic plural of säbäp ‘reason’), wäraitlar ‘conditions’ (wärait Arabic plural of wart ‘condition’). Note: There are no nouns in Tatar which are used in the plural only.

53

The Article [183] Tatar has no definite article. The indefinite article is ber, which is etymologically identical with the numeral ber ‘one’. However, when used as a numeral, ber preserves its accent, while as an indefinite article it is proclitic: bép balŽa ‘one child’, bŽer Žãj ‘one house’, ber balŽa ‘a child’, ber Žãj ‘a house’. Compare also: Boryn-boryn zamanda ber kewenŽeè ike kyzy, bŽer ulŽy bulgan. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Ugi kyz.) Once upon a time a man had two daughters and one son. · Ber avylda ber kŽart belän ber karhŽyk bulgan. (ibid. Kart belän tãlke.) In a village there lived (lit., were) an old man and an old woman. · BŽer salkŽyn kyw kãne alar auga hyktylar. One cold winter day they went hunting. · SalkŽyn ber kŽyw kãne ide. It was a cold winter day (no special emphasis). Tatar nouns may be determinate, indeterminate or indeterminate-neutral. In the latter case it appears without the indefinite article. Hence, the noun at may mean ‘the horse’, ‘a horse’, or simply ‘horse’; ãj may mean ‘the house’, ‘a house’, or ‘house’. [184] The noun is determinate: a) When within a given context one or more particular persons (animals), or things are pointed out as distinct from others of the same kind (in English indicated by the use of the definite article): Kãn koqwly. The day is sunny. Kãnnär koqwly. The days are sunny. Çava saf. The air is clean. b) When it designates a person or thing previously mentioned: · – Äjtegez äle, Asiq /Asið/, tormywygyz nihek, avyr tågelme? – Niwläp avyr bulsyn, – dide xatyn, ... (Atilla Rasix, Urlangan xäzinä.) ”Tell me please, Asiä, how is your life, isn’t it difficult?” ”Why should it be difficult?” said the woman, ... · Kãtå kãtkän vakytta, moèa ber kart ohryj. Kart äjtä moèa: ... (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Alpamwa.) While he was tending herd he met an old man. The old man said to him: ... c) When it denotes a class or kind of persons, animals, or things: Ït – jort xajvany. The dog is a domestic animal. At ta – jort xajvany. The horse too is a domestic animal. Ït belän at – jort xajvannary. The dog and the horse are domestic animals. Note: There are various other determiners, such as numerals, possessive and demonstrative pronouns, etc. For these see the appropriate chapters.

Use of the Indefinite Article [185] The indefinite article is used when designating a person or thing as one of a general class or kind as opposed to one or more particular persons or things distinct from others of the same kind: · Boryn zamanda bar ide ber patwa. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Ak båre.) Once upon a time there was a king. · Kãtåhe äjtä: – ...mièa ber kãn kãtå kãtsäè, sièa ber at birermen, – di. (ibid. Ugi kyz.) The shepherd said. ... if you tend my herd for me for one day, I shall give you a horse. · Min, ber malaj belän, hitän buenda kaldym. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) I remained with a boy beside the fence.

54

[186] When the noun is described or limited by one or several attributs, the indefinite article may stand between the attribute(s) and the noun or it may precede the attribute(s). As a rule, the indefinite article stands between attribute(s) and noun (subject, object) when the latter’s quality, as described by the attribute(s), is presented by the narrator (writer) as news, as a specific characteristic in a given situation (actualization of speech). Furthermore, ber functions as a kind of tonal separator, i.e., it delimits the intonation of the attribute and the noun, which otherwise would merge in speech. As a result, the attribute retains its stress and assumes an even higher degree of quality: · ... aqz çäm salkynharak ber kãn ide. (Wärif Kamal, Akharlaklar.) ... it was a clear and somewhat chilly day. · Ozaklamyj uk iwek ahylyp, iwek arasynda mãlaem genä ber kyz kårende. (ibid.) Almost immediately the door opened and in the door appeared a rather pretty girl. · Bu wäçärneè urtasynda ... waktyj zur ber kål bulgan ... (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Kãngä kårenmäs Sylu-kãmew.) In the center of this town ... there was a rather large lake. · Wul minutta bik sylu, matur, alsu bitle, kara kawly ber kyz iwekne ahyp, egetneè sälamen aldy: ... (ibid., Ak båre.) That minute a very graceful, beautiful girl with rosy cheeks and dark eyebrows opened the door and welcomned the young man (lit., accepted the young man’s greeting). [187] The indefinite article precedes the attribute when the quality which it describes is not presented by the narrator (writer) as specific news, but merely as an ordinary characteristic already known and usually associated with the subject or object denoted by the noun: · Beraz bargannan soè, ber bik kue urmanga baryp æittelär. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Kãngä kårenmäs Sylu-kãmew.) After walking a little, they came to a very dense forest. · Îl buenda ber biek, zur agah tebendä utyrgan karhykka ohrawkan. (ibid., Hakma tawy.) On the way he met some old woman, who was sitting beside a big, tall tree. · Ãjdä äni belän åzebez genä kalyp irtänge häjne ïhkändä bezgä ber kehkenä kyz bala kilde. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) While mother and we were alone in the house having morning tea, a little girl came to us. (Reference is to the mother, her son and a friend of his.) ·

Menä Räwidäne dä bernihä kul mawina ãstenä tartyp aldylar. Ber käläpåwle eget any ièbawynnan kohaklady, ... (Ämirxan Eniki, Räwä.) There, several hands pulled Räshidä too unto the truck. A young man with a scullcap put his arm around her shoulder, ...

[188] Ber is not used when designating a person (animal), or thing in a collective or general sense: Min xat qzam. I am writing a letter. Altyn – zatly metall. Gold is a precious metal. Ul – wäkert. He is a student. · Ul (Mirxäjdär Fäjzi) – wagyjrá dä, xikäqhe çäm täræemähe dä. (Mirxäjdär Fäjzi, Galiqbanu, introduction.) He (Mirkheydär Feyzi) is a poet, a novelist, as well as a translator. · Ïsse æäj kãnendä salkyn su tämle. On a hot summer day (i.e., on any hot summer day) cool water is tasty. · – Qryj, äjtmäm, ser itep saklarmyn, – di kyz. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Patwa kiqve soldat.) “All right, I shall not tell, I shall keep it a secret,” said the girl. · – Maçibikä owadymy? – Bala bit äle ul. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) “Did you like Mahibikä?” “But she is still a child.”

55

[189] In some cases it makes little or no difference whether ber is used or not, while in others its omission often tends to indicate less emphasis on the noun itself, stressing rather its attribute(s): Ãstäldä ber kitap qta (or: Ãstäldä kitap qta). On the table there lies a book. Malaj ber kitap ukyj (or: Malaj kitap ukyj). The boy is reading a book. Äminä – matur kyz. Äminä is a beautiful girl (pronounced without any emphasis). Compare also: Ul – xezmät sãîhe, buldykly kyz. (Mirxäjdär Fäjzi, Galiqbanu.) She is an industrious, clever girl. · Avyldan ãh-dårt hakrym æirdä, ... matur su buena kilep æittelär. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Tire takyq.) At a place three or four versts from the village, ... they came to a beautiful stream.

The Arabic Definite Article [190] The Arabic definite article (äl, el)1) is used infrequently in contemporary Tatar. It occures mainly: a) In names of persons adopted from Arabic: Gajnetdin /Ôðjnetdin/, Wämsetdin, Gabdelxämit /Ôðbdelxðmit/, Zäjnelbäna, Älmãxämmätov, etc. b) In forms of greetings: Ässälamägaläjkem ‘Peace be with you’, Vägaläjkemässälam (the answer to it). c) In religious expressions: Älxämdelilla! ‘Praise God!’ d) In a very few individual words: älbättä ‘without fail’, ‘certainly’, ‘of course’, älxasyjl ‘in brief’. In Tatar classical literature as well as in Tatar newspapers and periodicals of the first two decades of the 20th century, the Arabic definite article occurs rather frequently: Älgasrelæädit ‘(The) New Century’ (name of a journal which appeared at the beginning of the 1900’s), Älislax ‘The Reform’ (name of a newspaper, contemporary of the above).

The Noun with Possessive Suffixes [191] The possessive pronouns “my”, “your”, “his”, “her”, “its”, “our”, “your”, “their”, are primarily rendered in Tatar by possessive suffixes joined to the noun designating the object possessed. They are subject to vowel harmony. Singular: 1st Person: 2nd Person: 3rd Person:

+m, +ym, +em +è, +yè, +eè +y, +e, +sy, +se

Plural: 1st Person: 2nd Person: 3rd Person:

+byz, +bez, +ybyz, +ebez +gyz, +gez, +ygyz, +egez +lary, +läre, +y, +e, +sy, +se

1)

56

The “l” of the article changes to d (t) /d (t)/, z /z/, n /n/, r /r/, s /s/, w /ø/, t /t/ when followed by one of these phonemes, i.e., “l” is assimilated. See: Garälhä-tatarha-rusha alynmalar såzlege, Tatarstan kitap näwriqty, Kazan 1965, rr. 843-844.

+m, +è, +sy, +se, +byz, +bez, +gyz, +gez are joined to stems ending in a vowel, except «u», «å». +ym, +em, +yè, +eè, +y, +e, +ybyz, +ebez, +ygyz, +egez are joined to stems ending in a consonant, or in «u», «å» +lary, +läre are attached to stems ending in a consonant or a vowel: balam ‘my child’, bålmäm ‘my room’, atym ‘my horse’, ïtem ‘my dog’, balaè ‘your child’, bålmäè ‘your room’, atyè ‘your horse’, ïteè ‘your dog’, balasy ‘his, her child’, bålmäse ‘his, her room’, atabyz ‘our father’, avylybyz ‘our village’, ïtebez ‘our dog’, almagyz ‘your apple’, ahkyhygyz ‘your key’, æiregez ‘your land’, duslary ‘their friend’, ‘his, her friends’, ‘their friends’, däresläre ‘their lesson’, ‘his, her lessons’, ‘their lessons’, ukuym ‘my reading’, kilåeè ‘your coming’, suy ‘his, her, its water’, ãjlärem ‘my houses’, duslarybyz ‘our friends’, ïtläregez ‘your dogs’. Nouns with final +i: Nouns ending in +i may belong to the front vowel or back vowel group of words. Front vowel words are, for example, äti ‘father’, äni ‘mother’, äbi ‘grandmother’, ipi ‘bread’, mi ‘brain’, pesi ‘cat’, axiri (A., vernacular) ‘bosom friend’, ‘intimate friend’, kãrsi (A.) ‘armchair’, kenäri (vern. känäri ‘canary’. Back vowel words are, for example, taksi ‘taxi’, ruxani (A.) ‘clergyman’. Words belonging to the front vowel group take the possessive suffixes +em, +eè, +e (+se), +ebez, +egez, +läre. Words of the back vowel group take +em, +eè, +e, +ebyz, +egyz, +lary, but «e» expressing here the sound jy: (taksijym /taksijím/, taksijyè /taksijíì/, taksijy /taksijí/, etc.). Note 1: To avoid the hiatus, stems ending in +u or +å (mostly verbal nouns) are pronounced with a slight glide, a slight “w”, and stems ending in +i with a slight “j” between the final vowel of the stem and the initial vowel of the suffix. Hence, suy, kilåeè, äbiebez are pronounced suwy, kilåweè, äbijebez. (Compare also 191 and 195,8). Note 2: Some words, e.g., seèel ‘younger sister’, abyj ‘older brother’, gãnaç ‘the sin’, the cardinals ber, ãh, dårt, biw, un, meè, the collective numerals beräå, ikäå, etc. may take the possessive suffix of the third person singular in either its regular form +y, +e, or its reduplicated form +ysy, +ese or +sy, +se. Hence: seèele or (preferred) seèelese, abye or abyjsy, gãnaçy or gãnaçysy (gãnaçsy), kåbe or kåbese, bary or barysy, bere, or (preferred) berse, dårte or dårtese, biwe or biwese, uny or unysy (unsy), meèe or meèese, beräve or berävese, ikäve or ikävese;

äti ‘father’, äni ‘mother’, äbi ‘grandmother’, though ending in i, take +se (not +e) in the third person singular: ätise, änise, äbise; rabbi, rabby, rabbe ‘God’, ‘Lord’ take the possessive suffixes in the following manner: rabbiem, rabbym, rabbem ‘My God’, ‘My Lord’. [192] Compound nouns take the possessive suffixes as follows: a) Compound nouns united by the third person possessive suffix +y, +e, +sy, +se remain unchanged if the possessor is the third person singular: æimew bakhasy ‘orchard’, (anyè) æimew bakhasy ‘his, her, its orchard’, aw bålmäse ‘dining room’, (anyè) aw bålmäse ‘his, her, its dining room’. In the first and second persons -y, -e, sy, se is replaced by the respective possessive endings: æimew bakham ‘my orchard’, æil tegermäneè ‘your windmill’, aw bålmäbez ‘our dining room’, aw bålmägez ‘your dining room’, (anyè) æimew bakhalary ‘his, her, its orchards’, æimew bakhalarym ‘my orchards’, æil tegermännäreè ‘your windmills’, aw bålmälärebez ‘our dining rooms’, aw bålmäläregez ‘your dining rooms’. b) With all other compound nouns the possessive suffix is joined to the last component: kãmew kawygym ‘my silver spoon’, kulâqzmabyz ‘our manuscript’, urynbasaryè ‘your deputy, representative’, ata-anagyz ‘your parents’. 57

[193] Nouns with the possessive suffixes may be emphasized or specified more precisely by using minem ‘my’, sineè ‘your’, anyè ‘his’, ‘her’, ‘its’, bezneè ‘our’, sezneè ‘your’, alarnyè ‘their’, which actually are genitives of the personal pronouns (see 388). If preceded by one of these pronouns, the possessive suffix may be omitted, except that of the 3rd person singular and plural.1) Examples: atym kitaplaryè ãe ïtlärebez däresegez balalary aw bålmäbez æimew bakham

minem atym sineè kitaplaryè anyè ãe bezneè ïtlärebez sezneè däresegez alarnyè balasy bezneè aw bålmäbez

aw bålmäse

minem æimew bakham anyè aw bålmäse

æimew bakhalary

anyè æimew bakhalary

minem at sineè kitaplar – bezneè ïtlär sezneè däres – bezneè aw bålmäse minem æimew bakhasy – –

my horse your books his, her house our dogs your lesson their child our dining room my orchard his, her, its dining room his, her, its orchards

Note: The possessive suffix of the third person may be omitted: a) In some dialects (including literary works in which a character speaks in his (or her) local dialect), as well as in poetry: Anyè ïw qxwy. (Sovremennyj tatarskij literaturnyj qzyk.) His affairs are getting on well. Bik matur ber ajly kihtä bu avylnyè ber eget Kitkän urmanga utynga, ... (Gabdulla Tukaj, Wåräle.) One very beautiful, moonlit evening, a young man of this village went into the forest for firewood, ... b) In the literary language in certain syntactical constructions. For example, if a possessive relation exists between a noun (or pronoun) designating the possessor, and two or more nouns designating the objects possessed, only the last noun may take the possessive suffix: Bezneè wäçärneè barlyk bakha çäm stadionnary. (Xäzerge tatar ädäbi tele.) All parks and stadiums of our city ...

[194] The suffix +lary, +läre, can have three different meanings, depending on its composition: a) bala+lary ‘their child’. The object possessed is in the singular and the possessive suffix in the 3rd person plural, indicating several possessors. b) balalar+y ‘his, her children’. The object possessed is in the plural and the possessive suffix joined to it is in the 3rd person singular, indicating one possessor. c) balalary ‘their children’. In this case the full form is theoretically bala+lar+lary, but for euphonic reasons +lar (+lär) is used only once. Thus, the plural refers here to both the possessors and the objects possessed. The exact meaning of +lary, +läre can usually be established from the context. In case of ambiguity, anyè, alarnyè should be used before the noun designating the object possessed. 1)

58

There is no difference in the meaning of the two forms. However, in the literary language it is better to use the full form i.e., minem kitabym instead of minem kitap, which is more characteristic of the spoken language.

Tables and Use of Nouns with Possessive Suffixes [195] 1. When the noun ends in a back vowel Singular: (Minem) (Sineè) (Anyè) (Bezneè) (Sezneè) (Alarnyè)

balam balaè balasy balabyz balagyz balasy, balalary

Minem Sineè Anyè Bezneè Sezneè Alarnyè

bala bala balasy bala bala balasy

my child your child his, her child our child your child their child

Plural: (Minem) (Sineè) (Anyè) (Bezneè) (Sezneè) (Alarnyè)

balalarym balalaryè balalary balalarybyz balalarygyz balalary

Minem Sineè Anyè Bezneè Sezneè Alarnyè

balalar balalar balalary balalar balalar balalary

my children your children his, her children our children your children their children

2. When the noun ends in a front vowel Singular: (Minem) (Sineè) (Anyè) (Bezneè) (Sezneè) (Alarnyè) Plural: (Minem) (Sineè) (Anyè) (Bezneè) (Sezneè) (Alarnyè)

bålmäm bålmäè bålmäse bålmäbez bålmägez bålmäse bålmäläre

Minem Sineè Anyè Bezneè Sezneè Alarnyè

bålmä bålmä bålmäse bålmä bålmä bålmäse

my room your room his, her room our room your room their room

bålmälärem bålmäläreè bålmäläre bålmälärebez bålmäläregez bålmäläre

Minem Sineè Anyè Bezneè Sezneè Alarnyè

bålmälär bålmälär bålmäläre bålmälär bålmälär bålmäläre

my rooms your rooms his, her rooms our rooms your rooms their rooms

3. When the noun ends in a consonant preceded by a back vowel Singular: (Minem) (Sineè) (Anyè) (Bezneè) (Sezneè) (Alarnyè)

kulym kulyè kuly kulybyz kulygyz kuly kullary

Minem Sineè Anyè Bezneè Sezneè Alarnyè

kul kul kuly kul kul kuly

my hand your hand his, her hand our hand your hand their hand

59

Plural: (Minem) (Sineè) (Anyè) (Bezneè) (Sezneè) (Alarnyè)

kullarym kullaryè kullary kullarybyz kullarygyz kullary

Minem Sineè Anyè Bezneè Sezneè Alarnyè

kullar kullar kullary kullar kullar kullary

my hands your hands his, her hands our hands your hands their hands

4. When the noun ends in a consonant preceded by a front vowel Singular: (Minem) (Sineè) (Anyè) (Bezneè) (Sezneè) (Alarnyè) Plural: (Minem) (Sineè) (Anyè) (Bezneè) (Sezneè) (Alarnyè)

wäçärem wäçäreè wäçäre wäçärebez wäçäregez wäçäre wäçärläre

Minem Sineè Anyè Bezneè Sezneè Alarnyè

wäçär wäçär wäçäre wäçär wäçär wäçäre

my town your town his, her town our town your town their town

wäçärlärem wäçärläreè wäçärläre wäçärlärebez wäçärläregez wäçärläre

Minem Sineè Anyè Bezneè Sezneè Alarnyè

wäçärlär wäçärlär wäçärläre wäçärlär wäçärlär wäçärläre

my towns your towns his, her towns our towns your towns their towns

ukuym ukuyè ukuy ukuybyz ukuygyz ukuy ukulary

Minem Sineè Anyè Bezneè Sezneè Alarnyè

uku uku ukuy uku uku ukuy

my reading your reading his, her reading our reading your reading their reading

ukularym ukularyè ukulary ukularybyz ukularygyz ukulary

Minem Sineè Anyè Bezneè Sezneè Alarnyè

ukular ukular ukulary ukular ukular ukulary

my readings your readings his, her readings our readings your readings their readings

Minem Sineè Anyè Bezneè Sezneè Alarnyè

kilå kilå kilåe kilå kilå kilåe

my coming your coming his, her coming our coming your coming their coming

5. When the noun ends in «u» Singular: (Minem) (Sineè) (Anyè) (Bezneè) (Sezneè) (Alarnyè) Plural: (Minem) (Sineè) (Anyè) (Bezneè) (Sezneè) (Alarnyè)

6. When the noun ends in a «å» Singular: (Minem) (Sineè) (Anyè) (Bezneè) (Sezneè) (Alarnyè)

60

kilåem kilåeè kilåe kilåebez kilåegez kilåe kilåläre

Plural: (Minem) (Sineè) (Anyè) (Bezneè) (Sezneè) (Alarnyè)

kilålärem kilåläreè kilåläre kilålärebez kilåläregez kilåläre

Minem Sineè Anyè Bezneè Sezneè Alarnyè

kilålär kilålär kilåläre kilålär kilålär kilåläre

my comings your comings his, her comings our comings your comings their comings

7. When the noun is a front vowel word ending in «i» Singular: (Minem) (Sineè) (Anyè) (Bezneè) (Sezneè) (Alarnyè)

ipiem ipieè ipie ipiebez ipiegez ipie ipiläre

Minem Sineè Anyè Bezneè Sezneè Alarnyè

ipi ipi ipie ipi ipi ipie

my bread your bread his, her bread our bread your bread their bread

(Minem) (Sineè) (Anyè) (Bezneè) (Sezneè) (Alarnyè)

äbiem äbieè äbise äbiebez äbiegez äbise

Minem Sineè Anyè Bezneè Sezneè Alarnyè

äbi äbi äbise äbi äbi äbise

my grandmother your grandmother his, her grandmother our grandmother your grandmother their grandmother

Plural: (Minem) (Sineè) (Aniè) (Bezneè) (Sezneè) (Alarnyè)

äbilärem äbiläreè äbiläre äbilärebez äbiläregez äbiläre

Minem Sineè Anyè Bezneè Sezneè Alarnyè

äbilär äbilär äbiläre äbilär äbilär äbiläre

my grandmothers your grandmothers his, her grandmothers our grandmothers your grandmothers their grandmothers

8. When the noun is a back vowel word ending in «i» Singular: (Minem) (Sineè) (Anyè) (Bezneè) (Sezneè) (Alarnyè) Plural: (Minem) (Sineè) (Anyè) (Bezneè) (Sezneè) (Alarnyè)

taksiem taksieè taksie taksiebyz taksiegyz taksie takeiläry

/taksijám/ /taksijáì/ /taksijá/ /taksijábáz/ /taksijáôáz/ /taksijá/

taksilarym taksilaryè taksilary taksilarybyz taksilarygyz taksilary

Minem Sineè Anyè Bezneè Sezneè Alarnyè

taksi taksi taksie /taksijá/ taksi taksi taksie /taksijá/

my taxi your taxi his taxi our taxi your taxi their taxi

Minem Sineè Anyè Bezneè Sezneè Alarnyè

taksilar taksilar taksilary taksilar taksilar taksilary

my taxis your taxis his taxis our taxis your taxis their taxis

61

[196] Examples or the use of the possessive suffixes: · Bergäläwep Agyjdel /Aôidel/ buena – minem tugan avylyma kajttyk. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) Together we returned to the banks of the Belaya, to my native village. · Ul minem kåzläremä tup-tury karap, bik az gyna vakyt xäräkätsez qtty ... (ibid.) Looking straight into my eyes, he lay still for only a very short while ... · – Oqlyp utyrma, ulym, awa äle! (Gomär Bawirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) ”Don’t be bashful, my son, eat, please!” · Kitaplarymnan aerylu aeruha kyen buldy. (ibid.) Parting with my books was especially difficult. · Sineè qweèdä mädräsägä jãrergä kiräk ide ... (ibid.) At your age you should attend (lit., go to) the medrese (Moslem religious high school). · Irtägesen bezneè kaçarmannar /qðhðrmannar/ or /qaharmannar/ îlga hyktylar. (Atilla Rasix, Bäxet orlyklary.) In the morning our heroes set out on the road. · Boryn-boryn zamanda ... bar ide, di, ber kart belän karhyk. Alarnyè balalary îk ide, ... (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Kamyr batyr.) Long, long ago ... there lived an old man and an old woman. They had no children. ... · Bolar ... wul korallary belän kul kãhläre arkasynda tamaklaryn tujdyralar ide. (Mäæit Gafuri, Qrlylar qki ãjdäw xatyn.) They ... were making a living with those tools of theirs and physical work. · [Balalar] jãgerep, atalary alyp kajtkan närsälär qnyna baryp, totyp-totyp karadylar. (ibid.) [The children] came running and, going up to the things which their father had brought, looked them over, taking them (in their hands) again and again. · Gabdulla iptäwläre belän ... Wäbärde urmanyna kitte. (Äxmät Fäjzi, Tukaj.) Ghabdulla went with his friends into ... the forest of Shäbärde. · Gabdulla alarnyè berse belän dä qrywa almyj. (ibid.) Ghabdulla cannot compete with any of them. · Wuwy ujlar belän Iskändär «Àiguli»en garaàdan hygardy. ... «Àiguli»nyè tigez genä gåläp ïwli bawlavy Iskändärneè kåèelen kåtärep æibärde. (Gaziz Åzile, Gyjfrit.) With these thoughts in mind Iskändär took his “Zhiguli” out of the garage ... The “Zhiguli’s” beginning to run with a steady hum cheered Iskändär up. (Zhiguli, a make of passenger car.) [197] If the object possessed belongs to a subject appearing in the third person singular or plural, åz, ‘own’ in its possessive case – åzeneè, åzläreneè – must be used instead of the possessive pronouns anyè, alarnyè. The word denoting the object possessed takes the respective possessive suffix. For example: Ul åzeneè iptäwen kårde. He (she) saw his (her) friend. But: Ul anyè iptäwen kårde. He saw his (someone else’s) friend. Alar åzläreneè iptäwen kurdelär. They saw their friend. Åz in its possessive form may also function as the possessive pronoun of the first and second persons singular and plural: Min åzemneè kilähägem turynda ujlyjm. I am thinking about my (own) future. Sin åzeèneè dusyèny kårdeème? Did you see your friend? Bez åzebezneè dusybyzny kårdek. We saw our friend. All of these forms serve to place a strong emphasis on the subject, to underscore his (her, its) importance. (See also 409.) ·

62

– Ällä åzegezneè dä kågärhennäregez barmy? – dide. · Åzebezdä îk îklykka! Latifa tåtilärdä bar. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) “Perhaps you (plural) too have pigeons?” said she. “We do not have any! (But) aount Latifa (and her family) have.” (For îk îklykka, see 1238, b).

Gabdulla åzeneè baj æir turyndagy xyqlynnan ajnyp, Safuw fikerenä kuwyldy. (Äxmät Fäjzi, Tukaj.) Sobering from his dream about rich soil, Ghabdulla agreed with Safush’s view. · Åzeneè åtkäne belän danlykly bu boryngy çäm tyngysyz wäçär ... (ibid.) This ancient and restless city which is famous for its past ... ·

[198] The possessive suffix of the 3rd person (+y, +e, +sy, +se), besides expressing possession, has also the following functions: a) Joined to common and proper nouns (including names of persons) it concretizes a person, animal, thing, idea, etc. (persons, animals, things, ideas, etc.) and singles him (her, it, them) out from among two or more of a similar class. To a certain degree it comes close to the definite article in Germanic and Romance languages. However, it is not identical with it. Furthermore, it is used in the partitive sense. In this function it is similar to the partitive article in French; in English expressed by “some”, “any”, or not rendered at all, the partitive sense being understood. · Ujhan kewe çaman wunda ide ... Kãtkän kewese kilmägän ... (Gaziz Mãxämmätwin, Jãräktäge ïzlär.) The day-dreamer was still there (i.e., at the same place as before) ... Apparently, the person he has been waiting for has not come ... · [Galimæan Ibraçimov] Ufada ozak tuktalmyj. Qkyn kårgän keweläre belän kårewkälägäh, avylyna kajtu xästären kårä. (G. Ibraçimov turynda istäleklär, Ismägyjlá Rämiev.) [Ghalimjan Ibrahimov] does not stay long in Ufa. After he has visited (i.e., visited here and there) the people whom he considers close, he prepares to return to his village. (For the frequentative in -gala, -gälä, see 1310, 2). ·

· ·

· · ·

·

– Sezne kårergä kildek, – [dide Bibinur ...] – Bez bik borhyldyk, Xäbib abyj, – dip ãstäde Sara, äkren genä. - Wulajmyni? – didem min ... – Äjdägez, alajsa kerik ... Kyzlar tagyn karawyp aldylar. Sarasy xätta bawyn da selekkändäj itte. Kurkalar, axrysy, kurkalar, biharalar! (Ämirxan Eniki, Vãædan.) “We came to see you,” [Bibinur said ...] “We were very upset, Khäbib,” Sarah added softly. “Is that so? “I said ... “Then come on, let’s go in.” The girls exchanged looks again. It even appeared as though Sarah (the one who was Sarah) shook her head. Obviously, they were afraid, the poor things. (Abyj, ‘older brother’, ‘uncle’, is used in addressing a person older than oneself). ... dagasyz atlarnyè toqklaryna qbywyp katkan bozlary säbäple tarta almyj, ärle-birle selkenåläre, ... tirläp hykkan parlary ãslärenä bäs bulyp qbywkah, ap-ak bulyp kårenåläre kãnneè räximsez salkyn ikänen kårsätä ide. (Mäæit Gafuri, Qrlylar.) ... the tottering of the horses unable to pull because of the ice which was frozen to their unshod hoofs, ... their looking all white from the steam resulting from sweating and settling upon them as hoarfrost, ... showed that the day was mercilessly cold. Bäqse 90 tien. The price (of this journal) is 90 kopecks. Xaæäte kalmady. There has remained no need of it. Kåèeldä matur xislär tawyj, alarny äjtep biräse kilä, läkin äjtep birer harasyn belmilär, ... (Mädinä Malikova. Ak davylda tal bãrese.) The heart is flowing over with beautiful feelings. They wish to express them, but they do not know the way to express them (lit., the way which will express them), ... Annary atna kihlären avyl malajlary bolarga sädaka itep äz-mäz onyn, qrmasyn, jomyrkasyn, sãten dä kitergälilär ikän. (Ämirxan Eniki, Hikertkä.) Then, on Thursdays (so they say), the village boys brought them as a charitable gift also a little flour, some groats, some eggs, milk. 63

Awxanä zaly gaæäp zur, matur. Ap-ak awâqulyk æäelgän ãställär, kyzyl xätfäle uryndyklar. Kewe saen kawygy, hänehkese, pyhagy kuelgan. (G. Ibraçimov turynda istäleklär, Ismägyjlá Rämiev.) The restaurant room is amazingly large, beautiful. There are tables covered with snow-white tablecloths (and) red plush chairs. For each person a spoon, a fork (and) a knife have been laid out. · Gomumän, bajlyk berkajhan da kewelärgä tigez birelmägän, bawkortlarda da boryn-borynnan uk bae da, qrlysy da bulgan. (Ämirxan Eniki, Soègy kitap.) In general, wealth has never been given equally to people. With the Bashkirs too there have from time immemorial been rich as well as poor. · Bez iè gadi /ôadi/ kãnkårew mäsáälälärennän alyp bãten dãnáq kålämendäge problemalarga kadär baryp æitäbez. Amerikasy da, Evropasy da, Aziqse dä, Afrikasy da hittä kalmyj. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) We go from the simplest matters of life to problems of world proportion. Neither America nor Europe, nor Asia, nor Africa are left out. b) It substantivizes other parts of speech (adjectives, numerals, pronouns, adverbs, postpositions, etc.), concretizes and singles out as described in a). (See 321-323, 425, 574). c) It pronominalizes other parts of speech, concretizing and singling them out. (See 434, 441, 442). d) It forms adverbs. (See 598). ·

[199] In the vernacular the possessive suffix of the third person singular is often used to add color or a certain emotional f lavor (warmth, softness, pleasantness, politeness, emphasis, affection, admiration, praise, dissatisfaction, criticism, regret, disappointment) to the speech: · – Q /Jð/, räxim itegez, çärkem telägänen alsyn. Menä alma, jãzem ... Menä kyqry, pomidory, käbestäse. Menä salaty. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Qwel qr.) “Now, please, everybody take what he likes. Here are apples, grapes ... Here are some cucumbers, tomatoes, cabbage. Here is salad.” (Politeness, pleasantness). · Min æitärlek rizyk alyp kildem. Ipie dä, mae, kåkäe dä, digän wikelle ... Anda ... baly da äz-mäz bar ide. (Atilla Rasix, Kaçarmannar îly.) I had brought along enough food, such as bread, butter, eggs ... There was also a little ... honey. (i.e., there was everything, nothing was missing). · Soèga kalyrga da qramyj ... Sièa kiräktä taksie tabylamy? (Aqz Gyjläæev /Ajaz Ôilðçev/, Uramnar artynda qwel bolyn.) Arriving late (at work) is not right either .... (But) do you ever find a taxi when you need it? (Dissatisfaction, criticism). · ... äti arba turynda däwmi kala almady. – Ïx! · dip kujdy. – Arbasy arba gyna tågel ide, äräm kitte. (Mirsäj Ämir, Bez bäläkäj haklarda.) ... Father could not keep silent about that wagon. “Ah,” said he, “the wagon was such a good wagon,” (lit., the wagon was not just a wagon) “it’s ruined.” (Praise and regret). [200] Ana, äni ‘mother’, and ata, äti ‘father’, with the possessive suffix of the third person singular may be used as affectionate address between husband and wife: · · Anasy! Anasy! Sin kajda? Tiz ker, kunak kilde! (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Tirän tamyrlar.) “Mother! Mother! Where are you? Come in quickly, a guest has arrived!” · Æamali bu avyr tãwlärdän vatylyp uqndy: – Anasy, – dide, – min katy avyryjm ... (ibid.) Jamali awoke tired from these heavy dreams and said, “Mother, I am severely ill ...”

64

[201] The possessive suffix of the third person singular joined to a noun (including proper nouns) and the same noun repeated without the possessive suffix expresses indifference of the subject to actions or conditions not concerning himself (herself): · Läjli. Mirkäe Mirkäj. Menä kyzym närsä buldy. ... menä kyzym gyna terelsen ide äle. (Näkyj Isänbät, Mirkäj belän Ajsylu.) Leyli. Never mind Mirkey (who cares about Mirkey). Here, what has become of my daughter. ... if my daughter would only recover. · Zum-Zum. Xaribdasy Xaribda, änä anyè tegendä argysy, Scilla digäne bar äle anyè. (Näkyj Isänbät, Spartak.) Zum-Zum. Never mind Charybdis (forget about Charybdis); there, beyond it, there is still Scylla. · Wakiry Wakir, mäktäptän kitkän – ïwe betkän. Ä bit Kärimäneè tagy ber el ukyjsy bar äle, ... (Mirsäj Ämir, Qlantau keweläre.) Never mind Shakir. He has left school. He has finished (lit., his work is finished). But Kärimä has to study for still another year, ... (Indifference towards Shakir, sympathy with a tinge of pity for Kärimä).

The Independent Possessive Pronouns [202] The independent possessive pronouns (in English ‘mine’, ‘yours’, ‘his’, ‘hers’, etc.), which cannot be followed by a noun, are formed by joining the suffix +nyky, +neke1) to the personal pronouns: mineke ‘mine’, sineke ‘yours’, anyky ‘his, hers, its’, bezneke ‘ours’, sezneke ‘yours’, alarnyky ‘theirs’. In the same way +nyky, +neke may also be joined to other pronouns and nouns to express possession: kemneke? ‘whose?’, Äxmätneke ‘Äkhmät’s’, Bulatnyky ‘Bulat’s’, balanyky ‘the child’s’, balalarnyky ‘the children’s’, ïwhelärneke ‘the workers’. The plural is formed by adding +lar, +lär to the suffix ´+nyky, +neke: minekelär ‘mine’, ‘these (those) belonging to me’, anykylar ‘his, hers’, ‘these (those) belonging to him, her’, Äxmätnekelär, Bulatnykylar, balanykylar ‘Äkhmät’s’, ‘these (those) belonging to Äkhmät, etc., kårwelärnekelär ‘the neighbors’, ‘these (those) belonging to the neighbors’. In case of double possession +nyky, +neke, is joined to the possessive stem: Fatyjma kyzynyky ‘Fatima’s daughter’s’, ‘these (those) belonging to Fatima’s daughter’, alarnyè balalarynyky ‘their children’s’, ‘this (that) belonging to their children’, bu firmanyè xezmätkärläreneke ‘this company’s employees’ ‘, ‘this (that) belonging to this company’s employees’. [203] The singular forms are used to denote possession of: a) One object. · Bu kitap mineke. This book is mine. · – At mineke, mineke! – Îk ätäh sineke, at mineke! (Äxmät Fäjzi, Tukaj.) “The horse is mine, mine!” “No, the cock is yours, the horse is mine!” · Anyè ãstendä, mineke kebek åk, æièsez heltär kålmäk, ... (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) On him is a sleeveless net shirt, just like mine, ... · Märáqm bu tavywny tanyj: ul Zyqnyè seèeleseneke. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Qwá jãräklär.) Märyäm knows this voice; it is that of Zia’s younger sister. 1)

The suffix +nyky, +neke actually consists of the genitive suffix +nyè, +neè +ke, i.e., +nyè+ky > +nyky, +neè+ke > +neke.

and the suffix +ky,

65

b) Several objects forming a collective. · Çärberseneè diqrlek tovary awlyk, ä Zaçirlarnyky – ärdänä. (Taçir Taçirov, Galiq.) Almost everybody’s goods were grain, but the Zahirs’ were stacks of firewood. · · ... maennan räxim itegez – Bäläbäj zavodynyky. (ibid.) “... please, take butter – it is from the Bäläbey dairy.” (lit., it is the Bäläbey factory’s). c) Several objects if the possessor(s) is (are) the predicate of the sentence. · Bu kitaplar anyky. These books are his. Bu kitaplar alarnyky. These books are theirs. Idändäge uenhyklar balanyky. The toys on the floor belong to the child. Ul däftärlär Bulatnyky. Those copybooks are Bulat’s. (Tatar Grammar.) · ... åzebezneè avylnyky bulganga, bernärsä dä birmi åtälär. (Galimæan Ibranimov, Kyzyl hähäklär.) ... as they belong to our own village, they pass through without giving anything. [204] The plural forms are used to denote possession of several objects if the possessor(s) is (are) the subject or object in a sentence: · Minem karandawlarym kara, seznekelär kyzyl. My pencils are black; yours are red. · Bezneè ãj bik matur, läkin kårwelärnekelär dä matur. Our house is very beautiful, but the neighbors’ (houses) are also beautiful. · – Minem räsemnärne kårdegezme? – Îk, seznekelärne kårmädem, ämma Bulatnykylarny kårdem. “Have you seen my pictures?” “No, I have not seen yours, but I have seen Bulat’s.” · ... Tubalnykylar wakmakny baryp utyrtyp kujdylar. Xäzer hirat Xälimnekelärneke ide. (Ibraçim Gazi, Onytylmas ellar.) ... Tubal’s team (i.e., those belonging to Tubal) went and set up the cubes. Now it was Khälim’s team’s turn (the turn of those belonging to Khälim). Note: In the vernacular +nyky, +neke may be joined to past participles in -gan, -gän to indicate cause. (See 1085.)

[205] Possession may also be expressed by the suffix +ly, +le. Joined to nouns, it forms adjectives indicating a quality or an object possessed (see also 129, b). The possessor is expressed by the noun which the adjective in +ly, +le modifies: · Bawkalar da çärkem kulynnan kilgänhä, atly – aty belän, atsyzy – kul kãhe belän bulywyp, ... (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Kyzyl hähäklär.) The others too, everyone helping as he could, those who had horses – with their horses, those who had no horses – with their hands, ... · Räwidäneè ãstendä kiè itäkle, tar æièle qbyk qkaly kara-zäègär ozyn kålmäk ide. (Ämirxan Eniki, Räwä.) Räshidä was dressed in a long, dark blue dress, which had a wide skirt, narrow sleeves and a high collar. · · Ãjle bulu mièa bäxetneè iè olysy bulyp kårende. (Mägâsåm Nasyjbullin, Qrkanat.) «To own a house appeared to me as the greatest happiness.» · Bazar kajnyj, ... kysyk kåzle, ... kara-sory hikmännän huvawlar, kiè maègajly eltyr kåzle, ak hikmänle kara bawkortlar, kåbese itekle, kartuzly, kyska kiemle, zur sary sakally, ozyn myekly ruslar, ... ozyn kara kiemle poplar, ak jãzle, ... kara kazakily, itekle qki hitek-kävewle säådägär tatarlar, – çämmäse alalar, satalar, ... (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Kyzyl hähäklär.) The market is in full swing, ... narrow-eyed, ... Chuvash in dark gray armiaks, swarthy Bashkirs with broad foreheads and flashing, restless eyes, clad in white armiaks, Russians, most 66

of them wearing boots, caps, short (street)-clothes and having big, blond beards (and) long moustaches, ... priests in long, black attire, Tatar merchants of light complexion (lit., pale faced), ... in black casaques, boots or Morocco leather boots, all of them are buying, selling, ...

Tatar Substitute for the Verb “to have” [206] With the addition of bar ‘there is’, ‘there are’, and îk ‘there is not’, ‘there are not’, the possessive suffixes are used to express “to have”, “to possess”, “to have no”, “to possess no”. The possessive pronouns may precede the noun designating the object possessed: (Minem) (Sineè) (Anyè) (Bezneè) (Sezneè) (Alarnyè)

sägatem bar sägateè bar sägate bar sägatebez bar sägategez bar sägate bar

I have a watch You have a watch He, she has a watch We have a watch You have a watch They have a watch

(Minem) (Sineè) (Anyè) (Bezneè) (Sezneè) (Alarnyè)

qxwy ber kitabym bar qxwy ber kitabyè bar qxwy ber kitaby bar qxwy ber kitabybyz bar qxwy ber kitabygyz bar qxwy ber kitaby bar

I have a good book You have a good book He, she has a good book We have a good book You have a good book They have a good book

(Minem) (Sineè) (Anyè) (Bezneè) (Sezneè) (Alarnyè)

vakytym îk vakytyè îk vakyty îk vakytybyz îk vakytygyz îk vakyty îk

I have no time You have no time He, she has no time We have no time You have no time They have no time

Note: When used to convey the meaning “to have”, or “not to have”, bar and îk occur only in the present and past I tenses of the indicative. In other tenses and in the conditional the auxiliary verb bulu is used.

Sezneè matur ber ãegez bar. You have a beautiful house. Bezneè akhabyz îk. We have no money. Kihä minem däresem îk ide. Yesterday I had no lesson. Sineè altyn sägateè bar. You have a golden watch. Anyè ike kyzy1) bar ide. He (she) had two daughters. Compare also: · ... Qxwy kålmägem belän äjbät itegem bar ide. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Kyzyl hähäklär.) ... I had a good shirt and fine boots. · – Äbkäem, bik xarap susadym. Bozly äjräneè îkmy? (ibid.) “Granny, I am awfully thirsty. Don’t you have (some) ice-cold eyrän (sour milk diluted with cold water)?” · Bezneè Almahuardan bawka ike atybyz1) bar. (ibid.) Besides Almachuar we have two horses. 1)

After numerals the noun appears in the singular.

67

·

·

· ·

·

·

– Bågengä vakytym îk, irtägä sãjläwerbez, dip kitep tä bardy. (Ämirxan Eniki, Saz hähäge.) “(For) today I have no time, we shall talk tomorrow,” said he and left abruptly. Xisam abzyj – kart kewe, Färbizä isemle buj æitkän kyzynnan bawka ber keme îk. (Wäjxi Mannur, Agymsularga karap.) Uncle Khisam is an old man, he has no one except his grown-up daughter Färbizä. Boryn zamanda bar ide ber patwa. Anyè dårt uly bar ide. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Ak båre.) Once there was a king. He had four sons. Eget äjtä: – Îk, – di, – min ãjgä kajtyjm inde, – di. Minem ãjdä ätiem-äniem bar, ... Alarnyè båtän balalary îk, ... (ibid. Ãh kågärhen.) The young man said: “No, I’ll return home now. I have parents (lit., my parents) at home, ... They have no other children, ...” – Xäjri. ... Zãçrä belän Väligä äjt, ... alarda minem jomywym bar. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Qèa kewelär.) Kheyri. ... Tell Zöhrä and Wäli, I have a message for them. Äåväl zamanda bulgan, di, ber ir belän ber xatyn. Bolarnyè un malajlary bulgan. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Unberenhe Äxmät.) Once there was a man and a woman. They had ten boys (so they say).

[207] When expressing “to have”, the possessive suffix may be omitted when the noun designating the object possessed is preceded by minem, sineè, etc., and the object is not singled out from among others: · Kalanyè urtasynda, iè zur uramda, minem jort bulyr ... (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Kyzyl hähäklär.) I shall have a house in the center of town, on the largest street, ... · Bezneè kyzylly-karaly bik matur palas bar ide, ... (Wäjxi Mannur, Agymsularga karap.) We had a very beautiful carpet, which had a reddish and blackish hue, ... [208] If the object possessed designates a property or character trait usually inherent in, or part of, the owner, or if the object is qualified in a way indicating that the owner usually, generally, or in an indefinite manner, possesses or lacks possession of the object, bula (3rd person singular of bulu ‘to be’) and bulmyj (negative form of bula) are used instead of bar and îk: · Kihke sägatá altyga kadär /qðdðr/, buw vakytym bar. I am free (lit., I have free time) until six o’clock at night. · Kihke sägatá altyga kadär /qðdðr/, gadättä /ôðdðttð/, buw vakytym bula. I usually have free time until six o’clock at night. · – Bu atna azagynda sièa kilä almyjm, hãnki kåp ïwem bar. “This weekend I cannot come to you because I have much work.” · – Atna azaklarynda ãjdä ïwem kåp bula. “On weekends I have (usually) much work at home.” · Alarnyè bawkalardan aerylyp torgan åzenhälekläre dä bulmyj bugaj. (Gomär Bäwirov, Kãnnärneè berendä.) It seems that they have also no characteristics ... which would distinguish them from others. · Kåke kyhkyrmyj, æäjneè qme bulmyj. (Proverb.) Without the cuckoo calling, summer has no charm. · Bolytly kãnneè ber aqzy da bula. (Proverb.) A cloudy day too has a bright spot.

68

[209] “To have”, “to possess” may also be expressed by bar and îk and the noun designating the possessor in the locative: · Bawtarak minem hybyrky îk ide. Bãten malajlarda bar, mindä îk. (Wäjxi Mannur, Agymsularga karap.) At first I had no whip. All the boys had (lit., have) one, I had (lit., have) none.

Declension of Nouns [210] The singular, plural and possessive forms of the noun may be used as stems to which the various case suffixes are joined. There are six cases in Tatar: Nominative,1) genitive, dative, accusative, locative, ablative.

Nominative [211] The nominative always corresponds to the stem. It is used in the following constructions: a) The subject: Koqw hykty. The sun has risen. Tamawa bawlandy. The performance has begun. Kãn koqwly. The day is sunny! b) The predicate nominative (or its basic component): At – bik fajdaly xajvan. The horse is a very useful animal. Idel – zur su îly. The Volga is a large waterway. Idel – bãten Evropada iè ozyn elga. The Volga is the longest river in all of Europe. Note: In the affirmative present tense indicative, or when not referring to a specific time (timelessness), a predicate noun may take the predicate endings:2)

+myn, +men +syè, +seè +dyr, +der, +tyr, +ter +byz, +bez +syz, +sez +lar, +lär

for for for for for for

the the the the the the

first person singular second person singular third person singular first person plural second person plural third person plural

Examples: Min ïwhemen. I am a worker. Sin wäkertseè! You are a student. Alar qzuhylar. They are writers. Tatar bit min, åzem dä hyn tatarmyn. (Gabdulla Tukaj, Åz-åzemä.) After all, I am a Tatar, I myself too am a true Tatar. · ... Ozyn kyjlyp (now spelled: kylyp) saldyrdy timer îly. ... Dãnáqda berenhe ozyn îldyr, ... (Mäæit Gafuri, Seber timer îly.) ... He has had the railroad built long. ... It is the world’s first long railroad, ... ·

c) The attribute: · Bu timer îl kewene itär xäjran, ... (ibid.) This railroad (lit., iron way/road) amazes man, ... 1) Also called “basic case” or “zero.form”. 2) In the present Tatar literary language these endings are usually not used.

69

Kãmew alkalar silver earrings. Minem kitaplar wårlegändä ... æiz kyègyrau tora. (Ämirxan Eniki, Æiz kyègyrau.) On my bookshelf there stands a ... brass bell. d) The vocative (nominative of direct address): · ¡ Saniq, sin kaq kitteè? (Mirsäj Ämir, Qlantau keweläre.) “Saniä, where did you go?” · Faizä. Tårdän uzygyz, Mãxämmätæan, räxim itegez. (Kärim Tinhurin, Josyf belän Zãläjxa.) Faizä. Come on in, Mökhämmätjan, please! · Räwit. Änkäj, bågen bezgä Iláqs äfände kilähäk. (Kärim Tinhurin, Nazly kiqå.) Räshit. Mommy, today Mister Ilyas will come to (see) us. e) The exclamatory nominative: · Kyz. Karagyz, karagyz! Nindi ir! (Näkyj Isänbät, Spartak.) The girl. Look, look! What a man! · Sura. Äle senatorlar kilmägän. Ä xalyk! (ibid.) Sura. The senators have not yet arrived. But the people! · – Kilegez, kåregez, gladiatorlar! (ibid.) “Come, see, the gladiators!” f) Appositive with a nominative: · Îk, kart qxwylap kårmägänder, bu – ul, Narhatka. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Kart mukwy.) No, the old man had apparently not got a good look at her. This is she, Narchatka. · · Sez, tutawlar, mine kiheregez inde, åzegezne genä kaldyryrga tury kilä. (Ämirxan Eniki, Gãländäm tutaw xatiräse.) “You, young ladies, please, do forgive me, I must leave you to yourselves.” · ·

(For inde following a verb in the imperative mood, see 928). ·

Ägär anyè 29 ellyk gomere /ôomere/ buwka uzmagan bulsa, ul ¡ aek akylga iq kewe ¡ kartajdym, dip utyrmas ide. (Fatix Ämirxan, Kartajdym, quoted from: XX jãz bawy tatar ädäbiqty.) If his life of 29 years had not been wasted, he, a sober-minded man (lit., a man possessing a sober mind), would not keep saying that he had grown old (lit., would not say: I have grown old).

Genitive [212] The genitive is formed by joining +nyè, +neè to the stem: atnyè ‘of the horse’, atlarnyè ‘of the horses’, ïwneè ‘of the work’, ïwlärneè ‘of the works’, bålmäbezneè ‘of our room’, bålmäläregezneè ‘of your rooms’. [213] The genitive is used: 1. To designate possessive relation between nouns. As a rule, the noun governing the genitive follows the governed noun and takes a third person possessive ending (+y, +e, +sy, +se, +lary, +läte), as required. This construction may denote: a) Actual ownership or possession: Ojneè xuæasy ‘the owner of the house’, ukuhynyè kitaby ‘the student’s book’, Äxmätneè däftäre ‘Äkhmät’s copybook’. · Argamaknyè nehkä ozyn aqklary æirgä dä timi. Ägär dä kãhle toqklary, timerheneè håkehe tãsle, tawlardan utlar hähep tavyw hygarmasalar, any, çavada oha ikän, dip ujlarlyk ide. Kuherynyè ïwläpäsenä kystyrylgan tutyj kow kauryjlary koqw nurlarynda æem-æem kilep æilferdilär. (Kärim

70

Tinhurin, Berenhe märæän.) The steed’s slender, long legs do not even touch the ground. If its strong hoofs did not, like a smith’s hammer, produce a sound and cause sparks to fly from the pavement, one might think that it was floating in the air. The peacock feathers, which are stuck into its coachman’s hat, sway and glisten in the sunshine. · · ... qktawlarny häjgä alyp ker, xäzer äbineè samovary kajnyj ... (Wärif Kamal, Akharlaklar.) “... bring the countrymen in for tea, Grandmother’s samovar is now boiling ...” b) Possessive relation between the acting person or thing and the action: Karnyè ïråe ‘the melting of the snow’, bolytlarnyè agulary ‘the floating of the clouds,’ Zäki wäkertneè mädräsädän kuyluy ‘The student Zäki’s expulsion from the medrese’ (Title of a novella by Ghalimjan Ibrahimo.) · Karhyknyè soègy ellardagy gomere wul balalarynyè kajtyp kitålären kãtep qwäå belän genä uza bawlady. (Ämirxan Eniki, Äjtelmägän vasyqtá.) During the last years the old woman’s life passed (lit., began to pass) with just living and waiting for these her children’s visits (lit., these her children’s coming and leaving). · Gãlbikäneè kadak åkhäle tufliläre belän wak-wok basyp, awygyp jãrgäne iwetelä, tälinkä, hänehke-pyhak, rîmkalar hyèlavy iwetelä, wunnan zaldagy kunaklarnyè waulap sãjläwåläre, kãlåläre iwetelä bawlyj. (ibid.) One hears Gölbikä making a knocking noise in her nail-heeled shoes, as she moves around hurriedly; one hears the clanking of the plates, forks, knives and wineglasses. After that, one begins to hear the noisy talk and laughter of the guests in the salon. c) Possessive relation, in time, place, quality, quantity, measure, extent, pourpose: Åtkän gasyrnyè urtasy ‘the middle of the past century’, 20 nhe ellarnyè berenhe qrtysynda ‘in the first half of the 1920’s’, wäçärneè binalary ‘the city’s buildings’, Idelneè qrlary ‘the banks of the Volga’, taularnyè maturlygy ‘the beauty of the mountains’, kunaklarybyznyè çämmäse ‘all of our guests’, mallarnyè ãhtän bere ‘one third of the merchandise’, taunyè bieklege ‘the height of the mountain’, bakhanyè ozynlygy ‘the length of the garden’, kitapnyè ïhtälege ‘the contents of the book’, terleklärneè azygy ‘the fodder for (of) the animals’. · Æäjneè aqz, æyly, ajly kihlärennän berse ide. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Kart qlhy.) It was one of summer’s clear, warm, moonlit evenings. · ... anyè qwá jãräge qkty kilähäkneè matur kãnnäre ãhen åzen ber kãräwhe itterep åsterå därte belän tulyp qlkynlandy. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Tirän tamyrlar.) ... his young heart was overflowing and burning with passion to educate himself as a fighter for the beautiful days of a bright future. · Inewneè ike qgyna tezelgän tallar, qwel qfrakka kåmelep, akryn gyna, sak kyna tavywlyjlar. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Qz bawy.) The willows lining both sides of the brook and buried in green leaves, are rustling gently and gingerly. · Min tora torgan wäçärneè urtasynda bazar bulyp, ul bazarnyè da urtasynda ber æirdä çärvakytta ïw ïzläp, ïw kãtep tora torgan qrlylar bula torgan ide. (Mäæit Gafuri, Qrlylar qki /jðki/ ãjdäw xatyn.) In the center of the town in which I lived was a market, and in the center of that market, there were in one place always some poor, looking and waiting for work. · Æiçangirneè sabyry bette, ... (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Bezneè kãnnär.) Jihangir’s patience came to an end, ... · Diègezneè æièelhä zäègärlege akrynlap kãlsu tãskä kerä bara, ... (Rafaïlá Mostafin, «Oæmax»ka säqxät.) The light blue of the sea gradually became ashcoloured, ...

71

Xaæilärneè kåbese, ... åzläreneè kylgan gãnaçlaryn sãjläp-sãjläp, täåbägä totynalar, ... (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Diègezdä.) Most of the pilgrims, ... began to confess, reciting their sins, ... · Galimæan Ibraçimov mirasynyè iè kåp çäm qxwy ãlewe ... xalykka xezmät itå maksatyna bagywlangan. (G. Xalit, Galimæan Ibraçimov tormywy çäm iæaty.) The largest and best part of Ghalimjan Ibrahim’s heritage ... is dedicated to the aim of serving the people. · Kihä min tugan kãnemne Urta diègezneè zäègär kièleklärendä karwyladym. (Rafaïlá Mostafin, «Oæmax»ka säqxät.) Yesterday I celebrated my birthday on the blue vastness of the Mediterranean Sea. · Bosfor bugazynyè bue 15 milá tiräse. ... tiränlege – 20-100 metr. (ibid.) The length of the Bosporus is approximately 15 miles. ... Its depth is 20 to 100 meters. · Ãjneè dårttän ber ãlewen zur mih algan. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Bezneè kãnnär.) A large stove took up a quarter of the house. · Ïwneè berenhe baskyhy bette dip, ul bågen kalaga kajtyp kitärgä æyengan ide. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Tirän tamyrlar.) Considering the first stage of the work finished, he had got ready to return to the city today. d) If a genitive relation exists between three nouns in a sentence, the first noun is in the genitive, the second noun, i.e., the noun governing the first, takes the appropriate possessive suffix (+y, +e, +sy, +se, +lary, +läre) to which in turn the genitive ending +nyè, +neè is joined, and the third noun, governing the second, takes the possessive suffix only: · Monda kilgän xatynnarnyè kåbräge bu wäçärneè mäwçår familiqle bajlarynyè xatynnary bulyp, matur kiemnär, qxwy atlar, nykly kuherlar belän kilälär, ... (Mäæit Gafuri, Qrlylar qki ãjdäw xatyn.) As most of the women who came here were the wives of this city’s wealthy with famous names, they arrived in beautiful dresses, with fine horses, (and) sturdy coachmen, ... · Kewelärneè Bãrelene qratyp, utyryp kalularynyè säbäbe anyè tabigate matur buluda gyna tågel, bilgele. (Ämirxan Eniki, Bãreledä nilär bar.) Of course, the reason why people love Börele and stay on (lit., the reason of people’s loving Börele and staying on) is not only its beautiful nature. · ...tutawnyè kehkenä genä avyzynyè elmaîy mine kolaklaryma kadär kyzartty. (Kärim Tinhgurin, Ätäh.) ... the smile from (lit., of) the young lady’s little mouth made me blush to my ears. 2. To designate the possessor in sentences in which bar, îk, bula, bulmyj, etc. and the possessive suffix of the 3rd person are used to express “to have”, “to possess” (comp. also 206-209): · ... gadättän tyw vakyjgalarga /waqiôðlðrgð/ nigezlängän andyj äsärlärneè dä åz ukuhysy bar. (Rafaïlá Mostafin, Tabywlar çäm îgaltular.) ... such works which are based on unusual events have their readers too. · Fäxrilärneè matur ber kolyny bar ide. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Almahuar.) The Fäkhris had a beautiful foal. · Æirneè hige bar, kåkneè hige îk. (Proverb.) The earth has a limit, the sky has no limit. 3. With some pronouns when followed by postpositions governing this case (see 460-540). ·

[214] The genitive ending may be omitted when the governed noun is a proper noun or a common noun used as a proper noun and immediately followed by the governing noun: Tukaj wigyráläre ‘Tuqai’s poems’, Fatix Ämirxan äsärläre ‘Fatikh Ämirkhan’s works’.

72

Tyn bålmädä qrty sägatá bue Kamaliev tavywy gyna iwetelep tordy. (Mägâsåm Nasyjbullin, Qrkanat.) For half an hour only Kamaliev’s voice was heard in the quiet room. · ... isemlektä Æiçanwin familiqse dä tabylmady. (ibid.) ... Jihanshin’s surname too was not found on the list. ·

[215] The omission of the genitive of the governed component (proper name) becomes obligatory when the governing component is itself in the genitive: Tatarstan mägarif ministrlygynyè binasy The building of the Ministry of Education of Tataristan, Respublika bawkalasynyè åzäk mäjdany (Tatarstan.) The central square of the Republic’s capital. [216] The genitive ending is always omitted: a) When two nouns are in apposition, the second qualifying the first: Kazan wäçäre ‘the city of Kazan’, Kazan xanlygy ‘the Khanate of Kazan’, Idel elgasy ‘the river Volga’, Afzallar gailäse ‘the Afzal family’, 5 (biw) sany ‘the number 5’, 5 çäm 7 (æide) sannary ‘the numbers 5 and 7’. Ukytuhy såze – isem. The word “teacher” is a noun. b) When two or more nouns together form a compound noun: Irek mäjdany ‘Liberty Square’, Tukaj uramy ‘Tuqai Street’, ãj iwege ‘front door’, joky bålmäse ‘bedroom’, æimew bakhasy ‘orchard’, Amerika Kuwma Wtatlary ‘The United States of America’. [217] The genitive suffix is also omitted when the governed noun is of secondary importance in a sentence, when there is no need for concretization, or when its repetition is felt as stylistically clumsy, as for example, with two words in the genitive immediately following each other: · Bågen, kapitan rãxsäte belän berenhe märtäbä wturvalny åz kulyma aldym. (Rafaïlá Mostafin, «Oæmax»ka säqxät.) Today, with the captain’s permission, I took the helm for the first time into my own hands. · Taular itägennän diègezgä karap çäm kue qwellekkä kåmelep utyrgan ak sarajlar wäçäre Sohiga min bågen kãnneè ikenhe qrtysynda gyna kilep tãwkän idem. (Ämirxan Eniki, Jãräk sere.) In Sochi, the city of white palaces, which looks at the sea from the foot of the mountains and sits buried in dense green, I had arrived only today, in the second half of the day. · Ul timer îl kyryena kilep æitkändä ozyn tovar poezdy stanciqdan kuzgalyp kyna tora ide. (Gomär Bäwirov, Sarut.) When he reached the edge of the railroad, a long freight train was just pulling out of the station. · Oly îl hatynnan anyè avylyna dårt-biw hakrym hamasy gyna kala. (ibid.) From the corner of the highway it is only about four or five kilometers to his village. [218] The use of the genitive ending is obligatory, even with two words in the genitive immnediately following each other, if its omission would disrupt their grammatical connection or result in ambiguousness or confusion of different parts of speech (for example, confusion of the subject with the object) in a sentence: · Alarnyè çärkajsynyè åzenhälekle qklary bar. (R. A. Îsupov, Täræemä mäsáäläläre.) Each of them has its characteristic aspects. · In the above sentence the genitive suffix on alar may not be omitted, as this would grammatically disconnect it from the following word, resulting in an ungrammatical sentence.

73

Compare further: Meteleva qwi torgan bålmälärneè ikeseneè dä täräzäläre uramga karyj, ... (Zãfär Fätxetdinov, Ahylgan serlär.) The windows of both rooms in which Meteleva lives look onto the street, ... · ¡ Uzegez wularnyè kajsynyè qzmywy belän qkynnan tanyw, kemnärne qxwy beläsez? (Marat Bibiwev, «Istälekkä wäçär båläk itäm».) “With which of those people’s lives (lit., fate, lot) do you have closer acquaintance? Whom do you know well?” ·

[219] A noun designating “day”, “month”, “year”, etc. in the genitive and immediately repeated in the locative indicates that the action is carried out regularly “every” day, month, year, etc. For example: · Sugywka xätle Gãlmäráqm elnyè elynda Abu baba belän ire Näbineè, nartaga1) ïtlär æigep, tajgaga hygyp kitålären karap kala torgan ide. (Bulat Sãläjman, Abu baba.) Every year until the war, Gölmäryäm had watched Abu Baba and her husband Näbi harness the dogs to the sledge and go out into the taiga. [220] A word in the genitive denoting time and immediately followed by the same word in the nominative expresses emphasis of the extent of the time period during which the action is carried out: · ... bezneè palátolarybyz bar ide. Kalgan balalar kywnyè kyw bue palátosyz, aqk kiemsez ... ãjdä utyryp hyktylar. (Ibraçim Gazi, Malajlykta kunakta.) ... we had overcoats. The other children ... sat in the house all winter coatless, without footwear. (For the postposition bue /bují/, see 474, 1 a.) · Wulaj itep bez babaj belän æäjneè æäj bue kãtådä jãrdek. (Mãxämmät Gali, Kãtåhelär.) So the old man and I, tended the cattle throughout the whole summer.

The Persian Izafet Construction [221] To express possessive relation between nouns, or attributive relation of adjectives with nouns,2) the older Tatar literary language (including the language of Tatar classical literature) made frequent use of the Persian izafet. In contemporary Tatar writing it is used infrequently. It occurs mainly, but not exclusively, in quotations from older Tatar literature, names of organizations, institutions, schools, etc., of former times and in a few frozen expressions. [222] The izafet construction, which basically is used only with nouns (and adjectives) of Persian and Arabic origin,3) is formed by joining the particle i, e, y, the so-called izafet, to the first component; i is joined to words ending in a vowel, e and y are attached to words ending in a consonant. Izafet constructions are treated as one unit; suffixes of declension, possessive suffixes, etc. are joined only to the last component. The izafet never carries the accent.

1) 2) 3)

74

Narta · sledge drawn by reindeer or dogs. For the izafet construction to express attributive relation of adjectives with nouns, see 329. Exceptions to this rule include a number of nouns and adjectives borrowed from European languages and a few words of Turkic origin.

Examples: täræemäi xäl ‘biography’ (täræemä (A.) ‘translation’, ‘interpretation’, xäl (A.) ‘situation’, ‘condition’, ‘circumstance’), barikai xakyjkatá ‘ray of truth’ (barika (A.) ‘gleam’, ‘ray’, xakyjkatá (A.) ‘truth’), aby Käåsär ‘a spring in Paradise’ (ab (P.) ‘water’, Käåsär (A.) ‘name of river in Paradise’), väzne wigyrá ‘meter’ (väzen (A.) ‘rhythm’ wigyrá (A.) ‘poem’). · – ... zinçar mine kalänseväi mäæås kiqrgä kãhlämä, ... (Fatix Ämirxan, Fätxulla xäzrät.) “... please do not force me to put on a heathen cap, ...” · Mãsadämäi äfkardan /ðfkardan/ barikai /bariqai/ xakyjkatá /xðqiqðt/ zoçur idär.1) (Gabdulla Tukaj, Xissiqte milliq.) From the clash of ideas (thoughts) springs the ray of truth. · Biktimer äfände Æantimerov Parià Änæãmäni Danäwenä Fäxri ägâza sajlandy.2) (Fatix Ämirxan, Garäfä kih tãwemdä.) Mister Biktimer Jantimerov was elected honorable member of the Paris Academy of Sciences. · Qwálär, Wäçre Bolgarga säqxät qsap kajtkannan soè, Kazan mähetlären tãzekländerå ãmälärendä katnawtylar. (K.U. 8, 1991, r. 189, Äjt såzeène, qwálek!) After returning from a trip to the City of Bolghar, the youths took part in the (voluntary, unpaid, collective) work of restoring the Kazan mosques.

The Arabic Genitive [223] The older Tatar literary language (including the language of Tatar classical literature of the turn of this century) also used Arabic grammatical structures to express possessive relation between Arabic nouns (Arabic genitive). In contemporary Tatar the Arabic genitive is no longer in general use. However, it occurs not infrequently in names of persons adopted from Arabic. Furthermore, it may occur in quotations from older Tatar literary works, names of organizations, newspapers, etc., of former times and in a few frozen expressions. [224] The Arabic genitive is formed in the following way: The noun governing the genitive precedes the noun governed, which takes the definite article ðl (el). The entire genitive construction is written in one word, or a hyphen is placed before and/or after the article. Like the Persian izafet construction, the Arabic genitive is treated as one unit; suffixes of declension, possessive suffixes, etc., are attached only to the last component. Examples: Wärifelislam (masc. name), Gabdelväli /Ôðbdelwðli/ (masc. name), Gabdessäläm /Ôðbdessðlðm/ (masc. name), Rizaetdin (masc. name), Bäqnelxak ‘The Exposition of the Truth’ (name of a Tatar newspaper) (bäqn ‘exposition’, ‘declaration’, ‘manifestation’, xak ‘truth’), darelfãnån ‘academy’, ‘university’ (dar ‘house’, fãnån broken plural of fän ‘art’, ‘science’), bäjnälmiläl ‘international’ (bäjn ‘space between’, miläl broken plural of millät ‘nation’), Tärbiqt-el-ätfalá ‘The Education of the Children’ (name of a Tatar journal) (tärbiq ‘education’, ätfalá broken plural of tyjfel /tifel/ ‘(small) child’), Ittifak-el-mãslimin ‘Union of the Moslems’ (ittifak ‘union’, mãslimin ‘Moslems’ (regular plural masc., genitive of mãselman ‘Moslem’). · U (Ul) – bäxerelgolumder! (gyjlem /ôilem/ diègezeder). (Fatix Ämirxan, Salixæan kari.) He is a sea of knowledge! 1)

In present-day Tatar this sentence would be rendered as follows: Fikerlär bärelewåennän xakyjkatá qwennäre tuar. 2) In contemporary Tatar: ... Parià Fännär Akademiqsenä maktauly ägâza bulyp sajlandy.

75

... mãgallimnär, ... millättän darelmogalliminnär (i.e., ukytuhylar xäzerläå mäktäpläre) taläp itep,,... (Fatix Ämirxan, Kazan 23 fevralá.) ... the teachers, ... demanding from the people teacher training schools, ... · Tãwemdä æännätel-firdävesneè (i.e., oæmaxnyè) ïhen kårdem. (Gabdulla Tukaj, Tãwemdä kårgännärem.) In my dream I had a glimpse into paradise. ·

Dative [225] The dative is formed by means of the suffixes +ga, +gä, +ka, +kä /+ôa, +gð, +qa,+kð/, +na, +nä, +a, +ä. +ga, +gä /+ôa, +gð/ is joined to stems ending in a voiced consonant or a vowel and to stems with the possessive suffixes of the 1st and 2nd persons plural: +ka, kä /+qa, +kð/ is joined to stems ending in a voiceless consonant; +na, +nä is joined to stems with the possessive suffixes of the third person singular and plural; +a, +ä is joined to stems with the possessive suffixes of the first and second persons singular. Words borrowed from or via Russian which end in +k or +g and require Tatar suffixes with back vowels take +ka /+ka, +qa/ instead of +ka, +ga /+qa, +ôa/. Kazanga /Qazanôa/ ‘to Kazan’, kulga /qulôa/ ‘to, into the hand’, suga /suôa/ ‘to, into the water’, ãjgä /õjgð/ ‘to, into the house’, bålmäbezgä /bulmðbezgð/ ‘to, into our room’, atagyzga /ataôázôa/ ‘to your father’, atka /atqa/ ‘to the horse’, ïwkä /eøkð/ ‘to the work’, atasyna ‘to his (her, its) father’, ïtenä ‘to his (her, its) dog’, atama ‘to my father’, ataèa ‘to your father’, ïtemä ‘to my dog’, ïteèä ‘to your dog’, parkka /parkka/ ‘to the park’, galstukka /galstukka/ ‘to the necktie’, Peterburgka /Peterburgqa/ ‘to Petersburg’, katalogka /katalogqa/ ‘to the catalogue’. [226] The dative case indicates the indirect object: · Bez äjtäbez: – Bu kåkäjlärne beräågä dä birmik ..., åzebez awarbyz, – dibez. Kärzinnärebezdän alyp kåkäjlärne kålmäk ïhlärebezgä qwerergä totyndyk. Wul arada ällä kajdan kulyna taqk totkan ber desqtnik kilep hykty da bezgä barmak selkep: – Äj, malajlar, niwlisez sez anda?! Nigä æyjgan kåkäjläregezne karaul ãenä tapwyrmyjsyz, ... – dip kyhkyrdy. (Mãxämmät Gali, Saban tuenda.) We say: “Let’s not give these eggs to anybody ..., we will eat them ourselves,” we say. We began to take the eggs from our baskets and hide them inside our shirts. At that moment, an overseer, holding a stick in his hand, (suddenly) appeared from somewhere and, shaking his finger at us, cried out: “Hey, boys, what are you doing there! Why aren’t you delivering the eggs you have collected to the guardhouse ...?” · Bågen, kapitan rãxsäte belän, berenhe märtäbä wturvalny åz kulyma aldym. (Rafaïlá Mostafin, «Oæmax»ka säqxät.) Today, with the captain’s permission, I took the wheel (helm) for the first time in my own hands. · Koqw ta hykmagan, wulaj da inde ïsselektän bãten diègez ãste parga äjlänä. (ibid.) The sun has not even risen; however, the entire surface of the sea is already turning into steam from the heat. · · Bu äle sezgä avyrrak bulyr. Min sezgä æièelräk ïw täkâdim itäm. (Äxmät Fäjzi, Tukaj.) “This will be still somewhat difficult for you. I propose to you an easier task.” 76

Note: When governed by a factitive verb the indirect object may occur in the dative. However, this use of the dative is regarded as inferior style, the ablative being the correct case (see 895).

[227] The dative functions as the circumstantial complement of the verb, giving precision to the action in a number of ways. For example, it indicates: 1. Motion in various directions: · Ajzat ãhenhe katka menep kitte. Tar baskyhnyè qrtysyna æitkäh, ikelänep tuktady. (Gaziz /Ôðziz/ Mãxämmätwin, Jãräktäge ïzlär.) Aizat walked up to the third floor. When he was (lit., reached) halfway up the narrow staircase, he hesitated and stopped. · Tämle ukuymny bålep, asrau kyzybyz Sabira bålmämä kilep kerde. (Ämirxan Eniki, Gãländäm tutaw xatiräse.) Interrupting my pleasant study, our maid Sabira came into my room. · Æyly-æilsez kãnnärdä min dä çavaga hygyp jãri bawladym. (ibid.) On warm and calm days I too began to get out in the air and walk. · Kapitannyè berenhe qrdämhese qrga hyguhylarnyè isemlegen tãzi, ... (Rafaïlá Mostafin, «Oæmax»ka säqxät.) The captain’s first mate makes up a list of names of those who are going ashore, ... · Azor utraularynnan kilåhe davyl kinät kenä tãnáqkka borylgan ... (ibid.) The storm which was coming from the (direction of the) Azores, suddenly turned to the north ... · ... korab akryn-akryn uèga-sulga hajkala bawlyj. (ibid.) ... the ship begins to rock slowly to the right and to the left. · Çaman saen ïkvatorga qkynlawa barabyz. Timer kazyk joldyzy çär tãn saen ofykka qkynrak tãwä bara, ä Håmeh joldyz inde tozly suny humyryp alyrdaj bulyp okeanga qkynlawty. (ibid.) We are nearing the equator more and more. With every night the North Star is sinking deeper in the horizon, while the Dipper has already come so close to the ocean, it could scoop up the salty water. 2. Time limit: · Ikenhe æäjdä Rãstäm Kärimäneè tuena ike atnaga gyna kajtyp kitä. (Sadri Æäläl, Dim buenda.) The second summer Röstäm returned (home for vacation) only two weeks before Kärimä’s wedding. · Akhanyè ikenhe tãp hygymy fatirga tålärgä kitä. Kãngä 2 (ike) dollar isäbennän ajga 60 (altmyw) dollar tålilär. (Rafaïlá Mostafin, «Oæmax»ka säqxät.) The second principal expenditure goes to paying for the apartment. Figured at 2 dollars a day, they pay 60 dollars per month. · Tywta koep-koep qègyr qva ide. Irtädän birle ber genä mizgelgä dä tuktalgany îk. (Koqw Timbikova, Täèkäle tau.) Outside it was pouring. Since morning it had not stopped for even a moment. · – Qlgyw kyzym didem, kabat xatalansam, ahulanmassyz bit? Rufinä oqlgan kyqfättä aska karady. – Ahulanmam ... Bernihä sekundka uèajsyz tynlyk urnawty. (Foat Sadriev, Adäm äåliqse.) “By mistake I said ‘my daughter’. If I make that mistake again, you won’t be angry, will you?” As though ashamed, Rufinä looked down. “I won’t be angry.” There was an uneasy silence for a few seconds. 3. The amount of money for which something is bought or sold: · ... alarnyè kåbese wul akhaga bawkort arasynnan at alyp, at æigep kajtalar. (Mãxämmät Gali, Räxmätulla tegåhe.) ... most of them buy for that money horses among the Bashkirs and return with horses harnessed (to their sleighs). · – Bu kãtepxanäne ahu mièa bik kyjmätkä tãwte. (Äxmät Fäjzi, Tukaj.) “Opening this library cost me very dearly.” 77

Ajdar. ... Babaè erak basuybyzny ber kadak häjgä satyp æirsez kaldyrdy. (Taæi Gyjzzät, Färxinaz.) Aidar. ... Your grandfather, having sold our (i.e., the village’s) distant field for a pound of tea, left us without land. · Mansur. Bezneè bawta sãjläwåebez ike meè bastyru ide. Min wuèa karap kitapny egerme biw sumga satkan idem. Ämma sez any alty meè bastyrgansyz ikän. (Kärim Tinhurin, Sakla, wartlamasyn!) Mansur. Our preliminary agreement was to print two thousand (copies). In view of that, I had sold the book for twenty-five rubles (a copy). But, apparently, you printed six thousand (copies) of it. · Wakiræan. Bezdä kyryk tiengä bãten kãn xezmät itälär. Ä sin ber minutlyk xezmäteèä kyryk tienne azsynasyè. (ibid.) Shakirjan. With us they work all day for forty kopecks. And you consider forty kopecks insufficient for your one minute’s work. 4. Age: · Mädinä. Mièa nibary unsigez qwá. Sièa da wunnan kåp artyk tågel. (Riza Iwmorat, Mädinä.) Mädinä. I am only eighteen years old. You too are not much older. · Soè xäzer aèa nihä qwá? (Fatix Ämirxan, Kartajdym, XX jãz bawy tatar ädäbiqty, r. 300.) So, how old is he now? 5. Measure and degree: · ... hynnan da, bolar kinät bernihä jãz tonnaga artygrak tawyj bawladylar. (Rafaïlá Mostafin, «Oæmax»ka säqxät.) ... indeed, they (the freighters) suddenly began to carry several hundred tons more. (Made possible by getting rid of some unwanted ·

ballast).

Mäktäpne dä, institutny da ul gel biwlegä genä beterä. (Rafaïlá Mostafin, Tabywlar çäm îgaltular.) She finishes both the school and the institute with straight A’s (all A’s). · Wul kihtän minem kyz tormywymda qèa ber hor bawlandy. Kajgysyz, vaemsyz kãnnär bette, kinät kenä bernihä qwákä olajgan kebek buldym, ... (Ämirxan Eniki, Jãräk sere.) From that evening on, a new period began in my life as a girl. The carefree, happy days were gone. All of a sudden I felt like I had aged several years, ... ·

Note: olajgan – infinitive: olaî. This is a form of the vernacular. The literary form is olygaî ‘to age’.

Mäktäptä ukyganda alar aralawmadylar. Nik disäè, Gabdelxäj Ilçamnan ike qwákä zurrak ... ide. (Foat Sadriev, Waçzamanov ïwe.) When they went to school they did not associate with each other because (lit., If you ask/say ‘why’) Ghäbdelkhey was two years older than Ilham. 6. Purpose (with verbs denoting movement): · Älfiq ... tugan qklary Aktanywka qlga kajtkan, åzeneè Gåzäl çäm Zãlfiq isemle kyzlaryn æitäkläp æiläkkä bara. (Gãlwat Zäjnaweva, Käkkåk.) Älfiä has returned for vacation to her native countryside, Aqtanysh. Taking her daughters Güzäl and Zölfiä, she goes for berries. · Bik matur ber ajly kihtä bu avylnyè ber eget kitkän urmanga utynga ... (Gabdulla Tukaj, Wåräle.) On a very beautiful moonlit evening a youth from this village went into the forest for firewood ... · Kihtän åk balykka baryrga sãjläwep kujgan idek. (Garif Axunov, Marselá Zaripov, I kaderle tugan qk.) We had agreed, already in the evening, to go fishing. · Kärimä Täèkäle tau hiwmäsenä suga kitte. (Koqw Timbikova, Täèkäle tau.) Kärimä went for water to the Tängkäle mountain spring. ·

78

7. Manner: · Mäjsärä. Kãhkä kahyp, kotyldym, ... (Kärim Tinhurin, Zäègär wäl.) Meysärä. I escaped and saved myself with difficulty, ... · Ãjrätkändä, Bylbyl atnyè kalku æilkäsenä totyndy, sul aqgy belän Gabdelxäjneè uè kulyna basty da bar kãhenä talpynyp æibärde. (Nurixan Fättax, Kihå.) As instructed, Bylbyl held on to the horse’s high neck, stepped with her left foot on Ghäbdelkhey’s right hand and, with all her strength, propelled herself up (onto the horse). · – Ä sez nihek, ul kyzlarny jãzgä tanyjsyzmy? ... – Kårsäm – tanyrmyn dip ujlyjm. (Zãfär Fätxetdinov, Ålem ïlmäge.) “What do you think? Will you recognize those girls by their faces?” ... “If I see them, I think I will.” · Alar çaman ber kãjgä baralar da baralar. (Sadri Æäläl, Dim buenda.) They keep going and going always at the same pace. · ... däå kãjmä tuly tizlegenä alga omtyldy. (Flås Latyjfi, Xyqnät.) ... the big ship sped on at full speed. 8. Cause: · Ul suykka kaltyryj. He is shivering with cold. 9. ‘As’ (in the capacity of): · Menä kåhtänähkä bazardan limon, anar, ãrek, jãzem æimewläre kebek äjberlär alyndy, ... (Foat Sadriev, Adäm äåliqse.) So, things like lemons, pomegranates, apricots and grapes were bought at the market as a present, ... · ... ikenhe beräålär, ... Vengriqdäme, Rumyniqdäme xezmät itä ikän, qlgamy, bãtenläjgäme kajtkan ikän dä, wunnan fajdalanyp menä monda Qèavylga kunakka kilgän ikän, didedär. (Nurixan Fättax, Kihå.) ... others said ... it seems he was serving (in the army) in Hungary or Romania, and had apparently either come back on leave or returned for good and that he had apparently taken advantage of the opportunity and come here to Yangawyl (New Village) as a guest. [228] The dative is also used: a) In such set expressions as: taèga kalu ‘to be astonished, amazed’, gaæäpkä /ôðçðpkð/ kaldyru ‘to astonish, surprise, amaze’, kurkuga tãwå ‘to be afraid’, väsväsägä tãwå ‘to fall into temptation’, aptyrawka tãwå ‘to be perplexed, to be in a state of perplexity’. b) With postpositions governing the dative (see 541). c) To form adverbs (see 607). [229] In the vernacular the dative is sometimes attached to non-nominal forms of the verb – mostly to the 3rd person singular of the imperative, the 3rd person of the past tense I indicative, the future tense I and II indicative, and to the verbal adverb in -gah, -kah, -gäh, -käh – and even to certain postpositions (mostly to ãhen ‘for’). This “breach” of the grammatical norms is used to make the speech sound “unusual” in order to attract greater attention to its contents. Besides, when attached to the imperative, the dative softens it somewhat, while with the past tense I it creates an adverbial meaning. Examples: · Ägär ul Xafiz belän bergä bula alsa, kãn åtsengä genä (normal literary form: åtsen dip kenä) qwämäqhägenä nyk ywana. (Barlas Kamalov, Qlykmaslar.) She believes firmly that, if she could be together with Khafiz, she would not live for the sole purpose of passing the day (lit., that the day may only pass).

79

·

·

·

·

·

·

·

Anyè åze ywangan imany bar, ul – dãreslek. Ul – namus. Ul – bulsynga ïwläå (normal literary form: bulsyn dip ïwläå). (Garif Axunov, Hiklävek tãwe.) He has his own faith in which he believes. That (faith) is truthfulness, honesty, and assiduousness (work until it is accomplished). Älege dä baqgy Xalikânyè bulsynga jãråe (Xalikânyè bulsyn dip jãråe) æiède. (ibid.) Now as before, Khaliq’s seeing his work through to its completion won out. [Alar], bu ïwne wunyè belän bettegä isäpläp, båtän mäsáälälärgä kåhtelär. (Fatix Xãsni, Utyzynhy el.) Considering this matter herewith finished, they turned to other subjects. · Xäer, nigä kyzyl kar qugahka kaldyryrga, xäzer åk äjtäm. (ibid.) “Well then, why postpone it to a time that will never come (lit., until red snow falls); I will say it right now.” · Ataè sãjlägändä tik tor! Kartlyk kãnemdä xur itsen ãhengä åstermädem min sine! “When your father speaks, keep quiet! I did not bring you up to disgrace (me) in (my) old age!” Bez kåbräk vakyt åtsen ãhengä bu kitaplarnyè kajsy ukylgan, kajsysy ukylmagan, kyzykmy-tågelme, – wul turyda sãjläwkäläp, karap hyktyk. (Ämirxan Eniki, Maturlyk.) In order to kill some more time, we looked over these books, talking about such things as which of them one has read, which of them one has not read, whether or not they were interesting. Alan tiräli qwá kaennarga aralawtyryp hyrwy utyrtkannar. ... Anyè kåèelendä ãlgerep æitkän ber ue da îk ide, såz îktan såz bulsyn ãhengä, alanny maktarga totyndy. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Balta kem kulynda.) Around the glade, intermingled with the young birches, firs have been planted. ... In his (i.e., Sabit’s) mind there was no clear thought and, just in order to say something, he started to praise the glade.

Accusative [230] The accusative is formed by the suffix +ny, +ne, +n; +ny, +ne is joined to stems ending in a vowel or a consonant, +n is joined to stems with the possessive suffixes of the 3rd person singular and plural. [231] The accusative designates the direct object of the action. The direct object may be determinate or indeterminate. When determinate the direct object takes the accusative suffix; when indeterminate, it appears in its zero-form (i.e., without the accusative suffix). For example (compare): Kitapny ukyp hykkan kãnne åk Soltan aèarga xat qzarga bulgan ide ... (Gadel Kutuj /Ôðdel Qutuj/, Soltannyè ber kãne.) Soltan had intended to write him a letter on the very day when he finished reading the book ... · Xatny qzyp beterep, Soltan joklarga qtty. (ibid.) Having finished the letter, Soltan lay down to sleep. · Qz kãne ul anda tãrle-tãrle hähäklär utyrtkan ide. (ibid.) In spring he had planted there various kinds of flowers. · Soltan alarga su sibä, ... håp ålännärne ãzep tawlyj çäm aradan iè matur hähäkne jãräk dustyna båläk itärgä dip bilgeläp kuq. (ibid.) Soltan gives them water (lit., sprinkles water on them), ... pulls out the weeds and selects from among them the most beautiful flower as a present for his sweetheart. ·

80

Alar häj ïhä-ïhä, æajga gyna sãjläwep utyrdylar. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) They sat, drinking tea and talking amiably. · Äti mäzinneè ... häjne bik tämläp ïhåen karap tordy da tagyn äjtte ... (ibid.) Watching the muezzin ... drinking the tea with great relish, Father said again ... ·

[232] The direct object is determinate and, consequently, takes the accusative suffix when: 1. It is pointed out as a particular object as distinct from others of the same kind (in English by the definite article “the”). · Miènisa min birgän almany wunduk awyj da bawlady. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) Mingnisa immediately began to eat the apple which I had given her. · ... Zäjnäp kyzå-kyzå idänne seberde dä kaqdyr hygyp jãgerde. (Ämirxan Eniki, Ber genä sägatákä.) ... Zeynäp hurriedly swept the floor and ran out somewhere. · Bãten balalarny da wulaj kåzdän kihergännän soè, ul däreskä kerewte. (Gadel Kutuj, Soltannyè ber kãne.) After checking all the children in this manner, he began with the lesson. · Berenhe tänäfesne ul balalar arasynda uzdyrdy. (ibid.) He spent the first recess among the children. 2. It is preceded by an attributive relational adjective formed by the suffixes +dagy, +däge /+daôá, +dðge/, +tagy, +täge /+taôá, +tðge/, +gy, +ge /+ôá, +ge/, +ky, +ke /+qí, +ke/ (see 248, 1-4; 251, 1-5; 322; 323). · Kinder bukhadan ãr-qèa «Iman warty»n hygaryp, anyè berenhe bitendäge bakhalarny ... karap utyra bawladym. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) Taking the brand-new “Condition of Faith”1) out of the canvas satchel, I began to look at the gardens ... on its first page. · Ul åze avyldagy kewelärne isemnäre belän belmäsä dä, ... (Mãxämmät Gali, Telsez Säjfulla.) Though he himself does not know the people in the village by their names, ... · Æiçangir vakyjgany sãjläp birde. Läkin ... Gäräj turyndagy äègämälärne kaldyrdy. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Bezneè kãnnär.) Jihangir related the event. But ... he omitted the talks he had had about Gärey. · Kåp tä åtmäde, tywky iwekne dãberdätkän tavyw iwetelä bawlady. (Mãxämmät Gali, Aulak ãjdä.) After a little while the sound of (someone) knocking at the front (lit., outer) door began to be heard. 3. It is determined by a cardinal number in a specific way. · Qèa såzlär kergän inglizhä biw æãmläne kuen däftärenä kåherep alyp qtlarga totyndy. (Gadel Kutuj, Soltannyè ber kãne.) He copied the five English sentences which contained the new words in his copybook and began to memorize them. · Æide diègezne åtkäh, sigezenhe diègez bawlana, ... (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Ãh kågärhen.) After one crosses the seven seas an eighth sea begins, ... · – Ul kyryk sandykny nihek itep aharga kiräk ikän soè? – dip soryj tege eget. (ibid.) That youth asks: “How, then, is one to open those forty chests?” 4. It is preceded by an attribute expressed by an ordinal number. · Wäkertlärneè berse ... : – Apaè barmy? – dip berenhe sorauny birde. (Kärim Tinhurin, Ikenhe märæän.) One of the students ... asked the first question, saying: “Do you have an older sister?” 1)

In the old-style religious schools the first reader.

81

Bikä berenhe balykny totkah, Qbalak kart åz qnyna Albugany hakyrdy. Ikenhe balykny Qbalak kart belän bergäläp Albuga totty. (Nurixan Fättax, Syzgyra torgan uklar.) After the first lady (i.e., here the wife of the Khakan) caught the first fish, the old man Yabalaq called Albugha to his side. Together with the old man Yabalaq, Albugha caught the second fish. · Æirän sakally kewe ... ber tälinkä awady, ike tälinkä awady. ... ãhenhe tälinkäne bãgärgä kerewte. (Kärim Tinhurin Biwenhe märæän.) The red-bearded man ... ate one plateful (lit., plate), he ate two platefuls ... he began to devour the third plateful. It has possessive suffixes, or it is preceded by a possessiv pronoun: · [Soltan] institutny beterep hygu kãnen xäterläde. (Gadel Kutuj, Soltannyè ber kãne.) [Soltan] recalled the day of leaving the institute. · Räwit. ... Nihä rät räsemeène qzdym, ämma buqular alyrga da akha birmiseè. (Sägyjtá Sånhäläj /Sðôit Syncðlðj/, Sängatáhelär.) Räshit. I have painted your picture – how many times. And you don’t even give me any money to buy artists’ paints. · ... kåptän ujlap jãrgän ber telägemne åtim dip, tãwke awtan soè wäçär muzeena kittem. (Ämirxan Eniki, Jãräk sere.) ... to carry out a long-cherished wish of mine, I went to the city museum after lunch. · Uzeneè adresyn äjtte, ... Säxipneken soramady, ... (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Bezneè kãnnär.) He said his address, ... he did not ask Säkhip’s. · – Läkin min sezneè fatirny belmim, ... (Kärim Tinhurin, Ãhenhe märæän.) “But I do not know your apartment ...” It is preceded by the indefinite article ‘ber’ but determined in a specific manner: · Onygynyè ni äjteren kãtmästän, babaj ... boryngy ber kãjne kãjläp æibärde. (Äxsän Baqnov, Tau qgy poveste.) Without waiting for what his grandson would say, ... the grandfather began to sing an ancient song (i.e., one specific, ancient song). · ... [min] kaphyk ãstendä utyrgan ozynha jãzle, ujhan koègyrt kåzle ber xatynny kårdem. (Mirgaziqn Înys, Tozly æil.) ... [I] saw a woman, who had a longish face and pensive, brown eyes, sitting on top of a sack. · Timerhelektä Xäsän ozyn bujly, käæä sakally ber kewene ohratty. (Atilla Rasix, Bäxet orlyklary.) In the forge Xhäsän encountered a tall man with a goatee. It is preceded by an attribute expressed by a demonstrative pronoun: · Patwa bu egetne åzeneè saraenda xezmät itärgä kaldyra. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Patwa belän soldat.) The king kept this youth to serve in his palace. · Nihek mãmkin wundyj närsäne qratmaska! (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Bezneè kãnnär.) How is it possible not to like something like that (lit., such a thing; reference is to a literary work)! · · Bulmas, mondyj närsäne ädäbi kihägä kertä almyjbyz. (ibid.) “Impossible, something like this (lit., such a thing) we cannot admit to the literary evening.” It is preceded by an attribute expressed by a generalizing pronoun (see 434), by an indefinite pronoun (see 435-439), an interrogative pronoun, or by the indefinite adjective numeral «kåp» but in each case determined in a specific manner: · Bädri. ... Nindi qxwy bålmäne äräm itep toralar bit, ...! (Kärim Ämiri, Pehän bazary.) Bädri. ... What a good room they are wasting, ...! (Reference is to a specific room which could bring them income if they rented it out.) · Xäjdär. Anysy iahar. Kirägennän artyk maktau kåp kewelärne çälak itä dilär bit. (Riza Iwmorat, Qkyn dus.) Kheydär. That is bad. After all, they say that excessive praise is the undoing of many people. ·

5.

6.

7.

8.

82

9. It is a pronoun (personal, reflexive, reciprocal, demonstrative, etc.). For examples, see chapter on pronouns. 10. It is by implication determinate: · Akylly akyllyny beler. (Proverb.) A wise man knows (recognizes) a wise man. · Ït ïtne awamas. (Proverb.) A dog does not eat a dog (i.e., its own kind). 11. It is a proper name (name of a person, geographical name, etc.): · Alar bergä Mopassanny çäm Tukajny ukyjlar. (Gadel Kutuj, Soltannyè ber kãne.) Together they read Maupassant and Tuqai. · Bu sorau Gajnetdinovny räxätländerde. (ibid.) This question delighted Gheynetdinov. · Ätiem isä minem alda çaman Näæipne maktyj, ... (Ämirxan Eniki, Jãräk sere.) As to my father, he always praises Näjip in front of me, ... · · Min Zãçräne kinoga hakyryrga dip kenä kergän idem. (ibid.) “I thought I’d come in to invite Zöhrä to the movies.” Note: For the modal qualities of the past perfect, see 983 a, b.

Min: «Kazannan», – digäh, ul: «Beläm Kazanny, bulganym bar», – dide. When I said: “From Kazan”, she said: “I know Kazan, I have been” (there). 12. It is a qualitative noun (adjective, numeral, participle, verbal noun): · Aluhy qxwyny soryj. (Proverb.) The buyer demands what is good. · Miènisa ... Sälimäneè almasyn tewläp tä aldy. – Äçä! Sièa tämlesen birgän ikän ... Mä, ähesen dä awap kara! (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) Mingnisa ... took a quick bite of Sälimä’s apple. “Aha! He gave you the sweet one, I see ... Here, try the sour one too!” · Sägatá tãnge unberne sugyp qta. (Mãsägyjt /Mõsðôit/ Xäbibullin, Xäter qrlary.) The clock is striking eleven at night. · – Bu malajga nihäne biräbez inde ... – Biwne birergä kiräk, – dide ul. (Mãxämmät Gali, Saban tuenda.) “Now, how many do we give this boy ...” “One must give him five,” said he (i.e., five eggs). · – Sabyr itegez, xäzer barysyn da belersez. (Ämirxan Eniki, Jãräk sere.) “Be patient, you will know all of it now.” · ... wulaj sãjläåhelärne Soltan hyn kåèelennän kyzgana. (Gadel Kutuj, Soltannyè ber kãne.) ... Soltan sincerely pities those who talk like that. · ... äti min äjtkänne iwetmäde ... (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) ... Father did not hear what I said ... ·

Note: In the older literary language the full accusative, i.e., the accusative formed by the suffix +ny, +ne was used also on stems with the possessive suffixes of the 3rd person singular and plural. In this function it gave way to, and was replaced by, the reduced accusative (accusative formed by means of the suffix +n) by approximately the end of the first decade of this century. (For some exceptions, see 321-323).

Compare the following examples of its use in the older literary language: · Salyp jãrer syrtyna ul kojrygyny, çih totmas ul xuæasynyè boerygyny, ... (Gabdelæäbbar Kandalyj, 1797-1860, Käæä.) It walks, putting its tail on its back, It never observes its owner’s command, ... · Sälim mulla ... kih berlä sägatá unberdä ãstäl ãstendä lampasyny qndyryp kujgan. (Zakir Çadi, Bäxetle kyz, 1904.) Mulla Sälim ... had lit his lamp on the table at eleven o’clock at night (berlä, belän). · Æiçanwa mädräsädäge xälfäneè xällärene – kãmew sägatá hylbyryny muennaryna ïlep, tåbätäjne kyègyr gyna kiep, myeklaryny boryp, karwylaryna wäkertlärne æyep, sabak ãjrätkännärene, ozyn æilän, ak halma kiep, hitek-kävewtän akryn gyna wygyr-wygyr wygyrdap kyna mähetkä, qki 83

mäæleskä kilgännärene, xälfälär åtkändä wäkertlär aqgårä toryp xãrmät itkännärene, ... kårep, bik kyzyga ide. (Zakir Çadi, Æiçanwa xäzrät, 1908.) Seeing the behaviour of the medrese’s teachers – their hanging their silver watch chains around their necks, putting their scullcaps at an angle, twirling their mustaches, their gathering the students in front of them and teaching them, their putting on long coats, white turbans and coming to the mosque or meetings, walking rather slowly in their morocco leather boots producing some creaking noise, the students’ showing their respect standing upright when teachers passed by, ... Jihansha was fascinated. [233] The accusative suffix is not attached to the direct object when: a) It is indeterminate (compare also the examples under 231): · ... Kiqå alarga bernihä kãmew akha birgäh kenä alar iwekne ahtylar. (Äxmät Fäjzi, Tukaj.) They opened the door only after the bridegroom gave them some silver coins. · ... Alpamwa Sandugah ãhen at sajlyj. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Alpamwa.) Alpamsha selects a horse for Sandughach. · – Käläpåw, kalfak, bårek wikelle närsälär alasyzmy? (Galiäsgar Kamal, Bezneè wäçärneè serläre.) “Are you buying things such as scullcaps, qalfaqs,1) caps?” b) It is determined by a numeral in a general way: · Kãtäm, biw minåt kãtäm, un minut kãtäm, ... (Ämirxan Eniki, Jãräk sere.) I wait, I wait five minutes, I wait ten minutes, ... · – Kåpme sorarsyz? di. – Ille meè altyn birsäè, alyrsyè, – dilär. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Karunbaj.) He says, “How much are you asking?” They say, “If you give fifty thousand pieces of gold, you can take him (i.e., the boy).” · Anyè ãhen æide diègez kihärgä kiräk, ... (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Ãh kågärhen.) For this one has to cross seven seas, ... c) By its meaning it is closely connected with the verb: · Agah qru ‘to chop wood’, agah kiså ‘to cut wood’, awlyk hähå ‘to sow grain’, maj qzu ‘to make butter, to butter’, notyk sãjläå to make a speech’, kul habu ‘to applaud’. [234] When in the accusative case, nouns denoting time may function as adverbs of time: ... çär elny 24 (egerme dårtenhe) iînádä, Kunaklar (säådägärlär) utravynda zur qrminkä ahyla torgan bulgan. (Tatarstan ASSR tarixy.) ... every year on the 24th of June a large fair used to be held (lit., opened) on Guests’ (merchants’) Island. · Pänæewämbe kihne, awap-ïhkännän soè, ... (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) On Thursday evening, after the meal (lit., after eating and drinking), ... · Berkãnne kihke häj vakytynda, ... (ibid.) One day, during the evening tea, ... · Ber kãzne äti, axwam namazynnan kajtywlyj, ... (ibid.) One autumn, while returning from evening prayer, Father, ... ·

Locative [235] The locative is formed by means of the suffix +da, +dä, +ta, +tä; The suffix +da, +dä is joined to stems ending in a vowel or a voiced consonant: bakhada ‘in the garden/park’, kulda ‘in the hand’, uramda ‘in (on) the street’, tauda ‘on the mountain’, bålmädä ‘in the room’, ãjdä ‘in the house’, Ideldä ‘on the Volga’. 1)

84

Qalfaq – national headdress for women.

The suffix +ta, +tä is joined to stems ending in a voiceless consonant: agahta ‘on the tree’, vakytta ‘in, at the time’, mäktäptä ‘in the school’, hiktä ‘at the border’. Words (including proper names) with final b, g, d borrowed from or via Russian take +ta. For example: klubta ‘at the club’, korabta ‘on the ship’, Orenburgta ‘in Orenburg’, sudta ‘in court’, Madridta ‘in Madrid’. If the stem is the possessive third person singular or plural, an n precedes the locative suffix: Unaltynhy gasyrnyè bawynda. At the beginning of the 16th century. Unaltynhy gasyrnyè urtalarynda. Approximately in the middle of the 16th century. [236] The locative functions. 1. As the indirect object of verbs governing this case: · Änisä xanym bolarnyè çämmäsen dä aèlyj, ulynyè bäxetsezlegendä äle åzen, äle kilenen gaepli ide. Läkin Qxâqny bäqläådä iè aldangan kewe Gãlzadä buldy. (Foat Sadriev, Waçzamanov ïwe.) Lady Änisä understood all that, (and) she blamed now herself, now her daughter-in-law for her son’s unhappiness. But the person who erred the most in judging Yakhya (i.e., in judging Y.’s character) was Gölzadä. · Qwálär, Wäçre Bolgarga säqxät qsap kajtkannan soè, Kazan mähetlären tãzekländeru ãmälärendä katnawtylar. (Kazan utlary, 8, 1991, Äjt såzeène, qwálek!) After returning from a trip to the city of Bolghar, the youths took part in the (voluntary, unpaid collective) work actions of restoring the Kazan mosques. · Kyzykly sãjläwådä ... qwá tänkyjtáhelär katnawty. (Kazan utlary, 6, 1980, Qwá tänkyjtáhelär tågärägendä.) ... young critics participated in the interesting talk. 2. To indicate place or time of the action: · Kåèeldä qkty xyqllar, teldä matur såzlär, kåktä ïre-ïre joldyzlar ujnap torgan bu iîná kihendä alar dãnáqda ikäådän-ikäå genä kaldyk dip ujlagannar ide, ... (Fatix Xãsni, Æäj bawy.) [With] bright dreams in their hearts (lit., in the heart), beautiful words on their lips (lit., on the tongue), [and] big stars playing in the sky on this June night, they thought that there were only the two of them in the world,  ... · Kazan xanlygy xalkynyè kåphelege avyllarda qwägän. (Tatarstan ASSR tarixy.) The majority of the people of the Khanate of Kazan lived in villages. · Çãnärhelek belän wãgylálänåhe kewelär wäçärlärdä çäm bigräk tä Kazanda tuplangan bulgan. Biredä çãnärhelär çäm säådägärlär zur bistädä qwägännär. (ibid.) People occupying themselves with crafts were concentrated in cities, especially in Kazan. Here craftsmen and merchants lived in a large suburb. · XV (unbiwenhe) gasyrda Kazannyè åzäge xäzerge kremláneè tãnáqk ãlewendä bulgan. (ibid.) In the 15th century the center of Kazan was at the northern end (lit., part) of today’s Kremlin. · XIX (untugyzynhy) gasyrnyè bawlarynda Kazanda kitap näwriqty ïwläre åsä bawlyj. 1800 (ber meè sigez jãzenhe) elda garäp älifbasy belän kitaplar basu ãhen Peterburgtan Kazanga Aziq tipografiqse kåherelä. (ibid.) Approximately at the beginning of the 19th century the book publishing business began to grow in Kazan. In order to print books in the Arabic alphabet, the Asia printing house was transferred to Kazan from St. Petersburg in the year 1800. 3. To indicate manner: · Anyè jãze berenhe karauda tynyh kebek kårensä dä, ... (Atilla Rasix, Säxi babaj maæaralary.) Although at the first glance his face appeared as if quiet, ... 85

· Ägär min ïlek-ïlektän belmägän bulsam, sineè turyèda bik nahar fikerdä kalgan bulyr idem. (Ibraçim Gazi, Gaepsez gaeplelär.) “If I had not known you for a long time, I would have remained with a very bad opinion about you.” 4. To indicate motion (with some adverbs of place): · Monda xätle (hakly) ‘up to here’, anda barma! ‘do not go there!’ Sez irtägä sägatá tugyzga wunda kilep æitegez. (Atilla Rasix, Säxi babaj maæaralary.) Come there tomorrow morning by nine o’clock. · – ... nigä monda kiterdegez mine? (Atilla Rasix, Urlangan xäzinä.) “... why did you bring me here?” 5. As a modifier: · [Kartnyè] unbiw qwálärendä ber kyzy gyna bulgan. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Tapkyr kyz.) [The old man] had only one daughter, about fifteen years old. ·

Ablative [237] The ablative is formed with the suffix +dan, +dän, +tan, +tän, +nan, +nän, +dan, +dän being joined to stems ending in a vowel or a voiced consonant, +tan, +tän to stems ending in a voiceless consonant, +tan to loanwords ending in b, g, d, +nan, +nän to stems ending in nasals. If the stem is the possessive third person singular or plural, an n precedes the ablative suffix. This n requires the ablative in its form of +nan, +nän. Ukytuhydan ‘from the teacher’, îldan ‘from the road’, bålmädän ‘from the room’, wäçärdän ‘from the city’, attan ‘from the horse’, hiktän ‘from the border’, klubtan ‘from the club’, Orenburgtan ‘from Orenburg’, sudtan ‘from the court’, urmannan ‘from the forest’, kemnän ‘from whom’, kãnnän ‘from the day’, kulynnan ‘from his (her) hand’, bålmäsennän ‘from his (her) room’, ïtennän ‘from his (her) dog’, balalarynnan ‘from his (her) children’, ãjlärennän ‘from his (her) houses’. Note: The change of the initial «d» of the ablative suffix +dan, +dän to «t» (+tan, +tän) after a voiceless consonant and to «n» (+nan, +nän) after the nasals m, n, è was not reflected in the orthography of the Arabic alphabet used by Tatars until the adoption of the latinized alphabet (Jaìalif).

[238] The ablative functions: 1. As the object of verbs governing this case: Such verbs are rather numerous. They may be verbs of feeling, like oqlu ‘to be ashamed of’, kurku ‘to be afraid of’, wiklänå ‘to suspect, be suspicious of’, tuî ‘to be bored with’, ‘to become repulsive to’, kãnläwå ‘to be jealous of’; or they may be verbs of various meanings, such as: saklanu ‘to guard oneself against’, kotylu ‘to save oneself’, ‘to escape’, aerylu ‘to part’, fajdalanu ‘to make use of’, kãlå ‘to laugh (about)’, etc. · Min åzemneè täæribäsezlegemnän oqla bawladym. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) I began to feel ashamed of my inexperience. · [Sadyjk] wärigatátän dä bigräk, mäxällä telenä kerådän, annan da bigräk, åzeneè kãnhe xatynynnan kurka ide. (Fatix Xãsni, Æäqåle kewe sukmagy.) [Sadiq] was afraid of the Shariat (Moslem code of laws), but especially of becoming the talk of the parish, and still more than that, of his jealous wife. · Wulaj itep, bezneè Säfärgali åzeneè ul kãnge maæaralarynnan isän-imin kotylyp kaldy ... (ibid.) Thus, our Säfärghäli escaped safe and sound from his adventures of that day ...

86

– Ä Äkramnan îkka kãnläwäseè. (Äbrar Wämin, Qèa qzlar.) “But of Äkräm, you are jealous for no reason (lit., for nothing).” · ... ike gåzäl närsädänder watlanyp kãlälär. Närsädän kãlälär ikän ... Kåk zäègärlegennän? Qwellek hiksezlegennän? Dãnáq xozurlygynnan? Äje, kåk zäègärlegennän, qwellek hiksezlegennän, dãnáq xozurlygynnan çäm, barynnan da bigräk, qwálekneè åzennän. (Äxsän Baqnov, Argy qr.) ... the two beauties are laughing joyfully about something. What can they be laughing about? ... About the blue of the sky? About the boundlessness of the green countryside? About the pleasures of the world? Yes, about the blue of the sky, the boundlessness of the green countryside, about the pleasures of the world and, above all, about youth itself. · ... okean zäègärlegennän tar gyna tasma belän aerylgan zäègär kål qta ide. (Mädinä Malikova, Qnartaular qktysynda.) ... a blue lake lay there, which was separated from the blue of the ocean by a rather narrow band (of land). · Iwek aldynda ärle-birle jãrenåennän kapylt tuktap, Täxau xatynyna tekälde. (Äxät Gaffar, Ber jotym su.) Täkhaw stopped (his) pacing up and down in the yard abruptly, and stared at his wife. · Niwlätäseè, mäæles wulardan tora bit ... (Äxsän Baqnov, Ut çäm su.) What can you do? – a party consists of these (things), after all. 2. As the indirect object of factitive verbs (see 895): · Uze ukyp hykkannan soè, wigyráne ukuhylarnyè åzlärennän ukytty. (Gadel Kutuj, Soltannyè ber kãne.) After he read it himself, he had the poem read by the students themselves. 3. As the complement of predicate nouns and adjectives requiring the ablative: · Min Kazannan, äåväl qzganymha, bik razyj. (Gabdulla Tukaj, quoted from: XX jãz bawy tatar ädäbiqty.) As I have written before, I am very pleased with Kazan. · Min ... sabynlap îynu mãmkinlegennän dä mäxråm. (Atilla Rasix, Xävefle synau.) I am also deprived of the possibility of washing myself with soap ... · Aqk kieme ... kån iteklärdän gyjbarät bulgan. (Tatarstan ASSR tarixy.) [Their] footwear ... consisted of leather boots. · ... alar ... dãnáqvi /dõnjawi/ ïwlärdän täæribäsez, bik gadel /ôðdel/, insafly kewelär ... (Ämirxan Eniki, Räwä.) ... they ... are very honest, modest people, who are inexperienced in wordly matters ... · ... Iskändär dä, Gãlfärvaz da såz bawlarlyk såz tabudan gaæiz /ôðçiz/ idelär. (Kärim Tinhurin, Iskändär.) ... both Iskändär and Gölfärwaz were at a loss in finding words apt to start a conversation. 4. As the object denoting the person or thing from whom or from which something is received, bought, taken away, asked, etc.: · Kihä Kadyr kyzy Gãlåsädän xat aldy. (Mãsägyjt Xäbibullin, Xäter qrlary.) Yesterday Qadyr received a letter from his daughter Gölüsä. · · Min sezdän ber kièäw soramakhy idem, abzyj ... (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Qrly Bilal.) “I wanted to ask you for a bit of advice, Uncle ...” · · Îk, min sinnän båläk kabul itä almyjm ... (Ämirxan Eniki, Räwä.) “No, I cannot accept a present from you, ...” · ... närsä genä täkâdim itsäk tä, Artykbikä bezdän åzen kaldyruybyzny åtende. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) ... whatever we proposed, Artyqbikä begged us to leave her. · Zufirä ... bu kårenewtän kåzlären ala almady. (Mädinä Malikova, Qnartaular qktysynda.) Zufirä could not take her eyes off this view. ·

87

5. As the object denoting the point toward which the action is directed. The possessor of the point toward which the action is directed appears: a) In the possessive (genitive) case, the indirect object takes the possessive suffix of the third person: · Kyqm bik watlanyp kyznyè kullarynnan totty. (Ibraçim Gazi, Gaepsez gaeplelär.) Qiam was very glad and took the girl by her hands. · Kapitan ... hal apanyè belägennän ïlekterep, hitkä tartty. (Mädinä Malikova, Qnartaular qktysynda.) The captain ... grasped the gray-haired, elderly lady by her arm and pulled her aside. · Ul, ulynyè maègaennan åbep, karwysyna utyryp, ... sãekle häjnegennän häj qsap, anyè aldyna kujdy. (Kärim Tinhurin, Iskändär.) He kissed his son on his forehead, sat down opposite him ... made tea in (lit., from) his beloved teapot and put it in front of him. b) As the object of the predicate; the object in the ablative agrees in person (possessive suffixes) with the direct object: · ... Artykbikä ... any ... kåzlärennän, maègaennan, irinnän åbä bawlady. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) ... Artyqbikä began to kiss ... him ... on his eyes, forehead, lips. · ... ul kãtmägändä mine handyr æilkämnän koha. (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) ... he suddenly puts his arm around my slender shoulder. · Gaqz mine sul belägemnän totyp îldan hitkä alyp hykty. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) Holding me by my left arm, Ghayaz took me aside from the road. 6. As the object denoting the characteristic by which someone or something is recognized: · Mony nihekter anyè tywky kyqfätennän /qiðfðtennðn/ åk sizep bula ide. (Ämirxan Eniki, Räwä.) Somehow one could feel this (i.e., feel that he was no ordinary man) from his very appearance. · Änä kajberläreneè tãs-bitlärennän, kiemnärennän, tellärennän aèlyjsyè ... (Äbrar Wämin, Qèa qzlar.) Here some of them you (can) identify (i.e., one can identify) by their faces and complexion, their clothing and their language ... · Alar ... ber-bersen kåz karawlarynnan uk aèlawyrlar ... (Barlas Kamalov, Åramnar kièäq.) They ... will understand one another just by the looks in their eyes ... · ... bezneè ... universitetta ukyrga ïlägåneè bezgä nixätle bäxet ikänen ul bezneè kåzlärebezdäge ohkynnardan uk belergä tiew ide. (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) ... by the very sparkle in our eyes he must have noticed how happy we were that we ... had got in to study at the university. · ... qktylyk çäm temperatura åzgärewennän, tirä-qgymdagy tavywlardan min åzemneè kajda ikänlegemne belergä waktyj ostardym inde. (Atilla Rasix, Xävefle synau.) ... by now I had become quite masterful in telling where I was by the light and temperature changes and by the voices in my surroundings. 7. As the object denoting the material of which something is made: · Bazarda bez bik ozak jãrdek. Farfor, altynnan qsalgan äjberlär rätennän åtep, çãnärhelär qnyna kilep hyktyk. Biredä täæribäle ostalar åzläreneè wäkertlären metalldan, agahtan, dãq sãqgennän, baka kabyklarynnan tãrle matur äjberlär qsarga ãjrätälär... (Luiza Wäjdullina, Piramidalar ilendä.) We walked around at the market a very long time. Passing through the rows of things made of porcelain (and) gold, we came to the craftsmen. Here, experienced masters were teaching their students to make various beautiful objects of metal, wood, camel bone, tortoise shells...

88

[239] Furthermore, the ablative functions as the circumstancial complement of the verb giving precision to the action in a number of ways. For example, it indicates: 1. Motion from a point or place: · Bez barybyz urynnarybyzdan tordyk. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) We all rose from our seats. · Æäjge matur kãnnärdä monda jãrå gaæäp kåèelle. Avtobustan tãwep ällä erak kitmiseè, kue agahlyklar arasyndagy kyrgyj urynnarga baryp hygasyè. (Atilla Rasix, Urlangan xäzinä.) Walking here on beautiful summer days is amazingly pleasant. Getting off the autobus, you don’t walk very far until you come upon some wild places among dense stands of trees. · · Byltyr kãz, Hallyga barganda sineè æyryèny iwettem min, Ädilä. ... · Kih ide. Matur kih ide! Sin æyrlyj-æyrlyj, ber bawyè Oly su qgynnan îlga taba menä ideè. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Qzgy kärvannar.) “Last fall, when going to Chelny, I heard your song, Ädilä.” ... “It was evening. It was a beautiful evening! You were walking from Oly Su up towards the road, all alone, singing.” · Bik ahyk xäteremdä, ägär Ufadan Stärletamak qgyna hygyp kitärgä kiräk bulsa, iè ïlek ... bormaly-bormaly, tawly-tuzanly îl belän Agyjdelneè tekä tavyn tãwäse bula torgan ide. (Mirsäj Ämir, Kåèelle säqxät.) I remember it very clearly: If one had to travel from Ufa to Sterlitamak, one would first have to ... go down the steep heights of the Byelaya along a wildly curving, rock-strewn, dusty road. 2. The place or space through which, along which, or past which the action takes place: · Uramda kar qva ide. Ak uramnan kara kiemle kewelär awyga-awyga baralar ide. (Ibraçim Gazi, Gaepsez gaeplelär.) In the street it was snowing. People dressed in dark clothes were hurrying along the white street. · Tau qgynnan kilgän îldan ... jãk mawinasy uzyp bara ide. (Saæidä Sãläjmanova, Äs-sälqmi, Sufiqt.) Along the road from the mountain ... a truck was passing by. · ... ul Iskändärneè åtenehen kabul itep, kiè agah baskyhtan ... vak-vak atlap awygyp aldan tãwep kitte. (Kärim Tinhurin, Iskändär.) ... she complied with Iskändär’s request and, ... taking small, quick steps, she descended the wide wooden staircase ahead of him. · Iskändär Iláqsovlarnyè kapkalarynnan kergändä, koqw waktyj avywkan ide inde. (ibid.) When Iskändär entered through the Il’yasov’s gate, the sun was already rather low. · ... bu kapka qnynnan Säfärgali tuktamyjha çih uza almady. (Fatix Xãsni, Æäqåle kewe sukmagy.) ... Säfärghäli could never pass by this gate without stopping. · Sãjläwkännär, älbättä, läkin Ïláviranyè ul ber kolagynnan kergän dä ikenhesennän hykkan. (Atilla Rasix, Synau.) Of course, they had talked (about it), but that had gone in one of Elvira’s ears and out the other. · Æäj bue urmannan kura æiläge æyep, Arha bazaryna iltep, satsam da, ... (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) Although throughout the summer I gathered raspberries from the forest, brought them to market in Arsk and sold them, ... 3. Distance or direction from a place or point: · Hattan dårtenhe ãj anyky, ... (Mãsägyjt Xäbibullin, Xäter qrlary.) His was the fourth house from the corner, ... · Bez barasy æir biredän 12 (unike) kilometr hamasy eraklykta. (Ibraçim Gazi, Kãndälektän ber bit.) The place we are to go to is about 12 kilometers from here.

89

Seber timer îly belän Kazannan altmyw hakrymnar kitkäh, Arha bulyr. (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) Traveling on the Siberian Railroad from Kazan for about sixty versts, one arrives at Arsk (Archa) (lit., it will be Archa). · Bezdän qrty gyna hakrym ary Kaenlyk digän avyl bar ide. (ibid.) Only half a verst away from us was a village called Qayynlyq. · Wäçärdän tãnáqkka taba 6 (alty) kilometr eraklykta Idel åtkän. (S.S. Ajdarov, N.D. Aksenova, Bolgar wäçäre.) At a distance of six kilometers to the north of the city ran the Volga. · Wäçär boryngy nygytmalar higennän tãnáqkka, kãnbatywka çäm kãnhygywka taba kièäq. (ibid.) The city spread (lit., spreads) from the old fortifications towards the north, west and east. 4. Time: · Ul zamannan bu tãrdäge sängatá årnäkläre ... saklanmagan. (Tatarstan ASSR tarixy.) From that period these kinds of art patterns ... have not been preserved. · Kazan xanlygy zamanynnan kalgan arxitektura istälekläre îk. (ibid.) There are no monuments of architecture dating from the period of the Khanate of Kazan. · ... kihke æidedän irtänge biwkä hakly ... (Saæidä Sãläjmanova, Äs-sälqmi, Sufiqt.) ... from seven in the evening until five in the morning ... · Qrty sägatátän Zufirägä dä ike kewelek bålmädä ... uryn taptylar. (Mädinä Malikova, Qnartaular qktysynda.) After half an hour they also found accommodation for Zufirä in a double room ... · · Egerme minuttan äzer bulyrsyzmy? (ibid.) “Will you be ready in twenty minutes?” · Xäqt belän Liza bala vakytlarynnan uk bergä ujnap åskän duslar ide. (Fatix Ämirxan, Xäqt.) Kheyat and Liza were friends who had played and grown up together from childhood. 5. Age: · – Gadättä nihä qwátä ãjlänälär? – ... undårttän dä, unsigezdän dä, egerme biwtän dä. (Saæidä Sãläjmanova, Äs-sälqmi Sufiqt.) “At what age do they usually marry?” “... at fourteen, also at eighteen, also at twenty-five.” · Min kehe qwátän kitap ukyrga qrata idem. (Gãlwäçidä, Minem kala aluym.) I have loved reading books since childhood. 6. Cause: · Säfärgalineè tuèudan tewe tewkä bärelep dereldi bawlagan, ... (Fatix Xãsni. Æäqåle kewe sukmagy.) Säfärghäli’s teeth began to chatter with cold, ... · Xatynnyè malae, ... gaæäplänådän wakkatyp kaldy. (ibid.) The woman’s boy ... was struck dumb with surprise. · Zäjtånä åze oqludan kolaklaryna hakly kyzardy. (ibid.) Zeytünä herself blushed to her ears with shame. · Anyè bolaj osta æavap biråennän Sadyjk mulla bãtenläj telsez kaldy. (ibid.) That he gave such an able answer left Mulla Sadiq completely speechless (lit., From his giving such an able answer Mulla Sadiq became completely speechless). · [Ul] kuanyhynnan niwlärgä belmi. (Ibraçim Gazi, Gaepsez gaeplelär.) [He] is beside himself with joy (lit., [He] does not know what to do from joy). · Anyè jãze watlyktan balkyj ide. (Atilla Rasix, Urlangan xäzine.) His face shone with joy. 7. Manner: · Bawtanaqk karadan kiengän ozyn, handyr karhyk ... (Ämirxan Eniki, Räwä.) A tall, slender, old woman ..., who was clad in black from head to foot ... ·

90

– Min berenhe karawtan uk gawyjk buluga ywanmyjm ... (ibid.) “I do not believe in love at first sight...” · Beräålär any, ... myltyktan atkannar, ... dip sãjlädelär. (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) Some (people) said that someone shot him with a rifle, ... · Kalgannary imtixannaryn hittän toryp tapwyrdylar. (ibid.) The others took their exams by correspondence course. · ... zur kelätneè ahyk iwegendä beráîly ãh kyz kårende. Iè alda – Fäåziq, kyska æièle ak kålmäktän, kulynda mandolina. (Mirsäj Ämir, Åsä tãwkäh.) ... suddenly three girls appeared in the open door of the large storehouse. The first was Fäwziä. She was (clad) in a white dress with short sleeves, and in her hand she had a mandolin. · – Tukta, Zoq, åzeè telägän kiemnärdän ujnarsyè, ... (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) “Wait, Zoya, you play in the dresses which you want, ...” · Rizvan äjtäse såzlärneè barysyn da Nägyjmä kåèeldän belä ide inde. (Atilla Rasix, Urlangan xäzinä.) Näghimä knew already by heart all the words which Rizwan would say to her. · Kapitan ... telefonnan kaqdyr waltyratty. (Mädinä Malikova, Qnartaular qktysynda.) The captain ... made a telephone call to a certain place. 8. Measure and degree: · Kyskasy, uku elyna kolaktan humyp barganda ... (Fatix Xãsni, Bez qwá idek.) In brief, while being immersed to the ears in the academic year ... · ... tezdän æyly suda tynyh kyna basyp toruhy akkowlar, ... (Mädinä Malikova, Qnartaular qktysynda.) ... swans standing quietly to their knees in the warm water, ... · ... sädaka ãläwågä dä, bu tuj ãhen muennan buryhka batuyna karamastan, bik nyk äzerlände. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Tatar xatyny nilär kårmi.) ... despite the fact that he plunged head over ears into debt for this wedding, he had prepared himself very well also for the almsgiving. 9. The amount of money for which each of a number of objects is bought or sold: · · Ãh kaphygyè egerme biwär tiennän – æitmew biw tien. (Taæi Gyjzzät, Hatkylar.) “Your three bags of twenty-five kopecks each, that makes seventy-five kopecks.” 10. The ablative indicates an unspecified part of a whole (partitive): · Irtä belän Nägyjmä iè tämle awlardan ãstäl xäzerläde. (Gadel Kutuj, Vãædan gazaby.) In the morning Näghimä set (lit., prepared) the table with the tastiest dishes. · ... æiègilär ... samovarny kertep kujdylar. Majdan, baldan, läväwtän, vak bälewtän, kojmaktan, kajmaktan, dãnáqda åzläre belgän, kårgän nihakly tämle awamlyklar, kaderle syjlar bulsa, çämmäsen kiterep tezdelär. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Tatar xatyny nilär kårmi.) ... the sisters-in-law ... brought in the samovar. They carried in and put on the table everything, butter, honey, läväsh (round patties with raisins, fruit or jam baked in butter), small bälesh (turnovers with a filling), blini, sour cream, whatever tasty food and fine refreshments they themselves knew and had seen in the world. · [Tabarov] ... ozyn-ozak sãjlänep tora torgannardan tågel. (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) [Tabarov] ... is not (one) of those who talk at great length. · Tatar telennän çäm tatar ädäbiqtynnan imtixan tapwyrganda, bez åzebezne sudagy balyk kebek sizdek. (ibid.) When taking the exam in Tatar language and Tatar literature we felt like fish in water. 11. The ablative singles out a part from a whole. a) The part singled out takes the possessive suffix of the third person: ·

91

Æäjneè aqz, matur ajly kihlärennän bere ide. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Kazak kyzy.) It was one of summer’s clear, beautiful, moonlit evenings. · ... bu terrasa Iskändärneè sãekle urynnarynnan berse ide. (Kärim Tinhurin, Iskändär.) ... this terrace was one of Iskändär’s favorite places. · Ul mäælestäge adämnärdän ikäveseneè baryp, kyzdan rizalyk sorap kilåen tiewle tapty. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Tatar xatyny nilär kårmi.) He found it necessary that two of the men at the (wedding) banquet should go and ask the girl’s consent. · Anyè artynnan egetlärdän dä ikävese kajttylar. (Fatix Ämirxan, Urtalykta.) After her (i.e., after Sufia) two of the young men also returned. b) The part singled out does not take the possessive suffix: · Kart professorlardan beräå, åzeneè student hagyn xäterläp, ... (Gadel Kutuj, Soltannyè ber kãne.) One of the old professors, recalling his student time, ... · Kãndälektän ber bit. (Ibraçim Gazi.) A page from the diary. · Dekabrá kihlärennän ber kih, sägatá altylar ide. (Fatix Ämirxan, Xäqt.) It was a December evening (lit., one of the December evenings) around six o’clock. · Märáqm Ufa mirzalarynnan baj ber mirzanyè kyzy ide. (Fatix Ämirxan, urtalykta.) Märyäm was the daughter of a rich mirza in Ufa. · «Socialistik Tatarstan»da A. Rasixnyè «Kaçarmannar îly» isemle qèa romanynnan ãzek hykty. (Ädäbiqt baskyhlary · Tatar sovet ädäbiqty elâqzmasy, 1917-1973.) An excerpt of A. Rasikh’s new novel “The Road of the Heroes” appeared in “Socialist Tataristan”. ·

Note: The noun designating the whole may also be used with the genitive: Xäsän ... kyzlarnyè çär ikese belän kårewte ... (Fatix Ämirxan, Urtalykta.) Khäsän ... greeted both of the girls ... ... [kilen] xuæa xatyn ãstendäge mäwäkatálärneè qrtysyn åz æilkäsenä kåtärde. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Tatar xatyny nilär kårmi.) ... [the daughter-in-law] took half of the missis’ troubles upon her own shoulder. ... Räæäpov jãz sumnyè utyz sumyn gyna aldy, ... (Gadel Kutuj, Vãædan gazaby.) ... Räjäpov took only thirty of the hundred roubles, ...

12. The ablative is used to express comparison (see also 306; 610, 613 b): · · Min any sinnän qxwyrak beläm, ... (Mädinä Malikova, Qnartaular qktysynda.) “I know him better than you do, ...” · ... aèardan da îgaryrak bäq biråhe hynlap ta îk ide. (Ämirxan Eniki, Räwä.) ... there was indeed no one offering (lit., giving) a higher price than he. · Berse tanyw kibethe Mäxmåt. ... ikenhese Mäxmåttän keheräk kara-kuhkyl jãzle åsmer malaj. (Saæidä Sãläjmanova, Äs-sälqmi, Sufiqt.) One of them was the familiar shopkeeper Mäkhmüt. ... the other one was a young boy with a dark complexion, (and) younger than Mäkhmüt. 13. The ablative is used when governed by a postposition requiring this case (see 555; 556, 1 a, b, 2 a, b; 557-571). 14. It is used in idiomatic expressions: · Xäldän taî ‘to become tired’, xäterdän hygu ‘to pass from one’s memory’, akyldan qzu ‘to be out of one’s senses’, kåzdän îgalu ‘to disappear’, kuldan kilå ‘to be able to do’, çuwtan qzu ‘to faint, pass out’. 15. The ablative forms adverbs (see 597).

92

[240] Depending on their lexical meaning, some verbs governing the ablative may also govern a direct object (both determinate and indeterminate). For example: Beräåneè kulynnan totu ‘to hold someone by the hand’, karakny totu ‘to catch the thief’, bålmäne hista totu ‘to keep the room clean’, ser totu ‘to keep a secret’, îgary uryn totu ‘to hold a high position’, Sin kemnän soradyè? ‘Whom did you ask? ‘ qrdäm sorau ‘to ask for help’, buryhka akha sorau ‘to ask for a loan’, beräåneè isemen sorau ‘to ask someone’s name’, keweneè adresyn sorau ‘to ask for a person’s address’, gazetadan uku ‘to read in the newspaper’, kåzlärdän uku ‘to anticipate (someone’s wishes)’, klassiklarny uku ‘to read the classics’, îl arasyn uku ‘to read between the lines’. Compare also: · – Min sezdän ber kièäw soramakhy idem, abzyj ... (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Qrly Bilal.) “I wanted to ask you for some advice, Uncle ...” (abzyj ‘older brother’, ‘uncle’, used in addressing a person older than oneself). · – Nigä any minnän soryjsyè? (Taæi Gyjzzät, Färxinaz.) “Why do you ask me that?” · Ajdar. Æibärergä kiräk, olannar.1) Æiçanwa. Äje, äje. ... Ajdar. Tik akhasyn kajdan tabarbyz? (ibid.) Aidar. We must send him, esteemed friends. Jihansha. Yes, yes. Aidar. But where will we find the money (i.e., where will we get the money from)? · Akhany îlda tapsaè da sanap al. (Proverb) If you find money even on the road, count it. · Elga qrlarynnan hykty. (Såzlek) The river overflowed its banks. · Ul, isemen dä sorarga onytkan avylny hykkannan soè, ber märtäbä dä artyna borylmady. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Ãh arwyn æir.) After traveling through the village he had even forgotten to ask the name of, he did not turn round even once. · Æämilä ... aw bålmäsendäge awamlyk närsälärne kåzennän kiherde. (Mäæit Gafuri, Qrlylar, qki ãjdäw xatyn.) Jämilä ... looked (cast an eye) over the food which was in the dining room. · Dimhe diègez kiherä. (Proverb) The matchmaker puts one across the sea (i.e., she convinces one). · ... min sezneè ... gaepläregezne kiheräm, ... (Taæi Gyjzzät, Färxinaz.) ... I forgive you your offences, ...

1)

Olan – ‘child’; used in the plural form in direct address in the sense of ‘esteemed friends’, ‘comrades’, ‘colleagues’.

93

Table of the Declension of Nouns [241] 1. Nouns ending in a voiced Nom.: kul hand Gen.: kulnyè Dat.: kulga Acc.: kulny Loc.: kulda Abl.: kuldan Nom.: ana Gen.: ananyè Dat.: anaga Acc.: anany Loc.: anada Abl.: anadan

mother

consonant or in a vowel wäçär city, town wäçärneè wäçärgä wäçärne wäçärdä wäçärdän bådmä bålmäneè bålmägä bålmäne bålmädä bålmädän

2. Nouns ending in a voiceless consoant Nom.: at horse mäktäp Gen.: atnyè mäktäpneè Dat.: atka mäktäpkä Acc.: atny mäktäpne Loc.: atta mäktäptä Abl.: attan mäktäptän 3. Nouns ending in a nasal Nom.: uram street Gen.: uramnyè Dat.: uramga Acc.: uramny Loc.: uramda Abl.: uramnan

idän idänneè idängä idänne idändä idännän

room

school

floor

moè melody, tune moènyè moèga moèny moèda moènan

4. Loanwords ending in b, d, g, k Nom.: klub club paroxod steamship Gen.: klubnyè paroxodnyè Dat.: klubka paroxodka Acc.: klubny paroxodny Loc.: klubta paroxodta Abl.: klubtan paroxodtan Nom.: Gen.: Dat.: Acc.: Loc.: Abl.:

94

katalog katalognyè katalogka katalogny katalogta katalogtan

catalogue park parknyè parkka parkny parkta parktan

park

[242] 1st Person Singular Nom.: kitabym Gen.: kitabymnyè Dat.: kitabyma Acc.: kitabymny Loc.: kitabymda Abl.: kitabymnan

Table of the Declension of Nouns with Possessive Suffixes bålmäm bålmämneè bålmämä bålmämne bålmämdä bålmämnän

my room,etc.

2nd Person Singular Nom.: kitabyè your book Gen.: kitabyènyè etc. Dat.: kitabyèa Acc.: kitabyèny Loc.: kitabyèda Abl.: kitabyènan

bålmäè bålmäèneè bålmäèä bålmäène bålmäèdä bålmäènän

your room etc.

3rd Person Singular Nom.: kitaby his (her) book Gen.: kitabynyè etc. Dat.: kitabyna Acc.: kitabyn Loc.: kitabynda Abl.: kitabynnan

bålmäse bålmäseneè bålmäsenä bålmäsen bålmäsendä bålmäsennän

his (her) room etc.

1st Person Plural Nom.: kitabybyz our book Gen.: kitabybyznyè etc. Dat.: kitabybyzga Acc.: kitabybyzny Loc.: kitabybyzda Abl.: kitabybyzdan

bålmäbez bålmäbezneè bålmäbezgä bålmäbezne bålmäbezdä bålmäbezdän

our room etc.

2nd Person Plural Nom.: kytabygyz your book Gen.: kitabygyznyè etc. Dat.: kitabygyzga Acc.: kitabygyzny Loc.: kitabygyzda Abl.: kitabygyzdan

bålmägez bålmägezneè bålmägezgä bålmägezne bålmägezdä bålmägezdän

your room etc.

3rd Person Plural Nom.: kitaplary their book1) Gen.: kitaplarynyè etc. Dat.: kitaplaryna Acc.: kitaplaryn Loc.: kitaplarynda Abl.: kitaplarynnan

bålmäläre their room2) bålmäläreneè etc. bålmälärenä bålmälären bålmälärendä bålmälärennän

1) 2)

my book of my book to my book my book in my book from my book

Also: his (her) books, etc., their books, etc. Also: his (her) rooms, etc., their rooms, etc.

95

Declension of the Independent Possessive Pronouns [243] The singular forms are declined like simple nouns with the 3rd person possessive suffix. the plural forms like any other noun or pronoun in the plural: Nom.: Gen.: Dat.: Acc.: Loc.: Abl.:

mineke minekeneè minekenä mineken minekendä minekennän

Bulatnyky Bulatnykynyè Bulatnykyna Bulatnykyn Bulatnykynda Bulatnykynnan

seznekelär seznekelärneè seznekelärgä seznekelärne seznekelärdä seznekelärdän

Bulatnykylar Bulatnykylarnyè Bålatnykylarga Bulatnykylarny Bulatnykylarda Bulatnykylardan

The Privative [244] The suffix +syz, +sez joined to nouns or to pronouns indicates the execution of an action without the participation of the person or thing expressed by the noun or pronoun. Joined to nouns designating time, it indicates that the action expressed by the predicate of the sentence is not carried out before the span of time expressed by the noun to which +syz, +sez is joined has elapsed. · Kärimä moèarhy Xarrassyz nihek qwi aluyna gaæäplänä ide. (Koqw Timbikova, Täèkäle tau.) Kärimä was wondering how until now she had been able to live without Kharras. · ... mine imtixansyz aldylar. (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) ... they accepted me without an exam. · – Sinsez monda niwlim? (Äxsän Baqnov, Argy qr.) “What shall I do here without you?” · – Gãlhähäk avyryj, ber atnasyz hyga almas, – dide ul. “Gölchächäk is ill, she will not be able to go out before a week,” said he. · Ul Kazanga qzuhylar konferenciqsenä kitkän ide, atna-un kãnsez kajtmastyr. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) He had gone to Kazan to a writer’s conference [and] would probably not return before a week or ten days. Note: With the demonstrative pronouns bu, ul, and wul, +syz is joined to their stems mon+, an+, wun+. Hence: monsyz, ansyz, wunsyz.

96

CHAPTER II ¡ ADJECTIVES1) Classification of Adjectives [245] Tatar adjectives may be descriptive or relational. Most descriptive adjectives describe as well as limit their noun, usually by indicating some quality. A relational. adjective indicates the relationship of its object of attribution to the word from which it (the relational adjective) is derived. Some relational adjectives may also qualify their noun(s). Descriptive adjectives may be simple (underived), derived, or compound. Relational adjectives are always derived.

Formation of Adjectives [246] Derived adjectives are formed by means of suffixes joined to nouns, adjectives or other nominal parts of speech, or to verbs.

Suffixes Forming Adjectives from Words other than Verbs [247] +am, +äm (rare, mostly äm): kårek ‘elegance’, ‘beauty’, kårkäm ‘elegant’, ‘beautiful’. [248] +gy, +ge, +ky, +ke /+ôí, +ge, +qí, +ke/; this suffix forms relational adjectives. It is joined to 1. nouns; 2. adjectives; 3. adverbs; and 4. postpositions. 1. Joined to nouns designating location or time, it forms relational adjectives indicating spatial or temporal relationship, as well as possession. (It often corresponds to nouns used as attributive adjectives (compound nouns) in English): art ‘rear’, ‘back’, artky ‘situated at, or pertaining to, the rear, back’, e.g., artky rät ‘the last (rear) row’; ãs (ãst) ‘top’, ‘upper part’, ‘surface’, ãske ‘upper’, for example: ãske kat ‘upper floor’; tyw ‘exterior’, ‘external/outer side’, tywky ‘external’, ‘outward’, tywky kårenew ‘outward appearance’; qz ‘spring’, qzgy ‘pertaining to spring’, qzgy çava ‘spring air’; kãz ‘autumn’, ‘fall’, kãzge ‘autumnal’, kãzge kiemnär ‘fall dresses’; kyw ‘winter’, kywky kãn ‘a winter day’; tãw ‘noon’, tãwke aw ‘lunch’ (noon meal); tãn ‘night’, tãnge karavylhy ‘night watchman’. · Tãnge sägatá unda. At 10 o’clock at night. · Ãjdä äni belän åzebez genä kalyp irtänge häjne ïhkändä bezgä ber kehkenä kyz bala kilde. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) While we were alone in the house with Mother and having the morning tea, a little girl came to (see) us. · ... min atnaga dårt tapkyr Älmätkä kihke mäktäpkä kiläm. (Rafail Tãxfätullin, Agymsu.) ... I come to Al’met’evsk, to the evening school four times a week. · Bäxetkä, wagyjrá arxivynda älege æurnalnyè ber sany – 1920 elgy qnvará sany saklanyp kalgan. (Nil Îziev, Gaæäp talant.) Fortunately, one issue of that (same) journal – the January issue of the year 1920 – has been preserved in the poet’s archives. 1)

For other parts of speech (pronouns, numerals, participles) used as adjectives see the appropriate chapters.

97

2. It is attached to some adjectives: · Tåbän ‘low’, tåbänge ‘low’, ‘lower’, Tåbänge palata ‘House of Commons’; qzu ãstäleneè tåbänge tartmasy ‘the lower drawer of the desk’; îgary ‘high’, ‘above’, ‘upper’, æämgyqtáneè îgarygy katlaulary ‘the upper strata of society.’ 3. It is joined to adverbs of place and time, including adverbs formed by means of case endings: · Bågen ‘today’, Bågenge ïwne irtägä kaldyrma. (Proverb). Do not postpone today’s work to tomorrow. · Irtä ‘morning’, irtägä ‘tomorrow’. Irtägäge ïweène bågen ïwlä. (Proverb). Do tomorrow’s work today. · Xäzer ‘now’; xäzerge tatar ädäbi tele ‘today’s Tatar literary language’, · soè ‘late’; soègy märtäbä ‘the last time’, · kåp ‘much’, kåptän ‘of long (duration, standing)’; kåptänge ike dus ‘two friends of long standing’, · kajhan ‘when’; ... kunak ... ällä kajhangy, bäläkäj Hallyda hykkan rajon gazetasyn karap utyrgan Fäez qnyna kilde. (Äxsän Baqnov, Taw kitap.) ... the guest ... came over to Fäyez, who was sitting, looking at an out-of-date district paper which had appeared in little Chelny. Note: If, in addition to the relational adjective formed by the suffix +gy, +ge, etc., the noun is also modified by one or more descriptive attributive adjectives, the latter usually follow(s) the relational adjective: kãzge ahy æillär ‘piercing autumn winds’.

Compare also: · Galimæan kywky æyly kiemnän, tolyptan. (G. Ibraçimov turynda istäleklär, Moxtar Ibraçimov.) Ghalimjan is (dressed in) warm winter clothes, in a sheepskin coat. · Kywky waktyj salkyn ajly tãn ide, ... (Ämirxan Eniki, Soègy kitap.) It was a rather cold, moonlit winter night. 4. It is joined to certain postpositions (see 573). Note: In the vernacular, as well as in literature, a few attributive adjectives formed by means of the suffix +gy, +ge, etc., and indicating time may take the possessive suffix of the 3rd person singular +sy, +se, which then serves to intensify their meaning. Attributive adjectives used with +sy, +se are, for example, bågenge ‘today’s’, irtäge ‘tomorrow’s’, and xäzerge ‘present’. Their nouns may be in any case, but mostly they are used with the bearer of the attribute in the accusative, locative, or ablative. ·

· · ·

·

– ... xäbär sineè ãhen dä kyzykly bulahak. Äje. Wul kyzny wäçärneè baw tärbiqhese itep kuqhaklar. Irtägese forumda. (Äxsän Baqnov, Taw kitap.) “... the news will be interesting to you too. Yes, they will install that girl as the town’s chief educator. At tomorrow’s forum.” Çerkemneè åz iseme bar, bågengese kãndä wunysy xak. (ibid.) Everybody has his own name. Today that is a right (law). · Xäzergese kãndä Mädinä kem belän tora? (Fatix Xãsni, Beräå kilä, beräå kitä.) “With whom does Mädinä live at present?” Balyk totu egetlärne isertep æibärde. ... Xäzergese minutta balykka moxtaælyk barmy-îkmy, ul sièa kiräkme-tågelme – bu turyda ujlap toryrga vakyt ta, teläk tä îk ide. (Mirgaziqn Înys, Îlda ujlanular.) Catching fish made the youths dizzy. ... There was neither the time nor the desire to think about whether at the present minute there was or was not a need for fish, whether one needed them or not. Irtägese kãn Moxtar ïwtän soèlabrak kajtty. (Wärif Kamal, Taè atkanda.) The next day Mokhtar returned somewhat late from work.

Note: The neutral literary forms of the above attributive constructions are: irtägä bulahak forumda, bågenge kãndä, xäzerge minutta, ikenhe kãnne (instead of the colloquial irtägese kãn).

98

[249] +gylt, +kelt; this suffix is attached to some names of colors to express a lesser degree of quality (equivalent to English “+ish”): sary ‘yellow’, sargylt ‘yellowish’, qwel ‘green’, qwákelt ‘greenish’. [250] +gyra (rare); aè ‘reason’, ‘conception’, ‘idea’, aègyra ‘stupid’, ‘dull’, ‘slow-witted’. [251] +dagy, +däge, +tagy, +täge; this suffix, which consists of the locative +da, +dä, +ta, +tä plus +gy, +ge, forms relational adjectives. It is joined to 1. common and proper nouns (including names of persons); 2. adjectives; 3. adverbs; 4. numerals; 5. pronouns; 6. postpositions (see 574); 7. past participles (see 1083); 8. verbal nouns in +u, +å (see 1199); 9. to any substantivizied part of speech. 1. Attached to common nouns in the singular or plural, with or without possessive suffixes, and denoting place or time, it forms relational adjectives indicating spatial or temporal relationship, as well as possession. (Relational adjectives in +dagy, etc., often correspond to nouns in the possessive case in English). For example: Avyldagy: bu avyldagy igenhelär ‘the farmers of/in this village’; bakhabyzdagy: bakhabyzdagy æimew agahlary ‘the fruit trees (which are) in our garden; kåktäge: kåktäge joldyzlar ‘the stars (which are) in the sky’; atnadagy: bu atnadagy vakyjgalar /waqiôðlðr/ ‘this week’s events’; 60 nhy ellardagy tatar ädäbiqty ‘Tatar literature of the 1960’s’; wul vakyttagy tatar ädäbiqty ‘Tatar literature of that time’. Compare also: Däreslekneè 81 nhe bitendäge soraular çäm 80-82 nhe bitlärdäge räsemnärdän fajdalanyp, tabigatátäge kywky åzgärewlär iskä tãwerelä. (S.M.) Winter changes in nature are recalled, using the questions on page 81 of the textbook and the pictures (which are) on pages 80-82. · Saniq belägendäge sägatenä karap aldy. (Mirsäj Ämir, Qlantau keweläre.) Saniä glanced at the watch on her wrist. · Bålmä ïhe gaæäp pãxtä, æyjnak. Idändäge qwel keläm bolyn åläne tãsen xäterlätä. (Färit Gyjlámetdinov, Elganyè borylgan tãwendä.) The interior of the room is remarkably neat (and) cozy. The green carpet on the floor reminds one of the color of meadow grass. · Zãq elgasy, ... wäçär äjlänäsen qrym aj qsap uryj da, ... kãnbatywtagy ahyklyktan Kamaga awyga. (ibid.) The Sviyaga river, ... circles the city area in a crescent and, ... through the open country in the west, hurries to the Kama. · Lida Däåläkändä îk ide inde, kaqdyr Ukrainaga ... kiqådäge kyzy qnyna kitkän bulyp hykty. (Ämirxan Eniki, Soègy kitap.) Lida was no longer in Däwläkän. It turned out that she had moved in with her married daughter somewhere in Ukraine (kiqå ‘bridegroom’; ‘young husband in his first years of marriage’; ‘son-inlaw’; kiqågä baru (hygu) ‘to get married (of a girl)’, kiqådäge ‘married’). · Minem zamandagy kewelär îk, ... (ibid.) There are no people of my time, ... (i.e., of the time when the writer lived in that village). · Bu äsärne soègy ellardagy iè qxwy xikäqlärdän berse itep sanauhylarga min tulysynha kuwylam. (Rafaïlá Mostafin, Perspektivany îgaltmyjk.) I completely agree with those who consider this work (i.e., literary work) one of the best stories in recent years. ·

With other common nouns +dagy etc. forms relational adjectives qualifying their objects of attribution. For example: urta qwálärdäge xatyn ‘a middle-aged woman’; îgary däräæädäge kewelär ‘high-ranking persons’; tatar telendäge kitaplar ‘books in Tatar language’; kåp sandagy äsärlärendä ‘in his numerous works’. 99

Gäp närsä turynda? Zamana turynda, agymdagy vakyjgalar turynda, ... (Ämirxan Eniki, Xäterdäge tãennär.) What is the conversation about? About the times, about current events, ... · Tukaj isemendäge klubta 12 apreládä hirattagy ädäbi æomgada kyska xikäqlär kihäse åtkärelde. (Kazan utlary no. 6, 1968.) On the 12th of April, on the regular literary Friday, a short story evening was organized at the Tuqai Club (lit., at the club with the name of Tuqai). · 173 kilometr ozynlygyndagy kanalny ber täålek ïhendä åtep, ikenhe kãnne taè aldynnan Såäew portyna kilep æittek. (Mirgaziqn Înys, Såäew kanaly.) Passing through the 173 km long Canal in 24 hours, we reached the port of Suez the next day before dawn. · Alarnyè tormywka mãnäsäbätlärendäge, fikerläå rävewendäge, tellärendäge «avyllyk» ällä kaqn sizelep tora. (Fäiz Zãlkarnäev, Hakma hakmyj ut hykmyj.) One somehow feels the “touch of the village” in their (i.e., the prose writers’) attitude towards life, in their way of thinking, in their language. ·

Joined to geographical names, +dagy, +däge, etc., forms relational adjectives indicating spacial relationship. Note: Relational adjectives in +dagy, etc., derived from geographical names are written with a capital letter. · ... min Kazandagy synly sängatá mäktäbendä ukyj idem, ... (G. Ibraçimov

turynda istäleklär, Bakyj Urmanhy.) ... I was studying at the Kazan School of Fine Arts, ... · – Min Karamalynyky. ... Xäzerge Tatarstandagy Karamaly bulsa, min any beläm. (Mirgaziqn Înys, Bezneè ãj ãqnke astynda ide.) “I am from Qaramaly.” ... “If it is the Qaramaly in present-day Tatarstan, I know it.” · Akâäbi kalaga kilep urynga qtu belän, Kazakâstandagy kehe ulyn çäm Permá ãlkäsendäge zur kyzyn hakyryp qzuny åtenä bawlady. (Ämirxan Eniki, Äjtelmägen vasyqtá.) As soon as Aqäbi came to the city and lay down on her bed, she began begging her (i.e., her younger daughter) to write and invite her youngest son (who was) in Kazakstan and her older daughter (who was) in the Perm’ region. Joined to names of persons +dagy, etc., forms relational adjectives indicating location, possession. Note: Relational adjectives in +dagy, etc., derived from names of persons are written with a capital letter. · ... Xafazamdagy ul åzgärewlärneè berse dä mine ujlandyrmady, sagaerga mäæbår

itmäde. (Ämirxan Eniki, Vãædan.) ... not one of those changes in my Khafaza caused me to think, (or) forced me to beware (Xafaza feminine name). · Mãxämmätneè çäm Näsimäneè mãgamäläläre Xäsändäge bu tartynu, uèajsyzlanuny bik kåp kimettelär. (Fatix Ämirxan, Urtalakta.) Mökhämmät’s and Näsimä’s conduct lessened very much this uneasiness, uncomfortableness of Khäsän’s.

Note: Relational adjectives formed by joining +dagy, +däge, etc., to nouns are often used to avoid the repetition of a genitive immediately after another genitive. For example: ... bu mähet ... XIII–XIV gasyrlarda Idel bue Bolgar däåläteneè bawkalasyndagy tãp mähet bulyp sanalgan. (S.S. Ajdarov, N.D. Aksenova, Bolgar wäçäre.) In the 13th and 14th centuries ... this mosque ... was regarded as the main mosque of the capital of the Volga Bolghar State. (... Bolgar däåläteneè bawkalasyndagy tãp mähet..., instead of ... Bolgar däåläteneè bawkalasynyè tãp mähete ... The use of the two consecutive genitive endings is considered stylistically somewhat clumsy. Besides, in the above example the form with +dagy also points to location, which is more appropriate in its context).

100

2. Attached to some adjectives +dagy, +däge, etc., forms relational adjectives indicating the basic lexical meaning of the adjectives from which they are derived: · Eraktagy koqw æyly bula. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) The distant sun is warm. · Äjtelgännärdän tåbändäge nätiæäne qsap bula. (M.Z. Zäkiev, Tatar xalky teleneè barlykka kilåe.) From what has been said one can draw the following conclusion (one can draw the conclusion (which is) below. (For the verbal adverb in -p etc., and bulu, see 1258). · Îgarydagy misallar wul turyda sãjli. (F.S. Safiullina, Tatar teleneè såz tärtibe.) The above examples tell about that. · Wul sekundta uk qkyndagy kuak tãbennän iptäwläre kilep hykty. (Gomär Bäwirov, Kãtelmägän ohrawu.) At the same moment (lit., second) his comrades came out from under the nearby bushes. · Qkyndagy un el ïhendä ilneè awlamalar æitewteråhänlege waktyj arttyrylyrga tiew. (Marselá Zaripov, Otywly äjlänew.) In the next ten years the country’s output of fertilizers must be considerably increased. 3. Attached to some adverbs +dagy, +däge, etc., forms relational adjectives reflecting the basic lexical meaning of the adverb. For example: bire ‘here’: Biredäge kewelärneè kåbese tanyw ide. (Atilla Rasix, Qmawev.) Most of the people (who were) here were known (to him). 4. The suffix +dagy, +däge, etc., is attached to certain numerals to form relational adjectives: · Altmywtagy kart babaè ... (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) Your old grandfather of sixty ... · Siksändäge ber kart ... (ibid.) An old man of eighty ... (An octogenarian ...). 5. Joined to pronouns, +dagy, +däge, etc., forms relational adjectives indicating location, possession. · Vafa åzeneè åtkäne belän dä çäm xäzerge vakyttagy ïwe belän dä bezdäge miwärlärdän waktyj aerylyp tora ide. (Ämirxan Eniki, Vãædan.) Wafa distinguished himself considerably from the Mishars at our (working) place by his past, as well as by his present work. · Kitapxanäneè kyjmäte – andagy kitaplarnyè kåplegendä çäm tãrlelegendä. (Renat Xarisov, Æäjlär, kãzlär nindi bulyr?) The value of a library lies in the multitude and variety of the books (which are) in it. · Aèardagy bu gadätne bary aèa gyna xas närsä itep kårå dãres bulmas ide ... (Ämirxan Eniki, Xäterdäge tãennär.) To regard this habit of his as something peculiar only to him would not be right ... · · Gazetalarny, alardagy xäbär çäm surätlärne kårmägän, älbättä. (Äxsän Baqnov, Taw kitap.) “Of course, he has not seen (I think) the newspapers, the news and pictures (which are) in them.” · – Läkin, turysyn äjtäm, qrdäm kãtep qtmagyz, åzegezdäge rezervlarny kyîrak ahyp ïwkä awyra barsagyz, xäerleräk bulyr. (Gaziz Kawapov, Æir æylysy.) “But, I tell you the truth, don’t wait for help. It will be better, if you develop and put to work more boldly the reserves which you yourselves have.” · Bakha bik kåptän utyrtylgan bulsa kiräk: andagy agahlar inde tämam kartajgannar. (Sadri Æäläl, Dim buenda.) The garden must have been planted very long ago, for the trees in it have already grown very old. · Kart mirza ara-tirä häj qnnarynda aèardan ukygan däreslären, gimnaziqdäge tormywny, andagy mãgallimnärne, awau-ïhålärne sorawtyra. (ibid.) From time

101

to time, at tea, the old mirza asks him (i.e., his son) about his studies, about life at the high school, the teachers there, and about the food and drink. · Ul arada kywky kyska kãn uzyp ta kitte, karaègylana da bawlady. Ä bågen alar Kama buena baryp hygarga, wundagy ber rajon åzägenä kilep kunarga tiewlär. (Mirsäj Ämir, Qlantau keweläre.) Meanwhile, the short winter day passed quickly and darkness began to fall. But today they must reach the Kama, get to (lit., come to), and spend the night at, a district center (which is) there. · Ber-berse belän tiränräk tanywa, tegendäge-mondagy xällär turynda sorawa bawladylar. (ibid.) They began to know each other better (lit., deeper) (and) to ask about things (conditions) (which were) there and here. Note: Mondagy, andagy, wundagy, tegendäge are formed by joining +dagy, +däge to the demonstrative pronouns bu, ul, wul, tege (see 414-422). In the locative they function as adverbs of place: monda ‘here’, anda ‘there’, etc. Furthermore, as ul can be both demonstrative pronoun and personal pronoun of the 3rd person singular (see 414-417), anda may also mean ‘in (with) him, her, it’.

[252] +daw, +däw (forms also nouns); avaz ‘voice’, avazdaw ‘homonymic’, ‘homonymous’; mägânä ‘meaning’, mägânädäw ‘synonymous’, mägânädäw såzlär ‘synonyms words’. [253] +i, +yj, +vi, +vyj; an Arabic suffix; used frequently in Tatar. It forms adjectives from nouns of Arabic origin: tarix ‘history’, tarixi ‘historical’; fän ‘science’, fänni ‘scientific’; gyjlem ‘science’, gyjlámi ‘scientific’, syjnyf ‘class’, syjnfyj ‘pertaining to class’, as for example, syjnfyj kãräw ‘class struggle’, mägânä ‘sense’, ‘meaning’, ‘substance’, ‘nature’, mägânävi ‘spiritual’, ‘intellectual’. [254] ik (compare also 84, 2 c); forms adjectives from Russian loanwords (adjectives) ending in Russian in +iheskij: biografiheskij – biografik ‘biographic’; teoretiheskij – teoretik ‘theoretic’; grammatiheskij – grammatik ‘grammatical’. [255] +kär (R.); xäjlä ‘cunning’, ‘slyness’, ‘ruse’, xäjläkär ‘cunning’, ‘sly’, ‘artful’. Note: When joined to nouns of the back vowel group this suffix is spelled +kará or +kqr: fida ‘sacrifice’, fidakará, fidakqr /fidakðr/ ‘selfless’, ‘devoted’.

[256] +lah, +läh; forms adjectives designating abundance, profusion, excess: it ‘meat’, itläh ‘fleshy’, ‘meaty’, ‘beefy’; jon ‘wool’, ‘down’, jonlah ‘woolly’, ‘downy’, ‘fluffy’. [257] +ly, +le; this suffix belongs to the most productive and most frequently used suffixes. 1. Joined to nouns, it forms both descriptive and relational adjectives indicating; a) A quality or an object possessed (see also 129, 205): mägânä ‘meaning’, mägânäle æavap ‘an intelligent, sensible answer’; kanun ‘law’, kanunly ‘lawful’, ‘legal’; kãh ‘strength’, kãhle ‘strong’; vakyt ‘time’, vakytly ‘temporary’, vakytly matbugat ‘periodicals’; akyl ‘brain’, akylly ‘intelligent’, ‘having a brain’; irek ‘freedom’, irekle ‘free’; æir ‘land’, æirle kewe ‘a local person’, or ‘a person who owns land’; urman ‘wood’, urmanly tau ‘a wooded mountain’; at ‘horse’, atly kewe ‘a person owning a horse’; bala ‘child’, balaly xatyn ‘a woman who has a child’; sakal ‘beard’, sakally kart ‘an old man having a beard’; buj ‘stature’, ozyn bujly ber eget ‘a tall youth’. b) The presence – also the abundant or excessive presence – of one object in (on, at, etc.) another object (place, etc.): toz ‘salt’, tozly su ‘salt water’; kitap ‘book’, kitaply wkaf ‘a bookcase with books’; balyk ‘fish’, balykly kål ‘a lake having fish’; tau ‘mountain’, tauly æir ‘a place where there is a mountain’, or ‘a mountainous place’ (i.e.,

102

a place with many mountains); täm ‘taste’, tämle awamlyk ‘tasty food’, or ‘good-tasting food’; tozly aw ‘salty food’ (i.e., excessively salty food). 2. Joined to names of countries (continents), it forms names of nationalities (see also 325, 326): Daniq ‘Denmark’, daniqle ‘a Dane’ or ‘Danish’; Belágiq ‘Belgium’, belágiqle ‘Belgian’; Avstriq ‘Austria’, avstriqle ‘Austrian’. 3. Joined to names of colors, it indicates that the color predominates, or that it is mixed with other colors: ak ‘white’, akly sitsy ‘a cotton (print) whose basic color is white’; akly-karaly ‘white and black’; akly-kåkle ‘white and blue’. 4. Attached to verbal nouns in -u, -å (see 1171), the suffix +ly, +le forms adjectives indicating the basic lexical meaning of the verbal nouns from which they are derived. Note: They often correspond to present participles in English when these are used as pure adjectives: ·

Nikadär kuarga tyrywsam da, Nadq minem ujlaryma çaman kilä dä kerä ... Kolak tãbemdä muzyka da qègyryj kebek. Awkynuly çäm moèsu, ãndäåle çäm kisätåle muzyka. Ul arada mièa Nadq sorauly kåzläre belän karap kuq: «Baryp æitä mikän bu sièa? Aèlyjsyè mikän?» (Rafail Tãxfätullin, Agymsu.) As much as I try to chase her away, Nadya still, keeps coming into my thoughts ... It is as though the music rings in my ear too, passionate and mournful, inviting and foreboding music. It is then as though Nadya, glancing at me with her inquiring eyes, asks: “Is this really getting to you? Do you really understand it?” (Nadya is a professional musician, but the person thinking the above is not particularly well-versed in music. Nadya doubts that he understands the music referred to).

[258] +lyk, +lek; forms relational adjectives designating a quantity. It is attached to nouns denoting time, measure, weight and monetary units: Atna ‘week’, atnalyk ‘weekly’; kãn ‘day’, kãnlek ‘daily’; biw minutlyk ïw ‘a five-minute job’, ‘some work which can be done in five minutes’; alty qwálek bala ‘a six-year-old child’; utyz santimetrlyk syzgyh ‘a 30 centimeter ruler’; ber potlyk ger ‘a one pood weight (15.38 kg)’; un dollarlyk bilet ‘a ten dollar bill’. [259] +su; this suffix is attached to some names of colors to express a lower degree of quality; it is equivalent to English “+ish”: kara ‘black’, karasu ‘blackish’; zäègär ‘blue (skyblue)’, zäègärsu ‘bluish’. [260] +syz, +sez; forms both descriptive and relational adjectives with a negative meaning: akyl ‘brain’, akylsyz ‘brainless’, ‘stupid’; kanun ‘law’, kanunsyz ‘lawless’; it ‘meat’, itsez ‘meatless’, ‘without meat’; kãh ‘strength’, kãhsez ‘powerless’, ‘having no strength’. [261] +syl, +sel; this suffix has the same meaning as +su: ak ‘white’, aksyl ‘whitish’; kåk ‘blue’, kåksel ‘bluish’. [262] +ha, +hä;1) this suffix forms: a) Adjectives from nouns denoting nationalities: tatar ‘Tatar’, tatarha ‘Tatar’ (adj.); tãrek ‘Turk’, tãrekhä ‘Turkish’; garäp ‘Arab’, garäphä ‘Arabic’; francuz ‘Frenchman’, francuzha ‘French’; ingliz ‘Englishman’, inglizhä ‘English’. b) Adjectives from adjectives; indicates a lesser degree of the quality described by the basic adjective: salkyn ‘cold’, salkynha ‘cool’; ozyn ‘long’, ozynha ‘oblong’. 1)

Adjectives formed with +ha, +hä function also as adverbs. For example: Tatarha sãjläwå ‘to speak Tatar’.

103

[263] +hak, +häk; basym ‘pressure’, ‘stress’, basymhak ‘bothersome’, ‘troublesome’, ‘irksome’. [264] +han, +hän; expresses the inclination towards a certain characteristic or the habit of performing the action expressed by the basic noun: uj ‘thought’, ujhan ‘pensive’, ‘given to reverie’; ïw ‘work’, ïwhän ‘industrious’, ‘active’; joky ‘sleep’, jokyhan ‘loving to sleep’, ‘sleepyhead’; såz ‘word’, såzhän ‘talkative’, ‘garrulous’; tyrywu ‘the striving’ (verbal noun), tyrywuhan ‘diligent’, ‘assiduous’, ‘zealous’; ïhå ‘the drinking’ (verb. noun)’ ïhåhän ‘addicted to drinking’, ‘having the habit of drinking’. [265] +hyl, +hel; this suffix has the same meaning as +han, +hän: kunak ‘guest’, kunakhyl ‘hospitable’; xyqnät ‘treason’, xyqnäthel ‘treacherous’, ‘inclined to treason’; åpkä ‘offense’, ‘anger’, åpkähel ‘touchy’, ‘quick to take offense’. [266] +yl, +el (mostly +el); qwá ‘young’, ‘fresh’, qwel ‘green’, ‘unripe’.

Suffixes Forming Adjectives from Verbs [267] -an, -än, -yn, -en; kys ‘press’, kysan ‘tight’, ‘narrow’; qwer ‘hide’, qweren ‘secret’, ‘hidden’. [268] -ah, -äh, -yh, -eh; kãl ‘laugh’, kãläh ‘gay’, ‘merry’, ‘cheerful’; kyzgan ‘pity’, ‘feel sorry’, kyzganyh ‘pitiful’; awyk ‘hurry’, awygyh ‘urgent’; imän ‘be terrified’, ‘feel awestruck’, imäneh ‘frightful’, ‘dreadful’. [269] -gak, -gäk, -kak, -käk; forms adjectives expressing the quality inherent in the basic verb: taj ‘slip’, tajgak ‘slippery’; bat ‘become soiled’, ‘sink (in the mud), batkak ‘boggy’, ‘swampy’, ‘muddy’. [270] -gyn, -gen, -kyn, -ken; forms adjectives expressing the inclination to something, or the natural quality, characteristic of an object: az ‘become corrupted’, ‘be naughty’, azgyn ‘spoiled’, ‘licentious’, azgyn bala ‘a spoilt child’, azgyn kewe ‘a licentious person’; kis ‘cut’, kisken ‘sharp’, ‘harsh’, ‘firm’, ‘decisive’; åt ‘be sharp’, åtken ‘sharp’. [271] -gyr, -ger, -kyr, ker; designates a high ability to carry out an activity: al ‘take’, algyr ‘agile’, ‘dexterous’, ‘bright’, ‘smart’; siz ‘feel’, sizger ‘sensitive’; tap ‘find’, tapkyr ‘resourceful’, ‘ready’, ‘quick’. [272] -gy+syz, -ge+sez; forms adjectives with a negative meaning: kotyl ‘save yourself’, kotylgysyz ‘inevitable’, ‘unavoidable’, ‘hopeless’; almawtyr ‘replace’, almawtyrgysyz ‘irreplaceable’; kihekter ‘delay’, ‘put off’, ‘postpone’, kihektergesez ‘not postponable’, ‘urgent’. [273] -gyh, -geh, -kyh, keh; forms adjectives expressing a quality: kyzyktyr ‘interest’ (transitive verb), kyzyktyrgyh ‘tempting’, ‘alluring’; kot oh ‘be terrified’, ‘be horrified’, kotohkyh ‘terrible’, ‘horrible’; ïtär ‘push’, ‘shove’, ‘incite’, ‘instigate’, ‘drive’, ïtärgeh ‘impellent’, ‘motive’, ïtärgeh kãh ‘motive force’; is kit ‘be amazed’, iskitkeh ‘amazing’, ‘wonderful’. [274]-dam, -däm (mostly däm); kån ‘obey’, ‘agree’, ‘get used to’, kåndäm ‘obedient’, ‘obliging’, ‘accustomed’, ‘used to’. 104

[275] -dyk, dek (mostly -dyk; also forms nouns): tawlan ‘be abandoned’, ‘be deserted’, ‘be neglected’, tawlandyk ‘abandoned’, ‘deserted’, ‘neglected’, tawlandyk bala ‘stray child’; kal ‘remain’, kaldyk ‘residual’. [276] -ok /-oq/, -ok: aksa ‘limp’, aksak ‘lame’; kuryk ‘be afraid’, kurkak ‘fearful’, ‘timid’; boz ‘spoil’, ‘destroy’, bozyk ‘spoiled’, ‘rotten’; ãrek ‘be afraid’, ãrkäk ‘fearful’, ‘scared’, ‘easily frightened’; iser ‘get drunk’, iserek ‘drunken’. [277] -ma, -mä; kuw ‘join’, ‘add’, kuwma ‘united’, ‘compound’, ‘complex’; qsal ‘be made’, ‘be formed’, qsalma ‘artificial’; kåh ‘move’, ‘migrate’, kåhmä ‘nomadic’. [278] -maly, -mäle; this suffix, which is attached to both active and passive verbs, indicates a permanent property or quality; it often corresponds to the present participle in English used attributively): bor ‘wind’, bormaly îl ‘a winding road’; asyl ‘hang’ (intransitive), asylmaly lampa ‘a hanging lamp’; ahyl ‘open’ (intransitive’, ahylmaly täräzä ‘a window that opens (folds)’; äjlän ‘turn’, ‘spin’, ‘gyrate’, ‘rotate’, äjlänmäle uenhyk ‘a spinning (gyrating) toy (plaything)’. [279] -mas, -mäs; forms negative adjectives: hyda ‘bear’, hydamas ‘unbearable’; åzgär ‘change’, åzgärmäs ‘invariable’, ‘not changing’, ‘constant’; sån ‘go out’, ‘die out’, ‘grow dim’, ‘fade’, sånmäs ut ‘a fire which does not go out’. [280] -nak, -näk; æyj ‘gather’, ‘collect’, æyjnak ‘neat’, ‘tidy’; tyj ‘restrain’, ‘hold back’, ‘curb’, tyjnak ‘modest’, ‘reserved’. [281] -or; forms attributive adjectives expressing an activity or property characteristic of the noun which it precedes: kajna ‘boil’, kajnar su ‘boiling water’; sajra ‘sing’, sajrar sandugah ‘singing nightingale’; ak ‘flow’, agar su ‘flowing, running water’; qn ‘burn’, qnar tau, also: qnartau ‘volcano’ (lit., burning mountain); qra ‘suit’, ‘be fit to’, çär ïwkä qrar ber kewe ‘a person able to do everything’; kaldyr ‘leave (behind)’, ‘abandon’, taè kaldyr ‘amaze’, taè kaldyryr däräæädä ‘to an amazing degree’; kanatlan ‘be inspired’, ‘become winged’, ‘rejoice’, kanatlanyr hak ‘a glad, joyful time’; is ‘blow’, isär æil ‘strong (gusty) wind’; kil ‘come’, ‘arrive’, kiler æir (uryn) ‘destination’, ‘place of arrival’. [282] -u+ly, -å+le; this suffix forms adjectives which usually correspond to active and passive participles in English: qrsy ‘rage’, qrsu ‘the raging’, ‘to rage’, qrsuly dyègez ‘raging sea’; sana ‘count’, sanau ‘the counting’, ‘to count’, sanauly ‘counted’; kimset ‘humiliate’, kimsetå ‘the humiliating’, ‘to humiliate’, kimsetåle wartlar ‘humiliating conditions’. [283] -hak, -häk, -hyk, -hek; forms adjectives expressing the inclination towards, the habit of, performing the action expressed by the verb: tartyn ‘be shy’, ‘be timid’, tartynhak ‘shy’, ‘timid’; ujna ‘play’, uenhak ‘playful’; iren ‘be lazy’, ‘loaf’, irenhäk ‘lazy’; kylan ‘flirt’, kylanhyk ‘coquetish’; bäjlän ‘bother’, bäjlänhek ‘quarrelsome’. [284] -wok; forms adjectives denoting a quality: kup ‘come unstuck’, kupwak ‘coming unstuck’; æep ‘become wet’, æepwek kar ‘wet, melting snow’. [285] -y, -e; tul ‘be filled’, ‘fill’ (intransitive), tuly ‘full’; kat ‘harden’, ‘grow hard’, katy ‘hard’, ‘firm’, ‘severe’; kory ‘dry’, ‘become dry’, kory ‘dry’ (adjective); ål ‘die’, åle ‘dead’. 105

[286] -ym, -em (mostly -ym); kuw ‘join’, ‘add’, kuwym ‘compound’, ‘joined’; aer ‘separate’, aerym ‘separate’, ‘special’. [287] -ynky, -enke; forms adjectives expressing a quality: bas ‘pacify’, ‘calm’, ‘quiet’, basynky ‘gentle’, ‘mild’, ‘quiet’, ‘modest’; kåtär ‘raise’, kåtärenke ‘elevated’, ‘high’; tãw ‘fall’, ‘descend’, tãwenke ‘depressed’. [288] -yw (rare); kat ‘mix’, katyw ‘mixed’, kar katyw qègyr ‘rain mixed with snow’. In addition to the above suffixes a few Persian prefixes are used to form derived adjectives: [289] bi+; indicates the lack of a quality: bixäbär ‘unknown’ (xäbär ‘information’, ‘news’), bitaraf ‘neutral’ (taraf ‘side’), bixisap ‘innumerable’, ‘numberless’ (xisap ‘calculation’), biniçaq ‘boundless’, ‘endless’, ‘infinite’, (niçaq /nihajð/ ‘end’, ‘limit’). [290] na+, nä+ (mostly na+); forms adjectives with a negative meaning: naxak ‘unjust’, ‘lawless’ (xak ‘law’, ‘justice’), naxuw ‘unpleasant’ (xuw ‘pleasant’), nadan ‘illiterate’, ‘ignorant’ (dan /in composition/ ‘knowing’).

Formation of Compound Adjectives [291] An adjective is united with an adjective. Both parts are written separately: kue kyzyl or kara kyzyl ‘dark red’, kue qwel ‘dark green’, tonyk qwel ‘pale green’. [292] An adjective is united with an adjective. Both parts are written with a hyphen: koègyrt-kara ‘hazel’ (koègyrt ‘brown’, kara ‘black’), koègyrt-kyzyl ‘reddish-brown’ (kyzyl ‘red’), isän-sau ‘healthy’, ‘safe and sound’, isän-sau jãrep kajtu ‘to return safe and sound’, isäpsez-xisapsyz ‘countless’, ‘innumerable’. [293] Phraseological verbs (see 837-856) are joined together and the suffix -kyh, -keh is attached to the verb stem: is kit ‘amaze’, iskitkeh ‘amazing’; kot oh ‘be terrified’, ‘be horrified’, kotohkyh ‘terrible’, ‘horrible’; xäl it ‘decide’, xälitkeh ‘decisive’, baw vat ‘rack one’s brain’, bawvatkyh ‘puzzling’. [294] An adjective or numeral is united with a noun plus the suffix +ly, +le. Both parts are written separately: kara kåzle ‘dark-eyed’, ozyn bujly ‘tall’ (of stature), täbänäk bujly ‘short’ (of stature), ak hähle ‘white-haired’, kiè qfrakly ‘broad-leaved’, kiè æilkäle ‘broad-shouldered’, dårt aqkly ‘quadrupedal’, ike qkly ‘having two sides’, ãh katly ‘having three stories’, as for example: ãh katly ãj ‘a three-storied house’, kåp millätle ‘multinational’. [295] The fractional number qrym is united with an adjective. Both parts are written separately: qrym kåhmä ‘seminomadic’, qrym räsmi ‘semiofficial’, qrym ahyk ‘half open’, ‘ajar’. [296] Two nouns are united. The last takes the suffix +ly, +le. Both parts are written separately: aryslan jãräkle ‘lionhearted’, kuqn jãräkle or kuqn æanly ‘fainthearted’, ‘weakhearted’, ‘cowardly’, ‘timid’, kuqn irenle ‘harelipped’, taw bägyrále or taw kuèelle or taw jãräkle ‘stony-hearted’, ‘cold-hearted’, ‘unmerciful’. 106

[297] A noun or pronoun and the postposition ara are joined. Both parts are written together: xalykara ‘international’ (ara ‘between’), åzara ‘mutual’ (åz ‘oneself’).

Attributive and Predicate Adjectives [298] Adjectives are not inflected. According to their position in a sentence, they may be classified as attributive and predicate adjectives. [299] An attributive adjective is closely attached to its noun and regularly precedes it: sary hähäk ‘the yellow flower’, sary hähäklär ‘yellow flowers’, tågäräk ãstäl ‘the round table’, qzgy koqw ‘the spring sun’, kiè uramnarnyè ‘of the broad streets’, tar karawly kewedän ‘from the narrow-minded person’, îgary katta ‘on the upper floor’, biek taularga ‘to (unto) the high mountains’. [300] A predicate adjective completes the meaning of the predicate verb but describes or limits the subject. Predicate adjectives are common with auxiliary (copulative) verbs, except when the copula is not expressed (for example, when the adjective describes or limits the subject in a specific manner in the affirmative present tense, indicative). In this latter case the predicate adjective functions as the predicate of the sentence: Bu hähäk sary. This flower is yellow. Alma tämle. The apple is tasty. Tãn karaègy. The night is dark. Æäjge kãnnär matur. The summer days are beautiful. Kihä kãn matur ide. Yesterday the day was beautiful. Kålneè suy æyly ide. The water of the lake was warm. · Bu wäçärneè uramnary tury, matur, kibetläre bik baj. (Gabdelbär Fäjzraxmanov, Piramidalar ilendä.) The streets of this city are straight, beautiful. Its shops are very rich. · Majnyè äåvälge ike atnasy bolytly, qègyrly buldy. The first two weeks in May were cloudy and rainy. · Jortlar qèargan. ... Salam tåbäle ber, ike, ãh jort – qlgyz karhyklar qwi torgan jortlar gyna salam tåbäle. (Mirgaziqn Înys, Tabu çäm îgaltu.) The houses have changed. ... There are one, two (or) three houses with thatched roofs. Only those houses in which old women are living are thatched. · Näkâ Kazan artynda bardyr ber avyl ... Zurmy? disäè, zur tågelder, bu avyl bik kehkenä, ... Anda bik salkyn vä bik ïsse tågel. (Gabdulla Tukaj, Wåräle.) Just behind Kazan there is a village ... You might ask (lit., say): “Is it large?” It is not large. This village is very small, ... There it is not very cold nor very hot. [301] A predicate adjective having a personal pronoun for its subject may take the predicate endings: Min isän Sin isän Ul isän Bez isän Sez isän Alar isän

min isänmen sin isänseè ul isänder bez isänbez sez isänsez alar isännär

I am healthy you are healthy he (she, it) is healthy we are healthy you are healthy they are healthy

Note: In today’s Tatar literary language these endings are used only in certain cases (see 211, b, ‘Note’, 691 c, 1027).

107

Degrees of Comparison [302] The degrees of comparison indicate in what degree of intensity the quality described by the adjective exists. Note: Many adjectives are, from their meaning, incapable of comparison. Such are adjectives expressing a quality as absolute or complete, as for example: mäègelek ‘eternal’, ‘immortal’, berdänber ‘single’, ‘unique’, kihekteråsez ‘instantaneous’, ‘immediate’, hiksez ‘infinite’, ãhpohmakly ‘triangular’. Here belong also many of the relational adjectives formed by means of the suffixes +dagy, +däge, +tagy, +täge, +gy, +ge, +ky, +ke, +ly, +le (when denoting possession), +lyk, +lek, +syz, +sez, +yj, +i, +ik.

[303] The positive degree merely describes the quality. It has no special ending: Räwit kãhle. Räshit is strong. Qxwy kewe. The good man. Çava qxwy. The weather is good. [304] The comparative degree is formed by means of the suffix +rak, +räk. When attached to adjectives with a final consonant, a very short y, e requires the change of final k /k/ into g /g/, k /q/ into g /ô/, p into b, both in writing and in pronunciation: qxwy ‘good’, qxwyrak ‘better’; kehkenä ‘small’, kehkenäräk ‘smaller’; zur ‘big’, zurrak (pronounced: zuryrak) ‘bigger’; tåbän ‘low’, tåbänräk (pronounced: tåbäneräk) ‘lower’; ziräk ‘clever’, ‘bright’, zirägräk (pronounced: zirägeräk) ‘more clever’, ‘brighter’; biek ‘high’, biegräk ‘higher’; kåp ‘much’, kåbräk ‘more’; wäp ‘fast’, ‘remarkable’, ‘good’, wäbräk ‘faster’, ‘more remarkable’, ‘better’; nyk /níq/ ‘strong’, ‘hard’, ‘firm’, nygrak /níôíraq/ ‘stronger’, ‘harder’, ‘firmer’; kurkak ‘timid’, ‘fearful’, kurkagrak /qurqaôíraq/ ‘more timid’, ‘fearful’. With compound adjectives formed by uniting an adjective with a noun plus the suffix -ly, -le, +rak, +räk is joined to the adjective: ozynrak bujly ‘taller’, kièräk qfrakly ‘having broader leaves, kyskarak jonly ‘having shorter hair’ (jon ‘wool’). [305] The comparative degree is used in comparing persons or things of the same or of different kind. It can make an explicit comparison as well as an implicit one. [306] When used explicitly, i.e., naming both the bearer of the attribute in the greater degree as well as the bearer of the attribute in the lesser degree, the word designating the latter takes the ablative, or it is in the dative followed by the word karaganda ‘with regard to’, ‘in comparison to’. The word designating by how much the quality of one object is higher (or lesser) appears in the dative. In making an explicit comparison, the adjective may also be used in its positive form, i.e., without the suffix +rak, +räk. Examples: Sezneè avyl bezneè avyldan zurrak (or: zur). Your village is larger than our village. Ul minnän qwáräk (or: ul minnän qwá). He is younger than I. Kazanga karaganda Mäskäå zurrak. Moscow is larger than Kazan. Sin bezgä karaganda olyrak. You are older than we. Compare also: · – Sez ... nihek qwisez? – Ïw kåp. – Ukytuhynykyna karaganda azrak tågelmeni? (Mirsäj Ämir, Qlantau keweläre.) “... how are you doing (lit., living)?” “I have a lot of work.” “Isn’t it less than that of a teacher?” · Bu kãnne kåk jãze gadättägedän zäègärräk ... bula. (Mirgaziqn Înys, Ärhegän bäräège.) On this day the sky (lit., face of the sky) is bluer than usual ... · Æildän æitez mawinada bik kåp îllar åtäm min. (Gamir Nasryj, Kuwnarat.) In the automobile, which is faster than the wind, I drive (over) very many roads. (From a song).

108

Äbågalisina. Beläm, sin fäkyjrá, /Ataè-anaè îk/, Wulaj da sinnän/ Baerak /bajíraq/ adäm îk. (Näkyj Isänbät. Äbågalisina.) Avicenna. I know, you are poor, You have no parents, Yet, there is no man Richer than you. · Student Xälimnän un qwálärgä olyrak ide. (Ibraçim Gazi, Kanatlanyr hak.) The student was about ten years older than Khälim. · Arif baba Abu babadan nibary ber-ike qwákä genä keheräk ide. (Bulat Sãläjman, Abu baba.) The old man Arif was only one or two years younger than the old man Abu. ·

[307] An explicit comparison may also be made by naming the bearer of the attribute in the lesser degree, followed by the postposition hagywtyrganda ‘comparing’ (participle in -gan in the locative of hagywtyru ‘to compare): · Borhakta isä aksym, bodaj belän hagywtyrganda, ikelätä kåbräk ... (Marselá Zaripov, Otywly äjlänew.) But compared with wheat, peas have twice as much albumen, ... [308] Used implicitly, the bearer of the attribute in the greater degree alone is named explicitly. The bearer of the attribute in the lesser degree is felt often to be some undefined standard or norm; often there is produced an impression of approximateness or incomplete degree of the quality. In making an implicit comparison, the comparative adjective may not be used in the positive degree: · Joldyz. Wulaj bulgah, zurrak çäm nygrak kåperlär salyrga kiräk. (Gamir Nasryj, Kuwnarat.) Yoldyz. If this is so, one must build larger and stronger bridges. · Busy katlaulyrak mäsáälä ide. (Ämirxan Eniki, Saz hähäge.) This was a more complicated matter. · Taktaw1) basynkyrak, sabyrrak, kewelär belän mãgamälädä jomwagrak bulsa, Kutuj2) kiresenhä, därtleräk, kajnarrak, kiskenräk kewe ide. (Ämirxan Eniki, Xäterdäge tãennär.) If Taqtash was more reserved, more patient (and), in dealing with people, more courteous; Qutuy was in contrast (to him) a more energetic, more fiery, more resolute man. · – Sin, Kamali ïnem, bu ïw ãhen qwáräk äle, ... (Mirsäj Ämir, Bezneè avyl kewese.) “You, my brother (i.e., younger brother) Kamali, are still a little young for this work, ...” · Kyz ... urynynnan tordy: – Mièa vakyt bugaj. – Îk, irtäräk äle. (Äxsän Baqnov, Dekabrányè unãhenhe kãne.) The girl ... got up. “I have to go, I think.” “No, it’s still rather early.” · – Sälam Xäsän! Ïwlär baramy? – Sälam Änvär! Bara. Uzeèneke nihek? – Urtaharak, Xäsän. (ibid.) “Greetings, Khäsän! Are things all right?” “Greetings, Änwär! They are all right. How are you doing?” “So-so, Khäsän.” · Kãtåhe – sälämäräk kiemle, bawynda iske ïwläpä, qlanaqk. (Mirxäjdär Fäjzi, Galiqbanu.) The shepherd is (clad) in somewhat ragged clothes, on his head is an old hat, and he is barefooted.

1) 2)

Çadi Taktaw (Hadi Taqtash), Tatar poet (1901-1931). Gadel Kutuj (Ghädel Qutuy), Tatar poet, prose writer, playwright and journalist (1903-1945).

109

[309] The comparative may be further intensified by placing tagyn (tagy) da ‘still’, ‘even’, ‘even more’ before the adjective in the comparative degree: · Näkyq. Sez ïlek tagy da usalrak såzle, tagy da waqnrak idegez. (Mirxäjdär Fäjzi, Adawkan kåèel.) Näqiä. Before, you had an even more malicious tongue and you were even naughtier. [310] The suffix +rak, +räk may also be joined to other parts of speech, e.g., to nouns and pronouns in the nominative, dative, locativa or ablative, to adverbs of place and time, interrogative words, modal words, postpositions (see 527), verbal adverbs in -a, -ä, -yj, -i (-myj, -mi), -p, -yp, -ep (-myjha, -mihä) (1242, 1252, 1284), -gah, -gäh, and even particles. In English such constructions are usually expressed by: ‘more’, ‘a little more’, ‘approximately’, ‘a little’, ‘a bit’, ‘more or less’, ‘somewhat’: · Balarak hagymda bu äkiqtlärgä hyn dip ywana idem. When I was still more or less a child (at my more or less infant stage) I believed these stories to be true. · – Dimäk, sine duslarymnyè barysynnan da dusrak itäm, qkynrak kåräm. (Fail Wäfigullin, Ãj salunyè nie bar...) “That means that I am making you more of a friend, (and) that I am regarding you as closer than all of my other friends.” · ... kojma ãstendä ... utyrgan ike hyphyk – tynyhsyz kunaklardan erakkarak kitep, ambar tåbäsenä kåhep utyrdylar. (Gomär Bäwirov, Sivaw.) ... the two sparrows ... which were sitting on the fence moved a bit farther away from the restless guests and settled down on the barn roof. · Maviq kerä. Bawyna wäl salyp, any kåzlärenäräk tãwergän. (Mirxäjdär Fäjzi, Adawkan kåèel.) Mawiä enters. She has put a scarf on her head and has pulled it down somewhat to her eyes. · Binanyè kerewennän az gyna uèdarak, matur-matur hähäk tåtälläre bar ide. (Mirsäj Ämir, Qlantau keweläre.) A bit to the right of the entrance to the building were very beautiful flower beds. · Bu tirädä kåptän tågelräk avyldan kilgän kewelär qwi ide. (Mirgaziqn Înys, Ärhegän bäräège.) Around here people were living who had come from the village not so long ago. · · Sez, ... Säfär äfände, îkkarak kyzasyz. (Wärif Kamal, Ajlar æyelywy.) “You, ... Mister Säfär are getting excited over a mere nothing.” · – Garif baryp qtsyn, – dide kart. – Minem dä ïwem barrak, ... (Wärif Kamal, Akharlaklar.) “Let Gharif go and lie down,” the old man said. “I’ll also have work to do, ...” · – Alajsa teatr xäzerlibez. – «Zäègär wäl»ne.1) – Îk, xäzerge tormywtanrak alynganny. (Änisä Ibraçimova, Toman tarala.) Then we (shall) prepare a play. – “The Blue Shawl.” “No, something taken more from today’s life.” · Bålmäneè täräzäsez divarynda ike räsem. Beraz tåbändäräk çäm suldarak zur itep ïwlängän rajon xaritasy, xaritadan ãstäräk barometr. (Mirsäj Ämir, Qlantau keweläre.) On the windowless wall of the room are two pictures. A little lower and more to the left is a large-scale district map; a little higher than the map is a barometer. · Kamali. ... Mondarak kil, mondarak! (Fätxi Burnaw, Kamali kart.) Kamali. ... Come more over here, more over here!

1)

“The Blue Shawl” – a popular melodrama by Kärim Tinchurin (1887-1947).

110

Gãlnur. Sez kajdarak torasyz? (ibid.) Gölnur. Whereabouts do you live? Kart änä wulajrak ujlyj ... (Fatix Xãsni, Æäqåle kewe sukmagy.) The old man thinks more or less like that. · ¡ Nindiräk tormyw belän toryrbyz anda ...? Nihegräk qwärbez? (Ibraçim Gazi, Kanatlanyr hak.) “Whatever kind of life shall we have there ...? However shall we live?” · ·

[311] The superlative degree is formed with the particle iè ‘most’, ‘extremely’, ‘in the highest degree’, placed before the adjective. It denotes that the quality exists in the highest degree in the object or person described. For example: Iè matur bina ‘the most beautiful building’; iè zur kazanywlar ‘the greatest achievements’; iè kart kewe ‘the oldest person’. The superlative is used in comparing persons or things of the same kind. Like the comparative, the superlative can make an explicit comparison as well as an implicit one: · Taipov. ... qwálär avyl qwáläreneè iè aèlylary, iè ïwlekleläre, iè äxlaklylary bulyrga tiew. (Fätxi Burnaw, Kamali kart.) Taipov. ... the youths must be the brightest, the most assiduous, the most well-behaved of the village youths. · ... bakhanyè iè matur æirenä karap torgan, ... bu terassa Iskändärneè sãekle urynnarynnan berse ide. (Kärim Tinhurin, Iskändär.) ... this terrace, which looked, ... onto the most beautiful spot of the garden, was one of Iskändär’s favorite places. · Dudinkadan æir warynyè iè tãnáqgyndagy timer îl – Dudinka-Norilásk timer îly bawlana. (Niqz Xäkimullin, Arktika kièleklärendä.) From Dudinka begins the world’s (lit., the globe’s) most northern railroad, the Dudinka-Noril’sk railroad. · Igarkany urman bawkalasy qisä dãnáqda iè kåp agahly wäçär dip jãrtälär (ibid.) They call Igarka the forest capital or the city with the most trees in the world. · Samat åzeneè iè qkyn dusty turyndagy bu såzlärne Kazanga kilgän tanywlary arkyly iwetkäläp tordy. (Mansur Väliev, Ikenhe kattagy bålmä.) Samat repeatedly heard this talk about his closest friend through acquaintances who came to Kazan. [312] The superlative may be further intensified by repeating the particle iè (in writing both connected by a hyphen): · – Aç, äbiem, ... Dãnáqda iè-iè qxwy, iè-iè izge kewem! (Fäåziq Bäjrämova, Bolyn.) “Oh, my Grandmother, ... My by far best, by far most kindhearted one in the world!” [313] The particle iè may also be used with common nouns whose meaning permits this. For example: · Mäktäp avylnyè iè ohyna urnawkan. (Nurixan Fättax, Mãdir Saæidä.) The school is located at the very end of the village. · · ... Mäjsärä, ujlavymha, iè taw kåèellärdä dä kyzganu xise uqtyrga tiew. (Garif Gobäj, Läjsän qègyr.) “... in my opinion, Meysärä must arouse the feeling of pity even in the stoniest hearts.” · Wäçärneè iè åzäge bulgan Irek mäjdanynda, ... (Garif Axunov, Marselá Zaripov, I kaderle tugan qk.) On Liberty Square, which is in the very center of the city, ... The particle iè may also be used with adverbs, participles and verbal adverbs.

111

Emphatic Forms (Emphatic Superlative) of Adjectives [314] The emphatic superlative of descriptive adjectives is formed morphologically or syntactically. 1. It is formed morphologically: a) By full reduplication: · Anda ... kehkenä-kehkenä kowlar sajryjlar. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) There, tiny little birds are singing. · Su buenda ... kart-kart ãqnke agahlar. (Fatix Xãsni, Æäqåle kewe sukmagy.) Beside the water are ... old, old willows. · ... Kaq baryrga dip aptyrap basyp torganda, kinät ... ïre-ïre tamhyly qègyr qvarga totyna ... (ibid.) ... while she is standing and wondering where to go, it suddenly ... begins to rain in big heavy drops, ... · Ozyn-ozyn kyw kãnnäre dä uzyp kittelär. The long, long winter days also passed. b) By partial reduplication i.e., by placing the first syllable of the adjective – in a closed syllable the consonant is dropped – augmented by p or m before the adjective itself. In writing, the reduplicated elements are connected by a hyphen with the basic adjective: Kara ‘black’, kap-kara ‘completely black’; zäègär ‘blue’, zäp-zäègär ‘deep blue’; qwel ‘green’, qmá-qwel ‘completely green’; kåk ‘blue’, ‘dark blue’, kåm-kåk ‘completely blue’; ak ‘white’, ap-ak ‘completely (all) white’; tågäräk ‘round’, tåm-tågäräk or: tåp-tågäräk ‘completely, perfectly round’; buw ‘empty’, bup-buw ‘absolutely empty’; tyn ‘quiet’, ‘silent’, typ-tyn ‘completely quiet, silent’; kyska ‘short’, kyp-kyska ‘very short’; tury ‘straight’, tup-tury ‘perfectly straight’; aqz ‘clear’, ‘cloudless’, ap-aqz ‘completely clear, cloudless’; qkty ‘bright’, qp-qkty ‘very bright’. · Bakhada tämle æiläk-æimewlär ãlgerä: kyp-kyzyl hiqlär, kap-kara karlygannar pewep utyralar. In the garden tasty fruits (berries and fruits) are ripening: beautiful red cherries, deep black currants. · ... agahlar, ... qmá-qwel qfraklarga kåmelde. (Fatix Xãsni, Æäqåle kewe sukmagy.) ... the trees, ... were buried in leaves of the deepest green. · ... wäp-wärä iwek aldynda täbänäk kenä balhyk ãj utyra. (Gomär Bäwirov, Sivaw.) ... in a completely bare yard there sits a rather low clay house. · Busy ... ap-ak hähle, zäègär kåzle matur kewe ide. (Ibraçim Gazi, Kanatlanyr hak.) This one ... was a handsome man with completely white hair and blue eyes. · ... ber vakytny ul îlda kehkenä genä tåp-tågäräk, ap-ak ber äjber kårgän, ... (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) ... once he saw (so they say) on the road a rather small, perfectly round, all-white object, ... c) By placing one of the following intensive words before the adjective: bik ‘very’, åtä ‘very’, ‘much too’, ‘too’, ‘extremely’, gaqtá ‘very’, ifrat ‘very’, ‘highly’, ‘extremely’, artyk ‘extremely’, ‘to the highest degree’, bigräk ‘especially’, dãm ‘completely’, ãr ‘completely’. · Gosman. ... Ul äle bik qwá. Bezgä karaganda malaj gyna. (Gamir Nasryj, Kuwnarat.) Ghosman. ... He is still very young. Compared to us he is only a boy. · · Sin bik maturajgansyè. ... kåzläreè bik matur. (Ibraçim Gazi, Kanatlanyr hak.) “You have become very beautiful, ... your eyes are very beautiful.” · Utä ïsse çäm bãrkå ide. (Gomär Bäwirov, Sivaw.) It was extremely hot and sultry.

112

·

· ·

· ·

·

Zur iwek aldynda1) karhyk Xälimgä bigräk kehkenä bulyp toeldy, ... (Ibraçim Gazi, Kanatlanyr hak.) In the large yard the old woman appeared to Khälim as being especially small, ... Çava ifrat qxwy. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) The weather is very good. Any awap betergäh, minem aldyma tabada ... gaqtá zur bälew kiterep kujdy. (Safa Sabirov, Firdäves.) After I had finished it (i.e., finished eating the soup), she brought on a frying pan a gigantic stuffed pie, ..., and placed it before me. ... mäsáälä artyk æitdi, åtä katlauly. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Tynyhlanu zararly.) ... the matter is extremely serious, very complex. Avylnyè urta ber æirendä qmá-qwel bakha, bakha ïhendä ãr-qèa klub. (Garif Axunov, Avyl säxifäläre.) In a central place of the village is an all-green park. In the park (stands) a brand-new club (building). ... ãj ïhe ber mälgä dãm karaègy bulyp kaldy. (Ravil Väliev, Gãlmäræän mäkläre.) ... for a while the inside of the house turned completely dark.

Note: dãm and ãr are only used with certain adjectives.

2. The superlative is formed syntactically: a) With the genitive of the substantivized adjective followed by the third person possessive form of the same (substantivized) adjective: Qxwylarnyè qxwysy ‘the best of the good’, usallarnyè usaly ‘the worst of the bad’. · · ... kår äle sin any, xäjläkärneè dä xäjläkäre ikänseè, äj. (Fail Wäfigullin, Ãj salunyè nie bar ...) “... ay, look at that, you seem to be the most cunning of all.” Note: The same emphatic superlative can also be formed with true nouns. For example: gãnaç ‘the sin’:

· Bulmyj ... Gãnaçnyè gãnaçyna ïtäräseè ... (Mägâsåm Xuæin, Kara kål.) “That is impossible ... You are pushing me to the sin of (all) sins (i.e., to the greatest sin) ...” b) By the ablative of the substantivized adjective followed by the nominative of the same (substantivized) adjective: ·

Qxwydan qxwy ‘the best of the good’, maturdan matur ‘the most beautiful of the beautiful’. · Maturdan matur jãrgän æirlär, Jãrgän æirdän matur tugan il. (Fätxi Burnaw, Tagy da sälam xatlar æibäräm.) The places traveled are most beautiful, More beautiful than a place traveled is the native country.

The Negative Comparative and Superlative Degrees [315] The negative comparative and superlative degrees are expressed with the help of tågel ‘not’, îk ‘there is not’, ‘there are not’, a negative form of the auxiliary verb bulu. · ... anyè ätise Maliktan kartrak tågel ide. (Ibraçim Gazi, Kanatlanyr hak.) ... his father was not older than Malik.

1)

Now written together: iwegaldynda /iøeôaldínda/.

113

·

· ·

·

·

– Ajsyluttilärgä kergän idek, îk, îk, kertä almyjm, ãebez bäläkäj, dip kire boryp hygardy. – Bezneè ãjdän dä bäläkäj tågel inde alarnyè ãe, – dide äni. (Näzifä Kärimova, Karurmannan hykkan îlhylar.) “We had gone to aunt Aisylus’, but she turned us away saying no, no, that she could not take us in, that their house was small.” “Well,” Mother said, “their house isn’t any smaller than our house.” (Ajsyluttilär – Ajsylut åtilär). Dãnáqda sälamätlektän dä kyjmätle närsä îk. (Gurij Tavlin, Afät.) There is nothing more precious in the world than health. Kårmägän-belmägän kewegä båläk aludan da kyeny îk. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Balta kem kulynda.) Nothing is more difficult than buying a present for someone one hasn’t seen and doesn’t know. Gãlnisa. Jãz procenty belän åk bulmasa da, tåksan æide-tuksan sigez procenttan kim bulmas dip ujlyjm. (Riza Iwmorat, Mädinä.) Gölnisa. Although it (i.e., the signing-up for an issue of government bonds) won’t be exactly by one hundred percent (of the people), I think it will be by not less than ninety-seven or ninety-eight percent. Änvär. ... Minem iè zur xyqlym sin, sin, Gãlsinä. Sineè belän matur tormyw koru. Gãlsinä. Xyqlyènyè iè zurysy uk tågelder, bilgele, tik wulaj da... (Riza Iwmorat, Bistä kyzy Gãlsinä.) Änwär. My greatest dream is you, you, Gölsinä. To build a beautiful life with you. Gölsinä. It is, of course, probably not quite the greatest of your dreams, but nevertheless...

Comparison of One or Several Qualities Possessed in the Same Degree [316] To indicate that two or more persons or things possess a quality in the same degree, the postposition kebek’as’, or kebek åk ‘just as’, is used after the last object of comparison. Note: Comparison may also be expressed by the postpositions symak, syman (500), synly (501), tãsle (510, 1), wikelle (520), kadär (531, h), tik (533), tikle, tiklem (534, e), xätle (535, g), hakly (536, f).

Examples with kebek: · – Min dä ãjlänäm! Sineke kebek matur xatyn alam! (Ibraçim Gazi, Kanatlanyr hak.) “I too will get married! I shall take a woman who is as pretty as yours!” · ... hyrwy kårkäse kebek ïre bawakly bodajlar ... äle uèga, äle sulga æäelgännär. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Kahak.) ... wheat (fields of wheat), whose ears were as big as fir cones, ... stretched now to the right, now to the left. · – ... nihek inde ul ätise kebek ãlkän kartka kyzykkan? (Asiq Gyjniqtullina, Bäxäs.) “... how then did she become attracted to an old man (who is) as old as her father?” [317] To indicate that two or more persons or things do not possess a quality in the same degree tågel ‘not’ is added to the positive comparison: · – Min monda ber eget belän tanywtym. Ul sineè kebek matur tågel. (Ibraçim Gazi, Kanatlanyr hak.) “I became acquainted here with a young man. He is not as handsome as you.” [318] To indicate that one person or thing possesses two or more different qualities in the same degree, nikadär, nixätle or nihakly ‘how much’, ‘as’, is placed before the

114

adjective describing one quality, the auxiliary verb bulu in its conditional mood follows it. The word describing the other quality is preceded by wulkadär (wultikle, wulxätle, wulhakly) ‘so much’, ‘as’. The degree of the quality possessed may be intensified by placing the particle uk, åk after wulkadär, etc. · Ul nikadär tapkyr bulsa, wulkadär (åk) batyr da. He is (just) as courageous as he is resourceful. · Xalyk Bulat bäkkä näfrätle, ämma, näfräte nikadär kãhle bulsa, kurkuy da wulkadär bulyp, däwmi. (Batulla, Sãembikä kyjssasy.) The people were full of hatred of Bulat Bek, but, their fear being just as strong as their hatred, they kept silent (lit., keep silent). [319] To indicate that one person or thing possesses a lesser degree of a quality than another, azrak ‘less’, is placed before the adjective. The person or thing possessing the higher degree of the quality is in the dative followed by karaganda, or in the ablative: · Bu îl tegesenä karaganda (or: tegesennän) azrak kurkynyhly. This road is less dangerous than that one. [320] With some adjectives, mostly designating colors, the lesser degree of the quality may be indicated by means of the suffixes +gylt, +gelt, +kylt, +kelt, +gyltym, +geltem, +kyltym, +keltem, +syl, +sel, +su, +ha, +hä, +(y)læym, +(e)læem. Before the suffixes +gylt, +gelt, etc. and +gyltym, +geltem, etc., the adjective drops its last vowel and the following consonant, if any. Examples: sary ‘yellow’, sargylt ‘less yellow’, ‘yellowish’; sory ‘gray’, sorgylt ‘less gray’, ‘grayish’; kyzyl ‘red’, kyzgylt ‘less red’, ‘reddish’; qwel ‘green’, qwákelt ‘less green’, ‘greenish’; ahy ‘bitter’, ahkyltym ‘less bitter’; tãhe ‘insipid’, tãhkeltem ‘less insipid’; ak ‘white’, aksyl ‘less white’, ‘whitish’; kåk ‘blue’, ‘dark blue’, kåksel ‘less blue’, ‘bluish’; kara ‘black’, karasu ‘blackish’; al ‘pink’, alsu ‘pinkish’; zäègär ‘light blue’, ‘azure’, ‘sky-blue’, zäègärsu ‘less blue’, ‘light bluish’; ozyn ‘long’, ozynha ‘less long’, ‘oblong’; salkyn ‘cold’, salkynha ‘cool’, ‘chilly’; kåk ‘blue’, kågelæem ‘bluish’; karalæym ‘blackish’. · Bakhada aksyl, sargylt, kyzyl çäm kyp-kyzyl tãstä bersennän-berse tämleräk almalar pewä. In the garden are ripening apples of whitish, yellowish, red and deep red color, one tastier than the other. · Tauwalgan bu sargylt kägazálär /kðôðzlðr/ aèa tormyw îldawy Galimäsen ... xäterlätälär. (Gomär Bäwirov, Sivaw.) These crumpled, yellowish (sheets of) paper remind him of his companion through life, his Ghalimä. · Algy qktan salkynha æil iste. (ibid.) A cool wind was blowing from the front side. · Ul (Äbågalisina) ozyn, bãdrä hal hähle, kara bãdrä sakally, kyryk biw qwálärdä mäçabät ber därviw kyqfätendä, ãstendä karasu-zäègär qbynha, ... (Näkyj Isänbät, Äbågalisina.) He (Avicenna) is disguised as an imposing dervish, about forty-five years of age, with long, gray, curly hair and a black, curly beard; he is wearing (lit., on him is) a darkish blue cloak, ... · ... naratnyè käkre-bãkre kyzgylt botaklary nindnder kullar syman bulyp, ber-berse belän aralawyp betkän. (Nurixan Fättax, Ätil suy aka torur.) ... the crooked, reddish branches of the pine-tree were intertwined like some kind of arms. · Ofykka sylangan kågelæem urman da çaman wul ber kilew: ... qkynajmyj da, eragajmyj da ... (Ibraçim Gazi, Kanatlanyr hak.) Also the bluish forest which is daubed on the horizon is still in that same state: ... it does not move nearer, nor does it move farther away.

115

Adjectives Used as Nouns [321] Adjectives may be substantivized: 1. Syntactically, which means that they are simply used as nouns within a given context. 2. Morphologically. In this case, they are substantivized by means of the possessive suffix of the 3rd person. As with words which are commonly nouns, these also concretize and single out persons, things, ideas, etc. Substantivized adjectives (except those in +dagy, +däge, etc.) are declined like ordinary nouns with or without possessive suffixes, singular or plural. Note: Substantivized relational adjectives formed by means of +dagy, +däge, +tagy, +täge offer some characteristics of their own. They will therefore be studied separately.

Examples of 1: · Ahyny kårmihä, tãhene belmässeè. (Proverb). You won’t know the sweet without experiencing the sour. · Tatlyny ahytu æièel, ahyny tatly itå kyen. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) It is easy to make the sweet sour, (but) it is difficult to make the sour sweet. · Kãhle bawkalarga kãh birer, kãhsez bawkalarnyè da kãhen alyr. (ibid.) The strong give strength to others, the weak take (away) the strength of others. · ... kihägegä karaganda bik kåp soè qtkan bulsak ta, kåzgä joky kermäde. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) Although we had lain down much later than (we had) yesterday, we could not sleep. · Minnän hibärräkne taptyè, kåräseè. (Gadel Kutuj, Tapwyrylmagan xatlar, Ikenhe xat.) You have found one prettier than I, it seems. · – Wul buryhny kabul itä alasyzmy? Soraunyè mägânäsen: «Îgyjsä, sezdän dä uèganraklarny ïzlärgä tury kilähäk» – dip farazlarga mãmkin ide. (Äxsän Baqnov, Taw kitap.) “Can you accept that duty?” One could interpret the meaning of the question as: “If not (otherwise), it will be necessary to look for (men) more capable than you are.” · Kazan · kontrastlarga baj kala. Biredä boryngy belän bågenge aralawyp, kåzgä tawlanyp tora. (Garif Axunov, Marselá Zaripov, I kaderle tugan qk.) Kazan is a city rich in contrast. Here, the old and the new (lit., present) mix strikingly. Examples of 2: · Mähet karwynda uram awa gyna ... ike jort – berse gadi båränädän, ikenhese · zårragy, takta belän tywlap, saryga buqlgan. Keherägendä iptidai (bawlangyh), ä zurragynda rãwti (urta) syjnyflar ukyj. (Ämirxan Eniki, Soègy kitap.) Just across the street, opposite the mosque ... are two houses, one of ordinary logs, the other, the larger, covered with boards and painted yellow. The elementary classes study in the smaller one and the intermediate classes in the larger one. · Utraularnyè åsemleklär dãnáqsy bik baj: biw jãz tãrle. Iè matuqlary apak kaennar, älbättä. (Niqz Xäkimullin, Arktika kièleklärendä.) The plant life (lit., plant world) of the islands is very rich; there are five hundred species. The most beautiful are the bright white birches, of course. · Irtänge namaz ber genä, ä kihkeläre ãhäå: ikende, axwam, qstå. (Mädinä Malikova, Ak davylda tal bãrese.) There is only one morning prayer, but the evening ones are three: Ikende (performed before sundown), Akhsham (performed immediately after sundown), Yästü /Jðsty/ (the fifth prayer, performed after sundown). 116

Ul hakta barysy da bik gadi çäm aèlaewly ide. (ibid.) At that time all was very simple and understandable. · Sägatálärneè tãrlese bar: kyègyraulysy, haèlysy, kãjlese, tavyw-tynsyzy. (Kamil Kärimov, Aldavyh kãz.) There are various kinds of clocks: those which have a bell, those which have an (alarm) bell, those which have chimes, (and) silent ones. · Bez barlygy æide bala buldyk. Iè olybyz Färdänä isemle. Iè soègysy · Gobäjdulla. (G. Ibraçimov turynda istäleklär, Wakiræan Ibraçimov, Xäkim Ibraçimov.) Altogether we were seven children. The oldest of us (lit., our oldest) is called (has the name) Färdänä. The last (i.e., youngest) is Ghöbeydulla. · – Tãrle gajbätkä /ôðjbðtkð/ îl ahkanhy, Mãxsinovnyè åze belän sãjläwådän qxwysy bulmas. (Mirsäj Ämir, Saf kåèel.) “Before allowing all kinds of gossip to spread (lit., Before opening the way to ...), there will be nothing better than talking with Mökhsinov himself.” ·

Substantivization of Relational Adjectives Formed by Means of +dagy, +däge, +tagy, +täge [322] Relational adjectives in +dagy, +däge, +tagy, +täge in the plural are substantivized and declined in the same manner as are other adjectives. In the singular they are substantivized and declined in three ways as shown in the paradigms below.1) I II III Nom. kuldagy kuldagysy kuldagy Gen. kuldagynyè kuldagysynyè kuldagynyè Dative kuldagyga kuldagysyna kuldagyna Acc. kuldagyny kuldagysyn kuldagyn kuldagyny Loc. kuldagyda kuldagysynda kuldagynda Abl. kuldagydan kuldagysynnan kuldagynnan Nom. Gen. Dative Acc. Loc. Abl.

ãjdäge ãjdägeneè ãjdägegä ãjdägene ãjdägedä ãjdägedän

ãjdägese ãjdägeseneè ãjdägesenä ãjdägesen ãjdägesendä ãjdägesennän

ãjdäge ãjdägenen ãjdägenä ãjdägen ãjdägendä ãjdägennän

ãjdägene

As can be seen from the above tables,the substantivization and declension of relational adjectives in +dagy, +dege, etc. shown in paradigms I and II are identical with those of other adjectives. Paradigm III is somewhat different. Nominative and genitive are the same as in paradigm I, but the dative, the accusative in +n, the locative and ablative are formed by means of those case endings which ordinarily are joined to nouns with the possessive suffix of the third person. This means that in these cases final «y», «e» of +dagy, +däge must function as the possessive suffix of that person. 1)

Paradigms compiled and information supplied by D. Phil. H. R. Kurbatov of the Ghalimjan Ibrahimov Institute for Language, Literature and History of the Academy of Sciences of Tatarstan, Kazan.

117

The full accusative ending +ny, +ne of paradigm III is a remnant from the old Tatar literary language (232, Note, 321-323). It must not be confused with the accusative ending +ny, +ne of the neutral form (paradigm I), which in contemporary Tatar cannot ordinarily be joined to nouns with the possessive suffix of the third person. Except for the accusative ending +ny, +ne, the declension of substantivized relational adjectives in +dagy, +däge, etc., as shown in paradigm III, corresponds to that of nouns with the suffix +nyky, +neke (compare 243, table). The forms shown in paradigms I and II are identical with, and have the same functions as, those of other substantivized adjectives (see 321, 1. and 2.). They are common to both the present literary language and the vernacular. Compare the examples below: · Eraktagy ukyp belenä, qkyndagy kårenä. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) What is far away one learns by reading, what is close by seeing. · – Åz ãegezdäge kebek bulygyz, tartynyp tormagyz. (Bulat Sãläjman, Abu baba.) “Make yourself at home (lit., be like in your own home). Don’t be bashful.” · – ... ãjdägeläregez isännärme? (Wärif Kamal, Ike qxwy.) “... are all your people all right?” (lit., “... are all in your house healthy?”) · Tanywtyk. Bålmädägelär bezgä uryn birdelär ... (Garif Axunov, Marselá Zaripov, I kaderle tugan qk.) We introduced ourselves. The people in the room (lit., those in the room) made room for us. · Wundagysy sineke, mondagysy mineke. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) That one (which is) there is yours, this one (which is) here is mine. · Bålmädä ike bala bar ide. Berse · ... · kyz bala ... Ikenhese – biw-alty qwálär hamasyndagysy – malaj. (Mäxmåt Xäsänov, Kama taènary.) In the room there were two children. One – ... – a girl. ... The other – the one approximately five or sixyear-old – was a boy. · Illedägeneè akyly ni artmas, ni kimemäs. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) The intellect of a fifty-year-old person will neither increase nor decrease. · ... anda bäqlär dä bawka magazinnardagyga karaganda îgaryrak bulgan. (Tatarstan ASSR tarixy.) ... there, prices were also higher than (they were) in other stores. · Kewe kålyndagyga årelmä. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) Do not reach for what is in a man’s (i.e., in another man’s) hand. · Åtkänneè ahysyn onytma, aldagysyna sabak bulsyn. (ibid.) Do not forget the sorrow of the past; may it be a lesson for that which is (lies) ahead. · Tukaj hygargan satirik æyrlar, wigyrálär çäm anyè åtken tapkyr såzlärkalamburlary nikadär täïsir, ïffekt qsaganlygyn tagyn ber tapkyr kårsätå ãhen, minem tåbändägene qzyp åtåem dä urynly bulyr dip ujlyjm. (Zarif Bäwiri, Zamandawlary belän ohrawular.) To show once again what an influence (and) effect Tuqai’s published satirical songs (and) poems and his sharp-witted words and puns produced, I think it will also be appropriate to relate the following. (tåbändägene: regular accusative, reference is to an event not mentioned before). · Wundyj nawirlarnyè berse turynda avtor tåbändägelärne qza: ... (Fatix Ibraçimov, Belem älifbadan bawlana.) About one of such publishers the author writes the following: ... (nawir – also näwir, plural: näwirlär). · Tåbändägesen kara. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) See the one below. (Singles out one specific proverb).

118

Gadättägehä, ul åzen bik tigez, bik tynyh tota. Ïhendägesen çih sizdermi. (Ämirxan Eniki, Gãländäm tutaw xatiräse.) As usually he conducts himself in a very balanced manner, very calmly. He never reveals what is inside him. (Singles out, puts emphasis on the second part of the sentence). · – Unæide qwemdä hakta mièa egerme biw qwáleklär inde ir urtasy bulyp kårenä idelär, ä utyzdagylarny inde äjtkän dä îk. (Zãfär Fätxetdinov, Ahylgan serlär.) “When I was seventeen, twenty-five-year-olds appeared to me already as middle-aged men, not to mention the thirty-year-olds.” · Adäm åzeneè artyndagylaryn kårep kartaq. (ibid.) Man grows older, seeing what is (left) behind him. · Ãske wårlek bãtenläj buw diqrlek. Asky kattagysynda tuzyp betkän dårt-biw kitap, ... kårenä. (Mirsäj Ämir, Qktaw.) The upper shelf is almost completely empty. On the lower (on that which is the lower) one sees four or five books, ... covered in dust. · Kulyèdagydan aerylma. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) Do not part with what is in your hand. · Institutta monnan ike el ïlek bulgan xäl tåbändägedän tora ide. (Atilla Rasix, Synau.) The incident which happened at the institute two years ago consisted in the following. · Kywyn kãz kãnendägedän æylyrak kienergä kiräk. (S.M. no. 12, 1976.) In winter one must dress warmer than (one does) on autumn days. · Byel çär æirdä uku ïwlärenä uzgan eldagydan artygrak äçämiqt bireler tãsle kårenä. (Galiäsgar /Ôðliðsôðr/ Kamal, Åz xälebez.) It looks as if this year everywhere more importance is attached to matters of education than (was the case) last year. (For tãsle with conjugated verbal forms, see 576). · ... ike katly matur gyna agah jortnyè kapkasy aldyna ike izvozhik kilep tuktadylar. Aldagysynnan undårt-unbiw qwálek ber ir bala tãwep tiz genä jortka kerde. (Wärif Kamal, Näfisä.) Two cabs pulled up and stopped before the gate of a beautiful, two-story wooden house ... From the first (lit., from the one in front) a fourteen or fifteen-year-old boy alighted and rather quickly entered the house. ·

[323] The forms shown in paradigm III contain traces of linguistic archaism.1) It is this shade of archaism which, attracting attention, intensifies the speech as if underlining the importance of the object (or person, etc.) denoted by the word to which these forms are joined. In other words, they too indicate a measure of concretization (definiteness), but in a lesser degree than the possessive suffix +sy, +se of paradigm II. The forms of paradigm III belong especially to the vernacular and to the language of folklore. They can be found in proverbs. Though infrequently, they also occur in contemporary literary works where their skilful use – mostly +dagy, +däge, etc. – with the old, full 1)

For example, the full accusative in +ny, +ne goes back to a later period of the old Turkish language. (See also A. von Gabain. Alttürkische Grammatik, p. 88.) It also pertains to the old Tatar literary language of the 15th through the 19th centuries, when it was joined to any possessive stem of the third person singular. In the position indicated in paradigm III it may be regarded as a remnant of the then rather numerous Oghuz grammatical elements in Tatar, most of which have since fallen from use. Compare also the Uzbek literary language which, although a Qypchaq language, still uses the full (Oghuz) accusative with any possessive stem of the 3rd person singular (for example, otasini ‘his/her father’, acc.). However, in the Uzbek vernacular final «i» is dropped (otasin). (See A.N. Kononov, Grammatika sovremennogo uzbekskogo literaturnogo qzyka, Moscow, Leningrad, 1960.)

119

accusative – adds a tinge of elevated style, a higher degree of expressiveness, to the language. Examples: · Kyrdagyny uèyw dimä, kuldagyny uèyw digen. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) Do not call that which is in the field a harvest, call that a harvest which is in the hand. · Kyrdagyny ikmägem dimä, ambardagyn äjt. (ibid.) Do not call that which is in the field your (lit., my) corn, call (your corn) what is in the barn. Note: In the above examples it is possible to substitute kyrdagyn, kuldagyn for kyrdagyny, kuldagyny. However, it would not sound as rich, as expressive.

– Beläm min sineè kimhelekläreène, Zaçid, – dide Zãbäræät, ... Sin gomereè /ôõmereì/ buena kåèeleèdägene qwerep jãriqhäkseè. (Atilla Rasix, Ike bujdak.) “Do I know your shortcomings, Zahid!” Zöbärjät said, ... “You will always (lit., all your life) hide what’s in your heart.” · – Kåèelemdägen qwermi äjtåem ãhen gafu itegez. (Mirsäj Ämir, Mäxäbbät bålmäse.) “Pardon me for saying openly (lit., saying without hiding) what is in my heart.”

·

Note: In these two examples – one having «kåèeleèdägene», i.e., the full, archaic (Oghuz) accusative, the other «kåèelemdägen», i.e., the reduced, modern (Qypchaq) accusative – the accusatives distinguish themselves not only from the point of view of style and expressiveness on the one hand and grammatical-functional nuances on the other, but they introduce into the speech also some contextual-semantical differences. For example, the use in the first example of the reduced instead of the full accusative would give the speech a shade of indelicacy, lack of good taste which, coming from another person, would be inadmissible in the context. In the second example the speaker refers to himself, and the critical niceness required in the first example is not needed.

Åz kesäse buw kewe kårwe kesäsendägen isäplär. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) A man whose pockets are empty will count (figure, calculate) what’s in his neighbor’s pocket. · Xäjri. Bulat abyj, ahulanma, sin nadan kewe, sin xodajnyè kodrätlären belmiseè. Bulat. Sin beläseème? Xäjri. Min kitaptagyny äjtäm. Bulat. Kitaptagyny sez kåp äjtäsez. (Kärim Tinhurin, Zäègär wäl.1) Kheyri. Uncle Bulat, don’t get angry, (but) you are an ignorant (illiterate) man. You do not know the powers of the Lord. Bulat. Do you know them? Kheyri. I say (i.e., quote) what is in the Book. Bulat. You say (i.e., quote) too much what’s in the Book.

·

Note: Reference is to the Holy Koran. The use of the old, full accusative emphasizes the importance of its contents. Also, it singles out and defines what Kheyri is saying.

Gomer bue uèywsyzlyklardan zarlanyp jãråhe kewelär belän hagywtyrganda, kirese kilep hyga, bu åze kyenlyk ïzli kebek, xyqlyndagyny tormywka awyru ãhen, qnyp-kãep jãri. (Marselá Zaripov, Otywly äjlänew.) Compared with people who always complain of failures, it turns out that he is the opposite. It seems that he himself looks for difficulties. He burns to make come true what’s in his dream. · Alq bågen bawka vakyttagynnan da matur, sãjkemle ... (Fatix Ämirxan, Kaderle minutlar.) Today Alya is even more beautiful, even more lovable than (she was) at other times (before). ·

1)

Zäègär wäl ‘The Blue Shawl’. A melodrama, it is one of Kärim Tinchurin’s best-known plays; written in 1926.

120

Nouns Used as Adjectives [324] Some words, notably the names for the points of the compass and the word åzäk ‘center’, that are commonly nouns, are also used as adjectives. In this latter function they simply precede their object of attribution as do ordinary adjectives: Tãnáqk kotyp ‘North Pole’, Kãnáqk kotyp ‘South Pole’, Kãnbatyw Evropa ‘Western Europe’, Tãnáqk qrymwar ‘northern hemisphere’, kãnáqk kapka ‘south gate’, tãnáqk-kãnhygyw ãlkä ‘the northeastern province’, Åzäk Aziq /Azið/ ‘Central Asia’, åzäk çãæåmhe ‘centre-forward’ (in sport), åzäk kala ‘chief town’, ‘capital’ (of a district or province). Note: As nouns they are used as any other noun. When united with other nouns to form compound nouns (compare 175, a), the second noun takes the possessive suffix of the third person: kãnáqkka borylu ‘to turn to the south’ (for example: wind), kãnbatywta ‘in the west’, Tatarstannyè tãnáqgy ‘the north of Tataristan’, wäçärneè åzägendä ‘in the center of the city’, Kãnhygyw xalyklary ‘peoples of the East’, Kãnbatyw ädäbiqty ‘Western literature’, tãnáqk balkywy ‘northern lights’, ‘aurora borealis’, tãnáqk æäe ‘northern summer’, tãnáqk-kãnbatyw æile ‘north-west wind’, åzäk tiweme (uemy) ‘center cavity’ (as the conical cavity drilled in the center of a workpiece to be worked on a lathe).

Names of Nationalities and Languages [325] Names designating nationalities are either independent formations, or they are derived from names of countries (continents) by adding the suffix +ly, +le. Names of languages are formed by attaching the suffix +ha, +hä to the respective names of nationality. Continents

Nationalities

Languages

English Names

Afrika Aziq Avstraliq Evropa Amerika

afrikaly aziqle avstraliqle evropaly amerikaly

– – – – –

Africa, African Asia, Asian Australia, Australian Europe, European America, American

Countries

Nationalities

Languages

English Names

ingilzhä

England, Englishman

bawkortha – garäphä

Bashkirstan, Bashkir Belgium, Belgian Arabia, Arab, Arabic

Angliq ingliz angliqle English Bawkortstan bawkort Belágiq belágiqle Garäpstan garäp /Ôðrðpstan/ Germaniq german1) /Germanið/ nemec, nimes Almaniq alman /Almanið/ Gollandiq golland gollandiqle gollandly Greciq grek 1)

Germany, German nemecha, nimeshä almanha gollandha

Holland, Dutchman, Dutch

grekha

Greece, Greek

German may also mean ‘Germanic’. For example: german telläre ‘the Germanic languages’.

121

Countries

Nationalities

Languages

English Names

Gyjrak (Irak) Iran

gyjrakly (irakly) iranly farsy ispan ispaniqle ispanly italáqn italiqle kazakâ kanadaly kyrgyz /qírôíz/ kytaj hin misyrly portugaliqle rus urys tatar tãrek francuz

–

Iraq (Irak), Iraqi

Ispaniq Italiq Kazakâstan Kanada Kyrgyzstan /Qírôízstan/ Kytaj Misyr Portugaliq Rossiq, Räsäj Tatarstan Tãrkiq Franciq Wvejcariq Wveciq Qponiq Åzbäkstan Çindstan

wvejcariqle wved qpon qponiqle åzbäk çind çindly çindstanly

Iran, Iranian, Persian

farsyha ispanha

Spain, Spaniard, Spanish

italáqnha

Italy, Italian

kazakâha – kyrgyzha

Kazakstan, Kazak, Kazakish Canada, Canadian Kyrghyzstan, Kyrghyz

kytajha

China, Chinese

– portugalha rusha urysha tatarha tãrekhä francuzha

Egypt, Egyptian Portugal, Portuguese Russia, Russian

– wvedha qponha

Tatarstan, Tatar Turkey, Turk, Turkish France, Frenchman, French Switzerland, Swiss Sweden, Swede, Swedish Japan, Japanese

åzbäkhä –

Uzbekistan, Usbek India, Indian

Note: In many cases, names of nationalities in +ly, +le may also be formed where already independent formations exist. For example: rossiqle ‘an inhabitant of Russia’, wveciqle ‘an inhabitant of Sweden’, ‘a Swede’, gollandiqle ‘an inhabitant of Holland’, ‘a Dutchman’. However, these formations belong strictly to the book language, and some of them, such as qponiqle or ispanly, ispaniqle, sound even artificial.

[326] Names of nationalities may be used either as adjectives or as nouns. If used as nouns, they are treated as such, (i.e., they are declined, take the plural, etc.). If they are used as adjectives, a distinction must be made between independent formations and those which are derived from names of countries by the addition of +ly, +le. Names of nationalities which are independent formations require the addition of the possessive suffix of the third person to the noun which they modify: Tãrek xãkåmäte ‘the Turkish government’, francuz ilhese ‘the French ambassador’, tatar xalky ‘the Tatar people’, garäp tele ‘the Arab language’, kazakâ balalary ‘Kazak children’, bawkort ädäbiqty ‘Bashkir literature’. The same rule applies to adjectives designating religions: Mãselman xalyklary ‘the Moslem peoples’, xristian dine ‘the Christian religion’, islam æämgyqte /çðmôiðte/ ‘Islamic society’. 122

Names of nationalities derived by means of +ly, +le and tãrki ‘Turkic’, are used like ordinary adjectives: Amerikaly îlhylar ‘American travelers’, avstriqle qzuhylar ‘Austrian writers’, gyjrakly ber säådägär ‘an Iraqi merchant’, tãrki xalyklar ‘the Turkic peoples’. [327] The names of languages may be used as adjectives1) or as nouns. If used as adjectives, they precede the noun they modify: Tatarha gazetalar ‘Tatar-language newspapers’, francuzha kitaplar ‘French-language books’, tatarha-rusha såzlek ‘a Tatar-Russian dictionary’. If used as nouns, names of languages are treated as are any other nouns: inglizhädän tatarhaga täræemä itå ‘to translate from English into Tatar’. · Tatar ädäbiqtyn kåzdän kihergändä, bez anda äxlak mäsáäläseneè gaqtá zur uryn totkanlygyn kårdek. (Ibraçim Nurullin, XX jãz bawy tatar ädäbiqty.) In reviewing Tatar literature, we have seen that the matter of ethics occupies a very large place in it. · Sãläjmaniqneè iè zur bajlygy anyè tãrki, garäp, farsy kulâqzmalary kitapxanäse ikän. (Mirfatix Zäkiev, Aj çäm joldyz qktysynda.) The greatest treasure of the Süleymaniye Mosque2) is probably its library of Turkic, Arabic and Persian manuscripts. · Bez kãn saen tãrek gazetalaryn ukywtyrgalap tordyk. (ibid.) Every day we read (in a cursory manner) the Turkish newspapers. · Latin, francuz çäm boryngy grek tellären ãjränäbez. (Ïduard Kasyjmov, Sorbonna professory.) We are studying the Latin, French and old Greek languages. · Mièa ... roman çäm german tellären dä, slavqn tellären dä, ... ãjränergä tury kilde, ... (ibid.) I had occasion to study ... the Romance and Germanic languages, as well as the Slavonic languages, ... · Bolgarlar kilgändä, Urta Idel çäm Ural bujlarynda tãrki kabilälär /qðbilðlðr/ belän bergä kåp sanly ugrofin kabiläläre dä qwägän. (M.Z. Zäkiev, Tatar xalky teleneè barlykka kilåe.) When the Bolghars arrived, there lived along the Middle Volga and the Ural also numerous Ugro-Finnic tribes together with the Turkic tribes. · Bezneè tãrkemdä kåp kenä tatarlar bar ide. (Luiza Wäjdullina, Piramidalar ilendä.) In our group there were rather many Tatars. · [Semen] nemeclar belän avstriqlelär tora torgan barakta qwi. (Kazan utlary, quoted from «Tatar teleneè aèlatmaly såzlege».) [Semen] lives in the barracks in which German, and Austrians are dwelling. · Ber tãrle mäkalálär bawka xalyklarda, mäsälän, rus, nemec, francuz, inglizlärdä dä kåzätelä. (R.A. Îsupov, Täræemä mäsáäläläre.) Identical proverbs can be observed also among (lit., in) other nations, for example, among Russians, Germans, French, English. · ... ul, nemecha, rusha, francuzha såzlär kystyryp, åze turynda kyska gyna sãjläp birde. (Wäjxi Mannur, Musa.) ... mixing German, Russian and French words, he told briefly about himself. · Ul, ... «Monda italáqnha kitaplar da birälärmeni?» – dip sorady. (ibid.) “Here they also supply Italian books, don’t they?” he asked ...

1) 2)

Names of languages formed by +ha, +hä are also used as adverbs (see 591, a-o). Reference is to the Sülemaniye Mosque in Istanbul.

123

– Närsä qzasyz? – dip, aksak nemechasy belän sorady eget ... (ibid.) “What are you writing?” asked the young man in his halting German. · – Äjdä, barabyz da tege mãselman studenty belän tanywabyz. (Fatix Ämirxan, Xäqt.) “Come on, let’s go and get acquainted with that Moslem student.” · Mãselmannar ãhen genä tågel, xristian, qçåd dinendäge kewelär ãhen dä urtak izge sanalgan urynnar waktyj ew /jíø/ ohryj. (Luiza Wäjdullina, Islam dinendä izge xatynnar kuláty.) Places which are regarded as holy not only by (lit., for) Moslems, but jointly also by (for) those of the Christian (and) Jewish religions, are found rather frequently. · «Tukaj» romany tatarha berenhe märtäbä 1950-51 ellarny «Sovet ädäbiqty» æurnalynda basylyp hykty. (Galiq /Ôalið/ Xantemirova, Täræemädä milli åzenhäleklärne saklau.) The novel “Tuqai” appeared first in Tatar in the years 195051 in the journal “Soviet Literature”. ·

[328] Tatar often uses the name of the country where English uses the respective adjective: Aziq illäre ‘the Asian countries’, Italiq lirasy ‘the Italian lira’, Misyr prezidenty ‘The Egyptian president’, Amerika professory ‘an American professor’. · Ïwtän kajtywlyj Såriq gazetalaryn ala torgan gadätem bar ... (Mãnir Îsupov, Såriqdä ohrawular.) I have the habit of buying Syrian newspapers when I return from work. · Musa. Ozaklamyjha, kyzym, bezgä Amerika professory kilähäk. (Kärim Tinhurin, Amerikan.) Musa. Soon, my daughter, an American professor will come to (see) us. · Bezneè gid – Wäddiq isemle Misyr kyzy – barysy turynda da rus telendä bäjnä-bäjnä sãjli. (Luiza Wäjdullina, Piramidalar ilendä.) Our guide, an Egyptian girl named Shaäddiyä, speaks about everything in detail in Russian. · Andre Belágiq kewese ikän ... (Wäjxi Mannur, Musa.) Andre, it turned out, was a Belgian. · Bu xäl tanyw bulmagan Italiq egete belän ike tatar egete arasyn bik qkynajtyp æibärde. (ibid.) This circumstance (suddenly) brought the Italian youth and the two Tatar youths, who had not been acquainted with him, much closer together.

The (Persian) Izafet Construction [329] Besides expressing possessive relation between nouns (221, 222), the izafet construction serves also to connect attributive adjectives with their nouns. In such constructions, which are treated as one unit, the noun precedes the adjective as in Persian. Declensional suffixes, possessive suffixes, etc., are joined only to the last component, (i.e., the adjective). If both the noun and the adjective are of Arabic origin, the following rules must be observed: 1. After a noun in the singular the adjective agrees with it in gender and number. 2. After a masculine noun in the regular plural the adjective agrees with it in gender and number or is in the feminine singular. 3. After a feminine noun in the regular plural the adjective is in the feminine singular. 4. After a noun in the broken plural the adjective is in the feminine singular.

124

If the adjective is of Persian origin, it remains unchanged, since Persian – like Tatar – does not distinguish grammatical gender. An Arabic adjective connected with a Persian noun appears in its masculine form. Note: Izafet constructions with nouns and adjectives of Persian origin occur much less frequently.

Examples: kamus (A., masc. sing.) ‘dictionary’, gyjlámi (A., masc. sing.) ‘scientific’, kamusy gyjlámi ‘encyclopedic dictionary; mädräsä (A., fem. sing.) ‘religious school’, ‘medrese’, gali (A., masc. sing.), galiq (fem. sing.) ‘high’, mädräsäi galiq ‘religious school of higher learning’; æämgyqtá (A., fem. sing.) ‘society’, xäjriq (A., fem. sing.) ‘charitable’, ‘beneficient’, æämgyqte xäjriq /çðmôiðte xðjrið/ ‘charitable society’; xãrriqt (A., fem. sing.) ‘liberty’, ‘freedom’, wäxsiq (A., fem. sing.) ‘personal’, xãrriqte wäxsiq /xõrriðte øðxsið/ ‘personal freedom’; xissiqt (A., fem. sing.) ‘feeling’, milliq (A., fem. sing.) ‘national’, xissiqte milliq ‘national feeling’; mägâlåmat (A., fem. pl.) ‘information’, ‘education’, ibtidaiq (A., fem. sing.) ‘elementary’, ‘primary’, mägâlåmaty ibtidaiq ‘primary education’; äfkar (A.) broken plural of fiker ‘thought’, ‘opinion’, gomumiq (A., fem. sing.) ‘general’, ‘public’, äfkare gomumiq ‘public opinion’; äxväl (A.) broken plural of xäl ‘situation’, ‘condition’, ‘circumstance’, säqsiq (A., fem. sing.) ‘political’, äxväle säqsiq /ðxwðle sðjasið/ ‘political conditions’; dus (P.) ‘friend’, sadyjk (A., masc.) ‘true’, ‘faithful’, dusty sadyjk ‘true friend’. In some frozen expressions the izafet particle is not used: ysul (A., masc.) ‘method’, kadim /qðdim/ (A., masc.) ‘old’, ‘ancient’, ysul kadim (also: ysuly kadim) ‘old method (of teaching)’; æädit (A., masc.) ‘new’, ysul æädit ‘new method (of teaching)’; ädäbiqt (A., fem.) ‘literature’, æädidä (A., fem.) ‘new’, ädäbiqt æädidä ‘new literature’. Note: Like the izafet construction of nouns, the izfet construction of nouns and attributive adjectives was used rather frequently in the older Tatar literary language. In contemporary Tatar it occurs mostly in quotations from older literary works, in names of organizations, institutions, schools, etc., of former times and in a few frozen expressions.

For example: · 1906 (ber meè tugyz jãz altynhy) elda ul (Galimæan Ibraçimov) Ufaga kilä çäm æädithelek înälewendäge «Mädräsäi Galiq»gä kerä. (G. Xalit, Galimæan Ibraçimov, tormywy çäm iæaty, G. Ibraçimov, Sajlanma äsärlär, Volume I.) In 1906 he (Ghalimjan Ibrahimov) comes to Ufa and enters the “Ghaliä Medrese”, a school of Jadidist trend. · Axyr «kuväi kodsiq» galäbä /ôðlðbð/ itte (in modern Tatar: «izge kãh» æiède). (Fatix Ämirxan, Fätxulla xäzrät, 1910.) In the end the “holy power” triumphed. · Ul ... kåptän åk ... fãnåne æädidä (qèa fännär) kiräklegenä ywana ide. (Fatix Ämirxan, Millät täräkâkyj itterå.) He had believed ... for a long time ... in the necessity for new sciences. · Tämam 20 nhe (egermenhe) oktqbrá kãne æitkänhe, äfkare gomumiqi tatariq (tatar xalkynyè gomumi fikere) wuwy xaksyzlyklarnyè bulganlygyna ... ywanyp tordy. (Gabdulla Tukaj, Xaksyzlyktan kotyldyk.) Up to the 20th of October Tatar public opinion believed ... that there was this injustice. · ... bu ber ämere tabigyj gyna ... (Wärif Kamal, Xikäqdän ber bab.) ... this is only a natural precept (law of nature) ... · Xäsän ilä (bälän) Xãsäen ... mäktäbe ibtidaiqdä (bawlangyh mäktäptä) åkyla torgan kitaplarny tämam itkännär ide. (Zakir Çadi, Bäxetle kyz.) Khäsän and Khösäyen ... had finished the books, which are studied (read) in elementary school.

125

Figurative Use of Names of Colors [330] Besides designating colors, names of colors may be used figuratively to describe various qualities of the human voice, often also reflecting or expressing emotions. For example: Qwel ‘green’, qwel tavyw ‘an unpleasant, piercing, penetrating voice; qwelle-zäègär ‘greenish and blue’, qwelle-zäègär tavyw ‘a venomous, bilious, vitriolic voice’; sarylyqwelle ‘yellowish and greenish’, saryly-qwelle tavyw ‘a very loud, stentorian voice’. See also the examples below: · Nahalánik,1) åz-åzen belewtermihä, qwelle-mãwelle tavyw belän akyryp æibärde: · ... (Räfkatá Kärami, Kargywly îllar.) The camp manager, going wild, started yelling (at the prisoner) at the top of his voice: “ ... “ · Mondagy tamawany kårep bermälgä kehe lejtenant ta îgalyp kaldy. Ïwneè närsädä ikänen tãwengäh, ... qwelle-kyzylly tavyw belän akyryrga totyndy. (Änäs Galiev, Avyldawlar.) Seeing the things going on here, even the junior lieutenant was lost for a moment. After realizing what it was about (a crowd of people was attempting to break into a store’s warehouse), ... he began to shout with a powerful voice. · ... anyè qnyna tanyw tågel ber därviw päjda buldy. ... tutajga karamyjha gyna, koègyrt2) tavyw belän: · Kojrykly joldyz kilä-ä, · dide. (Batulla, Sãembikä kyissasy.) ... a strange dervish came up to her. ... without looking at the elderly lady, he said in a clear voice: “A comet is coming.” · · ... tovaryènyè bäçase tãwte, · dide kemder kåkle-qwelle3) tavyw belän xixyldap. (Gaziz Åzile, Gyjfrit.) “... the value of your wares has diminished,” somebody said, chuckling in a hoarse (husky) voice. Note: The adjective sary ‘yellow’ forms a pair (compound) with the adjective kory ‘dry’ – korysary. This compound is used as a noun meaning ‘dry branches and twigs’ (in the woods). ·

Ul ... kolak saldy · îk, syngan botak, toqk astynda izelgän kory-sary tavywy, gomumän, at iwaräte sizelmi. (Ajdar Xälim, Ãh aqkly at.) He listened ... – no, no sound of a breaking branch, of dry branches or twigs being crushed under hoofs could be heard – in all, no sign of a horse. (A boy is trying to find his horse which has wandered away from him in the woods).

Note: The pair kory-sary may also mean ‘cooked, non-liquid food’. Note also: ak ‘white’: ak îl teläå ‘to wish a pleasant journy’ kara ‘black’: kara ïwhe ‘unskilled labourer’ kyzyl ‘red’: kyzyl kar qugah (quganda) (‘lit., when red snow falls’; said about something that will never happen).

1) 2) 3)

Nahalánik: R. – bawlyk koègyrt · brown kåkle-qwelle · bluish and greenish

126

CHAPTER III ¡ NUMERALS Meaning and Grammatical Characteristics of Numerals [331] Tatar numerals are: 1. Cardinal numbers; 2. Fractional Numbers; 3. Multiplicative Numbers; 4. Ordinal Numbers; 5. Approximative Numbers; 6. Distributive Numbers; 7. Collective Numbers, and 8. Indefinite Numeral Adjectives. The various classes of the numerals (except numeral adjectives) are formed through simple or complex derivation from the basic class of the cardinals. Derivational suffixes, as well as inflectional suffixes, are added only to the last number of a compound numeral, except the compound distributive numbers ending with round hundreds, thousands, etc. (see 369). Nouns preceded by cardinals, distributive or approximative numbers formed with +lap, +läp remain in the singular. Nouns preceded by indefinite numbers stand in the singular or plural. Numerals are not declined when preceding a noun: ber ãjneè ‘of one house’, biw ãjdä ‘in five houses’, ãh el ‘three years’, un kara attan ‘from ten black horses’, ikenhe atnaga ‘to the second week’, ãhenhe ãjdä ‘in the third house’, altywar kitap ‘six books each’, æideläp ukuhynyè ‘of about seven pupils’, bernihä binadan ‘from a few buildings’. When used as nouns, numerals are declined as any other noun. They are substantivized: a) By simply using them in their basic form: Biwtän ãhne alsaè, ike kala. ‘Three from five leaves two (lit., If you take three from five, two remain).’ unga æidene kuwkah unæide bula. ‘Ten plus seven make seventeen (lit., if you add seven to ten there will be seventeen).’ Kåpne belsäè tiz kartaersyè. ‘If you know much you will get old fast’ (proverb). b) By means of the possessive suffix of the 3rd person, which then has the same functions as described in 321, 2 (adjectives): · ... tramvaj iwegennän berse ãlkänräk, ikenhese qwáräk ike xatyn hyktylar. (Mädinä Malikova, Ak davylda tal bãrese.) ... two women, one older, the other younger, alighted from the door of the streetcar. · Kaban kålendä ... ike kehkenä paroxod jãri. Berse «Neptun», ikenheseneè isemen xäterlämim. (G. Ibraçimov turynda istäleklär, Ismägyjlá Rämiev.) Two small steamboats ... operate on Qaban Lake. One is the “Neptune”, the name of the second I do not remember. · Niçaqtá, arbabyz ïwlänep bette. Kãphäkläre îan kolgalardan kiselep qsalgan. Dårtese dårt ïzdän bara. (ibid., Moxtar Ibraçimov.) Finally, our cart was finished. Its wheels have been cut from thick rods. All four are moving in four tracks (i.e., in four different tracks). · Bez barlygy æide bala buldyk. Iè olybyz Färdänä isemle. Ikenhebez – Nägyjmä. Ãhenhese – min. Dårtenhese – Galimæan. Biwenhese Näfisä isemle kyz ide. (ibid., Wakiræan Ibraçimov, Xäkim Ibraçimov.) In all we were seven children. Our oldest is called Färdänä. Our second, Näghimä. The third is me. The fourth – Ghalimjan. The fifth was a girl named Näfisä. · Ew kyna xatlar qzywyp tordyk. Kåbese tãrle kullarda îgaldy ... (ibid., Moxtar Ibraçimov.) We wrote each other letters rather frequently. Many were lost while in various hands. 127

Cardinal Numbers [332] 1 – ber, 2 – ike, 3 – ãh, 4 – dårt, 5 – biw, 6 – alty, 7 – æide, 8 – sigez, 9 – tugyz, 10 – un, 20 – egerme, 30 – utyz, 40 – kyryk, 50 – ille, 60 – altmyw, 70 – æitmew, 80 – siksän, 90 – tuksan, 100 – jãz, 1000 – meè, 1,000,000 – million, 1,000,000,000 – milliard.1) In compound numbers the lower figure follows the higher, except in round hundreds, thousands, etc., where it precedes the higher. The numbers 11 to 19 are written together, all other compound numbers are written separately. However, compound cardinals from 100 to 119, 1000 to 1099, and those from 1 million on may be joined by the conjunction da, dä: 11 – unber, 12 – unike, 13 – unãh, 14 – undårt, 15 – unbiw, 16 – unalty, 17 – unæide, 18 – unsigez, 19 – untugyz, 21 – egerme ber, 32 – utyz ike, 43 – kyryk ãh, 68 – altmyw sigez, 3,579 – ãh meè biw jãz æitmew tugyz, 300,684 – ãh jãz meè alty jãz siksän dårt. · Meè dä ber tãn. Thousand and One Nights. · Bu mewçår wagyjrá tuuyna noqbrá aenda jãz dä alty el tuldy. In November it was 106 years since the birth of this famous poet. · Räsmi æan isäbe buenha, soègy un el ïhendä 1 million da 200 meè kewe îgary belem aluga irewkän. According to the official census, 1,200.000 people have obtained higher education during the last ten years. The cardinal number ‘ten’ is often expressed by distä: · Inde dårt distäne tutyruyna karamastan, åzendä ïlektägehä kãh ïnergiq bãrki. (Galimæan Säjfetdinov, Ukytuhy.) In spite of his having already completed his fortieth year, strength and energy abound in him as before. [333] Cardinals answer the question: Nihä? Kåpme? Nikadär? ‘How many?’ ‘How much?’ Nihä ãj? ‘How many houses?’ Nihä el? ‘How many years?’ Kåpme akha? ‘How much money?’ Nikadär tukyma? ‘How much cloth?’ · Ber atnada æide kãn: dåwämbe, siwämbe, härwämbe, pänæewämbe, æomga, wimbä, qkwämbe. (Sovet mäktäbe.) ‘There are seven days in a week: Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, Sunday.’ · – Bu kitap kåpme tora? – Ul dårt sum egerme biw tien tora. “How much is this book?” “It costs four rubles twenty-five kopecks.” · Ramaj. ... Ike jãz ille potka dårtär tiennän un sum tiewle ide, monda sigez genä sum. (Taæi Gyjzzät, Hatkylar.) Ramai. ... two hundred and fifty poods at four kopecks each should make ten rubles, here are only eight rubles. · Bäxetlelär meègä ber ... (Garif Gobäj /Ôõbðj/, Bez åskändä.) The lucky ones are one in a thousand. · Xäzer aèa egerme tugyz qwá. (Änäs Kamal, Oly Äkbärneè kehe Äsgare.) He is now twenty-nine years old. · Meène sãjlägännän berne ïwläp kårsätå artygrak. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) To carry out one thing is more than talking a thousand.

1) milliard – in the USA ‘billion’.

128

[334] The hours of the day and night are expressed by the cardinals, except the half hours which are expressed by the ordinals: · Sägatá nihä? What time is it? Sägatá ber. It is one o’clock. · Sägatá berdän un minut kihte. It is ten minutes past one. · Sägatá berne sågyp hirek. It is a quarter past one. · Sägatá ikene sågyp egerme minut. It is twenty minutes past two. · Biwkä egerme biw minut kaldy. It is twenty-five minutes to five. · Tugyzny sågarga egerme minut. It is twenty minutes to nine. · Altyga ber hirek kaldy. It is a quarter to six. · Æidegä biw minut kaldy. It is five minutes to seven. · Sägatá biwenhe qrty. It is half past four (lit., half of the fifth hour). · Gabbas. Nigä ãjdä tågel? Sägatá nihä ikänen beläseème? (Aqz Gyjläæev, Bez unike kyz idek.) Ghabbas. “Why are you not at home? Do you know what time it is?” · Tãnge sägatá unber tularga un minut. Tãgäl unberdä min qtyp joklarga tiew. (Tufan Miènullin, Xäsän Vägyjzovih.) It is ten minutes to eleven at night. I must go to sleep exactly at eleven. · Sägatá ãh bulyp kilä. It is nearly three o’clock. · Sägatá ãhkä qkynlawa. It’s getting close to three o’clock. · · Min sine sägatá ãhtä kårähäkmen. “I shall see you at three o’clock.” · – Zinçar ãhen, dårttän unbiw minut uzgah (kihkäh) mièa kil. “Please come to me at a quarter past four.” · – Zinçar ãhen, un belän unber arasynda anda bul. “Please be there between ten and eleven o’clock.” · Avtobus irtänge sägatá tugyz kyryk sigezdä kitä. The bus leaves at 9:48 a.m. · Bezneè bîroda irtänge sägatá tugyzdan kihke sägatá altyga kadär ïwlilär. In our office they work from nine o’clock to six o’clock. · Äti altyny beraz uzgah ãjgä kajtty. Our father came home a little after six. · Ike mãgallimä ber mãgallim näkâ sägagá æide tåluga kilep kerdelär. (Wärif Kamal, Taè atkanda.) The two lady teachers and one male teacher stepped in exactly at the stroke of seven. [335] When indicating the time, the cardinals are placed after sägatá ‘clock’, ‘hour’; when indicating the number of hours, they precede sägatá: sägatá ber ‘one o’clock’; sägatá ike ‘two o’clock’; sägatá ãh ‘three o’clock’; ber sägatá ‘one hour’; ike sägatá ‘two hours’. · Bu ïw tuly ber sägatá vakyt alahak. This work will take a full hour. · Ul monnan alty sägatá ïlek hygyp kitte. He left six hours ago. · Alarnyè kyzy ãh sägatátän kajtahak. Their daughter will return in three hours. · – Sezgä ïwlägän æiregezgä baryp æitå ãhen kåpme vakyt kiräk? – Qkynha ber sägatá, kajvakytlarda ber qrym sägatá. “How much time do you need (is necessary) to get to your place of work?” “About an hour, sometimes an hour and a half.” · · Irtägä ïwne ber sägatá aldan bawlyjbyz. (Garif Gobäj, Bez åskändä.) “Tomorrow we shall start work one hour earlier.” [336] Addition, subtraction, division and multiplication are rendered in Tatar as follows: · 6 ga 2 ne (Altyga ikene) kuwsaè (or: kuwkah) 8 (sigez) bula. (6 + 2 = 8). 6 plus 2 are 8 (lit., If one adds 2 to 6, there will be 8). 17 gä 9 ny (Unæidegä tugyzny) kuwsaè (kuwkah), 26 (egerme alty) bula. (17 + 9 = 26). 17 plus 9 are 26 (lit., If one adds 9 to 17, there will be 26).

129

8 dän 4 ne (Sigezdän dårtne) alsaè, 4 (dårt) kala. (8 – 4 = 4). 8 minus 4 leaves 4 (lit., If one subtracts 4 from 8, there remains 4). 10 nan 5 ne (Unnan biwne) alsaè, 5 (biw) kala. (10 – 5 = 5). 10 minus 5 leaves 5 (lit., If one subtracts 5 from 10, there remains 5). · 16 ny 2 gä (Unaltyny ikegä) bålsäè, 8 (sigez) bula. (16 : 2 = 8). 16 divided by 2 are 8 (lit., If one divides 16 by 2, there will be 8). 20 ne 20 gä (Egermene egermegä) bålsäk, 1 bula. (S. M., #10, 1971, r. 21.) If we divide 20 by 20, there will be 1. Or: 16 da 2 (Unaltyda ike) tapkyr 8 (sigez) bar. 16 divided by 2 are 8 (lit., Going two times in 16 are 8). 20 dä 20 (Egermedä egerme) tapkyr 1 (ber) bar. 20 divided by 20 is 1 (lit., Going 20 times in 20 is 1). · Tugyz tapkyr æide (9 . 7) – altmyw ãh. 9 times 7 are 63. Sigez tapkyr unike (8 . 12) – tuksan alty. 8 times 12 are 96. Or: 9 ny 7 gä (Tugyzny æidegä) tapkyrlasaè, 63 (altmyw ãh) bula. 9 times 7 are 63 (lit., If one multiplies 9 by 7, there will be 63). 8 ne 12 gä (Sigezne unikegä) tapkyrlasaè, 96 (tuksan alty) bula. 8 times 12 are 96 (lit., If one multiplies 8 by 12, there will be 96). ·

[337] Dates are expressed by the cardinals if preceded by names of the months or by the word aj ‘month’. The latter are then in the possessive case and the cardinals take the possessive suffix of the third person singular: · Majnyè 15 ennän 20 senä hakly. From the 15th to the 20th of May. · Bågen ajnyè biwe. Today is the fifth of the month. · Kihä ajnyè undårte ide. Yesterday was the 14th. Note: If followed by the words kãn ‘day’, atna ‘week’, aj ‘month’, el ‘year’, or by names of the months, dates are expressed by the ordinals (see 361).

[338] With the suffix +ly, +le cardinals form: a) Numeral adjectives: æidele itek ‘a number seven boot’, biwle lampa ‘a lamp whose wick consists of five threads’. b) Numeral nouns designating: 1. The names of figures (as for instance in card or numbers games): · Kara kiemle. ... Mindä 17 le ikäå. Mindä – ike biwle, ike unæidele, ike utyz altyly, ike kyryk tugyzly bar. (Galiäsgar Kamal, Bezneè wäçärneè serläre.) The gentleman claid in black. ... I have two (a pair of) seventeens. I have two fives, two seventeens, two thirty-sixes, two forty-nines. 2. School marks: Imtixanny biwlegä birå ‘to pass the exam with a five (i.e., with an “A”)’. Imtixanda ãhle alu ‘to receive a three (i.e., “average”) in the exam’. · ... sigezär bitle inwa qzyp hyktyk. ... imtixannarny tapwyra biregez, didelär. ... Dimäk, bezneè inwalar «ikele» qki «berle» almagan, ... rus telennän biwlegä belåebez belän inwadagy utyzar xatabyzny kuwyp, bezgä ãhle hygardylar. Tatar telennän çäm tatar ädäbiqtynnan imtixan tapwyrganda, bez åzebezne sudagy balyk kebek sizdek. Ãhme-dårtme kãn ïhendä tarixny botarlap attyk imtixany – xäterem qlgywmasa – dårtle buldy wikelle. Bez, älbättä, mony ukytuhynyè kiè kåèelle bulmavynnan kårdek, ... Çäm, çihwiksez, biwle kuqrga tiew ide. (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) ... each of us (i.e., each of the two of us) wrote an eight-page exposition. ... proceed with the exams, they said. ... That means, our expositions had not received a “two” (poor) or a “one” (unsatisfactory), ... combining our “A”-grade (oral) knowledge of the Russian language with the thirty mistakes each of us made in the exposition, they gave us a three (satisfactory). When

130

taking the exam in Tatar language and Tatar literature, we felt like fish in the water. In three or four days we knocked off the history (test). If my memory serves me right, the exam resulted in a four (good). Of course, we attributed this to the teacher’s not being too charitable (magnanimous) ... And there is no question but that he should have put down a five (excellent). [339] With the suffix +lyk, +lek cardinals form nouns designating paper money: biwlek ‘a five-ruble note’, unlyk ‘a ten-ruble note’, illelek ‘a fifty-ruble note’. When the cardinal number is followed by a nominator (the name of the currency unit) the suffix is joined to the latter: · ... akha kaltasynnan biw sumlyk hygaryp Safiullinga suzdym. (Tufan Miènullin, Xäsän Vägyjzovih.) ... I took a five-ruble note from my wallet and gave it to Safiullin. [340] Besides indicating number, some cardinals have a variety of other meanings, or they are used to form a great many idiomatic and colloquial expressions. Such cardinals are: ber ‘one’, dårt ‘four’, biw ‘five’, æide ‘seven’, kyryk ‘forty’, æitmew ‘seventy’, siksän ‘eighty’, tuksan ‘ninety’, tuksan tugyz ‘ninety-nine’. [341] Ber: 1. ber functions as an indefinite article (183, 185-189); 2. ber functions as an indefinite pronoun and serves to form compound indefinite and negative pronouns (439, 440, 443); 3. ber ... ber functions as a disjunctive conjunction (651); 4. ber may correspond to urtak ‘common’, ‘mutual’, for example: ber såzgä kilå ‘to find a common language’; 5. ber may mean ‘equal’, ‘same’ (a matter of indifference): · Bu täräzälär, ixtimal, takta tåwämneè mathalaryn totyp toruhy arkalar belän ber bieklektä bulgandyr. (S.S. Ajdarov, N.D. Aksenova, Bolgar wäçäre.) These windows were most probably on one level (lit., on the same height) with the arches which carried the beams of the wooden ceiling. · Sadyjk. Tuktagyz äle ... Menä mä, Miènulla abzyj ãhen min tålim, alygyz! (Akha birä.) Kaîm. Kiter, kiter ... Mièa bar da ber. (Kärim Ämiri, Taè vakyty.) Sadiq. Wait please ... Here, I’ll pay for Mingnulla, take it! (He gives the money.) Qayum. Give it then, give it then ... For me it’s all the same. ‘Same’ may also be expressed by ber and the particle åk – ber åk: · ... torak jortlarnyè dårtese dä ber åk tãrle tãzelgän. (Bolgar wäçäre.) ... all four dwellings were built the same way. · ... Xäbibullin, ..., kåzlären Iskändärevtän almyjha çaman ber åk såzlärne kabatlyj ... (Ämirxan Eniki, Koqwly irtä.) Without taking his eyes off Iskändärev, Khäbibullin, ..., constantly repeats the same words: ... Note: ber åk must not be confused with the modal word beråk (written solid) ‘please’, denoting a strong desire, request, plea, with the connotation of warning, or anxiety, worry: ·

Päri: – Tawlyj kårmä beråk, babaj ahulanyr, – dip kyzulanyp taqkny alyp kerep kitte. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Çãnärle ålmäs.) Getting exited, the demon said: “Don’t throw it, please, Grandfather will be angry”, and, seizing the cane, hurriedly went inside.

131

6. ber may mean ‘unique’, ‘unequalled’: · ... Waçi kartnyè alma kebek kyzy bar, ïwkä disäè avylda ber. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Tabigatá balalary.) ... the old man Shahi has a pretty daughter (lit., a daughter like an apple), who, when it comes to work, has no equal in the village. 7. ber preceding a verb means ber tapkyr, ber märtäbä ‘once’: · Xälim avyldawlaryna, tanywlaryna tagyn ber kaerylyp karady, kåèele tulsa da elmaerga tyrywyp ... Mihkä artynnan kitep bardy. (Ibraçim Gazi, Onytylmas ellar.) Khälim turned once again to look at his fellow villagers, his acquaintances and, though moved to tears, he tried to smile ... and followed Michkä. · Gabbaslar xäzer ike elga ber genä avylga kajtalar, ... (Aqz Gyjläæev, Ätäh mengän hitengä.) Now the Ghabbases return to the village only once in two years, ... 8. ber may mean ‘some time’, ‘some day’, ‘one day’: · Inwalla, Täbrik tä ber kiler äle avylyna. (Äxsän Baqnov, Tau qgy poveste.) God willing, Täbrik too will some day come to his village. · – Kitärgä buldyèmyni? – Kitäsem kilmäsä dä, kitärgä ber kiräk bit. (Kärim Tinhurin, Märæännär.) “You are going to leave, aren’t you? (You have decided to leave, haven’t you?)” “Although I do not wish to leave, one day I will have to leave after all.” [342] Dårt: dårt kullap alu ‘to receive with open arms’; dårt san da sau ‘safe and sound’. · Kåzläre dårt buldy. He was greatly (extremely) surprised. · Dårt kåz belän kãtelgän kãn æitte. (Kärim Tinhurin, Jãz meè.) The eagerly awaited day arrived. · Mulla ike kåzen dårt itep åz tågärägendä utyra birgän. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Abaga hähäge.) Absolutely amazed, the mulla continued to sit in his own circle. [343] Biw: Biwe belän kajtaru ‘to repay someone many times’, ber alga, biw artka karau, to be cautious’, ‘to keep one’s eyes open’. · Bergä biwne kuwyp sãjläåhelär dãnáqda az tågel. (Gãlsem Mãxämmädova, Qwálek kãnnäre.) There are many (lit., not a few) in the world who exaggerate (make a mountain out of a molehill). [344] Æide: · Æide tãn urtasynda ‘at the dead of night’, æide îl haty ‘cross-roads (crossing of many roads)’; æide qt arasynda ‘among strangers’; · æide babasyn tanytu, or: æide babasyna æitå ‘to scold severely’, ‘to give somebody a dressing-down’. · Sãjmäsä, anyè belän avylny tawlap æide qt æirlärgä hygyp kitär ideme? (Aqz Gyjläæev, Ãh arwin æir.) If she did not love him, would she have left the village and gone with him to completely strange places? [345] Kyryk: Kyryk kat sãjläå ‘to say it many times’, ‘to say it over and over’; kyryk dalanyè kyryena ‘to a faraway place’, ‘far from any inhabited place’ (lit., to the edge of forty steppes); kyryk aldar ‘a person who deceives much’; kyrykka qrylu ‘having much work’; kyryktan artyk kyègyr qk’very many deficiencies, shortcomings’ (kyègyr qk ‘deficiency’, ‘shortcoming’); kyrykmasa kyryk ‘very many times’, ‘countless’, ‘innumerable’; åz kyrygy kyryk ‘stubborn’. 132

[346] Æitmew: · Eget kewegä æitmew tãrle çãnär dä az. (Proverb.) For a young man even seventy trades are few (i.e., a young man must go on learning). [347] Siksän: · Märviqgä tanyw tågel ide bu kewe. Aèa æavap kajtaruny kiräksenmihä, kyz stanoknyè1) ikenhe qgyna hykty. Tege keweneè dä åz siksäne siksän, kyzdan ber adym da kalmady. (Koqw Timbikova, Agym urtasynda.) Märwiä did not know this man (lit., This man was not known to Märwiä). Not deeming it necessary to give him an answer, the girl stepped to the other side of the lathe. But the man was extremely stubborn; he did not fall even one step behind the girl. [348] Tuksan: Åz tuksanyn kabatlau ‘to insist on one’s own word’, ‘to refuse to accept other opinions’; åz tuksany tuksan ‘to be stubborn’. · Kollegalarynyè mondyj gadättän tyw taläptän hiksez gaæäplänålärenä /ôðçðplðnylðrenð/ karamastan, ul fäkatá åz tuksanyn gyna kabatlady. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) Despite his colleagues’ immense astonishment at such an extraordinary demand (i.e., the demand that an employee be discharged from work without cause, just because he disliked her), he stubbornly maintained his position (i.e., he refused to listen to other opinions). · ... äjlänep kajtmady. ... Berazdan ul Bakudan åz qnyna däwep xat qzdy ... Anasynyè åz tuksany tuksan bulyp hykty. Barmady. (Gomär Bäwirov, Æidegän hiwmä.) ... he did not return. ... A little later he wrote a letter from Baku, inviting them (i.e., inviting his family) ... His (the son’s) mother turned out to be stubborn. She did not go. [349] Tuksan tugyz ‘very many’, ‘immense’; tuksan tugyzly ‘silly’, ‘foolish’, ‘he who has a screw loose somewhere’. [350] Like other languages, Tatar too uses noun classifiers between the number and certain names of persons, animals or objects to be counted. The principal noun classifiers are: · Baw ‘head’, ‘loaf’: Kewe bawyna qrtywar kadak wikär ‘half a pound of sugar per person’; jãz baw saryk ‘one hundred head of sheep’; ber baw wikär ‘one sugarloaf’. · Danä ‘piece’, ‘cake’, ‘bar’: Un danä alma ‘ten apples’; ike danä sabyn ‘two bars (or cakes) of soap’; ber meè danä kirpeh ‘one thousand bricks’. · Nãsxä ‘copy’: Biw nãsxä gazeta ‘five copies of a newspaper’. · Olau ‘cart’: Ber olau pehän ‘one load of hay’; ãh olau utyn ‘three loads of firewood’. · Par ‘pair’; Ber par itek ‘one pair of boots’; ike par biqläj ‘two pairs of gloves’. · Synyk ‘chunk’, ‘piece’: Ber synyk ikmäk ‘a chunk (piece) of bread’. · Wakmak ‘lump’, ‘cube’: Ãh wakmak wikär ‘three lumps of sugar’. · Telem ‘slice’: Ber telem ikmäk ‘one slice of bread’. · Tãp ‘root’: Egerme æide tãp hiq ‘twenty-seven cherry trees’. · Tãrkem ‘group’: Ber tãrkem xalyk ‘a group of people’. · Qwálek ‘year-old’, ‘age’: Alty qwálek bala ‘a six-year-old child’. · ... ber kartnyè unbiw qwálek malae bula. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Çãnärle îgalmas ... an old man had a fifteen-year-old boy. 1)

stanok, R. – ïskänæä

133

Fractional Numbers [351] In Tatar fractions the denominator precedes the numerator. In the basic form of the fraction the numerator is in the nominative, the denominator in the ablative case. For example: 1/3 ãhtän ber, 5/6 altydan biw, 7/10 unnan æide, 33/100 jãzdän utyz ãh. A whole number preceding a fraction is expressed by the respective cardinal and the word bãten ‘whole’: 5 3/4 biw bãten dårttän ãh, 8 1/10 sigez bãten unnan ber, 7 7/16 æide bãten unaltydan æide. [352] In a decimal fraction the denominator is expressed by a comma, which stands for ‘10’. The comma is placed before the numerator; the whole number or a zero, respectively, precedes the comma. Tatar decimal fractions are read the same way as common fractions, or they can be read literally: 0,3 – unnan ãh, or: nolá ãter ãh, 6,1 – alty bãten unnan ber, or: alty ãter ber; 10,9 – un bãten unnan tugyz, or: un ãter tugyz. [353] Like the cardinals, fractional numbers of the above kinds (for qrty and qrym ‘half’, see below) may be attributive adjectives or nouns. As attributive adjectives they remain unchanged and are followed by a noun denoting a quantity, measure, degree or weight. When functioning as nouns, suffixes are joined to the numerator; the denominator remains in the ablative case. Examples of common and decimal fractions used attributively: · 2 3/4 (ike bãten dårttän ãh) hynaqk su. 2 3/4 cups of water. · Elganyè tiränlege monda ãh bãten dårttän ber metr. The depth of the river here is three and a quarter meters. · Bakhanyè mäjdany ike bãten ãhtän ber gektar. The park’s area covers two and one third hectares. · Avylga ãh bãten dårttän ãh kilometr. It is three and three quarters kilometers to the village. · Min bu kewedän kårgän kader-xãrmätneè jãzdän ber ãlewen dä kajtara alu ixtimalym îk ... (Mãxämmät Gali, Serle kaber.) I do not have the possibility ... of repaying even one hundredth of the respect and esteem I have received from this man. · Xalyk saklyk kassalaryna qrty elda 5,3 (biw bãten unnan ãh) milliard sum akha saldy. (C.M.  # 9, 1976, p. 10.) In half a year people deposited 5.3 billion rubles in savings banks. · 1980 elda 2,1 – 2,2 mln. (ike bãten unnan ber – ike bãten unnan ike million) avtomobilá, wul isäptän 800-825 meè jãk avtomobile ïwläp hygaru ... kåzdä totyla. (ibid. # 8, 1976, p. 38.) It is envisaged that in 1980 2.1 – 2.2 million automobiles, 800-825 thousand of them trucks, ... will be produced. Note: The decimal fractions and the numbers 800-825 meè in the above example can be read as shown, with the hyphen indicating a short pause, or by expressing ‘from ... to’: 800 meènän alyp 825 meègä kadär ...

Ïlektr stanciqläreneè egärlege 1,6 (ber bãten unnan alty) märtäbä artty. (ibid. # 7, 1976, p. 35.) The energy of the power plants increased 1.6 times. · Alar tãrle zurlykta: diametrlary 1,5 m dan (ber qrym metrdan) alyp 2,6 m ga (ike bãten unnan alty metrga) kadär. (S.S. Ajdarov, N.D. Aksenova, Bolgar wäçäre.) They (i.e., the ovens) are of different sizes. Their diameters range from 1.5 to 2.6 meters. · Æäen balygyn sãttä pewerå. 1 kewegä 150-200 g (jãz illedän ike jãz grammga kadär) balyk, 1 danä jomyrka, 0,2-0,3 l (unnan ikedän unnan ãh litrga kadär)

·

134

sãt alyna. (Î.Ä. Äxmätæanov, Tabigatá xäzinäsennän awlar.) Cooking sheatfish in milk. For one person take from 150 to 200 grams of fish, one egg, 0.2 or 0.3 liter of milk. Examples of fractions used as nouns: · Tugyzdan ikegä tugyzdan biwne kuwsaè, tugyzdan æide bula. 2/9 plus 5/9 is 7/9. · Anyè såzläreneè unnan berse dä dãres bulmyj torgan ide. (Mirxäjdär Fäjzi, Galiqbanu.) Usually not even one tenth of what he said was true. · Byel, mäsälän, avyl urta mäktäplären tämamlauhylarnyè 1/3 e (ãhtän bere) avyl xuæalygynda ïwlärgä teläk belderde. (S. M., # 11, 1977, r. 7.) This year, for example, one third of the students finishing rural middle schools expressed the wish to work in agriculture. · Alardagy su resursy qkynha 104 meè kub kilometr isäplänä. Wunyè dårttän ãhe hamasy, qgâni 77 meè kub kilometry dãnáqdagy berdänber zur kål-diègez Kaspijda tuplangan. (ibid. # 7, 1977, p. 63.) The water resource which they (i.e., the lakes) contain are calculated to amount to approximately 104.000 cubic kilometers. About three quarters, or 77.000 cubic kilometers, are concentrated in the Caspian Sea, which is the world’s only large lake-sea. · ... æäjlären fabrikada ïwlärgä teläåhe wäkertlärneè unnan bere genä sajlanyp alyna. (Kärim Tinhuryn, Ãhenhe märæän.) ... of the students who wish to work in the factory in summer only one tenth are selected. [354] ‘Half’ is expressed by qrty or qrym. Qrty is used independently, qrym in compund numerals. For example: Qrty aj ‘half a month’, qrty sägatá ‘half an hour’, qrty kadak maj ‘half a pound of butter’, xalyknyè qrtysy ‘half of the people’, atnanyè berenhe qrtysy ‘the first half of the week’; ber qrym ‘1 ½’, ike qrym ‘2 ½’, ãh qrym ‘3 ½’, ike qrym metr or ike metr qrym ‘2 ½ meters’, biw qrym litr or biw litr qrym. When expressing 1 ½, the ‘one’ may be omitted; qrym then follows the word of measure: ber qrym sägatá or sägatá qrym ‘1 ½ hours’, ber qrym metr or metr qrym ‘1 ½ meters’. [355] ‘Quarter’ is hirek: ber hirek ‘one quarter’, qrty hirek ‘one eighth’, ãh hirek ‘three quarters’, bu hirek gasyrda ‘in this quarter century’, hirek sägatá ‘one quarter of an hour’. Note: In the vernacular ‘one eighth’ is also expressed by the word ähmuxa.

[356] Like all other fractional numbers, qrty, qrym, and hirek may be attributive adjectives or nouns: berenhe qrty el ‘the first half-year’; ikenhe qrty el ‘the second halfyear’. · Unike tularga qrty sägatá kaldy. (Ämirxan Eniki, Räwä.) It was half past eleven (lit., Half an hour remained till twelve). · Maçitap ikenhe tãrkem qnyna bara: – Bågen ber qrty sägatákä genä artygrak ïwlägez inde, – di. (100 el alga karap, Azat xatyn, # 9, 1976.) Mahitap walks over to the second group: “Work just one half hour more today, please”, she says. · Ukuhylarnyè qrtysyn avyl mäktäplärendä belem aluhylar täwkil itä. (Kyzyl taè, 18 iîlá 1973 el.) Those getting their education in rural schools make up half of (all) students. · Uèga «90» sany qzylgan bagana kårenä. Dimäk, tuksan kilometr ara uzylgan. Bu – bågenge îlnyè qrtysy diqrlek. (Mägâsåm Gäräev, Æièelmäs kapitan, Kazan utlary, # 5, 1977, r. 95.) To the right there appears a pole with the number “90” written upon it. That means, they have covered a distance of ninety kilometers. This is almost half of today’s route. 135

·

· ·

·

·

·

XIX jãzneè berenhe qrtysynda bawlangan ädäbi kulâqzmalarny bastyru ïwe XIX jãzneè ikenhe qrtysynda da qzuhylarybyznyè igâtibar åzägendä tora ... (XIX jãzdä Tatar ädäbiqty, r. 120.) The printing of literary manuscripts, which began in the first half of the 19th century, was the center of attention of our writers also in the second half of the 19th century, ... ... bez segatenä egerme ike qrym mil tizlek belän bardyk. ... we traveled at a speed of 22 ½ miles per hour. Soègy ike el qrym ïhendä respublikabyznyè däålät säådäsendä 115 qèa zur magazin berenhe kãnnärdän åk åzxezmätländerå tärtibendä ïwli bawlady. (Kyzyl taè, 22 iîná, 1973 el.) In the last two and a half years, in our republic’s state commerce, 115 new large stores began to work under the self-service system right from the first day on. Dårt qktan urmannar belän äjländerep alyngan ywyk basunyè ber bawynnan ikenhe bawynaha metr qrym hamasy kièlektäge tåtällär suzylgan. (100 el alga karap, Azat xatyn, # 9, 1976, r. 6.) Beds with a width of approximately a meter and a half stretched from one end to the other of a protected field surrounded by woods on (all) four sides. Zãfär isä bawta 300 meè birde, annary akrynlap 350 meègä mende, ä xuæalar dårt qrymnan ber karyw ta tãwmäs buldylar. (Ämirxan Eniki, Räwä.) Zöfär offered first 300,000, then raised it gradually to 350,000. But the owners (of the house) intended not to go one penny (lit., inch) lower than four and a half (i.e., 400,500). ... atna-un kãn ïhendä unbiw million åsentene kazyp alasy, wunyè ãh million qrymyn Kazan tiräsendä utyrtasy ... bar. (100 el alga karap, Azat xatyn, # 9, 1976, r. 6.) ... in a week or ten days they must dig out fifteen million seedlings (i.e., pine-tree seedlings). Three and a half million of them must be planted around Kazan, ...

Note 1: Prefixed to or preceding a noun or adjective, qrym may form compound nouns and adjectives (in English in most cases formed with the prefix “semi-”): qrymtågäräk ‘semicircle’, qrymfinal ‘semifinal’, qrymutrau ‘peninsula’, qrymwar ‘hemisphere’, qrymhål ‘semidesert’, qrym suzyk ‘semivowel’, qrym nadan ‘semiliterate’, qrym räsmi ‘semiofficial’, qrym kåhmä ‘seminomadic’, qrym efäk ‘fifty percent silk’, qrym aèsyz ‘semiconscious’, qrym ah ‘half-starved’, qrym karaègy ‘halfdark’, qrym uqu ‘half-awake’. Note 2: Some years back such compounds as qrymutrau, qrymwar and qrymtågäräk were written in two words: qrym utrau, qrym war, qrym tågäräk.

Furthermore, qrym can function as an adverbial modifier: · Xämidä irken sulap kujdy çäm Zinnurga qrym pywyldap sãjli birde: ... (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) Khämidä heaved a sigh of relief and, half whispering, continued to say to Zinnur: ... · Ul ... qrym waqrtyp kåz kysty. (ibid.) ... he winked half jokingly. · XIX jãzneè soègy hiregendä tatar ädäbiqty waktyj tarmaklanyp åsä bawlyj. (XIX jãzdä Tatar ädäbiqty, r. 117.) In the last quarter of the 19th century Tatar literature begins to branch out and develop considerably. [357] ‘Percent’ is expressed either by jãzdän followed by the numerator, or by the word procent: jãzdän ber ‘one percent’, jãzdän un ‘ten percent’, jãzdän jãz ‘one hundred percent’; ber procent ‘one percent’, un procent ‘ten percent’, jãz procent ‘one hundred percent’. · 1977 elda sigezáellyk mäktäp tämamlauhylarnyè 92,2 (tuksan ike bãten unnan ike) procenty urta belem biråhe uku jortlarynda ukyj. (C.M., # 11, 1977, p. 5.) In the year 1977, 92.2 percent of the graduates from the eight-year school study in establishments of secondary education.

136

·

Abiturientlarnyè 90 procenttan artygragy Tatarstan rajonnarynnan çäm wäçärlärennän kilgän ide. (ibid. # 1, 1977, p. 6.) More than 90 percent of the high school graduates had come from districts and towns of Tatarstan. (Abiturient – urta mäktäpne tämamlagan ukuhy.)

[358] ‘Per thousand’ is expressed by meènän followed by the numerator: meènän ber ‘1 per thousand’, meènän biw ‘5 per thousand’.

Multiplicative Numbers [359] Multiplicative numbers answer the question ‘How many times? ‘. They are formed: 1. By combining cardinals, fractional numbers, ordinals, distributive numbers and indefinite numeral adjectives, as well as approximative numbers expressed by cardinals, with tapkyr, märtäbä, kat, kabat, rät: ber tapkyr (märtäbä, kat, kabat, rät) ‘once’, ãh tapkyr (märtäbä, kat, etc.) ‘three times’, dårt qrym tapkyr ‘four and a half times’, biwenhe märtäbä ‘the fifth time’, berenhe kat ‘the first time’, dårtär tapkyr (märtäbä, etc.) ‘four times each’, kåp tapkyr ‘many times’, bernihä kabat ‘several times’, ãh-dårt rät ‘three to four times’. · Xäjrulla abzyjnyè ... mondyj såzlärne kåp tapkyr, bälki, jãz tapkyr iwetkäne bardyr, ... (Afzal Wamov, Ata kåèele.) Uncle Kheyrulla has ... heard such words many times, perhaps a hundred times, ... · – ... ber märtäbä minem dä sezne åz kunagym itep kåräsem kilä. (Fatix Xãsni, Altyn ïzläåhelär.) “... I too wish to see you once as my own guest.” · Bu kånegå 10-16 tapkyr kabatlana. (Azat xatyn.) This exercise is repeated 10-16 times (from 10 to 16 times). · Æide kat ålhä, ber kat kis. (Proverb.) Measure seven times, cut once. · Äxmädiev wuwy såzlärne gomumi æyelywta tagyn ber kabat sãjläde. (Wärif Kamal, Taè atkanda.) Äkhmädiev spoke these words once again at the general meeting. · Moxtar any (wigyráne) ber-ike kabat ukyp qratkan ide. (ibid.) Mokhtar had read it (the poem) once or twice and loved it. · Baj äjtä: – Tulaem aldym min, di, ãh rät äjtterdem min annan, – di. Kazyj babajga äjtä: – Tulaem satam dip, ãh mertäbä äjtteèmeni? – di. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Tapkyr kyz.) The rich man says: “I bought it as a whole – I made him say it three times.” The cadi says to the old man: “You did say three times over that you are selling it as a whole (thing), didn’t you?” (lit., saying I am selling it as a whole). Note: di, a form of the verb diî ‘to say’, is frequently used in folktales as a stylistic particle. (For di see also 691, a-c, and Note).

2. By a cardinal and itep, the verbal adverb of itå ‘to do, make’: · Berkãnne ul: – Kem dä kem il imamyna närsä dä bulsa sädaka itep birsä, xodaj aèa un itep kajtaryr, – digän. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Mulla belän muæik.) One day he (the mulla) said: “Whoever gives the village imam anything whatsoever as an offering, the Lord will return it to him tenfold.” Note: The basic meaning of il is ‘country’, ‘state’. However, in dialect it may mean ‘village’.

3. By joining the suffix +lata, +lätä to cardinals: ikelätä ‘twice’, ‘double’, ‘twofold’, altylata ‘six times’, ‘sixfold’, meèlätä kajtaru ‘to return a thousendfold’.

137

Æilneè kãhe ikelätä artty. (Tat.-rus. såzlek.) The wind’s strength doubled. – 1977 elnyè karwylau bezgä ãhlätä bäjräm, – dilär. (Azat xatyn, # 3, 1977, r. 4.) They say that celebrating the 1977 New Year will be for us a triple celebration. · Onytylyp ul dala qgyna karap tordy-tordy da telär-telemäs kenä ãenä boryldy. Båtän vakytta dårt-biw minut hamasy jãri torgan arany ul xäzär ikelätäãhlätä ozagrak kajtty. (Nurixan Fättax, Bala kåèele dalada.) Lost in thought, she stood for a while, looking in the direction of the steppe, and only reluctantly turned around towards home. It took her two or three times as long to walk the distance home, which at other times she had walked in about four or five minutes. 4. By adding the suffix +laj, +läj to ordinals: · Ul ... kehkenä batist kulâqulygyn hygaryp, qraga kaplagan qfraklar ãstennän bäjläp kujdy. ... · Q, buldy, · dide Miläåwä. · Ikenheläj ällä kajda, ärämä aralarynda îgalyp jãrise bulma! (Mirsäj Ämir, Qlantau keweläre.) She ... pulled out her little batiste handkerchief and tied it over the leaves which covered the wound ... “Well, that’s it”, Miläwshä said. “Next time don’t disappear somewhere among the bushes.” · ·

Note: Ordinals with the suffix +laj, +läj are also used as parenthetical words (366).

Ordinal Numbers [360] Ordinals denote position in a series. They are formed from cardinals by means of the suffix +nhy, +nhe after a final vowel, +ynhy, +enhe after a final consonant: · Berenhe ‘first’, ikenhe ‘second’, ãhenhe ‘third’, altynhy ‘sixth’, unsigezenhe ‘eighteenth’, untugyzynhy ‘nineteenth’, biw jãzenhe ‘five hundredth’, æitmew æidenhe ‘seventy-seventh’, kyryk altynhy ‘forty-sixth’. · ... Josyf mièa berenhe tapkyr xuw dimäde, ikenhe kãn berenhe tapkyr ïwkä qlgyzy kitte. (Garif Gobäj, Bez åskändä.) ... for the first time Joseph did not say goodbye to me; the next day for the first time he went to work alone. · ... ul kåp tulaj toraklarda ïwläde. Bersendä zwne æajga salgah, any ikenhesenä, ... kåherälär ide. Anysyn rätkä kertkäh, ãhenhesenä, annary dårtenhesenä ... (Mädinä Malikova, Hähäklärgä baj tormyw.) ... she had worked in many hostels. When she had got things going in one, ... they transferred her to another (lit., to a second) one. After she put that one in (good) order, to a third, then to a fourth ... [361] Dates are expressed by ordinals if the number is followed by the words kãn ‘day’, atna ‘week’, aj ‘month’, el ‘year’, or by names of the months: · Bågen ajnyè nihenhe kãne? What day of the month is today? · Bågen ajnyè biwenhe kãne. Today is the fifth of the month. · Kazan, unsigezenhe avgust, meè tugyz jãz altmyw sigez. Kazan, August 18, 1968. · Ber meè tugyz jãz utyzynhy elda. In the year 1930. · Ber meè tugyz jãz egerme biwenhe eldan ber meè tugyz jãz kyrygynhy elga hakly (1925-1940). From 1925 to 1940. · Ber meè tugyz jãz unsigezenhe elnyè axyrynda. At the end of the year 1918. If ordinals are expressed by numerals, +nhy, +nhe is placed after them: 1 nhe, 2 nhe, 6 nhy, 10 nhy. In writing, the suffix is often omitted, but must be pronounced whereever usage requires the ordinals. Compare these examples: · Gabdulla Tukaj 1886 nhy elnyè 27 nhe aprelendä xäzerge Tatarstan respublikasy Arha rajony, Kuwlavyh avylynda mulla gailäsendä dãnáqga kilä. (Gabdulla 138

·

·

· ·

Tukaj, Fotoalábom.) Ghabdulla Tuqai was born (lit., comes into the world) into the family of a mulla on April 27, 1886, in the village of Qushlawych, district of Arsk, in the present Republic of Tatarstan. ... Mäæit Gafurinyè ... «1906 nhy eldan 1907 nhe elga vasyqtá», «1906 nhy elga 1907 nhe elnyè æavaby» ... wigyráläre aeruha kårenekle uryn totalar. (Äxät Nigâmätullin, Qlkynly tribun qzuhy.) ... Mäjit Ghafuri’s poems ... “The Legacy of (lit., from) the Year 1906 to the Year 1907”, “The Answer of the Year 1907 to the Year 1906”, ... hold an especially distinguished place. 1950 elnyè 23 qnvarenda, dåwämbe kãnne, sägatá kihke unberlär tiräsendä tulaj toraktagy bez torgan bålmägä mine sorap ãh kewe kilep kerde. (Gurij Tavlin, Afät.) On Monday, January 23, 1950, around eleven o’clock at night, three men came into the hostel room in which we lived and asked for me. 16 oktqbrá, 1921 el. (Fatix Ämirxan, Kãndälek däftärennän.) October 16, 1921. 1918 elnyè urtasy ide. (Ismägyjlá Rämiev, Qktawym.) It was the middle of the year 1918.

[362] After Roman numerals +nhy, +nhe is always omitted in writing: XIX (untugyzynhy) jãz tatar ädäbiqty. (Boryngy tatar ädäbiqty.) Tatar Literature of the 19th Century. · XV (unbiwenhe) jãzneè ikenhe çäm XVI (unaltynhy) jãzneè berenhe qrtysynda ädäbiqt. (ibid.) Literature of the second half of the 15th and the first half of the 16th centuries. [363] For some usages of the cardinals compare also the following examples: · Sigezenhe tramvajga sikerep menåem buldy, ... konduktornyè ... avazy iwetelde: ... (Äxät Fazylæanov, Kãtelmägän ohrawu.) No sooner had I jumped on the number eight streetcar ... when the ... voice of the conductor sounded out (lit. was heard): ... · Tapwyrularny Kazan wäçäre çäm anyè tiräsendäge rajon, avyl mäktäpläre – 3 nhe kanal, ... histajlylar 9 nhy kanal buenha karyj alalar. (S.M., Därestä televidenie.) Kazan city schools and district and village schools (which are) around it can view the programs (lit., transmissions) on channel 3, ... those in Chistopol on channel 9. · 2 nhe räsemne karagyz. (ibid.) See drawing number 2. · Däreslekneè 98-99 nhy bitlärendäge räsemnärne karagyz. (ibid.) See the drawings on pages 98 and 99 of the textbook. · II t., 276 bit (ikenhe tom, ike jãz æitmew altynhy bit.) (ibid.) Volume 2, page 276. · Wunda uk, 123 bit. (ibid.) Ibid., page 123. · 10 nhy § or: § 10 (paragraf un) § 10. · III bålem (ãhenhe bålem) or: Bålem III (Bålem ãh.) Section 3. · Sägadät ... æidenhe klasslar urnawkan 4 nhe kattagy 85 nhe bålmäneè iwegen baryp ahkanda inde däres bawlangan ide. (Mãxämmät Gali. Ber mäxäbbät.) When Säghädät reached and opened the door of room 85 on the 4th floor, where the seventh grade classrooms were located, lessons had already begun. (Klass · also: syjnyf.) · «Kazan utlary» æurnalynyè 1967 (meè tugyz jãz altmyw æidenhe) elgy 1 nhe sany, 102-104 nhe bitlär. (S.M.) The journal “Kazan utlary” of 1967, number 1, pages 102-104. (In Tatar, the hyphen between the two numbers denotes a short pause in speech.) 139

[364] The suffix +nhy, +nhe is only attached to numerals and to the word urta ‘center’, ‘middle’ = urtanhy ‘middle’: · Boryn zamanda bulgan ikän, di, ber kart. Anyè bulgan, di, ãh uly ... kart iè ïlek åzeneè oly ulyn hakyryp alyp äjtkän: ... Wunnan soè urtanhy ulyn hakyryp algan: ... (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Vasyqtá.) In olden times there was, they say, an old man. He had three sons, they say, ... first, the old man called his oldest son and said: ... After that he called his next-oldest son: ... · Ãh balanyè urtanhysy kyz buldy. (Afzal Wamov, Ata kåèele.) The next-oldest of the three children was a girl. [365] The suffix +nhy, +nhe, etc., expanded by +l and joined to cardinals, indicates position in order of importance: berenhel ‘primary’, ikenhel ‘secondary’. · Materializmnyè tãp princiby – materiqne berenhel, aèny ikenhel dip tanu. (S.M.) The basic principle of materialism is the recognition of matter as primary, consciousness as secondary. · ... avtor çärvakyt tãp temadan hitkä kitep, ikenhel däräæädäge mäsáälälär belän mavyga. (Midxät Abdullin, Tatar tarixy turynda kitap.) ... the author constantly digresses from the main theme and is carried away by matters of secondary significance. [366] Ordinal numbers in the ablative case or expanded with the suffix +laj, +läj may be used as parenthetical words expressing enumeration. (See also 778 h.) · – Ä monda berenhe bulyp sez kalahaksyzmy ...? dip sorady Îldawev. ... – Xäzergä äjtåe kyen. Berenhedän, ul äle kitmägän, ikenhedän, kemne sajlyjlar bit. Ä åzemä kilgändä, minem ãhen baryber. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) “And you will remain here as the top (highest) official ...?” Yuldashev asked ... “For the present that is difficult to say. In the first place, he (i.e., the First Secretary) hasn’t gone yet, and in the second place, who are they going to choose next? But as far as I am concerned, it’s all the same.” · Îldawev kurka. Berenhedän, ul çertãrle qèalyktan kurka. ... Ikenhedän, irtäme, soèmy, ul åzeneè æitäkhelek arbasynnan tãwep kalyrga tiewlegen dä bik qxwy hamalyj. (ibid.) Yuldashev is afraid. Firstly, he is afraid of any kind of innovation. ... Secondly, he assumes quite rightly that, sooner or later, he must fall from his position as the manager (lit., from the leadership wagon). · Äåväl bawlap ni bette? Aj bette dä kãn bette. Ikenheläj ni bette? Kåk bette dä æir bette. Ãhenheläj ni bette? Ut bette dä su bette. Dårtenheläj ni bette? Tau bette dä taw bette. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) What came about (was created) first? The moon came about and the sun came about. Secondly (In the second place) what came about (was created)? Heaven and earth came about. Thirdly (In the third place) what came about (was created)? Fire came about and water came about. Fourthly (In the fourth place) what came about (was created)? Mountains came about and rocks came about. Note: In the above proverbs, which have their origin in religion, the intransitive verb betå ‘to end’, ‘to come to an end’ is used in the sense of ‘to come about’, ‘to be created’.

140

·

Rãstäm (elyj-elyj takmaklyj). ... Halbar balagy hänehkele timer hybykka ïlägep kaldy. ... Äräm buldy halbarkaem, äräm buldy! Älfiq. Æitte inde sièa, æitte, wawynma! Ikenheläj menä sabak bulyr. (Gamir Nasryj, Kaderle minutlar.) Röstäm (crying, laments). My trouser leg got caught in the barbed (iron) wire. ... My precious (cherished) trousers are ruined, ruined! Älfiä. That’s enough now, enough, don’t carry on! And (secondly), let this be a lesson to you.

Approximative Numbers [367] Approximative numbers designate the approximate quantity of persons and things. They are formed: 1. By adding the suffix +lap, +läp to cardinal numbers: biwläp ‘about five’, æideläp ‘about seven’, egermeläp ‘about twenty’, jãz egerme biwläp ‘about 125’, ike meè biw jãzläp ‘about 2,500’. Note: +lap, +läp is not used with ber ‘one’ and ike ‘two’.

Särkatip /Sðrkatip/. Bågen karalyrga tiewle bulgan ïwneè ohy-kyrye îk. Åtyzlap gariza /ôariza/ bar. (Galiäsgar Kamal, Bezneè wäçärneè serläre.) The Secretary. Today there is no end to the business which has to be dealt with. There are about thirty petitions. · ... xezmäten qzar ãhen, galim XVII-XIX gasyrlarga karagan1) 200 läp tarixi kulâqzmany ãjränep hykkan. (Räfyjk Näfikov, Tarixybyznyè mãçim mäsáäläläre.) To write his ... work, the scholar studied about 200 historical manuscripts pertaining to the (period from the) 17th to the 19th centuries. · Bezneè Kildebäktän genä dä egermeläp kewe kuzgaldy. (Wäjxi Mannur, Hyn sãî barmy.) About twenty men marched off from our (village of) Kildebäk alone. · ... Wamil distäläp æyr qzgan. (Kamal Kärimov, Ber arbada.) ... Shamil has written about ten songs. ·

·

· · ·

·

If an approximative number modifies a noun designating time, measure, dimension, volume, or weight, +lap, +läp is usually joined to the latter: Anyè (Idris Tuktarnyè) berenhe äsärläre qrty gasyrlap ïlek ... basylyp hyga. (Îbilqrlarny kotlyjbyz! Kazan åglari 9, 1966.) His (Idris Tuqtar’s) first works appeared ... about half a century ago. Aerylywularyna un kãnläp vakyt åtkän ide ... (Taçir Taçirov, Galiq.) About ten days had passed since they had parted. Bu vakyjgaga xäzer dårt ellap vakyt uzdy. (Gadel Kutuj, Tapwyrylmagan xatlar.) Approximately four years have now passed since this event. Mawina egerme, utyz metrlap artka hikte dä tuktap kaldy. (Färit Gyjlámi, Zäjtånäkäj, akharlagym.) The car backed up about twenty or thirty meters and stopped (there). – ... Wul jortka ike jãz atlamlap kalgah, sineè karwyèa bik matur ike kyz hygar, ... (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Auhy malae.) “... About two hundred paces from that house two very pretty girls will meet you, ...”

1) unæidenhedän untugyzynhy gasyrlarga karagan ...

141

2. By joining the suffix +lagan, +lägän to the cardinals un ‘ten’, jãz ‘hundred’, meè ‘thousand’, un meè ‘ten thousand’, jãz meè ‘hundred thousand’, million ‘million’, to distä ‘ten’, and to the distributive numbers jãzär ‘hundred each’, meèär ‘thousand each’. A noun modified by the approximative numeral in +lagan, +lägän may stand in the singular or plural: · Idelneè bue dårt meè hakrymnan bik az gyna kim. Balalaryn baguhy ana kebek, meèlägän avyl, jãzlägän kalalarga ... sulyw birgän. (Garif Axunov, Marselá Zaripov, I kaderle tugan qk.) The length of the Volga is only very little less than 4000 versts. Like a mother caring for her children, it has given life (lit., breath) to thousands of villages, hundreds of cities ... · Tirä-qktan jãzärlägän kewe æyelgan. (Taçir Taçirov, Galiq.) Hundreds of people have gathered from all around. · Monda jãzärlägän olau-bazarhylar æyelgan. (ibid.) Here were gathered hundreds of carters and market people. · Meèärlägän kewene ïhenä algan wuwy «oewmaga» æitdi «ideolog» ta kiräk bula. (Rafaïlá Mostafin, Galimæan Ibraçimovnyè soègy kãnnäre.) This “organization”, which comprised thousands of people, needed also a strong “ideologist”. 3. By two cardinals, the first standing in the ablative, the second in the dative case, or both appearing in the nominative and in writing connected by a hyphen: · Kewedä ... 400 dän 600 gä kadär tãrle muskullar bar dip isäplänä. (S. M., # 11, 1976, r. 27.) It is estimated that man has from about 400 to 600 different muscles. · ... äni mine kulymnan æitäkläde dä åzebezdän biw-alty gyna adym bulgan Fätxeraxman xäzrät ãenä alyp bardy ... (Gabdulla Tukaj, Isemdä kalgannar, Fotoalábom.) ... Mother led me by the hand and brought me to His Holiness Fätkherakhman’s house, which was only five to six steps from ours. · Ãh-dårt qwálek ber bala äbise belän jãrergä hykkan. (Gomär /Ôõmðr/ Bäwirov, Kãnnärneè berendä.) A child, three to four years old, had gone out to walk with his grandmother. · Säxip aerym kãjlärne artyk ozynga suzmyjhy, ber-ber artly ãh-dårt kãj ujnady. (Wärif Kamal, Taè atkanda.) Not drawing out each tune too long, Säkhip played three to four tunes one after the other. Note 1: For suzmyjhy see 1303, 5. Note 2: Approximative numbers of the above kinds may also be formed with fractional numbers, multiplicative numbers formed with tapkyr, märtäbä, etc., and with distibutive numbers.

For example: Kewegä 150-200 g balyk, 1 danä jomyrka, 0,2-0,3 l sãt alyna. (Î.Ä. Äxmätæanov, Tabigatá xäzinäsennän awlar, 147.) Take 150-200 g fish, 1 egg, 0.2-0.3 liter of milk per person. Kånegåne 5-6 tapkyr kabatlau. To repeat the exercise 5-6 times. (Compare also the relevant examples in the respective chapters.) For approximateness expressed by distributive numbers, see 373, 374. Note: Two cardinals, the first in the ablative, the second in the dative case, may also designate a specific time limit: Sägatá ãhtän biwkä hakly ‘from three to five o’clock’; Martnyè 9 ynnan 15 enä kadär ‘from the 9th to the 15th of March’.

The last component of the formations in which both numerals appear in the nominative case may additionally take the suffix +lap, +läp: · Bez kårewep, tanywyp torgan arada tirä-qgybyzga un-unbiwläp bala æyelyp ãlgerde. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) While we said hello to and got acquainted with each other, about ten to fifteen children managed to gather around us. 142

Artykbikä belän bergä alty-æide bawkort kyzy çäm biw-altylap mäktäp malajlary kilgän ide. (ibid.) Together with Artyqbikä had come six to seven Bashkir girls and about five to six school boys. · ... xuæalar sãjläwkän saen biw-un meèläp kenä tãwtelär, läkin Zãfär äjtkängä qkyn da kilmädelär. (Ämirxan Eniki, Räwä.) ... as they talked, the owners (of the house) came down five to ten thousand, but they did not even come close to what Zöfär offered (lit., said). ·

When modifying nouns as specified in 1. +lap, +läp is joined to the latter: · – ... sièa, di, alarga kihlären ber-ike ajlap sabak ukytyp alyrga kiräk bulyr, di. (Wamil Bikhurin, Tirän katlam.) “... you”, he says, “will have to give them lessons at night for about one to two months.” 4. By numerals in the plural: · Çär ajnyè 15 lärendä. (S. M., # 11, 1976.) At about the 15th of each month. · Sägatá qrymnar vakyt bar äle. (Wärif Kamal, Taè atkanda.) There is still about an hour and a half left. · Æyelywtan hykkanda, sägatá 11 lär ide inde. (ibid.) When they left the meeting, it was already about eleven o’clock. · Wäkertlär sägatá unberlärsez jokyga kitmilär. (Kärim Tinhurin, Ikenhe märæän.) The students do not go to sleep before about 11 o’clock. If the numeral modifies a noun designating time, quantity, or measure, the plural suffix is attached to the latter: · Gali. Sezne kårmägänemä ike ellar inde bugaj. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda, páesa.) Ghäli. It has already been about two years that I haven’t seen you. · ... ber avylda ber kart qwägän, di. Unbiw qwálärendä ber kyzy gyna bulgan monyè. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Tapkyr kyz.) ... In a village there lived an old man, they say. He had only one daughter, of about fifteen years of age. · Min æide qwálärdä hakta bervakytny kãz kãne äti ... mãäzin babajny häjgä alyp kerde. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tormyw sukmaklary.) One time, on an autumn day, when I was approximately seven years old, Father ... brought the old muezzin in for tea. Note: A cardinal followed by a noun in the plural may also indicate hyperbole: Sadyjk. ... xodajnyè birgänenä meè wãkerlär bulsyn, ... (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda, páesa.) Sadiq. ... a thousand thanks for what the Lord has given, ...

5. By joining the suffix +ha, +hä to the plural forms of the same cardinals listed under 2., as well as to distälär and to nouns expressing time (sägatá ‘hour’, kãn ‘day’, el ‘year’, gasyr ‘century’). This form puts a greater emphasis on the approximate quantity. · Qrullina täkâdimenä kuwyluhy unnarha kewe bar. (Riza Iwmorat, Bistä kyzy Gãlsinä.) There are tens of people who agree with Yarullina’s suggestion. · Auhylar kåldä jãzlärhä kaz çäm årdäk kårdelär. The hunters saw hundreds of geese and ducks on the lake. · Meènärhä hakrym îl uzyp, bez menä tagyn Idelgä kajtyp tãwek. (I kaderle tugan qk.) Having traveled thousands of versts, we returned again to the Volga. 6. By cardinals preceded by ber: · Kåperdän tåbän qkta elga ber æitmew-siksän metrga kadär tämam bozdan ahylgan, ... (Ämirxan Eniki, Koqwly irtä.) Downstream from the bridge, for some seventy to eighty meters, the river has become completely free (lit., open) of ice ... · ... monnan ber 150 hakrymda ... ber kål bar, ... (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Unberenhe Äxmät.) ... some 150 versts from here ... there is a lake, ...

143

[368] Approximateness may also be expressed by combining cardinals, distributive numbers and even approximative numbers (except those formed by +lap, +läp, +lagan, +lägän and +ha, +hä) with certain words denoting approximateness. The most frequently used words are: hama ‘measure’, ‘extent’, tirä ‘surroundings’, ‘environs’, qkyn ‘close to’, ary ‘more’, ‘beyond’, artyk ‘more’. All of these words immediately follow the numeral, or the noun modified by the numeral. Hama and tirä are nouns. Taking the possessive suffix of the 3rd person singular, both require the nominative of the numeral or noun preceding them. Tirä also takes the locative; hama is used with or without the locative. Qkyn is an adjective. It requires the dative. Ary and artyk require the ablative. · Ãhenhese sabyr gyna xolykly, ille qwálär hamasy ber xatyn kewe ide. (Gomär Bäwirov, Kãnnärneè berendä.) The third one (of them) was a rather patient woman of about fifty years. · Tawnyè diametry 60-80 santimetr hamasynda bulgan. (Tatarstan ASSR tarixy, r. 50.) The diameter of the stone was approximately 60 to 80 centimeters. · ... hokyrnyè kièlege 14 metr çäm tiränlege b metr hamasynda bulgan. (ibid.) The width of the moat was about 14 meters, its depth about 6 meters. · Kãndezge sägatá unikelär tiräsendä xalyk åzäk mäjdanda ide inde. (Garif Axunov, Marselá Zaripov, I kaderle tugan qk.) Already around twelve o’clock noon the people were at the central square. · Mine åz qnyna, kabinaga utyrtkan wofer, 23-25 qwálär tiräsendäge qwá, taza eget, såzhän çäm ahyk kåèelle bulyp hykty. (Afzal Waiov, Avyr kãnnärdä.) The driver, who sat me at his side in the cabin, a young, robust man around twenty-three to twenty-five years of age, turned out to be talkative and good-natured. · Lekciq ãh sägatákä qkyn dävam itte. (Tat.-rus. såzlege.) The lecture lasted almost three hours. · Kara tufrakly dala æirlärdä avyr saban kullanylgan, anyè tãräneneè ozynlygy 30 sm dan artyk çäm avyrlygy 4,5 (dårt qrym) kilogramm hamasy bulgan. (Tatarstan ASSR tarixy.) On the black soil steppe lands a heavy plough was used. Its ploughshare was more than 30 centimeters long and its weight was about 4.5 kilograms. · Bu savytka biw kilogrammnan ary syjmyj. (ibid.) This vessel does not hold more than five kilograms. · ... anyè karamagynda jãzdän artyk tulaj torak. (Mädinä Malikova, Hähäklärgä baj tormyw.) ... there are more than a hundred hostels under her supervision. Note: With nouns designating time or measure qkyn follows the noun, with other nouns it follows the number. The same applies to ary and artyk.

Distributive Numbers [369] Distributive numbers answer the question: Nihäwär? Kåpmewär? How many of each? How much of each? They are formed from the cardinals by means of the suffix +ar, +är after a final consonant, +war, +wär after a final vowel: Ãhär ‘three each’, unar ‘ten each’, altywar ‘six each’, æidewär ‘seven each’, egerme dårtär ‘twenty-four each’, unbiwär ‘fifteen each’, jãz altmyw ikewär ‘one hundred and sixty-two each’, ike jãz tuksanywar ‘two hundred and ninety each’. Note: Tuksan takes +ywar, siksän takes +ewär, qrym takes +ywar or +war: tuksanywar ‘ninety each’, siksänewär ‘eighty each’, qrymywar (qrymwar) ‘one half each’.

144

If a figure ends with round hundreds, thousands, millions, or billions, the suffix is added to the number indicating the quantity of the hundreds, thousands, etc.: biwär jãz ‘five hundred each’, jãz utyz altywar meè ‘one hundred and thirty-six thousand each’, meèär qrym ‘one thousand five hundred each’ (lit., one and a half thousand each), ãhär million ‘three million each’. [370] Distributive numbers are adjectives or nouns: · Ãebezneè çär katynda ãhär bulmä bar. On every floor of our house there are three rooms (each). · Çär joky bålmäsendä ikewär qtak bar. In every bedroom there are two beds (each). · – Jãz kewe æyelsak, kewe bawynnan altywar sum gyna hygahak, ... (Fatix Xãsni, Altyn ïzläåhelär.) “If we get together a hundred people, each person will be apportioned only six rubles, ...” · Kitapxanädä sigezär kiwtäle 12 kitap wkafy bar. (S. M.) In the library there are 12 bookcases, each having eight shelves. · Alarnyè ikesenä dä unæidewär qwá. (Azat xatyn.) Both of them are seventeen years old. [371] Distributive numbers may take the suffix +lap, +läp to form numeral adverbs which retain their distributive character: · ... ãställär qnynda ikewärläp tä, ãhärläp tä, dårtärläp tä utyrgan agaj-ïne tirläp-pewep häj hãmerälär ide. (Fatix Xãsni, Altyn ïzläåhelär.) ... close friends and relatives who sat at the tables in twos, threes and fours, were slurping tea, sweating profusely. · Tåtäl aralarynda anda da, monda da tãrkem-tãrkem xalyk kajnawa. Usentelärne kazyp alyp, jãzärläp bäjlilär ... (Azat xatyn, # 9, 1976, r. 6.) Here and there among the beds, groups of people are busy. They dig up the (pine) seedlings and bind them together in bundles of approximately one hundred each. Note: For distributive numbers with the suffix +lagan, +lägän see 367, 2., last three examples.

[372] The same distributive numbers may be repeated (in writing connected by a hyphen) to indicate equal distribution of a quantity: · Iè kãhle çäm batyr egerme wäkert heltärle timer kapkanyè ahyk kanatlary artyna unar-unar bulyp qwerendelär. (Kärim Tinhurin, Sigezenhe märæän.) The twenty strongest and most courageous students hid in groups of ten behind the open wings of the latticed iron gate. [373] Two different distributive numbers are united (written with a hyphen or a comma) to indicate, with a connotation of approximateness, the unequal distribution of a quantity: · ... bulmä saen ãhär-dårtär kewe utyra, ... (Fatix Xãsni, Altyn ïzläåhelär.) ... three to four people are sitting in each room, ... · – ... dårtär-biwär kewe urnawyrlyk bålmälärgä xezmätkärlärdän ike bãrtek kewelär urnawtyrgansyz, ... (Wärif Kamal, Nykly adymnar.) “... you have accommodated only two of the employees in rooms each of which can accomodate four to five people, ...” · Monda æidewär, sigezär katly jortlar bula. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Auhy malae.) Here are houses of seven, eight stories each.

145

[374] In constructions as shown in 373 the distributive suffix may also be omitted on the first number: · Botkany oly-oly agah kawyklar belän bik qratyp awagannan soè biw-altywar hynaqk häj ïhtelär. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Ätäh mengän hitängä.) After eating the porridge with great relish with big wooden spoons, each of them had five to six cups of tea. [375] The distributive suffixes +ar, +är, +war, +wär may also be attached to some other parts of speech denoting quantity. For example: Nihäwär? ‘How many each?’ Kupmewär? ‘How much each?’, ‘How many each?’ · – Sezneè S. lagerenda kåpme kewe bar ide? – Unsigez meè dip sãjlädelär ... – Ä ... çäm bawka lagerálarda kåpme bulyr? · Gel wunyè xätlewär bulsyn di. (Wäjxi Mannur, Musa.) “How many people were there in your camp at S.?” “Eighteen thousand they said ...” “And in ... and the other camps, how many would there be?” “There should be fully as many in each of those.” Note: The person supplying the information is no longer in the camp at S.

Collective Numbers [376] Collective numbers denote the number of persons or things taken or acting as a group. [377] They are formed by joining the suffix +au, +äå to cardinals and to some indefinite numbers (for the latter see 382). Final y or e is omitted before this suffix. For example: ikäå, ãhäå, dårtäå, biwäå, altau, æidäå, unau ‘two, three, four, etc. (of them)’, ‘two, three, four, etc., together’. In the contemporary Tatar language collective numbers are only formed from the first ten numerals, with sigezäå and tugyzau rarely being used. [378] Collective numbers have no adjectival functions. In a sentence they may be the subject, the object, the predicate, or they may funcion as adverbs. Note: In their latter two functions they are often rendered in English as a predicate nominative or a prepositional/adverbial phrase, respectively. ·

· · · ·

146

... ber bålmädä, ikävese dä bik wäp kiengän ... ãh xatyn sãjläwep utyra ide. (Zarif Bäwiri, Zamandawlarym belän ohrawular.) ... in one room three women, two of them dressed very nicely, ... were sitting and talking. Bez ãjdä ikäå genä kaldyk. (Rafail Tãxfätullin, Ike kaen, ber karama.) Only we two remained in the house. Ul arada bez inde ... ãhäå buldyk. (Gomär Bäwirov, Sivaw.) In the meantime we had already ... become three. Alar dårtäå ide. (Title of a drama by Riza Ishmorat.) They were four. Ujnauhylar biwäå bulalar ... «Jãgerek!» digändä bar da pohmaklarga jãgerälär. Aldan ãlgergän dårtäå dårt pohmakny ala. Ber bala pohmaksyz kala. (Näkyj

Isänbät, Nänilär watlana.) The players are (a group of) five. ... At the call “go!” all run to the corners. The four (of them) who manage to get there first occupy (lit., take) the four corners. One child is left without a corner. · Ozaklamyj kewelär tãrlese tãrle æirgä taralywyp bettelär. Ikäådän-ikäå genä kalgah, Soltan Sabirov egetne ãstälgä qkynrak kilep utyryrga hakyrdy. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) Soon after, the men dispersed, each going to a different place. When the two of them were alone (lit: After the two of them remained by themselves), Soltan Sabirov invited the young man to step closer to his desk and sit down. · Îl buennan beraz hittä kewelär tãrkeme æyelyp ãlgergän ide inde ... Ul wunda torgan beräådän: – Ni buldy? – dip sorady. (ibid.) A group of people had already managed to gather a little to the side away from the edge of the road. ... He asked one of them standing there, “What happened?” Note: The collective number beräu functions also as an indefinite pronoun (439). With the particle dä (beräå dä) it forms a negative pronoun (444).

[379] In the vernacular the collective numbers are often used instead of the cardinals when counting without mentioning the objects being counted. They are also used when counting objects with special attention: · Tagy da tekäläbräk karagah, bolarnyè bozau kadär biek bårelär ikänen beldem. Beräå, ikäå, ãhäå ... Tagyn beräå, ikäå, ãhäå ... Alty! (Mãxämmät Mäçdiev, Tornalar tãwkän æirdä.) When I looked still more intently I realized that those were wolves as tall as a calf. One, two, three ... Again one, two, three ... Six! · Wäçit îl bukhasynnan eraktan kårsätåhe kãpwä aldy da kåzlärenä kuep, manaralarny sanarga kerewte. Beräå, ikäå, ãhäå, dårtäå, biwäå, altau. (Flås Latyjfi, Xyqnät.) Shähit took a telescope from his travelling bag and, putting it to his eyes, began to count the minarets – one, two, three, four, five, six. [380] Collective numbers may take the suffixes +lap, +läp, +lawyp, +läwep. While not changing their basic meaning, these suffixes add a tinge of reciprocity, togetherness, with reciprocity expressing the joint execution of an action (884, b.). Furthermore, they emphasize the number (quantity) of persons or things in a group. · Kãnnärdän berkãnne bu egetlär ãhäåläp auga hygyp kitälär. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Æilän.) One day, these young men go out hunting in a group of three. · Xäzer bolar dårt eget, ber kyz – biwäåläp utyryp awadylar, ïhtelär, bik kåèelle buldy. (ibid. Ãh kågärhen.) Now they – four young men, one girl – sat all five together and ate, drank and were very merry. · Taè attymy, bez dårtäåläp tiz-tiz ãj ïwlären karyjbyz da iwekne bikläp dårtebez dårt qkka kitäbez. (Gãlwäçidä, Minem kala aluym.) As soon as it dawns, the four of us quickly do the housework and, locking the door, we four leave in four (different) directions. · Bu kewelär ikäåläwep patwaga xãkemgä kerep kitälär. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Ziräk kyz.) These two men went together to the king (i.e., the king’s palace) for judgment. · Änä alar dårtäåläwep äkren genä qrga menep baralar. (Ämirxan Eniki, Uzyp barywlyj.) There, they are going slowly ashore, all four (of them) together. · Karap jãråne tämamlagah, ãhäåläwep zaldagy ïlekke urynnaryna hygyp utyrdylar. (Ämirxan Eniki, Räwä.) After they finished viewing (the house), all three together went back and sat down on their previous seats in the hall.

147

[381] Cardinals with possessive suffixes may function as collective numbers: · Beräåneè ãh uly bulgan. Malajlary ber zaman ãhese dä åsep bujga æitkännär. Wunnan bu kewe äjtkän: – Ullarym, digän, min sezne, digän, ãhegezne dä beráîly ãjländeräm ... Min ãhegezgä dä berdän tuj qsap, qratkan kyzlarygyzny alyp birermen, – digän. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Kem æièåhe.) Someone had three sons. One fine day all three of his boys grew up and came of age. Then this man said, “My sons, I shall have the three of you marry at the same time ... I shall hold the wedding for the three of you together, and get you the girls you love.”

Indefinite Numeral Adjectives [382] Indefinite numeral adjectives designate, in a general, indefinite manner, an unspecified number, amount, quantity, or measure of persons, animals, things, ideas, etc. They are expressed by such words as: kåp ‘many, much’, bik kåp ‘a great many’, ‘very much’, waktyj kåp ‘rather many, much’, az ‘little’, ‘few’, ‘a bit’, bajtak ‘quite some’, waktyj ‘quite a lot’. They may function as attributive adjectives and as nouns. · Az vägâdä bir, kåp ïw kårsät. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) Give few promises, show much work. · – Äni, bu kaphykny kaq kuqrga ikän. Äzräk on alyp kajtkan idem ... (Wäjxi Mannur, Agymsularga karap.) “Mommy, where shall I put this bag? I’ve brought back a little flour.” · Monda ïwlägän hagym mine kåp närsägä ãjrätte. (ibid.) The time I worked here taught me many things. · Kywnyè salkynlygyn alar sizmilär kebek. Kåplärneè hähläre, kawlary bäslängän ... (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elta buenda.) They do not seem to feel the winter cold. The hair and eyebrows of many (of them) have become covered with rime ... · Ãjdän iè ïlek Vasil hykty. Läkin aèa kapka tãbendä kyzny bajtak vakyt kãtärgä tury kilde. (ibid.) Wasil left the house first. But he had to wait for the girl quite some time at the gate. · Su koenu urynnary tulysynha æiçazlanyp betmägän äle, wulaj da kewelär ql itsen ãhen bajtagy ïwlängän inde. (ibid.) The bathing places (i.e., bathing sites along the river) have not yet been fully equipped; however, quite a lot has already been done for the people’s recreation. · Vasil bu ohrawuda «mäsáäläne tämam xäl itkänhe» sãjläwmäkhe ide. Inde anyè waktyj vakytlardan birle äzerläp kujgan såzläre dä bar: ... (ibid.) At this meeting Wasil wanted to talk “until the matter was completely solved” (i.e., he wanted to propose to the girl). He even had the (proper) words, which he had prepared already quite some time ago: ... Note: Words like bernihä ‘some’, ‘several’, ‘a few’, kajber ‘some’, bar, barha, barlyk, bãten, çämmä ‘all’ have similar meanings, but as parts of speech they are generalizing or indefinite pronouns (434 and 435-438).

[383] Az and kåp may take the suffix +lap, +läp to form numeral adverbs: · – ... azlap kyna da birmädek, kåpläp birdek. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) “... we didn’t only give a little, we gave generously.” · XIII gasyr azaklarynda çäm XIV gasyrda Bolgar wäçäreneè elga arâqgy rajonyna xalyk kåpläp kilep utyra bawlagan. (S.S. Ajdarov, N.D. Aksenova, Bolgar wäçäre.) About the end of the 13th and in the 14th centuries people started to come

148

to and settle in great numbers in that area of the city of Bolghar which was on the other side of the river. [384] Kåp may take the suffix +äå. This form designates an unspecified number of persons, things, etc., taken or acting together as a group: · Alar bu îly kåbäå ide. (Garif Gobäj, Bez åskändä.) This time they were a numerous group. [385] The fraction qrty and some cardinals are used as indefinite numerals. In this function they designate an unspecified quantity, amount, measure, degree, etc., ranging in meaning from ‘very little’, ‘very few’, to ‘very much, many’. Qrty: Annary ul Safinny kårergä bulgan. Anyè qnyna baryrga hygyp ta, qrty îldan kire borylgan. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) After that he intended (as he told it) to see Safin. But, (as told by him) although he did leave to go to him, he turned back half way. Ber: Ber genä kolak belän tyèladym, ... (Fatix Xãsni, Æäj bawy.) I listened with only half an ear, ... Jãz: · Dãres, Petrovih, jãz märtäbä dãres! (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) “That is true, Petrovich, true a hundred times!” Jãz siksän: · Sez inde tormywygyzda jãz siksän gradus borylyw qsyjsyz ikän, ... (ibid.) “You seem to be already making a hundred and eighty degree about-face in your life, ...” Meè: – Moèa kara, tegeèär kara. Farukny äjtep torasy da îk: meè ïwneè mastery! (ibid.) “Look at him here, look at him over there. Not to mention Faruq, – a jackof-all-trades (lit., he is an expert at a thousand trades)!” [386] Cardinals and a few indefinite numeral adjectives may be components of compound nouns and adjectives: Ãhpohmak ‘triangle’, dårtpohmak ‘quadrangle’, biwáellyk ‘five-year plan’, kyrgaqk or meèaqk ‘multipede’, jãzbawy ‘captain’, meè bawy ‘major’; ikejãzle ‘two-faced’, ‘hypocritical’, dårt aqkly ‘fourlegged’, beráqkly ‘one-sided’, ‘biased’; kåppohmak ‘polygon’, kåpmillätle ‘multinational’, kåptãsle ‘multicoloured’, az såzle ‘taciturn’.

149

CHAPTER IV – PRONOUNS Classification of Pronouns [387] Tatar pronouns may be classified as 1. personal, 2. possessive, 3. reflexive and intensive, 4. reciprocal, 5. demonstrative, 6. interrogative, 7. generalizing, 8. indefinite, 9. negative, 10. relative.

Personal Pronouns [388] The personal pronouns are: min ‘I’, sin ‘you’, ul ‘he’, ‘she’, ‘it’, bez ‘we’, sez ‘you’, alar ‘they’. [389] The pronoun of the first person singular – min – designates the speaker: · Min tiz genä ãjgä kerdem dä: «Äni, min balykka baram!» – didem. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Qz bawy.) I quickly went into the house and said, “Mommy, I’m going fishing!” · · Min mony aèlamyjm. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Qwel Qr.) “I don’t understand this.” · Zãfär. Zãçrä, min ul xatlarny ukyrga tiew. Zãçrä. Min alarny sièa birä almyjm. (Xäj Vaxit, Soègy xat.) Zöfär. Zöhrä, I must read those letters. Zöhrä. I cannot give them to you. (For the verbal adverb in -a, -ä, -yj, -i and alu to express the ability, inability to carry out an action see 1243-1245.) ·

– Sin qlgywma tagyn, bu – hyn min tågel äle, xäzerge min – näkâ minem åzem tågel. Min åzem, hyn min, monnan beraz înáleräk. (Gomär Bäwirov, Æidegän hiwmä.) “Don’t you make a mistake, please, this is not the real me, this me (you see) is not my true self exactly. My true self, the real me, is a little more decent than this.”

(For tagyn following a verb in the imperative mood see 932.) [390] The pronoun of the second person singular – sin – designates the person spoken to. It is the familiar form used to address a close relative or a close friend, a child, a pet or animal. In informal conversation, an older person may use it to address a much younger person. · Mägâråfä. Äti, sin kemdä ideè? (Mirxäjdär Fäjzi, Qwálär aldatmyjlar.) Mäghrüfä. Father, with whom have you been? · · Fatyjma, ... sin monda ber kewene dä kertmä, ... (Kärim Ämiri, Pehän bazary.) “Fatima, ... don’t you let anybody enter here, ...” · · ... sin, eget, utyr. Bik arygansyè kårenä. (Kärim Tinhurin, Il.) “... you, young man, sit down. You are very tired, it seems” (The speaker is a much older person.) · Ul ..., Kuramwinga karap aldy. «Bu nindi bändä, sin dip ïndäwergä minem belän nindi urtaklygy bar ikän monyè?» dip ujlyj ide bugaj. (Wamil Bikhurin, Tirän katlam.) ... he glanced at Quramschin. Apparently he was thinking: “What kind of a fellow is this, what could he have in common with me that he addresses me with thou?” 150

Persons, whose relations have been more or less formal but good, may suddenly switch from sez (the polite address; see below) to sin when getting into an argument: · · Beläbez, iptäw! Sez bezgä älifba ãjrätmägez! Läkin bit wunysy da mägâlåm: sin ul ïwne bawlyjsyè da tawlap kitep barasyè, ä avyz pewerergä bezgä kala! (Wamil Bikhurin, Tirän katlam.) “We know, comrade! Don’t you teach us the ABC’s! After all, that is well known: you start the job, then you abandon it and we are left (it remains for us) to get our fingers (lit., mouths) burnt!” The pronoun sin is also used when personifying places or things: Idel, Idel, gåzäl Idel, Volga, Volga, beautiful Volga, Tirän dä sin, kiè dä sin, You are deep and you are wide, Kãhle dä sin, serle dä sin, You are strong and you are mysterious, Dãnáqda îk sièa tiè. In all the world there is nothing equal to you. (Riza Iwmorat, Bistä kyzy Gãlsinä.) [391] The pronoun of the third person singular, ul, designates the person, place, or thing spoken of. For example: ul ïwli ‘he works’, ul ukyj ‘she reads’. · Diègez ãste tyn, ul, woma kãzge kebek, ... qltyrap qta. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Diègezdä.) The surface of the sea is quiet, ... it shines like a polished mirror. [392] The plural forms are used as follows: 1. The pronoun of the first person, bez, designates several persons speaking or one person speaking collectively for a group: · Xäjri. Kiqå egete bulyp minem dä barasym kilä. Wäjxi. Qryj, qryj, baryrsyè. Bawkalar. Bez dä barabyz. (Kärim Tinhurin, Zäègär wäl.) Kheyri. As the best man I too want to go. Sheykhi. All right, all right, you will go. The others. We too are going. · Nailä. Bez – bez idek, Bez unike kyz idek! ... (Aqz Gyjläæev, Bez unike kyz idek ...) Nailä. We – we were, We were twelve girls! ... · – Minemhä, dãreslek – ikegezdä dä. Bu xakta bez äle ujlawyrbyz. (Wamil Bikhurin, Tirän katlam.) “In my opinion (lit., according to me) both of you are right. We shall still think about this.” (I.e., think about this together.) 2. Bez is used instead of the first person singular (min) when the latter is a part of a compound subject or object. Bez is then connected with the other element(s) of the compound by belän, a postposition (472) functioning also as a coordinating conjunction (622). As a postposition it requires the nominative of nouns, the genitive of personal and demonstrative pronouns (except the third person plural of the former and the plural of the latter). The normal word order in such compounds is: bez + other element(s) + belän. However, depending on the context, bez may be shifted from its usual position, and it may even be omitted. Note: For the omission of personal pronouns see 397. The verbal predicate of the compound subject agrees with bez (i.e., it is in the first person plural). As part of a compound object, bez alone takes the required case endings.

151

Examples: · – ... monda ïwlärem bar. Ä annan bez sineè belän kaq bulsa da bergä kitärbez. (Atilla Rasix, Ike bujdak.) “... I have some work here. But after that you and I can go somewhere together.” · Gaziz. Sineè belän, æizni, ber-berebezne aèlawa almabyz bez, ... (Fatix Ämirxan, Qwálär.) Ghäziz. You, brother-in-law, and I will be unable to understand each other, ...” · – Bez anyè belän tanyw ... (Atilla Rasix, Ike bujdak.) “He and I are already acquainted.” · – ... bez inde sezneè belän qwá balalar tågel, Zaçid Safih. (ibid.) “... you and I are not little children any more, Zahid Safich.” · Bez Islam belän artky utyrgyhka urnawtyk. (Mäxmåt Xäsänov, Inàenerlar.) Islam and I settled into the back seat. · Alar çämmäse urakta. Bez monda Kaîm belän ikebez genä wul. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) All of them are at the harvest. Only we two, Qayum and I, are here. (For wul as intensifier see 428.) · – Bez ätieè belän Näæipne sièa laek kewe dip tababyz. (Ämirxan Eniki, Jãräk sere.) “Your dad and I think that Näjip is a man worthy of you.” · Bez apa belän ber-berebezgä karawyp aldyk ... (Atilla Rasix, Äniem xatirälärennän.) My (older) sister and I glanced at each other ... · Bez Fäçimä belän tagyn bergä. (Äxsän Baqnov, Qwálegemne ïzlim.) Fähimä and I are together again. · – ... sineè belän bezgä monda avylda åz xalyklarybyz arasynda ïwlärgä kiräk. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) “... you and I must work here in the village among our own people.” Note: The modal word kiräk requires the dative of the subject.

Bu minem Gabdulla Tukaj belän berenhe ohrawuym buldy. ... Gabdulla Tukajny bez ikenhe tapkyr Rabiga çäm Bädriæiçan apalarym belän Ekaterininskij (xäzerge G. Tukaj) uramynnan barganda ohrattyk. (Atilla Rasix, Äniem xatirälärennän.) This was my first meeting with Ghabdulla Tuqai. ... My (older) sisters Rabighä and Bädrijihan and I met Ghabdulla Tuqai a second time while walking along Yekaterininskiy Street (the present Gh. Tuqai Street). · Äxmät. Beläseème, menä digän duslar taptym min anda. ... bälki, sineè belän ikäåläp, kalaga kåhep kitärbez. (Mirsäj Ämir, Gãlwaqn.) Äkhmät. Do you know, I have found excellent friends there. ... perhaps you and I will both move together to the city. · – ... Sin nigä mondyj ozak? – ... Balyk belän mavygyp, koqw iègänne dä sizmi kalganmyn. Årge avyly îlyna hykkah ta Nokta Väli ohrady. Anyè belän akrynlap sãjläwä-sãjläwä kajttyk. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) “... What took you so long?” “... I was so busy fishing that I did not even notice that the sun was going down. Just when I got to the road to the village of Ürge I ran into Noqta Wäli. Talking together, he and I came back slowly.” · Kyqm. Bolar tiräsendä hualma. Bu xalyk sineè belän bezgä bervakytta da hyn dus bula almyjlar. (Kärim Tinhurin, Berenhe hähäklär.) Qiam. Don’t get entangled with them. These people can never be real friends to you and me. · – Sineè belän bezneè bãtenläj kolak kaguybyz bar. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) “It is possible that you and I wind up with nothing at all.” 3. The use of the first person plural instead of the singular applies also to the possessive pronoun bezneè (instead of minem), to the independent possessive pronoun bezneke ·

152

(instead of mineke), and to possessive stems of the first person plural plus +nyky, +neke. For example: Sabira belän bezneè ãs-bawybyz ber tãsle åk bulmasa da, bik åk aerylyp ta tormaska tiewter inde. (Ämirxan Eniki, Gãländäm tutaw xatiräse.) Although Sabira’s and my clothes are not exactly uniform (i.e., of the same color, cut, etc.), they ought not differ too much either. · ... bezneè Läbip Xänipovih belän ohrawular tora-bara æitdi tãs aldy. (Mäxmåt Xäsänov, Inàenerlar.) ... gradually, my meetings with Läbip Khänipovich took on a serious character (lit., Läbip Khänipovich’s and my meetings). · – Kem käæäse? – Näsimä belän ikävebezneke. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) “Whose goat is it?” “It belongs to both (of us) Näsimä and me.” ·

[393] Sez is both the familiar and the polite form of address used when talking to several persons; it is the polite form used to address one person. In the latter case sez stands for the singular, however, it is used with the plural form of the verb. 1. Sez is the familiar form; several persons are addressed: · Tänäfes vakytynda Gäåçär ... balalar belän kaldy, alardan æyrlyj beläsezme? dip sorady. Belmihä! – Bik qxwy, min bawlyjm, ä sez mièa kuwylygyz. Qryjmy? (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Qwel Qr.) During the recess Gäwhär ... remained with the children. ... She asked them whether they could sing (lit., ..saying: “Can you sing?”). “Why, of course, we can!” “Very good, I’ll begin and you join me. All right?” (For belmihä see 1294, for the verbal adverb in -a, -ä, -yj, -i and belå see 1246.) · – ... balalar, sugywyp, sez bik nahar ïwlägänsez. Äjterseè, sez uramnan kergän malajlar. (ibid.) “... children, you did a very bad thing, fighting among yourselves. As if you were street urchins (lit., As if you were boys who have come in from the street).” 2. Sez is the polite form; several persons are addressed: · – Sez, tutawlar, mine kiheregez inde, åzegezne genä kaldyryrga tury kilä. (Ämirxan Eniki, Gãländäm tutaw xatiräse.) “You, young ladies, please, forgive me, I have to leave you alone.” (For inde following a verb in the imperative mood see 928.) · Awarga utyrgah, eget, ..., tege ãh egetkä äjtä: · Min sezdä biwenhe aemny xezmät itäm inde, di, sez irtä hygyp kitäsez, kih kajtasyz, niwläp jãrisez soè sez? · di. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Ãh kågärhen.) Having sat down for supper, the youth ... says to those three young men, “I am serving my fifth month with you now. You leave (i.e., leave the house) in the morning and return at night; what kind of work are you doing, then?” 3. Sez is the polite form; one person is addressed: · Fättax. Iskändär äfände, sez ni ïwlädegez? (Fätxi Burnaw, Taè.) “Fättakh. Mister Iskändär, what have you done?” · Sez, professor äfände, Amerikadan kajhan hyktygyz? (Kärim Tinhurin, Amerikan.) “Professor, when did you depart from America?” · – Zãçrä xanym, bågen sez niwlärgä ujlyjsyz? (Ämirxan Eniki, Jãräk sere.) “Lady Zöhrä, what do you intend to do today?” · – Tutaw, – dide ädäp belän genä, – sez inde nota tanyjsyz, pianinoda qxwy gyna ujnyjsyz. Wuèa kårä min bågenge däresne turydan-tury åzebezneè xalyk kãjlären ujnarga ãjrätådän bawlamakhy bulam. Sez karwy tågelsezder bit? (Ämirxan Eniki, Gãländäm tutaw xatiräse.) “Miss”, he said politely, “you already

153

read music and you play the piano rather well. Therefore, I want to start today’s lesson immediately with teaching you to play our folk tunes. You don’t have anything against that, do you?” [394] Alar. 1. Alar designates several persons, places, or things spoken of: Alar ïwlilär. ‘They work’. Alar ukyjlar. ‘They read’. Alar bezne aèlyjlar. ‘They understand us’. 2. Alar is used instead of the third person singular (ul) when the latter is a part of a compound subject. In such a case, the same rules governing the use of bez apply also to alar. · Alar Fätxi belän xat qzywalar. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) She and Fätkhi are corresponding together. · Mädinäneè ãe mäktäptän waktyj erark. ... alar Säläxi belän ikäåläp uram urtasynnan baralar. (ibid.) Mädinä’s house is rather far from the school. ... she and Säläkhi are walking together along the center of the street. · Alar apasy belän ikäå häj ïhep utyrgan vakytta, xaæi da kajtyp kerde. (ibid.) While he and his (older) sister were having tea together, the hadji also returned. · Xalikâ artyk æavap birmäde. Xäsän belän alar Mädinälärgä kerep kittelär. (ibid.) Khaliq did not answer any more. He and Khäsän went in to Mädinä’s. · Kaîm ... Äxmätne onytyp kujmady. Wäçärgä bargan saen Äxmätkä kerä. Mostafa belän dä alar ike-ãh tapkyr Äxmättä buldylar, ber tapkyr Nägyjm belän dä kunyp kaldylar. (ibid.) ... Qayum did not forget Äkhmät. Each time he went to the city he dropped in on Äkhmät. Two or three times he was at Äkhmät’s along with Mustafa and once he and Näghim stayed over night. · – Sadyjk æizni bik kåp sälam äjtte åzeèä. Mièsylu belän ikäåläp kunakka kilep hyksynnar, di. (ibid.) “Brother-in-law Sadiq sends you best regards. He says that both you and Mingsylu should visit him (lit., let him and Mingsylu come on a visit together).”

Declension of the Personal Pronouns [395] SINGULAR 1st Person Nom. min Gen. minem1) Dat. mièa Acc. mine Loc. mindä Abl. minnän

154

2nd Person sin sineè1) sièa sine sindä sinnän

3rd Person ul anyè1) aèa, aèar, aèarga any anda, aèarda annan, aèardan

PLURAL Nom. Gen. Dat. Acc. Loc. Abl.

1st Person bez bezneè1) bezgä bezne bezdä bezdän

2nd Person sez sezneè1) sezgä sezne sezdä sezdän

3rd Person alar alarnyè1) alarga alarny alarda alardan

[396] The declension of personal pronouns follows that of nouns. Exceptions are: The genitive of the 1st person singular, which takes +em (instead of +neè), the dative, which is mièa, and the accusative, which takes +e (instead of +ne). The genitive of the 2nd person singular takes the ending +eè (instead of +neè); the dative and accusative are formed as in the 1st person singular. The nominative of the 3rd person singular is ul, the other cases are formed from the stem an+. The 3rd person plural, which is formed from the stem a+, takes all cases the same way as ordinary nouns in the plural. Note: In Old Tatar, the dative of min, sin was mingar, singar. Later mingar, singar became mièar, sièar. The modern forms are mièa, sièa. In some dialects mièar, sièar still occur and, although rarely, even such forms as mièarga, sièarga can be found.2) The accusative was originally minne, sinne. In contemporary Tatar ‘nn’ has been reduced. In the 3rd person in the genitive and accusative ‘nn’ was reduced, the dative angar became aèar and then aèa. However, the form aèar also continues to exist in both the literary language and the vernacular. The dative forms aèar and aèarga and the locative and ablative forms aèarda, aèardan commonly refer to persons, but sometimes they are also used to refer to objects or concepts, ideas; aèa, anda, annan designate persons as well as objects and ideas. The old declension of ul (ulnyè, ulgar, ulny, ulda, uldan) is not used today.

Examples of the use of the persomal pronouns. · Gãlæiçan. ... Min any hakyrmadym. (Galiäsgar Kamal, Bankrot.) Göljihan. ... I did not invite her. · Vasilij Dimitrih. Kilenegez mondamy? Annan da sorap karasak nihek bulyr? (ibid.) Vasiliy Dimitrich. Is your daughter-in-law here? How would it be if we tried questioning her too? · Æamali. Menä, kilen, bolar ... sinnän soramakhy bulalar. (ibid.) Jamali. Here, my dear (lit. daughter-in-law), these (people) ... want to ask you some questions. · Räwit. Anda ber karhyk kilgän, sine soryj. (Sägyjtá Sånhäläj, Sängatáhelär.) Räshit. There’s an old woman here. She is asking for you. · Ozak ta åtmäde, äti mine qèadan åzebezneè avyl mädräsäsenä kajtardy. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) After a short time, Father returned me again to our village medrese. · Bezne kyw bue ukytkan ãhen aèa båtän berkem bernärsä birmi. (ibid.) No one else gives him anything for having taught us all winter. · – Äti, min sine ... azyk sorap borhymyjm, – dide tãphek uly. – Mièa bary, ber elga kaq barsam da æitärlek itep, akha gyna bir, – dide. Atasy aèa æitärlek akha birde. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Ak båre.) “Father, I do not bother you asking for ... provisions,” said his youngest son. “Give me only enough money for one year wherever I might go,” said he. His father gave him enough money (for that). · Ak båre aèarga: – Qryj, min sezgä rãxsät biräm, ... dide. (ibid.) The white wolf said to him: “All right, I give you permission.” 1)

2)

For the use of the genitive forms as possessive pronouns see 193-197. See: W. Ramazanov çäm X. Xismätullin, Tatar tele grammatikasy (Kazan, 1954), r. 106.

155

·

·

·

·

·

·

· Maksud bezdä ike el ïwläde inde. ... Sãjläwtek: tagyn ïwlärgä isäbe bar. Wuny belgähennän, menä bez aèar jort saldyk. (Garif Axunov, Gomer îly.) “Maqsud has worked with us for two years before. ... We had a talk. He intends to work (with us) again. So, when we learned that, we built him a house.” (For belgähennän see 1277 c.) – Kåpme tora? – Ber meè dä biw jãz täèkä. – Minem bit aèar tålärlek akham îk, Xalik abyj. (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) “How much does it (i.e., the ticket for the journey) cost?” “One thousand five hundred rubles.” “But I don’t have the money to pay for it, Uncle Khaliq.” Min aèardan ãh ãstäl awa gyna ïwlim, läkin anyè qgyna ew /jáø/ karyj almyjm ... ämma baryber uem aèarda ... (Ämirxan Eniki, Vãædan.) I am working only three tables across from her, but I cannot look in her direction too frequently ..., but my thoughts are with her anyway, ... Woferlar ... ber-bersenä kyhkyralar, åzara tirgäwälär, tik aèardan mägânä îk. (Wamil Bikhurin, Tirän katlam.) The drivers ... shout at each other and quarrel among themselves, but that does not achieve anything (lit., there is no meaning from that). Æiçangir. Xäzer bez any synap karyjk! Sineè soègy æavabyè bezgä owamady. (Näkyj Isänbät, Xuæa Nasretdin.) Jihangir. Now let us test him! Your last answer did not please us. Mansur. Îk, utyrmyjm, tik sezgä xäbär birergä kildem. (Galiäsgar Kamal, Bäxetsez eget.) Mansur. No, I won’t sit down, I came only to give you information.

Omission of Personal Pronouns [397] Personal pronouns are frequently omitted when they are not emphasized and their antecedent has been mentioned before. · – Kesägezdä wuwy ahkyh ideme? Kemneke ul? – Berenhe kåråem. (Mägâsåm Nasyjbullin, Qrkanat.) “Was this key here in your pocket? Whose is it?” “I am seeing it for the first time.” · – Wifonáer iweklären soègy märtäbä kem ahkanyn, kem qpkanyn äjtegez. – Zajcev åze ahty, portfelen kujdy da, åze åk qpty. (ibid.) “Tell us who last opened and closed the doors of the chiffonier.” “Zaitsev himself opened them, put his briefcase inside and also closed them himself.” · – ... tugannarybyzga kittem. Alar ãjdä bulmady. Kårwe xatyn mièa: – Kihtän dahalaryna kittelär, bågen kajtulary ikele, – dide. (ibid.) “... I went to our relatives. They were not at home. The woman next door told me that they left for their cottage last night, that it was doubtful that they will return today.” · Gilámanov. Nazirov kajtmadymy? Galiq. Qèa gyna kajtyp tãwte, didelär. Gilámanov. Mièa hakyrygyz. (Mirsäj Ämir, Mièlekamal.) Ghilmanov. Didn’t Nazirov return? Ghaliä. They said that he returned just now. Ghilmanov. Call him to me. · Gaini. ... Kajda Mièlekamal apa? Näsimä. Xäzer kerer. (ibid.) Gheyni. ... Where is Minglekamal? Näsimä. She’ll come in right now. Note: Apa ‘older sister’, ‘aunt’ and abyj ‘older brother’, ‘uncle’ are also used whrn addressing or referring to a person older than oneself. ·

156

Tãlke äjtä: – Babaj, ... bu xätle aî kaphykka syqmy soè? – di. Aî äjtä: – Syqm, syqm, – di. Tãlke äjtä: – Min åz kåzem belän kårmihä ywanmyjm, ... (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Aî belän babaj.) The fox says, “Grandfather, ... does a bear of

this size really fit into the sack?” The bear says, “I fit in, I fit in.” The fox says, “Without seeing it with my own eyes I won’t believe it.” · · Waltyrat, waltyrat, ulym. Äle qèa gyna tãzätep hygyp kittelär. (Räisä Iwmoratova, Miliciq lejtenanty.) “Call me, call me, my son. They have just repaired it (i.e., the telephone) and left.”

Reflexive and Intensive Pronouns [398] Reflexivity is expressed by: 1. Reflexive verbs (876-880), 2. Reflexive pronouns governed by a verb or (less often) a postposition. [399] The reflexive pronouns are formed from the noun åz ‘self’, ‘own’, ‘core’, ‘essence’, with the addition of the possessive suffixes: åzem ‘myself’, åzeè ‘yourself’, åze ‘himself’, ‘herself’, ‘itself’, åzebez ‘ourselves’, åzegez ‘yourselves’, åzläre ‘themselves’. [400] In the declension, the various case suffixes are added to the possessive stem: Nom. Gen. Dat. Acc. Loc. Abl.

åzem åzemneè1) åzemä åzemne åzemdä åzemnän

åzeè åzeèneè åzeèä åzeène åzeèdä åzeènän

åze åzeneè åzenä åzen åzendä åzennän

åzebez åzebezneè åzebezgä åzebezne åzebezdä åzebezdän

åzegez åzegezneè åzegezgä åzegezne åzegezdä åzegezdän

åzläre åzläreneè åzlärenä åzlären åzlärendä åzlärennän

[401] The reflexive pronouns are primarily used: a) With verbs which in Tatar cannot be made into true reflexive verbs. For example: · Sanau ‘to count’, ‘to consider’: Min åzemne iè bexetle kewelärdän sanyjm. I consider myself the happiest of men. · Xis itå ‘to feel’: Min åzemne qxwy xis itäm. ‘I feel well.’ · Kårsätå ‘to show’: Uzegezne dãnáqga kårsätegez. Show yourselves to the world. · Tanytu ‘to show’, ‘to prove’: Ul åzen tanytty. He showed, proved himself. b) With verbs whose reflexive form has a different meaning. For example: · Kårå ‘to see’; reflexive form: kårenå ‘to appear’, ‘to be visible’: Taular artynnan koqw kårende. The sun appeared from behind the mountains. But: åzen tiè kårå ‘to regard oneself as equal’. · Belå ‘to know’, belenå ‘to be revealed’, ‘to manifest itself’, ‘to be, become known’: Kyègyr ïw kyryk eldan soè da belenä. Falsehood comes to light even after forty years. But: Uzeène bel! Know thyself! [402] In certain instances reflexive pronouns may also be used when the verb governing it does form a reflexive verb of the same basic meaning. However, there is a distinct difference between the use of the former and that of the latter and, consequently, the two constructions may not be used interchangeably. For example, the English sentence ‘I wash myself with soap’ is rendered in Tatar as follows: Min sabyn belän îynam. The use of the reflexive verb îynu ‘to wash oneself’, in this sentence is the normal, correct way to express reflexivity. 1)

For the use of the genitive forms åzemneè, åzeèneè, etc. as possessive pronouns see 197.

157

The same sentence may also be rendered by using the transitive verb îu ‘to wash’, and the reflexive pronoun: Min åzemne sabyn belän îam. This construction is used when referring to the process of washing off some substance (tar, oil paint, grease, etc.) from parts of one’s body or from the clothes one is wearing. [403] The reflexive pronoun agrees in person and number with the subject of the same sentence. It indicates that the object of the action expressed by the verb is identical with the agent (subject). The reflexive pronoun appears in the case required by the verb (or postposition) governing it. · Ul wulaj dip ujlyj, wulaj dip îanyrga tyrywa. Läkin vakyt-vakyt qlgyzlyk åzen sizderä. (Läbibä Ixsanova, Ana kãndälege.) She thinks that way, she tries to console herself that way. But from time to time loneliness makes itself felt. · · Ägär wulaj bulsa, min åzemne bäxetle adämgä xisaplar idem. (Gaziz Mãxämmätwin, Jãräktäge ïzlär.) “If it were so I would consider myself a happy man.” · Sãläjman. Min ... åzemne aèarga tiè kårmimen. (Sägyjtá Rämiev, Qwä, Zãbäjdä, qwim min.) Söleyman. ... (but) I do not regard myself her equal. · Nägyjmä. Äj, zinçar, åzeène kystyrmasaèhy! (Wärif Kamal, Gabbas Galin.) Näghimä. Oh, please, don’t you interfere! · Min åzemä kitap satyp aldym. (R.S. Gazizov, Sopostavitelánaq grammatika.) I bought myself a book. · – ... sez, Elena, ... åzegez turynda sãjlägez ... (Barlas Kamalov, Qlykmaslar.) “... you, Yelena, ... talk about yourself ...” [404] Åz (åzem, åzeè, etc.) may be used to emphasize the agent. In this use they are called intensive pronouns. 1. The agent is expressed by a reflexive pronoun: a) In this case, the intensive pronoun immediately follows the reflexive pronoun. Both agree in person and number. The reflexive pronoun appears in the case required by the governing verb (postposition); the intensive pronoun is in the nominative case. · – Sez aèarga karywyp, åzegezne åzegez çälak itkänsez. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Ak båre.) “Going against him, you destroyed yourself (lit., you yourself destroyed yourself).” · Sãläjman. ... Menä min xatyn-kyz bulsam ide çäm åzemne åzem belsäm ide, ... (Sägyjtá Rämiev, Qwä, Zãbäjdä, qwim min.) Söleyman. ... Well, if I were a woman and if I (myself) knew myself, ... · Sãläjman. ... Ni ïwlim – åzemne åzem orywyrga totyndym: ... (ibid.) Söleyman. ... What shall I do – I began to reproach myself, ... · – Närsä bar? – Îk, bolaj gyna. Åzebezdän åzebez kãläbez. (Gaziz Mãxämmätwin, Jãräktäge ïzlär.) “What happened?” “Nothing, really. We are just laughing about ourselves.” · · Ägär åzeèä åzeè bulywmasaè, ... bu ïwlärdän ber tienlek tä mänfägatá hykmaqhak, ... (ibid.) “If you (yourself) do not help yourself, ... not even a penny’s worth of benifit will come from these things, ...” · Fizik qktan da, ruxi qktan da min åzemnän-åzem kanägatá tågel. (ibid.) Both physically and spiritually I (myself) am not satisfied with myself. · Åzemne-åzem tyq almyjha, any pyr tuzdyryp tirgi bawladym. (Läbibä Ixsanova, Ana kãndälege.) Unable to restrain myself, I began to scold him severely.

158

Zãfär. Åzemä åzem gaæäplänäm. (Wärif Xãsäenov, Zãbäjdä – adäm balasy.) Zöfär. I (myself) am amazed at myself. · Beraz ujlap torgah, åzennän åze soragan kebek bik äkren: ... dide. (Wärif Kamal, Uqnu.) After thinking a little, he said very slowly, as though asking himself: ... ·

Note: In Tatar literary works, as well as in other publications, the two components (the reflexive pronoun and the intensive pronoun) are sometimes written with a hyphen (see examples 6 and 7). The correct spelling is without a hyphen.

b) Åz is prefixed to the reflexive pronouns (in writing joined by a hyphen: Åz-åzem, åz-åzeè, åz-åze, etc. Åz always remains in its basic form, i.e., it is indeterminate. The second component – the reflexive pronoun – takes the case endings required by the verb (postposition) governing it. Note: The difference between this construction and that treated under a) is rather subtle. Though in English both are rendered the same way, in Tatar they do not sound the same stylistically. Åz being indeterminate, it lacks the nuance of concretizing the subject of the action.

Examples: · Inde ïw åtkäh åz-åzemne ärlärgä genä kaldy: nikadär berkatly bulganmyn ikän! (Gaziz Mãxämmätwin, Jãräktäge ïzlär.) After the matter was already over, there remained for me only to reproach myself. How naive had I obviously been! · Nägyjmä. ... Avyr bulsa da, tåzärgä tyryw, Miènulla, åz-åzeène betermä. (Kärim Ämiri, Taè vakyty.) Näghimä. ... Though it is difficult, try to endure it, Mingnulla, don’t you kill yourself (lit., finish yourself). · Kewe ãhen iè kyeny – åz-åzen tãwenå. (B.M. Miftaxov, Tatar tele.) The most difficult thing for man is to understand himself. · Älxasyjl bu turyda ata uldan riza, uly da bu kãngä kadär åz-åzennän riza ide. (Wärif Kamal, Wäkert.) In a word, about this the father was pleased with the son, the son too was, up to this day, pleased with himself. · – Kartaq belmi torgan kewelär bula inde wulaj! .. – dide Lokman, läkin bu îly ul åz-åzenä sãjlängän syman ide. (Xäsän Saráqn, Ätkäm çãnäre.) “Yes, for sure there are people who cannot get old!” said Loqman, but this time it was as though he spoke to himself. · Min åz-åzemne kyzganmyjm, åz-åzemä bik aqusyz, wäfkatásez bulasy kilä. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) I do not pity myself, I want to be very merciless, cruel to myself. 2. The acting person is expressed by a personal pronoun or by a noun: Åzem, åzeè, åze etc, follow immediately. Note: Depending on context and style, åzem, åzeè, åze etc., may also be used without the personal pronoun.

Examples: · Sãläjman. Sez bik ozak jãrdegez, sagywyp bettek sezlärne. Mariq. Bez åzebez dä sagynganga kårä genä kajttyk, ... (Sägyjtá Rämiev, Qwä, Zãbäjdä, qwim min.) Söleyman. You were gone very long; we missed you. Maria. We ourselves too returned only because we missed you ... · Dãres, ul åze bu turyda mièa bervakytta da äjtkäne îk. (Gadel Kutuj, Tapwyrylmagan xatlar.) True, he himself never spoke to me about this. · Galiäkbär åze dä, xatyny da bik ew /jáø/ xälemne belä bawladylar. (ibid.) Ghäliäkbär himself, as well as his wife, began to inquire very often about my situation (i.e., family situation). · – Æyelywlarga habarga beräå dä kuwmyj, åzeè habasyè. (ibid.) “No one orders you to run to the meetings, you run there yourself.”

159

· ·

· ·

·

Æämilä. Soè sin åzeè Ãfegä barsaè nihek bulyr ikän? (Galiäsgar Kamal, Bäxetsez eget.) Iämilä. Now, if you yourself went to Ufa, how would that be? – Anysyn åzegez dä bik qxwy beläsez dip ujlyjm, – dide Moxtar. (Wärif Kamal, Taè atkanda.) “I think that you yourself know that very well too,” said Mokhtar. Ni bulganyn Xäsän åze dä belmi ide. (Läbibä Ixsanova, Ana kãndälege.) Even Khäsän himself did not know what had happened. Woferlar åzläre dä kyhkyryrga totyndylar: – Nik tuktadyk? (Gaziz Mãxämmätwin, Jãräktäge ïzlär.) The drivers themselves also began to shout: “Why did we stop?” Äje, monda gaepneè zurysy Käramnyè åzenä tãwä. (Wamil Bikhurin, Tirän katlam.) Yes, the greater blame falls here on Käram himself.

[405] The intensive pronoun in the 3rd person singular may be used to emphasize such shades of meaning as confirmation, negation, definition, indifference, concession, pride, esteem, respect: · – Sindä ukygan Änvär tågelme soè, Ägâlä? – Näkâ åze, – dide Ägâlä Wakirovyh, ... (Galimæan Säjfetdinov, Ukytuhy.) “Isn’t that Änwär who studied under you (i.e., who was your student), Äghlä?” “Exactly,” said Äghlä Shakirovich, ... · ... Kazan. Karap karyjk, åzeène kårsätä alyrsyèmy ikän sin aèarga? Bolaj åze sineè turyda ïlek-ïlektän tãrle såz jãri ... Wulaj da, allaga wãker, sin äle åz urynyèda, ... (Fatix Xãsni, Altyn ïzläåhelär.) ... Kazan. Let’s see, will you (i.e., Kazan) be able to show yourself off to him? True, various stories have been going around about you since olden times, ... Nevertheless, thanks God, you are still in your own place. · Läkin plany baryp hykmady. Restoran bolaj åze inde ahylgan bulsa da, kyryjdagy ãstäl qnynda fyrt kiengän ber bajbäthä belän, ... sary hähle maræa kyzy gyna utyra ide. (ibid.) But his plan didn’t work out. True, although the restaurant was already open, there were only a snobbishly clad son of a rich man and a blond Russian girl ... sitting at a table to the side. [406] Åzem, åzeè, åze, etc. immediately followed by genä means ‘I by myself’, ‘you by yourself’, ‘he (she, it) by himself (herself, itself)’, etc., or ‘I alone’, ‘you alone’, ‘he (she, it) alone’, etc. in the sense of ‘apart from others’, ‘all by oneself’, ‘solitary’. Examples: · Nadq. Bar åzeè genä. Min äle beraz monda bulam. Mansur. Îk, sineè åzeène genä kaldyryp kitä almyjm. Kittek, Nadq! (Riza Iwmorat, Alar dårtäå ide.) Nadya. You go alone. I’ll still remain here a little. Mansur. No, I cannot go, leaving you all alone. Let’s go, Nadya! · – Bu xatny sin iè ïlek åzeè genä ukyp hyk. (Gadel Kutuj, Niwlärgä.) “First you read this letter by yourself.” · ... Käbirov, bålmädän kyhkyryp, Märáqmne karta ujnarga hakyrdy. – Ujnyjsy kilmi, åzegez genä ujnagyz, – dip Märáqm æavap kajtardy. (Wärif Kamal, Taè atkanda.) ... calling from the room, Käbirov invited Märyäm to play cards. Märyäm answered, “I don’t wish to play, you play by yourselves.” · ... ikenhe kãnne Turaj batyr auga åze genä hygyp kitä. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Turaj batyr.) ... the next day Turai the Strong goes out to hunt by himself.

160

[407] Åzem, åzeè, åze, etc. preceded by the cardinal number ber (written solid or separate) may have the same meaning as åzem genä, åzeè genä, åze genä, etc., or it may mean ‘exclusive of others’; ‘without anyone, anything else’: · Moxtar Wäräfi kartlarga baryp kergändä kart ber åze ãstäl qnynda ... utyra ide. (Wärif Kamal, Taè atkanda.) When Mokhtar dropped in at old Shäräfis’, the old man was sitting all alone ... at the table (i.e., there was no one else in the room). · – Menä sin bezgä bik zur xezmät kårsätteè, bez ãhäåläp ïwli almagan ïwne sin ber åzeè ïwlädeè. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Ãh kågärhen.) “There, you did us a very great service. The work which we three together could not do, you did by yourself.” [408] Ber åzem, ber åzeè, etc. immediately followed by genä means ‘I, you, etc. all, completely alone’, ‘I, you, etc., all, completely by myself, yourself, etc.’ · Bik ozak ul, ber åze genä, qr bawynnan arâqktagy eraklawyp bargan traktorhylarga karap tora. (Ämirxan Eniki, Koqwly irtä.) For a very long time he stood all alone, watching from the height of the (river) bank the tractor drivers, who were moving away on the other side (of the river). · Xäzer närsä, ... Fatyjma ber åze genä ïwli, æitmäsä xatyn-kyzlarga, irlärgä karaganda, ãhtän ber ãlew kenä tålilär. (Kärim Ämiri, Taè vakyty.) Now what, ... Fatima works all alone, and if that isn’t enough, they are paying women only one third of what they are paying men. · Daladagy qlgyz agah tãsle, tau bawynda beråze genä basyp torgan anasynyè wäåläsen kårågä, Sãläjmannyè jãräge kysyldy. (Kärim Tinhurin, Berenhe märæän.) It pulled at his heartstrings when Söleyman saw the silhouette of his mother standing all alone on top of the mountain like a lonely tree in the steppe.

Use of the Reflexive-Intensive Pronoun instead of the Personal Pronoun [409] Åzem, åzeè, åze, etc. are used instead of the respective personal pronouns when the speaker (writer) wishes to draw attention to, place special emphasis on, the person who is acting or acted upon, including himself (herself). Furthermore, by using the reflexiveintensive pronoun instead of the personal pronoun, the speaker may indicate his personal attitude – respect, admiration, friendship, liking, love, closeness – towards the person he is speaking of. Examples: · Gyjlámanov. Xalyk arasynda sezneè ber kuwamatygyz bar dilär, åzegezgä bilgeleme wul? (Mirsäj Ämir, Mièlekamal.) Ghilmanov. They say that among the people you have a nickname; is that known to you? (Emphasis on ‘you’). · Mièlekamal. ... Iè avyr, iè mäwäkatále ïwne soradym. At karauhy itep kujdylar åzemne. (ibid.) Minglekamal. ... I asked for the most strenuous, the most troublesome work. They placed me as a stable girl. · M. Wuèa åpkälim: åzegez avylybyznyè oly keweläre. ... såzegez çärkem ãhen ata såze. Ä åzegez avylybyznyè adäm mäsxäräsenä kaluyna ïhegez powmyjha, tynyh kyna karap torgansyz. (ibid.) M. I am angry at this: you are the elders (i.e., the respected men) of our village. ... your word is the word of a father for everyone.

161

Yet, without feeling bad about it, you have quietly looked on as you became the laughingstock of the village. (The speaker criticizes them, but esteems them and wishes them well.)

Tälgatá. ... Min äle bala hakta uk, åzebez torgan avylnyè kart kãtåhesenä iqrep, basuga hykkalyj idem. (Xäj Vaxit, Berenhe mäxäbbät.) Tälghät. ... Even when I was still a child I repeatedly went out into the field, accompanying the old shepherd of the village in which we lived. · Gosman. Nursänä, sin Räxiläneè dusty, kièäw bir åzenä. ... (ibid.) Ghosman. Nursänä, you are Räkhilä’s friend, give her advice. ... · Tälgaá (Räxilägä). Kiräk ikän, min sãjli alam. Läkin åzeèä genä ... (ibid.) Tälghät (to Räkhilä). If it is (really) necessary, I can tell. But only you ... (Expresses

·

friendship, closeness.)

Îk, iptäwlär, minnän bulmyj ... Mostafa iè mäslixät kewe. Åze qwá, kãhle çäm buldykly. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) “No, comrades, for me it’s not possible ... Mostafa is the man most apt and suitable (for the job). He is young, strong and capable.” (Expresses esteem and admiration.) · Ilaçi, kãne dä kãne! Åze tyn, åze nurly, åze æyly, äjterseè balahakta kårgän bäjräm irtäse! (Ämirxan Eniki, Waqru.) My God, what a (beautiful) day! It is calm, it is glorious, it is warm, as if it were a holiday morning she had seen in (her) childhood! · Ruzanov. Kaçarman babalaryè belän gorurlanasyè. Moèa xakyè bar. Ämma åzeè... Närsä zwliseè soè åzeè! (Gabdelxäj Sabitov, Hulpan taèny uqta.) Ruzanov. You are proud of your heroic forefathers. You have the right to that. But you... What are you doing then! (Emphasis and well-meant criticism.) · Fatyjma. ... Kara äle, Säfär! Sin Miènulla abyj belän soègy märtäbä kajda ohrawtyè? Safär. ... Nigä? Kaqn iseèä tãwte äle ul? Fatyjma. ... Bolaj gyna ... Isemä tãwte dä kyzganyp kujdym åzen. (Kärim Ämiri, Taè vakyty.) Fatima. ... Look, Säfär! Where did you last meet with Mingnulla? Säfär. ... Why? However did he come to mind? Fatima. ... Just so ... He came to mind and I suddenly felt sorry for him.

·

The Pronoun åz [410] Åz preceding nouns with possessive suffixes means ‘own’: Åz jortym ‘my own house’, åz akhaè ‘your own money’, åz æire ‘his own land’, åz kitabybyz ‘our own book’. · Ul mièa ... åz telendä närsäder sãjli bawlyj. (Mirgaziqn Înys, Såäew kanaly.) ... he starts to tell me something in his own language. · Sadyjk. ... Sin åz æaeèny åzeè kara ... Säfär. ... Älbättä, åz æaemny åzem kararmyn. (Kärim Ämiri, Taè vakyty.) Sadiq. ... You look after your own affairs yourself ... Säfär. ... Of course, I shall look after my own affairs myself. · Sadyjk. ... Bez any åzebez, åz kullarybyz belän qulap alyrga tiewbez. (ibid.) Sadiq. ... We must win it (i.e., a better life) ourselves, with our own hands.

162

Reciprocal Pronouns [411] Reciprocity is expressed by: 1. Reciprocal verbs (883, 884 a.), 2. Reciprocal pronouns governed by transitive verbs or postpositions. The reciprocal pronouns are formed by reduplication of the numeral ber: ber-ber, plus the possessive suffixes: ber-berebez ‘we ... each other, one another’, ber-beregez ‘you ... each other, one another’, ber-bere, ber-berse, ber-berläre ‘they ... each other, one another’. The various case endings required by the verb or postposition governing the reciprocal pronoun are joined to the possessive suffixes. [412] The reciprocal pronouns are primarily used: a) With verbs which in Tatar cannot be made into true reciprocal verbs. For example: Uku ‘to read’, ïwläå ‘to work’. b) With verbs whose reciprocal form has a different meaning. For example: Belå ‘to know’, belewå ‘to ask (about), make inquiries (about)’, bålå ‘to interrupt’, bålewå ‘to divide’, ‘to share’. Examples of the use of the reciprocal pronouns: Alar, ber-beren belmilär ide, alar Taçirny gyna belälär ide. (Xäsän Saráqn, Ätkäm çãnäre.) They did not know each other, they only knew Tahir. · Duslar ozak ellar kårewmägän, ber-bersen sagyngannar, ... (Wamil Bikhurin, Tirän katlam.) The friends had not seen each other for long years, they had missed each other, ... · Bez ber-berebezgä äkrenläp iqläwä bawladyk. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) Little by little we began to get used to each other. · Ohrawkanda isänläwäbez, ä kunakka jãrewå îk. Hãnki ber-berebezdän kurkabyz. (ibid.) When we meet we greet each other, but there is no mutual visiting because we are afraid of each other. · Alarnyè kåèelendä älegä, ... ber-bersennän oqlu-tartynu ãstenlek itä ide bugaj. (Nurixan Fättax, Ätil suy aka torur.) Up to now, ... obviously, bashfulness and shyness of each other were still prevailing in their hearts. · · Kajhan bez ber-berse belän talawyp, yzgywyp qwägän tarkau uluslarny, yrularny berläwterep, bãek Bolgar jort1) kora alyrbyz?! (ibid.) “When shall we be able to unite the tribes, the kin which live dispersed, quarreling and bickering with each other, and build a great Bolghar home (i.e., state)!” · Xädihä. Ber-beregezne äåväldän belä idegezmeni? (Mirsäj Ämir, Tormyw æyry.) Khädichä. You knew each other before, didn’t you? · – Îk, bulmyj, anyè belän genä bulmyj, barysyn da tãptän ujlarga kiräk. Berbereène synap, ber-bereèä tämam ywanyp betkäh kenä bawlarga kiräk ul tormywny. Ä menä sez ywanasyzmy ber-beregezgä? (Säet Wäkårov, Mäxäbbät gazaby.) “No, it won’t work, with that (i.e., with a promise) alone it won’t work, one must think about it all thoroughly. That life (i.e., married life) one must begin only after having tested one another and after having come to completely believe in one another. Now, do you believe in each other?” ·

Note: For the use of the second person singular in indefinite personal sentences see 1023. 1)

Used without possessive to distinguish it from jort ‘house’: Bolgar jorty ‘house of a Bolghar’, ‘a Bolghar house’.

163

[413] Ber-ber permits comparison. Both components take the same possessive suffix, the first also takes the ablative case ending. The adjective denoting the higher degree of quality in the person or object expressed by the second component takes the suffix +rak, +räk, or it appears in its basic form: · Bersennän-berse usalrak, bersennän-berse jãgänsezräk ugyllary da anyè atalarynnan ber dä kalywmyjlar ide. (Nurixan Fättax, Ätil suy aka torur.) His sons too, one even nastier than the other, one even more unbridled than the other, were every bit like their father. · Gosman. ... Bersennän-berse hibär ike kyzym bar, ... (Xäj Vaxit, Kåk kapusy ahyla.) Ghosman. ... I have two daughters, one even prettier than the other, ... · – At habywyn kararga qratam! Æide at kitte. Bersennän-berse sylu, zifa atlar, ... (Aqz Gyjläæev, Uramnar artynda qwel bolyn.) “I like to watch the horse races! Seven horeses ran. Horses, one even more graceful, more slender than the other, ...” · · Xäer, æilkenerlege dä bula wul. Nik disäè, bersennän-berse arslanrak bulyp malajlar åsep baralar. (Fatix Xãsni, Avyl ãstendä joldyzlar.) “By the way, he does have something to brag about. Why, you may ask. Well, his boys (lit., the boys) are growing up, one even more of a lion than the other.”

Demonstrative Pronouns [414] The demonstrative pronouns are: bu ‘this’, bolar ‘these’, wuwy ‘this’, ‘this (same) ... here’, wuwylar ‘these’, ‘these (same) ... here’, ul ‘that’ (farther away), alar ‘those’ (farther away), wul ‘that’, ‘that (same) ... there’, wular ‘those’, ‘those (same) ... there’, tege ‘that’ (farther away), ‘that ... there’, tegelär ‘those’ (farther away), ‘those ... there’, mondyj ‘such’ (like this), ‘this kind of’, pl. mondyjlar; wuwyndyj ‘such’ (like this /same/ ... here), ‘this (same) kind of’, pl. wuwyndyjlar; andyj ‘such’ (like that), ‘that kind of’, pl. andyjlar; wundyj ‘such’ (like that /same/ ... there); that same kind of; pl. wundyjlar; tegendi ‘such’ (like that ... there), ‘that kind of’, pl. tegendilär, bolaj ‘in this manner’, ‘in this way’, ‘so’ (like this), wuwylaj ‘in this (same) manner ... here’, ‘in this (same) way ... here’, ‘so’ (like this ... here), alaj ‘in that manner’, ‘in that way’, ‘so’ (like that), wulaj ‘in that (same) manner’, ‘in that (same) way’, ‘so’ (like that ... there), tegeläj ‘in that manner ... there’, ‘in that way ...’, ‘so’ (like that, like that ... there). To the above may be added menä ‘this is, these are’, ‘here is, are’, and änä ‘that is, those are’, ‘there is, are’, when they are used to point out a person or thing (for menä and änä as particles see 711). [415] Demonstrative pronouns can be adjectives or nouns. Exceptions are the demonstrative adverbs bolaj, wuwylaj, alaj, wulaj, tegeläj, and menä and änä. Though regarded as demonstratives when pointing out persons or things, menä and änä cannot function as nouns or adjectives. [416] When used as nouns, demonstrative pronouns are declined as shown below: SINGULAR Nom. bu Gen. monyè Dat. moèa Acc. mony Loc. monda Abl. monnan 164

wuwy wuwynyè wuwyèa wuwyny wuwynda wuwynnan

ul anyè aèa any anda annan

wul wunyè wuèa wuny wunda wunnan

tege tegeneè tegeèä tegene tegendä tegennän

PLURAL Nom. bolar

wuwylar

alar

wular

tegelär

The plural is declined like that of any other noun. Bu, wuwy, wul, tege also have the following forms: In the dative: moèar, moèarga, wuwyèar, wuwyèarga. wuèar, wuèarga, tegeèär, tegeèärgä. In the loccative: moèarda, wuwyèarda, wuèarda, tegeèärdä. In the ablative: moèardan, wuwyèardan, wuèardan, tegeèärdän. Like the corresponding forms of ul (comp. 396), these refer in most cases to persons, but may refer also to things. Bolaj, wuwylaj, alaj, wulaj and tegeläj are, as a rule, not declined. However, they may sometimes take the dative and certain other suffixes (Examples 423). Note: Bu, wuwy, ul, wul, tege in the locative and ablative are also used as adverbs of place and time. The dative of wul – wuèa, wuèarga is used as an adverb of cause meaning ‘therefore’. Bu, ul, wul in their dative case in +ar plus the suffix +hy form the adverbs of time moèarhy ‘til, up to now’, ‘up to this time’, aèarhy ‘up to then’, ‘up to that time’, wuèarhy ‘up to that (same) time’. Tegendä dä monda da ‘here and there’ (lit., there and here), wunnan ‘from there’. Alar anda utyralar. They are sitting there. Min sièa monnan ike atna ïlek ike xat qzgan idem. (Gadel Kutuj, Tapwyrylmagan xatlar.) Two weeks ago I wrote (lit., had written) you two letters.

– Alar minem ukytuny qratmyj ãjlärenä kajtyp kittelär çäm, minem fikeremhä, qèadan mädräsägä kilmäqhäklär. – Bu bit bezdä moèarhy bulgan xäl tågel, Gabdulla äfände! (Äxmät Fäjzi, Tukaj.) “They did not like my teaching and left for their homes. And in my opinion, they will not come back to the medrese again.” “But this is a situation we have not had up to now, Mister Ghabdulla.” · Kyznyè gadilege, ïhkersezlege, keweleklelege mine æiède. Aèarhy åzem turynda bik az kewelärgä ahylganym bar ide ... (Gurij Tavlin, Afät.) The girl’s simplicity, her sincerity, her decency, overwhelmed me. Up to then I had opened up about myself only to very few people ...

·

Monarhy, anarhy, etc. may be used with the dative case and a postposition governing it. However, there is no difference between this construction and the form without the dative case and postposition. For example: · ... ul (Fätxi) Mädinäneè qzmywy belän waktyj kyzyksyndy, any kårå teläge uqndy. Läkin moèarhyga xätle avylga kajtuga çih tä uèajly vakyt tury kiterä almagan ide. Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) ... he (i.e., Fätkhi) became very interested in Mädinä’s fate. The wish to see her awoke (in him). But up to now he had never been able to find a suitable time to return to (i.e., visit) the village.

Use of the Demonstrative Pronouns [417] Bu is used to point out persons, things, or ideas present, near in place, time, or thought, just mentioned, or spoken of now. · Ïjdä, bez bu egetne åzebezneè çãnärlärgä ãjrätik äle, ... – dilär. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Ãh kågärhen.) “Come, let’s teach this young man our skills, ... they say.” · Boryn zamanda bar ide ber patwa. Bu patwanyè xatyny bik hibär ide. (ibid. Ak båre.) In ancient times there was a king. The (lit., This) king’s wife was very pretty. · – Min – Isänbäk abyeè ... 1904 (meè tugyz jãz dårtenhe) elnyè 13 (unãhenhe) dekabrenda tuganmyn. Kolak sal – unãhenhe ... Bu kãnne kewelär oly ïwkä 165

totynmyjlar, îlga hykmyjlar ... (Äxsän Baqnov, Dekabrányè unãhenhe kãne.) “I am your older brother Isänbäk ... I was born the thirteenth of December, 1904. Listen – the thirteenth ... On this day people do not begin any major work, they do not set out on a trip ...” · ... babajnyè bu såzläre mine kanägatáländerep /qðnaôðtlðnderep/ betermäde. Îk, kart qxwylap kårmägänder, bu – ul, Narhatka! (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Kart mukwy.) ... these words of the old man did not (fully) satisfy me. No, the old man had apparently not got a good look at her. This was she, Narchatka. (For beterå functioning as an auxiliary verb see 1333.) ·

·

· ·

· · ·

· ·

Idris Kurt belän tanywty: – bu bezneè Kazan kunagy, äbekäj. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Uramnar artynda qwel bolyn.) Idris introduced Kurt (to her): “This is our Kazan guest, Grandma dear.” – ... sin bezgä zur xezmät kårsätteè, ... Monyè ãhen närsä belän rizalatyjk sine? (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Ãh kågärhen.) “... you have done us a great service, ... With what shall we repay you for this?” Mony iwetkäh, tãphek uly: – Mièa da rãxsät bir, – dide. (ibid. Ak båre.) After hearing this the youngest son said, “Give me permission too, ...” Wul vakytny bu kewelärneè unberenhe malajlary tua. Moèarga Äxmät dip isem kuwalar. (ibid. Unberenhe Äxmät.) At that time these people’s eleventh boy is born. To this one (to him) they give the name Äkhmät. Mostafanyè xatyny Färxiæamal moèar karwy tãwte. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) Mostafa’s wife, Färkhijamal, opposed this. · Mièa monnan ary baryrga rãxsät îk. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Ak båre.) “I am not allowed to go beyond this (place).” Bolar åz kul kãhläre belän kãn kåråhe urtaha tormywly kewelär bulgannar. (ibid. Unberenhe Äxmät.) These were average people who were earning their living through the strength of their own hands. [Patwa] ... min bolarnyè biwesenä biw kyzymny biräm, – di. (ibid.) [The king] says: “... I’ll give my five daughters to these five” (lit., to the five of these). Unãh bolarny iwetkännän soè sãenä-sãenä hygyp kitä. (ibid. Unãh.) After hearing these (words), the thirteen leave happy.

[418] Wuwy is more emphatic, more concrete than bu. It points out persons, things, or ideas present, near in place, time, or thought to which special attention is directed, or which are known or have just been mentioned or are being mentioned, or about which further details follow. Being emphatic, wuwy often conveys the idea of ‘this same’, ‘exactly this same’. · – Gafu itegez, – dide Xämit, – bezgä Äxmädullin Mirzaçit digän kewe kiräk ide. Ul wuwy fatirda tora bit? – Äje, ul wuwynda tora, – dide xatyn. “Pardon me”, said Khämit, “we are looking for (lit., we would need) a man named Äkhmädullin Mirzahit. He does live here in this apartment?” “Yes, he lives (right) here”, said the woman. · ... Zãnnån allaçy tägalädän /tðôðlðdðn/, qlvaryp sorarga totyndy ... Irtänge namazdan soè Zãnnån çärvakyt bala hakta ätisennän otkan wuwy dogany kabatlyj ide. (Mirgaziqn Înys, Ïnæe ïzläåhelär.) ... Zönnün began to beseech God ... After the morning prayer, Zönnün always repeated this (same) prayer which he had learned from his father when he was a child.

166

– Wuwy bulamyni inde kiqvegez? – Bulahak kiqvegez, – dip tãzätergä awykty Lena. (Äxsän Baqnov, Qwálegemne zzlim.) “Well, this then is your husband?” “Your future husband,” corrected Lena hastily. · Ajdarnyè Çawim kart alahygy qnyna kajtyp kitåe bik ixtimal ide. Mãgaen, ul wuwy îlny sajlagandyr. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Uramnar artynda qwel bolyn.) It was very possible that Aidar went to the cabin of the old man Hashim. He probably chose this road here. · – Menä wuwynda hababyz, ... Sin menä wuwynnan ura bawla, dide Mãzäkir ... (ibid.) “Here, we cut (i.e., make hay) right here, ... You start reaping right from here,” said Mözakir ... · Bergä tatu qwägän haklarda da çär kãn ïwtän kajtkah, wuwyèar oxwawly xällär turynda sãjli torgan ide ul. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) Even when they had lived together peacefully, she had talked about things like these (i.e., similar to the things she was talking about now) every day after she returned from work. ·

[419] Ul is used to point out persons, things, or ideas farther away in place, time, or thought, either mentioned or not mentioned before. · ... ber xatyn ... räsemne seèelese Zãlfiqneè ber dus kyzyna oxwatuyn äjtte. Ul kyz Qkty Tauda qwi ikän. (Mägâsåm Nasyjbullin, Telsez waçitlär.) ... a woman ... said that the picture resembled a girl friend of Zölfiä’s, her younger sister. That girl apparently lives in Yaqty Taw. · Bälki Sattarov xaklydyr da. Ul täæribäle kewe rajonny biw barmagy kebek belä. (ibid.) Perhaps Sattarov is right. That experienced man knows the area like the back of his hand (lit., like his five fingers). · Minem isemgä Qltadan ber xat kilep tãwte. ... Min ul vakytta Simferopolá Tel, ädäbiqt gyjlámi tikwerenå institutynda ïwli idem. (Galimæan Ibraçimov turynda istäleklär, K. Æamanakly.) A letter came (unexpectedly) to my address (lit., to my name) from Yalta. ... At that time I was working at the Simferopol’ Scientific Research Institute for Language and Literature. · Ul gyna da tågel ïle. Monda wular ãstenä mine kyzyksyndyra torgan ikenhe ber bik mãçim säbäp dä bar ide. (ibid. Säjfi Kudaw.) Not only that. In addition to those (matters), there was also another, very important reason here which interested me. · Bernihä gasyr buena bu däålätneè bawkalasy Bolgar, qki, ... Bãek Bolgar wäçäre bulgan. Xäzerge vakytta ul urynda Bolgar avyly tora. (S.S. Ajdarov, N.D. Aksenova, Bolgar wäçäre.) For several centuries, the capital of this state was the city of Bolghar, or, ... Great Bolghar. Today, the village of Bolghar stands at that place. Note: Bernihä requires its noun in the singular.

[420] Wul is more concrete than ul. It is used to point out persons, things, or ideas farther away in place, time, or thought to which special attention is directed, or which are more or less known to the interlocutor, or have been mentioned before. It often conveys the idea of ‘that same’, ‘exactly that same’. · – ... garizany kire alyrga kiräk. – Sez dä wul kièäwne biräsezme? (Aqz Gyjläæev, Uramnar artynda qwel bolyn.) “... the petition must be withdrawn.” “You too are giving that (same) advice?”

167

·

·

·

·

·

·

· ·

– Æaj hyksa, minem tugan avylyma kajtyrga tyryw. Ul avyl Idel isemle danlykly elga buenda. Tokymybyz wul tirägä taralgan. Ata-babalarybyznyè sãqkläre wul æirdä qta. (Mirgaziqn Înys, Ïnæe ïzläåhelär.) “When the opportunity arises, try to return to my native village. That village is on the famous river called Volga. Our clan is spread out in that neighborhood (area). Our ancestors’ bones rest in that (same) ground.” – Tägaen /Tðôðjen/, Latifnyè ätise Taliqgä ber genä xat qzmagandyr. Wularnyè bälki berärse saklangandyr äle. (Atilla Rasix, Kaçarmannar îly.) “Precisely, Latif’s father probably did not write Taliä only one letter. Perhaps some of them (those) are still preserved.” Xäbibraxman Aláfredny ãh kãn kãtte, wunnan soè kartnyè sabyrlygy tämam bette. (ibid.) Khäbibrakhman waited three days for Alfred; after that, the old man finally lost his patience. Näkâ wul hakta iqrle atka atlangan ber eget ... kapkadan hygyp kitte. (Ämirxan Eniki, Æiz kyègyrau.) Exactly at that time a youth, riding a saddle horse, ... left through the gate. Xäer, minem uem alarda tågel, bawkada ide: ni ãhen tabynda qwá käläw åze îk – wuèa bik gaæäplänep utyram. (ibid.) By the way, my thoughts were not with them, but with something else: Why is the young bride herself not at the table? I am very amazed at that. – Bu egetne kem dip beläbez inde? Xatyn wuny kãtkändäj, gaæäp ber ãlgerlek belän ... Bu ... Äxtäm bula, – dide. (ibid.) “Do we know who this young man might be?” As though she had waited for (just) that, the woman said with an amazing promptness ... “This is ... Äkhtäm.” Rabiga. ... Wunnan ni buldy, Zilä. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Bez unike kyz idek.) “Rabighä. ... After that what happened, Zilä?” Äsma. ... wuèardan da tämleräk såz îk inde ul kyzlar ãhen ... (Riza Iwmorat, Serle moè.) Äsma. ... For those girls there is surely no more pleasant conversation than that ...

[421] Tege is used: a) To point out visible persons or things farther away from the speaker. · – Qxwy, – dide Raxmanov, – tege bålmägä alyp kerep sãjläwä torygyz. Buwagah sezneè qnga hygarmyn. (Atilla Rasix, Urlangan xäzinä.) “Good”, said Rakhmanov, “take him into that room there and talk a while. I shall join you immediately after I am free.” · ... Xäkim ... Usmanovlar dahasyn kårsätte: – Änä tege qwel tåbäne kåräsezme? (Aqz Gyjläæev, Uramnar artynda qwel bolyn.) · ... Khäkim ... showed (them) the Usmanovs’ cottage: “Do you see that green roof over there?” · Iwek aldynnan uramga uk hyktylar. – Tege qkka hygyjk, – dide kart, kuly belän izäp. (ibid.) From the yard they went right out into the street. “Let’s go that way,” said the old man, waving his hand. b) In conversation to refer to persons, things, or ideas, presenting them in a very concrete, vivid, tangible way, often conveying at the same time the speaker’s attitude towards them. Also, the persons, things, or ideas tege refers to are well known to the interlocutor and in most cases farther away in place, time or thought. · – Nigä soè tege vakyt wul qvyz kewe belän duslawtygyz? (Atilla Rasix, Urlangan xäzinä.) “Why then did you become friends with that evil man at that

168

· ·

·

·

time?” (i.e., at that time when all those events took place which were just related in the conversation). ¡ Tege vakytny min bit anyè turynda baryn sãjlädem. (ibid.) “But at that time I told (you) everything about him.” Rizvan åzeneè ïw bålmäsendä muzäjdan kilergä tiewle kewene kãtte. Tege kewe kilergä un minut vakyt bar äle. (ibid.) Rizwan waited in his office for the man who was to come from the museum. There are still ten minutes left until that man comes. · Äje, näkâ menä wul kãnne abyj qnyna ber kewe kerde. Xatyn kewe. ... Abyj tege xatynga kehkenä genä kaphyk birde. ... Tege xatyn kaphykny aldy ... Wunnan tege xatyn tiz genä hygyp kitte. (ibid.) “Yes, exactly on that very day someone came to (my) older brother. A woman. ... (My) brother gave that woman a rather small bag ... That woman took the bag. ... Then that woman left quickly.” ... bezne totyp, komendaturaga alyp kittelär. Sez kem, didelär. Min däwmim. Nigä däwmisez, dilär. Wunnan wul tege jãze kara inàener barysyn da sãjläp birde. (Atilla Rasix, Bäxet orlyklary.) ... they caught us and took us to the commandant’s office. “Who are you”, they asked (lit., said). I did not say a word. “Why don’t you speak”, they said (lit., say). Then that despicable engineer told them everything. (Pejorative; implies detestation, contempt, hate).

(For wul as intensifier see 428, inàener – mãçändis.) c) In opposition or contradistinction to another demonstrative pronoun, mostly bu. In this case, the persons or things pointed out by tege may be close to the speaker. · Jortnyè äle bu, äle tege iwegennän kewelär hygyp ïwkä awygalar. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Uramnar artynda qwel bolyn.) People are emerging now from this door, now from that door of the house and are hurrying to work. · Såzläre dä kilewte, fikerläre dä ber qkkarak qtty, xätta qratkan æyrlary da ber åk tãsle bulyp hykty. Îldawev, wularny uennan kiherep, tege-bu turyda sãjläwkäli tordy. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) They (i.e., Y. and the government official he has come to see) talked the same line, and their views too were much the same. Even the songs they loved turned out to be the same kind. With these things going through his mind, Yuldashev talked about one thing and the other (lit., about that and this). d) In opposition or contradistinction to several other demonstrative pronouns, usually bu and ul. In this case, tege points to persons or things far away from the speaker, bu refers to persons or things near to the speaker and ul to persons or things at a medium distance from the speaker. · Xäjrulla. Monda watlyk! ... Monda tuj! ... Anda moèlyk, qlgyzlyk! ... (erakka kårsätep). Tegendä sugyw! ... kanly sugyw! ... (Gaqz Isxakyj, Dålkyn ïhendä.) ‘Kheyrulla. Here, there is joy! ... Here, there is a wedding! .. Over there is grief, loneliness! ... (pointing into the distance). There (far away) is war! ... bloody war! [422] Tege may mean ‘other’: · Raziq (asrauga). Xäzer kilerlär, min azrak ãstem-bawymny alywtyryjm ... (tege bulmädän) boryh taptyèmy? (Gaqz Isxakyj, Dulkyn ïhendä.) Razia (to the maid). They’ll come in a minute (lit., now). I’ll just change a bit (my clothes) ... (from the other room), did you find pepper? · Takta divarnyè tege qgynda Tuktabaj ... belän Nurbak sãjläwälär. (Gaziz Mãxämmätwin, Jãräktäge ïzlär.) On the other side of the wooden wall Tuqtabai ... and Nurbaq are talking.

169

Demonstrative Adjectives and Adverbs [423] Mondyj, wuwyndyj, andyj, wundyj, tegendi and bolaj, wuwylaj, alaj, wulaj, tegeläj. Mondyj, wuwyndyj, etc. are demonstrative adjectives, bolaj, wuwylaj, etc. are demonstrative adverbs. The demonstrative adjectives are used to point out, in a general way, a property (quality), often also the degree, intensity of the property. The demonstrative adverbs indicate comparison or degree. Being derived from the demonstrative pronouns bu, wuwy, ul, wul, tege, both the demonstrative adjectives and adverbs are used analogously to the former, i.e., they point out properties, etc. which are near or farther away in place, time, or thought. · Mondyj sorauga xäzerlänmägän qwá eget nihek itep tä æavap birergä belmäde, ... (Gadel Kåtuj, Soltannyè ber kãne.) The young man, who was not prepared for such a question, didn’t know how to answer, ... · Bågen ql kãne. Mondyj kãndä nihek ãjdä utyrmak kiräk. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Qwel Qr.) Today is a day of rest. On such a day how is one to sit at home. · Bik kåèelle, bik sãjkemle æirdä utyra ikän bu Kehkenä Abzan. Min åzem nigäder menä wuwyndyj irken, matur tabigatátä utyrgan kehkenä, æyjnak avyllarny kåbräk qratam. (Ämirxan Eniki, Æiz kyègyrau.) It turned out that this (village of) Kechkenä Abzan sat on a very pleasant, very lovely spot. For some reason, I myself love more the small, neat villages which are set in such free, beautiful nature (as this here). · ... ul bary tik student çäm Gäåçärgä qxwy tormyw båläk itärgä xyqllana gyna ide. Andyj närsä isä ukyp betermihä mãmkin tågel. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Qwel Qr.) ... he was only a student and dreamed only of giving Gäwhär a good life. But such a thing would not be possible without finishing his studies. · Ajdar wundyj aèly, tere malaj ... (Aqz Gyjläæev, Uramnar artynda qwel bolyn.) Aidar is such an intelligent, lively boy ... · ... kåplär Gäåçärneè wundyj säläte barlygyn berenhe tapkyr beldelär. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Qwel Qr.) ... many learned for the first time that Gäwhär had such a talent. · Æomga kãn az gyna qègyr sibälägän ide, ä bågen wundyj aqz, wundyj tyn, wundyj æyly, ... (ibid.) On Friday it drizzled a little, and today it is so clear, so quiet, so warm, ... · Ul tegendi-mondyj gyna æyrhy tågel. (Vakyjf Nurullin, Ul qwärgä tiew ide.) She is not just any (lit., such and such) singer (i.e., not just any average singer). · · Bolaj bulmyj bit, Taliq. Aknazarga tärbiq kiräk. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Qwel Qr.) “It can’t go on like this, Taliä. Aqnazar needs an education.” · – Gãlgãl, ... kunakny sin nihegräk kåz aldyèa kiteräseè? ... – Min any menä bolajrak itep kåz aldyma kiteräm: ... (Mäxmåt Xäsänov, Wãgerovlar.) “Gölgöl, ... how do you picture the guest – more or less?” ... “I picture him more or less like this: ...” · Mälikä. Belmim, Xäqt xanym, ni ãhen qrata torganbyzdyr sezne. Xäqt. Nigä qratkanyèny belmiseème? Menä wuwylaj itep äjtä alganyè ãhen. Upkälär dip, ahulanyr dip kurkyp tormyjha. (Xäj Vaxit, Mäxäbbäteè hyn bulsa.) Mälikä. I don’t know, lady Khäyat, why we seem to love you. Khäyat. You don’t know why you love me? Well, because you can talk to me like this (i.e., as she just did, saying 170

·

· ·

·

·

·

things which normally would offend a person or arouse a person’s anger), without being afraid that I will be offended or get angry. – Alaj ãmetle ïw belän jãrgäh nigä soè abyeè karwy? (Mäxmåt Xäsähnov, Wãterovlar.) “Since he is occupied with such promising work (a work which is so promising), why then is your older brother against it?” – Alarga bezneè räxmätebezne belderegez. – Wulaj itärbez. (ibid.) “Convey our thanks to them.” “We shall do so.” · Gäåçär, vakyt kåpme soè? ... niwläp wulaj irtä tordyè? (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Qwel Qr.) “Gäwhär, what time is it then? ... why did you get up so early?” Kajhagynda tormywtagy bik näni vakyjgalar da çih kãtelmägän zur nätiæälär kiterep hygara, ... Bu îly da wulajga kitte ïw, ... (Aqz Gyjläæev, Ätäh mengän hitängä.) Sometimes in life, very small events lead to completely unexpected big consequences, ... This time, too, things went that way, ... Sufiq anyè täkâdimenä nä tegeläj, nä bolaj æavap kajtarmyjha basyp toruynda buldy. (Ibraçim Gazi, Gaepsez gaeplelär.) Sufia continued to stand (there), responding to his proposition neither one way nor the other. Monda berkem dä sine tegesen tegeläj it, busyn bolaj it, dip ãjrätep tormyj. (Fail Wäfigullin, Ãj salunyè nie bar.) Here nobody instructs you to do that (thing there) that way, this (thing here) this way (lit., ... instructs you, saying, ‘do that (thing there) that way, do this (thing here) this way’).

[424] Menä, änä are close in their lexical meaning to the demonstratives, menä pointing to persons, things, or ideas closer by in place, time, or thought, änä pointing to persons, things, or ideas farther away. They may be used: a) Independently as demonstrative words. · Gosman. Menä närsä, talawasyè kilä ikän – talaw, ämma hygyryènan hykmyjha. (Xäj Vaxit, Kåk kapusy ahylsa.) Ghosman. Here is what, if you do want to argue, argue, but without losing your temper. · Menä avyl. ... Menä warlap tãwkän su tavywy iwetelde, ... – dimäk, tegermän. (Irwat Vergasov, Kyrym partizannary.) Here is the village. ... Here one heard the sound of water thundering down, ... – that means, it’s the mill. · Anda ygy-zygy, ... Ä monda tyn ... Änä altyn sary kåk. Änä kyzgylt qftakly tal kuaklary ... Änä kow sajryj, hyn kow. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Uramnar artynda qwel bolyn.) Over there is commotion, ... But here it is quiet ... Over there is that golden yellow sky ... There, are those rose willows with their reddish leaves ... There, a bird is singing, a real bird! · Änä patwa kyzy gåzäl Narhatka (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Kart mukwy.) There is the king’s daughter, beautiful Narchatka. b) In conjunction with demonstrative pronouns to intensify the latter’s demonstratiuve meaning. Menä is then commonly used with demonstrative pronouns pointing to nearby persons, things, or ideas, while änä is used with those referring to persons, things, or ideas farther away. · · Menä bu kewe turynda såzebez bar, ... (Gomär Bäwirov, Sivaw.) “We have something to say (lit., we have a word) about this man here, ...” · – Menä bu närsä, tanyjsyèmy? – dip kårsätte. – Alaj bulgah, sin belmäsäè, min äjtäm: Menä busy sineè ãlkän agaè, änä ul qnynda qtkan tawlar anyè batyr soldatlary. Alar minem såzemä karwy kildelär dä, min alarny menä bu surätkä kerttem, – dide. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Ak båre.) “This thing here, do you recognize it?” said he, pointing at it. “So if you do not know it, I’ll tell you: This 171

·

·

·

·

one here is your oldest brother, those stones there which are lying beside him are his brave soldiers. They disobeyed my word and I turned them into this shape here,” he said. Vasil änä wul soraularga æavap ïzläde. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) Those were the questions Wasil sought an answer to (i.e., the question he had asked himself). Tanyw æirlär ih bolar! ... Änä tege tauda ätise belän taw hygargannar ide. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Ãh arwin æir.) These are familiar places, after all! ... On that mountain there he and his father had dug out rocks. Inde aktka kul kuqrga ãhenhe kewe tabylmasa, ike imza æitmägänmeni? Îldawev änä wulaj uj jãrtte. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) If a third person won’t be found to sign the report (statement), wouldn’t perhaps two signatures be sufficient? Yuldashev reasoned that way. Vasilnyè bawynnan änä wundyj ujlar åtte. (ibid.) Such were the thoughts (i.e., the thoughts related in the preceding sentence) which passed through Wasil’s head.

[425] When used as nouns, bu, wuwy, ul, wul, tege, mondyj, wuwyndyj, andyj, wundyj, tegendi may take the possessive suffix of the third person: Singular. Monysy (or: busy), wuwysy, anysy, wunysy, tegese, mondye (mondùí), wuwyndye (øuøíndùí), andye (andùí), wundye (øundùí), tegendie (tegendie). Plural. Bolary, wuwylary, alary, wulary, tegeläre, mondyjlary, wuwyndyjlary, andyjlary, wundyjlary, tegendiläre. They are then declined as is any other noun with the possessive suffix of the third person: Monysy (busy), monysynyè (busynyè), monysyna (busyna), monysyn (busyn), monysynda (busynda), monysynnan (busynnan). Bolary, bolarynyè, bolaryna, bolaryn, bolarynda, bolarynnan. Anysy, anysynyè, anysyna, anysyn, anysynda, anysynnan, etc. [426] Demonstrative pronouns with the possessive suffix of the third person serve to refer to and to single out persons, things, or ideas which are either near or farther away in place, time, or thought and which have been mentioned before: · Räjxan. ... Ä minem æyr däftärem! Bibkäj. Alyp kajttym. Menä. Räjxan. I, menä monysy ãhen räxmät tä räxmät! Monysy mièa bigräk tä kaderle kåhtänäh. (Näkyj Isänbät, Räjxan.) Reykhan. ... But my songbook! Bibkey. I brought it. Here it is. Reykhan. Oh, thanks, thanks again for this! This is for me an especially dear present. · – Kartlah, min Räkyjp belän sãjläwtem. – Äje ... – Kajt, di. Hakyra. – Menä busy akylly kièäw. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Uramnar artynda qwel bolyn.) “I talked with Räqip, old fellow.” “I see ...” “He’s inviting me back – come back, he says.” “Now, this is sensible advice.” · Tyèladym sezne, ... Kåzemne ahtygyz. Kuasyzmy, îkmy, anysyn åzegez xäl itärsez, ... (ibid.) “I have listened to you, ... You have opened my eyes. Whether or not you are going to fire me, that you yourself will decide, ...” · Berenhe ãh keweneè iseme äjtelde. Alary kilmägän bulyp hykty. (Garif Axunov, Gomer îly.) The names of the first three men were called. These, it turned out, had not come. · – Ä iskelären baryber tålärgä tury kilähäk. Alarynnan kotylu îk. (Äxsän Baqnov, Æäj belän æäj arasy.) “But the old ones (i.e., the old taxes) you’ll have to pay anyway. There is no escape from those.” 172

– Älbättä, wulaj. Bez bu turyda åzara sãjläwkän idek inde. – Sez sãjläwkänsezder, anysynda wigem îk. (Säet Wäkårov, Kyz birå.) “Of course, that’s how it is. We had already talked about this among ourselves.” “You probably talked about it, I have no doubt about that.” · Zäkiq. ... Sin wunysyn gyna kara: menä Sabira apany al. Kehkenä bujly, handyr gyna, îaw kyna xatyn. (Mirsäj Ämir, Nailä.) Zäkiä. ... Just look at that: (Here), take Sabira. She is a small, rather slim, rather gentle woman. (But her workteam ·

placed first, ahead of that of a strong male leader.)

·

·

·

·

·

Ajtugan. Tukta, Äxmätwa, anysyn tawla, menä monysynnan bawla. (Kärim Tinhurin, Il.) Aitughan. Hold it, Äkhmätsha, leave that one, here, start with this one. Xädihä. ... Belmägännären Kazandagy galimnärgä xat qzyp soryj. Märgubä. Tegeläre dä irenmi, digen. Xädihä. Irenmilär. Tagyn qz, dilär, kitaplar æibärälär. (Mirsäj Ämir, Tormyw æyry.) Khädichä. ... What she does not know she asks about by writing letters to scholars in Kazan. Märghubä. Say, they are not idle either. Khädichä. No, they are not. Write again, they say, and they send books. Wäjxulla. ... Safiullaga qzasyèmy? Fatyjma. Äje, babaj, närsälär qzyjm soè? Wäjxulla. ... Wärifullanyè orden alganyn äjt. Märgubä. Anysyn qzgan idek inde. Wäjxulla. Tagyn qz ... Märgubä. Æamalyj xatynynyè irgä hyguyn da äjtäseème? Wäjxulla. Andyen äjtep tormasaè da qrar. ... Kolxoz ïwlären qz. ... Alaryn åzeè beläseè inde. (ibid.) Sheykhulla. ... Are you writing to Safiulla? Fatima. Yes, Grandfather, what shall I write then? Sheykhulla. ... Say that Shärifulla has received a decoration. Märghubä. We have already written about that. Sheykhulla. Write it again ... Märghubä. Will you also say that Jamali’s (former) wife got married? Sheykhulla It would be better (lit., it would also do), if you would not say that (lit., such) ... Write about kolkhoz matters. ... Those (things) you yourself know about. · Ïwne tiewenhä oewtyryp æibärgän hagynda material tawyp ta, tegesebusy ãhen dä anda-monda habyp vakyt åtkäräse îk. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) “When the work is organized properly (as it should be), they (i.e., the workers) need not waste any time fetching materials, running here and there for this or that.” Wämsiq. ... Kajsy monyè Arslanov. Tegeseme, monysymy? (Xäj Vaxit, Kåk kapusy ahylsa.) Shämsiä. ... Which one is Arslanov? That one, this one?

The demonstrative pronouns may be used to avoid the repetition of a noun: · – Bu xatlarny tegeläre belän hagywtyr! “Compare these letters with those!”

173

Use of the Demonstrative Pronouns instead of the Personal Pronouns of the Third Person Singular and Plural [427] The demonstrative pronouns are used instead of the personal pronouns of the third persons singular and plural to direct special attention to, to place special emphasis on, the persons or things referred to. When used in this function, they preserve the same characteristics which distinguish them as demonstrative pronouns. · – Min mony karwy aldym. “I met (received) him.” (The person spoken of is with the speaker and the interlocutor(s) and the former points him out to the latter.)

·

· Mony (bolarny) kertmä! “Don’t let him (them) in!” (The speaker knows the person(s)

·

and thinks that he (they) is (are) not worthy of being allowed in.) · Kilmäde bu! “He didn’t come!” (The person expected is well known to this speaker and his interlocutor(s). Also, the use of bu connotes a tinge of mild reproach.)

Compare also: · – ... Näæip kinät såzsez kaldy. ... Kåpmeder wulaj telgä kilä almyjha bargannan soè, bu åz aldyna äjtkändäj: ... (Ämirxan Eniki, Jãräk sere.) “Näjip suddenly remained speechless. ... After walking like that for some while, unable to find words, he said as though speaking to himself: ...” · Alpamwa ujlap ta tormyj, ... qryw bula torgan urynga kitä. ... Mäjdanda tezelgän bulsa kiräk jãzlägän xalyk. Bu da tezelä. Monyè kiem nahar, kãtåhe bulgah, monnan kãlälär. Bervakytny moèa kilep æitä hirat. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Alpamwa.) Without thinking (twice), ... he leaves for the place where the contest is going to be. ... On the square there must have lined up hundreds of people. He too gets in line. His clothes are bad, because he is a shepherd, and they (i.e., the other contestants) laugh at him. Then the moment comes when it is his go (i.e., his turn to race). · Æylyj-æylyj kajta bu munhasyna. Xatyny monyè æylavyna bik aptyrap karwy ala. Eget äjtä moèarga: – Patwa mièa ertkyh xajvannar arasyna baryp, ... wularnyè bersen alyp kajtyp birergä kuwty, – di. Xatyny äjtä: – Kurykma sin aèardan, di, sin any buldyryrsyè, – di. Ul moèarga ber taqk birä dä: – Bar, imän bawyna menep utyr ... Alar ujnyj bawlagahtyn, imängä ãh rät taqk belän sugarsyè da, annan kilep hygar ãh eget. Wularga äjterseè: ... – di. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Patwa belän soldat.) He returns to their bathhouse, crying. His wife receives him, very perplexed about his crying. The young man says to her: “The king ordered me to go among beasts of prey ... and bring one of them back to him.” His wife says: “Don’t be afraid of that, you’ll be able to do that.” She gives him a stick and says: “Go, climb up on an oak tree ... After they (i.e., the beasts of prey) have begun to play, beat three times with the stick against the oak tree and three young men will emerge from it. Say to them: ...” (soldat – gaskäri). · – Ïgär dä owasa, sin bezdä berär el xezmät it, annan soè kitärseè, – dilär. Eget, rizalyk birep, bolar qnynda kalyrga, bolarga aw-su xäzerläp toryrga buldy. ... Eget bolarda unbiw kãnnär hamasy xezmät itkäh, ãh kågärhen-eget moèa æide ambar ahkyhyn birdelär. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Ãh kågärhen.) They said: “If you like, serve with us for a year or so, – after that you’ll leave.” The young man agreed and consented to stay with them and cook for them. ... When the young man had served with them for about fifteen days, the three young dove-men gave him the keys to the seven storehouses. 174

Televidenie egetläre ih bolar, mawina da wularnyky! Idris awygyp wular qnyna înälde. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Uramnar artynda qwel bolyn.) Why, these are the television men. The car too is theirs! Idris hurried towards them. · – Naratbawta bezne ukytkan Ilçamiq apany beläseèder, wät? – dip sorap kujdy ... – Berkãn sigezenhe tramvajda wuny ohrattym bit, äj. (Äxät Fazylæanov, Kãtelmägän ohrawu.) He suddenly asked: “You know perhaps Ilhamiä, who taught us at Naratbash?” ... “Well, I met her recently on the number eight streetcar.” · Malajlar äle çaman taralmyj. Bolar tagyn sugywyp kitmäsme dip, wul tirädä taptanalar. ... Bädri urynynnan tordy, berni bulmagan kebek, elmaq-elmaq, Xälimneè karwysyna kilde, kulyn suzdy. ... Xälim tegeneè kulyn almady. (Ibraçim Gazi, Onytylmas ellar.) The boys still do not disperse. They keep hanging around there, in case they (i.e., Bädri and Khälim) start fighting again. ... Bädri got up and, smiling as though nothing had happened, stepped up to Khälim (and) stretched out his hand. ... Khälim did not take his hand. (The boys who fought with ·

one another are present and well known to the other boys. Khälim despises Bädri.)

«Äkäm kahkan!» Äle kihä åk anyè kaharga æyenuyn /çiínuín/ sizåhe malajlar tabyldy. «Sizgäh, nik mièa äjtmädegez?» dip, Francibr tegelärne kyzdyra bawlady. Tegelär: «Bez kaqan belik, bälki, ul bolaj gyna sandygynda aktaryngandyr», dip kotyldylar. (ibid.) “Äkäm has run away!” Boys turned up (lit., were found) who already yesterday sensed that he was preparing to run away. Frantsibr began to scold them, saying: “If you sensed it, why didn’t you tell me?” They extricated themselves, saying: “How should we know, perhaps he was just rummaging around in his chest.” · · Kara sin, nindi bãrketlär! Moèa kara, tegeèär kara. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) “Just look, what outstanding (courageous) men (we have here)! Look at him here! Look at him over there!”

·

Wul and ul as Particles [428] The demonstrative pronouns wul and ul may function as particles. In this case wul serves to confirm, admit, acknowledge the statement, property, condition, etc. expressed by the word or group of words (predicate) preceding it; ul emphasizes, intensifies the meaning of the word(s) preceding it. · Tälgatá. Wäp kãj. Räxilä. Såzlären genä belmim. Sez belmisezme? Tälgatá. Îk wul. (Xäj Vaxit, Berenhe mäxäbbät.) Tälghät. It’s a pretty tune. Räkhilä. Only I don’t know its words. Don’t you know them? Tälghät. No, I don’t. · Kamilä. Ä, sin ikänseè, äjdåk, Nursänä. Räxilä qnynamy? Ul därese belän utyra ide wul. (ibid.) Kamilä. Ah, it’s you, please come in, Nursänä. You want Räkhilä? Well, she was sitting at her lesson. · Gyjlámanov. Menä wul-wul, bu xälneè dãres tågellegen beläseè. (Mirsäj Ämir, Mièlekamal.) Ghilmanov. There, exactly, you know that this situation is not right. · Mièlekamal. Kara äle, Maçinur, Xälim qnyna Mäxmåteène dä hygar äle sin. Maçinår. Äje wul, åzem dä wuny ujlap tora idem. (ibid.) Minglekamal. Look, Mahinur, let your Mäkhmüt (i.e., her son Mäkhmüt) also go along with Khälim, please (lit., cause to go out to Khälim’s side). Mahinur. Yes, sure, that’s what I was thinking too. · Mäjmånä. Bågen ãjdä awygyh ïwem buldy wul, gelän alaj bulmas. (ibid.) Meymünä. Today I had urgent work to do at home, you see. It won’t always be like that. (gelän, dialect; lit. form gel). 175

·

·

·

·

·

... Taèhulpan. Menä wul vakytlar çih xäteremnän hykmyj. Barsyn. Min anda bulmadym wul! Taèhulpan. Äje, bulmadyè wul ... (Davyt Îltyj, Karagol.) Tangchulpan. Those times I’ll never forget. Barsyn. I wasn’t there, you know. Tangchulpan. Yes, you were not there ... (Pronounced with emphasis.) Räxilä. Uzeè ukytuhy bulyp kewene kãtåhelekkä ågetläå – æièel wul ul. (Xäj Vaxit, Berenhe mäxäbbät.) Räkhilä. Being yourself a teacher, exhorting a man to become a shepherd is easy, indeed. Bädiga. ... Inde ïw sezdän genä kalyp tora. Galiqbanu æitez kyz ul, ... (Mirxäjdär Fäjzi, Galiqbanu.) Bädighä. ... Now the matter depends only on you. Ghaliäbanu is a smart girl, ... Xälim. Iè zur ïwe bawkarylmagan äle. Hähå ïwen eryp hygu uen tågel ul. (Mirsäj Ämir, Mièlekamal.) Khälim. Her biggest work has not yet been carried out. To struggle through the work of sowing is certainly no play. Æäjge kanikulga hygu bäjräm bulsa, ukular bawlangan kãn tagyn bäjräm ul. (Kamil Kärimov, Ber arbada.) If going on summer vacation is a holiday, then the day on which studies begin is again a holiday.

Interrogative Pronouns [429] Interrogative pronouns are: kem ‘who’, närsä ‘what’, ni ‘what’, kaj, kajsy ‘which’, nindi ‘what kind of’, nihä1) ‘how many’, kåpme2) ‘how much’, ‘how many’, nihänhe ‘which one’, ‘what one’, nihäwär ‘how many each’, nihäläp ‘approximately how many’, nikadär, nihakly, nixätle ‘how many’, ‘how much’, ‘what quantity’, nihek ‘how’, ‘in what manner’, nik, nigä ‘why’, kajda ‘where’, kaq ‘to where, whither’, kajdan, kaqn ‘from where’, ‘whence’, kajhan ‘when’. [430] Depending on their lexical meaning, some interrogative pronouns may be nouns or adjectives. Nihek, nik, nigä are used like interrogative adverbs of manner, kajda, kaq, kaqn, kajdan like interrogative adverbs of place, kajhan like an interrogative adverb of time. Nihä, kåpme, nihänhe, nihäwär, nihäläp, nikadär, nihakly, nixätle are close in meaning to the numeral adjectives. Note: Kajhan ‘when’ may take the dative and ablative case endings: Kajhanga hakly? ‘Until when?’ Kajhannan birle? ‘Since when?’

[431] Interrogative pronouns are used in asking direct questions: Malik. Kem bar anda? Sin kem? ... Kaqn kiläseè? ... Nigä monda tuktaldyè? (Ildar Îzeev, Kyr kazlary artynnan.) Malik. Who is there? Who are you? ... Where do you come from? ... Why did you stop here? · Naæilä. Min bågen æièdem. Ässar. Kemne æièdeè? (Înys Äminov, Ohrawyrbyz Gãlsylu.) Najilä. I was victorious today. Ässar. Whom did you defeat? · – Äjt äle, abyeè soègy vakytlarda kemnär belän aralawty? (Atilla Rasix, Urlangan xäzinä.) “Tell me please, with whom did your older brother associate recently?” 1)

Nihä refers to quantities consisting of single units. For example: Nihä sum? ‘How many rubles?’ Nihä märtäbä? ‘How many times?’ Nihä kewe? ‘How many people?’ 2) Kåpme refers mostly to collective quantities, but may also refer to quantities consisting of single units. For example: Kåpme vakyt? ‘How much time?’ Kåpme sãt? ‘How much milk?’ Kåpme tora? ‘How much does it cost?’ Kåpme tavyklar? ‘How many hens, chickens?’

176

· ·

·

·

· · · ·

· · · · ·

·

· · ·

·

· ·

Xalik. Niwlädeè sin?... Närsäne îgaltkanyèny beläseème? (Ildar Îzeev, Kyr kazlary artynnan.) Khaliq. What did you do?... Do you know what you have lost? – Menä wuwynda äzräk sãjläwep toryjk ta, kitärmen. Närsä turynda sãjläwik soè? (Räfkatá Kärami, Ohar kowlar belän qnäwä.) “Let’s talk here a little, then I’ll go.” “What shall we talk about then?” – Bälki sez kewe såzennän kurkasyzdyr? ... – Min anysynnan kurykmyjm. – Ä närsädän? Xalidä däwmäde. Närsädän? (ibid.) “Perhaps you are afraid of people talking? ...” “I am not afraid of that.” “Then of what?” Khalidä kept silent. Of what? – Närsälär kårdeè, ulym, nilär iwetteè? – di ätise. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Ziräk kart.) “What (things) did you see, my son, what (things) did you hear?” says his father. Wämsenur. Ni buldy, Naæilä? (Înys Äminov, Ohrawyrbyz, Gãlsylu.) Shämsenur. What happened, Najilä? · Tagyn sièa ni kiräk? (ibid.) “What else do you need?” · Ni ïzliseè, Färdänä tåti? (Äxät Gaffar, Qzlar moèy.) “What are you looking for, Aunt Färdänä?” Sägyjdulla. ... Menä sièa q /jð/ akha, q /jð/ pehän. Ikeseneè berse. Kajsysyn sajlyjsyè? (ibid.) Säghidulla. ... Here is (for you) either money or hay. One of the two. Which one do you choose? · Xäerle kih, Islam! Nindi qèalyklar bar? (Räisä Iwmoratova, Miliciq lejtenanty.) “Good evening, Islam! What’s new?” · Gafu itegez, ä sez kem kyzy? (Taçir Taçirov, Galiq.) “Pardon me, and whose daughter are you?” – Sezgä nihä qwá? – Egerme biw. (Räfkatá Kärami, Ohar kowlar belän qnäwä.) “How old are you?” “Twenty-five.” · Nihä el /jál/ ïwliseè? – Ike. (ibid.) “How many years have you been working (lit., are you working)?” “Two.” · Wul zwlärne bawkaru ãhen, ul sezneè muzejda nihä tapkyr buldy inde? (Atilla Rasix, Urlangan xäzinä.) “How many times has he already been in your museum to carry out those works?” – Äni, sineè tege konferenciqè nihäsendä ahyldy äle? – Oktqbrányè untugyzynda. (ibid.) “Mother, on what date, now, did that conference of yours begin (lit., open)?” “On the nineteenth of October.” ¡ Nihänhe bålmä kiräk disez äle? – Biwenhe? (Wamil Bikhurin, Tirän katlam.) “Which room did you say you want? Number five?” Väli Baj. Kåpme soryjsyz? Måsin. Biwär meè soryjlar. (Fätxi Burnaw, Taè.) Wäli bai. How much are you asking? Müsin. They are asking five thousand each. Nuretdin. Æyenysy kåpme, diseè? Davyt. Dårt jãz utyz meè. Nuretdin. Bezneè ãlewkä kåpmese tãwä? (Kärim Tinhurin, Æilkänsezlär.) Nuretdin. How much is the total you say? David. Four hundred and thirty thousand. Nuretdin. How much of that do we have to put up (lit., falls to our share)? Xäkimæan. Isänme, Gãlbikä! Gãlbikä. Bik äjbät äle, Xäkimæan abzyj. Åzeèneè xälläreè nihek soè? (Gamir Nasryj, Qwel ïwläpä.) Khäkimjan. How are you, Gölbikä! Gölbikä. Very well so far, Uncle Khäkimjan. And how are things with yourself? Gãlsylu. Nigä alaj ittegez inde? (Înys Äminov, Ohrawyrbyz, Gãlsylu.) Gölsylu. Why then did you act like this? Wämsenur. Nik abyeèny årtiseè, Gãlsylu? (ibid.) Shämsenur. Why do you tease your older brother, Gölsylu?

177

Naæilä. Biwlegä qzganyèny kaqn beläseè? (ibid.) Najilä. How do you know that you wrote an “A” (lit., a five)? · Läbibä. Aj alla, aèa birermen dip minnän 100 täèkä akha aldyè labasa! Mãkatdimä. Kajhan aldym? Kem kårde? Aèa kem ywansyn? (ibid.) Läbibä. O God, after all, you borrowed (lit., took) one hundred rubles from me to give to him! Möqätdimä. When did I borrow (take) them? Who saw it? Who do you expect to believe that? · Xupæamal. Gãlkäem, kaq kitärgä æyenganyèny beläseème sin, îkmy? ... Kaq karama ohsyz-kyryjsyz urman, di. Kyw kãnnärendä hatnama salkyn bula, di, ... (Gamir Nasryj, Qwel ïwläpä.) Khupjamal. My dear Göl (short for Gölbikä), do you or don’t you know where you are preparing to leave for? ... Wherever you look, there are boundless woods, they say. In winter it is extremely cold, they say, ... (Gölbikä ·

is preparing to leave for Siberia.)

Zaçir ikelänep tordy: kajda, kemgä bara ul? (Taçir Taçirov, Galiq.) Zahir hesitated. Where, to whom is he going? · – Kajda ïwlärgä ujlyjsyè, Bulat? (ibid.) “Where do you think you will work, Bulat?” · – Akha biråheneè Àoràik ikänlegen kajdan beldegez? (Atilla Rasix, Urlangan xäzinä.) “Where did you find out that it was Zhorzhik who gave me money?”

·

[432] Interrogative pronouns may be used in indirect discourse: · Ajsylu Märáqmneè kaq baruyn sorady. (M.Z. Zäkiev, Sintaksis çäm punktuaciq.) Aisylu asked where Märyäm was going. · Ber æirgä æyela torgan qrlylar ber-bersen tanyganga kårä: «Bu iptäwläre kihä ni ïwlägän? Ïw tapkanmy, îkmy? Kåpme akha tapkan? Ni ïwläp tapkan?» kebek sãalálär belän kãndäge gadät buenha sãjläwä bawladylar. (Mäæit Gafuri, Qrlylar.) Because the poor, gathering at the same place, knew each other, they began as a daily routine to talk about questions like “what these comrades did yesterday, whether or not they found work, how much money they earned, with what work they earned it”. · Kyz anyè närsä äjtergä telägänen aèlady. (Räfkatá Kärami, Ohar kowlar belän qnäwä.) The girl understood what he wanted to say. [433] Interrogative pronouns are used to express various emotions: · Sadyjk. ... Åzeè ujlap kara: soègy ike-ãh el /jál/ ïhendä genä nixätle akhalarybyz æilgä ohty, akhalar gyna tågel, akhalar belän bergä nixätle matur xyqllar, nixätle qkty ãmetlärebez tuzanga tuzdy ... (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) Sadiq. ... Try to think yourself: during the last two or three years alone how much money of ours has been squandered (lit., flew in the wind), (and) not only money, how many beautiful dreams, how many of our bright hopes have vanished (lit., crumbled into dust) together with the money ... · – Ax, nindi matur sez bågen, Gãlwaçidä xanym. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) “Oh, how beautiful you are today, lady Gölshahidä.” · Min inde bajnyè: «Barysy niheå?» – dip soravyn kãtep kåzlärem belän iläklärne sanyj bawladym. (Garif Gobäj, Bez åskändä.) Expecting the rich man to ask how much they were altogether, I was already beginning to count the sieves with my eyes. · Xäqt ãhen ul nilär genä ïwlämäde! (Gadel Kutuj, Ilçam.) What didn’t he do for Khäyat! (i.e., he did everything).

178

Kihä bu vakytta nihek räxät ide. (Mäæit Gafuri, Qrlylar.) How pleasant it was yesterday at this time! · Nigä forsattan fajdalanyp kalmaska! (Räfkatá Kärami, Ohar kowlar belän qnäwä.) Why not take advantage of the opportunity. · · Nurmãxämmät abyj, kaderlem, min menä kildem. ... Kår äle, nikadär gåzäl ikän bit Alsuyè. (Mãsägyjt Xäbibullin, Ãhenhe Vagon.) “Nurmökhämmät, my dear, here, I have come. ... Look please, how truly beautiful your Alsu is!” ·

Note: Nikadär has the expanded form nikadärle. The former pertains to both the literary language and the vernacular. The latter belongs more to the vernacular rather than to the literary language. However, the expanded form does occur also in contexts of literary works. Furthermore, compared with the more commonly used nikadär, nikadärle is felt to be “weightier”, to sound “richer”. For example: Häjne kajnatyp alyp, ... häj ïhä bawlady. Menä bu häj nikadärle läzzätle. (Mäæit Gafuri, Qrlylar.) Having brewed the tea, ... she began to drink tea. How delightful the tea was.

[Æämilä] ... ãenä kajtyp utyrdy. Bu ãj nikadärle kåèelsez. (ibid.) [Jämilä] ... returned home and sat down. How joyless this house is. · [Baqzitov] ... nikadärle genä tynyhlanyrga tyrywsa da, bîro utyrywynda åzen gadättägehä irken tota almady. (Mirsäj Ämir, Qlantau keweläre.) As much as [Bayazitov] tried to compose himself, he was unable to conduct himself as freely as usual at the office meeting.

·

Note 1: Interrogative pronouns may function as relative pronouns (see 446, 447). Note 2: The pronoun kajsy can mean both ‘which?’ and ‘which of?’, ‘some’ and ‘some of’. It obviously is a contraction of kajsysy, with +sy sometimes functioning as the possessive suffix, sometimes losing its original meaning and becoming part of the word. · · ·

·

· ·

·

Gabdelxak. Sez wularnyè kajsyn sajladygyz? (Wärif Kamal, Xaæi äfände ãjlänä.) Ghäbdelkhaq. Which one of those did you choose? – Kårweläregezneè kajsynda telefon bar? (Mägâsåm Nasyjbullin Qrkanat.) “Which of your neighbors has a telephone?” Ãj ïhe kyzlar belän tuly. Kajsy oek bäjli, kajsy qulyk higä, kajsy heltär bäjli. (Mirsäj Ämir, Tuè ahuy.) The house is crowded with girls. Some are knitting stockings, some are embroidering handkerchiefs, some are making lace. ... avyldagy kyzlarnyè kajsy kiqågä, kajsy wäçärgä kitep betkän ide. (Foat Sadriev, Avyw basu ikmäge.) ... there were no girls left in the village, some of the girls having got married, others having gone to the city. Kajsylary Sebergä, kajsylary Tawkent qgyna. (Ämirxan Eniki, Soègy kitap.) Some of them (were headed) for Siberia, some for Tashkent. Räxilä. ... Aldybyzda tãrle îllar. Kajsynnan kitsäk, wul bezneè gomer /ôõmer/ îlybyz bulahak. (Xäj Vaxit, Berenhe mäxäbbät.) Räkhilä. ... Various paths lie before us. Whichever we may set out on will be our life’s path. – Æomgadan bawka kãnnärneè kajsy da qryj mièa. (Ämirxan Eniki, Gãländäm tutaw xatiräse.) “Any day suits me, except Fridays.”

Note: The long form carries more weight, is more concrete. For example:

Valentina. ... Kyqfätläre! ... belmässeè: kajsysy eget tä kajsysy kyz. (Gabdraxman Minskij, Sineè æyryè.) Valentina. ... And their appearance! ... You won’t know which (of them) is the boy and which (of them) the girl. · Räsim soraularnyè kajsysyna bawta, kajsysyna axyrda æavap birergä dä belmi tordy. (Fail Wäfigullin, Ãj salunyè nie bar.) Räsim did not know which of the questions to answer first and which last. ·

179

Generalizing Pronouns [434] Generalizing pronouns are: çär ‘every’, ‘each’, çärber ‘each’, ‘every’, ‘everybody’, ‘everyone’, çärkajsy ‘every’, ‘each’, ‘everyone (of them)’, çärkem ‘everyone’, ‘everybody’, ‘each’, çärnärsä ‘everything’, bar, barlyk, barha(sy) ‘all’, ‘whole’, ‘entire’, bãten ‘all’, ‘whole’, ‘entire’, çämmä ‘all’, ‘whole’, ‘entire’, ‘each’, ‘every’. Çär and the compounds formed with çär designate all persons, things, etc., of an unspecified number, amount, or quantity but refer to each of them separately. They are commonly used in the singular. çär is always an adjective, çärber may be an adjective or a noun, çärkem, çärkajsy and çärnärsä are always nouns. The pronouns bar, barlyk, barha, bãten, etc. designate a number, amount, quantity of persons, things, etc., as a whole. They may function as adjectives and as nouns and can be used in the singular and plural. When functioning as nouns, they often form a possessive relation with their antecedent. If the antecedent is not expressed, it is denoted by the respective possessive suffix on the pronoun. · Çär såzgä æavap bar, çär qxwyga savap bar. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) There is an answer to every word, there is a reward for every good (i.e., good deed). · ... ul ... Gåzälneè çärber xäräkäten kåzätep tora-tora ide dä, soèynnan tãzätålär kertä ide. (Garif Gobäj /Ôõbðj/, Läjsän qègyr.) ... he was watching Güzäl’s every movement and afterwards correcting her (lit., he was introducing corrections). · Nuriq. ... Irtän tor da awarga äzerlä, kih awarga äzerlä! Annan soè çärbersen awarga kystap jãr. (Riza Iwmorat, Bistä kyzy Gãlsinä.) Nuriä. ... In the morning get up and prepare the food, in the evening prepare the food! Then keep entreating everyone to eat. · Maksudov. Anysy dãres, Nuriq, çärnärsäneè åz vakyty bar. (ibid.) Maqsudov. That is correct, Nuriä, everything has its time. · Çärkem «qz» di, çärkem any ïhe, æany belän sizä. Çärnärsä anyè hige bulmagan maturlygyna, moèyna baw iq ... (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Qz bawy.) Everybody says “spring”, everybody feels it inside himself, in his heart. Everything bows to its boundless beauty, to its melody ... · Änä erak taular, urmannar, änä matur gyna dulkynlanyp kårenä torgan uæym basuy, ..., – bolar bar da bizängän, bar da xätfädäj ålännär belän tåwälep, sary, kyzyl, al hähäklär belän maturlangannar. (ibid.) Those distant mountains (and) woods there, that winter field there, which appears to sway beautifully, ..., these all are adorned, all covered with grass like velvet (and) beautified by yellow, red and scarlet flowers. · Bar kewegä dä qrap betä almassyè. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) One cannot please all people. · Bary da watlanalar. (Mirsäj Ämir, Telefon.) All (of them) are glad. · Raziq. ... Æyelywta baryn da ahyk itep äjt ... (Riza Iwmorat, Bistä kyzy Gãlsinä.) Razia. ... Say all (of it) frankly at the meeting ... · Min baryna da riza ... (Riza Iwmorat, Wajtan taqgy.) I agree to all of it ... · Barynnan da ïlek, min aèa Mäæit Gafurinyè sälamen tapwyrdym. (G. Ibraçimov turynda istäleklär, Säjfi Kudaw.) First of all, I conveyed Mäjit Ghafuri’s greetings to him.

180

·

·

· · ·

· ·

·

·

·

·

·

·

·

·

Miènulla. ... Anda tagyn kemnär bula soè? Fatyjma. Barysy da åzebeznekelär, hit kewe bulmyj. (Kärim Ämiri, Taè vakyty.) Mingnulla. ...? Who else will be there then? Fatima. All (of them) are ours (i.e., our people), there will be no strangers. Läriq. Nigä minnän soryjsyz any? Nigä barygyz da mièa tekäläsez? (Aqz Gyjläæev, Bez unike kyz idek.) Läriä. Why do you ask me that? Why do you all stare at me? Samat. Min alarnyè barysy belän ujnyjm. (Mirxäjdär Fäjzi, Adawkan kåèel.) Samat. I play with all of them. – Min barysyn da berazdan sièa aèlatyrmyn, – dide Färit. (Atilla Rasix, Synau.) “I shall explain all of it to you in a moment,” said Färit. Galimæan Ibraçimov iè ïlek kara taktaga kehkenä-kehkenä tågäräklär syzdy. Annan soè ... bu vak tågäräklärneè barhasyn ber zur tågäräk belän äjländerep kåjgah, ... (G. Ibraçimov turynda istäleklär, Säjfi Kudaw.) Ghalimjan Ibrahimov first drew tiny circles on the blackboard. Then, ... surrounding all of these small circles with one large circle, (he began to speak). Kuldan kilgän barlyk harany kårergä ... kiräk. (Kärim Ämiri, Taè vakyty.) All possible measures must be taken ... ... Xäjrulla agajnyè ãlewenä tigän æirneè barlyk igene buryhny tålärgä dä æitmi ide ... (Kärim Tinhurin, Kara kãnnärdä.) All the corn of the land, which fell to uncle Kheyrulla’s share, did not suffice to pay the debts ... Ämiræan. Mièa monda kårenergä qramyj. ... Sadyjk. Alaj bulgah, menä närsä, balam, ... Tuzlarnyè barlygy da kajsy kaq kitep bettelär ... (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) Ämirjan. I must not be seen here. Sadiq. If that is so, here is what, my child ... Each of all the bigwigs have left for somewhere ... Kerde, idarä jortyndagylarnyè barysyna da kåz jãrtep, bãtenese belän beráîly isänläwte, ... (Fatix Xãsni, Avyl ãstendä joldyzlar.) He entered (and), running his eyes over all of those in the administration building, he greeted all (of them) simultaneously, ... Ber såz belän äjtkändä, malaj uramda da bãtenesen åz kubyzyna biette. (Garif Gobäj, Läjsän qègyr.) In a word, on the street too, the boy made all (of them) dance to his tune. ... ul ... Qltaga ql itärgä kilgän kewelärne bik watlanyp kabul itä. Åzen kyzyksyndyrgan bãten xällärne sorawa. (G. Ibraçimov turynda istäleklär, Säjfi Kudaw.) ... he gladly receives the people who came ... to Yalta for vacation. He asks about all the news which interests him. Kåp tä åtmäde, älege wärigebez ... mädräsädäge bãten wäkertlärneè kåzlärenä halyna bawlady. (ibid., Fätxel Korbangaliev.) Soon, that same classmate of ours began to catch the eyes ... of all the students in the medrese. Çärxäldä, ul bãten kãhen, säläten æigep, wuèa omtylyrga tiew. (Ämirxan Eniki, Räwä.) At any rate, he must muster all his strength, his talent, and strive for that (goal). Galimæan alarnyè çämmäse belän sãjläwergä såz taba. (G. Ibraçimov turynda istäleklär, Gãlsem Mãxämmädova.) Ghalimjan finds something (lit., a word) to talk about with all of them. «Ul mäxäbbät, ul watlyk, ul qkty tereklek, qkty kãnnär – çämmäse åtte, çämmäse kaldy...» – dilär. (Wärif Kamal, Iptäwemä.) They say, “That love, that joy, that brilliant life, those bright days – all that has passed, all that has been left behind...”

181

Galiq. Min bolaj dip çih ujlamagan idem, Räåf iptäw... çämmä æir tãzätelgän, rätlängän, maturlangan ... (Wärif Kamal, Ut.) Ghaliä. I never thought it would be like this, comrade Räüf... The whole place has been restored, put in order, beautified ... · Çämmä bawta ber xyql. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) So many men, so many dreams (lit., In each head is a dream). · ... Käbir ... mäælestäge çämmä såzlärne, fikerlärne kire kagyp, îkka hygarahak. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Bezneè kãnnär.) ... Käbir ... will reject and disprove all words (and) thoughts (expressed) at the meeting. ·

Note 1: Bar, barha, barlyk, bãten and çämmä may limit, or refer to, nouns in the plural designating several individual persons, things, or places, as well as to nouns indicating a collective whole. Note 2: Having the same meaning (‘all’, ‘whole’, ‘entire’), the usage of these pronouns is determined by 1) subtle stylistic nuances within a given context; 2) personal preference or habit; 3) to avoid undesirable repetition of the same pronoun: ·

[Zinnur] Ïretep qbywtyrylgan kyrwaularny kat-kat karady. Barysy da tärtiptä syman, çämmäse åz urynynda kebek, barlyk kyrwaular da çihni kermäslek çäm hykmaslyk itep qbywtyrylgan tãsle. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) [Zinnur] examined again and again the hoops which had been welded on. All seem to be in order, all appear to be in their place, all hoops seem to have been welded on, so that nothing could get in or out. (Z. examines the interior of a huge condenser.)

Indefinite Pronouns [435] Indefinite pronouns are formed by: a) placing the particle ällä before the interrogative pronouns; b) joining the suffix +dyr, +der, +tyr, +ter to the interrogative pronouns. ällä kem kemder somebody, someone ällä närsä närsäder something ällä ni nider something ällä kajsy kajsydyr somebody, someone ällä nindi nindider some kind of, something like ällä nihä nihäder rather many (no one knows how many) ällä nikadär ) nikadärder ) rather, pretty many, a great many ällä nixätle ) nixätleder ) ällä nihakly ) nihaklydyr ) ällä kåpme kåpmeder some (unknown quantity) ällä nihek nihekter somehow, in some way ällä nigä ) nigäder ) for some reason (or another) ällä nik ) nikter ) ällä kajda kajdadyr somewhere, someplace ällä kajdan ) kajdandyr ) from somewhere ällä kaqn ) kaqndyr ) ällä kaq kaqdyr to some place, somewhere ällä kajhan kajhandyr sometime, sometime ago [436] The suffix +dyr, +der (+tyr, +ter) is subject to vowel harmony. It is unstressed and always follows other suffixes (plural, possessive, inflective, etc.) joined to those indefinite pronouns which are nouns or function as nouns for example, kemgäder ‘to somebody, someone’, närsädänder ‘from something’, kajsylarydyr ‘some of them’. 182

Meaning and Use of the Indefinite Pronouns Formed with ällä and +dyr, +der, +tyr, +ter

[437] The meaning of indefinite pronouns formed with ällä and that of their counterparts with +dyr, +der, etc. is not exactly the same, and they may therefore not be used interchangeably. Differences are rather subtle and may be discerned as follows:1) The forms with ällä generally carry more weight than those with +dyr, +der. In a sense, the logical emphasis is, therefore, often more on the pronoun than on the action or condition. Furthermore, indefinite pronouns formed with ällä merely point out persons, places, things, ideas, or time. There is no indication that the speaker desires to elucidate or define. Also, the indefinite pronouns formed with ällä and expressing time or place, may connote that the action, condition, or event took place or prevailed long ago, or that it occurred far away. The forms with +dyr, +der, etc. commonly carry no particular emphasis; primary attention is directed towards the action or state. The vagueness expressed by this category appears as though requiring elucidation, and it may have a connotation of wondering, doubt, suspicion, embarrassment. Also, the forms with +dyr, +der, etc. may indicate that the speaker (narrator), the acting person or the person spoken of remembers, knows, or perceives the event, action or condition only vaguely. Note 1: In praxis, it often appears that only the speaker (narrator), (who may be “wondering”, “doubting”, “suspecting”) would need elucidation. The person spoken of would be the one able to elucidate, should he (she) so decide. Note 2: The “person spoken of” may be the acting person, the subject of the sentence.

Furthermore, the following may be added:2) The indefinite form with ällä appears as though it contained a certain “internal” element of definiteness, certainty, while in the form with +dyr, +der, etc. there seems to exist an “internal” (additional) element of indefiniteness, uncertainty, whereby “definiteness” denotes higher degree of attention, “indefiniteness” lower degree of attention. For example: ällä kem sãjli ‘someone is speaking’ (i.e., some interesting person is speaking; the listener sits up and takes notice); kemder sãjli ‘someone is speaking’ (said as a mere statement that someone is speaking somewhere). [438] Indefinite pronouns are used when the speaker (writer) does not wish, or is not able, to describe a person, thing, etc., in a more precise, specific manner, or when he (she) wants to express a quantity, measure, etc., in an indefinite way. Hence, indefinite pronouns may also be called “indefinite pronouns and numerals”. · · Sineè wikelle wäkertlärgä genä ällä kem bit ul! Bez andyjlarny kup kårgän! ... Matur kiemnär kiep, zur bantiklar tagyp jãrgäh, sineè wikelle wäkertlär any ällä kem dip ujlyjlar. (Fatix Ämirxan, Urtalykta.) “He is somebody only to students like you! We have seen plenty of such! ... When he dresses smartly and tacks on large bows, students like you think he is somebody.”

1)

For the difference between indefinite pronouns formed with ällä and those formed with +dyr, +der see also: V.N. Xangildin, Tatar tele grammatikasy, Kazan 1959, and: Z.M. Väliullina, K.Z. Zinnätullina, M.A. Sägyjtov, Xäzerge tatar ädäbi tele morfologiqse, Kazan 1972. 2) This information supplied by D. Phil. H. R. Qurbatov, of the Ghalimjan Ibrahimov Institute for Language, Literature and History of the Academy of Sciences of Tatarstan.

183

·

· ·

· · · · ·

·

·

· ·

·

·

·

·

184

Kinät kårwe bålmädän kemneder hakyryp elamsyragan bala tavywy iwetelde. (Atilla Rasix, Ike bujdak.) Suddenly one heard from the adjacent room the whining voice of a child calling someone. Kemder moèly itep baqnda ozyn kãj ujnyj. (Riza Iwmorat, Bistä kyzy Gãlsinä.) Someone is melancholy playing a long tune on the accordion. ... studentlarnyè bu hygyp kitewläre anyè ällä närsäsen, jãrägenä qkyn närsäsen æimerä ide. (Fatix Ämirxan, Urtalykta.) ... this walking out of the students was destroying something in him, something which was close to his heart. ... anyè æany ällä närsäne îksyna, ällä närsäne sagyna, moèlana ide. (ibid.) ... his heart was longing for something, it was pining, grieving for something. Ul mièa ... åz telendä närsäder sãjli bawlyj. (Mirgaziqn Înys, Îl qzmalary.) ... he begins to tell me something in his own language. Isxak ... artkarak higende çäm närsägäder abynyp egyldy. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Beräå.) Iskhaq moved back a little and, stumbling over something, fell down. Gazizä ... närsäder tegep utyra ide. (Wärif Kamal, Taè atkanda.) Ghäzizä was sitting, sewing something. – Abyj, ällä ni bar! – Kajda? – Änä, änä, kywtyrdyj. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Uramnar artynda qwel bolyn.) “Uncle, there is something (there)!” “Where?” “There, something is rustling!” Ajzat vagonga kerde. Xalyk kåp bulsa da, tãn urtasy avywkanlyktan, ällä ni tavyw, wau-wu îk ide. (Gaziz Mãxämmätwin, Jãräktäge ïzlär.) Aizat entered the (railway) carriage. Although it was crowded, there was no sound, no noise at all, for midnight had passed. Ywandymy ul minem bu qlganyma, îkmy – äjtä almyjm, läkin nider sizende bulsa kiräk. (Ämirxan Eniki, Jãräk sere.) Whether or not she believed this lie of mine – that I cannot tell, but she must have sensed something. (For bulsa kiräk see 1010.) ... hynlap ta nider any borhyj ide bulsa kiräk. (ibid.) ... really, something appeared to be troubling her. Alar tiräsendä bez dä – malajlar, kyzlar – nindider uen koryp, hyr-hu kilep jãri idek. Kajsydyr wunda minem xakta såz bawlap æibärde: ... (Mirsäj Ämir, Äbi vasyqte.) We too, boys and girls, were carrying on some kind of a game and making a din around them. Suddenly, someone there began to talk about me: ... Kemnärder soraular birdelär, kajsylarydyr Mäsnävine, kajsylarydyr Fänåzäne qklap sãjläde. (Wamil Bikhurin, Tirän katlam.) Some people or other asked questions, and there were some others who spoke (in reply), supporting Mäsnäwi, and some others Fänüzä. Bawta bu kitaplar anyè ixtyqryn biläp aldylar. Ul ällä nindi qt dãnáq ïhenä kerep kitep, qèa xislär, qèa kiherewlär davyly ïhendä bãterelde ... (Äxmät Fäjzi, Tukaj.) At first these books possessed his mind. He entered into some strange world and was gyrating in a storm of new emotions, of new experiences ... Menä ber zaman kajdadyr ber kibet qnynda kotohkyh tavywlar iwetelä bawlyj ... Anda nindider ber tärbiqsez kalgan bala totylgan bulyp hyga; häldergän, kåräseè ... (Mirsäj Ämir, Kazan uramnarynda.) Now, suddenly, somewhere in the vicinity of a shop, a terrible yelling starts up ... There, it turns out, some homeless boy (lit., a boy who has remained without an education) has been caught; it seems he has stolen (something) ... Ä ike jort arasynda nindider sãjläwålär bara, närsäder ïwlärgä æyenalar, min mony sizep toram ... (Ämirxan Eniki, Jãräk sere.) But between the two houses (i.e., families) some talks are going on. They are about to do something, I sense this ... (Expresses suspicion and doubt.)

·

·

·

·

·

·

·

· · · ·

·

·

·

· ·

·

Wäçärneè ällä nihä urynynda qwel utraular wikelle bakha-parklar kåp. (Gaziz Mãxämmätwin, Jãräktäge ïzlär.) In rather many places of the city there are numerous gardens and parks, like green islands. – Tãlkeneè kåze qwel bulamyni? – Tãnlä wulaj qwel bulyp kårenä ul ... ut qktysynda. Min inde ällä nihäne kårdem, ... (Nurixan Fättax, Bala kåèele dalada.) “Can the eyes of the fox then be green?” “At night, in the glow of the (camp) fire, they look green like this. I have already seen quite a few, ...” – Ber genä kolak belän tyèladym, anda da ällä nikadär akylly såz iwetep kaldym. (Fatix Xãsni, Æäj bawy.) “I listened only with half an ear; even then I heard a good many clever words.” ... diègez ãstendä ällä nixätle akharlaklar, ãermägä ïläkkän qfraklar tãsle, butalyp ohynalar ... (Wärif Kamal, Akharlaklar.) ... over the sea a great many seagulls are flying about in a jumble, like leaves caught up in a storm ... ¡ Kåpmeder wulaj telgä kilä almyjha bargannan soè, bu åz aldyna äjtkändäj: ... dip kujdy. (Ämirxan Eniki, Jãräk sere.) “After walking like that for some while, unable to find words, he finally said, as though speaking to himself: ...” ... Saniqlärgä baryp jãri bawlagannan birle, Isxak ällä nihek åzgärep kitte. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Beräå.) Since the time he had begun to frequent Saniä’s house, Iskhaq somehow changed. Bågen qkwämbe, Kuramwinnyè ql kãne. Ul mony, nihekter, onytyp æibärgän ide ... (Wamil Bikhurin, Tirän katlam.) Today was Sunday, Quramshin’s day off. Somehow he had completely forgotten this ... · Ällä nigä arkam suyksynyp tora. (Aqz Gijläæev, Beräå.) “For some reason, my back feels a little cold.” Nurullalardan hykkah, ul nigäder basu qgyna boryldy. (ibid.) After he left the Nurullas, he turned for some reason or other towards the field. Nigäder minem bu turyda sãjläwäsem kilmi ide. (Ämirxan Eniki, Jãräk sere.) For some reason or other, I did not wish to talk about this. Xäsän nikter, bu soraudan uèajsyzlanyp, kyzaryp kitte ... (Fatix Ämirxan, Urtalykta.) For some reason or other, Khäsän felt unconfortable and blushed from this question ... Ällä kajlarda bulyp kajtkan qèa iptäwe bulu qtim malajnyè kitek kåèelen berkadär îatty da, axry. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Beräå.) Having a new friend, who had been to some faraway places, probably soothed to some degree the orphan’s torn heart. Ällä kajda, eraklarda kalgan tugan ilenä, ällä kajhan åtkän bala haklaryna kåèele kitte. (Wärif Kamal, Akharlaklar.) He longed for his native country, which lay (lit., remained) somewhere far away, for his childhood, which had passed sometime (long) ago. Äje, kajdadyr qrlarynda palámalar åsep utyrgan wau diègezlär bar ... (Äxät Gaffar, Kawan æyry.) Yes, somewhere there are noisy seas on whose coasts palm trees grow ... Aj kalykmagan, kajdadyr qwerenep tora. (Wärif Kamal, Taè atkanda.) The moon has not risen; it is hiding somewhere. Fäjzi kaqdyr hygyp kitkän, Färxi karhyk zal qkta nindider ber xatyn belän sãjläwep utyra. (Wärif Kamal, Taè atkanda.) Feyzi has gone somewhere, (and) the old woman Färkhi is sitting in the saloon, talking with some woman. Bulat, ..., sãjläp barganda, kajdandyr, nindider ... ber wau-wu iwetelä bawlady. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Bezneè kãnnär.) While Bulat was speaking, ... some kind of noise began to sound (began to be heard) ... from somewhere. 185

·

·

·

·

·

– Kaqndyr täväkkällek kilde, çäm min wul uk kãnne barysyn da Näæipkä äjtep, ïwne beráîly beterergä buldym. (Ämirxan Eniki, Jãräk sere.) “Somehow (lit., from somewhere) I got the courage and I decided to tell Näjip everything that same day, and, at the same time, to put an end to the matter.” – Sin alarny ällä kajhan onytkansyè inde, Kamil ... (Gomär Bäwirov, Æidegän hiwmä.) “You have probably forgotten them (i.e., the letters) already – long ago, Kamil ...” Kuramwinnyè kalu-kalmau mäsáäläse, bälki, ällä kajhan xäl itelgänder inde?! (Wamil Bikhurin, Tirän katlam.) The matter of whether or not Quramshin would stay on had perhaps been already decided sometime ago! Xädihäneè ätise æibärtkän faïton çäm ber gadi arba kunaklarny ällä kajhannan birle kãtä ikän inde. (Atilla Rasix, Qmawev.) The phaeton and an ordinary wagon, which Khädichä’s father had sent, had been waiting for the guests for some time already. Anyè babasy da kajhandyr wuwy îldan jãrgän ... (Gomär Bäwirov, Æidegän hiwmä.) His grandfather too has walked along this road sometime ...

Ber, berär and beräå as Indefinite Pronouns [439] The cardinal number ber ‘one’, the distributive number berär ‘one each’, and the collective number beräå ‘one of them’, may function as indefinite pronouns. Ber then means ‘some’, ‘someone’, ‘somebody’, reduplicated – ber-ber – it means ‘some’; berär means ‘some (kind of)’, ‘a certain’, beräå ‘someone’, ‘somebody’. Ber and berär may be adjectives or nouns, beräå is always a noun. · Tukta! Monda berse jãri, Äxtäræan! (Näkyj Isänbät, Mirkäj belän Ajsylu.) Wait! There is someone walking here, Äkhtärjan! · Xäzer anyè iè kårykkan närsäse ber-ber kãtelmägän xäl: qngyn, talanu, îgaltu ... ber-ber kardäw-yrugy belän berär xäl bulyp, moèardan qrdäm sorap kilå. (Äxmät Fäjzi, Tukaj.) What now frightens him most is some unexpected event: fire, robbery, loss ... some accident happening to some relative and the request to him to help. · · Telisezme, min sezgä beräåneè bawynnan kihkän ... kyzykly ber tarixyn sãjlim. (Ämirxan Eniki, Jãräk sere.) “If you wish, I will tell you an interesting story of what someone went through.” · ... tãrle qktan ... kewelär kilä bawlady. Beräålär qkyndagy avyllardan ... kildelär, ikenhe beräålär erak illärdän ... kajtyp, xan qnyna jomywlaryn jomywlarga awyktylar. (Nurixan Fättax, Ätil suy aka torur.) People began to arrive ... from various directions ... Some came from nearby villages, ... some others returned from distant countries ... and hurried to convey their messages to the Khan. · – ... Kitap ahuhylar bez. Falhylar. Iwetkänegez bardyr inde. ... – Bezneè avylda da bar beräå, nogyt borhagy belän fal aha. (Näzifä Kärimova, Karurmannan hykkan kewelär.) “We interpret the (fortune) book. We are fortunetellers. You have most likely heard.” ... “There is someone in our village too; he tells fortunes – reading beans.”

186

Compound Indefinite Pronouns Formed with ber, berär, beräå [440] United with interrogative pronouns, ber, berär, beräå form compound indefinite pronouns. Ber is prefixed to närsä, nihä, nikadär (nixätle, nihakly) to form bernärsä ‘something’, bernihä ‘some’, ‘several’, bernikadär (bernixätle, bernihakly) ‘to some degree’. It is attached to kaj and kajsy to form kajber, kajsyber ‘some’. Berär is placed before kem and närsä to form berär kem ‘somebody’, ‘someone’, berär närsä ‘something’. The plural of beräå is combined with kaj to form kajberäålär ‘some of them’. Examples: · Gabdulla åzeneè iptäwläre belän bernärsäne ahyk tãwenep aldy: Nindider galim bulyr ãhen ukyrga kiräk. (Äxmät Fäjzi, Tukaj.) Ghabdulla and his friends understood something (one thing) clearly: to become some educated person, one must study. · Ulynyè nigä ãjlänmäven dä bernikadär sizenä ide Maçibädär. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Beräå.) Mahibädär sensed to some degree why her son was also not getting married. · – Andyj kewelär bernihä distä elga, xätta, min äjter idem, gasyrga ber genä bulalar. (Räfkatá Kärami, Kowlar belän qnäwä.) “Such people are only one in several decades, even in a century, I would say.” · – Kåzgä kårenep åsälär, ... Nasyjp bulsa, byel bernihäse alma birä bawlamasmy, dip torabyz, – dide Xãrmätulla kart ... (Fatix Xãsni, Æäj bawy.) “They (i.e., the apple trees) are growing visibly, ... We keep saying that, if it is granted, some of them will perhaps start bearing apples this year,” said old Khörmätulla. (Lit., We keep saying: If it is granted, will some of them not start bearing apples?) · · Sineè kajber såzläreè, älbättä, dãres. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) “Some of your words are, of course, true.” · · Sez qt kewe, ir kewe, wuèa kårä mièa kajber närsälärne sãjläve bik kyen bulahak. (Ämirxan Eniki, Jãräk sere.) “You are a stranger, a man; therefore, saying some things will be very difficult for me.” (The speaker is a woman.) · Biredä gomumän ïrele-vakly îllar bik kåp ikän. Alarnyè kajberläre borylypborylyp kue agahlyklar arasyna kerep îgalalar; ... (ibid.) On the whole, there turn out to be very many large and small (foot) paths here; some of them, winding along, run into dense groves and disappear; ... (For ikän see 742, b.) · Kih belän Mariq anyè kajsyber närsäläreneè tãwkän tãjmälären tagyp, såtelgän æirlären qmap birde. (Fatix Ämirxan, Urtalykta.) In the evening Mary sewed the buttons back on which had come off some of his things, and she mended the spots which had become torn. · – Îk, min awamyjm. ... Min berär närsä ïhep kenä utyram. (Galiäsgar /Ôðliðsôðr/ Kamal, Bezneè wäçärneè serläre.) “No, I am not eating. ... I’ll sit and just drink a little something.” · Ul kåzlären ahkanda P.P. ta, bawkalar da toryp betkän, kajberäålär hygyp ta kitkän ide. (Gaziz Mãxämmätwin, Jãräktäge ïzlär.) When he opened his eyes, P.P. and the others had already got up, and some of them were already gone.

187

The Indefinite Pronouns fälän, fälänhä, fälän-tãgän, fälän dä tãgän, fälän (dä) ... tãgän, fälän-fäsmätän [441] Fälän, fälänhä ‘so and so’, ‘such and such’. They point out, in a general way, persons, places, or things whose name is either not specified, or not known, or whose name the speaker does not wish to mention at the moment of speaking. Joined to nouns (in writing connected with a hyphen), it adds a nuance of indefiniteness or indifference. Fälän may function as an adjective, a noun, or as an adverbial modifier. · Marina belä ide. ... Märviq åze sãjläde. Bäxtigä xat qzgan ide ul. Fälän kãnneè fälän sägatendä fälän æirgä kil äle, bik kiräk, dide. (Koqw Timbikova, Agym urtasynda.) Marina knew. ... Märwiä told her herself. She had written Bäkhti a letter. “Please come at such and such a time on such and such a day to such and such a place; it’s absolutely necessary”, she (had) said. · – Abyj, mine dä ïwkä alygyzhy? Æavap tagyn wul uk: Fälän kontoraga, fälänfälänevih qnyna. (Rafail Tãxfätullin, Agymsu.) “Uncle, please, take me on too?” The answer is again the same: (go) to such and such an office to Mr. So-and-so. · Ber zaman ber patwanyè väzire: «Min patwa bulsam, fälänne fälän, ... itär idem, ... – dip, ...» maktangan, di. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Patwa, väzir, tegermänhe.) A king’s minister once ... boasted (so they say): “If I were king, I would do certain things in a certain way ...” · Berse äjtä: «Fälän jãz sum biräm!» (Ibraçim Gazi, Onytylmas ellar.) One of them says, “I am giving you so many hundred rubles.” · Fälän æirdä bik zur qngyn bulgan, fälän æirdä boz qugan, fälän æirdä fälänhä kewe suga batkan, fälän kewe ïsse bulganlyktan, täräzä ahyp qtkan ikän, ãenä karaklar kergän, fälän æirdä ïsse sugudan fälänhä kewe vä fälänhä xajvan ålgän, digän xäbärlärdän bawka xäbärlär bulmyj. (Galiäsgar Kamal, Ïh powkanda.) There isn’t (usually) any other news; besides that, at such and such place, there was a very big fire (they say); at such and such place there was a hailstorm (they say); at such and such place so and so many persons drowned (they say); because it was hot, such and such a man lay down with the window open (and) thieves entered his home (they say); at such and such place so and so many people and so and so many animals died of heatstroke (they say). (For the use of the past tense II to relate non-witnessed action or condition see 967.) · Ãjneè äjlänäsendä kirtä-fälän îk. (Kärim Ämiri, Äsma.) Around the house there is no kind of a fence. · Urman artynda syerlar mãgeräve, hybyrky wartlatkan, ït ãrgän tavywlar iwetelde. Tiz genä sikerep tordym da, wuwy gomer onytylyp qtuym ãhen åzemne tirgi-tirgi, sukmak-fälän karap tormyj gyna æäjläågä taba jãgerdem. (Änisä Ibraçimova, Toman tarala.) One could hear the sounds of the cattle lowing behind the woods, of a whip cracking, of a dog barking. I quickly jumped up and, scolding myself for having forgotten this (side of) life, ran towards the (village) pasture without so much as keeping (observing, paying attention) to any kind of a path. [442] Fälän-tãgän, fälän dä tãgän, fälän (dä) ... tãgän, fälän-fäsmätän ‘this and that’, ‘one thing and another. These indefinite pronouns are likewise used to refer to or to enumerate, in a general way, persons, things, places, conditions, conversations, etc., without

188

naming or specifying them. Furthermore, they are used instead of specific words to express negative evaluation, to point out negative characteristics. They are therefore often used in contexts in which disregard, disparagement, or the speaker’s negative attitude towards the subject matter are expressed. Like fälän alone, fälän-tãgän, etc., may function as an adjective, as a noun, or as an adverbial modifier. Fälän-fäsmätän and fälän-tãgän are synonymous. · Anysyn afiwada bolaj dip qzarbyz: «Biw bålektä zur koncert. Katnawalar: wäçärdän kilgän mäwçår studentlar: Fälän-fälän uly, fälän-tãgän kyzy çäm bawkalar.» (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) We shall write that on the poster like this: “Big concert in five parts. Participating are: famous students who have come from the city; the son of so and so, the daughter of so and so and others.” · Tormywnyè bik kyen haklary bulgalady. Ämma analary bervakytta da «atagyz fälän dä atagyz tãgän» dip tel ozajtmady. (Gomär /Ôõmðr/ Bäwirov, Æidegän hiwmä.) Life was very difficult at times (lit., Life had very difficult times now and then). But their mother never made any disparaging remarks (or: never spoke ill of, vilified their father) like (lit., saying) “your father is this ... and your father is that” ... (For frequentative verbs in -gala– /-ôala-/, -gälä– /-gðlð-/, -kala– /-qala-/, -kälä– /-kðlð/ see 1309-1316.) · Galiq. ... Näfisä karhyk uly Gomär digän kewe. Kilgän dä monda akyl satyp utyra. Sez digän bula, abyegyzga täïsir qsyj almadygyz, ul axmak, fäläntãgän imew. (Wärif Kamal, Ut.) Ghaliä. ... a man called Ghömär, old Näfisä’s son. He came here and sat, talking big (giving unneeded advice). He said that I was unable to influence my (older) brother, that, as he put it, he is a fool, he is all kinds of (bad) things. · Ber zaman ber patwanyè väzire: «Min patwa bulsam, fälänne fälän, tãgänne tãgän itär idem, wunsyn wulaj, monysyn bolaj itär idem, – dip ... maktangan, di. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Patwa, väzir çäm tegermänhe.) A king’s minister once ... boasted (so they say): “If I were king, I would do certain things in a certain way, some other things in some other way, that thing I would do in that way, this thing I would do in this way.” · ... tiktomaldan Ädilä turynda såz bawlyj da minem kåèel kyllaryn tartkalap karyj. ... ber dä îkka Ädiläne qmanlarga totyna. Higå-tegå ïwen dä belmi, imew. Fälän dä tãgän, imew. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Qzgy kärvannar.) ... he suddenly begins to talk about Ädilä and tries to strike a chord in me (lit., to set my heartstrings vibrating). ... without any reason he starts to disparage Ädilä. Allegedly, she doesn’t know embroidering or sewing either. Allegedly, she cannot do all kinds of things. · Min çäjkäl qnyna kiläm dä ujlanam: bu kewene ãzelep sãjgän berär xatyn-kyz buldy mikän bu dãnáqda? Åze isän hakta sagynyp, sargaep qratkan berdänber qry bulganmy ikän? Niwläpter bu xakta ber genä belewmädä dä, ïnciklopediqdä dä qzmyjlar. Ul fälän-fälän diègezlärdä jãzgän, anyè karamagyndagy fänni tikwerenå korablary fälän dä tãgän dip atalgan, anyè iseme belän fälän bugaz atala. (Mädinä Malikova, Qnartaular qktysynda.) I step up to the statue and I am thinking: “Has there perhaps been in this world a woman who loved this man dearly? When he was alive did he himself perhaps have a one and only sweetheart whom he longed for, whom he loved and worried about? How come that they do not write about this either in guidebooks or in the encyclopedia. He has sailed such and such seas, the research vessels under his command carried such and such names, such and such strait is named after him.” Note: The above refers to the statue in Petropavlovsk-Kamchatski of the French navigator La Pérouse.

189

... kajber iptäwlär kurkytyp matawtylar: xalyk æänæal hygaryr, fälänfäsmätän, imew. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) ... some comrades tried to frighten (us): People would start a brawl and what not. · – ... sin alarnyè bersenä dä ywanyrga tiew tågel. Bugen alar sièa duslyk kårsätälär, Kaîm abzyj, sin wulaj bezgä dus, fälän-fäsmätän, dip toralar ikän, irtägä wul uk kewelärneè sine satulary bik mãmkin. (ibid.) “... you must not believe any one of them. Today they show you friendship, telling you: Uncle Qayum, you are such a friend to us, and what not. Tomorrow it is very possible that the same people will betray you.” ·

Negative Pronouns [443] Negative pronouns are formed by prefixing ber or çih ‘not a’, ‘no’, to interrogative pronouns: berkem (dä) – çihkem ‘nobody’, ‘no one’, bernärsä (dä) – çihnärsä ‘nothing’, berni (dä) – çihni ‘nothing’, bernindi (dä) – çihnindi ‘none whatever’, bernihek (dä) – çihnihek ‘in no manner’, ‘in no way’, berkajda (da) – çihkajda ‘nowhere’, berkaq (da) – çihkaq ‘to nowhere’, berkajdan (da) – çihkajdan ‘from nowhere’, berkajhan (da) çihkajhan ‘never’. Both categories of negative pronouns are synonymous and both require the predicate of the sentence to stand in the negative. Negative pronouns formed with ber are often used with the intensive particle da, dä. Note: Negative pronouns may be formed only from interrogative pronouns whose meaning permits this.

Examples: · Fatyjma. ... Min sinnän bary wuny gyna åtenäm: ... Berkemgä bernärsä sãjlämä. (Kärim Ämiri, Taè vakyty.) Fatima. ... I beg of you only this: ... Do not tell anybody anything. · Bågen alar ber-bersenä berni ïndäwmädelär. (Nurixan Fättax, Bala kåèele dalada.) Today they did not say anything to one another. · Barysy da åz urynynda ide, bernigä berkem timägän ide ... (ibid.) Everything was in its place, no one had touched anything, ... · – Ul haklarda äle Näæip belän minem arada duslyk dip äjterlek berni dä îk ide. (Ämirxan Eniki, Jãräk sere.) “At that time there was not yet anything between Näjip and me that could be called friendship.” · – Bezneè berkemgä dä bernindi vägâdä birgänebez îk. (ibid.) “We have not given any promise to anybody.” · – Min mony telämi idem äle, min moèa bernihek tä äzer tårel idem. (ibid.) “I did not want this, yet I was not ready for this in any way.” · – ... äjlänep kajtsak, avyldan berkaq da kitmibez. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Beräå.) “... if we return, we shall not go anywhere away from the village.” · ... kajsy gyna qkka kåz salsaè da, berkajhan da adäm kuly timägän kart dala suzylyp qta. (Nurixan Fättax, Bala kåèele dalada.) ... in whichever direction you look, there stretches the ancient steppe, which the human hand has never touched. · Inde xäzer bu dalada berkajhan da tuktap-tynyp tormaqhak ïw bawlandy. (ibid.) Work has already begun now in this steppe which will never cease. · Minem mondyj såz çäm kièäwne çihkemnän iwetkänem îk ide äle. (G. Ibraçimov turynda istäleklär, Säjfi Kudaw.) I had not yet heard such talk and advice from anybody. 190

·

· ·

· · ·

·

·

Galiq. Sineè xezmät îlyè æimerelä ikän, aèa çihkem gaeple tågel. Bary sin åzeène gaeplärgä tiew. (Wärif Kamal, Ut.) Ghaliä. If your career is destroyed, it is nobody’s fault. You must blame yourself alone for it. Räåf. Galiq! Bu ni bu? ... Elarlyk çihnärsä bulgany îk. (ibid.) Räüf. Ghaliä! What is this? ... After all, nothing has happened to cry about. Galiq. ... Karagyz äle, niwläp sez mièa baryp hykmyjsyz? Min åzem çihkajda hygyp jãrmim, ber qlgyzym bålmädä gel ukyp utyram. (ibid.) Ghaliä. ... Look please, why don’t you come to see me. I do not go out anywhere. I am always sitting all alone in my room, reading. Kyznyè çihkajhan mondyj kåèelle kihälärdä bulgany îk ... (Wamil Bikhurin, Tirän katlam.) The girl had never been at such lively parties ... – Ni sãjliseè sin, ...? çihni aèlamyjm... (Ranis Gazizov, Kåkkä qbywkan bolyt.) “What are you saying there, ...? I don’t understand anything.” Rian åzen, ïlektägehä åk, çihnigä isem kitmi digän syman çavaly tota. (Gurij Tavlin, Afät.) Rian behaves haughtily, just as before, as though he doesn’t care a straw. Dãreslek – bezneè qkta. Çäm mony dälilläå dä çihnindi kyenlyk tudyrmyj. ( Indus Taçirov, Tatarstan: kihä, bågen, irtägä.) The truth is on our side, and proving it does not create any difficulty whatsoever. Ämma läkin ber genä telägen ul çihnihek tä æièä almady. Bu anyè Läjläne kåz kyrye belän genä bulsa da ber kårep kalasy kilå teläge ide. (Ämirxan Eniki, Tãnge tamhylar.) However, one desire he could in no way overcome, try as he might (lit., in any way). This desire of his was to see Leylä once (again), even if only with the corner of his eye.

[444] Çih, ber and beräå may function independently as negative pronouns: · Galiq. Min bolaj dip çih ujlamagan idem, Räåf iptäw ... (Wärif Kamal, Ut.) Ghaliä. I never thought that it was like this, comrade Räüf ... · Anyè bu avylda çih kardäw vä qkynnary îk ide. (Wärif Kamal, Tormyw kãe.) In this village he did not have any brothers or (other) relatives. · Kerde Isxak, ãstäl qnyna utyrdy çäm gomerendä ber dä kårgäne bulmagan wokolad konfetny berenhe märtäbä wunda awady ... (Aqz Gyjläæev, Beräå.) Iskhaq entered, sat down at the table, and there, for the first time, he ate chocolate candy, which he had never seen in his life. · Tagyn kihkä xätle ber dä sãjläwmihä ïwlider idek. (Wärif Kamal, Kuraj tavywy.) Again we worked until evening without speaking at all. (For -dyr, -der on conjugated verbs see 980.) · Ul vakytta Moxtar aèa nihekter ber dä äçämiqt birmägän ide. (Wärif Kamal, Taè atkanda.) At that time, Mokhtar had somehow not paid any attention to him. · Xaty närsä turynda buldy anyè? Beräå dä belmäde. Hãnki ul mony beräågä dä kårsätmihä, beräå belän dä kièäwmihä qzdy. (Fatix Xãsni, Æäj bawy.) What was her letter about? No one knew because she wrote it without showing it to anybody, without consulting anybody. [445] Çih and ber (beräå) may be united to express categorical negation: · Galiq. ... Bolarny min sezgä åz itep sãjlim, bawka çihber kewegä sãjlägänem îk. (Wärif Kamal, Ut.) Ghaliä. I am telling you these things, regarding you as my close friend. I have not told them to anyone else. · Bez çihber närsägä karamyjha, çihber närsä ujlamyjha kyzu-kyzu alta atladyk. (Davyt Îltyj, Kan.) We marched on quickly without looking at anything, without thinking anything. 191

·

«Min qman», digänne çihberäådän iwetmässeè. (Proverb.) Nobody says of himself that he is bad. (Lit., You will not hear from anybody: “I am bad”.)

Relative Pronouns [446] In the Tatar literary language subordination is mostly rendered by participial or adverbial constructions. However, although not accepted as a norm in the literary language, in the vernacular and in poetry simple relative pronouns are sometimes used.1) For example: · Bez herek jãklärne ãstän tawlyjbyz, kajsylar bezne ålemdäj kaplagan. (Çadi Taktaw, – M.Z. Zäkiev, Xäzerge tatar ädäbi tele.) We are throwing off the rotten burdens which have covered us like death. · Utyr aulakka, kajda çih kewe îk. (Gabdulla Tukaj, ibid.) Sit down at a secluded place where there is no one. [447] Relative pronouns are more commonly used in pairs both in the literary language and in the vernacular. Such pairs consist mostly of an interrogative pronoun in the subordinate clause and a demonstrative pronoun in the main clause. Both relative pronouns agree in number, but not necessarily in case, the latter depending on the construction of their own clause. The subordinate clause precedes the main clause. Examples: · Kem hanasyna utyrsaè, wunyè æyryn æyrlarsyè. (Proverb.) He who pays the piper calls the tune. (Lit., You sing the song of him in whose sleigh you sit). · – Äti annan bawka ber-ber såz äjtteme? – di patwa kyzy. Malaj äjtä: – Äjtte, kylyhny kem alyp kilsä, kyzymny wuèa biräm dip äjtte ... (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Tire Takyq.) The king’s daughter says, “Did my father say anything besides that?” The youth (lit., boy) says, “He did, he said ‘I’ll give my daughter to him who brings me the sword’ ...” · Baj äjtä bolarga: «Kem dä kem kyzymny alyp kajtsa, kyz wuèarga bula», · di. (ibid. Serle baldak.) The rich man says to them, “Whoever brings back my daughter, the girl will be his.” · Ni hähsäè, wuny uryrsyè. (Proverb.) As ye sow so shall ye reap (lit., You reap that which you sow). · – Nihek qzylgan, wulaj ïwlädek. (Färit Gyjlámetdinov, Elganyè borylgan tãwendä.) “We did it (so) as it was written.” · – Sin uzeè kajdan kildeè, wunda kit. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Ak båre.) “You yourself go back there where you came from.” · ¡ Kajhan sezneè ãhen æajly bulyr – wunda kilersez ... (Mirsäj Ämir, Telefon.) “Come (then) when it is convenient for you.” · – Avylda nikadär mawina kåp bulsa, wulkadär qxwyrak, tågelme? (Nurixan Fättax, Kihå.) “The greater the amount of (agricultural) machinery in a village, the better – right?” · Bawka xalyklar buran bulganga nihakly kajgyrsalar, bolar wul kadärle watlanalar gyna ide. (Mäæit Gafuri, Qrlylar.) Whereas (to the extent that) the other people worried about there being a snowstorm, these (i.e., these poor people) only rejoiced the more (because it provided them with work). 1)

M.Z. Zäkiev, Xäzerge tatar ädäbi tele (Kazan 1966), r. 186.

192

Use of Other Parts of Speech as Pronouns Words commonly used in this function are: [448] Ber, berär, beräå, beräålär (439, 444). [449] Kewe ‘man’, ‘person’: · [Wäväli] ... iwekne ïtep ahty: – Ãjdä kewe barmy? (Garif Axunov, Xäzinä.) [Shäwäli] ... pushed the door open: “Is there anybody home?” · Karagol. ... Bez monda kãndezgä kalmyjk. Kewe kåzenä kårenergä qramyj. (Davyt Îltyj, Karagol.) Qaraghol. ... Let’s not stay here until day comes. It is not good (for us) to be seen by anybody. · [Eget] bãten bålmälärne karap hyga, ber kewene dä taba almyj. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Ãh kågärhen.) [The young man] looks through all the rooms, (but) he cannot find anybody. [450] Ïw ‘work’, ‘matter’: · Gosmannyè bu xäräkätlärendä Wakir Äsmany kimsetå syman ber ïw kårä, ... (Fatix Ämirxan, Sångäh.) In these actions of Ghosman, Shakir sees something in a way humiliating to Äsma, ... · – ... alaj bulgah, sineè rãxsäteènän bawka min monda ber ïw tä ïwlämimen, ... (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Ak båre.) “... if that is so, I shall do nothing here without your permission, ...” [451] Æir ‘place’, ‘land’: · – Minæan, karale, bar bezgä berär närsä kapkalarga xäzerlä. Menä Bäzgi belän barasy æir bar. (Mäsgut Wärifullin, Ellar åtkäh.) “Look, Minjan, please go and prepare us a little something to eat. B`äzgi and I have to go somewhere.” · · Ul çär æirdä dä wulaj ih. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) “That is so everywhere, after all.” [452] Qk ‘side’: · Kurkynyh, çär qk karaègy, ... (Çadi Taktaw, Æir ullary tragediqse.) It’s frightening, everywhere there is darkness ... [453] Äjber ‘object’, ‘thing’: · Ber äjber ïwläp bulmyj. (Tat.-rus. såzlek.) You (One) cannot do anything. · Ber äjber äjtmäde. (ibid.) He did not say anything. [454] Teläsä ‘if he (she, it) wishes, wants’. Teläsä is combined with interrogative pronouns to form compound indefinite pronouns: Teläsä kem ‘anybody’, ‘whoever’, teläsä närsä ‘anything’, ‘whatever’, teläsä nihek ‘somehow’, ‘anyhow’, teläsä kajdan ‘from anywhere’, teläsä kajhan ‘some time’, ‘whenever’. [455] Compound indefinite pronouns formed with teläsä indicate that the action may be directed towards the person, place, or thing expressed by the pronouns, if the subject so desires. Examples: · – Teläsä kem belän sãjläwergä xakym bar (Ibraçim Gazi, Onytylmas ellar.) “I have the right to talk with anybody (i.e., with anybody I want)!” 193

– Kitep kaq bara ala ul? – Ä sin kaq barasyè? – Min teläsä kaq kitä alam... (Wärif Kamal, Taè atkanda.) “When she leaves where can she go?” “And where do you go?” “I can go anywhere I want to go...” · Kilähäktä min alarnyè da serenä tãwenermen, teläsä kajsy kitapny, teläsä kajsy urynynnan ahyp ukyj alyrmyn dip xyqllana idem. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) I was dreaming that in the future I would unriddle their (i.e., those books’) secrets too, that I would be able to open any book at any place and read it. · – Balalar äkiqte! Alarga da teläsä nindi äkiqt sãjläp bulmyj. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) “Children’s story! Even to them you can’t tell just any old story.” ·

[456] Da bulsa, bulsa da ‘if it is’. Combined with interrogative pronouns, da bulsa (bulsa da) form compound indefinite pronouns: Kem bulsa da, kem dä bulsa ‘someone’, ‘somebody’, ‘anybody’, ‘anyone’, närsä dä bulsa ‘something’, ‘anything’, kajda da bulsa ‘somewhere’, ‘anywhere’, kajhan da bulsa, kajhan bulsa da ‘some time’, ‘some, one day (in the future)’, ‘ever’, nindi dä bulsa ‘some, any (kind of)’, nihek tä bulsa, nihek bulsa da ‘somehow’. Examples: · Byel Zäbixulla abyj bazarga bargan saen nindi dä bulsa ber qèa kitap alyp kajta torgan buldy. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) This year Zäbikhulla used to bring back (i.e., he assumed the habit of bringing back) some kind of new book, each time he went to the market. (For -a, -ä, yj, -i torgan bulu see 991, 2 a, b.) · Ällä berär æirdä, kajda da bulsa erakta, minem tikleräk ïnese barmy ikän? Ällä bik bala æanly keweme? (Gomär Bewirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) Does she perhaps have some place, somewhere far away, a younger brother who is a bit like me? Or is she a person who is very fond of children? (For ällä ... ällä see 729, a.) · · Bar, äjt: «Nihek tä bulsa tålärbez, Bikbulat abzyj, bolaj xälebez æitmäsä, awlygyèny uryp birerbez», digen. (ibid.) Go, tell him “we shall pay somehow, uncle Bikbulat, and if we cannot do so, we shall harvest your corn for you”. · Æämilä tirläde, kyzardy, nihek bulsa da samovarny agartyp beterde. (Mäæit Gafuri, Qrlylar.) Jämilä sweated, her face reddened; somehow she got the samovar clean. · – Sin nihek kenä bulsa da, biw jãz sum altyn akha tabarga tiewseè. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) “Somehow (one way or other), you must find five hundred rubles in gold.” (For the intensive particle gyna, genä, kyna, kenä see 686 d., e.) · – ..., beläseème närsä? – Närsä? – Bez bit sineè belän kajhan da bulsa ber baj bulahakbyz. (Kärim Tinhurin, Jãz meè.) “You know what ...?” “What?” “One day you and I, I say, will be rich.”

The Indefinite Verb Nitå [457] The Tatar language has the indefinite verb nitå. Obviously a contraction of ni ‘what’ and itå ‘to do, make’, it basically pertains to the vernacular. However, it has found its way also into the literary language. It is used:

194

1. As a past participle in -kän (1047) – nitkän. In this form it is an indefinite pronoun corresponding to nindi. It may express (connote) the speaker’s attitude towards the person, thing, place, idea, etc., he is talking about. · – Sineè hygaryluga oewma nihek karyj? Niwläp ximaq itmi? – Ix! Nitkän oewma bulsyn inde ul? (Wärif Kamal, Taè atkanda.) “How does the organization regard your expulsion? Why doesn’t it support you?” “Huh, what kind of an organization that is!” (Expresses derision.) · – Aj allam, nitkän såz ul tagyn? – dide Sãembikä xanym, ... (Garif Axunov, Gomer îly.) “O my God! What kind of talk is that again?” said lady Söyembikä. (Expresses apprehension.)

– Min åzem dä ällä nitkän hibär tågel dä, – dide bu berazdan, åz-åzen kimsätep. (Nurixan Fättax, Mãdir Saæidä.) “I myself am not pretty in any way, you see,” said she after a little while, belittling herself. · ... min äle kãnáqk qrymwarynyè joldyzly kågen kårgänem îk ide. Bolyt disäè bolyt tågel, kåktä ällä nitkän tãten syman dymly bãrkålek tora çäm anyè arkyly ber genä joldyz da kårenmi ide. (Rafaïlá Mostafin, «Oæmax»ka säqxät.) ... I had not seen the starry sky of the southern hemisphere before. There were no real clouds in the sky, but there was a damp, oppressive heat which hung there like some kind of smoke, and through it not a single star was visible. 2. As an ordinary verb. As such it may be conjugated in all persons and moods and may be used also with auxiliary verbs (for auxiliary verbs see 1322-1378). ·

Nitå is used when the speaker is at a momentary loss to find the appropriate verb (compare also ni – the first element in nitå – as an expletive (780, 1. a-c, 1103), or when, for some reason or other, he (she) wants to avoid being direct. Like its past participle, it may also connote the speaker’s attitude towards the subject matter he(she) is referring to. · – Qle, Gajniæamal, änä wuwy tãenhektä azrak älege ni ... bardyr, azrak nitep alyjk, kihädän birle ällä niwläp arkalar ãwep torgan wikelle bula. Azrak wifasy bulyrmy ällä dip alyp kergän idem. (Wärif Kamal, Avyl matur ujlyj.) “Well now, Gheynijamal, in this package here there is a little of that same... er... let’s have (i.e., taste, drink) a bit. Since yesterday it somehow seems to me like I’ve caught a chill in my whole back. I thought I’d bring this with me; perhaps it will help it a little.” Note: The above is said in a light, half-joking tone. The speaker avoids being explicit with regard to the action (taste, drink), although it is obvious that he refers to some alcoholic beverage, probably vodka.

Rãstäm (elyj-elyj takmaklyj). Kojma bawynnan nittem ... Egylyp tãwtem. (Gamir Nasryj, Kaderle minutlar.) Röstäm (crying, laments). It was that I... er... (slipped, lost my balance) from the top of a fence – I fell. 3. As an ordinary verb forming a pair with other verbs. In this case, nitå always appears in the same grammatical form as the verb with which it forms a pair. The latter precedes nitå and in writing both are connected by a hyphen. ·

In this function nitå gives the first component (verb) a somewhat general, abstract meaning. · – Uzemä ywan. Ikelänep-nitep torma. Bergä-bergä kåèelle bulyr. (Wärif Kamal, Nykly adymnar.) “Believe me. Don’t have any further doubts. Together it will be pleasant (cheerful).” (I.e., moving together to the city and working there together in the same establishment.)

195

Alar bezne tatarha aèlamyj dip ujladylar bulsa kiräk, tartynmyj-nitmi sãjläwä birdelär. (Safa Sabirov, Firdäves.) They must have thought that we did not understand Tatar, for they continued their conversation without feeling uncomfortable in any way. · Sãjläwmi-nitmi genä koqwta kyzyndylar. Niçaqtá, Zakirov tåzmäde. (Zãfär Fätxetdinov, Ahylgan serlär.) They were basking in the sun without saying anything at all. Finally, Zakirov couldn’t bear it any longer. · Tudyru jortynnan kajtkannyè soèynda da Gawiq aèa karata äjtep betergesez igâtibarly buludan tuktamady. «Hygyp jãrmä, ãzlegerseè-nitärseè», – dip, aèa ikmäkne dä åze alyp kajta torgan buldy. (Mirsäj Ämir, Saf kåèel.) Even after she (i.e., Kärimä) came out of the maternity hospital, Ghashiä did not cease being extremely considerate towards her. She told her not to go out because she could get all kinds of complications (lit., saying: Don’t go out, you’ll get all kinds of complications), she even got into the habit of getting the bread for her. · ... Äkäm ber såz däwmi. Berär pohmakka hågäli dä suksalar-nitsälär dip, bawyn kullary belän kaplyj, kåzlären hytyrdatyp joma. (Ibraçim Gazi, Onytylmas ellar.) ... Äkäm doesn’t say a word. He crouches in some corner and, in case they should beat or mistreat him in any way, he covers his head with his arms and shuts his eyes tightly. 4. Nitå may also form pairs with nouns. · Uku vakytlary da sägatáläp-nitep bilgelänmägän. Sine ukytuhy xälfäneè käefenä karap jãri. (Zarif Bäwiri, Zamandawlarym belän ohrawular.) The lessons are not scheduled by hours or anything, either. You go (to the lessons) according to the mood of the teacher who teaches you (i.e., neither the time when the lessons are given nor their length has been fixed). ·

196

CHAPTER V ¡ POSTPOSITIONS General Characteristics and Formation [458] A postposition is a word placed after a word to indicate its grammatical and syntactical relationship to the other words in the sentence. Tatar postpositions consist of: 1. Words resembling particles but differing from them in function and grammatical structure. Such postpositions originated from independent words sometime in the distant past, but today, their original meaning cannot readily be discerned any more. Having no independent lexical meaning, they cannot by themselves function as individual parts of speech. Postpositions belonging here are, for example:1) belän, ãhen, kebek (kåk, kebi), kadär /qðdðr/, taba(n), birle, syman, symak, saen /sajín/. 2. Verbal adverbs and participles (postpositions of verbal origin. 3. Adverbs, adjectives and nouns used in their basic form. Postpositions of the second and third group still maintain their link with the independent words from which they originated, and they are also used (some more, others less frequently) in their original meaning. Postpositions belonging to these two groups remain unchanged when following the word they govern.2) 4. Nouns functioning as postpositions may take the possessive suffixes. When preceded by the pronouns minem, sineè, bezneè, sezneè, the possessive endings may be omitted. With the third person possessive suffix, they form possessive couplets with the word they govern. To indicate various relationships, such as movement to, position at, or movement from a person, place, or thing, temporal or abstract relationship, most nouns functioning as postpositions take the dative, locative and ablative cases. Some may take only one or two of these cases or, like iw ‘couple’, ‘pair’, ‘an equal’ (482), take no case ending. On the other hand, buj ‘height’, ‘stature’, ‘length’ (474), is used with all three cases, with the suffix +ha (buenha /bujínca/), as well as with the third person possessive suffix only (bue /bují/). Note: The process of independent words being transformed into, or assuming the function of, postpositions still continues. This process has not progressed (and is not progressing) uniformly. Consequently, some postpositions (and words functioning as postpositions) are farther (some even very far) removed from the basic meanings of the independent words from which they originate, while others are closer to them.

[459] A number of postpositions and words functioning as postpositions may, depending on their origin and meaning, take the suffix +rak, räk (572) as well as certain other suffixes (573). Furthermore, some postpositions may be substantivized. They are then treated as any other noun: they may be put into the plural, take any case ending, be governed by another postposition, etc. (see 574). 1) 2)

For the meaning of these postpositions see the respective paragraphs. An exception is awa ‘through’, ‘over’, which is sometimes used with the possessive suffix of the third person singular and the ablative case: awasynnan (see 470, Note).

197

Also, postpositions are frequently used with participles, and some of them, for example kebek, syman, symak, wikelle, tãsle, may be used with conjugated verbal forms (see 576). Like prepositions in English and other languages, Tatar postpositions may indicate one or several relationships. Tatar postpositions are enclitic. They govern either the nominative, the genitive of personal and demonstrative pronouns, the dative or ablative.

Postpositions Governing the Nominative and the Genitive [460] The following postpositions require the nominative if the governed word is a noun and the genitive if the governed word is a personal pronoun (except the 3rd person plural). As a rule, demonstrative pronouns in the singular are also in the genitive. However, bu, ul, wul may stand in the nominative. [461] al(d) ‘front part’. Note: Case endings, derivational suffixes with an initial consonant, and the plural suffix +lar are joined to the short form: Minem alda ‘in front of me’; alga baru ‘to advance’; aldan äjtå ‘to foretell, predict’; binanyè algy qgy ‘the face of the building’; ally-artly ‘one after the other’, ‘in single file’; iwek allary ‘yards’. But: iwek aldy1) ‘yard’; ãj aldy ‘porch’, ‘passage’; aldyn-artyn ujlamastan ‘rashly’, ‘thoughtlessly’.

1. aldyna a) ‘before’, ‘in front of’ (indicating direction, motion to): · Any awap betergäh, minem aldyma tabada tämle is bãrkep torgan gaqtá /ôajðt or ôðjðt/ zur bälew kiterep kujdy. (Safa Sabirov, Firdäves.) After I had finished it (i.e., finished eating the soup), she brought on a fryingpan a gigantic, stuffed pie, which let out a pleasant aroma, and placed it before me. · ... Mansur ... Mädinä xanym aldyna kilep xãrmät belän ike kulyn suzyp kårewte. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) ... Mansur ... stepped before lady Mädinä and, stretching out both his hands, greeted her with respect. · Xatny ukyp hykkah, ul qèadan urynyna qtty. Anyè kåz aldyna åtkän istäleklär, tatly, kuanyhly istäleklär kilep basty. (Nurixan Fättax, Bala kåèele dalada.) After he had read through the letter, he again lay down on his bed. Memories of the past (lit., passed memories), sweet, happy memories, appeared before his (mind’s) eye. b) ‘(for) before’ (indicating time before): · Bezgä aw uryny xäzerläp matawuhy tatar oficianty ...: – Kaîm abyj, aw aldyna nindine kiterim: aknymy, ällä kyzylnymy? – dide. (G. Ibraçimov turynda istäleklär, Kaîm Mostakaev.) The Tatar waiter, who was busy preparing a table (lit., a dining place) for us ... asked (lit., said), “Uncle Qayum, which one shall I bring (for) before the meal (i.e., to drink before the meal), the white one, or the red one?” 2. aldynda a) ‘before’, ‘in front of’ (in position, in the presence of): · Äje, Wäräf bågen kårenmäde. ... bawka kãnnärdä alar gel wuwy urynda – Äminälär jorty aldynda ohrawyp, institutka bergä kitälär ide. (Gabdraxman Minskij, Qznyè berenhe kãne.) Yes, today Shäräf did not appear. ... on other days 1) More recently spelled iwegaldy.

198

they had always met at this spot here, in front of Äminä’s house, and gone together to the institute. · ... Kärimä tora, ..., îyna, kãzge aldynda hähen taryj, kienä ... (Mãsägyjt Xäbibullin, Sular årgä aksa da.) ... Kärimä gets up, ..., washes, combs her hair before the mirror, dresses ... · Niçaqtá, Krakatau utravy sul qkta kala çäm bezneè alda zãbäræättäj qwel kue åsemleklär belän kaplangan tauly Qva utravy qrlary ahyla. (Rafaïlá Mostafin, «Oæmax»ka säqxät.) Finally, the island of Krakatau lies to the left, and the shores of the mountainous island of Java, covered with dense, emerald-green vegetation, open up before us. · Min efäk tãenne kurka-kurka gyna såttem. Menä aldymda kån tywly, gaæäp zur, kalyn kitap. (Näbi Däåli, Qzmywka îl.) Fearfully, I untied the silk string. There, before me lay (lit., is) an amazingly large, thick, leatherbound book. b) ‘before’ (indicating time): · Bågen taè aldynda toryp sälam sãjlim, Kemgä? – Belmim. (Çadi Taktaw, Zäègär kåzlär.) Today, before dawn, I get up and say hello, To whom? – I do not know. · Taè aldynda bik kãhle qègyr qvyp, irtänhäk çava salkyn çäm bolytly ide. (Wärif Kamal, Kozgynnar oqsynda.) Before dawn it rained very severely, and in the morning the weather was cold and cloudy. (irtänhäk dial. Irtän). · Berkãn tãw aldynda berenhe nevodny hygargah, nyk kyna æil kuzgaldy. (Wärif Kamal, Akharlaklar.) One day, before noon, after they had pulled in the first sweep-net, a rather stiff wind sprang up (nevod – R., æylym). 3. aldynnan a) ‘from, past in front of’ (a place, thing, or person); also abstract relationship: · Xäsän, kienep betergäh, galstugyn tãzäter ãhen kãzge aldyna kilep utyrdy. ... Xäsän, any rätläp kujgah ta, kãzge aldynnan kitmäde ... (Fatix Ämirxan, Urtalykta.) After he had got dressed, Khäsän stepped to (lit., came to) and sat down before the mirror to readjust his necktie. ... After having set it straight, Khäsän did not move away from (in front of) the mirror ... · Åze genä kalgah, Xälim, qkty täräzä aldynnan kuzgala almyjha, bik ozak basyp tordy. (Ibraçim Gazi, Onytylmas ellar.) Alone now, Khälim stood there for a very long time, unable to move away from the lighted window. · Bez eragrak kitkän saen, avyl da artta kala bara. Ãjlär keheräq. Äjterseè lä alar wulaj äkren genä æirgä seèä baralar. Änä inde mähet manarasy da tåbän tãwä-tãwä kitte dä kåz aldynnan îgaldy. ... Ujlanam. Ujlagan saen sagywlarym arta bara. Ä Gãldäriem kåz aldymnan kitmi. (Näbi Däåli, Qzmywka îl.) The farther we move away, the more the village remains behind. The houses become smaller. It seems they are sinking gradually into the ground. The minaret of the mosque there too has already become lower and lower and has disappeared from sight. ... I am thinking. The more I think, the more my sadness grows. But my Göldäri does not vanish from my (mind’s) eye. (Göldäri: name of his pet cock.) · Ul ... Gajfullin ikän. Pohmaktagy bäläkäj uram kibete aldynnan ... åtep bara. (Wärif Kamal, Taè atkanda.) He ... turns out to be Ghaifullin. ... He is passing in front of the little street shop at the corner. · Ul ozak ujlandy. Bãten gomere /ôõmere/ kåz aldynnan åtte. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) She thought for a long time. Her whole life passed before her (mind’s) eye. 199

b) ‘before’ (indicating time): · Berkãnne wulaj kih aldynan uram bujlap barganda, ul avyldawy Nizamiga ohrady. (Sadri Æäläl, Îlär.) So, one day when he was walking along the street before evening, he ran into his fellow villager Nizami. · Erak îlga hygu aldynnan tugan avylym belän dä saubullawasym kilde. (Mirsäj Ämir, Åsä tãwkäh.) Before setting out on the long (lit., far) way, I wanted to say goodbye also to my native village. · Mãdirlek belän bergä, Mãslimi ukytuhylyk ïwen dä alyp bara, ... qrata idek. ... Sãjlägän vakytta ul «r» avazyn dãres äjtä almyj, «utyrygyz» digäne «utygygyz» bulyp hyga ,... wuk malajlar anyè därese aldynnan ãstäl qnynda ul bulyp kylanyp kãlderälär ide. (ibid.) Together with the duty of the principal, Möslimi also performed the work of a teacher, ... we liked him ... When he spoke, he could not pronounce the sound “r” correctly. When he said: “Utíríôíz” (Sit down), the “r” came out as a “gh” ... Before his class (lit., lesson), the mischievous boys (in the class) ... used to make us laugh by pretending to be him at the desk. [462] ara ‘space’, ‘interval, distance’. 1. arasyna a) ‘between’, ‘among’ (indicating direction, space to which): · Wulaj ujlanyp bargan hakta, Zakir qwá kaennar arasyna kilep kerde ... (Äbrar Wämin, Îgalgan kyz.) While he was thinking and walking (so), Zakir came among young birches ... · Bez æirdän årmäläp, avyl ïhenä – ãjlär arasyna qwerendek. (Mirsäj Ämir, Xikmätullinnyè manevrda kårgännäre.) We crept along on the ground and hid in the village between the houses. · [Firåzä] tåbän karady. Kyqlar, uentyklar awa, kaq sikerep, kaq tawlar arasyna kerä-îgala hiwmä aga ... (Mãsägyjt Xäbibullin, Tuj baldagy.) [Firüzä] looked down. Over rocks (and) ledges a spring was flowing, now junping (over), now entering and disappearing between, the rocks ... · ... uèda qwelhä tåtälläre såzylyp qta ide. Tåtällär ozyn, aralaryna tirän itep kanaular kazylgan... (Mädinä Malikova, Qnartaular qktysynda.) ... on the right, its (i.e., the village’s) vegetable beds stretched along. The beds are long. Between them deep ditches have been dug (lit., ditches have been dug deep). b) ‘into’ (the midst of, the space between two or more persons or things): · Wul ygy-zygy arasyna ... min dä kilep kerdem. (Fatix Xãsni, Gyjlámenisa.) I too got into (the midst of) that commotion (i.e., commotion of an aniversary celebration) ... · Änä, inde bazar kuera bawlagan. Kewelär wäçärneè tãrle uramnarynnan bire agyla toralar. Bezgä dä wular arasyna kerep kåzdän îgalyrga kiräk. (Näbi Däåli, Koqwka jãz belän.) There, the market has already begun to stir (become crowded). People are flocking here from various streets of the town; we must get into their midst and disappear from sight. (Being two homeless children, they do not want to get caught and be put in an orphanage.) · Æämilä, Bädrineè kièäwe båenha, ïw ïzläp, wäçär arasyna hygyp kitte. (Mäæit Gafuri, Qrlylar.) At Bädri’s advice, Jämilä went into town to look for work. 2. arasynda a) ‘between’, ‘among’ (indicating position where): · ... tãnáqgynda tundra, urtasynnan qnäwä ike tau syrty såzyla, alar arasynda kue ylysly urmannar, kyrlar, ... (Mädinä Malikova, Qnartaular qktysynda.)

200

... in the north (i.e., in the north of Kamtchatka) there is tundra. Two parallel mountain ranges extend along its center. Between them are dense coniferous forests, fields, ... · Avyl belän aïrodrom arasynda mawina jãrmägängä (kar hamasyz kåp ide), Äçletdin babaj alarny at belän ozatyp kujdy. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) Because cars did not run (there was too much snow) between the village and the airport, old Ähletdin brought them there by horse. · Bu xakta xalyk arasynda tãrle xäbärlär tarala. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Diègezdä.) Various rumors are spreading among the people about this. · ... aèa monda abyjsy qnynda, qwálär arasynda, åz tiènäre arasynda räxäträk tä, kåèelleräk tä ide. (Nurixan Fättax, Bala kåèele dalada.) ... here, with her older brother, among young people, among her own peers, it was both more relaxing and more pleasant for her. b) ‘between’, ‘among’ (indicating relationship): · · Tãrle såz jãri, balam. Elena belän sineè arada berär xäl barmy ällä? (Barlas Kamalov, Qlykmaslar.) “There are all kinds of gossip going round, my son. Is there perhaps something between Yelena and you?” · Qèa gyna iwetkän såzlär belän bu qulyk arasynda tägaen ber bäjlänew barlygyn da ul sizmihä kalmady. (Ämirxan Eniki, Waqru.) Also, she did not fail to notice that there was a definite connection between the words she had just heard and this kerchief. Note: When the action or condition is between, among two or more persons, places, or things, the postposition belän serves, as a rule, as a conjunction.

c) ‘between’ (intermediate to two times, quantities, or degrees): · – Zinçar ãhen, un belän unber arasynda anda bul. “Please, be there between ten and eleven o’clock.” · [Kaîm Nasyjri] ... tatar teleneè ... grammatikasyn, aèlatmaly såzlegen, matur çäm dãres qzu kagyjdälären tãzep, 1891-1896 ellar arasynda bastyryp hygara. (Tatar ädäbiqty, XIX jãz.) [Qayum Nasiri] ... compiled his ... grammar of the Tatar language, his encyclopedic dictionary, his rules of writing well and correctly, and published them between the years 1891 and 1896. Note: Qayum Nasiri (1825-1902) foremost Tatar educator, teacher and scholar. author of numerous academic and literary works, textbooks and treatises. Active member of the Society for Archeology, History and Ethnography at the University of Kazan. Author of the first major encyclopedic dictionary of the Tatar language.

Qwe egerme biw belän utyz arasynda gyna bulsa da, Färidneè ãlkän qwátäge igenhe agajlarha tyjnaklyk saklavy bik owyj ide Kamilgä. (Gomär Bäwirov, Æidegän hiwmä.) Kamil liked very much that Färid, although he was only between twenty-five and thirty years old, observed a modesty like (that of) the old graingrowers. · Stärlitamakta bezdän bawka tagy ber årnäk mäktäbe bar ide. «Ikenhe årnäk» dip jãri idek. «Ikenhe årnäk» malajlary belän «Berenhe årnäk» kyzlary arasynda tanywu-duslawu xälläre bulgan, kåräseè. (Mirsäj Ämir, Åsä tãwkäh.) Besides ours (lit., us), there was in Sterlitamak still another model school. We used to call it the “Second Model”. There seem to have been cases of fraternization (lit., getting acquainted and becoming friends) among the boys of the “Second Model” and the girls of the “First Model”. d) ‘during’, ‘in’ (indicating time of the action): · Wul turyda ul ïw arasynda da, ãjgä kajtkah ta ujlandy. (Atilla Rasix, Ajly tãnnär.) He thought about that during work, as well as after he returned home. ·

201

Awygyh kyna ïhkän häj arasynda alar åzläreneè gailä tormywyn sãjläp aldylar. (Mäæit Gafuri, Wagyjráneè altyn priiskasynda.) During tea, which they had in a hurry, they spoke (brief ly) about their family life. · Kårewmi torgan ber el arasynda ul tagyn da ... maturlanyp kitkän. (Nurixan Fättax, Syzgyra torgan uklar.) During the one year that they had not seen each other, she has become more ... beautiful still. · Kårwe bålmädä äti joky arasynda nider sãjlänä. (Sadri Æäläl, Inde min aèa ränæemim.) In the adjacent room Father is talking to himself in (his) sleep. · Bu zur jortta Gamzat bajnyè mal karauhysy qwi ikän ... çär kãnne irtän ... bãten xutorny äjlänep uza, di. Qnäse, barysy da åz urynyndamy? Tãn arasynda andyj-mondyj bäla-kaza bulmaganmy? (Näbi Däåli, Qzmywka îl.) In this big house lives rich Ghamzat’s animaltender (so the speaker has just learned). ... Every day in the morning ... he is said to make the rounds of the entire farmstead (to check) whether everything is in order, whether during the night there hasn’t been some kind of an accident. · Bu karardan soè kåèele azrak tynyhlangan tãsle bula. Wul arada nikter kinättän anyè kåz aldyna Färidä kilä, anyè jãräge tagyn syzylyp kitä. (Sadri Æäläl, Dim buenda.) It seems as though after this decision he (lit., his heart) has calmed down a little. At that moment, for some reason, Färidä comes suddenly before his mind’s eye, and his heart starts racing again. ‘in the midst of’, ‘in’ (indicating location where): · – Mièa berkem kilmi, berni kitermi. Min urmannar, taular arasynda, atsyer arasynda qwim. (Nurixan Fättax, Syzgyra torgan uklar.) “No one comes to see me, no one brings me anything. I am living in the midst of woods and mountains, amidst horses and cattle.” · Tywta karaègy, salkyn ... æil agahlarnyè wärä botaklary arasynda syzgyra. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) Outside it is dark (and) cold ... the wind is whistling in the naked branches of the trees. · Bädri kåptän dãnáq kårgängä kårä, wäçär arasynda jãråe anyè ãhen avyr kårenmi. (Mäæit Gafuri, Qrlylar.) Because Bädri has long experience of life, walking about in the city does not appear difficult to her. · ... iwek ahylyp, iwek arasynda mãlaem genä ber kyz kårende. (Wärif Kamal, Akharlaklar.) ... the door opened, and in the doorway a rather pretty girl appeared. ‘in’ (indicating manner): · Uen-kãlke arasynda äjtelgän wul såzdän soè Mãrwidä ïhtän genä ujlana bawlady. (Mãsägyjt Xäbibullin, Ikmäk kadere /qðdere/.) After these words, which were said in fun, Mörshidä began to ponder (inwardly). arasynnan ‘from between, among’ (indicating motion from): · Taunyè ... zur tawlary arasynnan waulap kuätle elga tãwä. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Kãtåhelär.) From between the ... big rocks of the mountain a powerful river comes thundering down. · «Moskvih» kilgän ide inde. Zaçid ... saubullawu ãhen awygyp kulyn suzdy. Berazdan inde ul, agahlar arasynnan hygyp, awyga-awyga taudan tãwep kitte. (Atilla Rasix, Ike bujdak.) The “Moskvich” had already come. Zahid ... hastily stretched out his hand to say goodbye. And soon, emerging from among the trees, he hurriedly drove down from the mountain. (“Moskvitch” – make of a car.) ·

e)

f)

3. a)

202

... iwan ãelep torgan kitaplar arasynnan ber qwel tywlysyn tartyp ala. (Ämirxan Eniki, Hikertkä.) ... from among the books which were piled up the Ishan1) pulled (lit., pulls) out one with a green cover. · Ul wul akhalar arasynnan 50 tienlek kãmewne alyp bezgä birde. (Mäæit Gafuri, Wagyjráneè altyn priiskasynda.) He took a 50-kopeck silver coin from (lit., from among) that money and gave it to us. b) ‘between’, ‘among’ (indicating motion between, among two or more places or things): · Davyt, hiwmä qnynnan kuzgalyp, kaennar arasynnan oly îlga taba atlady. (Mädinä Malikova, Fidaq.) Moving away from the spring, David strode among the birchtrees towards the highway. · Xafiz ãstälendäge kägazálär arasynnan ber bitne ïzläde. (Barlas Kamalov, Qlykmaslar.) Khafiz looked for a (certain) page among the papers on his desk (lit., table). c) ‘from among’ (indicating time): · «Onytma!» dip äjtkän erak tavywy ellar arasynnan iwetelde. (Robert Äxmätæanov, Vägâdä.) Her distant voice which said “Don’t forget me!” was heard from out (lit., among) the years. d) ‘through’: · Wagyjrá. Wäçär çaman ïlekkehä kajnyj. Wäçär wat. Ämma bãten wau-wu arasynnan kolakka ber åtken avaz iwetelä ... (Sägyjtá Sånhäläj, Sängatáhelär.) The Poet. The city is still in full swing (lit., boiling) as before. The city is cheerful. But through all the noise a piercing sound strikes the ear ... · ... idarä ïhe ... zäègär tãten belän tuldy. Täräzädän karap kãlep torgan mart koqwy tãten arasynnan åtep kerep kewelärneè sårän jãzlären qktyrta. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Qzgy kärvannar.) ... the inside of the (administration) office ... filled with blue smoke. The March sun, laughing through the window, cuts (lit., passes) through the smoke and lights the people’s cheerless faces... · Agahlar arasynnan äledän-äle Idel ãste kårenep kitä. (Atilla Rasix, Ike bujdak.) Every now and then the Volga (lit., the surface of the Volga) shows through the trees. e) ‘from’ (indicating difference): · Zãbäræät bu jomwak, qgymly tavywny meè tãrle tavywlar arasynnan da aeryp ala alyr ide. (Atilla Rasix, Ike bujdak.) Zöbärjät would be able to tell this soft, pleasant voice even from a thousand diffferent voices. ·

[463] aralaw ‘mixed’. a) ‘every other’ (with nouns designating time): · – Bik tämle, bik wäp, ... Närsä, kãn dä wulaj kojmak peweräsezme sez? ... – Kãn dä bulmasa da, peweräbez inde, Iger Ändrih. Kajhakta kãn aralaw, kajhakta çär kãnne ... nihek tury kilä ... (Nurixan Fättax, Bala kåèele dalada.) “Very tasty, very good, ... What, you are baking qoymaqs 2) like that daily?” “We are baking them, Igor Andrich, but not daily. Sometimes every other day, sometimes every day ... as it turns out...” 1) 2)

Ishan: A religious man considered holy by his followers. qoymaq – kind of thick pancake.

203

Aprelá urtalaryna kadär Damir eraktagy Urmanly mäktäbendä kalgan Nadiräsenä kãn aralaw xat qzyp tordy. (Gaziz Kawapov, Æir æylysy.) Up to about the middle of April, Damir wrote every other day a letter to his Nadirä, who remained at the distant Urmanly school. (Urmanly ‘name of a village’.) b) ‘in’, ‘during’, ‘through’ (indicating simultaneous action): · Kih bulsa, alar bez jokyga kitkäh kenä kajtalar ide. Min alarnyè ãjgä kerep hiwenep qtularyn joky aralaw kyna sizä torgan idem. (Mäæit Gafuri, Qlhy.) In the evenings (lit., if it is evening), they would return only after we had gone to sleep. I usually sensed their coming in, undressing and lying down only in (my) sleep. · Anyè bu såzennän soè ïwhelär çämmäse dä ïwkä kerewsälär dä, ïw aralaw kajberäålär aèa bäjlänep tä aldylar. (Mäæit Gafuri, Wagyjráneè altyn priiskasynda.) Although after these words of his, all of the workers started to work, some still made carping remarks to him as they worked. · Väräkyq ... qwá aralaw ãzek-ãzek tavyw belän dävam itte ... (Äxmät Fäjzi, Tukaj.) Wäräqiä continued in a halting voice through tears ... c) ‘side by side’, ‘together’: · Niwlärgä? ... Tal aralaw ... åskän womyrt, balan kuaklary kålägäsendä balyk kaptyryp, ... gamásez ql itärgäme? (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) What was there to do? ... Vacation with complete unconcern, ... fishing in the shade of bird cherry trees and snowball bushes growing side by side (together) with willow trees? d) ‘’(inseparably) mixed’: · Qègyr aralaw kar qva. Rain is falling mixed with snow. · Sälimä (kyhkyryp). Sin any nik beläseè! Belmä! Iwetsen any kolagyè! Mägâråfä (ahu aralaw kãlep). Qrar alajsa, belmim. (Mirxäjdär Fäjzi, Qwálär aldatmyjlar.) Sälimä (shouting). How is it that you are acquainted with him (i.e., with the teacher Shakir)! Stop the acquaintance (lit., Don’t know him)! Heed my words (lit., May your ears hear it)! Mäghrüfä (half laughing, half angry). All right then, I will not (I don’t) know him any more. · – Irkäm, berär æireè avyrtamy ällä? – dide Noqbrina apa qgymly tavyw belän. ... – Tuèdym-m, – didem min qwá aralaw. (Näzifä Kärimova, Karurmannan hykkan îlhylar.) “My darling, do you perhaps have some pain somewhere?” aunt Noyabrina said in a tender voice. “I am freezing,” I said all in tears. ·

[464] aralyj ‘in’, ‘during’, ‘while’ (indicating simultaneous action). Note: A verbal adverb of aralau ‘to separate, sort out’, aralyj is used rarely. ·

Bervakyt joky aralyj änineè bawymnan syjpavyn tojdym ... (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) Once, in (my) sleep, I felt Mother stroking my head ...

[465] arka ‘back’ (of a person, a chair, etc.), ‘support’. arkasynda ‘through’, ‘thanks to’, ‘because of’, ‘due to’, ‘for’ (because of, due to): · – Xäzer inde, räxim itep, xatny kyhkyryp ukygyz ... Kaderle kyzym, – dielgän ide anda tagyn, – bilgele säbäplär arkasynda, xatny ozyn qza almyjm. (Näbi Däåli, Koqwka jãz belän.) “Now then, please, read the letter aloud. ...” “My dear daughter,” it goes on further to say, “for obvious reasons I cannot write a lengthy letter. ...” · Fidaqny kårågä, anyè äle genä nindider zur faæiga /façiôð/ kihergänen aèlap ta aldy. Aèa nihek avyr ikänlegen sizde, säbäben soramady. Kewe qvyzlygy arkasynda îlykkanmy ul faæigagä, ällä åzeneè xatasy arkasyndamy – Wämseæiçan ãhen anysy mãçim tågel ide. (Mädinä Malikova, Fidaq.) Upon

204

seeing Fidaya, she (i.e., Shämsejihan) immediately understood that she had just gone through some terrible experience. She felt how painful it was for her (i.e., for Fidaya), but she did not ask about the (its) reason for it. Whether she had gotten involved in that tragedy because of some person’s evil deed or through her own fault; for Shämsejihan that was not important. · – Kihä kyhytkan tämle buldymy? – dide Sipkel. ... – Xäterliseème, tege hakta arifmetikadan kåherergä birmägän ideè. Sineè arkada bez «ike»le aldyk ul kãnne. Kihä wunyè ãhen båläk aldyè sin! (Rawat Nizamiev, Kar kewe.) “The stinging nettle yesterday, was it to your taste?” Sipkel said. ... “Do you remember, at that time you didn’t let us copy from your arithmetic (i.e., arithmetic class work). Because of you, we got a ‘two’ (i.e., ‘poor’) that day. Yesterday you got the reward for that!” (They had put stinging nettle into the boy’s trouser pockets while he was swimming.) · – ... anyè egyluy proektka kergän åzgärew arkasynda tågel – monyè nihekter saksyzlyk kårsätå arkasynda gyna kilep hyguy mãmkin. (Äxsän Baqnov, Ut çäm su.) “... it is possible that his fall came about not because of the change (I) introduced in the project, but only through some carelessness (lit., because of somehow showing carelessness).” · Närsä bu? ... Kartaq bawlaumy? Ällä inde kåp ïwläå arkasynda tugan vakytly gyna ber xälme? (Mansur Väliev, Zilä.) What is this? ... Is it the beginning of old age? Or is it just a temporary condition which has come about due to too much work? [466] arkyly (arkyla ‘cross over’, ‘pass by’; arka ‘back’, ‘support’). a) ‘through’, ‘over’, ‘across’, ‘via’ (a place): · Kire kajtyrga dip mawinaga utyrganda, karaègylyk tãwä bawlagan ide inde. Qèadan urman arkyly kajtyrga tury kilde. (Gadel Kutuj, Tapwyrylmagan xatlar.) When we got into the car to return, darkness had already begun to fall. We had to return again through the forest. · Bernikadär kyz sul qktagy täräzä qnynda egetlär belän täräzä arkyly sãjläwep utyralar. (Fätxi Burnaw, Qwá jãräklär.) Some girls are sitting at the window to the left, talking with the young men through the window. · Keheräk ber kåper arkyly hygyp, mawinalar aktaryp betergän waktyj uk bylhyrak ber uramga kilep kerdelär. (Garif Axunov, Xuæalar.) They walked over a small bridge and came to a rather muddy street rutted up by cars. · Hitän arkyly gyna tygyz itep kårewtek. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) We greeted each other (by handshake) warmly over the fence. · Bolyt disäè bolyt tågel, kåktä ällä nitkän tãten syman dymly bãrkålek tora çäm anyè arkyly ber genä joldyz da kårenmi ide. (Rafaïlá Mostafin, «Oæmax»ka säqxät.) There was not a cloud. In the air (lit., sky) there was a damp, oppressive heat, like some sort of smoke, and through it not one star was visible. (For disäè as intensifier see 1017, a.) · Min inde unæide qwálek ber åsmer. Gärhä berkadär äjlängehräk bulsa da, Akâeget avylyna barganda Kehe Kajbyh arkyly kajtam. (Zarif Bäwiri, Zamandawlarym belän ohrawular.) I am already a seventeen-year-old youth. Although it is somewhat of a detour, when going to the village of Aqyeget, I return via Keche Qaibych. b) ‘through’ (agency of): · ... äti ... paláto qkasy, bårek iwe äjberlär tegep, alarny tanyw-belewläre arkyly talhukta sattyra ide. (Garif Axunov, Hiklävek tãwe.) ... Father ... sewed things like coat collars, caps, and was selling them at the flea market through acquaintances. 205

[467] art ‘rear part’. 1. artyna ‘behind’ (indicating direction to): · ... çär tãnne diqrlek, sägatá unikelär-berlär tiräsendä avyl bawynda ah bårelär ulyj bawlyj. Kajhakta alar, kåzlären qndyryp, ãj artyna uk kilep basalar kebek. (Zãfär Fätxetdinov, Ålem ïlmäge.) ... almost every night around twelve or one o’clock, hungry wolves begin to howl at the edge of the village. Sometimes, they seem to come right behind the house and stand there, their eyes flashing. · Säqxät bawynda koqw salkyn bolytlar artyna qwerengän ide. (Mirgaziqn Înys, Îlda ujlanular.) At the beginning of the voyage the sun had hidden behind cold clouds. 2. artynda ‘behind’ (location): · Irlär ãstäl artynda ikäå genä sãjläwä kaldylar. (Barlas Kamalov, Qlykmaslar.) The men remained just a twosome behind the table, talking together. · ... bez alar artynda utyra idek. (Dilärä Zãbäerova, Kuw ãqnke waçit.) ... we were sitting behind them. · Min niwlim ul kar bawly taular belän? Alar bulsa ni, bulmasa ni. Wulaj da kajhaklarda min ul taraflarga karap ujlanam. Bezneè avyl ällä wul taular artyndamy ikän? (Näbi Däåli, Qzmywka îl.) What can I do with those mountains with their snow-covered summits? To me it’s all the same whether they are there or not. Still, I sometimes look in that direction and wonder. Is our village perhaps behind those mountains? 3. artynnan a) ‘from behind’ (indicating direction): · Ataunyè kyzgylt kyqlary artynnan koqw hyga bawlagah, Zãnnån namaz ukyrga kerewte. (Mirgaziqn Înys, Ïnæe ïzläåhelär.) When the sun began to rise from behind the reddish rocks of the island, Zönnün began to say his prayer. · Bu qklarda koqw änä kaqn hyga, kåräseè. Ä bezneè avylda koqw urman artynnan gyna kilep hyga da tup-tury bezneè täräzägä karyj torgan ide. (Näbi Däåli, Qzmywka îl.) Apparently that is where the sun rises (i.e., as though from beneath the waters of the Volga) in these regions. In our village, the sun used to rise just from behind the woods and shine (lit., look) directly into our window. · Paxom az gyna elmajgan buldy. Ämma æavap birergä isäbe îk ide. Ul kolak artynnan kalämen alyp, kesäsennän kehkenä genä kara savyty hygaryp ãstälgä kujdy. (Näbi Däåli, Koqwka jãz belän.) Pakhom smiled just a little bit. But he had no intention of giving any answer. He took a pen from behind his ear, pulled a tiny inkpot from his pocket and placed it on the table. b) ‘after’ (indicating time, order, succession, pursuit): · Kãn artynnan kãn åtä, el artynnan el. (Garif Axunov, Idel kyzy.) Day after day passed, year after year. · Wunyè artynnan nilär bulganyn ahyk xäterli almyjm. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Kãtåhelär.) I cannot recall clearly what happened after that. · Nägyjmä artynnan Xäsän belän Samatov ta tãrkemgä kuwyldylar. (Fatix Ämirxan, Urtalykta.) After Näghimä, Khäsän and Samatov also joined the group. · Anyè artynnan bernihä kewe belän Äpkäläj kilep kerä. (Davyt Îltyj, Karagol.) After him, several people and Äpkäley come in. · Kazan kåhtänähläre babajga owady axry, ul hynaqk artynnan hynaqk buwata tordy, tele hiwelgännän hiwelä bardy. (Atilla Rasix, Qmawev.) The presents from Kazan (lit., the Kazan presents) obviously pleased the old man. He kept emptying cup after cup, (and) his tongue loosened more and more.

206

(For baru with past participles in the ablative followed by the verbal adverb in -a, -ä, -yj, -i of the same verb see 1056, c.) · Anda berse artynnan ikenhese tezelep kitkän qèa utrauhyklar kårenä. (Rafaïlá Mostafin,«Oæmax»ka säqxät.) Ahead, tiny new islands, strung out one after the other, become visible. · · Îk inde, ..., min wãçrät artynnan kuu qwennän uzdym. (Atilla Rasix, Synau.) “No, ..., I have passed the age of chasing after fame.” · Bilnak, forsatny yhkyndyruyna garálängändäj, hinap elyj-elyj kåqn artynnan tawlandy. Läkin kaq tegeneè artynnan æitå! As if ashamed of having missed the opportunity, Bilnak, giving a whining howl, rushed after the hare. But how can he ever catch up with it! [468] arty ‘after’ (indicating repetition); (used rarely): · Äni ... abyjlaryna Kazanga xat arty xat æibärä. (Atilla Rasix, Iwan onygy.) Mommy ... sent letter after letter to Kazan, to her (older) brothers. [469] as(t) ‘lower part’. Note: Case endings, derivational suffixes with an initial consonant, and the plural suffix +lar are joined to the short form: aska ‘down’, ‘downwards’; astan ‘from below’; asky kat ‘ground floor’; aslyãsle jort ‘a two-story house’. But: idän asty ‘cellar’; su asty kãjmäse ‘submarine’; astyrtyn kewe ‘a secretive, reticent person’.

1. astyna a) ‘under’, ‘at’ (indicating direction): · Æäj wulaj, ämma kywlar, kywlar avyr ide. Elga boz astyna kaha, ... (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Kãtåhelär.) Summer is such (as related before), but the winters – the winters were difficult (joyless). The river hides (lit., escapes) under the ice, ... · Iwekne ahyp æibärågä, huar kiez itektän, hikmännän, ak warftan, hikmän astyna garmoná kystyrgan ozyn gyna bujly, ... ber eget kilep kerde. (Mãxämmät Gali, Aulak ãjdä.) Upon opening the door, a rather tall young man ... in colorful felt boots, armiak, (and) a white scarf, with an accordion tucked under the armiak, entered. · Astybyzga kory pehän æäep, ãstebezgä qbynyp qtarga kalyn kiez birdelär. (Mäæit Gafuri, Wagyjráneè altyn priiskasynda.) They spread dry hay under us and gave us thick felts to cover ourselves up. · Garálänådän, ahudan anyè jãze taw bulyp katty. Tegelärgä ber såz belän dä æavap kajtarmyjha, ottyrylgan pinàäkne Grqzinîknyè aqk astyna tawlady. (Zãfär Fätxetdinov, Ålem ïlmäge.) Insulted and angry, his face hardened. Without even saying one word in reply, he threw the jacket, which he had gambled away, at Gryazinyuk’s feet. b) ‘under’, ‘into’ (subordination, influence, etc.): · Gajnan Rämzine çär vakyt kanat astyna ala. (Gomär Bäwirov, Æidegän hiwmä.) Gheynan always protects Rämzi (lit., takes Rämzi under his wings). · Bu imännär – gåq æanlylar. Alar kolahly botaklary belän ber-berenä berekkännär dä salmak kyna hajkalalar, æiçanga baçadirlyklaryn belgertergä telägändäj, avazlanyp-gäpläwep alalar. ... Alar – kewe ixtyqry belän sak astyna alyngan çäjkäl. (Märdi Rafikov, Urmanym – çäjkälem.) These oaks are like living persons. They sway slowly, their widespread branches intertwined. Together they utter sounds as though they wish to tell the world of their fortitude. ... They are a monument which, by the will of the people, has been placed under protection.

207

2. astynda a) ‘under’, ‘at’ (location): · Kuzgalyp kittek. Îl urmanny kisep suzylgan îgary kãhänewle ïlektr åtkärgehe astynnan uza. Mawina kãphäkläre astynda imän hiklävekläre wartlap qryla ... (Äxät Gaffar, Bodaj bãrtege çäm tegermän tawy.) We got moving. The road passed underneath a power line which cut through the woods. Under the wheels of the car, acorns were bursting with a crack ... · Waktyj salkynajtkan, aqk astynda kar wygyrdyj. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) It has become rather cold. The snow is crunching under foot. · Tosq qlyndyryp tormady. Ilîxanyè aqk astynda qtkan pinàäkne ielep aldy da åz ièenä saldy. (Zãfär Fätxetdinov, Ålem ïlmäge.) Tosya didn’t have to be asked twice. Bending down, she picked up the jacket which was lying at Ilyukha’s feet and put it around her shoulders. b) ‘under’ (subordinate to, under influence of, etc.), ‘at the disposal of’: · Alar mine äti kul astynda ïwläåhe Gapsamat isemle ... bistä egetenä kiqågä birmäkhe buldylar. (Garif Axunov, Hiklävek tãwe.) They wanted to marry me to a young man from the suburb ... named Ghapsamat, who worked under my father. · Wul àurnal jogyntysy astynda åzemneè dä berär ädäbi äsär qzyp karyjsym kilä bawlady. (Mirsäj Ämir, Åsä tãwkäh.) Under the influence of that (same) journal, the desire began to stir in me to try to write some literary work myself. · Bakhadagy gãllär, kyrdagy igennär anyè æyly nurlary astynda kãnnän-kãn maturlana baralar. (Sadri Æäläl, Qz.) Under its (i.e., the sun’s) warm rays the flowers in the garden, the corn in the field grow more beautiful every day. · · Kul astynda xäzer genä mawina îk, Wamil. (Zãfär Fätxetdinov, Ålem ïlmäge.) “I don’t have a car at my disposal right now, Shamil.” 3. astynnan a) ‘from under’ (indicating direction): · Aqk tavywyn iwetep, ike ït ... baskyh astynnan ãrä-ãrä atylyp hygalar. (Ämirxan Eniki, Soègy kitap.) The two dogs, ... hearing his footsteps, come rushing out from under the staircase, barking. · At toqklary çäm tägärmäh astynnan kåtärelgän tuzan ber qkka ohyp bara. (Mäsgut Wärifullin, Ellar åtkäh.) The dust which rises from under the horse’s hoofs and the wheels f lies to one side. b) ‘under’ (indicating movement under): · – Ïsse, – dide Usman ... da, kåper astynnan åtkän kiè aryk buena tãwep, biten îa bawlady. (Äbrar Wämin, Qnar taular1) kihkändä.) “It’s hot,” said Usman ... and, descending to the broad irrigation ditch which passed under the bridge, he began to wash his face. · Kãjmä astynnan ... balyk kãtåe uzyp bara ide. (Mirgaziqn Înys, Ïnæe ïzläåhelär.) A school of fish ... was passing under the boat. c) ‘under’, ‘underneath’ (garment, etc.): · Ãstendä – syryp tekkän kyska biwmät. Biwmäteneè astynnan huar hähäkle kålmäge kårenep tora. (Näzifä Kärimova, Karurmannan hykkan îlhylar.) She has on a short, quilted overcoat. Her dress of a gaily colored, floral pattern, is visible under her overcoat. d) ‘from under’ (subordination, influence, etc.): · Tugannan alyp bezne änilär saklap åsterä. Usep æitkäh tä bez äni kanaty astynnan bãtenläjgä hyga almyjbyz. (Mirgaziqn Înys, Bäjräm.) From birth 1)

more recent spelling: qnargau

208

on mothers care for and raise us. Even after we have grown up, we cannot completely get away from under a mother’s wings. · · Andyj kewe, hynnan da, bar ikän. ... unæidenhe elnyè dekabrendä æinaqtá æavaplylygyna tartyluy mägâlåm. Xãkem bulganhy uk, sak astynnan kahkan. (Zãfär Fätxetdinov, Ålem ïlmäge.) “It turns out that such a person does indeed exist. ... It is known that in December 1917, he was made answerable for a crime. (But) just before the trial he escaped from custody.” [470] awa (verbal adverb of aw ‘rise’, ‘exceed’). a) ‘through’ (a place, thing): · – Sez, duskaj, Aî-Qtar awa åtmisezme? (Gaziz Mãxämmätwin, Jãräktäge ïzlär.) “Don’t you, my friend, pass through Ayu-Yatar?” · Xalyk bakha awa ãjgä kerep-hygyp jãri. (Fätxi Burnaw, Adawkan kyz.) The people are entering and leaving the house through the garden. · Kapka awa avylnyè ... uramy kårenep tora. (ibid.) Through the gate, a street of the village ... is visible. · Ãstän bik kue toelsa da, asta toman awa sukmak, elga qrynyè kyzyl balhyk da, ãqnke botaklary da kårenä ide. (Foat Sadriev, Waçzamanov ïwe.) Although from above the fog appeared to be very dense, below, the path, as well as the red clay of the river bank and the willow branches were visible. · Ul arada «Volga» kuzgalyp kitkän, anyè artyndagy kyzyl utlar qègyr awa sibelep, keheräq baryp æemeldi ide. (Mädinä Malikova, Fidaq.) Meanwhile, the “Volga” pulled away. Its red rear lights were glittering through the rain, becoming smaller and smaller. (“Volga” – make of a car). b) ‘through’ (by the agency of): · · Telne belmi. Qnnaryna telne belä torgan ber karhyk kujdym. Älegä wunyè awa aralawalar. (Nurixan Fättax, Syzgyra torgan uklar.) “She does not know the language. I have assigned to them an old woman who knows the language. For the time being, they are conversing through her.” · Nur Ibätullin digän ber avyldawym bar minem. ... Anyè åzenä çäm anyè awa mäktäp kitapxanäsenä åz kitaplarymny æibärgälägän haklarym da buldy. (Mirsäj Ämir, Kåèelle säqxät.) I have a fellow villager called Nur Ibätullin. ... At times, I have also sent my own books to him personally (lit., himself) and, through him, to the school library. c) ‘via’: · Bagraædan Hallyga turyrak îl da bar ... Wykmaj, Bordy avyllary awa, ... (Aqz Gyjläæev, Tatarstan mogæizasy.) From Baghrazh to Chelny there is a more direct road ... via the villages of Shyqmai (Shykmamayevo), Bordy (Burdy), ... · Kazannan Däåläkängä Bäläbäj awa da, Ufa awa da kajtyp bula. (Ämirxan Eniki, Soègy kitap.) From Kazan one can return (or: it is possible to return) to Däwläkän either via Bäläbey or via Ufa. d) ‘across’, ‘over’ (a place, thing): · – Nik soè min sezneè belän hitän awa sãjläwep toram, keregez äle bakhaga, ... (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) “But why am I still talking with you across the fence. Please, come into the garden, ...” · – Sez Alafuzov zavodynnanmy? Färxetdin ãhen Gafur äjtte. – Bezneè Färxetdin Idel awa kåper sala. (Atilla Rasix, Qmawev.) “Are you from the Alafuzov works?” Ghafur spoke for Färkhetdin: “Our Färkhetdin is building a bridge over the Volga.” 209

Bez wul mawinalar agymy urtasynda kåper awa hygyp barabyz. (Mirsäj Ämir, Kåèelle säqxät.) We drive over the bridge in the midst of that stream of cars. · Tau awa taular åtep, däráq awa däráqlar kihep, hål awa hållär gizep, Alyp Bärgän Æamna elgasyna kilep hykty. (Batulla, Alyp batyr maæaralary.) Traveling over mountain after mountain, crossing over river after river, passing through desert after desert, Alyp Bärgän came to the river Jamna. · Tege mälne ul mièa balalar jortyn bik qmanlap sãjlägän ide bit. Xäzer dä ul bu jort busagasy awa uzarga bik åk adarynyp tormyj. (Näbi Däåli, Koqwka jãz belän.) After all, at that time he had spoken very ill to me of the children’s home. At this moment (lit., Now) too, he was not particularly eager to step across the threshold of this house. e) ‘across’, ‘beyond’ (farther down): · Min aèardan ãh ãstäl awa gyna ïwlim ... (Ämirxan Eniki, Vãædan.) I work only three tables across from her ... · · Ul tiz bulmas. Ber iwek awa lejtenant Gafurov utyra. Aèa keregez. (Mäæit Rafikov, Ilçam avazy.) “He will be a while. One door beyond (farther down) sits lieutenant Ghafurov. Go in to him.” · Æämil awygyp ãjdän hyguga, åzlärennän biw-alty ãj awa qwägän Särvärbikä apany ohratty. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Ätäh mengän hitängä.) Upon hurrying out of the house, Jämil met Särwärbikä, who lived five or six houses down. f) ‘by’ (by means of): · – Min ... sezne istän hygarmaqhakmyn. Xat awa xäbärläwerbez. (Atilla Rasix, Ajly tãnnär.) “I shall not forget ... you. We shall keep in touch by letter.” · Bu kãnnärdä aèa Îldawev belän ohrawyrga tury kilmäde. Ul åze anyè qnyna barmady da, telefon awa waltyratuny da kiräkle sanamady. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) In these days he did not happen to meet Yuldashev. He himself did not go to him, nor did he deem it necessary to call him by telephone. g) ‘through’ (simultaneous action): · Elena bik tiz åzen kulga aldy çäm ... kåz qwe awa elmajdy. (Barlas Kamalov, Qlykmaslar.) Yelena composed herself very quickly and ... smiled through (her) tears. h) ‘apart’, ‘through’ (with nouns indicating time): · Tujny da ikese ber æäjdä, atna awa gyna uzdyrdylar, ... (Aqz Gyjläæev, Ätäh mengän hitängä.) Both (of them) also had their wedding in one (and the same) summer, (and) only a week apart. · Tabigatá aèa änise xakynda sãjli. ... Tyèlyj Täbrik. Kajdadyr qkynda, ... qwá bala tavywy iwetelä. Täbrikneè åz tavywy. Täbrik åz tavywyn tyèlyj, ellar awa tyèlap, åzen kyzgana ... (Äxsän Baqnov, Tau qgy poveste.) Nature tells him about his mother. ... Täbrik listens. Somewhere nearby, ... the voice of a little child is heard. Täbrik’s own voice. Täbrik listens to his own voice and, listening to it through the years, feels sorry for himself ... i) ‘across’, ‘over’ (at a time): · [Iskändär] ... ike-ãh baskyh awa sikerä-sikerä uramga hykty. (Razil Väliev, Iske sägatá dãres jãri.) [Iskändär] ... jumping down the stairs two or three at a time, went out onto the street. ·

Note: awa is sometimes used with the possessive suffix of the 3rd person singular and the ablative case: Eget... bakha awasynnan Märáqmnärneè jortyna taba înälde. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Qwá jãräklär.) The youth ... made his way towards Märyäm’s house through the garden.

210

[471] baw ‘head’. 1. bawyna ‘up to’, ‘to the top of’, ‘upon’ (indicating motion): · ... boldyr bawyna hygyp awhy xatyn alarny häjgä hakyrdy. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Balta kem kulynda.) ... stepping out onto the porch, the cook called them (i.e., the guests) to tea. · Atlar xäl algannar, ..., menderå kyen bulmady. Tauny menderå belän, dårt atymny ber-ber artly tezdem dä, aldagy arba bawyna sikerep mendem. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Kart qlhy.) The horses had rested, ..., ascending (i.e., ascending from the bottom of the ravine) was not difficult. As soon as we were at the top (lit., climbed the hill), I strung my four horses in a row and jumped on the first wagon (i.e., the wagon in front). 2. bawynda ‘upon’, ‘on’, ‘on top of’ (indicating position): · Kih saen diqrlek Mansur belän ohrawtylar, kih saen diqrlek ... tekä qr bawynda, tanyw uryndykta, kullarny kullardan almyjha utyryp tordylar. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) Almost every evening she and Mansur met. Almost every evening they ... sat on the familiar seat on the steep bank, not letting go of each other’s hands. · Kojma bawynda kanatlaryn æilpep kyzyl ätäh kyhkyra. (ibid.) On the fence, a red cock crows, flapping his wings. · Mih bawyndagy1) ïw bawynda bula almyj. (Wäåkät Galiev, Xikmätle såzlär.) The one on top of the stove cannot be on top of the work (i.e., He who lies on top of the stove cannot keep up with his work). 3. bawynnan a) ‘from’ (the top of a place or thing): · Wul arada tau bawynnan tãwep kilgän atly ber kewe kårende. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) At that moment, a rider appeared, coming down (from) the mountain. · Tau bawynnan hiwmä aga. Täbrik hiwmä qnynda tuktap ulak bawyna utyrdy. (Äxsän Baqnov, Tau qgy poveste.) A spring flowed (lit., flows) from the mountain. Täbrik stopped beside the spring and sat down on a drinking trough. b) ‘by’, ‘per’ (indicating amount): · Xalikâ äjtä, gektar bawynnan tålämim, centner bawynnan tålim, di. (Garif Axunov, Hiklävek tãwe.) Khaliq says, “I am not paying by the hectar, I am paying by the centner.” · Pehängä jãråhelärgä æan bawynnan ãh jãz gram on birelä. (Nurixan Fättax, Kihå.) Those who are making hay get three hundred grams of flour per person. [472] belän (berlä, berlän, ilä(n) ); old Turkish: bir+lä < bir+i-l– ‘to unite 2). The older forms berlä and berlän still occurred in Tatar literary works written only a few decades ago; ilä(n) pertains to the pre-revolutionary literary language. The postposition belän expresses a rather wide range of relationships: a) ‘with’ (indicating accompaniment, joint execution of, participation in, an action; comitative): · – Qryj, baryrsyè, läkin åzeè genä tågel. – Kem belän soè? – didem min. – Berär dus kyzyè belän. (Ämirxan Eniki, Gãländäm tutaw xatiräse.) “All right, you can go (lit., you will go), but not alone.” “With whom then,” I said. “With some girl friend of yours.” 1)

Mih bawy – A small place on top of a brick and clay stove on which things can be dried and on which a person can sleep. 2) (See A. von Gabain, Alttürkische Grammatik, § 276).

211

– Ãh el bit inde min sineè belän jãrim, sine beläm, ... (Ämirxan Eniki, Räwä.) “After all, I have been going steady with you already for three years, I know you, ...” · Räwidä iptäwläreneè bu gãnaçsyz sãjlänålärenä ber genä såz belän dä katnawmady. (ibid.) Räshidä did not participate with one single word in these innocent talks of her collegues. · ... tora-bara min ul malaj belän tanywtym. (Mirsäj Ämir, Bez bäläkäj haklarda.) In due course I became acquainted with that boy. · · Sezneè belän tanywuyma min wat ... (Atilla Rasix, Ajly tãnnär.) “I am glad to have made your acquaintance ...” ·

The comitative meaning may be emphasized by placing bergä, bergäläp, less often berlektä ‘together’, after the postposition belän: · Alar belän bergä tagyn Mädinäneè tugany Xätimä qwi. (Rämzi Maksudov, Wäjmorza keweläre.) Mädinä’s sister Khätimä also lives together with them. · Tyèlauhylar lektor belän bergä erak Afrika illärenä säqxät kyldylar. (Saæidä Sãläjmanova, Gãlbadran.) Together with the lecturer, the audience (lit., the listeners) made a trip to distant African countries. · Wärifulla ïwkä totyndy. Ul, uly belän bergäläp, mihneè ber ãlewen såtte, tãten îllaryn kãldän, korymnan arhydy ... (Afzal Wamov, Miènur kart.) Shärifulla started working. Together with his son he pulled down one part of the stove, cleaned the smoke paths of ash and soot ... · 1812 elda universitetta Ibraçim Xälfin tatar tele ukyta bawlyj ... XVIII gasyrda uk ïwläp kilgän åzeneè babasy S. Xälfin belän berlektä I. Xälfin tatar telen ãjränågä nigez salgan. (Tatarstan ASSR tarixy.) In 1812, Ibrahim Khälfin began (lit., begins) to teach the Tatar language at the university (i.e., University of Kazan) ... Together with his grandfather S. Khälfin, who had worked back in the 18th century, I. Khälfin laid the foundation for the study of the Tatar language. b) ‘with’, ‘by’ (indicating instrument, means: also in abstract relationships and idiomatic expressions): · Bolgar däåläte qwägän horda sãrep hähågä nigezlängän igenhelek avyl xuæalygynyè tãp tarmagy bulyp äverelgän. ... Uèywny uryp-æyî urak belän bawkarylgan. (Tatar ASSR Tarixy – IX-XIII gasyrlarda Idel buendagy Bolgar däåläte.) In the period when the Bolghar State existed, farming based on ploughing and sowing turned into the main branch of agriculture. ... Harvesting the crops was carried out with the sickle. · Wul arada Mälikä äbi ãstälgä oly tabak belän aw kiterep kujdy. (Ämirxan Eniki, Räwä.) At that moment, Grandmother Mälikä brought in a large tureen with soup (lit., brought in soup with a large tureen) and put it on the table. · ... ul avtobus belän kãn saen Hallyga jãri torgan buldy. (Äxsän Baqnov, Ut çäm su.) ... she started going (i.e., she assumed the habit of going) every day by autobus to Chelny. · Bez qrga tãwep, Idel suy belän bitlärebezne îyp kildek. (Näbi Däåli, Koqwka jãz belän.) We went down to the bank and washed our faces with the water of the Volga. · Ul jodrygy belän kapkany tãjde. (Mädinä Malikova, Fidaq.) He banged at the gate with his fist. · Niçaqtá, bez åzebezne Kazanga tartyp kitergän izge bina karwynda. ... bu jort åzeneè tywky kårenewe belän åk aerylyp tora: ... (Mirsäj Ämir, Kazan.) Finally, we are standing in front of (opposite) the venerable building which has attracted us to Kazan. ... this house distinguishes itself by its very appearance: ...

212

Mädräsädän imam-mãgallim iseme belän hykkan Idris xälfä zamanyna kårä xãr fikerle ukytuhy bula. (Mirsäj Ämir, Kazan.) Instructor Idris, who had finished the medrese with the title (lit., name) of spiritual educator-teacher, was (lit., is) for his time a freethinking teacher. · – Wunyè belän bågenge utyrywny qbyk dip igâlan itäm. (Gãlsem Mãxämmädova, Qwálek kãnnärendä.) “With this I declare today’s session closed.” · Keråheneè kem ikänen wunda uk belsä dä, ul ... ni xäräkäte, ni torywy belän berni dä sizdermäde. (Ämirxan Eniki, Räwä.) Although she immediately knew who was entering, she did not ... let her feelings show either by her behaviour or by her bearing. c) ‘because of’, ‘with’ (indicating the cause of, reason for): · – Soègy ellarda sièa bigräk kåp kilde inde, – dide Iskändärov. – Bälki bãten gomäreèä tiewle kyeny wuwy ellarda bulgandyr. Ä bit sin bäxetle bulyrga tiew kewe. Sineè hibärlegeè, akylyè, uèganlygyè belän, sineè sãjkemlelegeè belän! (Mädinä Malikova, Fidaq.) “True, you have gone through a lot, particularly during the last few years,” Iskändärov said. “The difficulties which perhaps you were destined to experience over your entire life seem to have happened in just these years. But, after all, you are a person who ought to be happy – with your beauty, your intelligence, your abilities, with your charm!” · ... kart gozeren /ôõzeren/ äjtergä awykty: – Kilen, äjdä, bez ãlkännärne borhyp tormyjk inde, – dide. – Menä karhygym såze belän jãråebez. Wuwy nigezne, koeny kåräse kilde anyè. (Rafis Gyjzzätullin, Sirtmäle koe.) ... the old man hastened to state his request: “Young lady (lit., daughter-in-law), come now, let’s not disturb the old folks,” he said. “We have come here because of my wife’s urging (lit., word, constant talk). She wanted to see this house (and grounds) and the draw-well.” (Nigez – here: The house and grounds of a person’s ancestor(s), the house in which a person was born and raised.) (Kilen – ‘daughter-in-law’; also used by a woman’s parents-in-law in addressing her. Furthermore, kilen may be used by an older man or woman in addressing a younger woman.) In the above example the second case applies. · Sin kilmäå belän ïw totkarlanmas. (Tatar-Russian Dictionary.) Work will not be delayed (just) because you don’t come (lit., because of you not coming). d) ‘on’ (indicating result): · Isänläwtelär. Davyt aèa ãmet belän karady: bu xatyn îkka gyna kilmägänder. Fidaqnyè hakyruy belän kilgänder, dimäk, alar ohrawyrga tiew. (Mädinä Malikova, Fidaq.) They said hello to each other. David looked at her with hope. This woman had probably not come without some reason. She had probably come on Fidaya’s request. That meant that they were to meet. (David had been looking for Fidaya ·

in vain.)

e) ‘with’ (indicating manner): · Mäålet egetlärgä zur kyzyksynu belän karap tordy. Alábert Xäsänov, Fändäm fondy.) Mäwlet had been watching the youths with great interest (lit., was looking at the youths). · Ul kãtepxanäneè çärvakytky kunagy. Kaîm ukyrga täkâdim itkän kitaplarny ul komsyzlyk belän ukyj ... (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) He is a regular visitor to the library. He avidly (lit., with avidity) reads the books which Qayum suggests that he read ... · ... Imametdin kunaklarny qkty hyraj belän karwy aldy. (Atilla Rasix, Ajly tãnnär.) ... Imametdin received the guests cordially (lit., with a friendly face).

213

f) ‘along’ (indicating motion along): · Eget, irtägesen jokydan toryp, awap-ïhkäh, karhykka bik kåp räxmätlär äjtep, ... îlga hygyp kitä, tege karhyk ãjrätkän îl belän kãn bara, tãn bara. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Kãngä kårenmäs Sylu-kãmew.) After getting up in the morning and having had something to eat and drink, the youth thanked the old woman very much, ... and set out on the road. Day and night he travels along the way which that old woman had explained to him. Note: In Tatar the verbs ‘to thank’ and ‘to set out’ are in the present tense to give more vividness and effect to the narration.

g) with predicates (both verbal and nominal) requiring the postposition belän: · · Barybyz isemennän Rãstämne tugan kãne belän täbriklärgä rãxsät itegez. (Safa Sabirov, Firdäves.) “On behalf of all of us, allow me to congratulate Röstäm on his birthday.” · Æyrlyjlar berdän bolar watlyk belän, Berse-bersen kotlyj azatlyk belän. (Mäæit Gafuri, Xãrriqt irtäse.) They are singing together with joy, They congratulate each other on their freedom. · [Zãfär] kienä bawlady. Kienep betkäh, äbigä räxmät äjtep, akha birde. Annary kyzlar belän kål birep saubullawty ... (Ämirxan Eniki, Räwä.) Zöfär began to dress. After he finished dressing, he thanked the old woman and gave her money. Then he said goodbye to the girls, shaking hands with them... · ... ul baw kagyp kyna Zãfär belän isänläwte. (ibid.) ... she greeted Zöfär, only nodding her head. · [Zãfär] iwek tãbendä idarä keweläre belän kul birep kårewte, çärkajsyn bäjräm belän kotlady ... (ibid.) At the door [Zöfär] greeted the administration people, shaking hands with them, (and) congratulated each of them on the holiday ... · – Menä kilenegez, äti-äni. Räjxan. Tumywy belän bezneè qk kyzy. (Barlas Kamalov, Uramnar kièäq.) “Here, Dad and Mom, is your daughter-in-law, Reykhan. She is from our area.” (tumywy belän · by birth). · Jãrå îllary studentlar, æurnalistlar, näwriqt xezmätkärläre belän tuly. (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) The aisles are filled (lit., full) with students, journalists, and employees of the publishing house. h) followed by qnäwä ‘beside’; ‘alongside of’, ‘next to’ (a person, place, or thing): · Turat xälne aèlagan kebek, muenhagynnan æitäklägängä bujsynyp, minem belän qnäwä jãgerde. (Mirsäj Ämir, Bez bäläkäj haklarda.) Turat (name of his horse), as if understanding the situation, submitted to being led by the collar and ran alongside me. · Iskändärneè kåzläre ãstäl tårendä Rådäl belän qnäwä utyrgan kyzda ide. (Razil Väliev, Iske sägatá dãres jãri.) Iskändär’s eyes were on the girl sitting next to Rüdäl at the head of the table. i) with verbs in the passive voice when their agent is inanimate (see also 864): · Wäçärneè urtasynda tirä-qgy bakhalar belän äjländerelgän zur ber sarajga bardyk. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Kãtåhelär.) In the center of the town, we went to a large palace, which was surrounded on all sides by gardens. · Kåräm, kãjmäbez aj belän, joldyzlar belän bizälgän diègez suyn eryp bara. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Diègezdä.) I can see, our ship is ploughing through the waters of the sea, which is adorned by the moon, by the stars.

214

·

Inde kyw bawlansa da, kållär, elgalar boz belän kaplansa da, kar äle tãwmägän. (Nurixan Fättax, Syzgyra torgan uklar.) Although winter has already begun, and although lakes (and) rivers are covered with ice, snow has not yet fallen.

Note: With verbal nouns belän expresses temporal relationship (1186, d). With nouns designating time belän forms adverbs (607). Furthermore, belän functions as a conjunction (622).

[473] boryn ‘nose’. 1. borynha (with the word ãj, jort ‘house’, kapka ‘gate’) a) ‘to each, every’, ‘per’: · ... pyhky ãj borynha, çär kewedä bar ... (Aqz Gyjläæev, Ätäh mengän hitängä.) ... there is a saw to every house, everybody has one ... b) ‘from ... to’ (indicating movement): · Avyl tegåheläreneè gadäte buenha, bez ãj borynha jãrep tegä idek. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) In keeping with the habit of the village tailors, we were moving from house to house, sewing. 2. borynyna ‘from ... to’ (indicating movement): · – Sin nigä alaj ãj borynyna kerep, telänep jãriseè, ...? (Mirsäj Ämir, Bez bäläkäj haklarda.) “Why are you going from house to house, begging like that, ...?” [474] buj ‘height’, ‘stature’, ‘length’. 1. bue /bují/ a) ‘for’, ‘through’, ‘throughout’ (indicating time): · Urmanda kunyp qtyp, atnalar bue kajtmyjha ïwlädelär. (Mãxämmät Mäçdiev, Tornalar tãwkän æirdä.) They worked, sleeping out in the woods and not returning (home) for weeks. · Ul kãne bue joklady çäm bary tik karaègy tãwkändä genä uqndy. (Nurixan Fättax, Syzgyra torgan uklar.) He slept all day and awoke only when darkness just began to fall. · Kaqndyr ilneè urta ber æirennän Bãek dala bawlana. Anyè ãstennän sägatálär bue oharga çäm ber genä æan iqse, ber genä qwellek tä ohratmaska mãmkin. (Islam Belqev, Soldat tãjmäse.) From somewhere, from a central place of the country, the Great Plain begins. One can fly over it for hours and not come across even one living thing, even one green spot. · Aeryla almyjm, kãne bue, tãne bue bastym. (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) I cannot tear myself away (from it); I typed day and night (lit., throughout the day and night). b) ‘on’, ‘along’ (indicating movement): · Çäm ber kãnne Färxetdin ... tagyn Kãlemsärne çäm balalaryn alyrga kitte. Îl bue närsä ujlaganyn sorasaè, uze dä äjtä almas ide. (Äxsän Baqnov, Tau qgy poveste.) And one day Färkhetdin ... went again to fetch Kölemsär and their children. If you asked what he was thinking on the way, he himself would not be able to tell. · Avyl da inde kåptän tyndy. Tik ïtlärneè genä uram bue jãri torgan qwálärgä ara-tirä ãrgäläp kujgannary iwetelep kitä ide. (Sadri Æäläl, Îgary urmanga æiläkkä baru.) The village too had long since become quiet. Only the dogs were heard barking from time to time at some youths walking along the street. c) ‘as ... as’, ‘like’ (indicating length, height): · ... kåzlär karmak æebenä tekälä: ... bot bue æäen kilep hyksahy, dip ãmetlänä. Wunnan karmagyèny tartyp æibäräseè. – Çäm hänti barmak bue majmyh

215

qltyrap kilep hyga ... (Änisä Ibraçimova, Toman tarala.) ... the eyes are fixed on the fishing line: ... one hopes that a sheatfish as long as one’s legs (lit., thigh, i.e., reaching from the ground to one’s hips; waist-high) may emerge. Then you quickly pull in the hook. – And a fish as long as one’s little finger comes glistening to the surface ... (For the modal particle -hy, -he with verbs in the conditional mood see 1006, 4.). · Bawka ellarda bu vakytta kewe bue bula torgan aryw byel tyhkan ïzläp jãrgän ïtne dä kåmä almyj ... (Kärim Tinhurin, Kara kãnnärdä.) The rye, which in other years at this time is as high as a man, cannot even cover up a dog looking for mice ... 2. buena /bujína/ a) ‘throughout’, ‘for’, ‘over’ (indicating time): · Bãten ramazan buena Korâänxafiz mähettä ... kyhkyryp korâän hykty. (Ämirxan Eniki, Korâänxafiz.) All throughout the entire Ramadan Qor’änkhafiz read the Koran aloud in the mosque ... Note: Ramadan – The ninth month of the Moslem year during which Moslems fast every day from sunrise to sunset.

[Patwa] biw aj buena ulynnan xäbär kãtte. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Ak båre.) For five months [the king] waited for news from his son. · Kazan gasyrlar buena tãzelep kilgän. (Räwit Musin, Kilähäkkä atlyj Kazan.) Kazan was built over centuries. · Bernihä gasyr buena bu däålätneè bawkalasy Bolgar, qki, boryngy rus elâqzmalary buenha, Bãek Bolgar wäçäre bulgan. (S.S. Ajdarov, N.D. Aksenova, Bolgar wäçäre.) For several centuries, the capital of this state was Bolghar, or, according to old Russian chronicles, the city of Great Bolghar. b) ‘to’, ‘on’, ‘all along’ (indicating movement): · Urman buena kilep æitkäh, hilägen agah tãbenä kujdy ... (Mãxämmät Mäçdiev, Tornalar tãwkän æirdä.) After reaching the wood, she put her pail under a tree ... · Ikäåläp Agyjdel buena tãwep kitäbez. (Mirsäj Ämir, Bez bäläkäj haklarda.) We go down to the Belaya as a twosome. · Îl buena ul karaègy hyrajly buldy. Îl buena ul åzeneè bäxetsez qzmywy, bilgesez kilähäge turynda ujlady. (Nurixan Fättax, Syzgyra torgan uklar.) All along the way he looked gloomy. All along the way he thought about his unhappy fate, his uncertain future. 3. buenda /bujínda/ ‘by’, ‘beside’, ‘along’ (indicating position at, along a place): · Ãj ïhendäge æiçaz-mãlkätlär dä zamanha · ... tår qktagy täräzä buenda telefon tora. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) Also the furniture and (other) belongings in the house are in keeping with the times. ... by the window in the parlor (best room) stands a telephone. · Bolgarlar IX–XIV jãzlärdä Urta Idel buenda çäm Kamanyè tåbän agymynda Idel bue Bolgar däåläte digän ildä qwägän. (Bolgar wäçäre.) In the 9th–14th centuries, the Bolghars lived along the Middle Volga and on the lower course of the Kama, in a country called the Volga Bolghar State. 4. buennan /bujínnan/ ‘along’ (indicating movement along); ‘from’ (indicating movement from): · Mäktäpkä îl urman buennan bara. (Mãxämmät Mäçdiev, Tornalar tãwkän æirdä.) The road to the school runs along a forest. · Yndyr arty kirtäläre buennan, ew-ew atlap, ... karhyk urmanga taba haba ide. (ibid.) Along the fences behind the kitchen garden, ... the old woman was hurrying with quick steps towards the wood. ·

216

Sary-su buennan kuzgalyp kitågä dårt kãn buldy digändä alar Diègez-kålgä qkynlawtylar. (Nurixan Fättax, Syzgyra torgan uklar.) Almost four days after they had set out from Sary-su (Yellow Water), they approached Dinggez-kül (Sea Lake). · Ämma Tätiw tikle Tätiwtän täpiläp kajtkah, ... Galiqttäjneè1) kapkasy buennan borylyp kitå dä egetlek tågel. (Barlas Kamalov, Qlykmaslar.) But after you return on foot from Tätish (i.e., from a place as far as Tätish), turning away from Aunt Ghaliä’s gate is no act of daring. (For tikle between two nouns to indicate emphasis see 537). 5. buenha /bujínca/ expresses a very wide range of relationships. Compare the examples below. a) ‘for’, ‘throughout’ (indicating time): · Ul totaw biw sägatá buenha däreslärdä utyrdy. (Dilärä Zãbäerova, Kyr hähäge.) He sat at his (lit., the) lessons for five hours without a break. · Sãläjman, ãh kãn, ãh tãn buenha bålmäsennän çavaga hykmyjha, xikäq qzdy. (Kärim Tinhurin, Tugyzynhy märæän.) Söleyman wrote a story, not getting out of his room into the air for three days (and) three nights. · Ul ullaryna akha æibärgändä çärvakyt: «Menä, karhyk, bez azaplanyp ellar buenha æyjgan malny ullaryè nihek æièel beterälär!» di. (Sadri Æäläl, Dim buenda.) Each time he sends his sons money he says: “Here you see, Mother, how thoughtlessly your sons are wasting the fortune which we acquired over the years with (such) difficulty.” ·

Note: Karhyk – ‘old woman’; used by an elderly husband to address his wife.

b) ‘along’, ‘throughout’ (indicating movement along, or position at, a place): · Qmle æäjge îl buenha æäqåläå æièelhä kiengän qwálär ãhen avyr bulmasa da, avylga kajtyp æitå belän, buynnarybyzda aryganlyk sizelde. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) Although walking along the pleasant summer road was not difficult for lightly dressed youths, we felt fatigue in our knees (joints) when we reached the village. · Min traktor ïze buenha, augan hitännär, æimerelgän kirtälär arkyly åtep, ... qlanga taba jãgerä bawladym. (ibid.) Passing over knocked-down fences, through ruined hedges, I began to run ... along the tractor tracks towards the field. · Bu wãçrätle din äçeleneè ... bãten dãnáq buenha gizep jãråen Æägâfär kåptän belä ide. (Atilla Rasix, Qmawev.) Jäghfär had known for long that this famous clergyman ... had traveled throughout the whole world. · ... divar buenha kehkenä ãställär kuelgan. (Fätxi Burnaw, Adawkan kyz.) ... small tables have been placed along the wall. c) ‘in’, ‘of’ (indicating profession, trade, skill): · Barysy da kajhandyr Galiäkbärgä kowhylyk fäne buenha imtixan birgän ... kewelär. (Atilla Rasix, Synau.) All of them are persons who at some time had taken the exam in poultry raising with Ghäliäkbär... · ... kåz aldyna saban tue batyrydaj, kyska æièle aksyl kålmägen kigän Æiçangiry kilep basty. ... Ger kåtärå buenha avylda da, rajonda da berenhelekne birmi. (Nurislam Xäsänov, Ak balyk.) ... before her mind’s eye stepped her Jihangir in his off-white, short-sleeved shirt which he had worn as the champion of the Festival of the Plough. ... He does not cede first place in weightlifting either in the village or in the district. 1)

Galiyqttäj – short for Galiq tåtäj.

217

Uzeneè berenhe xikäqse «Garäfä /Ôðrðfð/ kih tãwemdä»ne tatarlardan tãrle fännär buenha professorlar, tanylgan qzuhylar ... æyelgan kihäne surätläågä bagywlady. (X. Xismätullin, Fatix Ämirxan iæaty.) He devoted his first story “A Holiday Eve in My Dream” to depicting an evening at which from among Tatars professors of various sciences, well-known writers, ... had assembled. · Professor Äbåzär Taçirov Kazanda jãräk avyrulary buenha iè zur belgehlärneè berse bulyp sanala. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) Professor Äbüzär Tahirov was regarded as one of the most renowned specialists in heart diseases in Kazan. (For the use of the present tense instead of the past tense in Tatar see 956, 5.) · Ukuhy kyzlarga tãrle fännärdän belem birå ãstenä alarga higå higå, kiem tegå iwe kul ïwläre, aw-su äzerli belå buenha da maxsus däreslär oewtyrylgan. (Mirkasyjm Gosmanov, Hähelgän orlyklar – Golæa tatarlary.) In addition to teaching the girl students various subjects, special classes have been arranged in needlework, such as embroidering and sewing, as well as in cooking (lit., in knowing how to prepare food, meals). · Mäktäptä ïwläven zur syjnyflarga matematika ukytudan bawlagan, annary ukytu ïwläre buenha mãdir dä bulyp torgan Äsgatá abzyj Isxakov az såzlelege, sabyrlygy belän aerylyp tora torgan ide. (ibid.) Äsghät Iskhaqov, who had begun his activity in the school with teaching mathematics to the senior classes, and who then became the principal (lit., director for matters of education), distinguished himself by his taciturnity and patience. · – Tanyw bul, – dide Wämsån, minem xuæalyk buenha qrdämhem Minät bulyr bu. (Azat Vergazov, Kajtu.) “Get acquainted,” Shämsün said. “This is Minät, my assistant in financial (economic) matters.” d) ‘by’ (by means of, with the help of): · Tabywmaklar – xalyk avyz iæatynyè iè kåp taralgan tãrlärennän berse. Anyè æavaby tabywmakta birelgän surätlär, bilgelär buenha tabyla. (S.M., 9, 1977, b. 20.) Riddles are one of the most widespread genres of folklore. Its answers to them are found by means of (with the help of) the descriptions and intimations given in the riddle. · – Hähå ïwen bez åzebez dä buldyrabyz, egetlär. Qwelhä bakhasy ïwe ikenheräk. Äxmät iptäw bezgä any kitaplary buenha ïwläp kårsätsen. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) “The sowing job we will manage ourselves, fellows. Work in the kitchen garden is something else. Have comrade Äkhmät demonstrate how from his books.” · · Isemlek buenha kemneè nindiräk kewe ikänlegen kyskaha gyna sãjläp hyksagyz ide, – dim. (Mirgaziqn Înys, Îlda ujlanular.) “If, from (with help of) the list you would just tell me roughly what kind of a person each is,” I say. (The speaker is new ·

in a higher position and wants to get some information on the people he has to work with.)

e) ‘for’, ‘on’, ‘to’ (indicating purpose): · Baryj Safin digän eget belän tanywtym. ... Min äle bälki aèa tiz genä såz kuwarga da kyjmagan bulyr idem. Taktaw wigyráläre buenha qsagan räsemnäremne kårep, åze igâtibar itte. (Mirsäj Ämir, Åsä tãwkäh.) I became acquainted with a young man called Bari Safin. ... I would perhaps not have mustered the courage to address him anytime soon. Seeing the (lit., my) pictures I had prepared for Taqtash’s poems, he himself took notice of me. · Kazan buenha îl kårsätkeh kitap. (Mirsäj Ämir.) A guide(book) to Kazan. · Ïw buenha aèa wäçärgä baryrga tury kilde. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) He had to go to town on business. 218

· Kihä minem äti sezgä telefonda waltyratkan ikän. Min wul mäsáälä buenha kildem. (Gabdraxman Minskij, Qznyè berenhe kãne.) “Yesterday my father called you up, I understand. I have come on that matter.” (For ikän see 742, a.). f) ‘by’, ‘on the basis of’: · Räsemnäre buenha, iwetkännärem buenha, xätta äsärläre buenha da any tanydym: bu – Fatix Ämirxan ide. (Ämirxan Eniki, Gãländäm tutaw xatiräse.) I recognized him by his pictures, by what I had heard, and even by his works. This was Fatikh Ämirkhan. · – Ällä sez any beläsezme? – Kårep tugel, gazetalarda basylgan mäkaläläre buenha gyna. (Vakyjf Nurullin, Qwánäp åtkän qwálek.) “Then you know him?” “Not by sight, only by his articles which are printed in the newspapers.” · Äxmäj täæribäse buenha, bez åzebez torgan jorttan eragrak, avylnyè ikenhe bawynarak kitkän idek. (Mirsäj Ämir, Bez bäläkäj haklarda.) Based on Äkhmey’s experience, we had gone farther away from the house in which we were living more towards the other end of the village. g) ‘from’ (on the basis of, in accordance with): · ... annary åze berär qèa kãjne ujnap kårsätä çäm wuny mièa nota buenha ujnarga kuwa. (Ämirxan Eniki, Gãländäm tutaw xatiräse.) ... then he himself demonstrates (lit., plays and shows) some new tune and has me play it from the music (lit., by note). h) ‘on’, ‘at’ (as a result of, because of): · ... ul minem ãhen dä bik sãende, hãnki Salix hakyruy buenha baruymny belep tora. (ibid.) ... she was also very glad for me because she knew (lit., knows) that I was going at Salikh’s invitation. · Anyè urynyna Aliullin kièäwe buenha Irwatny kujdylar. (Rämzi Maksudov, Wäjmorza keweläre.) On Aliullin’s advice, they put Irshat in his position (i.e., in the former accountant’s position). · Lälä xanymnyè çäm Zaçit Räxmätullovihnyè katgyj taläbe buenha Aláfrednyè ätise belän änisenä båläklär dä alyndy. (Foat Sadriev, Adäm äåliqse.) At lady Lälä’s and Zahit Räkhmätullovich’s firm request (insistence), presents were bought for Alfred’s parents too. · Fätxineè täkâdime buenha, ... Mostafa sajlandy. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) At Fätkhi’s suggestion, Mostafa was elected ... i) ‘in’, ‘by’ (according to): · Nägyjmneè fikere buenha Wixrau sajlanyrga tiew ide. (ibid.) In Näghim’s opinion, Shikhraw ought to have been elected. · Fätxi karawy buenha da bu kièäw dãres ide. Ul wulaj ïwläde dä. (Wärif Kamal, Nykly adymnar.) In Fätkhi’s view too this advice (i.e., the advice given him) was right, and he proceeded accordingly. j) ‘after’ (indicating manner, ‘according to’): · Mãmkin bulgan ohrakta kåmäkläp «Dårtenhe bieklek» äsäre buenha ïwlängän kinofilám karala. (S.M., 12, 1977, 6. 25.) The movie made after the work “The Fourth Height” is to be watched collectively (i.e., by the whole class), if that is possible. k) ‘according to’ (in agreement with, in accordance with, as stated or shown by): · Boryngydan kilä torgan gadät buenha kunakka baryrga bernihä aj ïlek äzerlänä bawlyjlar. (Rämzi Maksudov, Wäjmorza keweläre.) According to long-standing tradition, they begin preparing themselves for visits several months in advance. ·

219

Minem isäp buenha inde ãh tågel, un minut uzarga tiew ide. (Garif Gobäj /Ôõbðj/, Bez åskändä.) According to my calculation, not three but ten minutes must already have passed. · Kartlarnyè såze buenha, ïlek, untugyzynhy gasyrnyè axyrlarynda, bu xärabä Isxak mirza gailäseneè kajnap torgan oqsy bulgan. (Sadri Æäläl, Dim buenda.) According to what the old folks relate, these ruins were once, around the end of the nineteenth century, the busy estate (lit., nest) of Mirza Iskhaq’s family. · Mäkalálärne uryndagy sãjläwlär buenha qzyp alganda, anda kajber urynhylyk, kabilähelek såzläre ohryj. Uryndagy dialektlarny ãjränå ãhen alarny wul äjtelewläre buenha qzyp alu äçämiqtle. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) As the proverbs are recorded in accordance in the local vernacular, one will come across some words there which pertain to local or tribal idioms. Recording them in accordance with those pronunciations is important for the study of local dialects. · Änisä. ... Kagyjdä buenha, tiränlek kimendä egerme santimetr bulyrga tiew. Ãrlek bu xälendä kalsa, qrty eldan tåwäm bãtenläj iwelep tãwähäk. (Gamir Nasryj, Kuwamat.) Änisä. ... According to the rules, the depth must be at least twenty centimeters. If the girder stays in this position (i.e., with its end only six centimeters in the wall), the whole ceiling will collapse in half a year. l) ‘about’ (concerning): · – Îk, kajber mäsáälälär buenha bez barybyz da, kyzganyhka karwy, bertãrle ujlamyjbyz äle. (Äxsän Baqnov, Ut çäm su.) “No, about some matters all of us do, unfortunately, not yet think the same way.” · · Min dä näkâ wundyj mäsáälälär buenha kilgän idem, bergä sãjläwik äle! (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) “I have come exactly about such matters; so let’s talk together.” · – Mièa Waçzamanov ïwe buenha hygyw qsau ikelätä kyen, – dide Bikkinin avyr sulap. (Foat Sadriev, Waçzamanov ïwe.) “To make a speech about (concerning) Shahzamanov’s case is for me difficult in two ways (or: doubly difficult),” Bikkinin said, taking a deep breath. · Ohrawkan saen ul mine ïwem buenha îgary oewmalarga nik qzmyjsyè dip tinterätä. (Gurij Tavlin, Afät.) Each time we meet, she gets on my nerves by saying why don’t I write to higher authorities (departments) about my case. m) ‘on’, ‘with’ (about, concerning, engaged upon): · Ukuhylarga tåbändäge ike sorau täkâdim itelä: ... Berenhe sorau buenha äègämä alyp barganda, åsemleklärneè kewegä tuklanu azygy ..., wulaj uk kiem-salym ... jort æiçazlary ... ç.b. bula aluy aèlatyla. (S.M., 8, 1977, b. 41.) The following two questions (lit., The two questions which are below) are put to the pupils: ... During the discussion held on the first question it will be explained (i.e., the teacher explains) that plants can be food for man ..., as well as clothing, ... furniture, ..., etc. · Xabi mièa tarix, geografiq buenha qrdäm itä, ... (Mãxämmät Mäçdiev, Tornalar tãwkän æirdä.) Khabi helps me with history, geography, ... n) ‘by’ (indicating origin): · Zarif tumywy buenha Kazan arty rajonnarynyè bersennän ikän. (Atilla Rasix, Synau.) It turned out that by birth Zarif was from one of the districts behind Kazan. o) ‘from’ (indicating source): · «Tatarha Teatr». «Joldyz» gazetasynda ... «G. Tukaj» imzasy belän basylgan. G. Tukaj kulâqzmalary arasynda da bar. Tekst kulâqzma buenha alyndy. (Gabdulla Tukaj – Äsärlär.) (The article) “Tatar Theatre” was published in the ·

220

newspaper “The Star” ... with the signature “Gh. Tuqai”. It (i.e., the article) is also among Gh. Tuqai’s manuscripts. The text has been taken from the manuscript. p) ‘due to’ (indicating cause): · Kemnär arkasynda, nindi säbäplär buenha bulganlygyn äjtep tormyjm, min æide qwemdä hagymda ukyrga-qzarga ãjrängän idem. (Zarif Bäwiri, Zamandawlarym belän ohrawular.) I am not saying through whom and due to what reasons it happened, (but) I had learned to read and write at age seven. [475] bujlap, bujlyj (bujlyj is used rarely), bujlatyp ‘along’, ‘throughout’, ‘through’ (indicating motion, extent, bujla ‘go, walk along’; ‘measure’): · ... bez dä bawkalabyz bujlap säqxätkä hyktyk. Kãnneè-kãn bue wäçär bujlap jãrdek ... (Garif Axunov, Marselá Zaripov, I kaderle tugan qk.) ... we too set out on a tour of our capital. All day long we traveled throughout the city ... · Färit iwek tãbendä beraz kãtkännän soè, professorny tiz genä kårä aludan ãmeten ãzep, baskyh bujlap tåbän tãwä bawlady. (Atilla Rasix, Synau.) After waiting a little at the door, Färit gave up hope of being able to see the professor soon and began to walk down the stairs (lit., walk down by, along the stairs). · Min, tänem bujlap jãgergän kaltyrauny basar ãhen, berkavym saraj buenda toryrga mäæbår buldym. (Garif Axunov, Hiklävek tãwe.) In order to calm the shiver which ran through (all along) my body, I was forced to pause for a while beside the shed. · Tubändä kehkenä elgahyk, wul elgahyk bujlap suzylyp kitkän Karakow avyly æäelep qta. (Ämirxan Eniki, Tugan tufrak.) Below is a little river. The village of Qaraqosh lies spread out along that little river. · Bu romannarnyè dany belän bergä, tatar ädäbiqtynyè da dany il bujlap qègyrady. (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) Together with the fame of these novels, the fame of Tatar literature too rang out throughout the country. · Hiwmädän hykkan kebek saf, salkyn su agah ulak bujlap hiläkkä agyp kyna tãwä. (Mirsäj Ämir, Bez bäläkäj haklarda.) The water, clear and cool as though coming from a spring, simply flows through a wooden trough into the pail. · ... ul ... ãh-dårt metr kièlegendäge bozdaj salkyn su awa hykty da, tagyn qr bujlatyp kitep bardy. (Nurixan Fättax, Artta kalgan îllar.) ... she ... walked through the three or four meter wide, ice-cold water and continued again along the bank. · ... äègämäläre tågäräklänep tä æitmäde, ferma kãtåen äjdäp, inew bujlatyp kilgän Gajnan belän Dilbär kårende. (Gomär Bäwirov, Æidegän hiwmä.) ... Their conversation had not come to an end (when) Gheynan and Dilbär appeared, coming along the brook driving the farm herd. [476] bujlata. a) ‘along’ (indicating motion): · Tãw vakyty æitär aldynnan qr bujlata wäçär qgyna ike tãrkem balyk totuhy malajlar åtep kittelär. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) Before midday appoached, two groups of boys, who had been fishing, were walking along the banks towards the town. · Wäçär çäm anyè tiräsendäge îllar bujlata tanyw mawina – karasu-zäègär «Volga» uza. (Äxsän Baqnov, Ut çäm su.) Through the city and along the roads around it passes a familiar car – a dark blue “Volga”.

221

b) ‘from’, ‘according to’ (indicating source): · Bary tik Säläxi genä, Wixrajdan iwetåe bujlata, Nägyjmneè ... fronttan ... kahkanlygyn belä ide. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) Only Säläkhi knew, from what he had heard from Shikhrai, that Näghim ... had run away from the front. [477] bularak (verbal adverb plus +rak of bul ‘be’, ‘become’). ‘as’ (‘in the capacity of’, with a connotation of ‘that being so’, ‘because of’): · Xuæa bularak, Isäntäj beraz gyna aldan bardy. (Nurixan Fättax, Syzgyra torgan uklar.) As the host, Isäntey went just a little ahead. · ... ul åze dä îgary kåtärelde, fän, kulátura ïwleklese bularak, ber Tatarstanda gyna tågel, bãten il kålämendä tanyldy. (Mansur Xäsänov, Galimæan Ibraçimov.) ... he himself too rose high (i.e., to a high position). As a scientist (and) cultural worker, he was known not only in Tatarstan but throughout the entire country. · Ädäbi tänkyjtáhe bularak Ibraçimovnyè iseme matbugatta 1910 eldan alyp kårenä bawlyj. (ibid.) As a literary critic, Ibrahimov’s name began (lit., begins) to appear in the press from 1910 on. · 30 nhy ellarda, tãp igâtibaryn dramaturgiq ãlkäsenä înältkän xäldä, Burnaw wagyjrá bularak ta waktyj zur äçämiqtle äsärlär iæat itä. (Bäqn Gyjzzät, Fätxi Burnaw.) Though in the 1930’s he directed his main attention to the field of dramaturgy, Burnash created (lit., creates) works of rather great importance also as a poet. · Universitet betergännän soè biw el bue kewe ãstendä qwäå, qzyp utyryrga nykly ber uryn bulmau, wularnyè barysy ãstenä Matbugat jorty belän Kazan uramnarynnan bawkany kårmäå mine qlyktyra bawlagan ide. Gel wulaj barsa, minem, qzuhy bularak, tãpsez kãjmägä utyryp kaluym da bik mãmkin ide. (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) Living as a roomer for five years after finishing the university, having no set (permanent) place to write and, in addition to all that, not seeing anything else besides the House of the Press and the streets of Kazan had begun to vex me. If things continued like that, it might be very possible that, as a writer, I’d be in a hopeless situation (lit., be getting in a boat without a bottom). [478] bulyp (verbal adverb of bul ‘be’, ‘become’). a) ‘as’ (in the function, condition, sense of): · Ul 1947 eldan tawhy bulyp ïwli bawlady ... (Kyzyl taè.) From 1947 on he began to work as a bricklayer .... · Sälix ... Nukaj sigezáellyk mäktäbendä ukytuhy bulyp ïwlägän. (ibid.) Sälikh ... worked as a teacher in the eight-grade (lit., eight-year) school of Nuqai. · Revolîciqdän soè Galimæan Ibraçimov qzuhy bulyp kyna tågel, tel-ädäbiqt belgehe, tarixhy çäm tyryw æämägatá ïwleklese bulyp ta tanyldy. (G. Xalit, Galimæan Ibraçimov.) After the revolution, Ghalimjan Ibrahimov was known not only as a writer but also as a scholar of language and literature, as a historian, and as a zealous social worker. · Anyè ... «Tatar telen nihek ukytyrga?», «Tel sabaklary» isemle xezmätläre kat-kat basylyp hyktylar, ozak ellar mäktäplärdä däreslek-kullanma bulyp xezmät ittelär. (Mansur Xäsänov, Galimæan Ibraçimov.) His works ... “How to Teach the Tatar Language?”, “Language Lessons” were published many times over and for many years served as textbooks and manuals in schools.

222

b) ‘as’ (role, character of): · Gaqz kyza tãwte: – Sièa kilewådä ïw tågel. Avyl kyzy bulyp kien! (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) Ghayaz got excited: “The thing is not whether it suits you. Get dressed as a country girl!” · ... qnybyzga awyga-awyga Gaqz kilep æitte. Ul Xälil bulyp kienep, bizänep ãlgergän ide inde. (ibid.) ... Ghayaz came hurriedly to us. He had already managed to dress as (i.e., as the character of) Khälil and to put on makeup. c) ‘like’ (similar to): · Kåzläre ut bulyp qna bawlady. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) Her eyes began to burn like fire. · Joldyzlar nury, Kiek kaz îly qktysy kåktän serle kãh bulyp agyla ide. (Ibraçim Gazi, Onytylmas ellar.) The sparkle of the stars, the light of the Milky Way flowed from the sky like a mysterious power. Note 1.: Preceded and followed by the same noun, bulyp has the meaning of xätta ‘even’ (see 1263). Note 2.: For reasons of style (for example, to avoid repeating the same postposition in short succession in a sentence), bularak and bulyp may be used in parallel construction. But note that they are not fundamentally sunonymic. They are ‘synonyms’ in ‘such constructions’ however. For example: Min sezgä bu såzlärne räsmi kewe bulyp tågel, ä sezne qkyn kåråhe kewe bularak äjtäm. (Atilla Rasix, Ike bujdak.) I am not telling you this as an official person, but as a person who regards you as one close.

[479] bärabär ‘equal’; ‘corresponding’. bärabärenä ‘at the price of’, ‘for’; ‘instead’; ‘in return for’: · Bu æièå kåp korban bärabärenä qulana. (Niqz Xäkimullin, Arktika kièleklärendä.) This victory was (lit., is) won at the price of much sacrifice. · – Bãtenesen bäxetsez ittem, åzemneè saflygymny îgalttym, ä wular bärabärenä ni taptym, ni aldym? (Ämirxan Eniki, Jãräk sere.) “I made all of them unhappy. I lost my purity, and what did I gain, what did I get in return for (all) that?” · Ïw xäzer aerata avyr, läkin wunyè bärabärenä kånelle dä. (Atilla Rasix, Bäxet orlyklary.) The work is especially heavy now, but for (all) that, cheering. · · Ixtimal bulgan æänæallar bärabärenä minem belän kilewergä tyrywuyè kåèelne jomwarta tãwte. (Äxsän Baqnov, Argy qr.) “Your endeavor to become reconciled with me, instead of quarelling (as you might have done), somewhat softened my heart.” · – Kaderle kunaklar, – dide konferansáe eget. – Bezneè atakly æyrhybyz Sabir äfände Wäripov bågen syrxaulap tora, sezne æyry belän båläkläådän gaæiz ôðçiz/. Ämma, anyè bärabärenä Sabir äfände bezgä ... – skripkada milli kãjlärebezne bawkarahak! (Ibraçim Salaxov, Imännär tamyr æäjgändä.) “Dear guests,” the young master of ceremonies said. “Our illustrious singer, Mister Sabir Shäripov is ill today and incapable of presenting you with his songs. But instead, Mister Sabir will perform (some) national melodies for us on the violin ...!” [480] vakyt ‘time’. vakytynda, vakytta ‘during’, ‘for’, ‘as’ (indicating time): · Ãh sägatákä suzylgan sãjläwå vakytynda ul bik nyk arydy ... (Garif Axunov, Hiklävek tãwe.) During the conversation, which stretched out three hours, he became very tired ... · – Sabyr itegez, ... äjtäse såzegezne fiker alywu vakytynda äjtersez. (Mãxämmät Wäjmi, Synau.) “Be patient, ... what you have to say you will say during the discussion period.”

223

Ikenhe tänäfes vakytynda alar qnyna docent Qègura kilde ... (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) During the second recess, assistant professor Yangghura came to them ... · Monda bytbyldyk, turgaj tavywlary, anyè kyz vakytta, åzeneè tièdäwläre belän urak uryp, pehän æyjnap jãrgän zamannaryn iskärtä idelär. (Wärif Kamal, Kozgynnar oqsynda.) Here, the voices of the quail and the lark reminded her of her years (lit., times) when, as a girl, she reaped (and) gathered hay with her equals (i.e., girls her age). · Ul çär ike-ãh kãndä ber tapkyr kerlär alyp, tynyh vakytta gyna elgaga tãwä çäm berär sägatá hamasy vakytta kerlär hajkap, îyp, räxätlänep kajta ide. (ibid.) Once every two or three days, at a quiet time, she would take the linen and go down to the river, and, for about an hour, she would rinse and wash linen and return contented. ·

[481] itep (verbal adverb of itå ‘to do’, ‘to make’). ‘as’ (in the role, function, capacity, form, or sense of): Note: With certain verbs (usually verbs of choosing, calling, naming, and making) a noun with itep may correspond to a predicate objective (complementary object), or to a predicate nominative (subject complement) in English. It corresponds to the former when the verb is in the active, to the latter when it is in the passive voice. ·

· · ·

·

·

·

– Min bit sezne anyè belän hibär tåtaw itep kenä tågel, ä bigräk tä bulahak muzykant itep tanywtyrdym. (Ämirxan Eniki, Gãländäm tutaw xatiräse.) “After all, I did not introduce you to him just as a pretty young lady, but above all, as a future musician. “ Ul åzen Æagpar Soltanbekovnyè agasy itep tanytty. He introduced himself as the older brother of Jaghpar Soltanbekov. Ul bu kulâqzmany kitap itep bastyryrga bik xyqllana ide. He was dreaming very much of having this manuscript published as a book. ... Färit bu ïwne kemgäder bawka kewegä jãklärgä æãráät itmäde, any ãstämä ber ïw itep åz kulyna aldy. (Atilla Rasix, Synau.) ... Färit did not dare to charge some other person with this work, (but) took it on himself as an additional task. Ul 1928 elda Däålät sängatá fännäre akademiqseneè xakyjkyj ägâzasy itep sajlandy. (Mansur Xäsänov, Galimæan Ibraçimov.) In 1928 he (i.e., Ghalimjan Ibrahimov) was elected a full member of the State Academy of Arts and Sciences. ... Ibraçimov anyè qrdämhelärennän berse itep bilgelänä ... (G. Xalit, Galimæan Ibraçimov.) Ibrahimov was (lit., is) appointed one of his (i.e., Wakhitov’s) assistants ... Alar (qwálär) ... xalykka xezmät itåne åzlärenä buryh itep kuqlar. (Bäqn Gyjzzät, Kärim Tinhurin /1887-1947/.) They (the youths) made (lit., make) it a duty to serve ... the people (or: made serving ... the people a duty).

Note: Kðrim Tincurin (1887-1947). Writer, playright, actor and stage director. Author of numerous stage plays (dramas, comedies, etc.) and novellas.

[482] iw ‘a pair’; ‘an equal’, ‘kind’. iwe ‘like’, ‘such as’ (compares two or more of a class): · Ul bit minem iwe teläsä kemnän soryj ala çäm berkem dä anyè åtenehen kire kakmaqhak. (Vakyjf Nurullin, Çälakät.) After all, she can ask anybody like me (i.e., any of the executives) and no one will refuse her request.

224

– Ä ïw nihek soè? ... – Utyn vaklau, utyn kertå, iwek aldyn, kapka aldylaryn seberå çäm bawka wunyè iwe vak-tãqk ïwlär. (Wärif Kamal, Nykly adymnar.) “And what work is it then?” ... “Chopping wood, carrying in wood, sweeping the yard, the front of the gate and other minor jobs like these.” · ... xäzrätkä sädaka itep saryk, syer, at, dãq iwe mal-tuar tagyp kilåhelär æäen dä, kywyn da tuktalmyj. (Atilla Rasix, Qmawev.) ... those coming to His Excellency (His Holiness), driving lifestock, such as sheep, cattle, horses and camels as a gift (i.e., as alms, charity), do not stop summer and winter. · · Sineè iwe qwáräk kewelär ãhen ber urynda ozak utyru fajdaly tågel. (Wärif Kamal, Nykly adymnar.) “Remaining (lit., sitting) for a long time in one position (i.e., job) is not good for young people like you.” ·

Note: Final +e of iwe can have two functions. 1. It may function as the possessive suffix third person singular of the noun iw. In that case, iwe takes the case endings ordinarily joined to such possessive stems: iweneè, iwenä, iwen, iwendä, iwennän. 2. Final +e may form an integral part of iwe, making it a simple noun. Iwe is then treated as any other noun. For example:

... bu kabilälärneè ber iwese kãnbatywka taba îl tota. (Garif Axunov, Marselá Zaripov, I kaderle tugan qk.) ... one part of these tribes moved towards the west. · – ... Min anyè iwegä såz îgaltasym da kilmi. (Wärif Kamal, Nykly adymnar.) “ ... I do not wish to waste any words on something like that.” · Åze inde îgary belemle çãnär iqse. Minem iwelärne ukytahak. (Vakyjf Nurullin, Ike uram arasy.) She is already a specialist (expert, master) with a higher education. She will teach the likes of me. · ... kãhlelär kiräk, ... – Xäsännär kebek, Morat iwelärdäj. (Xänif Xäjrullin, Kartlyk kemgä watlyk?) ... we need strong men, ... – like Khäsän, such ones as Morat. ·

[483] jãz ‘face’, ‘surface’. 1. jãzenä (most frequently with the words kåk ‘sky’, æir ‘earth’, dãnáq ‘world’) ‘on’, ‘upon’, ‘in’ (indicating movement to the face, surface of): · Bara torgah, koqw æièep hykty, Æir jãzenä karap kãlde ul. (Mäæit Gafuri, Koqw æiède.) Little by little the sun gained the upper hand, It laughed down upon the earth. 2. jãzendä a) (in this function mostly with the words kåk, æir, dãnáq) ‘on’, ‘upon’ (position on the face, surface): · Zäègär kåk jãzendä alama ber bolyt kisägennän gajre /ôðjre/ berni kåzgä halynmyj. (Rãstäm Kutuj, Sãenhe.) Except for a thin shred of clouds, nothing catches the eye in the blue sky. · Ul minutta dãnáq jãzendä minnän dä bäxetsezräk berkem dä bulmagandyr. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) That minute there was probably no one on the face of the earth more unhappy than I. b) ‘in’ (people, things): · Aláfred jãzendä ul gãnaçsyz, täæribäsez avylny tanydy, änä wul æene kotyrgan närsälärdän vakytlyha bulsa da kåz kårmäslek erakka alyp kitåhe zatny kårde. (Foat Sadriev, Adäm äåliqse.) In Alfred she (Rufina) discerned the

225

simple, crude (lit., inexperienced) village, saw the person who would, if only temporarily, take her far away from those things (i.e., the din, street noise, the crowded streetcars, etc.) which angered her. 3. jãzennän a) (in this function mostly with the words kåk, æir, dãnáq) ‘from’ (indicating direction, from the face, surface of): · Karaègy kåk jãzennän vak-vak kåbäläklär wikelle karlar ohyp kewelär ãstenä syrywa ... (Wärif Kamal, Taè atkanda.) From the dark sky snow is flying down like tiny butterflies and clinging to the people ... b) (in this function mostly with the words kåk, æir, dãnáq) ‘in’, ‘over’ (indicating movement along): · Kåk jãzennän ber-ber artly ak bolytlar jãzälär. (Äbrar Wämin, Kamaj kåpere.) In the sky white clouds are drifting by, one after the other. c) ‘out of’ (for the sake of, for the purpose of), ‘in order to’: · Kunakhyl xuæasyna ixtiram jãzennän Toma bu åtenehkä riza da bula. (Irwat Vergasov, Kyrym partizannary.) Toma agrees to this request out of esteem for the hospitable hostess. · · Maktau jãzennän tågel, ä hyn dãresen äjtäm. (Ämirxan Eniki, Gãländäm tutaw xatiräse.) “I don’t say it in order to praise, but I am speaking the real truth.” · Wul buryhny åtäå jãzennän, ambarlarga tutyrylgan orlyklarny tikwerep jãrgändä, ber ambarda histartylmagan bodaj ohratty ul. (Mirsäj Ämir, Bezneè avyl kewese.) While, in order to carry out that duty, he was inspecting the seeds which had been stored (lit., filled) in granaries, he came, in one granary, upon wheat which had not been cleaned. · Belorus kyzy Tanq mièa åz ãjlärennän ukyrga kitaplar tawyj ide. Räxmät jãzennän min aèa kitaplaryn tãpläp birä idem. (Ibraçim Gazi, Malajlykta kunakta.) The Belorussian girl Tanya was bringing (lit., was carrying) me books to read from their home (lit. their own home). As a way of saying thank you, I was making (paper) covers for her books. d) ‘as’ (indicating capacity, example): · Æäza birå jãzennän. As punishment. · Misal jãzennän äjtå. To say as an example. · Mondyj mäkalálärneè kajberläre ... kièäw jãzennän ... äjtelälär. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) Some such proverbs ... are used (lit., said) ... as advice. [484] kat ‘place beside, close to a person, place, or thing’. 1. katyna ‘to’, ‘before’, ‘at’ (indicating motion towards): · Mägâsåmä katyna jãrep iqläwkän biq îl aerylywynda kinät kenä sulga kaerdy. (Ibraçim Gazi, Onytylmas ellar.) The mare, which had got used to going to Mäghsümä, suddenly turned to the left at the fork of the road. · Qkup ... Xälim katyna kilep, malajnyè bawyna kulyn saldy. (ibid.) Jacob ... came over to Khälim and put his hand on the boy’s head. · · Kybyrsynma inde! Utyr äle minem katka. (Rãstäm Kutuj, Ber dä ber kãzne.) “Now, don’t fuss about! Sit down beside me, please.” · · Sineè katyèa, ulym, zarlanyrga dip kermädem. (Marselá Galiev, Erak urman avazy.) “I did not come (in) to you, my son, in order to complain.” · Min kihen azan äjtkänne tyèlarga mähet katyna baram. (Ibraçim Gazi, Malajlykta kunakta.) In the evening I go to the mosque to hear the call to prayer. 226

Avyldan avylga jãribez. Basu kapkasynnan kilep kerågä Æämil abyj: – Alma satam, alma! – dip kyhkyryp æibärä ... olylar awykmyj gyna ... almaly arba katyna qkynaqlar. (ibid.) We are moving from village to village. As soon as we enter through the village gate (i.e., the gate at the outskirts of a village on the road to the fields), uncle Jämil cries out: “I’m selling apples, apples!” ... unhurriedly ... the adults come up to the apple cart. 2. katynda ‘beside’, ‘at’ (location): · – Ni buldy? Sin bit åzem kiläm dimägän ideè? – dip kilåhene ãjgä hakyryrga da onytyp, iwek katynda terälep kaldy ul. (Rinat Mãxämmädiev, Sirat kåpere.) “What happened? You hadn’t said that you would come yourself, had you?” he said, and remained standing (motionless) at the door, even forgetting to invite his (lit., the) visitor into the house. · – Åz gaebeène kewegä audarma, – dide wul ara Wämsån Xädiskä çäm kåz katynda qtkan kägazágä iwaräläp ãstäp kujdy ... (Azat Vergazov, Kajtu.) Meanwhile, Shämsün said to Khädis: “Don’t shift the (lit., your) blame onto somebody else, and, motioning to the paper which lay there open to view (lit., before the eye), he added ...” 3. katynnan ‘from’ the direction of a place or thing): · – Bawka vakytta sãjlärseè jomywyèny, – dide ul waktyj kory itep, – xäzer vakytym îk. – Ul kartny ber seltäå belän kåz katynnan îkka hygargan kyqfät belän ãstäl ãstendäge kägazálären aktaryrga totyndy. (Azat Vergazov, Kajtu.) “You’ll submit (lit., say) your request at another time,” he said rather severely. “I have no time now.” With an expression as if, with one motion, he had made the old man disappear from his sight, he began to go through his papers on the desk. · Mih katynnan ãjne ikegä bålep suzylgan bålmä taktasy buenda ... iske genä timer karavat. (Ämirxan Eniki, Tugan tufrak.) Along the room divider which, extending from the stove, divided the room in half (lit., two), is a ... rather old iron bed. ·

[485] katnaw ‘mixed’. As a postposition it indicates a) simultaneous actions: · ... Artykbikä tagyn da nygrak borhyldy. Elau katnaw qlynu tavywy belän Gaqzny kire kajtyrga ãndi bawlady. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) ... Artyqbikä started to worry (lit., worried) still more. With an imploring and crying voice she began to call upon Ghayaz to turn back. · Anyè kart kipkän jãzenä, tirän, ïhkä batkan kåzlärenä ränæå katnaw ahu qlkyny hykty. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Tirän tamyrlar.) There appeared in his old, shriveled face, in his deep-set eyes, a glint of anger (mixed with) resentment. b) ‘side by side’, ‘together’: Kaen katnaw narat urmany. (T.T.A.S.) A pine forest mixed (interspersed) with birches (i.e., a forest in which pines are standing side by side with birches). · Bolgar däålätendä, bigräk tä dalaly çäm urman katnaw dalaly urynnarda, terlekhelek tä xuæalyknyè mãstäkyjlá tarmagy bulyp kitkän. (Tatarstan ASSR tarixy, XI–XIII gasyrlarda Idel buendagy Bolgar däåläte.) In the Bolghar State, particularly in the steppe and forest-steppe areas, stockraising too was carried on as an independent branch of the economy. c) inseparably mixed: · ... irtä belän kåbäläk kar qva, æirneè ãsten agartyp tawlyj, tãw æitkäh, ul kar katnaw qègyrga äjlänä. (Davyt Îlty Kan.) ... in the morning, flakes of snow fall (and) quickly turn the ground (lit., surface of the earth) white. At midday (lit., when, after midday arrived), it turned (lit., turns) into rain mixed with snow. 227

[486] katyw ‘mixed’. As a postposition it indicates a) simultaneous actions: · Jãzendä aptyrau katyw kauwau sizelä, ... (Mãxämmät Wäjmi, Synau.) On his face one senses confusion together with embarrassment, ... · Kuhärbaj elau katyw kaltyravykly tavyw belän åzeneè gaepsez ikänlegen aèlatyrga teläde. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) In a trembling and crying voice, Quchärbai tried to explain that he was innocent. · Ul åpkä katyw ahu belän Aqzgulovnyè kåzlärenä karady. (ibid.) He looked into Ayazghulov’s eyes with anger and resentment (lit., anger mixed with resentment). · Äni, waqru katyw weltä belän karwy alyp, åzeneè kãtä-kãtä aryp betkänlegen aèlatty. (ibid.) Receiving us with mock reproach, Mother explained that she had become tired waiting (for us). b) inseparably mixed: · Sãqklärgä åtep isä torgan ahy æil qrma syman katy kar katyw kom bãrtekläre alyp kilde. (Nurixan Fättax, Syzgyra torgan uklar.) A penetrating wind, which cut right through to the bone, carried along grains of sand mixed with hard, granular snow. · Karaègy. Kar katyw qègyr qva. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) It is dark. Rain is falling mixed with snow. · ... bålmädä tämäke tãtene katyw kãnbagyw mae, tãtäslängän balyk çäm ker sabyny isläre aèkyj. (Wärif Kamal, Nykly adymnar.) ... in the room there was a smell of sunflower oil, smoked fish, and laundry soap mixed with that of tobacco smoke. c) ‘side by side’, ‘together’: · Îl qnäwäsendä, sul qklap, kaen katyw imän urmany bawlandy. (Ajdar Xälim, Ãh aqkly at.) Beside the road, on the left, a forest of birches and oaks (i.e., birches and oaks standing beside each other) began. · ... mäjdanda gaskär /ôðskðr/ belän ïwhelär katyw miting buldy. (Ibraçim Gazi, Onytylmas ellar.) ... at the square there was a meeting of workers side by side with soldiers. (miting – zur æyelyw). [487] kebek (kåk, kebi) – (keb ‘model’, ‘form’). ‘as ... as’, ‘like’ (similar to’, in comparisons). Note: Kebek is commonly used in today’s Tatar language. Kåk belongs to the spoken language but is also used in poetry and prose. The form kebi pertains to the older Tatar literary language.

1. · – Min dä ãjlänäm! Sineke kebek matur xatyn alam! (Ibraçim Gazi, Kanatlanyr hak.) “I too shall get married! I shall take a woman who is as pretty as yours!” · Båre äjtä: – Sin, näkâ minem kebek åk, båtän æan iqläre isäbenä qwiseè. (Äxsän Baqnov, Ut çäm su.) The wolf says, “You are just like me; you live at the expense of other creatures.” · Wäårä egetne kulynnan aldy. Alar wunduk bersen-berse ällä kajhangy belewlär, duslar kebek xis itä bawladylar. (Gomär Bäwirov, Æidegän hiwmä.) Shäwrä took the young man by the hand. They instantly began to feel like acquaintances, friends who had known each other a long time. · Biw barmak kebek qxwy belä ul Ufany. (Atilla Rasix, Ajly tãnnär.) He knows Ufa well, like the back of his hand (lit., like his five fingers). · Kãn salkynha, mamyk kisäkläre kebek ïre-ïre kar qva. (Räfkatá Kärami, Sagywly koqw.) The day is chilly; snow is falling in large flakes like shreds of cotton. · Kãtåhelär tapkan hiwmä kebek, Æyrym minem, sin dä ulaksyz.

228

Wul hiwmä kåk sin dä tynyh aktyè, Wul hiwmä kåk sin dä gãnaçsyz. (Sibgatá Xäkim.) Like the spring the shepherds come upon, You too, my song, have no (confining) channel (i.e., you are completely free, unbound). You too have run quietly like that spring, You too are without sin like that spring. · Ul hydyj almady. Gajnikamal abystajga da, ..., bågenge kebi wärif kihne gyjbadät belänräk uzdyryrga tyrywyrga kiräk dip ujlaganyn beldertte, ... (Fatix Ämirxan, Bäjrämnär, 1908.) He could not bear it. He let Lady Gheynikamal know that he thought she too should, ..., (like he himself) endeavor to spend a holy evening like today’s more with prayer, ... (Rather than praying, Gh. was making preparations for the guests they expected the next day.)

2. A noun combined with kebek and repeated after the postposition in its required case form expresses emphasis (in English mostly rendered by ‘even’): · Mondyj ïnæe gasyrga ber genä märtäbä tabyla. Mondyj bajlykny ew tudyryrga diègez kebek diègezneè dä kãhe æitmi. (Mirgaziqn Înys, Ïnæe ïzläåhelär.) Such a pearl is found only once in a century. Even the power of the sea is not sufficient to produce such richness often. 3. Used in enumerations of objects of similar kind, kebek means ‘such as’ (for example): · Rifgatáneè aldynda tãrle zurlyktagy tälinkälärdä tozly käbestä, kyqr, pomidor, tozly balyk kebek syjlar tezelep tora, ... (Mirsäj Ämir, Saf kåèel.) Before Rifghät, on plates of various sizes, are placed refreshments, such as salted cabbage, cucumbers, tomatoes, and salted fish, ... 4. Kebek with possessive suffixes and bar expresses politeness, often with a shade of humility or respectfulness: · – Tãp telägem kårewep, xälegezne belep hygu ide, Saniq apa, – dide Rifgatá çäm beraz uèajsyzlanybrak ãstäp kujdy: – Kehkenä jomyw kebegem dä bar. (Mirsäj Ämir, Saf kåèel.) “I mainly wanted to say hello and to inquire after your health, Mrs. Saniä,” Rifghät said, and, somewhat uncomfortably, he added, “I would also have a small request.” [488] kilew ‘appearance’, ‘semblance’, ‘look’, ‘state’, ‘way’, ‘manner’, ‘order’. · Used as a postposition, kilew means ‘as’ (in the capacity, function, or sense of): ... Josyf gomereneè axyrynaha aèa tugry kala ... Zãläjxa ålgännän soè da qèadan ãjlänmi, bälki, tol kilew kala birep, balalaryn tärbiqläå belän wãgelálänä. (Mirkasyjm Gosmanov, Kol Gali – xalyk xäterendä sigez gasyr.) ... Joseph remained faithful to her right to the end of his life ... Also after Zöleykha’s death, he did not remarry, but lived on (lit., stays on) as a widower, busying himself with bringing up his children. (For the use of the present tense instead of the past tense see 956, 5.) · Ämma, gadätenhä, bu ïwne dä tagyn kihekterde Hyègyz. Ä åze kãtte, çaman kãtte, çaman qlgyz kilew, bujdak kilew jãri birde. (Zaçir Sadyjkov, Qsalma hähäklär.) But, as was his habit, Chynggyz put this matter (i.e., proposing to a girl) off again. And he waited, and waited, continuing to live alone as a bachelor. · ... xyqlym – xyql kilew kaldy. (Garif Gobäj, Bez åskändä.) ... my dream remained a dream.

229

[489] kyryj (in the vernacular also kyr) ‘edge’, ‘border’. 1. kyryena /qírùína/ ‘to’ (the edge of), ‘beside’, ‘next to’ (indicating movement very close to): · Sämigulla ... pehän belän båränälärne kaplyj kaldy ... Abzar kyryena sãjrälep kilgän båränä ïzlären îgaltu niqte belän jort tiräsen dä sebergäläp aldy. (Mäsgut Wärifullin, Ellar åtkäh.) Sämighulla ... covered the logs with hay ... To cover up the tracks of the logs (left) by dragging them right up to the (cow) barn, he also swept here and there around the house. · Barysynnan da aldan kilgän Faqgãl belän Mièleæamal kihäge urynnaryna urnawtylar ... Bolar kyryena Fägyjlä, Näsimä, tagyn bernihä xatyn kilep utyrdy. (Näzifä Kärimova, Karurmannan hykkan îlhylar.) Fayagöl and Minglejamal, who arrived before everybody else, took the seats they had the day before ... Fäghilä, Näsimä, and several other women came and sat down next to them. 2. kyryenda /qírùínda/ ‘beside’, ‘next to’ (position very close to): · Zäjnäp, garmonhy kyryenda utyrgan eget qnyna baryp, närsäder äjtte. (Mäsgut Wärifullin, Ellar åtkäh.) Zeynäp walked over to the youth sitting right next to the accordion player and said something to him. · Min belä bawlagannan birle, bezneè ãebezgä genä orynyp, îan käåsäle womyrt agahy åsä ... Ä zamanynda wul womyrt agahy kyryenda kalaj tåbäle, äjbät karalty-kuraly baj gyna jort ta bulgan. (Näzifä Kärimova, Karurmannan hykkan îlhylar.) As long as I can remember (lit., Since the time I began to think), a bird-cherry tree with a thick trunk has been growing (lit., is growing) quite close to our house ... And at one time, next to that bird-cherry tree, there were also a rather stately home with a metal roof, as well as (various) nice service buildings (work quarters). 3. kyryennan /qírùínnan/, kyrynnan (vernacular) ‘beside’ (movement very close past): · Jort kyryennan gyna akkan ... hiwmäneè hyltyragany taè atkanda iwetelä torgan ... tavywlarga kuwyla ide. (Mäsgut Wärifullin, Ellar åtkäh.) The murmur of the ... spring, which flowed right by the house, mingled with the ... sounds heard at dawn. · Nailäneè tagyn ber æitdi wige bar ide ... xäzer ... anysyn da ahyp saldy. «Irtän, xuæalar joklagan bålmä kyrynnan åtep baram, iwek qrym ahyk, ïhtä sãjläwälär ...» (Aqz Gyjläæev, Balta kem kulynda.) Nailä had still another serious doubt (suspicion) ... now ... she came out with that too: “In the morning when I was passing by the room in which the hosts sleep, the door was half-open and inside they were talking ...” (N. tells this to her husband. Both are guests in the home of her husband’s rich brother, where they experience some very strange things.)

[490] kãj ‘shape’, ‘form’, ‘appearance’; ‘way’, ‘manner’, ‘order’. Used postpositionally, kãe, kãenhä, kãenä express a) ‘as’ (in the capacity, function, role, or sense of): · Soègy vakytlarda da Mädinäneè kiqågä hykmyjha tol kãe qwäven avyl kewelärennän iwetep belgäh, anyè Mädinä turyndagy ïlekke ue /ují/ tagyn da nygyj tãwte. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) And after he learned from the village folks that Mädinä, not having remarried, was living in recent years as a widow, his earlier opinion of Mädinä became even more definite (stronger). · [Täbänäkev] ällä kajhan inde, malaj kãenhä åk ... Qlantaudan hygyp kitkän bulgan. (Mirsäj Ämir, Saf kåèel.) [Täbänäkev] (so they say) had already left Yalantaw a long time ago, when he was still a boy ...

230

b) manner, way: · – Niwläp monda tãwep kaldyè? – dide xatyny, åpkälägän syman ... – Åz kãemä æäqålep kenä kajtasym kilgän ide, – dip aklandy Æiçangir. (Nurislam Xäsänov, Ak balyk.) “Why did you get out (of the car) here?” his wife asked as though (a bit) angry ... “I had just wanted to walk home by myself, on foot,” Jihangir said, apologizing. (J. is ill and walks with a cane. The car could have brought him right to his house. His wife, seeing her husband from the window, had hurried to meet him).

[491] nam (P.) ‘name’. namyna a) ‘to’ (in toasts): · Tostlar bawlandy – kunaklar isänlegenä, aldagy uèywlar ... namyna. (Äxsän Baqnov, Taw kitap.) The toasts began – to the guests’ health, to future successes, ... b) ‘for the sake of’: · Æièå namyna ‘for the sake of victory’. [492] nigez ‘basis’, ‘foundation’. nigezendä ‘on the basis of’, ‘based on’: · Ul karar nigezendä gubernada æyelywlar uzdyru rãxsät itelmäqhäk, ... (Atilla Rasix, Qmawev.) On the basis of that decree, holding meetings will not be permitted in the province, ... · Bilgele inde, däreslär barysy da mägarif bålegennän birelgän tãp programma nigezendä alyp baryla. (Ibraçim Salaxov, Tomannarga tãrengän qwálek turynda.) Of course, all classes (lit., lessons) are conducted on the basis of the original program issued by the Department of Education. · Wular nigezendä mäktäpneè ber bålmäsendä qzuhy muzeen oewtyryrga niqtlilär. (Mäktäpkä – qzuhy iseme, K.U. 10, 1991.) On the basis of those (i.e., books, documents, pictures, etc. mentioned before), it is intended to organize, in one room of the school, a museum dedicated to the writer (i.e., to Afzal Shamov). [493] näzed (P.) ‘nearness’, ‘closeness’. näzedendä (obs.) ‘near’, ‘close’, ‘beside’, ‘at’: · Aèladyèmy, i gåzäl! Bäs æanym ul q /jð/ æanym al, It bäni näzdäèdä ålmäklä sägadät naile. (Gabdulla Tukaj, Mäxå idärmisän? 1906.) In contemporary Tatar: Aèladyèmy, i gåzäl! Q /Jð/ æanym bul, q /jð/ æanymny al, – Mine qnyèda ålå belän bäxetle it. (Îk itärseème?) Did you understand, O beautiful one! Either be my sweetheart – or take my soul. Make me happy with death at your side. Note: Æan ‘soul’ – also used as a term of endearment.

[494] nätiæä ‘result’. nätiæäsendä ‘as a result of’, ‘resulting from’, ‘in consequence of’, ‘owing to’, ‘due to’, ‘because of’, ‘through’: · Bu horda tellärneè äle qzma formalary bulmagan. Wuèa kårä tãrle tarixi säbäplär nätiæäsendä bu tellär tãrle åzgärewlärgä bik tiz birelgännär. (M.Z. Zäkiev, Tatar xalky teleneè barlykka kilåe.) In this period, languages did not yet have a written form. Therefore, as a result of various historical causes, these languages very quickly yielded to various changes.

231

El kory kilsä dä, sugaru nätiæäsendä uèyw äjbät kãtelä. (Socialistik Tatarstan.) Although the year is coming on dry, the harvest is expected to be good, owing to (due to) irrigation. · Wular nätiæäsendä bezne bãten avyl bik tiz belep aldy. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) In consequence of those (works), the whole village very quickly got to know us. ·

[495] rävew ‘shape’, ‘form’, ‘appearance’. 1. rävewendä ‘like’ (similar to; in comparisons); ‘as’ (in the capacity of), by way of: · Îlybyz tynyh bulmady, kãjmäbez kuätle dulkynnar arasyna tawlangan kehek ber jomyhka rävewendä äjlängän haklar kåp buldy. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Diègezdä.) Our voyage (lit., way) was not calm. There were many moments when our ship gyrated like a small chip thrown into the midst of powerful waves. · ... su astynda totaw märæän urmany bawlandy. Märæänneè kåbese urman abagasy rävewendä åsä. (Mirgaziqn Înys, Bezdän qweren zäègär dãnáq.) ... under water a continuous coral forest began. Most corals were (lit., are) growing like forest fern. · ... [kãjmä] berazdan ber batyp, ber kalkyp ujnagan karmak kalkavyhy rävewendä genä kårenä bawlady. (Wärif Kamal, Akharlaklar.) ... soon, [the boat] began to look only like the bobbing (lit., playing) float of a fishing rod, now going down, now rising. · · ... kièäw rävewendä, ber-ike såz äjtäsem kilä sezgä. (Riza Iwmorat, Wajtan taqgy.) “... I wish to say to you a few words by way of advice.” 2. rävewtä ‘like’ (similar to), ‘as’ (in the capacity of), ‘by way of’, ‘in’ (the form of): · ... xezmät xalyklarynyè tormyw, socialá-tarixi täæribälären mäkalálärneè åzenhälekle hagyldyrularyn da (qki årnäk rävewtä kalypka salularyn) bu kitapta æitärlek tabahakbyz. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) In this book, we shall also find in abundance that proverbs reflect characteristically (or put into a mould by way of example) the social-historical (and) life experience of the working people. (socialá – iætimagyj). · ... bawlangyh rävewtä bu turyda kajber fikerläremne äjtep åtmäkhe bulam. (ibid.) ... as a beginning, I wish to mention some thoughts of mine about this. (For åtmäkhe bulu see 1223 a, 1224 b, 1225, 1228, 1230.) · Telägän kewe soravyn qzma rävewtä dä birä ala ... (Gabdraxman Minskij, Qznyè berenhe kãne.) Any person who wants to can submit his question in writing as well ... 3. rävewle, rävewhä ‘like’ (similar to): · ... Iláqs ïhkä uzdy çäm iwekne sak kyna qpty. Bulmä karaègy bulganlyktan bawta Rägyjdä kåzgä kårenmihä, anyè karavatta qtyp torganyn hamalarga gyna mãmkin ide. Wulaj da berazdan bålmä qryklary awa tãwkän zägyjfá qktylyk kåzgä halyna bawlap, annary wäålä rävewle genä gäådä barlykka kilde. (Äxsän Baqnov, Æäj belän æäj arasy.) ... Ilyas entered and cautiously closed the door. As the room was dark, he could not see Räghidä at first. He could only guess that she was lying in bed. However, after a little while, the scant light falling through the cracks of the room began to strike the eye, and then (her) body emerged as a silhouette. · Mäkalálärne æyî ber ïw, ämma alarny nindi tärtiptä birergä? ... Ïwneè bu rävewle toruy æyelgan mäkalálärneè dä matbugatka hykmyj qtuyna tãp säbäplärneè berse bulyp tora diqrgä mãmkin. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) Collecting proverbs is one thing, but in what order do you present (lit.,

232

give) them? ... That (lit., That the matter stands like this) is, one can say, one of the principal reasons why collected proverbs are also not being published. · [Bizgäk] berazdan Kazandagy rävewhä bãten tamyrlarny dereldätä bawlady. (Gabdulla Tukaj, T.T.A.S.) [The fever], like that (a short time ago) in Kazan, soon began to make all my (lit., the) veins tremble. [496] saen /sajín/ (san ‘number’, ‘figure’). a) ‘every’, ‘each’ (indicating recurrence): · Ïwtän soè alar çär kãn saen ikäåläp velosipedta kånegålär qsyjlar. (Mägâsåm Gäräev, Æièelmäs kapitan.) Every day after work, they both train together on bicycles. · Bäjräm saen q /jð/ åze kunak hakyra, q /jð/ ... duslaryna bara. (Räfkatá Kärami, Sagywly koqw.) Each holiday, either he himself invites guests, or he goes to ... his friends. · Àurnal aj saen tatar telendä hyga. The journal appears monthly in the Tatar language. · Æirgändä qwi torgan tatarlarnyè åz aralarynda da uram qki tykryk saen diqrlek ber wivä. (Mirsäj Ämir, Bez bäläkäj haklarda.) Also among the Tatars themselves who live in Jirgän a different dialect is spoken in almost every street or lane. · Ïlekkelärne sagynyp utyryrmyn. Æyelyw saen sãjli idem bit, ... (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Idel xikäqte.) I shall be sitting, longing for what was in former times. After all, I was speaking at every meeting, ... · Nänäå dä xat saen diqrlek hakyryp qza. (Särvär Ädçämova, Näfisä apa.) Nänäw too invites her almost with every letter. b) ‘each’, ‘per’, ‘to’ (indicating equality, uniformity on the basis of a unit): · ... bålmä saen ãhär-dårtär kewe utyra, ... (Fatix Xãsni, Altyn ïzläåhelär.) ... in each room there are sitting three to four people, ... · Kapka tãbe saen diqrlek, ikewär-ãhäre bergä æyelgan kewelär ... bezne kåzätälär. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) Almost at every gate people ... gathered together in groups of two or three (each), are watching us. · ... äjlänä-tiräbezdä alty-æideläp kãjmä. Kãjmä saen ãh-dårt kewe. (Mirsäj Ämir, Balykhy qlgannary.) ... there are about six or seven boats around us. In each boat there are three or four men. · Awxanä zaly gaæäp zur, matur. Ap-ak awâqulyk æäelgän ãställär ... kewe saen kawygy, hänehkese, pyhagy kuelgan. (Galimæan Ibraçimov turynda istäleklär, Ismägyjlá Rämiev.) The restaurant room is amazingly large (and) beautiful. The tables are covered with snow-white table cloths (lit., There are tables covered ...) ... For each person a spoon, a fork, (and) a knife have been laid out. Note: The expression anyè saen means: ‘all the’ (with the comparative of adjectives), ‘in spite of’; ‘still’, ‘constantly’: · Tavywy gel ber kãe, bitaraf, xissez. Ä xattagy såzlärneè täïsire anyè saen

kãhleräk ... ide. (Äxät Gaffar, Biwek.) His voice was (lit., is) completely even, neutral, unemotional. But the effect of the words in the letter was all that much stronger ... · Zäjtånä ... urynynnan toryp, bålmägä hykty, æäelmäle qtakka uryn äzerlärgä kerewte. Ä kuxnqda Larisa anyè saen æanlanyp sãjli ide. (Mädinä Malikova, Ak davylda tal bãrese.) Zeytünä ... got up, went into the room and began to prepare a place on the folding bed. But in the kitchen Larisa was talking all the livelier.

233

Nindi kewe min? Nigä kiräk mièa ul Mädinä? Läkin Mädinä anyè saen kåz aldynnan kitmi ... ide. (Atilla Rasix, Ike bujdak.) What kind of a man am I? What do I need that Mädinä for? But Mädinä still did not disappear from his mind’s eye ... · «Aj-çaj baj qwi xäzerge balalar» – dip soklanyp kujdy ul. Tik soklanunyè hige bulmady: malajlar anyè saen akha sanadylar: jãz, biw jãz, meè. (Kamil Kärimov, Aldavyh kãz.) “Oh, do today’s children live affluently,” she said to herself in wonder. But the wonder did not end there. The boys still kept on counting out money – one hundred, five hundred, a thousand. ·

[497] saq /sajð/ (P. saya) ‘shade’, ‘shadow’; ‘protection’. saqsendä /sajðsendð/ (obs.), corresponds to arkasynda, säbäple: · Wärif çaman såz bawlamyj, bågen mäwäkatá belän åzeneè uèganlygy saqsendä genä akha tapkanlygyn belderer ber surättä tora ide. (Mäæit Gafuri, Qrlylar, 1907.) Shärif was standing (there), still without speaking, and in a manner which let it be known that today he had earned money only with difficulty and through his dexterity. · Min xäzer inde Dumaga sajlandym, ... Min bu däräæägä allanyè mièa qrdäme saqsendä genä irewtem. (Galiäsgar /Ôðliðsôðr/ Kamal, Deputatlar ozatu, 1907.) Now I have already been elected to the Duma1) ... I have reached this rank only through God’s help to me. · ... Gabbas qwá piwkadämnärdän ulsa (bulsa) da, zäkaväte saqsendä (sälätlelege arkasynda) kart xälfälärdän dä gyjláme artyk ide. (Zakir Çadi, Bäxetle kyz, 1904.) ... although Ghabbas was a young pishqädäm2), through (due to) his giftedness his knowledge was superior to that of the old teachers. [498] surät ‘picture’, ‘appearance’, ‘shape’, ‘form’. surätendä ‘as’ (similar to): · Sin tärbiqhe çäm ana surätendä itä bawlagan bu qèa gomereènän tagy åzenä bawka ber kyzyk tabarsyè. (Gabdulla Tukaj, Ikenhe mäktåp, Fatyjma Gajwägä.) You will find again some new (special, particular) interest in your new life which you have begun as an educator and a mother. (mäktåp – xat). · Æen æegetläre surätendä kyryk kyz îlbasarlyk kyla ikän, digän xäbärlär kåptän jãri. (Batulla, Sãembikä kyjssasy.) Reports have been circulating for a long time claiming that forty girls, appearing (i.e., clad and behaving) as men possessed by evil spirits, are waylaying travelers. · Täbänäk bujly bulsa da, utyrgan hagynda ul nihekter kãhle ber kewe surätendä ide. (Rãstäm Kutuj, Ber dä ber kãzne.) Although he was rather short, when he was sitting, he somehow looked (lit., was) like a strong man. [499] syjfat ‘quality’, ‘character’, ‘capacity’. a) syjfatynda, syjfaty belän ‘as’ (in the capacity, quality of): · ... min any çaman kãlep, waqryp, gel kyzyk såzlär genä sãjläp utyruhy ber kewe syjfatynda kårergä äzerlängän idem. (Mirsäj Ämir, Kazan.) ... I had been prepared to see him as a man who always laughs, jokes, always says only interesting things. 1) 2)

Parliament in Czarist Russia. A person who has finished the complete course of the old medrese.

234

Sälim bu ahy såzlären ïhke tantana belän, æièåhe syjfatynda äjtte. (Räfkatá Kärami, Sagywly koqw.) Sälim said these (his) bitter words with an inner triumph, as the victor. · · ... täræemähegez syjfatynda min sezne ozatyp jãriqhäkmen, – dide ... (Islam Belqev, Soldat tãjmäse.) “... I shall accompany you as your interpreter; he said ...” · Iláqs, ike kãtåheneè berse syjfatynda, wul avyr ïwne çih æiksenmihä åz ãstenä aldy. (Äxsän Baqnov, Æäj belän æäj arasy.) ... as one of two shepherds, Ilyas took that heavy work upon himself without any reluctance. b) ‘like’ (similar to): · Iláqs birge qrnyè aktyk higenähä kilde dä, wunda åze kagarga æyengan kazyklarnyè berse syjfatynda katty da kaldy. (ibid.) Ilyas advanced to the very edge of his side of the (river) bank and suddenly stood there as if rooted to the spot like one of the stakes he was about to drive into the ground. ·

[500] syman, symak ‘like’ (somewhat similar to), ‘as’ (in the capacity of). Syman and symak are synonymous. They are used to make comparisons indicating qualified similarity, resemblance. For example: uk syman ‘arrow-shaped’, kewe syman ‘resembling a man’, kewe syman majmyl ‘anthropoid ape’. Compare the examples below: · Bolyt dysäè bolyt tågel, kåktä ällä nitkän tãten syman dymly bãrkålek tora çäm anyè arkyly ber genä joldyz da kårenmi ide. (Rafaïlá Mostafin, «Oæmax»ka säqxät.) There was not a cloud. In the air (lit., sky) there was a damp, oppressive heat like some sort of smoke, and through it not one star was visible. (For disäè as intensifier see 1017 d.) · Bu ike narat bezgä hynnan da kartaep bãkräjgän kart belän karhyk syman kårenä bawlyjlar. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) These two pines begin to look to us really like (somewhat similar to) an old man and an old woman who, growing old, have become stooped. · Bärxät syman qwel åsentelär belän kaplangan, ãstenä su æibärelgän dãge basulary koqwta qltyryj. (Rafaïlá Mostafin, «Oæmax»ka säqxät.) The irrigated rice fields covered with velvety green shoots, glisten in the sun. · Tawlary änä bågen dä, æimerelgän xyql xärabäläre syman, æirdä aunap qta. (Fail Wäfigullin, Ãj salunyè nie bar.) Even today its stones lie on the ground like the ruins of a shattered dream. · Niçaqtá, berkãnne wuwy xakta xikäq symak ber närsä qzdym. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) At last, one day I wrote something like a story about this. · Çadi abyj bit ul mièa ätiem symak kewe! (Koqw Timbikova, Agym urtasynda.) Uncle Hadi is, after all, like a father to me (lit., a person like, similar to, a father)! · ... ul Ruwadka avyru kewe, ä ikenhe tãrle äjtsäè, bala symak itep karyj. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Idel xikäqte.) ... she regards Rushad as a sick man, in other words, as a child. Note: Syman and symak may serve as word forming elements. For example: kåbäläk ‘butterfly’ – kåbäläksymannar ‘papilionaseous plants’; oly ‘older’, ‘elderly’, ‘adult’, ‘venerable’ – olysymaklanu ‘to put on airs’, ‘to give oneself airs’.

235

[501] syn ‘figure’, ‘picture’, ‘image’, ‘sculpture’, ‘portrayal’. synly ‘like’, ‘as’, ‘similar to’: · Ul åzen çavaly tota; kyzyl ãjgä ew-ew /jíø-jíø/ kerep kitä dä, annan moèa bik mãçim ïw , vazyjfa tapwyrylgan adäm synly hygyp çäm xalykka ïre vä îgarydan karap: ... Taralmagyz, kitmägez! – dip kyhkyra. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Qwá jãräklär.) He behaves arrogantly. He frequently goes into the red house and, emerging from it like a man charged with a very important task and great responsibility, haughtily looking down upon the people, he cries: ... “Don’t go away, don’t leave!” · Alq avylynda da bu Kazantau synly tau bar. (Ibraçim Salaxov, Imännär tamyr æäjgändä.) In the village of Alya there is also a mountain like this Qazantaw here. · Menä xäzer tiwek kaphyk synly, sãjlägändä beräå båldersä, uem tãwä dä kala. (ibid.) Now it’s like a bag with holes. If somebody interrupts me while I’m speaking, I immediately lose my thoughts (train of thought) (lit., my thoughts get lost immediately). (For tãwä dä kala see 1377.) · – ... Mahy Gyjlaæ kyzyn äjtäm, uram awa gyna tora. Menä digän, kura æiläk synly. (ibid.) “ ... I mean Machy Ghilaj’s daughter who lives just across the street. She is really something – like a raspberry.” [502] säbäp ‘cause’, ‘reason’, ‘ground’. säbäple ‘because of’, ‘due to’, ‘on account of’, ‘since’: · Aj hamasy vakyt åtkäh, båtän ïwkä kåherelåe säbäple ul avtobus belän kãn saen Hallyga jãri torgan buldy. (Äxsän Baqnov, Ut çäm su.) After about a month had passed, (and) because of (due to) her having been transferred to another job, she started going (i.e., she assumed the habit of going) to Chelny by autobus every day. · Ukytuhylarnyè xezmät xaklary artu säbäple, Soltanga bågen uzgan ajlary ãhen ãstämä tålädelär. (Gadel /Ôðdel/ Kutuj, Soltannyè ber kãne.) Due to the increase in teachers’ salaries, they paid Soltan today additionally for past months. · Zalda xalyk artyk kåp bulsa da, urynynyè bik zurlygy säbäple, tygyzlyk toelmyj ide. (Fatix Ämirxan, Fätxulla xäzrät.) Although there were a great many people in the hall, no overcrowding was felt, due to the great magnitude of the place. [503] taraf ‘side’, ‘direction’. 1. tarafyna ‘to’, ‘towards’ (indicating direction): · Ul urynynnan sikerep tordy, ... Kapka qgyna ille adym, binaga taba kire ille adym ... Tagyn kapka tarafyna, qnä kiregä ... (Barlas Kamalov, Qlykmaslar.) He jumped up from his seat, ... To the gate (it is) fifty paces, back to the building fifty paces ... Again to the gate, again back ... · ... kewelär anyè tarafyna borylyp karamyjha åtmilär. (Mädinä Malikova, Ak davylda tal bãrese.) ... people do not pass without turning round and looking at her. · [Musin-Azman] ... uram hatyndagy jort tarafyna ymlap: – Äjdä, wunda baryp kilik äle, – dide. (Zãfär Fätxetdinov, Ålem ïlmäge.) ... motioning towards the house on the street corner, [Musin-Azman] said: “Come on, let’s go there now.” 2. tarafynda ‘about’ (concerning), (used rarely in this function): · Kem tarafynda såz bara? (Tatarha-rusha såzlek.) About whom is the conversation? 236

3. tarafynnan a) ‘from’, ‘for one’s part’, ‘in’ (indicating starting point, source): · Talipov. ... min åz tarafynnan mãmkin bulgan bãten haralarny ïwlädem, iptäwlär. (Wärif Kamal, Gabbas Galin.) Talipov. ... for my part, I have taken (lit., done) all actions which were possible, comrades. · Kyznyè ... moèa kadär çihkem tarafynnan bu kadär qgymly såzlärne iwetkäne îk ide. (Wamil Bikhurin, Tirän katlam.) Up to now, the girl ... had not heard such endearing words from anybody. · Æänåp tarafynnan bolytlar tãn qgyna taba agylalar. (Sadri Æäläl, Dim buenda.) Clouds are drifting from the south towards the north. (æänåp – kãnáqk ‘south’). b) ‘by’ (indicating an animate agent with verbs in the passive voice; see also 861, 862): · Æyentykka kergän kåphelek mäkalälär, istäleklär, belewmälär tãrle urynnarda teatr tãzådä turydan-tury åzläre katnawkan, jä bulmasa wul vakyjgalarnyè æanly waçite1) bulgan kewelär tarafynnan qzylgan çäm bolarnyè çämmäsen qxwy belåhelär tarafynnan bastyryp hygarylgan. (Tatar sovet teatry.) The majority of the articles, recollections, communications included in the collection have been written by persons who themselves have directly participated in establishing theatres in various places, or who have at least been living witnesses of those events, and they have been published by persons who knew all of these well. · Paxom, bu ikmäk kisägeneè dusty tarafynnan soègy kabat båläk tãsle itep birelgänlegen sizä. Bu – aerylywu minutlary ide. (Näbi Däåli, Koqwka jãz belän.) Pakhom realized (lit., realizes, feels) that this piece of bread was (lit., is) being given to him by his friend as a final gift. These were the moments of their final parting. · Nogman åz balasy tarafynnan äjtelgän bu såzne äz genä dä avyrga almady, ... (Mirsäj Ämir, Karamaly egete.) Noghman did not resent these words spoken by his own son even a bit, ... [504] tirä ‘surroundings’, ‘environment’, ‘environs’. 1. tiräsenä ‘around’ (movement to and around): · Kergäh, häj tabyny äzerlängän ãstäl tiräsenä utyrywtyk. (Ämirxan Eniki, Soègy kitap.) After entering, we sat down (together) around the table, which was set for tea. · Bawkalar da minem tirägä tuplandylar. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) The others too gathered around me. · Mostafa, Kaîm çäm bawkalar Çidiqt /Hidiðt/ tiräsenä æyjnaldylar. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) Mostafa, Qayum and the others gathered around Hidiät. 2. tiräsendä a) ‘around’ (movement about the central point of): · Æir Koqw tiräsendä ... äjlänä, Aj isä Æir tiräsendä äjlänep jãri. (Gãlsem Mãxämmädova, Qwálek kãnnäre.) The Earth revolves around the Sun ... as for the Moon, it revolves around the Earth. · Uram utlary tiräsendä kar bãrtekläre ak kåbäläklär kebek bãterelälär. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) Snowflakes are whirling around the street lights like white butterflies. b) ‘around’ (movement, position in the vicinity of, about, near, at): · Xafiz. Sineè tiräèdä bawka egetlär butaluyn qratmyjm. (Riza Iwmorat, Gãlzadä.) Khafiz. I do not like other (young) men hanging about you. 1)

Also used with back vowel suffixes: waçity.

237

Näsimä belän Xämidä kazannar tiräsendä mavygalar. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) Näsimä and Khämidä are busy around the kettles. · Bu sukmaklar tiräsendä kow oqlary bar ide. (Socialistik Tatarstan.) Around these paths there were (i.e., there used to be) bird’s nests. · Gãlnur. Min dä wul tirädä toram, Æägâfär kartta. (Fätxi Burnaw, Kamali kart.) Gölnur. I too live around there, with old (man) Jäghfär. · I, matur jort ul! Qwelgä buqlgan kalaj tåbäle. Tiräsendä alma, hiq bakhasy. Ä bakha tiräsendä biek kojmalar. (Näbi Däåli, Qzmywka îl.) Oh, how beautiful that house is! It has a (sheet) iron roof painted green. Around it is a garden with apple and cherry trees. And around the garden are high fences. c) ‘around’ (approximately – with time of day, date, age, weight, price, etc.): · Bugen sägatá unberlär tiräsendä ofykta tãtenlep baruhy moræalar safy kårende. (Rafaïlá Mostafin, «Oæmax»ka säqxät.) Today, around eleven o’clock, a row of smokestacks, which were emitting smoke, appeared at the horizon. · Tãxfättän bawka monda tagyn ãh tatar bar ide. Alarnyè ikävese egerme biw qwálär tiräsendä, berse waktyj ãlkän ... kewe ide. (Wärif Kamal, Taè atkanda.) Besides Tökhfät, there were still three Tatars here. Two of them were around twentyfive years old, one was an elderly man ... · Wäfi Wamilneè uly Zaçid 1870-71 ellar tiräsendä Kalugada dãnáqga kilgän. (Ibraçim Nurullin, Fatix Ämirxan.) Shäfi Shamil’s son Zahid was born in Kaluga around the years of 1870-71. · Kapal – bik kehkenä ber wäçär. Anda qwäåhe xalyknyè da sany unber-unike meè tiräsendä genä. (Zarif Bäwiri, Zamandawlarym belän ohrawular.) Qapal is a very small town. Also the number of people living in it is only around eleven or twelve thousand. d) ‘about’ (concerning): · ... Moxtar ul mäsáälä tiräsendä bajtak ujlady. (Wärif Kamal, Akharlaklar.) ... Mokhtar thought much about that matter. · Hynlap ta, såz Garif tiräsendä bargan hagynda, Gazizäneè /Ôðzizðneì/ kåz aldyna Garifnyè kyqfäte /qiafðte/ kilep baskan. (ibid.) Indeed, while the conversation went on about Gharif, Gharif’s figure appeared before Ghäzizä’s (inner) eye. 3. tiräsennän a) ‘around’ (movement around and along a surface): · Alar hyrwy tiräsennän bergäläp äjländelär dä ... tar îldan klubka kerep kittelär. They walked together around the New Year’s tree (lit., fir-tree) and entered the club by the narrow path ... · Pehän bazary tiräsennän uzywlyj mondagy åzgärewlärgä xäjran kaldym. (Gomär Bäwirov, I qzmyw, qzmyw.) ... when passing Haymarket, I was amazed at the changes (which had taken place) here. · Soraularym kåp ide. Tik irkenläp sãjläwep bulmyj. ... arkyly hyguhy kãjmälärne urap uzarga kiräk. Sãjläwågä mavygyp kitep, korab tiräsennän åtep torgan kãjmälärne batyryp tawlavyè bar. (Mirgaziqn Înys, Îlda ujlanular.) I had many questions. But it was (lit., is) impossible to talk freely (i.e., without interference). We had (lit., have) to ... navigate around the boats which were (lit., are) going across (i.e., across the Bosporus). If we (i.e., the speaker and the ship’s pilot) were to become engrossed in conversation, we might sink the boats which pass by the ship. ·

238

b) ‘from around’: · Kan basymy ike jãz utyz-ike jãz kyryk tiräsennän tãwmi, ... (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) His blood pressure does not fall from around two hundred thirty, two hundred forty, ... [505] tiräli (verbal adverb of tiräläå ‘to fence in’, ‘to border, edge with; tiräläp jãrå (ohu) ‘to walk (fly) around something’). ‘around’ (both position and movement): · Ul, ..., ãstäl tiräli utyrgan Sabirov, çäm Firsovlarga sãzep karap aldy, ... (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) ..., he glanced intently at Sabirov and Firsov, who were sitting around the table, ... · Äbåzär kåzlegen kide dä, ãstäl tiräli jãrep, hähäklärneè çärbersen aerymaerym karyj bawlady. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) Äbüzär put on his glasses and, walking around the table, began to look at each of the flowers separately. [506] tiè ‘equal’ (in height, depth, width, length, etc.). tièenten, tièennän ‘up to’ (equal to ... in height, depth, etc.): · Alarga kãlke, ä min tubyk tièenten suda. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) To them it is funny, but I am up to the ankles in water. · Aleksandr. ... ielde çäm ... idännän zur jomry taw aldy. Xasil bulgan tiwekkä tersäk tièenten kulyn tykty da ... metall taqk tartyp hygardy, ... (Zãfär Fätxetdinov, Ahylgan serlär.) Alexander. ... bent down and ... lifted a large, round stone from the floor. He put his arm up to the elbow into the hole which had appeared, and pulled out a metal rod, ... · Bil tièenten bulyp åskän kue kyhytkanlyklar arasynnan seræant: – Moskvyh! Avtomawina!! – dip kyhkyryp æibärde. (Atilla Rasix, Urlangan xäzinä.) From dense thickets of waist-high stinging nettles (lit., growing waist-high) the sergeant cried out: “A Moskvich! A car!!” · Avylga kergänhe Abu babaga tez tièennän kar eryp baryrga tury kilde. (Bulat Sãläjman, Abu baba.) Until he entered the village, Abu Baba had to struggle on, breaking a way through the knee-deep snow. [507] tury ‘straight’, ‘direct’. 1. turysyna, turyna ‘about’, ‘around’, ‘near’, ‘opposite’ (indicating movement to the vicinity of a place or thing): · Tagy beraz sãjläwep jãrgäh, Mädinälär turyna kilep æittelär. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) After they had walked and talked still a little more, they arrived near Mädinä’s place. · Bez Xäbirä äbilär tykrygy turysyna æitkäh tä tykrykta nindider karahkylar kårdek çäm wunda tawlandyk. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) Upon arriving near Grandma Khäbirä’s lane, we saw in the lane some dark silhouettes, and rushed there. · Kårgäzmä park turysyna urnawkan. (Tatarha-rusha såzlek.) The exhibition is located opposite the park. 2. turynda, turyda, turysynda a) ‘about’ (concerning): Note: The form turyda is used with demonstrative pronouns in the nominative (bu, ul, wul, etc.) and with personal pronouns (except that of the 3rd person singular and plural) in the possessive case. However, with the latter turyda may also take the possessive suffixes. For example: sineè turyda, or: sineè turyèda ‘about you’.

239

Åz-åzen minnän zurrak, ãstenräk itep totty. Nihänhe elgysyè, dide; kajdan kildeè, kajda ukydyè, dide; ätieè-änieè barmy, ... dide. Wunnan soè Ufa turynda, wäçär tormywy turynda sorawtyra bawlady. (Nurixan Fättax, Mãdir Saæidä.) He comported himself as though he were older than I, as though he were superior. He asked (lit., said) how old I was; he asked (said) where I came from, where I studied; he asked (said) whether I had parents, ... Then he began to inquire about Ufa, about city life. (For indirect discourse see 432, analytical, 1265, c-e.). · Min Gaqzga Imälineè kem buluy turynda sãjli bawladym. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) I began to tell Ghayaz about who Imäli was. · Min bu turyda ujlamyj buldyra almadym. (Mägâsåm Nasyjbullin, Telsez waçitlär.) I could not help thinking about this. · – ... sez, Elena ... åzegez turynda sãjlägez ... (Barlas Kamalov, Qlykmaslar.) .”.. you, Yelena. ... talk about yourself.” · Kihä Mädinädän algan xat turysynda ujlanular ... anyè jokysyn kahyrgannar ide, ... (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) The thoughts about Mädinä’s letter, which he had received yesterday, ... had prevented him from sleeping, ... · Kyzhyknyè bezneè belän ozak sãjläwäse kilmäde, bik zur ïw turysynda sãjlägän kyqfät alyp, Nizaminyè kolagyna närsäder pywyldady. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) The little girl did not wish to talk with us for long. Assuming an air as if speaking about a very important matter, she whispered something into Nizami’s ear. (For the future participle in -asy etc. plus kilå see 1143.) b) turysynda, turyda ‘opposite’, ‘around’, ‘near’ (ind. position): · ... menä, inde kyw kergäh, hatlama suyk tãnnärneè bersendä Nigâmätulla uzyp baruhy ïwelonnan avyl turysynda sikerep tãwep kala. (Ämirxan Eniki, Soègy kitap.) ... there, on one freezing cold night, after winter had already arrived (lit., entered), Nighmätulla jumped (lit., jumps) down from a passing troop train, near the village. · Bu turyda tirän qrlary astyna qwerengän Tyn elga borylmaly tugajly urynnarda ara-tirä kåzgä hagylgalap kitä. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) Around here (lit., Around this (i.e., this spot, place here), the river Tyn, hidden under its steep (lit., deep) banks, now and then catches one’s eye at curvy, grassy spots. 3. turysynnan, turynnan a) ‘by’ (indicating movement past a place or thing): · Ul mähet turysynnan åtkäh tä, atny uram îlynnan Xãsnulla kapkasyna taba bordy. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) Right after passing by the mosque, he turned the horse along the street towards Khösnulla’s gate. · Avylda ber närsä dä qwerä almyjsyè: ... kih saen sineè Borçannar turynnan åtep kitkäneène kårep toralar. (Aqz Gyjläæäv, Æomga kãn, kih belän.) In the village you can’t hide anything: ... they see that every evening you walk past the Borhans’ (house). b) ‘from around’ (indicating movement from around): · Moratbakyjnyè täräzäsennän karaganda, irtänge koqw gel wuwy ãqnke turysynnan kåtärelä ide. (Marselá Galiev, Erak urman avazy.) When looking out from Moratbaqi’s window, (one always sees) the morning sun rising from around this willow tree (i.e., from this same willow tree mentioned just before). · Borylyp karasa – ãlkän qwátäge taza gyna milicioner. – Eget, bu turydan îlny arkyly hygarga qramyj, – dide ul. (Foat Sadriev, Adäm äåliqse.) When he turned around and looked, there was an elderly, strapping policeman. “Young man,” he said, “it is not permitted to cross the road at this spot.” ·

240

Note 1: The case endings used with possessive stems of the 3rd person singular may be joined to tury either directly (turyna, turynda, turynnan) or to its expanded possessive stem turysy (turysyna, turysynda, turysynnan). When joined directly, final -y of tury functions like a possessive suffix. Note 2: turyda, turynda, turysynda, etc. have the archaic forms tugryda, tugrynda, tugrysynda, etc.

[508] tärtip ‘order’, ‘discipline’. tärtibendä ‘as’ (in the capacity of), ‘by way of’: · Sorau-æavap tärtibendä bez hibär egetneè kem buluy çäm nihek itep anyè mondyj avyr xälgä tãwåe tarixyn bik tiz belep aldyk. (Mirsäj Ämir, Balykhy qlgannary.) By way of question and answer, we learned very quickly who the handsome young man was and the history of how he got into such a difficult situation. [509] tãp ‘bottom’, ‘base’. 1. tãbenä ‘under’, ‘at’, ‘to’ (indicating direction): · Urman buena kilep æitkäh, hilägen agah tãbenä kujdy ... (Mãxämmät Mäçdiev, Tornalar tãwkän æirdä.) When she reached the forest, she put her pail under a tree ... · Ul arada kapka tãbenä æièel mawina kilep tuktady. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) At that moment, an automobile pulled up and stopped at the gate. · Iskändär ... äle täräzä tãbenä, äle iwek katyna kilde. (Razil Väliev, Iske sägatá dãres jãri.) ... Iskändär moved now to the window, now to the door. 2. tãbendä ‘under’, ‘at’, ‘beside’, ‘at the base of’, ‘in’ (position): · Îl buenda ber biek, zur agah tãbendä utyrgan karhykka ohragan. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Hakma tawy.) Along the way he met an old woman, who was sitting under a big, tall tree. · Uramda, iwek tãbendä, mawina kãtep tora ide. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Agyla bolyt.) In the street, a car was waiting before (at) the door. · Gäräj belän Näsimä irtägesen änä wul tekä kyqtaw tãbendä ohrawtylar. (Safa Sabirov, Gäräjneè ber æäe.) In the morning Gärey and Näsimä met at (the base of) that (same) steep rock there. · Gãlbibi any baskyh tãbendä kãtep tora ide. (Nurixan Fättax, Bala kåèele dalada.) Gölbibi was awaiting him at the staircase. · Telefon tãbendä ber qrty sägatálär hamasy azaplangah, ul any tapty, xälne aèlatyp birde. (Garif Axunov, Xäzinä.) After wearing himself out at the telephone for about half an hour, he reached (lit., found) him (and) explained the situation. · Hynnan da, bu kãnnärdä Bibisanyè kolak tãbendä tanyw isem qègyrap tordy ... (Saæidä Sãläjmanova, Gãlbadran.) Indeed, in these days a familiar name kept ringing in Bibisa’s ears ... 3. tãbennän ‘from under’, ‘from’, ‘past’ (a place, point): · – Äjdä bezgä, di, häj ïhärseè, di ... Min almagah tãbennän kãhkä kuzgalam. (Ibraçim Gazi, Malajlykta kunakta.) “Come on, to us,” she says. “Have tea,” she says ... I move with difficulty from under the apple tree. · Utyrywyp kyna betågä, kapka tãbennän sälam birgän tavyw iwetelde. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) They had just sat down when from the gate a voice was heard saying hello. · Ul arada koqw ta hygarga æyendy. Kapka tãbennän dãber-dãber bazarhylar uza bawlady. (ibid.) Meanwhile, the sun too was about to rise (was preparing to rise). The market men were beginning to rumble past the gate. 241

[510] tãs ‘color’; ‘air’, ‘appearance’, ‘aspect’, ‘look’. 1. tãsle ‘as’, ‘like’, ‘similar to’ (in making comparisons): · Anyè halara bawlagan ozyn hähe qkasyn kaplap tora, bãten biten hähe tãsle åk sory sakal-myek baskan, ... (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) His long hair, which has begun to turn grey, covers his collar. A beard and moustache, which are just as grey as his hair, cover his whole face, ... · Tälgatá /Tðlôðt/ isemle ide ul, Käwwaf æiznineè åze tãsle tynyh kyna, sabyr gyna ber malaj ide. (Ämirxan Eniki, Soègy kitap.) His name was Tälghät. He was a rather quiet, rather patient boy, like brother-in-law Käshshaf himself. · Irtyw bezneè Idelgä dä, Hulmanga da oxwamagan ide. Anyè suy Idelneke tãsle karalæym da, Hulmannyky tãsle kyzgylt-komly da tågel ide. (Nurixan Fättax, Bala kåèele dalada.) The Irtysh resembled neither our Volga nor our Kama. Its water was not darkish like that of the Volga, nor was it reddish-sandy like that of the Kama. · · ... sineè tãsle seèelem bulsa, min nindi bäxetle bulyr idem ... (Kärim Tinhurin, Utyz ãh kãn.) “... if I had a (younger) sister like you, how happy I would be ...” · Bu tãsle matur hähäklärne kårgänem îk ide. I had not seen such beautiful flowers. Note: Before tãsle, the demonstrative pronouns may stand in the nominative.

2. tãsendä ‘as’ (in the capacity of); ‘by way of’: · Kinaqle /kinajðle/ mäkalálär hynbarlyktan alyngan berär wigâri misal tãsendä hitlätep äjtelälär. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) Allegorical proverbs are used (lit., said) metaphorically as some poetic example taken from reality. · Mäkalálärneè kåphelegen kinaq, iwarä, hitlätem tãsendä karap bula. (ibid.) The majority of proverbs can be regarded as allegory, allusion, metaphor. · ... qwá balykhylarga kièäw tãsendä kajber täæribäläremne urtaklawasym kilä. (Mirsäj Ämir, Balykhy qlgannary.) ... I wish to share some of my experiences by way of advice to young fishermen. [511] ugrynda (arch.) ‘by way of’, ‘for’: · Ukymak – xäzerge kãnnärne kiläse kãnnär ãhen, bu kãnge mäsáälälärne kilähäktäge mäsáälälärne hiwå ugrynda tawlamak dimäkter. (Gabdulla Tukaj, Xissiqte milliq, 1906.) To study means to give up the present days for future days, [to leave] today’s matters (problems) for solving the matters (problems) of the future. (ukymak – uku, tawlamak – tawlau). · Xatynnar irke ugrynda ålärmen min. (Gabdulla Tukaj, Xatynnar xãrriqte, 1909.) I shall die (i.e., I am ready to die) for the freedom of women. [512] urta ‘middle’, ‘center’. 1. urtasyna ‘to, into the middle, center of’, ‘into the midst of’: · Uram urtasyna hygaryp kuelgan kehkenä ãstäl tiräsen bik kåp xalyk syryp algan. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) A great many people are crowding the space around a small table, which has been pulled out into the middle of the street. · Bikbulat, märtäbäle bulyrga tyrywyp kyna, mäæles urtasynarak uzdy ... da väkará belän såz bawlady ... (Æämit Räximov, Batyrwa.) Bikbulat, endeavoring to be authoritative, moved more to the center of the meeting and ... began to speak ceremoniously: ... 2. urtasynda ‘in the middle, center of’, ‘in the midst of’: · Uram urtasynda ber koe /qojí/ bar. (Mirsäj Ämir, Äbelgata kåpere.) In the middle of the street there is a well. 242

Basularda ïw kyza bardy ... Æäj urtasynda bãgelgän billär kãzgä kadär qzyla almady. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) Work in the fields became more hectic ... The backs, which had (begun to) bend in the middle of summer, could not straighten out until autumn. · Kårewå kihäbezdä dä igâtibar urtasynda bulahagymny sizenep, kyensynularym îkka hykty. (Dilärä Zãbäerova, Kuw ãqnke waçit.) Sensing that I will be in the center of attention also at our (school) reunion party, my timidity disappeared. 3. urtasynnan ‘from, along the middle, center of’: · Xäzer inde Amantaj kemgä îlygularyn tãwengän ide. Wuèa kårä, Balæanny kulynnan æitäkläp, tizräk wikle tãrkem urtasynnan hygyp kotylyrga omtyldy. (Täåfikâ Äjdi, Elan ugy.) By now, Amantai had realized whom they had run into. Therefore, leading Baljan by her hand, he endeavored to get out from the midst of the suspicious crowd in a hurry and disappear (escape, get away). · Åzän urtasynnan, näkâ ïlektägehä, kãmew kebek hiwmä aga. (Äbrar Wämin, Sagyndyrgan sukmaklar.) Just as before, a spring like silver is flowing along the middle of the valley. · Ul uram urtasynnan alpan-tilpän kilep, tury Wärifæannarga kajtty. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Ãh arwin æir.) Walking unsteadily along the middle of the street, he returned straight to the Shärifjans. ·

[513] uryn ‘place’. 1. urynyna a) ‘instead of’: · Nail æavap urynyna elmajgah, Fäez qne sorady ... (Äxsän Baqnov, Ut çäm su.) When Nail smiled instead of (giving) an answer, Fäyez asked again ... · Tik ul vakytta zalda mulla îk ide inde. Anyè urynyna zur ak sakally ber kart såz aldy. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) But at that time the mulla was no longer in the hall. In his place, an old man with a large, white beard began to speak. · Tågäräkkä qzylgan egerme kewe urynyna jãz kewe kilgän. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) Instead of the twenty people registered for the circle, a hundred people have come. b) ‘like’ (similar to): · Taæi ber närsäne bik qxwy aèlap aldy: bu jortta Väsiläne at urynyna æikkännär. (Garif Axunov, Xuæalar.) One thing Taji understood very well: In this house they have roped in (lit., they have harnessed) Wäsilä like a horse. · ... illär belän illär, xalyklar belän xalyklar bärelewkän. Kewelär heben urynyna kyrylgan, ... (Nurixan Fättax, Syzgyra torgan uklar.) ... countries have clashed with countries, nations with nations. People have been crushed like flies, ... c) ‘as’ (in the capacity of): · Bu kitap beräådä dä îk. ... monda ukyp qtkan märxåm Zäjnetdin wäkerttän miras urynyna kalgan kitap bu. (Äxmät Fäjzi, Tukaj.) Nobody has this book, ... This is a book which has remained as a legacy from the deceased student Zeynetdin, who ... studied here. · ... ul kagannar tamyrynyè iè kart kewese, bãten yruga ata urynyna kalgan kewe. (Nurixan Fättax, Syzgyra torgan uklar.) ... he is the oldest man of the khakan stock. He is a man who has remained as a father to the whole tribe. 2. urynynda ‘as’ (in lieu of): · ... kart ... egetne kårde. Kårde, läkin kårmämewkä salywty. Egetneè bernindi såz dä kuwmyjha tynyh kyna karap toruyna æavap urynynda kart, aèa karaganda 243

da tynyhrak itep, ber karap aldy da wunda uk kåzlären bawka noktaga kåherde. (Fatix Xãsni, Idel tynyhsyzlana.) ... the old man saw the youth, ... He saw him, but pretended not to see him. As an answer to the youth’s gazing at him silently without saying a single word, the old man, even more silently than he, took one look at him and immediately turned his eyes to another point. (For urynda, urynga with the future participle in -asy, -äse etc. see 1150.) [514] uèaj ‘direction’; ‘favorable’, ‘suitable’. 1. uèaena a) ‘with’ (indicating direction): · ... kory qfraklar, sary kåbäläklärdäj, çavada ujnaklap aldylar da, æil uèaena ohyp, Bädär sebergän qkka tãwä bawladylar. (Mãxämmät Wäjmi, Synau.) ... dry leaves fluttered up in the air like yellow butterflies and, flying with the wind, began to fall where Bädär was sweeping. · Bawka hara kalmagah, min batmas ãhen agym uèaena akryn gyna jãzä birdem. (Safa Sabirov, Firdäves.) As there was no other alternative, I kept swimming slowly with the stream so as not to drown. b) ‘in time to’, ‘while’ (indicating simultaneous actions): · Ul, mãgaen /mõôðjen/ ... kaenga sãqlep, ajga karap æyrlyjdyr. Kãe /kõje/ uèaena akryn gyna bawyn borgalyjdyr. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) He probably is singing, leaning against a birch ... and looking at the moon. He probably is moving his head slowly in time to his song. (Expresses supposition.) 2. uèae, uèaenda, uèaennan ‘while’ (with certain nouns, indicating simultaneous actions carried out by the same agent or by different agents): · Rajon åzägennän ul îl uèae tury kilgän, wyltyrap taralyr xälgä æitep tuzgan mawinaga utyryp kajtty. (Äxiqr Xäkimov, Gomer /Ôõmer/.) He returned from the district center, sitting in a rattling, battered car which had reached the stage of falling apart, and which he happened to encounter while on the road. · Niçaqtá, menä Agyjdel dä, îl uèaenda åzenä kilep syengan bik kåp inewlärne ïhenä ala-ala ... Kamaga kilep æitte. Kuwyldy. Xäzer inde bezneè alda Kama gyna kaldy. (Mirsäj Ämir, Usä tãwkäh.) Accepting on its way a great many streams which came running into it, the Byelaya too ... finally reached the Kama and joined up with it. Now only the Kama remained before us. · Fidaqnyè bawyn kaq kuqrga belmägän haklary bula. Qlgyz kalganda, kihlärentãnnären kåèelgä bigräk avyr ujlar kilä. Wundyj sägatálärneè berse any îl uèaenda hiwmä buena kiterde. (Mädinä Malikova, Fidaq.) There were times when Fidaya became very despondent (lit., did not know where to put her head). Especially in the evenings and at night when she was alone, gloomy thoughts came to her mind. One such time (lit., one of such hours) brought her to the spring while she was on her way (i.e., on her way to another village). · Îl uèaennan «Åzäk»kä kagylyp hygarga ujladylar. (ibid.) While on their way, they intended to (briefly) stop at the “Center”. («Uzäk» – “Center”; name of a collective farm.) 3. uèaenda following a noun denoting time, indicates approximateness. · Kih uèaenda gyna Märáqm «Hiwmä» awxanäsenä baryp kerde. (Mädinä Malikova, Kazan kalasy – taw kala.) Towards (in the) evening Märyäm went to the “Chishmä” (Spring) restaurant. 4. uèae belän a) ‘while’ (same as unae, uèaeda, uèaennan):

244

Ul ... tãenhek ïhendäge äjberne balalarnyè ikesenä bålep birergä ujlagan ide. Läkin wul uj uèae belän tãenhekne tagyn ber tapkyr totyp karagah, ul uennan vaz kihte. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) ... he had thought to divide and give the things in the little parcel to both the children. But, when with that thought (in mind), he took the little parcel once again in his hands and looked at it, he gave up that idea. · Ruzaevka stanciqsendä minem Bajbikov digän tanywlarym bar ide. Îl uèae belän wunda tuktap, berär kãn kunak bulyrga ujladym. (Zarif Bäwiri, Zamandawlarym belän ohrawular.) At the Ruzayevka station I had acquaintances called Baibikov. I thought that, while on the way, I would stop there and stay a day as (their) guest. b) ‘in connection with’, ‘on the occasion of’: · Wularny uku minem kåèelemdä hitkä kitå fikeren tudyrgan ide. Iptäwlärneè soravy uèae belän, minem wul telägem kåz aldyna kilep basty ... (Mäæit Gafuri, Wagyjráneè altyn priiskasynda.) Reading those things had given rise to the thought in me (lit., in my heart) to go to foreign parts. In connection with (my) comrades’ question, that wish of mine appeared before my mind’s eye ... · ... «Vakyt» gazetasynyè hyga bawlavyna ãh el tulu uèae belän, kehkenä genä ber æyelyw åtkärelde. (Zarif Bäwiri, Zamandawlarym belän ohrawular.) ... a small meeting was held on the occasion of the completion of three years since the newspaper “Waqyt” had begun to appear. ·

Note: såz uèaenda, såz uèaennan means ‘by the way’.

[515] xak ‘right’, ‘benefit’. 1. xakynda, xakta ‘about’ (concerning): Note: The form xakta is used with demonstrative pronouns in the nominative (bu, ul, wul, etc.) and with personal pronouns (except that of the 3rd person singular and plural) in the possessive case. However, with the latter xakta may also take the possessive suffixes. For example: sineè xakta, or sineè xakyèda ‘about you’. The latter applies also to xak in the dative: minem xakka, or minem xakyma ‘for my sake’.

Avyldagy xällär xakynda beraz sãjläwkäh, basularga hygyp kittek. (Äxsän Baqnov, Aqzuhan bolytly çava.) After we had talked a little about conditions in the village, we went out to the fields. · Ul xakta min soèynnanrak sãjlärmen, ... (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) About that I shall speak a little later, ... · Nailä. Sãjläwmik bu xakta, sin borhylasyè. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Bez unike kyz idek.) Nailä. Let’s not talk about this; you are upset (worried). · – ... Gãlhirä mièa andagy kewelärneè barysy turynda da sãjlägän ide, nikter sezneè xakta gyna berni dä äjtmäde. (Safa Sabirov, Firdäves.) “... Gölchirä had told me about all the people who were there. Only about you she did for some reason not say anything.” · Egetlär anyè xakynda nider äjtmäkhelär ide bugaj – åzen wäjlägäh, tyndylar. (Äxsän Baqnov, Ut çäm su.) Apparently, the young men intended to say something about him, (but) when they noticed him, they fell silent. 2. xakyna, xakka ‘for the sake of’, ‘thanks to’, ‘for’ (for the benefit of): · – Niwlim min, kièäw biregez, alla xakyna. (Atilla Rasix, Qmawev.) “What am I to do; for God’s sake, give me advice.” · – Tynyhlan, kyzym, tynyhlan! – dide ana. – Qzmywtan uzmyw îk. Ätieè xakyna... minem xakka... (Äbrar Wämin, Qnar tauny kihkändä.) “Calm down, ·

245

my daughter, calm down!” the mother said. “There is no escape from fate. For your father’s sake..., for my sake...” · Mäxäbbäte xakyna ul (qgâni Galiqbanu) åzendä kyîlyk taba, ... atasyna karwy tãwä. (Barlas Kamalov, Mirxäjdär Fäjzi, Galiqbanu.) Thanks to her love, she (i.e., Ghaliäbanu) finds the courage in herself; she ... stands up to her father. (Her father wants her to marry a man she does not love).

– Iskä almagan kãnnäre îk, sineè xakka doga kylalar. (Äxsän Baqnov, Ut çäm su.) “There is no day when they do not remember you. They pray for you.” · ... Tukaj saulygyna, tatar mädäniqte çäm ädäbiqtynyè alga kitåe xakyna tostlar kåtärelgännän soè, mäæles tynyhrak rävew aldy. (I. Nurullin, Kãzge æillär isär aldynnan.) After toasts had been proposed to ... Tuqai’s health, for the advancement of Tatar culture and literature, the party took on a quieter character.

·

[516] xosus ‘matter’, ‘case’, ‘subject’. xosusynda, xosusta (arch.) ‘regarding’, ‘in respect of’, ‘in relation to’, ‘about’: · Sabirnyè ostazy Gabdulla xäzrät täkâva vä riqsyz ber imam ide ... Uzeneè wäkerde mulla Sabir xosusynda däxi ul kadär razyj tågel ide. (Galiäsgar Kamal, Sabir xäzrät, 1900.) Sabir’s mentor, His Excellency (His Holiness) Ghabdulla, was a pious and sincere imam ... He was also not particularly (lit., that much) pleased with regard to his (former) student, Mulla Sabir. (wäkerd, now spelled wäkert, däxi (arch.) ‘also’, ‘still’, ‘again’; razyj – riza ‘pleased’, ‘agreeable’). · Bu xosusta çihkemgä mãwävärä vä kièäw itmäk läzem tågel. (ibid.) About this it is not necessary to deliberate and consult with anybody. (mãwävärä (arch.) ‘consultation’, ‘deliberation’, läzem, lazim (arch.) kiräk ‘necessary’; itmäk – itå). [517] xäl ‘state’, ‘condition’, ‘situation’, ‘circumstance’. xälendä ‘as’, ‘like’ (in the capacity, role of): · Bu ïwtä Xämitov åzen näkâ hit kewelärhä totty. Kåzätåhe xälendä. (Äxsän Baqnov, Taw kitap.) In this matter Khämitov conducted himself exactly like a stranger – as an observer. · Bary tik ... untugyz qwálek ber eget xälendä bäxet ïzlärgä hygyp kitkäh kenä berenhe märtäbä poezdga utyra aldym. (Säjfi Kudaw, Qwálek ïzläre bujlap.) I got (had an opportunity) to board a train for the first time only when ... as a nineteenyear-old youth, I went out to seek my fortune. [518] hak ‘time’. hak, with or without possessive suffixes in the locative, ‘while’, ‘during’; ‘when’, ‘as’: · Xänif abyj kesäsennän avyz garmunyn kulyna aldy ... – Ätiem båläk itkän ide, – dide. – Bik kåptän. Äle sineè kebek malaj hagymda. (Näbi Däåli, Qzmywka îl.) Uncle Khänif took a mouthorgan from his pocket ... “My dad gave it to me as a present,” he said. “Very long ago. When I was still a boy like you.” · Maçirä xanym hak kyna kyzaryp kujdy. Kyz hagynda Qègura aèa igâtibar itep jãrgän kewelärneè berse ide. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) Lady Mahirä nearly blushed. Yangghura was one of the persons who had noticed her when she was a girl (i.e., unmarried). · Ul, åsmer eget hagynda wuwy jortka kunak bulyp kilgän vakytta, Mädinägä gawyjk /ôaøiq/ bulgan ide. (Wärif Kamal, Nykly adymnar.) He had fallen in love with Mädinä when, as a teenager, he had come to this house as a guest. 246

·

– ... minem änkäem min kehkenä bala hakta matur äkiqtlär sãjlider ide. (ibid.) “... when I was a little child, my mommy told me (lit., was telling me) beautiful stories.”

Note: For -dyr, -der etc. see 693, d. In the above example, -der indicates emphasis. The speaker wants the woman to whom she is talking to tell, not to read, to her a story. ·

Malaj hakta kuna jãrgän alannarga ... baryp hygam. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) I am going out to the glades where, as a boy, I often spent the night ...

[519] hama ‘approximate measure, dimension’. hamasy, hama(syn)da ‘about’, ‘approximately’ (indicating approximate quantity, distance, length, height, size, weight, depth, time, age, etc.): · 150 el /jíl/ ïlek bu urynda 150 kewe hamasy æirle xalyk qwi torgan kehkenä genä balykhylar avyly bulgan. (Rafaïlá Mostafin, «Oæmax»ka säqxät.) One hundred and fifty years ago, there was in this place a rather small fishing village in which about one hundred and fifty local people lived. · Alar ikäå ide. Menä alar annan ber un adym hamasy æirdä tuktap kaldylar. (Nurixan Fättax, Syzgyra torgan uklar.) They were two. There, they stopped at a spot some ten paces from him. · – Mindä ber meè hamasy bar, – dide ul ... – Min sièa birep toryrmyn. (Nurixan Fättax, Bala kåèele dalada.) “I have about a thousand (rubles),” he said. “I am prepared to give them to you.” · Ul äle bågen tãw vakytynda gyna su alyrga bargan koeny isenä tãwerde. Ul koenyè tiränlege, kåp bulsa, ike-ãh metr hamasy bulyrga tiew ide. (ibid.) She recalled the well to which she had gone to fetch water only this noon. The depth of that well must have been approximately two or three meters at the most. · Kãräw ber-ike minut hamasy gyna dävam itte. Mansur Ilgizne dä kåtärep bärde. (ibid.) The (wrestling) match lasted only about one or two minutes. Mansur lifted and threw Ilgiz too. · Äjtålärenä karaganda, berenhe basunyè ozynlygy sigez hakrym hamasy bulyrga tiew ide. (ibid.) According to what they say, the length of the first field must have been about eight versts. · Berenhe karawta Gallämetdin Äxmätkä kyryk biw qwálär hamasynda urta qwále kewe bulyp kårengän ide. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) At first glance, Ghällämetdin had appeared to Äkhmät to be a middle-aged man of about forty-five. [520] wikelle (wäkel ‘form’, ‘figure’) ‘like’, ‘as’, ‘similar to’: · Uenhyk wikelle æyjnak ãjlär tau itägenä syenyp utyrgannar. (Rãstäm Kutuj, Sãenhe.) The cheerful houses were nestled like toys at the foot of the mountain. · Min kemnän kim? Min dä anyè wikelle, ul da minem kebek. (Gomär Bäwirov, Æidegän hiwmä.) To whom am I inferior? I am like him, he (too) is like me. · ... Kiek kaz îly qltyravyk bäs wikelle, ïhtän qktyryp torgan tuzan bãrtekläredej joldyzlar belän æemeldi. (Rafaïlá Mostafin, «Oæmax»ka säqxät.) ... the Milky Way shimmers with stars like glittering hoar-frost, like specks of dust shining from within. · Sãenehennän aèa bãten dãnáq åze wikelle bäxetleder syman toela ... (Rämzi Maksudov, Wäjmorza keweläre.) In her joy, it seems to her as though the whole world is as happy as she ... (For syman with relational adjectives and conjugated verbal forms see 575).

247

[521] ïh ‘interior’, ‘internal part’. 1. ïhenä ‘into’: · Gaqz mine bakha ïhenä alyp kerep ... ãstäl qnyndagy skämáqgä (ïskämiägä) utyrtty. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) Ghayaz took me into the garden and had me sit on a bench beside the ... table. · Eget, alarnyè bu såzlären iwetåe belän, atyna mende dä ... kiè dalanyè karaègylygy ïhenä kerep îgaldy. (Mäæit Gafuri, Wagyjráneè altyn priiskasynda.) Upon hearing these words (of theirs), the young man mounted his horse and ... disappeared into the darkness of the wide steppe. · Urmanda åz ïhenä biklänep, gel bertãrle genä qwärgä gadätlängän bu kåèelsez, sårän gailä ïhenä Jomabaj åze belän æanlylyk, qgymlylyk alyp kerde. (Gomär Bäwirov, Kunak eget.) Yomabai brought with him liveliness (and) kindness into this cheerless, listless family, which, retired into itself in the forest, had become used to living a monotonous life (lit., living always the same way). 2. ïhendä a) ‘in’, ‘inside’, ‘within’ (position where): · Ul ... hanaga nihek hygyp utyrganyn da xäterlämäde. Tirä-qk toman ïhendä kåk toeldy aèa. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) She did not remember either how she got into the sleigh ... The surroundings appeared to her as though in a haze. · Tirän tynlyk ïhendä bernihä sekund vakyt åtte. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Zäègär irtä.) Several seconds passed in the deep stillness (of the forest). · [Aj] ... akryn gyna kiè kåk ïhendä jãzep kitä. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Diègezdä.) [The moon] ... is floating slowly in the wide sky. · Alar kienep uramga hyktylar. Kãne bue diqrlek bina ïhendä bulganga, çava sulap tujmaslyk tatly toela. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) They dressed and went out into the street. As they had been inside the building almost all day, breathing (fresh) air felt (lit., seems) infinitely good (lit., sweet). · Qktyrganda Bosforga kilep æittek ... Ïhkä kerä bawlagah, hajkalu sånde. Bugaz ïhendä bezne tynlyk kohaklap aldy. (Mirgaziqn Înys, Îlda ujlanular.) When it was getting light, we reached the Bosphorus ... As we were getting into it, the rocking (of the ship) ceased. Inside the strait a stillness embraced us. · Bezgä bu nämäkäjne pohta belän salgannar. Xäzer wäçär ïhendä dä xatlar tawbaka tizlege belän jãri. Kim digändä, ãh kãn åtä. (Zãfär Fätxetdinov, Ålem ïlmäge.) This was sent to us by mail. At present, letters go with the speed of a turtle even within the city. They take at least three days. (nämäkäj – dialect of the Mishar Tatars – närsä). b) ‘among’ (a group, people, etc.): · Bå æirdä toryp kalgannarynyè ïhendä ... Wärif digän kewe dä bar ide. (Mäæit Gafuri, Qrlylar.) Among those (men) who remained standing in this place was also a man named Shärif ... · Bu qwálär ïhendä irlär çäm xatyn-kyzlar bergä çäm ber bulyp ïwlilär. (Galimæan Ibraçimov turynda istäleklär, Wäçit Äxmädiev.) Among these young people men and women are working together as one (body). c) ‘within’, ‘in’ (indicating time): · Monda mäktäplär, kitapxanälär ... kinoteatrlar kåp, uramnar irken ... Wularnyè barysy egerme biw-utyz el ïhendä salyndy. (G. Axunov, M. Zaripov, I kaderle tugan qk.) Here are many schools, libraries ... cinemas, the streets are wide ... All of these were built within twenty-five, thirty years.

248

Jãz kilometrga qkyn arany barly-îkly sägatá qrym ïhendä uzyp, Talbazyga kilep tä æittek. (Mirsäj Ämir, Kåèelle säqxät.) We arrived in Talbazy, covering the distance of approximately one hundred kilometers in a mere hour and a half. 3. ïhennän a) ‘from within’, ‘from among’, ‘out of’: · ... konvertny kulyma aldym. Anyè ïhennän dårt xat kilep hykty. (Gaziz Mãxämmätwin, Tabyldyk xatlar.) ... I took the envelope in my hand. From (within) it four letters came out. · ... xatyn, ber genä såz dä däwmihä ... mih aldyna bardy. Uhak ïhennän taw tabak belän aw hygaryp, qn täräzä tãbendä torgan ãstäl ãstenä kiterep kujdy. (Mirsäj Ämir, Bezneè avyl kewese.) ... without saying a word, the woman ... went to the stove. From (within) the fireplace she took out food in a stoneware dish and put it on the table, which was standing at the side window. · Ike kat sary tãrem kägazen såtep tawlagannan soè, kägazálär ïhennän fiolet tãsendä efäk baw qulygy çäm qulyk ïhennän xat hykty. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) After the two layers of yellow wrapping paper were undone, a violet silk headscarf came out of the paper, and from within the scarf came a letter. (fiolet – wämäxä). · Äkren genä kåbäläk-kåbäläk kar qva ... Wul kar ïhennän Diläfråz kilep hykty. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) Snow is slowly falling in dense flakes ... Out of that snow Diläfrüz emerged. · Bik eraktan, toman ïhennän Gãlwaçidä wäåläse kalka. (ibid.) Very far away, Gölshahidä’s shadow rises out of the mist. b) ‘in’ (indicating movement in, inside): · Tramvajdan tãwåhelär ..., tuflilären kullaryna totyp, tup-tury su ähenä sikerälär ide. Kyqm belän bu kyz da, tuflilären salyp, su ïhennän ... qlan aqk kittelär. (Ibraçim Gazi, Gaepsez gaeplelär.) Taking ..., their shoes in their hands, the people descending from the streetcar jumped right into the water. Qiam and this girl took off their shoes too and walked barefoot in the water, ... · Anda qwel tally hokyr ïhennän matur bulyp elga aga. (Mirsäj Ämir, Xikmätullinnyè manevrda kårgännäre.) There, in the ravine covered with green willows, a river flows beautifully. · Æil dulyj, kåzlärgä kom tula. Säxip kom ïhennän bata-huma çaman alga bara. (Wärif Kamal, Taè atkanda.) The wind is raging, the eyes fill with sand. Sinking in the sand, Säkhip keeps moving on. c) ‘to’, ‘by’ (myself, yourself, etc.): · Aldama, min äjtäm ïhemnän genä. (Mirsäj Ämir, Xikmätullinnyè manevrda kårgännäre.) “Don’t deceive me,” I say to myself. · «Wunysy gyna æitmägän!» – dip Xãsnulla ïhennän ujlap kujdy. (Wärif Kamal, Nykly adymnar.) “That’s all I need!” Khösnulla thought to himself. ·

[522] îl ‘way’, ‘road’. îlynda, îly belän ‘in the way of’, ‘by’, ‘through’, ‘by way of’: · Ul änise pewergän ipilärneè tämlelegen kårsäter ãhen, kaphygynnan ber ipine hygaryp, wäkertlärgä avyz itterä-itterä anasynyè abruen saklau îlynda ber bãten ipineè betkänen sizmi dä kaldy. (Kärim Tinhurin, Ikenhe märæän.) In order to demonstrate the tastiness of the breads his mom had baked, he pulled a bread from his bag, and having the students taste it, he didn’t even notice that through protecting his mother’s reputation a whole bread was finished off.

249

Wuwy ellarda basylgan kåp sanly mäkalälärdä anyè tatar sängaten /sðnôðten/ åsterå îlynda kårsätkän tyrywlygy ahyk hagylgan. (Bäqn Gyjzzät, Fätxi Burnaw.) The zeal which he displayed in the way of developing Tatar art is clearly ref lected in numerous articles printed in these (same) years. · ... ul bawka wäkertlär wikelle, mähetkä baryp korâän uku ... sädaka alu îly belän tågel, bälki åz kul kãhe belän ïwläp qwärgä tyrywa. (Tatar Ädäbiqty, Gabdulla Tukaj.) ... he (i.e., Tuqai) did (lit., does) not endeavor to make a living (lit., live) by going to the mosque and reading the Koran ... receiving alms like other students, but by working with his own hands. · Ägär 1905 nhe elga hakly wagyjrá tormywny, bawlyha, mägârifäthelek îly belän åzgärtergä mãmkin dip karagan bulsa, ... (Mäæit Gafuri, Sajlanma äsärlär, Introduction.) If until 1905, the poet had the opinion that living conditions (lit., life) could be changed mainly through enlightenment, ... ·

[523] qk ‘side’. 1. qgyna ‘to’, ‘towards’ (in direction of): · Bågen alar Äptelbär belän Bakaltaj qgyna ... bardylar. (Äxmät Fäjzi, Tukaj.) Today they went with Äptelbär to Lake Baqaltai ... · – Änä alar! – Grqzinîk kihke ïègergä urala bawlagan alma bakhasy qgyna kul izäde. (Zãfär Fätxetdinov, Ålem ïlmäge.) “There they are!” Gryazinyuk motioned with his hand towards the orchard, which was becoming enveloped in dusk. · Fidaqrov kåz kyryjlary belän genä ir-egetlär qgyna karap aldy. (Gaziz Åzile, Gyjfrit.) From the corner of his eye Fidayarov cast a glance towards the men. 2. qgynda a) ‘at’, ‘beside’ (position where): · Seèlem Saæidä ãjdä îk, Arha qgynda traktorda äwli ide. (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) My younger sister Sajidä was not at home. She was working at Arsk on a tractor. · ... täräzäsez divar qgynda wäçär jortlarynda bula torgan zur wifonáer, äjbät uryndyklar ... bu jortta waktyj uk mul tormywly kewelär qwägänne äjtep tora ide. (Garif Axunov, Xuæalar.) ... the large chiffonier at the windowless wall, which is usually (found) in the city homes, the fine chairs ... showed (lit., spoke) that there lived in this house rather well-to-do people. b) ‘for’ (in favor of, in support of): · – Îk, Zarif Salixovih, min sez äjtkän täkâdimne kabul itä almyjm. Mãmkin tågel. Min qxwy bawlangyhny buuga îl kujdyrmau qgynda! (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) “No, Zarif Salikhovich, I cannot accept the suggestion which you have proposed. It is not possible. I am not for permitting a good beginning to be stifled.” (lit., for permitting to stifle a good beginning.) 3. qgynnan a) ‘from’ (from the direction of): · Îlda ul basu qgynnan kajtyp kilåhe qwálärne ohratty. (Nurixan Fättax, Bala kåèele dalada.) On the road he met the youths who were returning from the field. · Bakha qgynnan alma ise aèkyj. (Ibraçim Gazi, Onytylmas ellar.) The fragrance of apples emanates from the garden. · ... åzem genä kalgah, kãtmägändä kajdandyr Xäjråw kilep hykty. Älege Nãgew qgynnan bezgä karmak hybyklary alyp kajta torgan iptäwem. (Mirsäj Ämir, Bez bäläkäj haklarda.) ... after I was left alone, Kheyrüsh, that same friend of mine 250

who used to bring us fishingrods from Nögesh, appeared unexpectedly from somewhere. b) ‘in’, ‘by’ (indicating age, origin, background, etc.): · Tujga bez äti-äni qgynnan bulgan tugannarny, tirä-kårwene hakyrdyk. (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) To the wedding we invited the relatives on Dad’s and Mommy’s side as well as the neighbors. · Iè kåp taralgan çäm fän ãhen iè äçämiqtle tãrkemläå – tellärne tuganlygy qgynnan, qgâni kilep hygywlary buenha tãrkemläå. (M.Z. Zäkiev, Tatar xalky teleneè barlykka kilåe.) The most common, and for linguistics (lit., science) the most important classification, is the classification of languages by relationship; that means, according to their origin. c) ‘as to’, ‘from the point of view of’, ‘from the standpoint of’: · Qwá qgynnan ul Fäezdän undårt qwákä zur ... (Äxsän Baqnov, Ut çäm su.) As regards age, he was fourteen years older than Fäyez ... · ... awau-ïhå qgynnan mäæles matur bara. (Äbrar Wämin, Ït belän mähe.) ... as to food, the party is going beautifully. · ... mäkalálärne mägânä qgynnan ike tãrkemgä bålep bula. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) ... from the point of view of meaning, it is possible to divide proverbs into two groups. · Dãresen genä äjtkändä, æyrga-måzykaga sälätlelegem qgynnan maktanyr æirem îk. (Mirsäj Ämir, Bez bäläkäj haklarda.) To tell the truth, regarding (as to) my talent for song (singing) and music, I have nothing to be proud of. [524] qn ‘side’. 1. qnyna ‘to’, ‘up to’, ‘at’ (in the direction of, towards a person, thing, or place): · Mawina ike-ãh minuttan qwálär qnyna kilep tä tuktady. (Nurixan Fättax, Bala kåèele dalada.) Two or three minutes later (lit., in, after two or three minutes), the car came up to the youths and stopped. · Wärifæan ... qèadan telefon qnyna kilep, anyè totkasyn bora bawlady. (Ibraçim Gazi, Onytylmas ellar.) Shärifjan ... went (lit., came) again to the telephone and began to turn its crank-handle. · Wul uk sabyrlyk qnyna tatarnyè tyjnaklygyn da kuwarga kiräk. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) To that (same) patience must also be added the Tatar’s unpretentiousness. · Urynynnan kåzgaldy da minem qnyma kilde. (Näbi Däåli, Qzmywka îl.) She (i.e., my mom) got up from her seat and came over to me. · Moxtar ... kitapny alyp, ãstäl qnyna utyrdy. (Wärif Kamal, Taè atkanda.) Mokhtar took the book ... and sat down at the table. · – Sägatá kihke æidelärgä minem qnga kererseè. (Äxsän Baqnov, Ut çäm su.) “You shall come to me by about seven o’clock at night.” 2. qnynda. a) ‘at’, ‘beside’ (position where): · Kihke sigez tularga biw minut kalganda, Fäez Lazarevlar iwege qnynda ide inde. (ibid.) At five minutes to eight in the evening Fäyez was already at the Lazarevs’ door. · ... Gyjlámulla kerep, aw xäzer bulganlykny äjtte. Bolar bålmädän hykkanda, Korbangali kart ãstäl qnynda kãtep utyra ide inde. (Wärif Kamal, Taè atkanda.) ... Ghilmulla entered and said that the meal was ready. When they came out of the room, the old man Qorbanghäli was already sitting at the table waiting. 251

Çärkemdä bulgan kebek, bezneè yndyrybyz bar ide. Ãj qnynda kehkenä bäräège bakhabyz. (Mirsäj Ämir, Bez bäläkäj haklarda.) We had our Kitchengarden, just as everybody else did. Beside the house was (lit., is) our little potato garden. · – Sin joklamyjsyèmy? – di ber tavyw. Bawymny kåtärsäm, qnymda Mirgali basyp tora. (Lokman Badyjkwan, Erak diègezdä.) “You aren’t sleeping?” a voice said. When I raised my head, there was Mirghäli standing beside me (at my side). (For the use of the Tatar present tense instead of the past see 956, 5.) b) ‘at’, ‘with’ (at house of, in company of): · – Ataè qnynda bawka kewe toryr, sin kãtågä bar, didelär. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Kãtåhelär.) “Someone else will stay with your father, you go to the (cattle) herd,” they said. · Irtägesen bilgelängän vakytta Galimæan Ibraçimov qnynda idem inde. Qnynda kunagy buluyna karamastan, mine ahyk jãz belän karwy aldy. (Istäleklär, Bakyj Urmanhy.) Next morning, at the scheduled time, I was at Ghalimjan Ibrahim’s (place). Despite his having a guest (visitor) with him, he received me in a friendly manner (lit., with an open face). c) ‘on, with’ (on person): · Qwá eget. Sadryj abzyj, mièa irtägä kadär un täèkä akha birep torygyz äle, min sezgä irtägä irtä åk kertep birermin. Sadryj. Minem qnymda ul kadär åk akha îk. (Galiäsgar Kamal, Bezneè wäçärneè serläre.) The young man. Uncle Sadri, lend (lit., give) me ten rubles until tomorrow, please, I’ll give it back (lit., bring and give it) to you tomorrow morning right away. Sadri. I don’t have that much money with me. d) ‘at’, ‘during’ (meal, etc.): · Sägyjtæan belän Miçri häj qnynda waktyj ozak sãjläwep, kièäwep utyrdylar. (Äxmät Fäjzi, Tukaj.) Säghitjan and Mihri sat at tea, talking and discussing for a rather long time. · Aw qnynda såz Kazan xälläre, andagy xãkåmät mäktäplärendä ukuhy tatar qwáläre, matbugat ... çäm wularga oxwawly bawka mäsáälälär turynda bardy. (Istäleklär, Kaîm Mostakaev.) During the meal, the conversation was about events in Kazan, about the Tatar youths studying at government schools there, the press ... and other matters similar to those. 3. qnynnan ‘from’, ‘by’, ‘past’ (the side of a person, thing, or place): · Täræimä at æigep kajtkah, Timerwäex ... ãstäl qnynnan tordy. (Xäsän Saráqn, Ber ananyè uly.) After Tärjimä had harnassed the horse and returned, Timershäyekh ... got up from the table. · Korbanov qnynnan min tämam tynyhlanyp hyktym. (Gadel Kutuj, Tapwyrylmagan xatlar.) I came away (lit., out) from Qorbanov completely calmed down. · Ber qrty sägatátän erakta Kãktugaj kårende. ... qwálär wifer tåbäle qèa jortlar qnynnan, tãzåhelärneè qwel hatyrlary qnynnan ... vyàlap uzyp kittelär dä iske Kãktugajga kilep kerdelär. (Nurixan Fättax, Bala kuèele dalada.) After about half an hour, Köktughai appeared in the distance. ... the youths zipped past the new slate roof houses and the green tents of the construction workers ... and entered old Köktughai. ·

[525] qrdäm ‘help’, ‘assistance’. qrdämendä ‘by means of’, ‘by’, ‘through’, ‘with the help of’: · Tartym tãwenhäsen tartym kuwymhasy qrdämendä belderep bula. (S.M., no. 7, 1976.) Possession (lit., the concept of possession) can be rendered by means of possessive suffixes. 252

Däresneè temasy – «Åsemleklärneè bãæäklär qrdämendä hittän serkälänåe.» (ibid.) The subject of the lesson is “Cross-pollination of Plants by (through) Insects”. · ... anyè berenhe xikäqläre «M. Gali» imzasy belän «Aè» æurnalynda basyla bawlyjlar. Qzuhynyè äjtåenä karaganda, alar «Xãsäeniq» mädräsäseneè ädäbiqt ukytuhysy Näæib Gasryj täïsire belän qzylalar çäm wul ukytuhy qrdämendä basylalar. (Gazi Kawwaf, Mãxämmät Gali.) ... his first stories with the signature “M. Ghäli” began to be published (printed) in the journal “Awareness”. According to the writer (lit., According to what the writer says), they were written under (lit., with) the influence of Näjib Ghasri, the teacher of literature at the “Khösäyeniye” medrese, and they were published with the help of that (same) teacher. ·

[526] ãs(t) ‘top’, ‘upper part’, ‘surface’.

Note: Case endings, derivational suffixes with an initial consonant, and the plural suffix +lär are joined to the short form: ãskä ‘up’, ‘upward’; ãstä ‘above’; ãstän ‘from above’, ‘from the top’; ãskä alu ‘to take upon oneself’; ãskä hygu ‘to win a victory’; ãske kat ‘the top floor’; ãslär ‘the upper parts’; ‘tops’, ‘surfaces’.

1. ãstenä a) ‘on’, ‘upon’, ‘over’ (indicating movement to): · Wäçär ãstenä kara, kue bolyt qbyrylyp kilä. Tizdän qègyr qvasy. (Näbi Däåli, Koqwka jãz belän.) Dark, dense clouds are gathering over the city. Soon it will rain. · Vakyt soè. Idel ãstenä tãn salkyny tãwep kilä. (ibid.) It is late. The cold of the night is settling upon the Volga. · Minem inde sãjläwergä xälem îk ide ... Kaltyrandym. Xänif abyj mine taphanga qtkyrdy, ãstemä îrgan qpty. (Näbi Däåli, Qzmywka îl.) I was no longer able to speak ... I shivered. Uncle Khänif laid me down on the tapchan and put a blanket over me. (taphan – piece of furniture used both as a chair and a bed). · Ul kägazá ãstenä ielep, ... qza bawlyj, ... (Garif Axunov, Hiklävek tãwe.) Bending over the paper, ... he begins to write, ... b) ‘on’, ‘upon’ (indicating a person or collective assuming, or being charged with, a task, responsibility): · Ãjdä inäsennän kala iè ãlkäne ul – Gabdelxäj. Bãten æavaplylyk anyè ãstenä tãwä. Dãresräge, inäseneè ul berenhe qrdämhese, uè kuly. (Nurixan Fättax, Kihå.) Next to his mother, he, Ghäbdelkhey, is the oldest in the house. All responsibility falls upon him. More precisely, he is his mother’s first assistant, her right hand. · Bez niwli alabyz – bulgan xälne sãjläp birådän bawka hara kalmady. Tãp gaepne min åz ãstemä aldym. (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) What could we do? We had no other choice but to tell what had happened. I took the main blame upon myself. · Kãn-kãnnän avyraq bara, läkin ällä ni ïwlär xäl îk, sin qllangansyè, ãsteèä algan ïwne bawkaryrga tiewleseè. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Kãtåhelär.) From day to day it becomes more difficult. But there isn’t anything you can do. You have hired yourself out and you are obliged to carry out the work which you have taken upon yourself. c) ‘in addition to’: · Kåzätå manarasy, hynnan da, nykly, totrykly, wunyè ãstenä matur çäm kårenekle dä ide. (Flås Latyjfi, Xyqnät.) The observation tower was indeed firm, sturdy, and, what is more, it was beautiful and splendid as well. · Gäåçärwad bikä Sãembikägä qnä soklanyp bakty: bu dala kyzy, gåzällek ãstenä, ziçen iqse dä ikän, kara. (Batulla, Sãembikä kyjssasy.) Lady Gäwhärshad looked again with delight at Söyembikä. Just think (lit., look)! In addition to being beautiful, 253

this girl from the steppe turned out to have a mind as well. (Expresses admiration and surprise.)

Åz tugan tellären belå ãstenä alar garäp çäm farsy tellären dä bik qxwy belgännär. In addition to their native language, they also knew Arabic and Persian very well. 2. ãstendä a) ‘on’, ‘upon’, ‘over’, ‘above’ (position where): · Stärletamak-Ufa îly ãstendä S. digän ber avyl bar. (Mirsäj Ämir, Åsä tãwkäh.) On the road from Sterlitamak to Ufa there is a village called S. · Çärkemneè ãstendä ïw kieme ide, ... (Nurixan Fättax, Bala kåèele dalada.) Everybody had working clothes on, ... (lit., On everybody were working clothes). · Su ãstendä akharlaklar oha. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) Seagulls are flying over the water. · Kamywlar ãstendä ak toman jãzä. (ibid.) A white fog floats over the reeds. · Bez xäzer wäçär ãstendä. Iè îgaryda. Iè biek jortlarnyè da birädän tåbäläre genä kårenä. (Näbi Däåli, Koqwka jãz belän.) We are now above the city – at the highest point. From here one can see only the roofs of even the highest buildings. b) ‘on’, ‘at’ (engaged upon): · Riannyè xäzergä matbugatta hykkan äjbärläre îk. Ul kãn-tãn ... isemle wigâri roman ãstendä utyra. (Gurij Tavlin, Afät.) So far, Rian has nothing (i.e., no piece of writing) which has appeared in print. He works day and night at (lit., he sits day and night over) a novel in verse entitled ... · ... moèa kadär çär elny ul ... Berenhe maj bäjrämen ... kyrda-basuda – ïw ãstendä karwylady. (Nurixan Fättax, Bala kåèele dalada.) ... every year until now (lit., until this) ... he had observed (lit., received) the First of May holiday in the fields – at work ... · ... ul çär kãn diqrlek åz ãstendä ïwlärgä, åzeneè belemen arttyra baryrga, ... vakyt taba. (Gadel Kutuj, Soltannyè ber kãne.) ... almost every day he finds the time to work on himself, to advance his education, ... c) ‘with’ (at house of): · ... kehe baæa xäzergä äle kewe ãstendä ber bålmädä genä qwi ... (Ämirxan Eniki, Ike baæa turynda xikäq.) ... the younger brother-in-law has been up till now lodging with some people (i.e., in some people’s house), in only one room ... 3. ãstennän a) ‘from upon’, ‘from top of’: · Æiçan äbi ... ketkeldäp kãlep æibärde. Awygyp kyna sandyk ãstennän tãwep, kehe qkka, hyàlyj bawlagan samavary qnyna kitte. (Marselá Galiev, Ul hakta.) ... Grandma Jihan chuckled. She hurriedly came down from the chest and went into the kitchen, to her samovar, which had begun to sizzle. · Uramga hykkah, Kamil ãstennän avyr jãk tãwkändäj, æièel sulap kujdy. (Gomär Bäwirov, Æidegän hiwmä.) After getting out into the street, Kamil breathed a sigh of relief as though a heavy load had fallen from him. b) ‘over’ (movement on, along, or over): · Alar, sãrgän æir ãstennän äle kåptän tågel genä salyngan îl bujlap, kåksel taularga taba kittelär. (Mädinä Malikova, Îldawlar.) They drove towards the bluish mountains along a road which had only recently been built over ploughed land. · Zakir abyj bezne inew ãstennän sikertep ujnatty. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) Uncle Zakir made us play at jumping over the brook. · Qègura xat ãstennän kåzlären tiz-tiz jãrtte dä, agarynyp, xatny ãstälgä tawlady. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) Yangghura quickly glanced over the letter and, paling, threw the letter on the table. ·

254

Äle Kazan ãstennän ohkan hakta uk ul kåzläre belän Fedoseev dambasyn ïzläde. (ibid.) While she was still f lying over Kazan, her eyes were searching for the Fedoseyev Dam. c) ‘over’ (garments, etc.): · Bawta ïnæele käläpåw, ãstä ak kålmäk, kålmäk ãstennän æièsez kamzul, kamzul ãstennän biwmät, biwmät ãstennän, elnyè fasylyna karap, q /jð/ æièel æilän, q tãlke tolyp. (ibid.) On his (lit., the) head is a skullcap embroidered with pearls. On him is a white shirt, over the shirt a sleeveless camisole, over the camisole a beshmet (a quilted jacket), over the beshmet, according to the season, either a light coat or fox coat. d) ‘over’ (the glasses, shoulder, etc.): · Wäåräneè fatir karhygy ... baskyh tãbendä ... utyra ide. Egetkä kåzlek ãstennän dä, kåzlek awa da tynyh kyna karap utyrgannan soè: – kitte, – dide. (Gomär Bäwirov, Æidegän hiwmä.) Shäwrä’s old landlady ... was sitting at the staircase ... After looking calmly at the young man over her glasses as well as through her glasses, she said, “She’s left.” e) ‘on’, ‘against’: · – Sez närsä, mièa ätiem-äniem ãstennän äläk sãjlärgä kuwasyzmy? (Garif Axunov, Hiklävek tãwe.) What do you want, are you ordering me to inform on my parents? · Ul tege vakytta ... Mansur Taçirov çäm aèa kilep kuwylgan Îmatwa Äxmätwin ... ãstennän zur wikaqtá /øikðjðt/ qzgan ide. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) At that time ... he had written a big complaint against Mansur Tahirov and (against) Yumatsha Äkhmätshin ... who had sided with him (i.e., had sided with the former). ·

[527] ãhen (old Turkish: uí ‘aim’, ‘cause’, ‘end’ – uíu > üíü) ‘aim at’?1) a) ‘for’, ‘(in order) to’ (indicating intention, aim, purpose): · «Moskvih» kilgän ide inde. Zaçid ... saubullawu ãhen awygyp kulyn suzdy. (Atilla Rasix, Ike bujdak.) The “Moskvich” had already come. Zahid ... hastily stretched out his hand to say goodbye. (Moskvich – make of car.) · Tãrle qktan holgap algan ... dowmannardan åzen-åze saklau ãhen, åzeneè bågengesen, kilähägen, ... qklau ãhen ul alarny, ... tar-mar itep tawlarga tiew ide. Läkin monyè ãhen älegä tiewle säbäbe, æitärlek syltavy bulmady. (Nurixan Fättax, Syzgyra torgan uklar.) To protect himself from the enemies ... who surrounded him from various sides, to safeguard his present (lit., present day), his future, ... he would have to destroy them. But for the time being, he had no good reason, no sufficient pretext for this. · – ... ïw monyè belän genä betmi. Sez monda wunyè ãhen genä kilmädegez. (Nurixan Fättax, Bala kåèele dalada.) “... work does not end with this alone. You did not come here just for that.” b) ‘for’, ‘about’ (with regard to, concerning): · Bezneè ãhen anyè såzläre qèa tågel ide. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) For us his words were not new. · – ... sineè bik äjbät qzylgan ozyn xatyèny alu minem ãhen zur bäjräm buldy. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) “... receiving your long, very beautifully written letter was for me a big event.” · – Al, – dide. – Sezgä kiräk bulyr. Biredä beraz akha da bar. – Anysy da sièa kalsyn, – dide Barlas. – Bezneè ãhen kajgyrma. Bez akhaga aptyramabyz ... (Näbi Däåli, Koqwka jãz belän.) “Take it,” he said. “You’ll need it. Here is also 1)

See also A.v. Gabain, Alttürkische Grammatik, p. 142.

255

some money.” “You keep that too,” Barlas said. “Don’t worry about us. We won’t be short of money.” · Vädåtneè ïwkä urnawuy ãhen çih kenä dä borhylyr æir îk ide. Any dårt kullap kabul itkännär. (Barlas Kamalov, Uramnar kièäq.) There wasn’t the slightest reason to worry about Wädüt’s getting placed in a job. They received him most readily. c) ‘for’ (because of, therefore, reason): · Zãçräbanu tåti Vädåtne ... xat-xäbär qzmavy ãhen tirgärgä dä niqtlägän ide dä, Morzaxan abzyj, ..., karhygyna tel ozajtyrga æaj kaldyrmady. (Barlas Kamalov, Uramnar kièäq.) Aunt Zöhräbanu had intended to give Wädüt a real scolding ... for not having written any letter or news, but uncle Morzakhan, ..., did not give his wife a chance (lit., possibility) to start an argument. · – Sez mièa ahulanmyjsyzmy, Gãlwaçidä? ... Ni ãhen min sezgä ahulanyrga tiew. (Gabdraxman Ämsämämov, Ak hähäklär.) “Aren’t you angry at me, Gõlshahidä?” ... “Why (for what) should I be angry at you?” · Äbineè mine wäpläp syjlyjsy kilde. Läkin kajmagy kar bazynda ikän, åze anda tãwä almyj, ..., wunyè ãhen kajmak alyrga mine hakyrdy. (Mirsäj Ämir, Äbi vasyqte /wasiðte/.) Grandmother wanted to feed me nicely. But it turned out that her cream was in the cold (storage) cellar. She herself could not go down there, ... Therefore (for that reason), she had me get the cream. d) ‘for’ (for the benefit, sake of): · Tyjnak xolykly ul bezneè äni. Äti ãhen, bezneè ãhen aç itep qwi. (Barlas Kamalov, Qlykmaslar.) She is of a retiring nature, our mother. She lives, caring for Father, for us. · Tatar milläteneè åsåe ãhen fajdaly ber ïw ïwläå, aèar fajdaly kewe bulu – bezneè maksatnyè iè zurysy ide. (Mäxmåt Bãdäjli, Ul tormywny sãq ide.) Our greatest aim was to do a useful work for the development of the Tatar nation, to become men useful to it. Note: Reference is to the Tatar-Bashkir poet Wäexzadä Babih (1895-1919).

– Min sineè ãhen bik watmyn, Asiq /Asið/. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) “I am very glad for you, Asiä.” e) ‘for’ (in exchange, return): · Bez, kara-karwy utyryp, tamak qlgadyk. Bufettan häj alyp ïhtek. Anyè ãhen tålärgä dip min nikadär genä tyrywsam da, ul minnän akha tålätmäde. (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) Sitting opposite to one another, we had a little to eat. From the counter we got some tea. Try as I might to pay for it, he did not let me (pay). · – Kiheregez, baj. Min sezgä kart ågezegez ãhen biw meè kirpeh sugyp birdem läbasa? Niwanbaj elmaep kujdy. – ... Ïw betkäh, ber pot bodajny kem birde sièa? Monnan tyw, ågez ãhen tagyn kilep ïwlärmen dimädeèmeni? (Äbrar Wämin, Qnar tauny kihkändä.) “Pardon me, Master. I made you five thousand bricks for your old ox, didn’t I?” Nishanbai gave a smile. ... “Who gave you a pood (16.38 kg) of wheat when the work was finished? Besides, didn’t you say that you would come and work again for the ox?” · Såz dä îk, hibär kyz ... Ämma bu kyz ãhen kåpme kalym birer ikän ul? (ibid.) Undoubtedly, she is a pretty girl ... But how much bride-money will he possibly pay for this girl? f) ‘for’ (representing, instead of): · – Sajlap kujdyk, sajlap! – dide Belugin, barysy ãhen dä æavap birep. (Nurixan Fättax, Bala kåèele dalada.) “We elected him, elected him!” Belugin said, answering for all of them. ·

256

Xäzer ul Färidäne bãtenläj ïwlätmäde, anyè ãhen sabanyn da histartty, traktoryn da histartty. (ibid.) Now he did not let Färidä work at all. He cleaned her plough and cleaned her tractor also for her. g) ‘for’, ‘to’ (indicating suitability): · Birgidelne åzlärenä xezmät itterå ãhen, tabigatá iæat itkän elga tarmagy belän genä kanägatálänmihä ... Qèa erym ahkannar. Nätiæädä, Birgidel zurajgan, sallar avylnyè qnyna uk kilä bawlagannar ... Birgidel kiè kåèelle bulyp hykty. Ul agah bajlaryna xezmät itep kenä kalmady ... Bala-hagaga su kerå, balyk totu, kaz kãtå ãhen wunnan da kulaj, wunnan da qmále uryn bar ideme ikän dãnáqda? – wulaj toela ide bezgä. (Mirsäj Ämir, Bez bäläkäj haklarda.) Not satisfied with the arm of the river just as nature had created it, they (i.e., the lumber barons) ... opened up the Yanga Yyrym (New Ravine) to make the Birgidel serviceable to them. As a result, the Birgidel became larger and (timber) rafts began to come right down to the village ... The Birgidel turned out to be kind. It didn’t just serve the lumber barons ... Could there possibly be a place in the world which was more convenient, more pleasant for children to swim, fish and tend geese? To us it seemed that way (i.e., that there wasn’t). (Birgidel – a small arm of the Aôidel/Belaya.) h) ‘for’ (indicating a time period for which something is due or designated): · Mondyj kader-xãrmätkä laek bulgan kewe – ... Ajsylu apa ide. Maj aenyè berenhe qrtysy ãhen ul xäzer ïw xaky alyp kilgän ide. (Nurixan Fättax, Bala kåèele dalada.) The person deserving such esteem was ... Aunt Aisylu. She had brought the wages for the first half of May. · Ukytuhylarnyè xezmät xaklary artu säbäple, Soltanga bågen uzgan ajlary ãhen ãstämä tålädelär. (Gadel /Ôðdel/ Kutuj, Soltannyè ber kãne.) Due to the increase in teachers’ salaries, they paid Soltan today additionally for past months. ·

[528] åtä, åtäli (åt ‘cross, go, pass through’). ‘beyond’, ‘through’: · Uramnyè ike qk rätendäge ãjlärdän täräzä åtä lampa qktylary karaègylykny ertyp kar ãstenä tãwtelär. From the houses standing in a row on either side of the street, the lights of the lamps, shining through the windows, pierced the darkness and fell upon the snow. · ... Sular agyzam tirän kållärdän. ... Bolyt åtä tãwkän aj wäåläsen Tãwerep kåqm Kålneè tãbenä. (Çadi Taktaw, Koqw kåktä wulaj mäège jãzär.) ... I make the waters flow from deep lakes. ... The reflection of the moon which falls through the clouds I send down to the bottom of the lake. · Qxwybaj ãjaldy baskyhynnan tãwep æitågä ït ... ahyk kapka åtäli iwek aldyna1) kerep kilä ide inde. (Mirsäj Ämir, Awmasov.) Just when Yakhshybai had descended the stairs to the porch, the dog ... was already coming into the yard through the open gate. (For æitå as auxiliary verb see 1374, a; for the verbal noun in the dative see 1177, a.)

1) New spelling: iwegaldyna.

257

Postpositions Governing the Nominative, the Genitive, or the Dative [529] The postpositions kadär /qðdðr/, tikle (tiklem), xätle, hakly (hikle). [530] These postpositions govern either the nominative of nouns, the genitive of the personal pronouns (except that of the third person plural), or the dative, and their meaning changes accordingly. With the dative, they express spatial, temporal, and a variety of other relationships (for details see below). With the nominative (genitive of the personal pronouns), they express comparison in extent, size, quantity, quality, degree, property, characteristics. Also, when expressing comparison, they mostly emphasize the noun (pronoun) which they govern. [531] kadär (qadr – Arabic, meaning ‘extent’, ‘scope’, ‘scale’, ‘quantity’, ‘measure’, ‘degree’). a) ‘to’, until’, ‘as far as’ (indicating distance): · Izge Ãmet borynyna kadär /qðdðr/ ike kãnlek îl kaldy. (Rafaïlá Mostafin, «Oæmax»ka säqxät.) A two days’ voyage remained to the Cape of Good Hope. · ... æyrhylar, ... biîhelär, ... säxnädän tåwämgä kadär baskyhly tagan qsauhy akrobatlar – çämmäse soklanyrlyk matur ... (Mãxämmät Wäjmi, Synau.) ... the singers, ... the dancers, ... the acrobats, who are building a stepped pyramid (lit., trivet) from the stage to the ceiling – all are enchantingly beautiful ... · [Mãrwidä] Zãlfät belän Fäçimäne iwegaldyna ozata hykty. Annary uram hatyna kadär åk bardy. (Räisä Iwmoratova, Qzmywlar.) [Mörshidä] saw Zölfät and Fähimä out to the yard. Then she went with them even to (as far as) the corner of the street. · Xäzer alar ikese dä Æirgängä alyp bara. Turyga kitkäne – Jomak avyly awa. Dimäk, Jomaknyè åzenä baryp æitärgä ike-ãh hakrym hamasy da, annan soè Æirgängä kadär æide hakrym isäplänä. (Mirsäj Ämir, Bez bäläkäj haklarda.) Now both of them (i.e., both roads) lead to Jirgän. The one running straight ahead goes through the village of Yomaq. That means, it is about two or three versts to Yomaq itself and then (lit., after that) seven versts to Jirgän. b) ‘(up, down) to’ (including): · Alar arasynda berse, womaryp, qltyrap torgan totaw kap-kara kån kiemnän ide. Aqgynnan alyp bawyna kadär kån. (Näbi Däåli, Koqwka jãz belän.) One of (lit., among) them was in a polished, shining, entirely raven-black leather suit. From head to foot (lit., From his feet up to his head) it was leather. · Çär sanyn kãtep alam. Any bawynnan axyryna kadär ukyp hygam. (Mirsäj Ämir, Åsä tãwkäh.) I wait impatiently for each number (i.e., issue of the newspaper). I read it through from the (lit., its) beginning to the (lit., its) end. c) ‘until’, ‘till’, ‘to’ (indicating time limit): · Sägatá ike ... Æidegä kadär biw sägatá bar äle. (Mirsäj Ämir, Aîxanov.) It is two o’clock ... There are still five hours until seven. · Ul kãnne bez äti belän irtädän kihkä kadär kyrda bulyp, koqw baegan vakytta gyna kajtyp kerdek. (Mirsäj Ämir, Bez bäläkäj haklarda.) That day Dad and I were in the field from morning till evening, and we returned home only at sundown. · Ul byel qzdan kãzgä kadär Bikbulatlarga xäzmäthe bulyp qllangan. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) He has been hired to work as a farmhand with the Bikbulats this year from spring to fall.

258

Unber qwákä kadär Galimæan avyl mäktäbendä ukyj, ... (Tatar sovet ädäbiqty tarixy, Galimæan Ibraçimov.) Until the age of eleven, Ghalimjan studied (lit., studies) in a village school, ... d) ‘before’ (indicating time, order, rank): · Toratau tåbäsendä æäj urtasyna kadär kar ïrep betmägän ellar ew kyna bula. (Mirsäj Ämir, Bez bäläkäj haklarda.) Years in which the snow on top of Torataw (mountain) does not melt completely before the middle of summer occur rather frequent. · Bolaj uk ta moèly, bolaj uk ta tirän itep bu æyrny aèa kadär ber kem dä æyrlyj almagandyr ... (Marselá Galiev, Ul hakta.) Before him, no one has probably been able to sing this song in such a melancholy way, in such a soul-stirring way ... · Kåèeldä tagyn da tiränräk ïz kaldyrgan uryn – Agyjdelneè Kamaga kuwylgan uryny ide. Bu îldan bezgä kadär uzgan kewelärdän iwetkänebez bar ide inde. Dãres ikän. (Mirsäj Ämir, Åsä tãwkäh.) A place which left a still deeper imprint in one’s heart was the place where the Belaya joins the Kama. We had already heard this from people who had passed on this way before us. It turned out to be true. e) ‘for’ (‘up to’, indicating time period): · Qtkahtyn beraz vakytka kadär tãrle kewelär vä manzaralar anyè kåz aldyna beräm-beräm genä kilep torsalar da, axyrda çämmäse butalyp kitä. (Wärif Kamal, Sukbaj.) Although for a little while after lying down the various people and sights come one by one to his mind’s eye, they eventually all get mixed together. (For qtkahtyn see 1277 b; vä – çäm.) · Koryhagah kyryk metrga buj åsterä, ber metr îanlykka æitä, ..., ãh joz elga kadär qwi. (Märdi Rafikov, Urmanym – çäjkälem.) The ash-tree grows a trunk up to forty meters tall (and) reaches a thickness of one meter. ... It lives for (up to) three hundred years. f) ‘for’ (as long as, time period): · Ul kåzen almyjha biw minut kadär täräzägä karap tordy. (Wärif Kamal, Uqnu.) Without taking his eyes away, he gazed at the window for (as long as) five minutes. g) ‘as much as’, ‘as many as’ (indicating time, or quantity, amount): · Bu vakyjgaga (waqiôðgð) inde el qrym kadär zaman uzyp kitte. (Galiäsgar Kamal, Åz xälebez.) As much as a year and a half have already passed since this event. · ... byel äåväldäge dårt-biw student urynyna, universitetta egerme kadär mãselman studentlary bar. (Galiäsgar Kamal, Mãselman studentlarybyz.) Instead of the previous four or five students, there are this year as many as twenty Moslem students at the university. · ... uku xaky bularak, universitetka elyna jãz sum kadär akha tålärgä kiräk. (ibid.) ... as tuition fee one must pay the university as much as one hundred rubles per year. · Kehkenä hagynda mièa bervakyt utyz tien kadär, bakyr akha birdelär. (Gabdulla Tukaj, Sybyzgy.) When I was little they once gave me as much as thirty kopecks in copper coins. · · Bezneè gasyr bawynda, beläsezme, bu tirädä urman kåpme bulgan? Barlyk æirneè ãhtän bere kadär. (Gomär Bäwirov, Æidegän hiwmä.) “Do you know how much woodland there was around here at the beginning of the century? As much as one third of all the land.” ·

259

h) ‘as’, ‘as ... as’, ‘like’ (in making comparisons): · Hynnan da, bu ätähne minem ätiem kaqndyr åze alyp kajtkan ide. Ul hakta Gãlderi jodryk kadär genä ber jolkyw hebi ide. (Näbi Däåli, Qzmywka îl.) In fact, my father had brought home this cock himself from somewhere. At that time, Gölderi was a flabby chick only as big as a fist. · Aèa tãwenå ãhen, dãnáq kadär belem ãstenä, tau kadär täæribä kiräk. (Mãxämmät Wäjmi, Synau.) To understand it (i.e., life), one needs, in addition to knowledge as wide as the world, experience as big as a mountain. · Ixtimal, ul hagynda minnän dä bäxetleräk ber genä kewe dä îk ideder. Åzeneè sãjgän kyzyn unike bawly diî päriennän kotkargan äkiqt batyry da minem kadär åk kuanmagandyr. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) At that time there was probably no one happier than I. Even the fairy tale hero who saved his beloved girl from the twelve-headed demon was probably not as happy as I. · · Mine wul kadär berkatly dip ujlyjsyèmy? (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Idel xikäqte.) “Do you think that I am that naive (as naive as that)?” i) ‘even’ (as intensive particle): · Ukuymnyè ãhenhe elynda äti mine ... Kaensar avylynyè kadim /qðdim/ mädräsäsenä iltep tawlady. Moèa äni dä, bãten ãj ïhe dä karwy ide. Kardäwyrularga /qðrdðø-árularôa/ kadär borhyldy. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) In the third year of my studies, Father ... transferred me to the old-style medrese in the village of Qayynsar. Mother, as well as everybody in the house,was against this. Even the relatives worried. · Bez, tyela almyjha, tägäräwep kãlärgä totyndyk. Xätta ätigä kadär kãlmihä buldyra almady. (ibid.) Unable to control ourselves, we began to double up with laughter. Even Father could not help laughing. Note: The use of both the intensive particle xätta and the postposition kadär expresses strongest emphasis.

[532] The postposition kadär has the expanded forms kadäre and kadärle. All three forms may be regarded as parallel forms without any difference in meaning. Their use depends on euphony (for example, to achieve a greater ease of pronunciation when the following word begins with a consonant), rhythm of speech, as well as on individual preference. It seems, however, that kadär conveys a certain concreteness, that it is somewhat more definite than, for example, kadäre. · Bu kãngä kadäre Æämilä Wäexneè ålekme, terekme ikänen, kaq kitkänen belmäde. (Mäæit Gafuri, Qrlylar.) Up to this day, Jämilä did not know whether Shäyekh was dead or alive, (or) where he had gone. · Ul kadäre inglizhä min dä beläm. That much English I know too (i.e., very little). · ... Zäjnäp egeteneè bawynnan aqgyna kadäre karap hykty. (Mäsgut Wärifullin, Ellar åtkäh.) ... Zeynäp scrutinized her boy friend (lit., her young man) from head to foot. · ... ni kadäre genä tavyw hygarmaska tyrywsa da ... kojmaga bärelep, tãnge tynlykny bozdy. (ibid.) ... however much he tried not to make any noise ... he bumped against the fence and broke the stillness of the night. · Muzyka tynyp kala. Kãndezge qlga kadärle inde ul bågän qègyramaqhak. (Ravil Väliev, Kãhle agym.) The music ceases. Today it will not sound again until the lunch break. · – Abyj, rulá artyna utyryp ber genä äjlänim inde, tege bawka kadärle genä alyp baryjm äle. (Mäsgut Wärifullin, Ellar åtkäh.) “Uncle, please, let me sit behind the wheel and do just one turn. I’ll take it (i.e., the tractor) only as far as the other end (of the village).” 260

·

Bez täålek kadärle bargah, Kazanga kilep kerep ber urynda tuktadyk. (Gabdulla Tukaj, Isemdä kalgannar.) After we had traveled for as long as a whole day, we entered Kazan and stopped at a certain place.

[533] tik (arch.) ‘like’ (in making comparisons): · Därviw. ... Aj tik jãzeè, bal tik teleè belän, alla îlynda tuzan bulgan ber därviwkä ni ãhen qlgan sãjliseè? (Näkyj Isänbät, Xuæa Nasretdin.) The Dervish. With your face like the moon, your tongue like honey, why do you lie to a dervish, who is dust on God’s path? · – Karap-karap toram da, aptyryjm bän sezgä, – dip bawlady Abdulla, salmak kyna. – Ågez tik egetlär åzegez, väläkin zarlanywyp jãrådän buwamyjsyz. (Æämit Räximov, Batyrwa.) “I have been watching you, and I am puzzled at you,” Abdulla began in a measured tone. “You are men strong as oxen, but you go on merely complaining.” (Implies that they ought to act.) (bän – min). [534] tikle, tiklem. a) ‘to’, ‘until’, ‘as far as’ (indicating distance): · Kãzen alsu änislär almagah botagynnan täräzägä tikle suzylalar. (Rämzi Maksudov, Wäjmorza keweläre.) In fall the pinkish anise apples extend along the branches of the apple-tree to the window. · – Menä wunda tikle ukyp kilerseè. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) “You will read up to there. “ Note: monda, wuwynda ‘here’, anda, wunda ‘there’, tegendä ‘there’, indicate both position at and movement to a place. For example: Bez monda. ‘We are here.’ Monda kil! ‘Come here!’ Monda xätle (hakly, kadär). ‘Up to here.’ Alar anda utyralar. ‘They are sitting there.’ Anda barma! ‘Don’t go there!’

Äni utyrgan arba artynnan baram ... Babaj atka sukty. At haba, min jãgeräm ... Kåpergä tikle jãgerdem, artyk jãgerä almadym. (Ibraçim Gazi, Malajlykta kunakta.) I walk behind the wagon on which Mother is sitting ... The old man hit out at the horse. The horse galops, I run ... I ran as far as the bridge, I could not run any further. · Min any borynynnan kojryk ohyna tiklem sabynlap îyp hyktym. (Rãstäm Kutuj, Ber dä ber kãzne.) I washed him (i.e., the dog) with soap from his nose to the tip of his tail. b) ‘up, down) to’ (including): · Bik soè inde. Inde bez genä, hana wuuhy malajlar gyna kaldyk ... Kiez itek belän biqläjlär dä gel boz gyna. Båtänne äjtkän dä îk, wuyp tãwkän saen egyla-mätälä torgah, halbarlarga tikle sygyp tawlardaj bulgan. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) It is already very late. Only we, the boys who are tobogganing, have remained ... The felt boots and the mittens are all frozen. Not to mention everything else. Since we are falling, rolling head over heels, each time we slide down, everything down to the trousers has become wringing wet. c) ‘until’, ‘till’, ‘by’, ‘before’ (indicating time limit): · ... wul biw täèkä ãhen tagyn ike kaphyk bäräège æyep birergä kåèelemne berkettem. Ämma kãndälek mäwäkatálär mièa vägâdämne åtärgä irek birmäde, ul buryh wuwy kãngä tikle minem ãstemdä asylynyp tora. (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) ... In my heart I made the firm resolution to pick another two sacks of potatoes and give them to her for the five rubles (i.e., the five rubles she had given the boy in addition to the ten rubles he had asked for two sacks of potatoes). But the daily worries did not permit me to fulfill my promise, and that debt has been hanging over me until this very day. ·

261

Xäzergä min äjtkännän bawka berni dä bilgele tågel. Ikenhe äègämägä tikle, bälki qèa xäbärlär alynyr. (Gomär Bäwirov, Æidegän hiwmä.) Except for what I have said, nothing is known up to now. Perhaps, new information will be received by the time we have the next talk. · Anau elny ... qègyr qumady, kålgä ällä nihä basudan torbalar tygyp, æäj bue suyn suyrttylar. Kãzgä tiklem kål tãbendä yndyr tabagy xätle genä su kaldy dip sãjlädelär. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Balta kem kulynda.) That year ... it did not rain. They said that from several fields they put pipes into the lake, and all summer long they drained (lit., sucked out) the water from it. By the autumn, only as much water as (the size of) a threshing floor had remained at the bottom of the lake. (anau – dial. änä wul, änä tege). d) ‘before’ (indicating time, order, rank): · Ul Taçiræannyè kilgänen Gåzälgä tikle åk kårgän ide. (Garif Gobäj, Läjsän qègyr.) He had seen Tahirjan coming even before Güzäl (had). e) ‘as’, ‘as ... as’ (in making comparisons): · Jortlarda tyhkan kåze tikle ut kårenmi ... xalyk wäfäkâ sånå belän joklarga qta. (Gomär Bäwirov, I qzmyw, qzmyw.) There isn’t even a tiny light (lit., a light as tiny as the eye of a mouse) visible in the houses ... people lie down to sleep as soon as the glow of the sunset is gone. · – Kabalanma ul tiklem, min kitkäh hygaryrsyè. (Fatix Xãsni, Æäqåle kewe sukmagy.) “Don’t hurry so much. You’ll go out after I have left.” f) ‘even’ (as intensive particle): · Moèarhy ... waulawyp bargan malajlar beráîly tyndylar. Äxmättän kãnläwep, îl bue åhekläp kilgän Nimæanga tikle telsez kaldy. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qk – qwel biwek.) The boys, who until now had walked noisily, ... all of a sudden fell silent. Even Nimjan, who was jealous of Äkhmät and had teased him all along the way, stopped talking. ·

Note: Of the two forms tikle and tiklem the former is the most commonly used form.

[535] xätle (hadd – Arabic, meaning ‘edge’, ‘border’, ‘limit’). a) ‘to’, ‘until’, ‘as far as’ (indicating distance): · Kala bit ul, Ãhile tågel. Anyè ber ohynnan ikenhe ohyna xätle æäqå jãrep kara! (Äxmät Fäjzi, Tukaj.) After all, this is a city, not (the village of) Öchile. Try to walk from one end of it to the other! · – Äjdä min sine pohmakka xätle kire ozatyjm, – dide Xälim. «Kurkyrsyè»ny syltau itep, Xälim any bawta pohmakka xätle, annary mähetkä kadär, wunnan soè çihber syltausyz ãjlärenä tikle ozatty. (Ibraçim Gazi, Onytylmas ellar.) “Come on, I’ll accompany you back as far as the corner,” Khälim said. Using the pretext: “You will be afraid”, he accompanied her first to the corner, then to the mosque, and after that, without any pretext, up to their house. · Avyldawlary any åsmer hakta uk hygyp kitkän dä, wunnan birle qrty dãnáqny ajkagan, dilär ... bãten Seberne kydyrgannan soè, xätta Manæuriq digän æir belän Kytajga xätle baryp hykkan. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) His countrymen (fellow villagers) say that he left when he was still a young lad, and that since then he has roamed around half the world ... after wandering around all of Siberia, he even got as far as Manchuria (lit., the land called Manchuria) and China. b) ‘(up, down) to’ (including): · Kãtmägändä Xälimneè kulyna klinder tottyrdylar. Xälim any ikegä syndyryp, qrtysyn kesäsenä tykty. Kalgan qrtysyn ... koelgan valhyklaryna xätle ... 262

awap beterde. (Ibraçim Gazi, Onytylmas ellar.) Suddenly (unexpectedly), someone put a small ring-shaped cracker into Khälim’s hand. Khälim broke it in two and put one half into his pocket. The other (lit., remaining) half ... he ate up ... down to (i.e., including) the crumbs which had fallen down. · ... garálänå tojgysy egetne tämam biläp aldy. Kåzlärennän atylyp hykkan qwá, îew hählärennän tamgan su tamhylaryna kuwylyp, ike qèagy bujlap akty. Kinät, bizgäk totkan kebek, bãten täne der-der kilä bawlady. Wunda gyna ul åzeneè æep bãrtegenä xätle hylangan buluyn, kãzge tãnneè salkynha æile æelegenä kadär åtep ãwåen sizde. (Zãfär Fätxetdinov, Ålem ïlmäge.) ... the feeling of being humiliated completely overwhelmed the young man. The tears bursting from his eyes mixed with the rain (lit., water) drops which dropped from his wet hair and ran down both his cheeks. Suddenly, as if gripped by fever, his whole body began to tremble. Only then did he feel that he had become soaked to the skin, and that the cold wind of the autumn night was penetrating to his bone marrow, making him shiver with cold. c) ‘up to’ (indicating limit): · Wulaj ber dä ujlamaganda, tire tawuny tawlap, æir kazuhyga äjländem. Berdän, bu ïw bik qkyn, ikenhedän, hynnan da «kãräkne batyryp ïwläsäè», ..., – 70-80 tien, xätta ber sumga xätle «tãwerep» bula ikän. (Ibraçim Salaxov, Tomannarga tãrengän qwálek turynda.) So, without thinking twice, I quit hauling hides and turned laborer-excavator. Firstly, this work was very familiar (lit., close), and, secondly, if you really “dug in your shovel”, ..., it seems you could “fetch” 70-80 kopecks, even as much as one ruble. (In his old job the speaker earned 20 kopecks.) · Annary, andagy ïwlär kimi tãwkäh, xatyny belän bergä Mangywlakka kåhte çäm wunda zur idarä æitäkhesenä xätle åste. (Gaziz Åzile, Gyjfrit.) Then, when the work there fell off, he moved with his wife to Manghyshlaq and there rose to the post of manager of a large department. d) ‘until’, ‘till’, ‘to’ (indicating time limit): · ... æomga kãnnärdä, sägatá unberdän ikegä xätle ... bãten wäkertlär ïwtän azat itelälär. (Kärim Tinhurin, Ãhenhe märæän.) ... on Fridays, from eleven to two o’clock, ... all students are excused from work. · – Sin qwá bit äle, min kajtkanda, egermeè dä tulmagan bula. – Min kyrykka xätle kãtärgä dä riza. (Mirsäj Ämir, Karamaly egete.) “You are still young, after all. When I return, you will not even have completed your twentieth year.” “I am ready to wait even till I am forty.” · Zakir Çadi 1904 nhe elnyè azagynnan alyp 1906 nhy elnyè qzyna xätle Odessa wäçärendä ukyta. (Kaîm Mostakaj, Zakir Çadi.) From the end of 1904 until the spring of 1906 Zakir Hadi taught (lit., teaches) in the city of Odessa.1) e) ‘before’, ‘ahead of’ (indicating time, order, rank): · Moxtar, Gajfullinnyè sugywka xätle mãgallim bulganlygyn iwetkäne bar. (Wärif Kamal, Taè atkanda.) Mokhtar has heard that before the war Ghaifullin was a teacher. · Islamga xätle boryngy zamannarda bezdä aj, el, kãn isemnäre åz telebezhä bulgan, kajberläre äle dä äjtelgäli. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaáläre.) In ancient times, before Islam, we had names of the months, years, (and) days in our own language. Some of them are still used (lit., said) from time to time. · Fäezgä xätle ul baw inàener bulyrga tiew ide. (Äxsän Baqnov, Ut çäm su.) He should have become the chief engineer ahead of Fäyez. 1)

Zakir Hadi (1863-1933) Tatar writer.

263

f) ‘for’ (up to, indicating time period): · Ul (Moxtar) bålmäsenä kerep joklarga qtkah ta, beraz vakytka xätle, notarius Brodskijnyè ... kuláqulyk belän æillänåläre anyè kåz aldyna kilep tordy. (Wärif Kamal, Taè atkanda.) He (Mokhtar) entered his room, and after he had lain down for a little while, notary Brodskiy stood before his mind’s eye, fanning himself ... with a handkerchief. g) ‘as’, ‘as ... as’, ‘like’ (in making comparisons): · – ... min any åzemä alyp kajtam, ... – Îk, ..., dide Ibraj. – Sin minem xätle tärbiqli almassyè. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) “... I’ll take him to my place, ...” “No, ...,” Ibrai said. “You will not be able to take care of him as I can.” · – Min anysyn «Raziq» dip jãri bawlyjm. Läkin ul sezneè xätle åk matur tågel, – dip, min Raziqny kultykladym. (Fatix Ämirxan, Kaderle minutlar.) “That one (i.e., that star) I shall from now on call (lit., I shall begin to call) Razia. But it is not as pretty as you,” I said, taking Razia’s arm. · Uzeneè Arkyly tykryktagy tavyk ketäge xätle genä bålmäsennän soè, bu egerme metrlyk bålmä aèa iskitkeh zur bulyp toeldy. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) After her room on Arqyly Lane, which was only as big as a hen-coop, this twenty-meter room appeared to her wonderfully large. · – Ni ãhen bu xätle arttyrasyz, iptäw Gyjlámanov? (Wärif Kamal, Nykly adymnar.) “Why are you exaggerating like this, comrade Ghilmanov?” · Kãn ul xätle suyk tågel, läkin waktyj kisken æil isä. (ibid.) The day is not that cold, but a rather sharp wind is blowing. h) ‘even’ (as intensive particle): · Anyè kãj ritmyna kullary gyna tugel, ièbawlaryna xätle ujnaklyj, ... (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) Not only her hands, even her shoulders moved to the rhythm of her song, ... · Irtän hykkan kewe, kãndez min inde avylda idem. Wul arada avyl bik sagyndyrgan. Åz avylyènyè hitängä kungan hyphyklaryna, tal botagynda tibrängän kargalaryna xätle kåèelgä qkyn. (Ibraçim Gazi, Malajlykta kunakta.) Leaving as I did (lit., being a man who left) in the morning, I was already in the village at noontime. It was that I (had) pined (lit., the village had made me pine) very much for the village all that time. Even the sparrows of one’s own village, which sit on the fences, the ravens, which swing on the willow branches, are close to the heart. [536] hakly (in some dialects also hikle; hik ‘border’, ‘edge’, hikle ‘limited’, ‘having a limit, border’). a) ‘to’, ‘until’, ‘as far as’ (indicating distance): · Salix ... artyk kystap tormady çäm uramga hakly ozata da hykty. (Ämirxan Eniki, Gãländäm tutaw xatiräse.) Salikh ... no longer tried to persuade me and even accompanied me out to the street. · – ... ãhenhe avtobusny ïzläp tap. Anyè belän Salavat tuktalywyna hakly bar da Tynyhlyk uramy bujlap kitärseè. (Garif Axunov, Xäzinä.) “... look for the number three bus. Go with it until (as far as) the Salawat stop and walk along Tynychlyq (Peace) Street.” · Umartalyktan ãh kilometrga hakly arada îkä agahlaryn kiså tyela. (Märdi Rafikov, Urmanym – çäjkälem.) Cutting down lindentrees is prohibited within a distance of (as far as) three kilometers from an apiary. b) ‘(up, down) to’ (including): · Kulâqzmany ãstälgä saldy, ukyrga awykmady, ïnäsennän æebenä hakly minem tormywymny, kajda ukuymny, kajhannan birle ädäbi ïw belän wãgylálänåemne, 264

sorawtyrdy, ... (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) He put the manuscript on the table. He did not hurry to read it (but) questioned me about my life down to the smallest detail; where was I studying, since when had I been engaged in literary work, ... c) ‘until’, ‘till’ (indicating time limit): · · Min riza. Tik vakyty kihke sägatá biwtän æidegä hakly bulsyn ide. (Ämirxan Eniki, Gãländäm tutaw xatiräse.) “I agree. Only let the time be in the evening from five o’clock until seven.” · – Marat ãhen ber dä borhylma, kãzgä hakly mindä toryr. (Safa Sabirov, Firdäves.) “Do not worry at all about Marat. He can (lit., will) stay with me until fall.” d) ‘before’ (indicating time, order, rank): · Taæi baj xuæalygynda biwenhe aj xezmät itä ul. Ä moèa hakly – qtim balalar jorty, telänhe sabyj ... (Äbrar Wämin, Qnar tauny kihkändä.) He is working the fifth month now on Taji Bai’s estate. And before this – the orphanage, a beggar child ... · Ïhtän kãläm åzemnän: Mièa hakly ber æålär dä tãnlä bu tåbägä menep bãten avyl karwynda garmun tartyp utyrmagandyr! – dim. (Mäæit Rafikov, Ilçam avazy.) Inwardly I am laughing about myself. Before me no fool has probably climbed to this summit during the night and played the accordion, before the whole village. e) ‘for’ (up to, indicating time period): · Ul nixätle arygan bulsa da, jokysy kahkan ide. Ällä kajvakytka hakly kåzlären ahyp karaègylykka karap qtty. (Wärif Kamal, Sukbaj.) Tired as he was, sleep escaped him. For some time he lay with open eyes, looking into the darkness (lit., he lay, his eyes open and looking). · Bu xalät ber atnaga hakly bardy, annary æièellek kilde, ... (Garif Axunov, Xäzinä.) This condition lasted for (up to) a week, then relief came, ... f) ‘as ... as’, ‘like’ (in making comparisons): · Karwyda kapka hakly kiè iwek, ... (Saæidä Sãläjmanova, Gãlbadran.) Opposite is a door as wide as a gate, ... · Bezneè avyl waktyj zur. Anyè hakly bawka tatar avyllarynda ãh-dårt mähet ... bulsa, bezneè avylda bar bulgany ike mähet, ... (Zarif Bäwiri, Zamandawlarym belän ohrawular.) Our village is rather large. Whereas, ... in other Tatar villages which are as large as it there are three or four mosques; in our village there are only two mosques, ... · – Kyhkyrma ul hakly! – dide Æämilä pywyldap. (Nurixan Fättax, Kihå.) “Don’t shout like that!” Jämilä whispered. g) ‘even’ (as intensive particle): · – ... ul Xisami kajda soè monda? – Xisamimy? Xisami sugyw betkäh tä ... kåhep kitte ... Bik äjbät tora, dilär. Kårkäsenä hakly asryj ikän. (Ämirxan Eniki, Tugan tufrak.) “... that Khisami, where (around) here is he (i.e., does he live), then?” “Khisami? Khisami moved away to ... immediately after the war ended ... He is doing very well, they say. He is even raising turkeys (so they say).” h) Examples with hikle: · Kihen bez uku jortynda sägatá unga-unbergä hikle utyrabyz. (Tatar teleneè dialektologik såzlege.) In the evenings we sit in the educational institution until ten or eleven o’clock. · ... min qzgy sabanga hikle ike jãz sum akha tabam ... (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Kyzyl hähäklär.) ... by (the time of) the spring ploughing I shall make two hundred rubles ... 265

[537] Emphasis may also be expressed by combining a noun in the nominative with kadär, tikle, xätle, or hakly and repeating the same noun after the postposition, putting it (the noun) in the required case form. These constructions express various emotions, such as pride, surprise, belief, trust, disappointment, doubt, conviction, etc.: · · Ä xäzer... min ni äjtergä dä belmim... Menä jort kadär jort algansyè – any minnän qwergänseè, ... (Ämirxan Eniki, Räwä.) “And now... I don’t know what to say... Look here! You have even bought a house. You have hidden that from me, ...” (Expresses disappointment.)

Borisovih bezgä karap ise kitep kalgan. Nihek bolaj, akha kadär akhany alyrga telämilär? dip gaæäplänä, kåräseè. (Näbi Däåli, Koqwka jãz belän.) Looking at us, Borisovich was amazed. “How is that, he seemed to wonder, “they don’t even want to take the money?” · – Tuj itkäh, Hallyga kajtabyz. Bãtenläjgä ... Räjxan ber mäl ïndäwmäde ... – Sineè tugannaryè bezne nihek kabul kårer? ... Bez alar belän ber kuywka syq alyrbyzmy? – Ber kuywka syewa almasak, wäçär tikle wäçär kalykkan tãwtä tãzåhe belän ukytuhy uramda toryp kalyr diseème? (Barlas Kamalov, Uramnar kièäq.) “After getting married we go back to Chelny. For good. ...” For a while Reykhan was silent. ... “How will your relatives receive us? ... Will we be able to fit in with them in one house?” “If we can’t fit in in one house, do you think that in a place where a city is rising a builder and a teacher will be left to live in the street?” · Wigyrá sãjläågä, kåräseè, wundyj da ostaryp kitkänbez, ber elny xätta bezne Arha xätle Arhaga alyp baryp sãjlättelär. (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) It seems that in reciting poems, we had become such masters that one year they even took us to such a city (i.e., such an important, such a large city) as Archa (Arsk) to have us recite (there). (Expresses pride.) · Älbättä, wulajdyr. Äti hakly äti wulaj dip äjtep torgah, wulaj bulmyjha soè. (Fatix Xãsni, Utyzynhy el.) Of course it is so. If even Father says so, then how can it not be so. (Expresses belief, trust, conviction.)

·

Note: kadär, tikle, xätle, hakly (hikle) have the same meaning. Their choice depends on the personal preference of the speaker (writer), as well as on which of them appears to be more euphonic within the context.

[538] dip (verbal adverb of diî ‘to say’). After nouns in the nominative, dip means ‘for’, ‘for the sake of’; after nouns in the dative, it means ‘for’, expressing intention, aim, for the benefit of. After nouns in the dative denoting time, it expresses temporal relationship: · Bäjräm kãn dip ãställärgä qxwyrak, zatlyrak azyklar kueldy. (Nurixan Fättax, Syzgyra torgan uklar.) For the holiday better, fancier food was put on the tables. · Qèa doktorny kårergä kilåhelär arasynda Zämzämiq dä buldy. ... Ni dip kilä ul? (Gabdraxman Minskij, Qznyè berenhe kãne.) Among those who were coming (lit., who are coming) to see the new doctor was also Zämzämiä ... For what is she coming? · Bänat ... irtänge häjgä suga dip kål buena tãwep kitte. (ibid.) Bänat ... went down to the lake for water for the morning tea. · Ul ... kajtyp kergändä, ãjdä inde kåptän awagannar ide. Aèa dip kaldyrylgan karabodaj botkasy ... ällä kajhan suynyp betkän ... (Safa Sabirov, Åz kanym.) When he returned and entered, ... they had already eaten in the house long ago. The buckwheat porridge ... which had been left for him had got cold long ago ... · Ber-ike genä sägatákä dip kergän bulsalar da, dãnáq xällären sãjläwep utyra torgah, samovar artynnan samovar qèartyp, tãn uzyp kitte, taè da belände.

266

(G. Ibraçimov turynda istäleklär, Moxtar Ibraçimov.) Although they had come in for only one or two hours, after discussing the world situation and heating up (lit., renewing) samovar after samovar, the night passed and it began to dawn. [539] karwy. The word functions as a postposition proper and as a postpositional word of nominal origin. As the former, it remains unchanged and always governs the dative. As a postpositional word – as a noun it means ‘opposite side’, as an adjective ‘opposite’, ‘adverse’ – it takes the possessive suffixes, the dative, locative, or ablative case and requires the nominative of nouns, the genitive of personal and demonstrative pronouns. When preceded by the pronouns minem, sineè, bezneè, sezneè, the possessive suffix may be omitted. Note also that the case endings used with nouns plus the possessive suffix of the 3rd person singular are joined to karwy either directly or with the possessive suffix +sy, i.e., karwyna, karwysyna, karwynda, karwysynda, karwynnan, karwysynnan. When joined directly, final y of karwy functions as the possessive suffix. 1. karwy means a) ‘against’ (indicating opposition, protest): · Fätxi moèar karwy läm-mim såz äjtmäde. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) Fätkhi did not say a single word against this. · Bu îly anyè hygywy aerym kewelärgä, Äxmät çäm mièa karwy tãbälgän. (ibid.) This time, his speech was directed against specific people, (against) Äkhmät and me. · Koqwka karwy ãjlärneè täräzä kapkahlary qbyk. (G. Ibraçimov, Kãtåhelär.) The shutters of the houses are closed against the sun. · Ul alarga su uèaena gyna jãzåneè ansat buluyn, ämma suga karwy jãzåneè bawkaharak ikänen tãwenderergä tyrywty. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) He tried to make them understand that just swimming with the stream (lit., water) was easy, but that swimming against the stream (water) was something else. b) ‘at’ (position at): · Ãstälgä karwy, aèa arkasy belän, nider qzyp utyrgan ak kålmäkle eget anyè iwektän kilep keråen sizenmäde bulsa kiräk, ... (ibid.) The young man in a white shirt, sitting at the table with his back towards him and writing something, must not have noticed that he entered (lit., his coming through the door), ... (For bulsa kiräk see 1010.) c) ‘opposite’ (both position at and movement to): · Menä wul sazlykka karwy gyna kehkenä vä bik iske ber ãjneè ber bålmäsendä, xatyny vä ber balasy belän, iskehe ber kart ... tora idelär. (Wärif Kamal, Ata.) In one room of a small and very old house, just opposite that (same) swamp, an old junkman was living with his wife and one child ... · Uèda çäm sulda ber-bersenä karwy ike iwek. (Gabdraxman Minskij, Qznyè berenhe kãne.) On the right and on the left there are two doors opposite each other. · Ul arada egetlärneè bersenä karwy zäègär kålmäkle, al qulykly, qwel alâqpkyh qpkan ber kyz hykty. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) Meanwhile, a girl in a blue dress (and) a pink scarf, and a green apron on, stepped opposite one of the young men. · Wäpew xälfä ãstäl qnyna kilep balalarga karwy utyrdy ... (Äxmät Fäjzi, Tukaj.) The teacher Shäpesh came to the table and sat down opposite the children ... d) ‘to’ (indicating cause): · Älfiqneè gaæäplänåenä karwy, bu närsälär Safura ãhen qèa tågel. (Atilla Rasix, Synau.) To Älfiä’s surprise, these things are nothing new for Safura.

267

Compare also: åkenehkä karwy ‘to (one’s) regret’; bäxetkä karwy ‘fortunately’; bäxetsezlekkä karwy ‘unfortunately’. e) ‘to’ (concerning, regarding): · – Ällä sãjliseème? Safinnyè bu soravyna karwy Ignat ber genä såz belän æavap birde: – Sãjlim. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) “Shall you speak?” To this question of Safin’s Ignat replied with only one word: “Yes.” (lit., “I shall speak.”). f) ‘towards’ (indicating time): · Koqw tåbänäq, kåk jãze ahyk, çava saf, bãten dãnáqny kihkä karwy gyna bula torgan ber räxät tynlyk holgyj. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Diègezdä.) The sun is going down, the sky is clear, the air clean, a serene tranquillity, which (usually) occurs only towards evening, envelops the whole world. · Tãngä karwy Krasnoborga baryp æittem. (Mirsäj Ämir, Kièäw.) Towards night I arrived at Krasnobor. g) ‘for’ (in return): · Min aèar az-maz buryh birgäläp torganym bar. Wuèar karwy ul da mièa waktyj fajda itkäläde. (Wärif Kamal, Nykly adymnar.) I have been giving him small loans from time to time. For that (in return) he too has repeatedly been rather useful to me. h) ‘before’ (indicating time): · Maj bäjrämenä karwy tãnne Xafiznyè çih onytasy îk. (Barlas Kamalov, Qlykmaslar.) Khafiz is not going to ever forget the night before the May Day celebrations. (For the participle in -asy, -äse, -yjsy, -ise plus bar or îk see 1129, 1. a-d, 2.; 1130 1133.) Note also: qèa elga karwy tãndä ‘on New Year’s eve’. · Avgustnyè 14 ennän 15 enä karwy tãndä ... (Zãfär Fätxetdinov, Ålem ïlmäge.) During the night of August 14 to August 15 ... i) in figurative speech: · – Menä eget ide, mesken. Ãh kewegä karwy ïwli ide bit ul, – dide Nasryj. (Wärif Kamal, Kozgynnar oqsynda.) “He was a good fellow, the poor soul. He did the work of three men, he did,” Nasri said. 2. karwyna, karwysyna. a) ‘opposite’, ‘towards’ (indicating movement to): · Kabinetnyè ... zur täräzäse karwyna hålmäklär belän bernihä gãl utyrtylgan ... (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) Opposite the large window ... of the office pots have been placed with a few flowers in them ... · Safin ãstäl artyna, Sabirov anyè karwysyna utyrdy. (ibid.) Safin sat down behind the desk, Sabirov sat down opposite him. · ... åz uramyna boryluga, Kadyjr karwysyna kilåhe Zãçräne kårde. (Mãsägyjt Xäbibullin, Xäter qrlary.) ... the moment he turned into his own street, Qadir saw Zöhrä coming towards him. b) ‘to’, ‘before’, ‘towards’ (indicating movement to, movement into the presence of): · ... Mägâsåmä qèadan bålmägä kerde çäm bik arygan, talhykkan kyqfät belän ãstäl karwyna kilep utyrdy, ... (Ibraçim Gazi, Onytylmas ellar.) Mäghsümä again entered the room and, with a very tired, weary look, came to the table and sat down, ... · Bez ikenhe katka kåtärelep, bizäkle iwek karwysyna kilep tuktadyk. (Mirgaziqn Înys, Tozly æil.) We walked up to the second floor and stopped (lit., came to and stopped) in front of an ornamented door. ·

268

Min tetränep kittem. Äjtäm any, æir astynnan hykkandaj, kinät kenä karwyma kilep basty. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) I began to shake. I tell you, he suddenly stepped in front of me as if by magic (lit., as if he emerged from the ground). · ... kårwe ãstäldäge ber kyz Zãçrä belän Tabibä karwyna ujmak kadäre genä kehkenä hynaqklarga salyngan kofe kiterep kujdy. (Koqw Timbikova, Agym urtasynda.) ... a girl at the next table brought coffee in cups as small as a thimble and placed it before Zöhrä and Tabibä. 3. karwynda, karwysynda. a) ‘opposite’, ‘before’, ‘in front of’, ‘at’ (indicating position at a place; in the presence of): · Kãzgegä baksam, karwymda yspaj gyna ber eget basyp tora. (Dilärä Zãbäerova, Kuw ãqnke waçit.) I look into the mirror; there is a rather elegant young man standing before (opposite) me. · ... Ãstäl karwynda aèa arty belän utyrgany kinät boryldy ... (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) ... the one sitting at (before) the table with his back towards him, suddenly turned around ... · Qkup bik aryp kajtty. Ul mihkä qgarga, ut karwynda utyryrga bik qrata ide. (Ibraçim Gazi, Onytylmas ellar.) Jacob returned very tired. He loved very much to light the stove and sit at the fire. · Ïnebezdän sorau alyrga totyndyk. Menä ul, gaeple kyqfättä bawyn iep, karwybyzda basyp tora. (Mirsäj Ämir, Bez bäläkäj haklarda.) We began to question our little (lit., younger) brother. There he was standing before us, hanging his head in a posture of guilt. · Gomereène åtkärmä sin îkny teläp, Xak karwynda kabul bulmas mondyj teläk. (Mäæit Gafuri, Qrkanat belän karlygah.) Don’t you spend your life wishing the impossible (wishing a senseless thing), Such a wish will not be acceptable before God (in the eyes of God). · Tukta, hå! Qmásez tavywly Ällä närsä kyhkyra. Siskänep bezneè eget Katyp kala aqgårä, Aèlamastan, karwysynda Ällä nindi «qt» kårä. (Gabdulla Tukaj, Wåräle.) Stop, hark! Something is howling With a horrible voice. Startled, our youth Stands petrified, At a loss to understand, he sees before him, something “strange”. · Mine dårtenhedän tury altynhyga kåherdelär. Bu xäl minem kåèelemne dä, malajlar karwynda däräæämne dä kåtärep æibärde. (Mirsäj Ämir, Åsä tãwkäh.) They moved me from the fourth grade directly up to the sixth grade. This event raised my spirits (lit., heart) as well as my standing with the boys. b) ‘with’, ‘in’, ‘at’ (an institution, etc.): · Bålek karwynda oewtyrylgan ädäbiqt tågärägeneè ïwe torgan saen æanlana bara. (Kazan utlary no. 5, 1971.) The activity of the Literary Circle established with the department is getting more and more lively. · Tatar däålät akademiq teatry karwynda bawta «Programma-Mäæmuga», soèrak «Tamawahy» isemle maxsus teatr àurnaly hyga bawlyj. (Tatar sovet teatry, Kerew.) At (i.e., under the direction, management of) the Tatar State Academy Theatre a special theatre journal began (lit., begins) to appear, first under the name “Program-Almanac”, later “Spectator”. c) ‘against’ (facing, be faced, confronted with): · Kaennar sary qfraklaryn æirgä tåwägännär, siräk-miräk kenä wärä nehkä tarmaklarda sary, kãrän qfraklar tirbälä, alar qtim, kyzganyh, ahy æillär ·

269

karwynda harasyz bulyp toelalar. (Mädinä Malikova, Fidaq.) The birch trees have spread their yellow leaves on the ground. The sparse yellow and brown leaves on the bare, thin twigs are quivering. They are orphans, pitiful. They seem forlorn, facing the piercing winds. 4. karwynnan, karwysynnan ‘from (in front of)’, ‘past’, ‘by’, ‘opposite’ (indicating movement): · Marina da kãzge karwynnan borylyp, Märviq hakyrgan kyzny kãtep aldy. (Koqw Timbikova, Agym urtasynda.) Marina too turned around from (in front of) the mirror and awaited the girl whom Märwiä had invited. · – Kotbetdin abyj, äle genä karwygyzdan uzyp baradyr idem ... (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Kåk kåkrär.) “Qotbetdin, I was just going past your place (lit., past you) ... “ (-dyr, -der, tyr, -ter, see 980). · Hynnan da tãw urtalarynda bezneè täräzä karwynnan gyna atka atlangan bernihä kewe uzyp kitte. (Näbi Däåli, Qzmywka îl.) And indeed, around noon, several men on horseback passed just by our window. · – Äjdä, utyrygyz äle, – dide kart ... Åze Färit urynyna utyrdy, Rämzigä karwysynnan uryn kårsätte. (Atilla Rasix, Synau.) “Come, sit down, please,” the old man said ... he himself sat down in Färit’s place, (and) to Rämzi he offered a seat opposite him. [540] qnäwä. This postpositional word is used in its basic form as well as with possessive suffixes plus the dative, locative, or ablative case. Used in its basic form, it governs the dative. With possessive suffixes and case endings, it requires the nominative of nouns, the genitive of personal and demonstrative pronouns. 1. qnäwä means ‘(close) beside’, ‘side by side’, ‘next to’: · Kazarmanyè çärber urynynda häj ïhålär bawlandy. Menä Sibgatá babajlarga qnäwä genä, qwá kenä xatynly çäm kehkenä balaly beräå käeflänep häj ïhä. (Mäæit Gafuri, Wagyjráneè altyn priiskasynda.) At every place in the barracks tea drinking has begun. Here, just next to the old Sibghäts, someone with a rather young wife and small child is enjoying tea. · Deribas uramyna æitkändä awxanälär ahyla bawlagan ide inde. Zur univermagka qnäwä ber awxanägä häj ïhärgä kerdem. (Mirgaziqn Înys, Tozly æil.) When I reached Deribas Street, the restaurants had already begun to open. I went into a restaurant next to a large department store to have tea. · Port Säid artta kaldy. Inde ãh sägatá kanalda barabyz. ... Uèda, Afrika qgynda, qrga qnäwä asfalát îl suzylgan. (Mirgaziqn Înys, Îlda ujlanular.) Port Said remained behind (us). We had already been traveling on the (Suez) Canal for three hours. ... On the right, the African side, an asphalt road ran beside the bank. 2. qnäwäsenä ‘beside’ (indicating movement close to the side of a person or thing): · ... mawinanyè artky urynynda Mixseevnyè îldawlary, mine urtada kaldyryp, ikese ike qgyma utyrdylar. Mixseev åze wofer qnäwäsenä urnawty. (Gurij Tavlin, Afät.) ... in the back of the car, Mikhseyev’s two companions sat down, one on either side of me, leaving me in the middle. Mikhseyev himself took a seat beside the chauffeur. · Z. tuktalywynda, ..., ber ãer qwálär kerde. Urynnar buw ide, ..., qnäwämä dä, karwyma da utyrywtylar. (Mirsäj Ämir, Balykhy qlgannary.) At the Z. stop, ..., a crowd of youths entered (i.e., entered the railway carriage). There were seats vacant, ..., (and) they sat down together beside me and opposite me.

270

3. qnäwäsendä ‘beside’ (indicating position or movement close beside): · Irken, baj ãjdä, qlkynlanyp qngan uhak qnäwäsendä alar ikäådän-ikäå genä utyrdylar. (Nurixan Fättax, Syzgyra torgan uklar.) In the spacious, rich (i.e., richly furnished) house they both sat together alone beside the brightly burning fireplace. · Zur zal. Bez baryp kergändä, anda ... Minçaæ Säjfi, anyè qnäwäsendä ozyn kara hähle, kyskartylgan kara myekly, taza gäådäle ber kewe utyra ide. (G. Ibraçimov turynda istäleklär, Timer Alîk.) A large hall. When we entered, Minhaj Seyfi, (and) beside him a strongly built man with long, black hair and shorttrimmed moustache, were sitting there. · Sãmbel karwylyk kårsätmäde, tyn gyna anyè qnäwäsendä atlyj birde. (Razil Väliev, Iske sägatá dãres jãri.) Sömbel did not resist. She kept walking silently beside him. 4. qnäwäsennän a) ‘beside’ (indicating movement beside, side by side): · Salix minem qkka hykty, läkin az gyna ara kaldyryp qnäwämnän atlady. (Ämirxan Eniki, Gãländäm tutaw xatiräse.) Salikh came to my side, but he walked beside me, leaving a little bit of space (between us). · Kåzgä kårenå belän ike qgynnan ike ït tawlandy. Æajdakny aty belän bergä totyp awardaj bulyp, ãrä-ãrä qnäwäsennän habalar, ... (Mirsäj Ämir, Bez bäläkäj haklarda.) The moment he appeared, two dogs came rushing out from two sides. As if ready to devour the rider together with his horse, they kept running beside him, barking, ... b) ‘beside’ (indicating movement past or away from a person or thing): · Æitäkläwkän kullaryn da yhkyndyrmyj, qnäwämnän uzyp kittelär. (Rinat Mãxämmädiev, Kenäri – hitlek kowy.) They walked past me hand in hand, without even letting go of one another’s hands.

Postpositions Governing the Dative [541] binaän ‘on the basis of’, ‘by virtue of’, ‘by dint of’, ‘through’ (Arabic: bana- ‘to build, erect’, bina-’an ‘ala- ‘on the basis of’, ‘by virtue of’): · – Menä wuwy säbäplärgä binaän bez sezgä: ... dibez. (Fatix Ämirxan, Mãtägassyjp Kazan tatarlaryna ahyk xat, 1907.) “It is for these reasons (by virtue of these reasons) that we say to you: ...” (mãtägassyjp – arch. ‘fanatic’). · ... wul waqn xat-gazeta, kãtelmägän berär mogæizaga binaän kajdadyr saklangan bulyp, bågen mièa any kårergä tury kilsä? Ixtimal, xäzer tasvirlanganga tury kilep betmägän urynnary da tabylyr ide. (Mirsäj Ämir, Åsä tãwkäh, 1979.) What if by dint of some unexpected miracle that satirical newsletter ... has been preserved somewhere and I should see it today? Probably, one would find (in it) some spots which do not quite correspond to what I have described now. Note: In today’s Tatar literary language binaän is used infrequently.

[542] gait /ôaid/ (arch. ‘about’, ‘regarding’, ‘concerning’ (Arabic: ‘a-da ‘to refer, relate to’): · Æãmlä fikrem kihä-kãndez sezgä gait, millätem. (Gabdulla Tukaj, Millätä, 1906.) In contemporary Tatar: Barlyk uem /ujím/ kihen dä, kãndezen dä sezneè turyda, millätem. Day and night all my thoughts are about you, my nation. (millätä-millätkä).

271

·

«Zamanymyznyè ädip vä mãxärrirlärenä gait» mäkaläsenä gait. (ibid., heading of an article, 1906.) In contemporary Tatar: «Zamanybyznyè qzuhy çäm àurnalistlary turynda» digän mäkalä turynda. About the article “About Writers and Journalists of Our Times”.

[543] dair (arch.) ‘regarding’, ‘concerning’; (Arabic, dâ‘ir ‘turning’, ‘revolving’): · ... ul xikäqtlär vä mäkalálär çärkajsy äxlakka vä mägyjwätkä dair bulgan såzlär ide. (Zakir Çadi, Bäxetle kyz, 1904.) ... every one of those stories and proverbs were (words) concerning ethics and everyday life (mägyjwät – tormyw). [544] karaganda (past participle in the locative of kara ‘look’). ‘judging by’, ‘according to’: · Ul åzen wul tirädäge ber avylnyè mullasy itep tanytty. Kyqfätenä karaganda, hynnan da mulla tãsle ide ul. (G. Ibraçimov turynda istäleklär, Mãxämmät Bikbulatov.) He introduced himself as the mulla of a village in that area. Judging by his appearance, he really looked like a mulla. · Professornyè sãjlävenä karaganda, synaular äle tagyn æäelergä ... tora. (Atilla Rasix, Synau.) According to what the professor says, the experiments are about to be extended still more ... · Çava torywy turyndagy soègy mägâlåmatlarga karaganda, bezgä karwy kãhle davyl kilä. (Rafaïlá Mostafin, «Oæmax»ka säqxät.) According to the latest weather report (lit., report about the weather situation, state of the weather), a strong storm is coming towards us. [545] karamastan (negative future participle in the ablative of kara ‘look’) ‘despite’, ‘in spite of’: · Ul, qwá buluyna karamastan, bajtak kyna närsäne belä ... (Fatix Xãsni, Utyzynhy el.) Despite her being young, she knows quite a lot of things ... · Wulaj åzgärågä karamastan, ul mièa boryngy vakyttan da matur çäm sãjkemle kårende. (Mäæit Gafuri, Kara jãzlär.) In spite of having so changed, she appeared to me still more beautiful and charming than in the old days. [546] karap (verbal adverb of kara ‘look’). a) ‘towards’ (indicating direction): · Bez çaman bãek diègez ãstennän kyjbla qkka karap barabyz. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Diègezdä.) We are still traveling over the great sea towards the south. · Menä wuwy îl buenha kãnhygywka – Irtyw qgyna karap kitsäè, Kãktugajga baryp hygasyè. Kãnbatywka karap kitsäè, kaq baryp hygasyè? (Nurixan Fättax, Bala kåèele dalada.) If you travel along this road (here) towards the east, towards the Irtysh, you get to Köktughai. If you travel towards the west, where do you get? b) ‘according to’ (in proportion to): · Îrganyèa karap aqgyèny suz. (Proverb) Cut your coat according to your cloth (lit., Stretch your feet according to your blanket). · Ber jortta ïwne beteräbez dä ikenhesenä kåhäbez. Kajsynda ber kih kunyla, kajsynda ikene, ãhne. Ïwneè betåenä karap. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym – qwel biwek.) We finish work in one house and move on to the next. In some one night is spent, in others two, three – according to when the work is finished.

272

c) ‘by’, ‘according to’ (as stated or shown by): · ... kåp ohrakta bez kewe turynda anyè tywky kyqfätenä karap xãkem jãrtäbez ... (Mägâsåm Nasyjbullin, Telsez waçitlär.) ... in many cases, we judge (about) people by their appearance ... · Xäräkätlärenä karap, ãjgä keråheneè äbi ikänen hamaladyk. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) By her movements (i.e., by the manner in which she moved), we guessed that the one entering the house was the grandmother. d) ‘by’ (indicating means): · – Aj saen tãqp kilmäsä ni, minem äle qèadan sukmagan ber även arywym bar, ... – Îk inde, abyj, avylda tormagan kewegä äjt sin any, ..., sin inde wul ber även arywyèa karap qèa ikmäkkä kadär ahly-tukly torasyè, ... (Mãxämmät Gali, Kala keweläre.) “If I can’t bring a load (i.e., a load of oats to sell in the city) each month (of the year), so what. I still have one barn of rye not yet threshed ...” “No way, brother, you tell that to people who haven’t lived in the country (lit., village), ..., you really live by that one barn of rye, half-strarving until the new crop, ...” (Även: a structure /barn, shed, etc./ equipped for drying grain before threshing.) e) ‘on account of’ (on the basis of): · Menä bezgä ... ohragan ber kewe såzenä karap teläsä nindi duamal adymnar qsaudan saklanyrga kiräk. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) There, we must ... guard against taking any hasty steps whatsoever on the basis of the word of some man we have chanced to meet. f) (most frequently with aèa, aèar, wuèar) ‘in spite of (that)’, ‘all the same’, ‘for all that’: · Räjxtrman ... jãgerep hygyp kitte çäm kaqdyr kahty. Fäjzulla anyè artynnan kua hykkanda, ul îgalgan ide inde. Läkin aèa karap Fäjzullanyè ahuy basylmady. (Fatix Xãsni, Garmonáhy.) Reykhtrman ... ran out and fled somewhere. When Feyzulla, chasing after him, came out (from the house), he had already disappeared. But in spite of that (But nevertheless), Feyzulla’s anger did not abate. · ... Näsimäneè änise Gãlsem xanym Gäräjgä kyryn karyj, kyzynyè Gäräj belän dus buluyn telämi ... Näsimä belän Gäräj, aèar karap, älbättä, ohrawmyj kalmyjlar, ... (Safa Sabirov, Gäräjneè ber æäe.) ... Näsimä’s mother, Lady Gölsem, looks askance at Gärey. She does not wish her daughter to be friends with Gärey ... In spite of that, Näsimä and Gärey continue, of course, to meet each other, ... · Alar ozak kyna, matur gyna itep ujlawtylar, läkin aèa karap alarnyè tamaklary tujmady. (Fatix Xãsni, Garmonáhy.) They discussed (lit., thought) long and nicely together (how to earn some money), but for all that, they did not have enough to eat. · Kihäneè programmasy ... waktyj kåp närsä vägâdä itä ide. Wuèa karap, älbättä, bilet bäqläre dä tåbän kuelmagan. (Wärif Kamal, Taè atkanda.) The program of the soirée ... promised rather much. ... Therefore (Because of that), the ticket prices have not been set low, of course. · Mälikä xanymny mäktäpkä hakyryp, balasy ãhen oqltudan tuktamadylar. Malajga ãjdä dä ïläkmäde tågel. Läkin nihek kenä katy bulmasynnar, aèa karap, Mälikä xanymny mäktäpkä hakyru sirägäjmäde. (Fatix Xãsni, Moè.) They did not stop calling Mrs. Mälikä to the school and make her feel ashamed for her son. It’s not that the boy didn’t get it at home too. But however severe they were, calling Mrs. Mälikä to the school did not become less frequent. Note: Karap may function as a conjunction meaning ‘because’, ‘still’ (in the sense of ‘notwithstanding’). ·

Doktor beraz tuktap tora da, tagy såzeèdä dävam itä: – ... Xäleè avyr ikänen åzem dä kåräm. Läkin aèar bãtenläj birelergä, korgan plannarny ber kyznyè

273

aldavyna karap bolaj æimerep tawlarga qramyj. (Sadri Æäläl, Dim buenda.) The doctor paused a little and then continued: “... That your condition is serious I can see myself. But to abandon yourself completely to it and to throw out (destroy) the plans which you made just like that – because a girl deceived you is not proper.” [547] karata (verbal adverb of karat ‘cause to, make look’). a) ‘to’ (when addressing someone): · Min, turydan-tury åzemä karata kuelgan bu sorauga ni dip æavap birergä belmihä, aptyrap kaldym. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) I was at a loss, not knowing what answer to give to this question, which was put directly to me. b) ‘regarding’, ‘concerning’: · Dãres tågel, çärxäldä, mièa karata dãres tågel. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Idel xikäqte.) It is not true. At any rate, it is not true with regard to me. · Min åzem iæatyma karata tänkyjtá såze iwetmäsäm dä, mine gel maktap kilsälär dä, tänkyjtáne kiräk dip karyjm. (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) Though I myself do not hear any words of criticism with regard to my (literary) works, and although they always acclaim them (lit., praise me), I consider criticism necessary. · Bu mäsáälägä karata Xäkimovnyè nyklap ujlanylgan plany ... bar. (Mãxämmät Wäjmi, Synau.) Regarding this matter, Khäkimov has a thoroughly thought-out plan, ... c) ‘about’ (concerning), ‘towards’ (in relation to), ‘for’, ‘on’ (with regard to, concerning): · Väliwinnyè ïzen îgaltuga karata da Xäkimovnyè fikere bawkaharak ikän. (ibid.) Also about losing trace of Wälishin, Khäkimov’s opinion appeared to be somewhat different. · Tugan telebezgä karata mäxäbbät tärbiqli algan ukytuhy bäxetle ukytuhy ul. Kewe ruxyn tärbiqli algan ukytuhy ul. Rämziq apany min änä wundyj ukytuhy dip sanyjm çäm wuèa kårä dä bez, anyè wäkertläre, aèa karata kåèelebezdä räxmät xise saklap jãribez. (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) A teacher who is able to instill love for the native language certainly is a lucky teacher. He (She) is a teacher able to educate (a person’s mind). I consider Aunt Rämziä to be just such a teacher, and, therefore, we, her students, carry in our hearts a feeling of thankfulness towards her. · Sämitov tajgak îlda tågel ... Tyèlausyz ide, åz såzle ide ... Qwenä karata bujga-synga da zur çäm totrykly bulgangadyr, qwátäwlärenä ãstänräk karau gadäte dä bar ide. (Barlas Kamalov, Uramnar kièäq.) Sämitov was not straying from the straight and narrow ... He was recalcitrant, he was stubborn ... Perhaps because he was physically tall and strong for his age, he also had the habit of looking somewhat down on boys of his age. · Bu oewma avyllarda mäktäplär, kitapxanälär aha, tãrle fänni kitaplar, bigräk tä avyl xuæalygyna karata fajdaly bulgan närsälärne bastyryp tarata, îllar, kåperlär tãzätä ide. (Zarif Bäwiri, Zamandawlarym belän ohrawular.) This organization was opening schools (and) libraries in villages. It printed and distributed various scientific books, especially books which were useful for agriculture, (and) it repaired roads, bridges. · ... Xämit Gosmanov aldyngy ukuhylardan ide ... Wul horga xas bulgan tãrle mäåzugâlarga aeruha ädäbiqt mäsáälälärenä karata qzgan mäkalälären qrata idem. (Mirsäj Ämir, Åsä tãwkäh.) ... Khämit Ghosmanov was one of the foremost students ... I liked his articles on various topics pertaining to that period, particularly, literary subjects.

274

d) ‘towards’ (in direction of): · Mine iqrtep alyp kilgän tanywym kãlemseräp mièa karata iwarä qsady da: – Menä kunak alyp kildem sièa, – dide, ... (Zarif Bäwiri, Zamaèdawlarym belän ohrawular.) My acquaintance, who had taken me with him, smiled and, motioning towards me, said: “Here, I have brought you a guest, ...” [548] karatyp ‘according to’ (verbal adverb of karat ‘cause to, make look’): · – Menä bu älifba ysule mätdiqneè iè asat vä qèa kagyjdälärenä /qaôidðlðrenð/ karatyp tärtip kylyngan närsä, – dide mãgallim. (Wärif Kamal, Huar manzara.) “This alphabet here is something which has been arranged according to the easiest and newest rules of the phonetic method,” the teacher said. (ysule mätdiq ‘phonetic method’ – ysuly æädit ‘new method’, i.e., the new phonetic method used at the beginning of this century to teach reading and writing with the Arabic alphabet. – asat – (vernacular) – ansat) [549] kilgändä (past participle in the locative of kil ‘come’). ‘regarding’, ‘concerning’: · ... aèa ällä nindi ozyn wigyjrálär kiräkmi ... inde ... Un-unbiw îl æitä ... Qzu xakyna kilgändä, bez anysyn kyzganmabyz. (Zarif Bäwiri, Zamandawlarym belän ohrawular.) “... she does not need any long poems ... Ten or fifteen lines will do ... as to the writer’s fee (lit., writing fee), we shall not be stingy.” · – Xäzergä äjtåe kyen /qíin/. Berenhedän, ul äle kitmägän, ikenhedän, kemne sajlyjlar bit. Ä åzemä kilgändä, minem ãhen baryber. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) “For now it is difficult to say. First of all, he has not gone yet. Secondly, whom will they elect then. But as far as I am concerned, it is all the same.” [550] kårä (verbal adverb of kår ‘see’). a) ‘according to’, ‘by’ (as stated or shown by; in agreement with, in proportion to): · Xäsänneè iwetåenä kårä, bu kyz egetlärgä ber dä igâtibar itmi torgan ... kiberle kyz ide. (Fatix Ämirxan, Urtalykta.) According to what Khäsän heard, this girl was a presumptious girl who did not pay any attention to (young) men ... (kiberle – ropyp, ïre, täkkäbber). · Sägatemä /sðôðtemð/ kårä, sägatá ãh. By my watch it is three o’clock. · Ïwenä kårä awy digändäj, ajlygy – ãh jãz-ãh jãz ille sum. (Rämzi Maksudov, Wäjmorza keweläre.) One says one earns (lit., one’s meal is) according to one’s work – his monthly salary is three hundred, three hundred and fifty rubles. · ... çärkajsy, åzeneè däräæäsenä kårä, sädaka æyjnyjlar. Mullaga egerme biw tien ikän, mäzingä egerme, mäxdåmgä unbiw. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) ... each of them collects alms in accordance with his rank. If for the mulla it is twentyfive kopecks, for the muezzin it is twenty, for the mulla’s son fifteen. b) ‘at’ (in consequence of): · Marziqnyè kystavyna kårä ul, skamáq hitenä utyryp ... (ibid.) Upon Marzia’s urging, she sat down on the edge of the bench and ... (skamáq – ïskämiq, utyrgyh). c) ‘for’ (considering): · ... Kazanda ew-ew mädräsälär almawtyrgannan soè, 14-15 qwálek åsmer zamanyna kårä aldyngyrak sanalgan «Mãxämmädiq»dä qtyp ukyj bawlyj. (Ibraçim Nurullin, XX jãz bawy tatar ädäbiqty, Galiäsgar Kamal.) ... after frequently changing medreses in Kazan, the 14 or 15-year-old youth begins to live and study at the “Muhammediye” (medrese) which, for its time, was regarded as more progressive.

275

Inde unikedä bulsam da ... qwemä kårä bujga kehkenä çäm bik aryk idem. (Mirsäj Ämir, Bez bäläkäj haklarda.) Although I was already in my twelfth year (lit., in the twelve) ... I was small for my age and very thin. d) ‘because of’: · Mãbaräkne îawlygyna kårä, Båläkne haqlygy ãhen sãq bugaj ul. (Batulla, Sãembikä kyjssasy.) He (i.e., Khan Safa Gärey) loved Möbaräk because of his gentleness, Büläk for his boldness, it seems. · – Anysynda såz da îk, Xalyjk abzyj. Tik äle bawta ikelänebräk æavap biråeèä kårä kabatlap soravym. (Wärif Kamal, Nykly adymnar.) “That is not the issue, brother Khaliq. I am only repeating my question because, at first, you answered ( lit., because of your answering) somewhat hesitatingly.” e) ‘therefore’ (with the demonstrative pronoun wul): · Galimæan Xänäfi belän ahulanywmaska, såzgä kermäskä tyrywa ide. Wuèa kårä ul sabyr gyna æavap birde. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Ågi ana qfraklary.) Ghalimjan was trying not to get angry, not to have words with Khänäfi. Therefore he answered patiently. ·

[551] muafyjk (Arabic) ‘in accordance with’, ‘according to’, ‘corresponding to’: · Gajnikamal kartynyè çär elny, garäfä /ôðrðfð/ kih, wulaj kåèelsez bula torgan gadäten belä vä wuèar kårä wuèar muafyjk tãskä kerä vä xälgä muafyjk såzlär genä sãjli ide. (Fatix Ämirxan, Bäjrämnär.) Gheynikamal knew her husband’s (lit., her old man’s) habit of being melancholy like that every year on the eve of a religious holiday, and, therefore, she assumed a mien corresponding to that and said only things suited to the situation. · Maksatka muafyjk. According to the aim. [552] taba, taban a) ‘to’, ‘towards’ (in the direction of): · Qwákelt-sory tãstäge mawina ... timer kapka awa hygyp aïrodrom qgyna taba îl aldy. (Razil Väliev, Qwise kilä.) The greenish-gray car ... left through the iron gate and took the road to the airport. · Idelneè uè qgyndagy æirlärne – kãnbatywka taba Zãq elgasyna kadär çäm kãnáqkka taba xäzerge Tätew wäçärenä kadär bulgan æirlärne dä Kazan xanlygynyè tãp æirläre isäbenä kertergä mãmkin. (Tatarstan ASSR tarixy.) The territories on the right bank of the Volga, to the west as far as the river Sviyaga, and the territories to the south as far as the present town Tetyushi can also be included in the original territories of the Khanate of Kazan. · Ul ... Xalikâka taba ielep, anyè belän ozak kyna sãjläwte ... (Garif Axunov, Hiklävek tãwe.) He ... bent over towards Khaliq and talked with him for a rather long time. · Bez akrynlap kyna ãjgä taban atladyk. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) We walked slowly towards the house. b) ‘towards’ (indicating time): · Tãwkä taba kåk jãze ahylyp, kãn bãtenläj aqzyp kitte ... (Fatix Xãsni, Avyl ãstendä joldyzlar.) Towards noon the sky (lit., the face of the sky) brightened up, and the day became completely clear ... · Urak ãste æitkändä xalyk waktyj irken sulyj bawlagan ide inde. Æäj azaklaryna, kãzgä taba avyl æanlangannan-æanlana, qmálängännän-qmálänä bardy. (Mirsäj Ämir, Bez bäläkäj haklarda.) When the harvesting (time) was approaching, the people had already begun to breath rather freely (i.e., because the 276

harvest would end the lack of grain). Towards the end of summer and the (beginning of) autumn, the village became more lively, more pleasant. [553] xilaf (arch.) ‘against’, ‘contrary to’, ‘despite’, ‘notwithstanding’ (khiläf /Arabic/ ‘contrast’, ‘contrariety’): · ... Zina, Xäsänneè telävenä xilaf, az sãjli, ... ide. (F. Ämirxan, Urtalykta, 1912.) ... contrary to Khäsän’s desire, Zina was saying little, ... · Häj kueldy ... gadätkä xilaf ularak, minem aldyma ber wakmak wikär dä kujdylar. (Gabdulla Tukaj, Isemdä kalgannar, 1909.) Tea was served ... as an unusual thing, they put before me also a cube of sugar. (ularak, arch. bularak) [554] qkyn. As an adjective, qkyn means ‘near’, ‘close by’. When functioning as a postposition, it means a) ‘nearly’, ‘about’, approximately’: · Bu – urtaha tizlek sägatenä 35 kilometrga qkyn digän såz. (Mägâsåm Gäräev, Æièelmäs kapitan.) This means that the average speed is approximately 35 kilometers per hour. · Raziq. Äjdä, Änvär, uz. Bezgä inde sineè ike ajga qkyn kilgäneè îk. (Riza Iwmorat, Bistä kyzy Gãlsinä.) Raziä. Come on in, Änvär. You haven’t come to see us for nearly two months now. b) ‘(approximately) like’ (similar to): · Xalikâ ywanuga qkyn mägânä aèlata torgan tavyw belän Nägyjmneè såzen æåpläde (xuplady). (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) With a voice indicating something (lit., a meaning) like belief, Khaliq approved of Näghim’s words. · Bu xatnyè kemnän ikänlegen Mädinäneè jãräge wunda uk sizde. Läkin watlanudan bigräk anyè jãrägendä kurkuga qkyn ber tojgy tudy. (ibid.) In her heart Mädinä sensed (lit., Mädinä’s heart sensed) right away from whom this letter was. But rather than joy, there arose in her heart a feeling like fear.

Postpositions Governing the Nominative and the Ablative [555] soèra (soè ‘end’; ‘late’). Soèra is a dialect word1) which, as an adverb, means ‘afterwards’, ‘then’, ‘later’. As a postposition meaning ‘after’, soèra was used in the older Tatar literary language. In today’s Tatar literary language it is no longer used in this function, its equivalent being soè (see 567). When governing the nominative, soèra indicates order, with the ablative it indicates time: · Ãh-dårt båre berse soèra kaha berse, Ãhenhese, annan soèra dårtenhese ... (Gabdulla Tukaj, Käæä belän saryk xikäqse, 1910.) The three or four wolves are taking flight one after the other, The third one, after that the fourth ...

1) See T.T.A.C., volume 3, p. 665.

277

·

· Bezne Orski qgyna ... baryrga kuwalar. – Kajhan kitärgä. – Irtädän soèra kitärgä. (Mäæit Gafuri, Wagyjráneè altyn priiskasynda, 1929-1931.) “They are ordering us to go to Orsk ... When are we to leave?” “We are to leave after tomorrow.”

Note: soèra is the only postposition governing these two cases.

Postpositions Governing the Dative or the Ablative [556] kala (verbal adverb of kal ‘remain’, ‘stay’). 1. When governing the dative, kala means a) ‘from’ (indicating distance): · Äniläre qwägän jortka jãz ille-ike jãz metrlar hamasy kala, uram hatynda tuktaldy mawina. (Rinat Mãxämmädiev, Kenäri – hitlek kowy.) The car stopped at the street corner, about one hundred fifty or two hundred meters from the house in which her mother lived. · Min Almajga biw-alty hakrym kalarak Idel arâqgyna borylam. (Saet Wäkårov, Säxnäneè kyl urtasynda.) I am turning off to the other side of the Volga, about five or six versts before Almai. (For postpositions with +rak, +räk see 572.) b) ‘before’, ‘to’ (indicating time before): · Qèa aj bawyna qrty täålek kala ul da ... kuzgalyrga buldy. (Nurixan Fättax, Syzgyra torgan uklar.) Half a (twenty-four-hour’s) day before the beginning of the new month (or: new moon), he too decided to set out. (For o-rga, o-rgä with bulu see 1159). · Sägatá altyga un minut kala. At ten minutes to six. · ... bäjrämgä dårt-biw kãn kala, mäktäp iwegaldyna akly-karaly wakmaklar tãwerelgän mawina kilep tuktyj. (Gaziz Kawapov, Æir æylysy.) ... four or five days before the holiday, a black and white checkered car pulled into the schoolyard (lit., comes into and stops). 2. When governing the ablative, kala means a) ‘next to’ (indicating order): · Ul horda Kavi Näæmi minem ãhen, Taktawtan kala · bälki anyè belän ber däräæädä åkter äle – iè kyzykly qzuhy bulgandyr. (Mirsäj Ämir, Kazan.) Next to Taqtash – perhaps even in the same degree as he (lit., with him) – Qawi Näjmi was for me at that time probably the most interesting writer. Note 1: Kavi Näæmi (1901-1957). Tatar novelist and poet, author of numerous literary works. Note 2: Çadi Taktaw (1901-1931). One of the most outstanding Tatar poets, who also excelled in the fields of dramatics, prose, literary criticism and journalism. One of his most renowned works, his tragedy «Æir Ullary» (“Sons of the Earth”), is based on the biblical story of Cain and Abel. Written in a poetic form, it was first performed in 1923. Despite the comparatively short span of time of his literary activities, Taqtash had a deep influence on the subsequent development of Tatar literature.

Attan kala bezneè mäkalálärdä bezgä fajdaly syer, saryklar iè kåp urynny alyrga tiew kebek bulsa da, ït ala. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) Although it would appear that, next to the horse, cows (and) sheep, which are useful to us, should take the foremost place in our proverbs, the dog takes it. (For kebek with conjugated verbal forms see 576.) b) ‘except for’: · Äjlänä-tirädä dulagan æil-buran tavywynnan kala, bawka tavywlar îk ide. (Gurij Tavlin, Buran.) Except for the sound of the wind and the blizzard raging all around, there were no other sounds. ·

278

·

Berazdan Olq: – Irek, nigä mine ränæetäseè? – dide. – Minem sinnän kala ber qkyn kewem dä îk bit. (Gurij Tavlin, Afät.) After a little while, Olya said: “Irek, why do you hurt (offend) me? After all, except for you, I have no one else who is close to me.”

Postpositions Governing the Ablative [557] alyp (verbal adverb of al ‘take’, ‘receive’). a) ‘from’, ‘from ... on’, ‘since’ (indicating the beginning at a specified time): · Wul kãnnän alyp bez anyè belän jãrewä bawladyk, ... (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Tabigatá balalary.) From that day on he and I began to date each other, ... (lit., we, i.e., I, began to go with him). · Ikenhe ajnyè bawynnan alyp xezmät xakymny siksän sumga, bernihä ajdan soè jãz sumga kadär æitkerdelär. (G. Ibraçimov turynda istäleklär, Gyjniqtulla Teregulov.) From the beginning of the second month, they raised my salary to eighty rubles and after a few months, to a hundred rubles. b) ‘from’ (with a specified point or time as the first of two limits; with a specified quantity, measure, etc. the lowest of two amounts): Note: alyp is often used in conjunction with the postpositions kadär, tikle, xätle, hakly to form pairs denoting ‘from ... to’, ‘from ... till/until’.

Uramnan alyp inewkä tãwep æitkänhe, alabuga, kyhytkan, ärekmän basyp betergän buw æir æäelep qta. (Ämirxan Eniki, Tugan tufrak.) A vacant lot (parcel of land), which is completely overgrown with goosefoot, stinging nettle and burdock, stretches from the street until it reaches the brook. · ... ul wuwy täräzä qnyna ber utyryp, ber toryp any kãtte. Irtädän alyp tãngä xätle kãtte. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) ... she waited for him, now sitting down, now standing at this window. She waited for him from morning till night. (For ber ... ber see 651). · Çämmä kewe irtä åk torgan. Kartlardan alyp, bala-hagalarga kadär, xälle xälenhä kiengännär. (Mãxämmät Gali, Saban tuenda.) Everybody has got up early. From the old folks to the children, they have dressed according to their (financial) means. · Bugaznyè ... tiränlege egerme æide metrdan alyp jãz egerme metrga kadär. (Mirgaziqn Înys, Istambul çäm Såäew kanaly awa Qmängä säqxät.) The strait’s ... depth is from twenty-seven meters to one hundred and twenty meters. ·

[558] ary a) ‘beyond’ (farther away than; on the far side): · Tymyzyktan ary Naæar kièräk sular kårde – Kama, Bãek Idel. (Äxsän Baqnov, Argy qr.) Beyond the (river) Tymyzyq, Najar saw wider rivers (lit., waters) – the Kama, the Great Volga. · – Mièa monnan ary baryrga rãxsät îk. (Tatar xalyk äkiqtläre, Ak båre.) “I am not allowed to go beyond this (point).” · Alda bua, buada iske tegermän ... tegermännän ary ferma karaltylary kårenä. (Ämirxan Eniki, Tugan tufrak.) In front there is a pond (i.e., a pond created by damming a brook, etc.), on the pond there is an old mill ... beyond the mill, farm buildings are visible. 279

b) ‘from’ (indicating distance from, beyond a point): · Bezdän qrty gyna hakrym ary Kaenlyk digän avyl bar ide ... (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) Just half a verst from us (i.e., from our village) was the village of Qayynlyq /Qajínlíq/ (Birch Grove) ... · Urman bezdän ike-ãh hakrymnar ary ide. (ibid.) The forest was about two or three versts from us (i.e., from our village). c) ‘after’, ‘beyond’ (in a specified time): · – Min åz fikeremne qklauhylarny tabarmyn! Ä sezgä soè bulyr, åkenersez. Ujlagyz, – dide Îldawev. Wunnan ary inde alarnyè gäpläre alga tägäri almady. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) “I shall find people who will support my opinion! But for you it will be too late, you will regret it – think,” Yuldashev said. After that their talk could no longer move forward. · – Unbiw-egerme eldan ary barmas, minemhä, – dide Gyjlámanov. (Wärif Kamal, Nykly adymnar.) “In my opinion it will not go (i.e., last, continue) beyond fifteen or twenty years,” Ghilmanov said. d) ‘beyond’ (surpassing, exceeding, past the limits): · Ul tup-tury äjtte: – Sindä ãmet bar, Axunov. Xikäq ãhen kiräkle vakyjga tapkansyè. Läkin ostalygyè wul vakyjga tabudan ary uzmagan. (Garif Axunov, Joldyzlar kalka.) He put it straight to me: “You have prospects (of success), Akhunov. You have found a suitable plot for the story. But your proficiency has not gone beyond finding that plot.” · Boris belän aralar çaman ... suyna bara. Räsmi sãjläwådän ary kitew îk. (Äxsän Baqnov, Ut çäm su.) (His) relations with Boris continue to ... cool. They do not go (lit., there is no going) beyond official communication. · Beleme dårt syjnyftan ary uzmagan ... (Nurixan Fättax, Kihå.) His (formal) education did not go beyond the fourth grade (lit., beyond four classes) ... e) ‘more’ (with a connotation of ‘beyond’): · Beraz vakyt såzsez genä ïwlägäh, kartätäj åz aldyna zarlanyp kujdy. – Îkagah tawuy avyrajdy, – dide. – Ber barganda biw-altydan ary kåtärep bulmyj. Bik birewtem byel, ulym. (ibid.) After working silently for a little while, Grandpa, talking to himself, complained: “Fetching lindentrees has become difficult. I can’t carry more than five or six at a time (i.e., each time he goes). I have grown very weak this year, my son.” (Reference is to very young trees.) Note: kartätäj – Minzälä (Menzelinsk) and Orenburg (Orenburg) dialect – babaj.

– Aèa kara ... Kem aèa kyryk biwne birer? Utyz biwtän ary beräå dä birmäs. (Äxmät Fäjzi, Tukaj.) “Look at her ... Who would say that she is (lit., Who would give her) forty-five? Nobody would think her (lit., give her) more (i.e., older) than thirty-five.” · Xäsän. Åtkän el jomyrkalardan gyna egerme meè sum aldyk. Gadelwa. Egerme meè, ä? Menä bit ul akha kajda qta. Egerme! Mony alu ãhen bit jãz gektardan ary igen igärgä kiräk. (Riza Iwmorat, Serle moè.) Khäsän. Last year we made twenty thousand rubles on eggs alone. Ghädelsha. Twenty thousand you say? It’s here where the money is! Twenty (thousand)! Why, to earn that much, you have to grow more than one hundred hectares of grain. ·

[559] bawka (bawka ‘other’; baw ‘head’); ‘besides’, ‘except’, ‘without’: · Anyè hygyp kitåen minnän bawka beräå dä kårmäde ... (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) Nobody besides me saw him leave ... · – Æomgadan bawka kãnnärneè kajsy da qryj mièa. (Ämirxan Eniki, Gãländäm tutaw xatiräse.) “Any day except Fridays suits me.” 280

Tyn urmanda haègylarnyè æièelhä hyàlavynnan bawka çihnärsä iwetelmäde. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Zäègär irtä.) Except for the light swishing of the skis, one heard nothing in the quiet forest. · – ... sineè rizalygyènan bawka ul däå ïwne ïwläp bulmyj. (Garif Axunov, Hiklävek tãwe.) “... without your consent it is impossible to do that big thing.” (For the verbal adverb in o-p with bulu see 1258.) · · Sinnän bawka kãn îk mièa, Rokyq ... (ibid.) “Without you life (lit., the day) is nothing for me, Röqiä.” ·

[560] bawlap (verbal adverb of bawla ‘begin’). a) ‘from’, ‘from ... on’, ‘since’ (indicating the beginning at a specified time): · XV gasyr azagynnan bawlap Kazanda daimi ike bazar bulgan. (Tatarstan ASSR tarixy.) From the end of the 15th century on there were two permanent markets in Kazan. · – Kajhan îlga hygabyz? – Avgustta. Kãnen bergäläp ahyklarbyz. Wul kãnnän bawlap kåèelem belän Kazanda idem inde. (Mirsäj Ämir, Åsä tãwkäh.) “When are we going to leave?” “In August. We’ll fix the day together.” From that day on I was in my mind (lit., heart) already in Kazan. · Wul ellardan bawlap, Märáqm apa çaman ukytuhy bulyp kilde. (Mirsäj Ämir, Kåèelle säqxät.) Since those years (my) older sister Märyäm has always been a teacher. b) ‘from’ (with a specified point or time as the first of two limits). Note: bawlap is often used in conjunction with the postpositions kadär, tikle, xätle, hakly to form pairs denoting ‘from ... to’, ‘from ... until/till’:

Ohrakly îldawym ... åzeneè fikerläå-satawularyn wulaj Angarskidan bawlap Omskiga kajtyp æitkänhe sãjli-sãjli saruymny kajnatty. (Gurij Tavlin, Afät.) My chance traveling companion ... annoyed me, going on and on expounding his nonsensical ideas all the way from Angarsk until we arrived back at Omsk. · Kyphaklar XI jãzdän bawlap XIII jãzneè qrtylaryna kadär Idel çäm Dunaj elgalary arasyndagy dalalarda, Åzäk çäm Kãnbatyw Kazakstanda, Kara diègez buenda, Kyrymda çäm Kavkazda kåhmä kabilälär bulyp qwägännär. (V.X. Xakov, Tatar milli ädäbi teleneè barlykka kilåe çäm åsewe.) From the 11th century until approximately the middle of the 13th century, the Qypchaqs lived as nomadic tribes in the steppes between the Volga and Danube rivers, in Central and Western Kazakstan, along the Black Sea, in the Crimea, and in the Caucasus. ·

[561] birle (bire+le, bire ‘here’) ‘for’, ‘since’, ‘from ... on’ (continuously or without exception or interruption from the time given until now; during the period between the time given and now): · Äxmät any ike-ãh eldan birle belä. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) Äkhmät has known (lit., knows) him for two or three years. · Min Zãläjxa tutaw belän ber atnadan birle tanyw inde. (Kärim Tinhurin, Utyz ãh kãn.) I have been (lit., I am) acquainted with Miss Zöleykha for a week already. · Ul zamannardan birle inde utyz eldan artyk vakyt uzgan. (Mãxämmät Mäçdiev, Tornalar tãwkän æirdä.) Since those times more than thirty years have already passed. · Wul vakyttan birle min anyè belän bik dus qwädem. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) From that time on I became (lit., lived) very friendly with him. · Irtädän birle kårenmägän ... Soltan da kãndezge aw vakytynda bawkalar belän bergä alanlykka kilde. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) Soltan, who ... 281

had not been seen since morning, also came at lunch time to the glade together with the others. [562] boryn (boryn ‘ancient’; ‘nose’). a) ‘before’ (in preference to; having precedence of): · Xodajga doga kyjlyp, ber Qrkanat Wuwylajha doga kyjldy kabat-kabat ... Telägem kåp, läkin çämmäsennän boryn Æir jãzennän alsaè ide koqw nuryn ... (Mäæit Gafuri, Qrkanat belän Karlygah.) Praying to the Lord, a Bat Prayed thus again and again ... My wishes are many, but before all, If you would only take the sunlight off the face of the earth ... Note: kyjlyp, kyjldy are now spelled kylyp, kyldy.

b) ‘before’ (earlier than; preceding in time): · ... alar annan da boryn kajsy zamannarda hykkan, Bolgar horyndamy, bawkamy, alaryn bilgeläve kyen /qiín/. (Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláäre.) ... at what time before that (i.e., before the period of the Khanate of Kazan) they (i.e., ancient proverbs) originated, whether in the Bolghar period or in some other (period), (that) is difficult to determine. · ... ikese dä namazny istän hygarmyjlar, urazany ãh aj boryn sãjli vä kãtälär. (Wärif Kamal, Ïh powuly.) ... the two of them do not forget the prayer. They talk about and wait for the fast, three months ahead. · (ãh aj boryn, i.e., monnan (annan, wunnan) ãh aj boryn). [563] båtän (båtän ‘other’, ‘different’) ‘besides’, ‘except’ ‘(nothing) but’: · Maratnyè babasynnan båtän berkeme dä îk ide. (Äbrar Wämin, Gãrläveklär akkanda.) Marat had no one besides his grandfather. · Anda ... bala arbasy tägärätåhe qwá xatynnan båtän kewe kårenmäde. (Gurij Tavlin, Afät.) There ... was no one to see, except a young woman pushing a baby carriage. · Bez sièa, balam, izgelektän båtän ber ni dä telämibez. (Garif Axunov, Hiklävek tãwe.) We, my child, wish you nothing but good. [564] gajre /ôðjre/ (Arabic – ghair ‘other than’; ghaira ‘except’, ‘save’, ‘but’) ‘besides’, ‘except’, ‘save’: · Syerhyk oqsy xätle genä ãjlärennän, ãh-dårt baw saryklarynnan çäm ber käæälärennän gajre telgä alyp sãjlärlek mallary îk ide alarnyè. (Vakyjf Nurullin, Çälakät.) Besides their house, which was only as large as a nesting box for starlings, three or four heads of sheep and one goat, they had no property worth mentioning. · Zäègär kåk jãzendä alama ber bolyt kisägennän gajre berni kåzgä halynmyj. (Rãstäm Kutuj, Sãenhe.) Except for a thin shred of clouds, nothing catches the eye in the blue sky. · Kulynda ïwläpäsennän, taqgynnan gajre ber närsäse îk ide. (Ibraçim Gazi, Kyzyl tomannar artynda.) He had nothing in his hand except his hat and his walking stick. 282

Note: gajre means also ‘other’. Furthermore – mostly in the older language, infrequently in contemporary Tatar – gajre functions as a particle corresponding to such English negative prefixes as non+, un+, in+, etc. For example: gajre räsmi ‘nonofficial’, ‘unofficial’, gajre tabigyj ‘unnatural’, gajre mãmkin ‘impossible’, gajre ixtyqri ‘involuntary’.

[565] igâtibarän (arch.), (Arabic: i‘tibâran) ‘from’, ‘as of’, ‘beginning’ (indicating the beginning at a specified time): · Menä wul vakyttan igâtibarän bezneè tormywybyzda bertãrle åzgärå sizelä bawlady. (Wärif Kamal, Ber kartnyè tojgylary.) From that time on, a certain change began to be felt in our life. [566] mãkaddäm, mãkatdäm /mõqðddðm/ (Arabic: muqaddam ‘anteceding’, ‘preceding’) ‘before’, ‘ago’: · Menä anyè wäkert vakytynda, monnan unbiw el mãkaddäm aldyrgan portrety. (Fatix Ämirxan, Kartajdym, 1909.) Here is his portrait which he had taken fifteen years ago during his student days. · Xädihä – monnan 30-35 ellar gyna mãkatdäm... Bädretdin digän keweneè berdänber genä sãekle kyzy ulyp, unbiw-unalty qwáläre tulyp kilgändä ... tirä-qkta «Æaek Xädihä» dip dan totkan ber kyz ide. (Sägyjtá Rämiev, Galävetdin xaæi korbany – Æaek Xädihä, 1909.) Just about 30 or 35 years ago, ... Khädichä was born the only beloved daughter to a man called Bädretdin, and when she attained the age of fifteen or sixteen, she ... was a girl famous all around as “Khädichä from the (river) Ural”. (ulyp. obs. – bulyp). Note: In today’s literary language, mãkatdäm is used infrequently.

[567] soè ‘end’; ‘late’. a) ‘after’ (later in time): · Wul kãnnän soè avyl minem kåèelemne tarta bawlady. (Galimæan Ibraçimov, Kãtåhelär.) After that day, the village began to tug at my heart. · Ber-ike sägatátän soè min, saubullawyp, kitärgä æyendym. (Afzal Wamov, Avyr kãnnärdä.) After one or two hours I said goodbye and prepared to leave. · Häjdän soè min iwek aldyna hyktym. (Mirsäj Ämir, Kurkynyh urynnar.) After tea I went out into the yard. (iwek aldy, now spelled iwegaldy). · ... berenhe isänläwå såzlärennän soè, Fäezneè karawy ãstäldäge däftärlärgä tãwte. (Äxsän Baqnov, Ut çäm su.) ... after the first words of greeting, Fäyez’ eyes fell on the notebooks, which were on the table. · Æaek çäm Sakmar elgalary, tawudan soè, äle dä qrlaryna kire kajtmagan. (Atilla Rasix, Ajly tãnnär.) After the flood, the Ural and Sakmara rivers have still not retreated to their banks. b) ‘after’ (indicating order): · Stärletamak mäktäben tämamlagah, 1925 elnyè æäendä min Qèa Karamaly digän avylga kildem. ... Stärletamaktan soè mièa Karamaly bik fäkyjrá kårende. (Mirsäj Ämir, Åsä tãwkäh.) After finishing school in Sterlitamak I moved to the village of Yanga Qaramaly in the summer of 1925. ... After Sterlitamak Qaramaly appeared to me very poor. · Mondyj tavyw meè elga ber genä tuadyr. Bolaj uk ta moèly, bolaj uk ta tirän itep bu æyrny aèa kadär ber kem dä æyrlyj almagandyr, annan soè da bulmas... (Marselá Galiev, Ul hakta.) Such a voice is probably born only once in a thousand years. Before him no one probably had been able to sing this song in such a melancholy way, in such a soul-stirring way, and there will (perhaps) be no one after him either... 283

[568] totynyp (verbal adverb of totyn ‘begin’, ‘set about’, ‘get down to’) ‘from’ (indicating starting point): · [Fäjzulla] iè zur garmonánan totynyp iè kehkenä garmonága hakly, annary kiresenhä, iè kehkenäsennän totynyp iè zurysyna xätle, barlyk garmonánarynda da ujnady ... (Fatix Xãsni, Garmonáhy.) [Feyzulla] played on all the accordions, from the largest accordion to the smallest accordion, then, conversely, from the smallest to the largest ... [569] tyw (tyw ‘exterior’, ‘outer part’) ‘besides’, ‘in addition to’: · Gadäti hålmäklärdän tyw, biredä hit illärdän kiterelgän kyjmätle savytlar ... tabyldy. (S.S. Ajdarov, N.D. Aksenova, Bolgar wäçäre.) Besides ordinary earthenware, costly vessels ... imported from abroad, were found here. · Ãstäl tiräsendä däå apa belän Gazizädän tyw tagyn nindider ike qwá çäm ber kartrak xatyn awap utyralar ide. (Äxmät Fäjzi, Tukaj.) Besides the oldest sister and Ghäzizä, there were still some other women, two of them young, one elderly, sitting around the table and eating. · Ãstäl qnyndagy uryndyklarga utyrgan älege ike xatynnan tyw, aqgårä basyp toruhy bez biw kewe belän bålmäneè ïhe bãtenläjgä tulyp kitkän ide. (Zarif Bäwiri, Zamandawlarym belän ohrawular.) With us five men standing, in addition to the same two women, who were seated on chairs beside (at) the table, the room (lit., the interior of the room) had become completely crowded (lit., full). [570] ïlek (ïlek, adverb, ‘first’, ‘at first’). a) ‘before’ (earlier than, preceding in time): · Keråeènän ïlek hyguyèny ujla. (Proverb.) Before you enter think of your way out. · Bu xällärdän ber aj ïlek ... tymyzyk kål buenda Xäjri karmak salyp utyra ide. (Äbrar Wämin, Kamaj kåpere.) A month before these events ... Kheyri was sitting by the quiet lake ... casting his fishhook (lit., fishing rod). b) ‘ago’: · Min sièa monnan ike atna ïlek ike xat qzgan idem. Läkin æibärmihä kaldym. (Gadel Kutuj, Tapwyrylmagan xatlar.) Two weeks ago I wrote (lit., had written) you two letters. But I did not send them off. · [Firdiq] /Firdið/ ... monnan sigez el ïlek ... bulgan vakyjgalarny isenä tãwerde. (Räfkatá Kärami, Sagywly koqw.) [Firdiä] ... recalled the events which took place eight years before ... c) ‘before’, ‘above’ (ahead in order, rank, or importance): · Läkin ul, barynnan da ïlek, xezmät iqlärenä qwäå ãhen uèajly wartlar tudyruny kåzdä totyp tãzelgän. (Mirsäj Ämir, Kåèelle säqxät.) But it (i.e., the city) was built above all with a view to creating favorable living conditions for the employees. [571] äåväl This postposition is the Arabic equivalent of ïlek. As a postposition it is used rarely in today’s Tatar literary language: · Monnan biw el äåväl, min bu wäçärdä torgan elny, bu jort ... bãtenläj bolaj tågel ide. (Fatix Ämirxan, Ber xärabädä, 1912.) Five years ago, the year I lived in this town, this house ... was not at all like this (i.e., in this dilapidated state).

284

Majnyè ber qkwämbese, kãndezge sägatá ãhlär ide. Ber sägatá kenä monnan äåväl qvyp kitkän æièel qègyr wäçär uramnarynyè tuzanyn baskan ... ide. (Fatix Ämirxan, Xäqt.) It was a Sunday in May, about three o’clock in the afternoon. The light rain which had fallen just an hour ago had settled away (lit., covered) the dust of the city streets ... · Islamov, barynnan da äåväl, ïwhelär ãhen pewerelgän awny tatyp karady. (Fatix Xãsni, Zäègär æyr, 1935.) Before anything else, Islamov tasted the food cooked for the workers. ·

Postpositions with +rak, +räk [572] The suffix +rak, +räk is joined to postpositions used in their basic form as well as to nouns and adjectives functioning as postpositions. To the former it is joined directly, with the latter it is attached to the case endings. A postposition with the suffix +rak, +räk indicates relationship in an incomplete degree. Bu mäsáälädä åze kebegräk ujlagan bawka ber kyz belän duslawyp aldy. She made friends with another girl who thought more like herself in this matter. · – Käefem minem nahar tågel. Sälamätlek qxwyra, ... Ämma ruxym minem båtänhäräk. Tãwenke dimäs idem min any. Îk, tãwenke tågel! Läkin nihegräk dip aèlatyrga? Tyn kyrlar ãstenä qtkan kihke wäfäkâ vakyty kebegräk dimme, – åzem dä belmim. (Ämirxan Eniki, Jãräk sere.) “I am not in a bad mood (lit., My mood is not bad). (My) health is improving, ... But my state of mind is somewhat different. I would not call it depressed. No, it is not depressed! But, how is it ever to be explained? Should I say that it is somewhat like the time when the evening glow settles (lit., lies) over the quiet fields? I don’t know myself.” · Gãlnur. Min dä wul tirädä toram, Æägâfär kartta. Sälimæan. Äje, ul bezgä karwyrak kyna. (Fätxi Burnaw, Kamali kart.) Gölnur. I too live around there; with the old man Jäghfär. Sälimjan. Yes, he is (i.e., lives, dwells) just about opposite us. · – Sin minem buqularyma bala waqruy tãsleräk itep karyjsyè. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Idel xikäqte.) “You look at my paintings as if they were more like a child’s joke.” · – Qlynyrga tury kilde ..., – dide Räzinä, gaeple kewe symanrak mièa tury karamyj gyna. (Änisä Ibraçimova, Toman tarala.) “One had to beg ...,” Räzinä said, much like a guilty person, not looking straight at me. · Tyn gyna akkan elgaga ujga talyp karap torganda waulawkan tavywlar iwetelde. Qr ãstenäräk mendem. (ibid.) While, immersed in thought, I was looking at the slowly flowing river, there was the sound of loud voices. I climbed a little more up the bank. · Ul, ..., qk-qgyna karangalap aldy çäm, qnymarak kilep, «tyèla, seremne aham», dip pywyldady, ... (ibid.) ... she repeatedly looked around (herself) and, moving (lit., coming) closer to me, she whispered: “Listen, I am going to reveal my secret,” ... (For the suffix -gala, -gälä see 1310, 2; 1311, a-c.). · Gajniq mih qnynda nider ïwli. ... Mädinä änise qnyndarak basyp tora. (Riza Iwmorat, Mädinä.) Gheyniä is doing something beside the stove. ... Mädinä is standing fairly close to her mother.

285

Postpositions with +gy /ôí/, +ge /ge/, +ky /qí/, +ke /ke/ [573] The suffix +gy, +ge, +ky, +ke is joined directly to certain postpositions used in their basic form. With nouns and adjectives functioning as postpositions and taking case endings, +gy, +ge is attached to the locative case (+da+gy, +dä+ge, +ta+gy; +tä+ge). A postposition augmented by the suffix +gy, +ge, +ky, +ke becomes an attribute to the noun following it while at the same time retaining its character and function as a postposition. · Bu sorauga æavap birå ãhen bez Gosman atly malajnyè moèa kaderge tormywyna da kåz salyrga tiew bulabyz. (Rawat Nizamiev, Kar kewe.) To answer this question (i.e., the question of why he ran away from home), we must take a look at the life the boy called Ghosman has had up to now. · Monnan ike el äåvälge Äsma æuqlyp, anyè urynyna tagy kihäge Äsma, ... kilep basty. (Fatix Ämirxan, Sångäh.) The Äsma of two years ago faded away, (and) in her place stepped again the Äsma of yesterday, ... (æuqlyp – vernacular, îgalyp). · Wul arada avylnyè Sakmarga tabangy bawynda ... ït ulagan tavyw iwetelde. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) At that moment the ... barking of dogs was heard (or: one heard the ... barking of dogs) at the village end which lay towards the Sakmara (river). · Ul dårt syjnyf avyl mäktäben åtkän kywtan ïlekke kywyn betergän ide. (ibid.) She had finished the four-grade village school the winter before last (winter). · Sämigullin Fätxineè ul turyndagy fikerlärenä kåwylganlygyn belderde ... (ibid.) Sämighullin stated that he concurred with Fätkhi’s thoughts about that. · Tãwke aw vakytynda çämmäse dä Tyn elga buendagy matur alanlykka æyeldy. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) At lunch time, all (of them) gathered together at the beautiful glade (which was) on the Tyn river. · – Tyrywkannar bit, Wärifä, – dide Ruwad, bålmä urtasyndagy gadi uryndykka utyryp. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Idel xikäqte.) “They surely did their best, Shärifä,” Rushad said, sitting down on the simple chair, which stood in the middle of the room. · Urman ïhendäge æyly ãjdä aw gaæäp tämle toeldy. (ibid.) In the warm house (which stood) in the forest the meal seemed amazingly tasty. · Menä alar universitet aldyndagy bakhaga kilep æittelär. (Gabdraxman Minskij, Qznyè berenhe kãne.) Here they arrived at the park (which was) in front of the university. Note: When not used in their function as postpositions, nouns, adjectives, adverbs, etc. augmented by the suffixes +gy, +ge, +ky, +ke, +dagy, +däge, +tagy, +tege become relational adjectives (comp. 248, 251). ·

· · ·

·

286

Soègy vakytlarda hirek gasyr hamasy ellar ïhendä tatar ädäbiqty çäm tatar tele tarixynyè boryngy horlary turynda aerym xezmätlär, mäkalälär kårende. (Boryngy tatar ädäbiqty, Kerew.) During recent times (and) within approximately a quarter century special works and articles appeared about the ancient periods of the history of Tatar literature and Tatar language. Annan soè äåvälge tynyhlyk urnawty. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) After that the previous calm settled in again. [Imäli] ... iè arttagy uryndykka gyna utyrdy. (ibid.) [Imäli] ... sat down on the very farthest seat in the back. Algy bålmägä bajtak kewe hakyrylgan, ä ïhke bålmädä bîro utyrywy bara. (Mãxämmät Wäjmi, Synau.) A lot of people have been called to the anteroom, but in the inner room an office meeting is taking place. Qkyndagy un el ïhendä ... (Marselá Zaripov, Otywly äjlänew.) In the next ten years ...

The expanded form kadärle (532) of the postposition kadär may also function attributively. · Sentqbrá kerå belän ... unbiw balany tuplap, ukyta bawlady. Bolar – berenhedän alyp dårtenhegä kadärle balalar ide. (Xäsän Saráqn, Æäza.) As soon as September arrived ... she gathered together the fifteen children and began to teach. They were children from the first to the fourth grade. · Anda [Islam] meè tãrle radioalgyhlar æyjdy, papiros tartmasy kadärle genä tranzistorlar qsady. (Mäxmåt Xäsänov, Inàenerlar.) There [Islam] assembled radio sets of many (lit., a thousand) different kinds, (and) he made transistors (which were) only the size of a cigarette pack.

Substantivized Postpositions [574] The postpositions kebek, syman/symak, wikelle, tãsle, kadär, tikle, xätle, hakly indicating comparison, and a few others, such as bawka and karwy, as well as postpositions with the suffix +dagy, +däge, +tagy, +täge, may be substantivized. They are then treated as any other noun; they may be put into the plural, may take possessive suffixes and case endings, be the object of a verb or even of another postposition, without, however, losing their character and function as postpositions: · Andyjlar siräk, ä bezneè kebeklär belän dãnáq tuly. (Äxsän Baqnov, Ut çäm su.) Such (i.e., engineers) are rare, but the world is full with the likes of us. · Fänåzä kebekläre îk anda ... (Wamil Bikhurin, Tirän katlam.) There arn’t any there like Fänüzä ... · – Min dä ãjlänäm! Sineke kebek matur xatyn alam! – Tabarsyè mikän mineke kebekne... – dip kãlde Xälim. (Ibraçim Gazi, Kanatlanyr hak.) “I too shall get married! I shall take a woman who is as pretty as yours!” “I wonder if you will find one like mine,” ... Khälim said, laughing. · ... minut saen kãhäq bargan suyktan ... barmy-îkmy îrgan kebegeène tartybrak qbynu belän genä dä kotyla almyjsyè. (Mirsäj Ämir, Kazan.) You cannot escape from the cold, which is increasing by the minute, just by ... pulling that something like your scanty blanket more over you. · Anyè bik ansat kyna, såzläreneè mägânäsenä îw kilep kenä tora torgan kãj symany da bar ide. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym-qwel biwek.) It (i.e., the poem) had also something like a melody which was very simple (and) which corresponded to the meaning of its words. · Asyl suga batmas, dip sineè wikellelärne äjtkännär, kyzym. (Afzal Wamov, quoted by Näkyj Isänbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) Saying that a precious thing will not go under, they meant (lit., spoke, said) the likes of you, my daughter. · 8 nhe sanga bar kadäremne æibärdem. (Gabdulla Tukaj, Zäjnäp Xäsänigä.) For the 8th issue I sent you all I had. · Sylunyè haqlygyn min qxwy belä idem. Wulaj da bu kadärgä baryp æitär dip ujlamagan idem. (Gadel Kutuj, Niwlärgä.) I knew Sylu’s boldness well. However, I had not thought that she would go as far as this (that she would go to this extent). · Bu tiklesen Îldawev bik ahyk tãwenä. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) This much (as this) Yuldashev understands very clearly. · Ïw inde bu tiklegä æitkäh, kranhy kauwyjrak kaldy çäm æavap kajtaru urynyna åze sorady ... (ibid.) When it got to this point, the crane operator (girl) became somewhat frightened and, instead of answering, she herself asked ...

287

·

·

· ·

·

·

Nindi genä hähäklär îk monda! ... Vak kyna kågärhen kåze xätlelärennän alyp, oly keweneè jodrygy zurlygy hähäklär ... (Äxmät Fäjzi, Tukaj.) What f lowers there are here! ... From those as small as a pigeon’s eye (to) f lowers the size of an adult person’s fist ... Ïw äjbät bara, bu haklysynda Zinèurnyè wige îk ide. Tik menä wuwy kãnnärdä kilep tãwkän Xämidä anyè tynyhlygyn bozdy da kujdy. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) Work is progressing (lit., going) nicely; about this much Zinnur had no doubt. But Khämidä, who had recently arrived unexpectedly, spoiled his peace of mind. Sybyzgy qsaudan bawkany belmäde, ber genä çãnäre îk ide. (Rãstäm Kutuj, Sãenhe.) He did not know anything except making whistles. He had not one trade. – Iptäwlär, Nägyjmgä såz birå qgynda bulgan kewelär kullaryn kåtärälär, karwylar toryp kalalar. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) “Comrades, those of you who support allowing Näghim to speak raise their hands, those opposed stand up.” Ukygan æide kat æir astyndagyn kårä, ukymagan æir ãstendägen dä kårmi. (Näkyj Isäèbät, Tatar xalyk mäkaláläre.) An educated person (lit., he who has studied) sees what is under seven layers of the earth (i.e., he is clever, quick-witted), an uneducated person (lit., he who has not studied) does not even see what is above ground. Boryn astyndagyn qxwy belmi, botak bawyndagyn belgän. (ibid.) That which is under his nose he does not know well, (but) that which is on top of the branches he finds out (lit., has found out). (Said about people who do not see their own faults but judge others.)

Postpositions with Relational Adjectives [575] The postpositions kebek, syman, symak, tãsle and wikelle, governing a relational adjective, indicate that the condition, state exists at a certain place or time, or that the action is carried out, in the same manner as at the time or place expressed by the adjective. · Balalar Kyrlaj mädräsäsendäge kebek säkegä qisä kory idängä tågel, belki täbänäk kenä tar çäm ozyn ãställär arasyna kerep dårtär-dårtär bulyp tezelep utyralar. (Äxmät Fäjzi, Tukaj.) The children do not sit on plank-benches or on the bare floor as they do in the medrese at Qyrlai but enter between rather low, narrow, long desks and sit in rows of four each. · Ozak ta åtmäde, kothykkyh kärvan baqgy kebek æil-davyl kuptaryp, kire äjlänep kajtty çäm Gosmanovlarnyè kapkasy aldynda tuktaldy. (ibid.) It was not long before the frightening caravan with great noise and commotion as before turned back and stopped dead in front of the Ghosmanovs’ gate. · Gabdulla xäzer ïlekke kilåendäge syman kewelärgä ise kitep karamyj ... (ibid.) Now Ghabdulla does not look at the people with amazement as he had on his previous visit (lit., coming) ... · ... toman da taraldy çäm, näkâ äkiqttäge syman, anyè ïhennän ber kyz kilep hykty. (ibid.) The mist dispersed, and, as in a story, a girl emerged from it. · Eget ... kyzurak atlyj bawlady. Äjterseè, any ozatkan kihtäge wikelle zarygyp Näsimäse kãtep tora. (Gomär Bäwirov, Sivaw.) ... the young man began to walk faster as though his Näsimä were waiting, yearning for him as on the evening when she saw him off.

288

·

·

· ·

·

Agyjdel! Räsemdäge tãsle matur, äkiqttäge tãsle serle, æyrdagy tãsle moèly elga ul Agyjdel! (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) The Belaya! A river as beautiful as in a picture, as mysterious as in a story, as tuneful as in a song. The Belaya! Urman kary kuzgalgah, taudan ... gãrlävek-tawkynnar tãwte, ä ul bawka ellardagy tãsle, ajly kihtä, kapka baganasyna arkasyn teräp su tavywyn tyèlap xozurlanmady. (Aqz Gyjläæev, Æomga kãn, kih belän.) After the snow in the forest melted (lit., moved), streams came rushing down from the mountain ... but, she did not listen and enjoy the sound of the water on moonlit evenings, leaning her back against the gate-post as she had in other years. Bu aèa tãwtäge symagrak bulyp toeldy. (Nurixan Fättax, Bala kåèele dalada.) She felt this was more like (in) a dream. «Beräåneè dä ãendä bezdäge kebek avyr xäsrät îktyr», · dip ujlana Rãstäm. (Räisä Iwmoratova, Qzmywlar.) “There is, perhaps, in no one else’s house such a deep sorrow as with us,” Röstäm muses. Bålmä ïlektäge tãsle åk karaègyga humyp, tynyp kaldy. (Kärim Tinhurin, Utyz ãh kãn.) The room sank into darkness and became quiet just as before.

Note: The above constructions correspond to English adverbial prepositional phrases led in by ‘as’ or ‘like’.

Postpositions with Conjugated Verbal Forms [576] The postpositions kebek, syman, symak, tãsle, wikelle and hamasy, when used with conjugated verbal forms, express uncertainty, doubt; in English mostly expressed by ‘to seem’, ‘to appear’ (in the sense of ‘to appear to one’s own mind or opinion), ‘as if’, ‘as though’ (in the sense of ‘supposedly’, ‘seemingly’). Note: In this use hamasy corresponds to kebek, wikelle.

Ul bik nyk åzgärde, xolky da almawyndy kebek. (Tabdraxman Äpsälämov, Idel xikäqte.) He changed very much. His character too seemed to have changed. · Vallaçi, urmanda kyw åtkärsäm, savygyp kitär idem tãsle. (ibid.) By God, if I spend the winter in the woods, I might regain my health (it would seem that I would regain my health). · Barysy da tärtiptä syman, çämmäse åz urynynda kebek, barlyk kyrwaular da çihni kermäslek çäm hykmaslyk itep qbywtyrylgan tãsle. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) All seems to be in order, all appears to be in its place, all the hoops seem to have been welded in such a manner that nothing can penetrate or (lit., and) escape. · Galimä belän boryngy kebek sãjläwäsem, any åzem belän sãjläwteräsem kilsä dä, moèa îl îk kebek, qramas kebek bulyp kårenä, xäzer såz bawlarga kilewmäs tãsle bula ide. (Mäæit Gafuri, Kara jãzlär.)Although I would like to talk with Ghälimä, to have her talk with me as (we did) in former times, it appeared as though there was no way for that, as though it would not be proper. It seemed like it would not be fitting to start a conversation now. (For the participle in -asy, -äse and kilå see 1143.) · Æil akrynajgan. Bolytlar da tarala kebek. (Riza Iwmorat, Vatan.) The wind has slowed down. The clouds too seem to be dispersing. · – Baram dip äjtkänem îk ih min sièa. – Mièa wulaj toeldy. Baryrga riza bulgan wikelle buldyè. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) “I didn’t say to you that I would go, did I.” “To me it appeared that way. You seemed to agree to go.” ·

289

Nahar joklagan, kåräseè: kåzläre wewenep hykkan ide. Nidänder kurka, sagaq symak. (Äbrar Wämin, Qnar tauny kihkändä.) He had slept badly, it seems. His eyes were swollen. He appeared (lit., appears) to be afraid, to be wary of something. · Sämigullin da anyè bu syjfatlaryna tiskäre qktan karap æitkermi hamasy. (Wärif Kamal, Nykly adymnar.) Sämighullin too does not seem to look (i.e., does not seem to have come to look) at these character traits of his from the negative side. (For æitkerå as an auxiliary verb see 1375.) ·

[577] The postpositions kebek, syman, symak, wikelle and tãsle may be used in pairs to express cautious comparison. It is possible to combine any two of them in any sequence, but by far the most common combination is kebek wikelle (in this sequence). · Gãlsinä (ukyj). «Åze matur, åze sãjkemle, åze usal ...» Nihek, nihek? Änvär. «Åze ber dä usal tågel kebek wikelle». (Riza Iwmorat, Bistä kyzy Gãlsinä.) Gölsinä (reads). “She is beautiful, she is lovely, she is naughty ...” What, what? Änwär. “She seems as not to be naughty at all.” Note: The use of åze before each of several homogeneous adjectives intensifies, puts special emphasis on the meanings expressed by the adjectives (comp. also 409). ·

Anyè qratuy da hyn syman wikelle bit. (Wäjxi Mannur, Hyn sãî barmy?) It seems as though her love too is true after all.

[578] Some postpositions (for example: arkyly, awa, karwy) may enter into a close relationship with verbs. In such formations, the postposition loses its original function and serves as an auxiliary element which (very much like the German verbs with separable prefixes) either indicates the direction of the action expressed by the basic verb or serves to form new verbs with a different lexical meaning. Furthermore, a postposition in this function no longer governs an object, the cases of both the direct and indirect object being determined by the verb. For example: arkyly hygu ‘to cross’, ‘to get across’; arkyly tãwå (kilå) ‘to cut somebody off’, ‘to prevent, hinder’; karwy alu ‘to meet’, ‘to receive’ (the latter in the sense of ‘to greet, welcome’). · Ãh kãnnän soè bez jortnyè täräzäsenä arkyly takta kagyp, kola biqne arbaga æigep ... îlga hyktyk. (Garif Axunov, Xuæalar.) After three days we boarded up the windows (nailed boards across the windows), harnassed the light bay mare to the wagon ... and set out on the road. · Kamil ... oly îlny arkyly hygyp, Ak hiwmägä menä torgan kiè sukmakka tãwte. (Gomär Bäwirov, Æidegän hiwmä.) Kamil ... crossed the highway and came onto the broad path which climbed (lit., climbs) up to Aq Chishmä (White Spring). · Vadim belän Donna any tuktalywka hygyp karwy aldylar. (Mädinä Malikova, Qnartaular qktysynda.) Vadim and Donna went out to the (bus) stop and met her. · ... soldatlar alarny tiräli holgap aldylar. (Sadri Æäläl, Inde min aèa ränæemim.) ... the soldiers surrounded them. · Note also: alga baru ‘to advance’, ‘to progress’; aldan kårå ‘to foresee’; aldan äjtå ‘to predict’; artta kalu ‘to remain behind’, ‘to be backward’; soèga kalu ‘to be late’; ãskä hygu ‘to gain, win a victory (over).’

Use of Prepositions in Tatar [579] The older Tatar literary language (including the language of Tatar classical literature) made use of some Arabic and Persian prepositions. Depending on the preposition, relationship with its object is established by 290

a) Placing the preposition before its object: · Fi axyrel gomer – gomereneè azagynda (or: axyrynda) ‘at the end of someone’s life’. · Täère gyjwkynda wäçadät itsälär där Gärbäla Bän (Min) wäçidem där mäxäbbät, där bälaem, niläem (ni ïwlim)? (Gabdulla Tukaj, Därdemänd dägelmiem? 1906.) In contemporary Tatar: Ägär Gärbäladä täère gyjwkynda wäçit bulsalar, Min mäxäbbät îlynda, bäla îlynda wäçitmen, ni ïwlim? (Xäsrät higåhe tågelme min?) If in Kerbala they become martyrs in love of God, I am a martyr in (by way of) love, in (by way of) sorrow, what can I do? (Am I not a mourner?) b) Merging prepositions with the Arabic definite article and joining both to their object: · Îk tägali, gawyjka bäjnel-äçali ta äbät, Sanki bän (min) täxtässäradä ber säraem, niläem (ni ïwlim). (ibid.) In contemporary Tatar: Gawyjklar kewelär arasynda berhakta da ãsten bula almyjlar, Gåq min tufrak astynda ber bãrtek tåfrakmyn, ni ïwlim? People in love can never prevail among other people. I am like a grain of soil under the ground (beneath the soil), what can I do? (tägali – bãek bulu ‘to be, become great’, bäjnäl-äçali – xalyk arasynda ‘among people’, äbät – mäège ‘eternal’, ‘ever’, sanki – gåq /gyjð/ ‘as if, though’, ‘like’, täxt – astynda ‘under’ sära · tufrak ‘soil’, ‘grain of soil’). · Bilaxyr – axyrda ‘in the end’; bililtifat – iltifat belän, igâtibar belän ‘with attention’, ‘with interest’. c) Joining prepositions directly to their object: Batärtip – tärtip belän ‘with order’, bixäbär · xäbärsez ‘without news’, bixisap – xisapsyz ‘countless’, bitaraf ‘neutral’, biçuw – çuwsyz ‘unconscious’. d) Connecting prepositions to their object by the Persian izafet: täxte täsarryf – beräåneè æitäkhelege astynda ‘under someone’s supervision, control’, xilafe kanun – kanunga karwy ‘against the law’. For example: · Kyhkyryp torgan xilafe kanun ïw kylgansyè. (Barlas Kamalov, Uramnar kièäq, 1972.) You have done something which is glaringly against the law. (Lit., You have done a thing against the law which cries out). Note 1: Xilaf is also used as a postposition governing the dative (compare 553). Note 2: Some prepositions, like täxt, ba, or fi, have become completely obsolete. Others, such as bi (see under c. above), or där – därxäl ‘immediately’, ‘at once’, därräå · ‘right away’, ‘suddenly’, are still used in some compounds.

291

CHAPTER VI ¡ ADVERBS General characteristics and Formation of Adverbs [580] Adverbs are words which modify verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs. They indicate various circumstances of action or the state of a person, thing, etc., his (her, its) quality, or condition. Tatar adverbs may be simple, derivational, or compound. Furthermore, nominal and verbal forms, as well as word combinations in the function of adverbial modifiers, may be used as adverbs. Accordingly,Tatar adverbs may be divided into: 1) simple adverbs; 2) derivational adverbs; 3) compound adverbs; 4) adverbs (adverbial phrases) formed by means of case suffixes; 5) adverbs (adverbial phrases) formed with the possessive suffix of the third person; 6) adverbs (adverbial phrases) formed with bulyp and itep; 7) adverbs (adverbial phrases) formed with kilew, kãe /kõje/, (kãenhä, kãjgä, kãenä), rävewtä (rävewle, rävewhä), surättä, tãstä, uèajga, xäldä; 8) adverbs formed with other postpositions; 9) verbal adverbs.

Simple Adverbs [581] Simple adverbs are words which modify verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs without changing their basic form: inde ‘already’, ‘now’, ‘no longer’, ‘any more’, xäzer ‘now’, tiz ‘fast’, ‘quickly’, îri ‘purposely’, ‘on purpose’, æäqå ‘on foot’, qxwy ‘well’ (as adjective: good), matur ‘beautifully’ (as adjective: beautiful), dãres ‘correctly’ (as adjective: correct), irtä ‘early’ (as noun: morning), vakyt ‘when’ (as noun: time). · Ul tatarha qxwy sãjläwä. He speaks Tatar well. Min sezne qxwy aèlyjm. I understand you well. Byel /Bùíl/ kyw soè kilde. This year winter arrived late. Ul elny qz bik irtä kilde. That year spring came very early. Sez bik qwá äle. You are still very young. · Qxwy æyewtyrylgan bålmä. (Kärim Tinhurin, Nazly kiqå.) A well-kept room. · Ramazan, xatynnar akryn åzara sãjläwälär ... (ibid.) Ramazan and the women are conversing in a low voice ... · Lalq kerä. Matur kiengän. (Mirxäjdär Fäjzi, Asylâqr.) Lalä enters. She is dressed beautifully. · Ikenhe kãnne Ajzat bålmädägelärneè barysynnan da soè uqndy. ... Petr Petrovih näkâ kihäge urynynda, näkâ kihägehä häj ïhep utyra. Ajzatka elmaep karady da: · Xäerle irtä! Qèa urynda äjbät jokladyèmy? · dide. (Gaziz Mãxämmätwin, Jãräktäge ïzlär.) The next day Aizat awoke later than all the other people in the room. ... Peter Petrovich was sitting exactly where he had sat the day before and was drinking tea just as he had the day before. Smiling, he looked at Aizat and said, “Good morning! Did you sleep well in your new spot? “ · Isak. ... Ätählär kyhkyra... (... sägatá karyj). Sägatá inde dårt bula. (Fätxi Burnaw, Qwá jãräklär.) Isaq. ... The cocks are crowing... (... he looks at the clock.) It is already four o’clock. · Räjxan. Äbiem! Bez utyrtkan almagahlarnyè almasy barmy inde? (Wärif Xãsäenov, Äniemneè ak kålmäge.) Reykhan. Grandma! Do the apple trees we planted have apples yet? · Färit. Kaldyr sin any! Ul bit inde kehkenä bala tågel. (Wärif Xãsäenov, Zãbäjdä · adäm balasy.) Färit. You leave her alone! After all, she is not a little child any more. 292

Menä buw klassta, ãstäl qnynda ul beråze utyra, inde ber bala da aèa berär jomyw belän mãräæägatá itmäs. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Qwel qr.) Here she is sitting all alone at the desk in the empty classroom. No longer will even one child with some need turn to her (seeking advice). The simple adverb hak has several meanings, and depending on these meanings, it requires the verb (or verbal form) it modifies in either the negative or the affirmative. a) Hak can be a restrictive adverb indicating that the action expressed by the predicate verb is (was) almost performed. The verb is in the negative: · Watlygymnan hak kyna kyhkyryp æibärmädem. (Näbi Däåli, Koqwka jãz belän.) I almost cried out with joy. · ... milicionerlarnyè berse waktyj ozyn gäådäle ide. Anyè ... kara bårege hak kyna tåwämgä timäde. (Räfkatá /Rðfqðt/ Kärami, Kargalyw îllar.) ... one of the militiamen was very tall. His black cap ... almost touched the ceiling. · Sadyjk kart kurkuynnan kinät sikerep, hak kyna arka ãstenä egylmady. (Wärif Kamal, Nykly adymnar.) Suddenly jumping with fear, old Sadiq almost fell on his back. b) Hak may indicate that the action is performed with some measure or degree of effort or difficulty. The verb modified by hak is in the affirmative: · Bez xäzer bu akhalar belän nilär genä ïwlämäbez, ... Watlyk ïhemne kytyklyj, hak tåzep utyram. (Näbi Däåli, Koqwka jãz belän.) What aren’t we going to do (i.e., we are going to do many things) with this money ... Joy is tickling my innards, and I am sitting here, hardly able to contain myself. c) Hak may indicate that the action of the verb it modifies is performed to a slight extent or degree. The verb is in the affirmative: · ... Mädinäneè jãzendä ... hak-hak kyna sizelerlek watlyk elmaîy ujnyj ide. (Wärif Kamal, Nykly adymnar.) ... a hardly noticeable smile of happiness played over Mädinä’s face. · ... ul Fätxine kårep algah ta ïwendä dävam itep, hak kyna kãlemserägän xäldä ïndäwmihä any karwylady. (ibid.) ... even after seeing Fätkhi, she continued with her work and received him, smiling just a bit without saying anything. d) Hak may express a polite request, while at the same time encouraging the interlocutor to agree to, or to perform, the action requested. The verb is in the affirmative: · · Qrar, Näsimä æiègine çäm anyè borhyluyn hak kyna hitkä kuep toryjk, Xalyjk abzyj. · Hak kyna tågel, sin any bãtenläj hitkä kuep tora alasyè da bit ... (Wärif Kamal, Nykly adymnar.) “All right, let’s just leave (lit., put) Aunt Näsimä and her worries aside for a moment, Uncle Khaliq.” “Not just for a moment – (as far as I am concerned,) you can leave (put) her aside for good...” ·

Note: The adverb hak is frequently used with the particle kyna.

Derivational Adverbs [582] Derivational adverbs are formed by means of suffixes. Such suffixes are: [583] +daj, +däj, +taj, +täj This suffix, which is subject to both vowel harmony and initial consonant change, is joined to nouns (including proper nouns), relational adjectives, personal pronouns (except that of the 3rd person singular), demonstrative pronouns in the plural, and to participles (for the latter see 1080-1082; 1112, 1113). 293

1. Attached to nouns in the singular or plural, to personal pronouns and to demonstrative pronouns, it forms adverbs indicating comparison, similarity of the quality inherent in the person or thing denoted by the noun or pronoun: aîdaj taza ‘strong as a bear’; tãndäj karaègy ‘dark as night’; îl uktaj tury ‘the road is straight as an arrow’; bolardaj ‘like these’. · Iwegallaryna, uramnarga, tykryklarga, kojma ãslärenä, ãj tåbälärenä ... wikärdäj ak, mamyktaj jomwak kar æäjmäse æäelgän. (Gomär Bäwirov, Tugan qgym · qwel biwek.) A snow blanket as white as sugar, as soft as cotton has spread on the yards, on the streets, lanes, the fence tops, (and) on the roofs ... · Bez, iske tanywlardaj, ikäå bergä zalga keräbez. (Gabdraxman Minskij, Qzgy uqnu.) Like old acquaintances, we two enter the auditorium together. · Menä elgahyk ... Suy zãbäræättäj qwákelt ... (Ämirxan Eniki, Æiz kyègyrau.) Here is the little river ... Its water is greenish like an emerald... · Räxim dä any tugan seèelesedäj qratty. (Atilla Rasix, Ike bujdak.) Räkhim too loved her like his own sister. · · ... minem ãem sezdäj kunak ãhen çärvakyt ahyk. (Atilla Rasix, Qmawev.) “... my house is always open for guests like you.” · Bolgar-Tatar illärendä bäxet artsyn, Wat gomerlär Hulman kebek aga torsyn, Josyf kebek ir-egetlär pehän hapsyn, Zãläjxadaj sylu kyzlar urak ursyn. (Gamil Afzal, Tagyn ber el... Kol Gali.) May good fortune flourish in the BolgharTatar lands, May happy life flow like the Kama, May men like Joseph make (lit., cut) hay, May graceful girls like Zöleykha reap (harvest corn). Note: Josyf, Zãläjxa: The two principal characters in Qol Ghäli’s «Kyjssai Josyf» (written in the first half of the 13th century), also known as «Josyf Kitaby» and, more recently, as «Josyf vä Zãläjxa».

2. With relational adjectives formed by means of the suffixes +gy, +ge, +ky, +ke, or +dagy, +däge, +tagy, +täge, +daj, +däj, indicates that the condition, state exists, or the action is carried out, in the same manner as at the time or place expressed by the adjective: Ul vakyttagydaj ‘as (like) at that time’; Kazandagydaj ‘as in Kazan’; ïlekkedäj ‘as before’; bågengedäj ‘as today’. · Kåptän, bik kåptän bulgan vakyjga, ämma bågengedäj kåz aldymda. (Ämirxan Eniki, Maturlyk.) It is an event which happened long ago, very long ago, but it is before my eyes as (if it had happened) today. · Saniq, alynganyna inde biw-alty el bulsa da, bågengedäj ãr-qèa kilew torgan imän bufetny ahyp æibärde. (Mirsäj Ämir, Qlantau keweläre.) Saniä opened up the oak sideboard, which, although it had been bought five or six years ago, had remained brand new (i.e., like one bought today). · Monnan da maturrak, mondagydaj da igelekleräk, æanga qkynrak æir båtän berkajda da îk, dide äniem mièa. (Gaziz Kawapov, Æir æylysy.) My mother said to me that there is no land anywhere more beautiful than this one (here), more benevolent and dearer to the heart than this one here. · Zur täräzälärennän kaj qkka kåz salsaè da · uh tãbendägedäj – ap-anyk bulyp, erak-erak aralar kårenä. (Zäki Nuri, Batyrlar çäm maturlar poïmasy.) In whichever direction you look through its large windows, the distant expanses appear completely clear as if (they were) in the palm of one’s hand. Note 1: With the singular of the demonstrative pronouns bu, ul, wul, tege, the suffix +daj, +däj forms the demonstrative adjectives bu + daj > mondyj, ul + daj > andyj, wul + daj > wundyj, tege + däj > tegendi. Note 2: Adverbs formed with the suffix +daj, +däj, etc. may be used as nouns. In that case they are treated as any other noun.

294

· Sindäjlär mindä insaniqtneè qzmywyna karata ywanyh tudyra. (Atilla Rasix, Ajly tãnnär.) “People like you raise faith in me in (lit., regarding) the fate of mankind.” · ... sezneè tormyw bezdäjlärneè kåbesenä årnäk bulyrlyk tormyw ul. (Atilla Rasix, Qmawev.) ... your life is a life which can be an example for many like us. ·

[584] +laj, +lej This suffix is attached to adjectives, certain numerals, some pronouns and, occasionally, to nouns, indicating their function as predicate complements, as well as to form adverbs of manner and degree. For example: tereläj ‘alive’, urtalaj ‘in half’, ‘half-and-half’, bolaj ‘so’, ‘in this way, manner’, alaj ‘in that way, manner’, wulaj ‘in that (same) way, manner’, tegeläj ‘in that way, manner’, berenheläj ‘for the first time’, ikenheläj ‘the second time’, ‘for the second time’, alaj da bolaj da ‘this way and that’; alaj da tågel, bolaj da tågel ‘neither this way nor that’; kofeny korylaj ïhå ‘to drink coffee without milk or sugar’. · Gaziz belän Gãlnisa bik qwáläj ãjlänewep bergä tora bawladylar. (Mirsäj Ämir, Qlantau keweläre.) Ghäziz and Gölnisa married and began to live together (when) very young. · · ... Akha soramyjm. Kitap, däftär, kalämne /qðlðmne/ åzem buwlaj biräm. (Äxmät Fäjzi, Tukaj.) “... I am not asking for money. The books, exercise books, pens I give free (of charge.” · Ajsylu kapkadan qrtylaj gyna hyga. (Näkyj Isänbät, Mirkäj belän Ajsylu.) Aisylu emerges only half-way from the gate. · Kãtelmägän bu ohrawudan Fäläx bãtenläj koelyp tãwte: niwlärgä? Aldawyrgamy? Ällä isemen dãres äjtergäme? (Vakyjf Nurullin, Çälakät.) Fäläkh was completely taken aback by this unexpected encounter. What should he do? Tell a lie? Or should he give (lit., say) his name correctly? · · ... Menä kajsylaj taba kitte ïwlär ... (Wäjxi Mannur, Hyn sãî barmy.) “There, that is where things have got to.” · Kajsylaj gyna atlasam da, kåz aldymda bary tik Zãçrä genä. (ibid.) Wherever I go, I have only Zöhrä in my mind. · Ãj bålmä taktasy belän urtalaj bålengän. (Mãxämmät Mäçdiev, Tornalar tãwkän æirdä.) The house is divided in half by a room divider. · ... lampanyè kyzgylt wäåläse anyè tegeläj dä sargylt hyraena karalæym qwel tãs birep tora ide. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) ... the reddish reflection of the lamp was giving a darkish-green colour to his face, (which was) yellowish anyway. · Min any tegeläj genä äjttem. (ibid.) I didn’t really mean it. [585] +lap, +läp 1. Joined to adjectives, this suffix forms adverbs of manner. Such adverbs often imply intensity or perfection in the manner of execution of the action: · Fatyjma bu ïwkä hynlap kerewte. Fatima really dug into this work. · Zyq bu xikäqne qèadan maturlap qzdy. Zia re-wrote this story beautifully (i.e., he improved it in content as well as in form). · Akrynlap kyna koqw ta æir hitenä qkynlawyp bara ... (Ämirxan Eniki, Waqru.) The sun too is slowly approaching the earth’s horizon (lit., edge)... · Kãtepxanägä kåmäkläp gazeta ukyrga da ew kyna jãrilär. (Wärif Kamal, Nykly adymnar.) They also go frequently to the library to read the newspaper together.

295

· Îk, äsäem, sine xäzer monda kaldyryp kitep bulmyj, · dide kyzy ... · Alyp kitäbez. Qxwylap dävalarga kiräk sine. (Ämirxan Eniki, Äjtelmägän vasyqtá.) “No, Mother, we cannot go away, leaving you here now,” her daughter said ... “We are taking you with us. You must get really good medical treatment.” (Äsä – Bashkir: ‘mother’). 2. Joined to nouns designating time, dimension, volume or weight +lap, +läp forms adverbial phrases of measure (in English usually rendered with ‘by’): · Gajnan xat kiler vakytny bawta atnalap, annan soè kãnläp, tora-bara sägatáläp sanyj bawlady. (Gomär Bäwirov, Æidegän hiwmä.) Gheynan began to count the time until a letter would come first by the week, then by day, and then, gradually, by the hour. · ... æil tyna tãwte çäm hiläkläp kojgandaj qègyr qva bawlady. (Barlas Kamalov, Qlykmaslar.) ... the wind abated somewhat, and the rain began to come down in torrents (lit., as though poured out by buckets). · (For tãwå as auxiliary verb see 1363, a; for kojgandaj see 1080.) · – Min ... sängatá äwhese, artist ... Bezneè xezmätne metrlap ta, litrlap ta, kilogrammlap ta ålhäp bulmyj. (Gabdraxman Äpsälämov, Ak hähäklär.) “I ... am a worker in the field of art, an artist, ... One cannot measure our work by the meter, by the liter, by the kilogram.” ·

If the noun of measure is modified by a numeral, +lap, +läp expresses approximateness: qrty ellap ‘about half a year’; ike sägatáläp ‘approximately two hours’; dårt metrlap tukyma satyp alu ‘to buy approximately four meters of fabric’; biw minutlap kãtå ‘to wait about five minutes’. · – Dãres äjtä Boris ... koqw baerga ber sägatáläp vakyt bar äle. (Äxsän Baqnov, Ut çäm su.) “Boris is right ... there is still about an hour’s time until the sun goes down.” If a numeral is modified by another numeral, +lap, +läp is joined to the modified numeral: · Wunda uk minem igâtibarymny maxsus zurajtylgan ber fotoräsem åzenä æälep itte. Anda ber unlap avyl karty tãwerelgän. (Ämirxan Eniki, Ärem.) At once, a specially enlarged photo attracted my attention. About ten village elders are shown in it. 3. Joined to other nouns, +lap, +läp indicates: a) The place of action: · Bar da toryp hykkannar, bar da irtänge elga ãsten çäráqklap kårergä telägändäj, tãrkem-tãrkem kåhep jãrilär, ... (Ämirxan Eniki, Waqru.) All (i.e., All passengers of the ship) have got up and gone outside (i.e., on deck). All move in groups from one spot to another as if they want to see the river (lit., the river surface) in the morning from all sides, ... (For telägändäj see 1080.) · Bawtarak alar çaman urman hitläp qki bãtenläj urman ïhläp kysynky îllar buenha xäräkät ittelär ... (Mirsäj Ämir, Qlantau keweläre.) At first they always moved along the edge of the forest or along narrow paths completely inside the forest... b) Manner: · Inewkä æitärgä ike jãz metrlar kalgah, atlar îyrtudan tuktadylar, adymlap kyna kilä bawladylar. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) About two hundred meters from the brook (lit., After about two hundred meters remained until arriving at, reaching the brook), the horses ceased moving at a trot and began to approach (lit., come) only at a walking pace. 296

Wäräfi kart bu såzlärne sãjlägän hakta, Moxtar aèar bik dikâkatáläp karap tordy. (Wärif Kamal, Taè atkanda.) While the old Shäräfi was speaking these words, Mokhtar looked very attentively at him. · Bolar Evropa ysulynda kiengän, läkin bawlaryna ïwläpä urynyna ak efäk qulyklarny ãhpohmaklap ... bäjlägän ike kyz idelär. (Fatix Ämirxan, Qz isereklegendä.) They were two girls dressed European style. But instead of (wearing) hats, they had tied the white silk scarves on their heads in a triangle... · Ãj ïhendäge ut qktysy Gabdraxman belän Ägâdiqneè çär xäräkäten kålägäläp pärdägä tãwerep tora · näkâ kinodagy tãsle. (Kamil Kärimov, Aldavyh kãz.) The light inside the house is projecting Ghabdrakhman’s and Äghdiä’s every movement as shadows on the curtain; exactly as (it is) in the cinema. c) It forms adverbial phrases with an instrumental meaning: ike kullap ‘with both hands’; sãtläp häj ïhå ‘to drink tea with milk’. · [Ul] kyryn kåzläp aèar karap aldy. (Wärif Kamal, Matur tuganda.) [He] gave him a sidelong glance. · Min ..., sabynlap îynu mãmkinlegennän dä mäxråm. (Atilla Rasix, Xävefle synau.) ..., I am also deprived of the possibility of washing myself with soap. · ... balta ostasy da ul, sukalap æiren sãråhe, uhlap igen hähåhe, uraklap uruhy, habagahlap suguhy da ... bulgan ul ... (Mäæit Rafikov, Qzmywlar.) ... he was also a carpenter. He also ploughed (lit., he was one who ploughed) his land with a plough, sowed the grain in handfuls, harvested it with a sickle, threshed it with a flail... · Gajnan ... biw barmaklap hähen artka sypyryrga totyndy. (Gomär Bäwirov, Æidegän hiwmä.) Gheynan began ... to stroke his hair back with his five fingers. ·

[586] +lata, +lätä This suffix is joined: a) To nouns designating things, and to descriptive adjectives to express manner. Akhalata ‘in cash’, äjberlätä tåläå ‘to pay in kind’, hilätä ‘raw’, ‘in a raw state’, terelätä (or: tereläj) ‘alive’, korylata (or: korylaj) ‘dry’ (used adverbially). Note: With the latter two adjectives +lata, +lätä is synonymous with +laj, +läj.

Kajnarlata awa! Eat it while it is hot (boiling)! Salkynlata ïh! Drink it while it is cold! – Akhalata almyjbyz, riwvät bula. Ä mondye · hähäk, konfet iwese gãnaç tågel. (Mädinä Malikova, Ak davylda tal bãrese.) “We don’t take it in cash (i.e., the bonus), it would be (lit., it is) a bribe. But (accepting) things like flowers or candy is no sin.” · ... qlangah ãstäl ãstendä, ..., zur huen hålmäk belän tary ãjräse utyra. ... . Ikenhe hålmäktä bãtenlätä pewerelgän bäräège kãtä – ... (Mirsäj Ämir, Qlantau keweläre.) ... on the bare table is (lit., sits) a large cast iron pot with millet soup ... . Potatoes boiled in their jackets are standing (waiting) in another pot ... · ... bäräègelätä tålärgä xakybyz îk. (Mirsäj Ämir, Saf kåèel.) ... we are not permitted (lit., we have no right) to pay with potatoes (i.e., they are not permitted to barter). b) To cardinal numbers to form multiplicative numbers (see 359, 3.). c) To the verbal adverb in -ä of kårå ‘to see’, to express manner: kårälätä ‘on purpose’, ‘deliberately’, ‘knowingly’; ‘in sight of somebody’, ‘before somebody’s eyes’. · Gabdelxäj äle berkajhan da Ramus belän kårälätä bärelewkäne dä, kãh synawkany da îk ide. (Nurixan Fättax, Kihå.) Ghäbdelkhey had never before deliberately clashed with, or measured his strength against, Ramus. · · ·

297

· Aèlatuygyz ãhen räxmät. Mersi, · dide ul ... kårälätä salkynlyk belän. (ibid.) “Thanks for your explanation. Thank you,” he said ... with noticeable coolness. · Gabdelxäj såzgä katywmady ... ul åzen totkyndagy kebek xis itä. Ber atna buena wulaj qègyr qusa, niwläp utyryr ikän soè ul monda kårälätä artyk kawyk bulyp? (ibid.) Ghäbdelkhey did not get involved in the conversation ... He felt as though he were in jail. If it continued to rain like that for a week, how would he be able to sit around there, knowing himself to be one mouth (lit., spoon) to many. (The ·

speaker is visiting with relatives who are very poor.)

[587] +law This suffix is joined to the fractional number ‘half’. It forms an indefinite numeral adverb indicating approximately one half of a whole, or it may indicate that an action is (was) performed, or a state, condition exists, in part, in an incomplete degree or measure. · Ak pulat xärabälärennän erak tågel, ... qrtylaw æimerelgän taw bina kalkyp tora. (S.S. Ajdarov, N.D. Aksenova, Bolgar wäçäre.) Not far from the ruins of the White Palace ... there rises a stone building, which has half fallen into ruin. · Iwegaldy qrtylaw karaègy ide. (Wärif Kamal, Akharlaklar.) The yard was half dark. · Ul, bezneè aldybyzdagy qrtylaw buwagan kehkenä hynaqklarny kystap ïhertep beterep, qèadan häj qsady da sãjlärgä totyndy. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) After entreating us to drink up the half-emptied little cups which were in front of us, she made fresh tea and began to speak. [588] +lyj, +li This suffix is attached: a) To verbal nouns in -w, yw, -ew (1215); b) to the verbal adverb in -ä of åtå ‘to go through, past’, ‘to pass through’, ‘to pass’, to form the adverb and postposition åtäli (528); c) to a few adjectives. For example: totawlyj ‘wholly’, ‘completely’. · Rizvan äti-änisennän bik qwáli qtim kaldy. (Atilla Rasix, Urlangan xäzinä.) Rizwan was left an orphan (by his parents) when very young. d) To a few nouns denoting time: kywlyj ‘in winter’, qzlyj ‘in spring’, kãzli ‘in autumn’, æäjli ‘in summer’. · Ber kãn bardyk, ber atna bardyk, ber aj bardyk ... Belorussiqgä kywlyj gyna baryp kerdek. (Ibraçim Gazi, Malajlykta kunakta.) We traveled for a day, for a week, a month ... We entered Belarus only in the winter (i.e., when it was already winter). Note: The forms kywlyj, qzlyj, etc. are regarded as pertaining to the vernacular.1) The literary forms are kywyn, qzyn, kãzen, æäen (see 589).

[589] +n, +yn, +en is mostly attached to nouns denoting time: irtän ‘in the morning’, kihen ‘in the evening’. · Kywyn kar kåp bulsa, æäen igen uèa. (Proverb) If there is much snow in winter, the corn thrives in summer. · Qzyn-æäen, kãzen-kywyn çärkãn diqrlek wäçärneè åzäk uramnaryndagy magazinnarny taptauhy bu xanym kem soè ul? (Ämirxan Eniki, Kåsiq xanym.) Who then is this lady who tramps around the street shops in the center of the city almost every day in spring and summer, in autumn and winter? 1) See T.T.A.C.

298

Min çaman tãnnären joklyj almyj elap åtkäräm ... Kãndezlären seremne kewegä beldermäs ãhen wat bulyrga tyrywam ... (Sadri Æäläl, Inde min aèa ränæemim.) I continue to spend the nights crying, unable to sleep ... During the day, in order not to reveal my secret to anybody, I endeavor to be cheerful... · Bu kåldän kihlären dymsulyk kåtärelep menä dä tirä-înáne kaplap kitä, åzännärgä, årlärgä æäelä. (Rãstäm Kutuj, Ber dä ber kãzne.) In the evenings, a mist rises from this lake and, settling over the surroundings, spreads to the valleys and slopes. ·

[590] +tyn, +ten Joined to adjectives, this suffix forms adverbs of degree: · Xaris biredä utyruhylarnyè bajtagysyn qkyntyn belmäde. (Wäjxi Mannur, Musa.) Many of those sitting here Kharis did not know intimately. · Ul alarny qwerten genä kåzätergä tyrywty. (ibid.) He endeavored to watch them secretly. · ... ul Rizvannyè äjtkännären tiränten aèlamady. (Atilla Rasix, Urlangan xäzinä.) ... she did not thoroughly understand what Rizwan said. · Kälimullin wunda åz tiräsendägelärgä wypyrtyn gyna kitaptan ukygannaryn sãjli. (Mirsäj Ämir, Xikmätullinnyè manevrda kårgännäre.) Kälimullin is quietly (i.e., in a low voice) telling those (who are) standing there around him what he has read in a book. [591] +ha, +hä Attached to common nouns in the singular and plural, with or without possessive suffixes, +ha, +hä forms adverbs indicating: a) Degree, extent: ãlewhä ‘partially’ (ãlew ‘part’, ‘portion’), hagywtyrmaha ‘comparatively’ (hagywtyrma ‘comparison’). · Tatar xalkynyè boryngy, urta gasyrlar tarixyn qzganda moèarhy kåbräk Bolgar däåläte, ãlewhä Altyn Urda çäm Kazan xanlygy zamannaryna igâtibar itelde. (Ravil Fäxretdinov, Tatar ugly tatarmyn.) In writing the ancient and medieval history of the Tatar people, attention has, up to now, been focused more on the periods of the Bolghar State and, in part, of the Golden Horde and the Khanate of Kazan. · Alar tekä agah baskyhtan mengändä basmalar sykrap-syktap kaldy ... Hagywtyrmaha qkty, bäläkäj genä bålmägä kilep kerdelär. (Räfkatá Kärami, Kargywly îllar.) When they ascended the steep wooden staircase, the stairs moaned and sobbed ... They came to and entered a comparatively (relatively) bright but rather small room. (‘Moaned’ and ‘sobbed’ is used figuratively. They refer to the innocent accused who walked these stairs before.)

b) Way, manner (in the same way, manner as): · Uze dä, balalary da, bäjrämhä kienep, kaderle keweneè häjgä hyguyn kãttelär. (Gadel Kutuj, Vãædan gazaby.) Both she herself and her children dressing festively, waited for the dear man (i.e., husband) to come out for tea (i.e., come out of his room). · Bez ... duslarha sãjläwä idek. (Atilla Rasix, Urlangan xäzinä.) We ... were talking in a friendly way (like friends). · Gaqz belän Raxmanov qkyn iptäwlärhä kul kysywtylar. (Mirsäj Ämir, Agyjdel.) Ghayaz and Rakhmanov shook hands like close friends. · Kuhärbaj ... kue urmanny batyrlarha eryp, aldan baruynda dävam itä ... (ibid.) Heroically (like heroes) struggling through the dense forest, Quchärbai continues to march in front... 299

c) According to (as stated, shown by): · Zinnur isäbenhä, äle Xämidäneè akhasy bulyrga tiew ide. (Sãbbux Rafikov, Tyn elga buenda.) According to Zinnur’s calculation, Khämidä must still have money. · Bu ïw, Aláfred fikerenhä, bik äjbät. (Atilla Rasix, Kaçarmannar /Qðhðrmannar/1) îly.) Doing this woul